[Title 46 CFR ]
[Code of Federal Regulations (annual edition) - October 1, 2007 Edition]
[From the U.S. Government Printing Office]



[[Page i]]

          

          46


          Parts 41 to 69

          Revised as of October 1, 2007


          Shipping
          



________________________

          Containing a codification of documents of general 
          applicability and future effect

          As of October 1, 2007
          With Ancillaries
                    Published by
                    Office of the Federal Register
                    National Archives and Records
                    Administration
                    A Special Edition of the Federal Register

[[Page ii]]

          U.S. GOVERNMENT OFFICIAL EDITION NOTICE

          Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos
          
          
          The seal of the National Archives and Records Administration 
              (NARA) authenticates the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) as 
              the official codification of Federal regulations established 
              under the Federal Register Act. Under the provisions of 44 
              U.S.C. 1507, the contents of the CFR, a special edition of the 
              Federal Register, shall be judicially noticed. The CFR is 
              prima facie evidence of the original documents published in 
              the Federal Register (44 U.S.C. 1510).

          It is prohibited to use NARA's official seal and the stylized Code 
              of Federal Regulations logo on any republication of this 
              material without the express, written permission of the 
              Archivist of the United States or the Archivist's designee. 
              Any person using NARA's official seals and logos in a manner 
              inconsistent with the provisions of 36 CFR part 1200 is 
              subject to the penalties specified in 18 U.S.C. 506, 701, and 
              1017.

          Use of ISBN Prefix

          This is the Official U.S. Government edition of this publication 
              and is herein identified to certify its authenticity. Use of 
              the 0-16 ISBN prefix is for U.S. Government Printing Office 
              Official Editions only. The Superintendent of Documents of the 
              U.S. Government Printing Office requests that any reprinted 
              edition clearly be labeled as a copy of the authentic work 
              with a new ISBN.

              
              
          U . S . G O V E R N M E N T P R I N T I N G O F F I C E

          ------------------------------------------------------------------

          U.S. Superintendent of Documents  Washington, DC 
              20402-0001

          http://bookstore.gpo.gov

          Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

[[Page iii]]




                            Table of Contents



                                                                    Page
  Explanation.................................................       v

  Title 46:
          Chapter I--Coast Guard, Department of Homeland 
          Security (Continued)                                       3
  Finding Aids:
      Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference........     439
      Table of CFR Titles and Chapters........................     453
      Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR......     471
      List of CFR Sections Affected...........................     481

[[Page iv]]





                     ----------------------------

                     Cite this Code: CFR
                     To cite the regulations in 
                       this volume use title, 
                       part and section number. 
                       Thus, 46 CFR 42.01-1 
                       refers to title 46, part 
                       42, section 01-1.

                     ----------------------------

[[Page v]]



                               EXPLANATION

    The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and 
permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive 
departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided 
into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal 
regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the 
name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into 
parts covering specific regulatory areas.
    Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year 
and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:

Title 1 through Title 16.................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27..................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41...................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50................................as of October 1

    The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each 
volume.

LEGAL STATUS

    The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially 
noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie 
evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).

HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

    The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual 
issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used 
together to determine the latest version of any given rule.
    To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its 
revision date (in this case, October 1, 2007), consult the ``List of CFR 
Sections Affected (LSA),'' which is issued monthly, and the ``Cumulative 
List of Parts Affected,'' which appears in the Reader Aids section of 
the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal 
Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule.

EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES

    Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal 
Register since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source 
citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page 
number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication 
dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be 
exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In 
instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-off date for the 
Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In 
those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register 
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be 
inserted following the text.

OMB CONTROL NUMBERS

    The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-511) requires 
Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information 
collection request.

[[Page vi]]

Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as 
amendments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are 
placed as close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting 
requirements.

OBSOLETE PROVISIONS

    Provisions that become obsolete before the revision date stated on 
the cover of each volume are not carried. Code users may find the text 
of provisions in effect on a given date in the past by using the 
appropriate numerical list of sections affected. For the period before 
January 1, 2001, consult either the List of CFR Sections Affected, 1949-
1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, or 1986-2000, published in 11 separate 
volumes. For the period beginning January 1, 2001, a ``List of CFR 
Sections Affected'' is published at the end of each CFR volume.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

    What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was 
established by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the 
requirement to publish regulations in the Federal Register by referring 
to materials already published elsewhere. For an incorporation to be 
valid, the Director of the Federal Register must approve it. The legal 
effect of incorporation by reference is that the material is treated as 
if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C. 552(a)). 
This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force 
of law.
    What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the 
Federal Register will approve an incorporation by reference only when 
the requirements of 1 CFR part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which 
approval is based are:
    (a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of 
material published in the Federal Register.
    (b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent 
necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative 
process.
    (c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for 
publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
    Properly approved incorporations by reference in this volume are 
listed in the Finding Aids at the end of this volume.
    What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If 
you have any problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed in 
the Finding Aids of this volume as an approved incorporation by 
reference, please contact the agency that issued the regulation 
containing that incorporation. If, after contacting the agency, you find 
the material is not available, please notify the Director of the Federal 
Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington DC 
20408, or call 202-741-6010.

CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES

    A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a 
separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR Index 
and Finding Aids. This volume contains the Parallel Table of Statutory 
Authorities and Agency Rules (Table I). A list of CFR titles, chapters, 
and parts and an alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are 
also included in this volume.
    An index to the text of ``Title 3--The President'' is carried within 
that volume.
    The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. 
This index is based on a consolidation of the ``Contents'' entries in 
the daily Federal Register.
    A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to 
the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.

[[Page vii]]


REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL

    There are no restrictions on the republication of textual material 
appearing in the Code of Federal Regulations.

INQUIRIES

    For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this 
volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency's name appears at 
the top of odd-numbered pages.
    For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202-741-6000 
or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National 
Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC 20408 or e-mail 
fedreg.info@nara.gov.

SALES

    The Government Printing Office (GPO) processes all sales and 
distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll-free, 
866-512-1800 or DC area, 202-512-1800, M-F, 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or 
fax your order to 202-512-2250, 24 hours a day. For payment by check, 
write to: US Government Printing Office - New Orders, P.O. Box 979050, 
St. Louis, MO 63197-9000. For GPO Customer Service call 202-512-1803.

ELECTRONIC SERVICES

    The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, the LSA (List of 
CFR Sections Affected), The United States Government Manual, the Federal 
Register, Public Laws, Public Papers, Weekly Compilation of Presidential 
Documents and the Privacy Act Compilation are available in electronic 
format at www.gpoaccess.gov/nara (``GPO Access''). For more information, 
contact Electronic Information Dissemination Services, U.S. Government 
Printing Office. Phone 202-512-1530, or 888-293-6498 (toll-free). E-
mail, gpoaccess@gpo.gov.
    The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the 
National Archives and Records Administration's (NARA) World Wide Web 
site for public law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related 
information. Connect to NARA's web site at www.archives.gov/federal-
register. The NARA site also contains links to GPO Access.

                              Raymond A. Mosley,
                                    Director,
                          Office of the Federal Register.

October 1, 2007.

[[Page ix]]



                               THIS TITLE

    Title 46--Shipping is composed of nine volumes. The parts in these 
volumes are arranged in the following order: Parts 1-40, 41-69, 70-89, 
90-139, 140-155, 156-165, 166-199, 200-499 and 500 to End. The first 
seven volumes containing parts 1-199 comprise chapter I--Coast Guard, 
DHS. The eighth volume, containing parts 200 to 499, includes chapter 
II--Maritime Administration, DOT and chapter III--Coast Guard (Great 
Lakes Pilotage), DHS. The ninth volume, containing part 500 to End, 
includes chapter IV--Federal Maritime Commission. The contents of these 
volumes represent all current regulations codified under this title of 
the CFR as of October 1, 2007.

    Subject indexes appear in chapter I, subchapters A--I, I-A, J, K, L, 
and Q--W following the subchapters.

    For this volume, Moja N. Mwaniki was Chief Editor. The Code of 
Federal Regulations publication program is under the direction of 
Michael L. White, assisted by Ann Worley.


[[Page 1]]



                           TITLE 46--SHIPPING




                   (This book contains parts 41 to 69)

  --------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                    Part

chapter i--Coast Guard, Department of Homeland Security 
  (Continued)...............................................          42

[[Page 3]]



   CHAPTER I--COAST GUARD, DEPARTMENT OF HOMELAND SECURITY (CONTINUED)




  --------------------------------------------------------------------


  Editorial Note: Nomenclature changes to chapter I appear at 69 FR 
18803, Apr. 9, 2004.

                        SUBCHAPTER E--LOAD LINES
Part                                                                Page
41              [Reserved]

42              Domestic and foreign voyages by sea.........           5
43              [Reserved]

44              Special service limited domestic voyages....          65
45              Great Lakes load lines......................          72
46              Subdivision load lines for passenger vessels          92
47              Combination load lines......................          98
                Index.......................................         101
                    SUBCHAPTER F--MARINE ENGINEERING
50              General provisions..........................         109
51              [Reserved]

52              Power boilers...............................         118
53              Heating boilers.............................         135
54              Pressure vessels............................         138
56              Piping systems and appurtenances............         169
57              Welding and brazing.........................         239
58              Main and auxiliary machinery and related 
                    systems.................................         253
59              Repairs to boilers, pressure vessels and 
                    appurtenances...........................         281
60            [Reserved]

61              Periodic tests and inspections..............         286
62              Vital system automation.....................         297
63              Automatic auxiliary boilers.................         311
64              Marine portable tanks and cargo handling 
                    systems.................................         317
                Index.......................................         325
         SUBCHAPTER G--DOCUMENTATION AND MEASUREMENT OF VESSELS
66            [Reserved]

67              Documentation of vessels....................         337
68               Documentation of vessels: Exceptions to 
                    coastwise qualification.................         375

[[Page 4]]

69              Measurement of vessels......................         392
                Index.......................................         429

[[Page 5]]



                         SUBCHAPTER E_LOAD LINES



                           PART 41 [RESERVED]



PART 42_DOMESTIC AND FOREIGN VOYAGES BY SEA--Table of Contents




                   Subpart 42.01_Authority and Purpose

Sec.
42.01-1 Authority for regulations.
42.01-5 OMB control numbers assigned pursuant to the Paperwork Reduction 
          Act.
42.01-10 Purpose of regulations.

                        Subpart 42.03_Application

42.03-5 U.S.-flag vessels subject to the requirements of this 
          subchapter.
42.03-10 Foreign vessels subject to this subchapter.
42.03-15 The Great Lakes of North America.
42.03-17 Special load line marks for vessels carrying timber deck cargo.
42.03-20 Equivalents.
42.03-25 Experimental installations.
42.03-30 Exemptions for vessels.
42.03-35 U.S.-flag vessels and Canadian vessels navigating on sheltered 
          waters of Puget Sound and contiguous west coast waters of 
          United States and Canada.

        Subpart 42.05_Definition of Terms Used in This Subchapter

42.05-1 Approved.
42.05-10 Assigning authority.
42.05-20 Commandant.
42.05-25 Coast Guard District Commander or District Commander.
42.05-30 Existing vessel.
42.05-40 Great Lakes.
42.05-45 International voyage.
42.05-47 Marine inspector or inspector.
42.05-50 New vessel.
42.05-55 Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection.
42.05-60 Recognized classification society.
42.05-63 Ship(s) and vessel(s).
42.05-65 Surveyor.

        Subpart 42.07_Control, Enforcement, and Rights of Appeal

42.07-1 Load lines required.
42.07-5 Marks placed on vessel to indicate load lines.
42.07-10 Submergence of load line marks.
42.07-15 Zones and seasonal areas.
42.07-20 Logbook entries.
42.07-25 Approval of the Commandant.
42.07-30 Approval of the assigning authority.
42.07-35 American Bureau of Shipping as an assigning authority.
42.07-40 Recognized classification society as an assigning authority.
42.07-43 Change in assigning authority.
42.07-45 Load line certificates.
42.07-50 Penalties for violations.
42.07-55 Cancellation of load line certificates or exemption 
          certificates.
42.07-60 Control.
42.07-75 Right of appeal.

  Subpart 42.09_Load Line Assignments and Surveys_General Requirements

42.09-1 Assignment of load lines.
42.09-5 All vessels--division into types.
42.09-10 Stability, subdivision, and strength.
42.09-15 Surveys by the American Bureau of Shipping or assigning 
          authority.
42.09-20 Surveys of foreign vessels.
42.09-25 Initial or periodic survey requirements for all vessels.
42.09-30 Additional survey requirements for steel-hull vessels.
42.09-35 Additional survey requirements for wood-hull vessels.
42.09-40 Annual surveys.
42.09-45 Correction of deficiencies.
42.09-50 Repairs or alterations to vessel after it has been surveyed.

   Subpart 42.11_Applications for Load Line Assignments, Surveys, and 
                              Certificates

42.11-1 General.
42.11-5 Applications for load line assignments, surveys, and 
          certificates for U.S.-flag vessels.
42.11-10 Applications for load line assignments and certificates for 
          vessels other than U.S.-flag vessels.
42.11-15 Application for timber load lines.
42.11-20 Application for annual survey.

         Subpart 42.13_General Rules for Determining Load Lines

42.13-1 Assumptions.
42.13-5 Strength of vessel.
42.13-10 Freeboards assigned vessels.
42.13-15 Definitions of terms.
42.13-20 Deck line.
42.13-25 Load line mark.
42.13-30 Lines to be used with the load line mark.
42.13-35 Mark of assigning authority.
42.13-40 Details of marking.
42.13-45 Verification of marks.

           Subpart 42.15_Conditions of Assignment of Freeboard

42.15-1 Information to be supplied to the master.

[[Page 6]]

42.15-5 Superstructure end bulkheads.
42.15-10 Doors.
42.15-15 Positions of hatchways, doorways and ventilators.
42.15-20 Cargo and other hatchways.
42.15-25 Hatchways closed by portable covers and secured weathertight by 
          tarpaulins and battening devices.
42.15-30 Hatchways closed by weathertight covers of steel or other 
          equivalent material fitted with gaskets and clamping devices.
42.15-35 Machinery space openings.
42.15-40 Miscellaneous openings in freeboard and superstructure decks.
42.15-45 Ventilators.
42.15-50 Air pipes.
42.15-55 Cargo ports and other similar openings.
42.15-60 Scuppers, inlets, and discharges.
42.15-65 Side scuttles.
42.15-70 Freeing ports.
42.15-75 Protection of the crew.
42.15-80 Special conditions of assignment for Type ``A'' vessels.

                        Subpart 42.20_Freeboards

42.20-3 Freeboard assignment: Type ``A'' vessels.
42.20-5 Freeboard assignment: Type ``B'' vessels.
42.20-6 Flooding standard: Type ``A'' vessels.
42.20-7 Flooding standard: Type ``B'' vessel, 60 percent reduction.
42.20-8 Flooding standard: Type ``B'' vessel, 100 percent reduction.
42.20-9 Initial conditions of loading.
42.20-10 Free surface.
42.20-11 Extent of damage.
42.20-12 Conditions of equilibrium.
42.20-13 Vessels without means of propulsion.
42.20-15 Freeboard tables.
42.20-20 Correction to the freeboard for vessels under 328 feet in 
          length.
42.20-25 Correction for block coefficient.
42.20-30 Correction for depth.
42.20-35 Correction for position of deck line.
42.20-40 Standard height of superstructure.
42.20-45 Length of superstructure.
42.20-50 Effective length of superstructure.
42.20-55 Trunks.
42.20-60 Deduction for superstructures and trunks.
42.20-65 Sheer.
42.20-70 Minimum bow height.
42.20-75 Minimum freeboards.

     Subpart 42.25_Special Requirements for Vessels Assigned Timber 
                               Freeboards

42.25-1 Application of this subpart.
42.25-5 Definitions of terms used in this subpart.
42.25-10 Construction of vessel.
42.25-15 Stowage.
42.25-20 Computation for freeboard.

            Subpart 42.30_Zones, Areas, and Seasonal Periods

42.30-1 Basis.
42.30-5 Northern Winter Seasonal Zones and area.
42.30-10 Southern Winter Seasonal Zone.
42.30-15 Tropical Zone.
42.30-20 Seasonal Tropical Areas.
42.30-25 Summer Zones.
42.30-30 Enclosed seas.
42.30-35 The Winter North Atlantic Load Line.

            Subpart 42.50_Load Line Certificates_Model Forms

42.50-1 General.
42.50-5 International load line certificates.
42.50-10 Load line certificates for nonadherent foreign flag vessels.
42.50-15 Coastwise load line certificates for U.S.-flag vessels.

    Authority: 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116; Department of Homeland Security 
Delegation No. 0170.1; section 42.01-5 also issued under the authority 
of 44 U.S.C. 3507.



                   Subpart 42.01_Authority and Purpose



Sec. 42.01-1  Authority for regulations.

    The statutory authority to prescribe rules and regulations requiring 
certain vessels to have and display load line marks indicating the 
maximum amidship draft to which such vessels may be safely loaded and 
certification thereof by the assigning authority is in 46 U.S.C. 5101-
5116.

[CGD 80-120, 47 FR 5721, Feb. 8, 1982, as amended by CGD 97-057, 62 FR 
51043, Sept. 30, 1997]



Sec. 42.01-5  OMB control numbers assigned pursuant to the Paperwork Reduction Act.

    (a) Purpose. This section collects and displays the control numbers 
assigned to information collection and recordkeeping requirements in 
this subchapter by the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) pursuant to 
the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (44 U.S.C. 3501 et seq.). The Coast 
Guard intends that this section comply with the requirements of 44 
U.S.C. 3507(f) which requires that agencies display a current control 
number assigned by the

[[Page 7]]

Director of the OMB for each approved agency information collection 
requirement.
    (b) Display.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Current
                                                                  OMB
    46 CFR part or section where identified or described        control
                                                                  No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Part 42.....................................................   1625-0013
Part 44.....................................................   1625-0013
Part 45.....................................................   1625-0013
Part 46.....................................................   1625-0013
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[49 FR 38120, Sept. 27, 1984, as amended by USCG-2004-18884, 69 FR 
58345, Sept. 30, 2004]



Sec. 42.01-10  Purpose of regulations.

    (a) The load line marks when placed on a vessel shall indicate the 
maximum amidships draft to which such vessel can be lawfully submerged, 
in the various circumstances and seasons applicable to such vessel.
    (b) This subchapter sets forth the uniform minimum requirements for 
load line marks on various categories of vessels. It also sets forth 
requirements for surveys relating to the assignment of load lines, the 
issuing of load line certificates by authorized issuing authorities, and 
the carriage of load line certificates aboard vessels.
    (c) The rules and regulations in this subchapter also provide for 
the enforcement of load line requirements and control over vessels when 
it is believed such vessels may be in violation of applicable load line 
requirements.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10049, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGD 80-120, 47 FR 
5721, Feb. 8, 1982]



                        Subpart 42.03_Application



Sec. 42.03-5  U.S.-flag vessels subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

    (a) Vessels engaged in foreign voyages or international voyages 
other than solely Great Lakes voyages. (1) All U.S. flag vessels which 
engage in foreign voyages or international voyages by sea (other than 
solely in Great Lakes voyages) are subject to this part; except the 
following:
    (i) Ships of war;
    (ii) New vessels of less than 79 feet in length;
    (iii) Existing vessels of less than 150 gross tons;
    (iv) Pleasure yachts not engaged in trade; and
    (v) Fishing vessels.
    (2) As provided in Article 4(4) of the 1966 Convention, in order for 
existing vessels to take advantage of any reduction in freeboards from 
those previously assigned, the regulations in Subparts 42.13 to 42.25, 
inclusive, of this part shall be fully complied with. Except for due 
cause, such vessels shall not be required to increase their freeboards 
under the provisions of the 1966 Convention.
    (3) All U.S.-flag vessels authorized to engage in foreign or 
international voyages may also engage in domestic voyages by sea and, as 
permitted by Sec. 45.9 of this part and Part 47 of this subchapter, in 
Great Lakes voyages without additional load line marks and/or 
certificates. Where additional load line marks and certificates are 
provided to specifically cover ``Special Service, Coastwise'' or ``Great 
Lakes'' operation, such vessels are subject to the applicable provisions 
of Parts 44 and 45 of this subchapter.
    (b) Vessels engaged in domestic voyages by sea. (1) All U.S.-flag 
vessels which engage in domestic voyages by sea (coastwise and 
intercoastal voyages) shall be subject to the applicable provisions of 
this part except the following:
    (i) Merchant vessels of less than 150 gross tons.
    (ii) Vessels which are mechanically propelled and numbered by a 
State or the Coast Guard under the Federal Boat Safety Act of 1971 (46 
U.S.C. 1451 et seq.) and not required by other laws to be inspected or 
certified by the U.S. Coast Guard. (This exception includes all 
mechanically propelled vessels of less than 150 gross tons, and 
uninspected motor propelled oceanographic vessels of less than 300 gross 
tons while operating pursuant to 46 U.S.C. 2113.
    (iii) Pleasure craft not used or engaged in trade or commerce.
    (iv) Barges of less than 150 gross tons.
    (v) Vessels engaged exclusively in voyages on waters within the 
United States or its possessions and which are determined not to be 
``coastwise'' or ``Great Lakes'' voyages.
    (vi) Ships of war.

[[Page 8]]

    (vii) U.S. public vessels other than those vessels of 150 gross tons 
or over and engaged in commercial activities.
    (2) In order for existing vessels to take advantage of any reduction 
in freeboards from those previously assigned, paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section applies.
    (c) Vessels engaged solely on Great Lakes voyages. A U.S. flag 
vessel 79 feet and more and 150 gross tons or over that engages solely 
on Great Lakes voyages is subject to the applicable provisions of this 
part and Part 45 of this subchapter and must comply with the regulations 
in force on the date the keel is laid or a similar progress in 
construction is made.
    (d) Special service coastwise voyage. A U.S. flag vessel 150 gross 
tons or over that engages in a ``special service coastwise voyage'' is 
subject to the applicable provisions of this part and Part 44 of this 
subchapter.
    (e) Hopper dredges engaged in limited service domestic voyages. 
Self-propelled hopper dredges over 79 feet (24 meters) in length with 
working freeboards, on limited service domestic voyages within 20 
nautical miles (37 kilometers) from the mouth of a harbor of safe 
refuge, are subject to the provisions of this subchapter that apply to a 
Type ``B'' vessel and to the provisions of Subpart E of Part 44 of this 
chapter.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10049, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9011, June 5, 1969; CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12289, May 10, 1973; CGD 80-
120, 47 FR 5721, Feb. 8, 1982; CGD 86-016, 51 FR 9962, Mar. 24, 1986; 
CDG 76-080, 54 FR 36976, Sept. 6, 1989; CGD 97-057, 62 FR 51043, Sept. 
30, 1997]



Sec. 42.03-10  Foreign vessels subject to this subchapter.

    (a) General. All existing foreign merchant vessels of 150 gross tons 
or over, and new foreign vessels of 79 feet in length or more, loading 
at or proceeding from any port or place within the jurisdiction of the 
United States or its possessions for a foreign voyage by sea, or 
arriving within the jurisdiction of the United States or its possessions 
from a foreign voyage by sea, in both cases the Great Lakes excepted, 
are subject to 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116, and the regulations in this part 
applicable to such service. All foreign merchant vessels of 150 gross 
tons or over, loading at or proceeding from any port or place within the 
United States on the Great Lakes of North America, or arriving within 
the jurisdiction of the United States on the Great Lakes, are subject to 
46 U.S.C. 5101-5116 and the regulations in part 45 of this subchapter 
applicable to such service.
    (b) Canadian vessels. All vessels of Canadian registry and holding 
valid certificates issued pursuant to Canadian laws and regulations are 
assumed to be in compliance with the applicable provisions of 46 U.S.C. 
5101-5116, the International Convention on Load Lines, 1966, and the 
regulations in this subchapter.
    (c) Vessels of countries signatory to or adhering to the 1966 
Convention. The enforcement and control of load line requirements 
regarding vessels of countries signatory to or adhering to The 
International Convention on Load Lines, 1966, (the 1966 Convention) are 
as described in Sec. 42.07-60 in this part, which is in accord with 
provisions of Article 21 of the 1966 Convention. Such vessels when 
holding currently valid certificates issued pursuant to the 1966 
Convention, or recognized under such Convention, are assumed to be in 
compliance with the applicable provisions of such Convention. Such 
vessels are deemed to be in compliance with the load line requirements 
found to be equally effective as those established in this part and 
therefore in compliance with the applicable load line provisions of 46 
U.S.C. 5101-5116, as amended, and the regulations in this part as 
authorized by such laws. Vessels engaged in navigation on the Great 
Lakes are subject to application of seasonal international marks as 
specified in Part 45 of this subchapter.
    (d) Vessels of countries not signatory to or adhering to the 1966 
Convention. (1) Vessels of countries not signatory to or adhering to the 
1966 Convention, when within the jurisdiction of the United States, 
shall be subject to 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116, and the regulations in this 
subchapter as authorized by such laws.
    (2) Vessels of countries signatory to or adhering only to 
International Load Line Convention, London, 1930 (the 1930 Convention), 
and holding valid certificates issued under that Convention, are

[[Page 9]]

subject to the applicable law described in paragraph (a) of this section 
and the regulations prescribed thereunder in this subchapter.

[CGD 80-120, 47 FR 5722, Feb. 8, 1982, as amended by CGD 97-057, 62 FR 
51043, Sept. 30, 1997; USCG-1998-4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 42.03-15  The Great Lakes of North America.

    (a) The term ``Great Lakes of North America'' means those waters of 
North America which are defined in Sec. 42.05-40, and in the exception 
in Article 5(2)(a) of the 1966 Convention.
    (b) The expressions in the regulations in this part, such as 
``voyages by sea,'' ``proceed to sea,'' ``arrive from the high seas,'' 
etc., shall be construed as having no application to voyages on the 
Great Lakes or portions thereof unless specifically provided otherwise 
in Part 45 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10050, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.03-17  Special load line marks for vessels carrying timber deck cargo.

    (a) Certain vessels having load line marks not related to carriage 
of timber deck cargo may be assigned timber load lines if they are in 
compliance with the applicable requirements governing timber deck 
cargoes in this subchapter. The timber load lines apply and may be used 
only when the vessel is carrying timber deck cargo.
    (b) A new or existing vessel having timber load lines assigned to 
it, when carrying timber deck cargo, may be loaded to the vessel's 
timber load line applicable to the voyage and season.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10050, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGD 80-120, 47 FR 
5722, Feb. 8, 1982]



Sec. 42.03-20  Equivalents.

    (a) Where in this subchapter it is provided that a particular 
fitting, material, appliance, apparatus, or equipment, or type thereof, 
shall be fitted or carried in a vessel, or that a particular provision 
shall be made or arrangement shall be adopted, the assigning authority, 
with the prior approval of the Commandant, may accept in substitution 
therefor any other fitting, material, apparatus, or equipment or type 
thereof, or any other provision or arrangement: Provided, That it can be 
demonstrated by trial thereof or otherwise that the substitution is at 
least as effective as that required by the regulations in this 
subchapter.
    (b) In any case where it is shown to the satisfaction of the 
assigning authority and the Commandant that the use of any particular 
equipment, apparatus, or arrangement not specifically required by law is 
unreasonable or impracticable, appropriate alternatives may be permitted 
under such conditions as are consistent with the minimum standards set 
forth in this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10050, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.03-25  Experimental installations.

    (a) Complete information (including plans, necessary instructions 
and limitations, if any) on proposed experimental installations 
affecting any fitting, material, appliance, apparatus, arrangement, or 
otherwise shall be submitted to the assigning authority for evaluation. 
After acceptance by the assigning authority, the complete information of 
such installation shall be forwarded to the Commandant for specific 
approval prior to installation. Complete information shall also be 
furnished for any associated installation(s) deemed necessary to prevent 
endangering the vessel during the trial period of proposed experimental 
installations.
    (b) The use of approved experimental installations shall be 
permitted only when in accordance with instructions and limitations as 
specifically prescribed for such installations by the Commandant.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10050, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.03-30  Exemptions for vessels.

    (a) For an individual vessel or category of vessels, upon the 
specific recommendation of the assigning authority, the Commandant may 
authorize an exemption from one or more load line requirements. Such 
recommendation and authorization will depend upon provision of any 
additional features as deemed necessary by the authorities to

[[Page 10]]

ensure the vessel's safety in the services and under the conditions 
specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b) Exemptions from specific load line requirements for vessels 
meeting requirements of paragraph (a) of this section are authorized, 
subject to certain conditions, including type of voyage engaged in, as 
follows:
    (1) For vessels engaged on international voyages between the United 
States and near neighboring ports of its possessions or of foreign 
countries. The exemptions may be permitted because the requirements are 
deemed to be unreasonable or impracticable due to the sheltered nature 
of the waters on which the voyages occur or other conditions. These 
exemptions shall be valid only so long as such a vessel shall remain 
engaged on specific designated voyages. If the voyage involves a foreign 
country or countries, the United States will require an exemption 
agreement with such country or countries prior to the issuance of the 
appropriate load line certificate.
    (2) For vessels engaged on international voyages which embody 
features of a novel kind, and where nonexemption may seriously impede 
research, development, and incorporation of novel features into vessels. 
If the voyage or voyages intended involve a foreign country or 
countries, then the United States will require an exemption agreement 
with such country or countries prior to the issuance of a Load Line 
Exemption Certificate. If the Commandant grants an exemption pursuant to 
this paragraph (b)(2) to a U.S. flag vessel that operates on the Great 
Lakes of North America, he may notify the Chairman of the Board of 
Steamship Inspection of Canada of the nature of the exemption, but no 
special exemption certificate is issued.
    (3) For a vessel not normally engaged on international voyages but 
which is required to undertake a single international voyage under 
exceptional circumstances.
    (4) For self-propelled hopper dredges engaged on international 
voyages or on limited service domestic voyages by sea. These vessels may 
be exempt from applicable hatch cover requirements of Sec. 42.15-25 of 
this part by showing they meet the requirements in Sec. 174.310 of this 
chapter. When a Load Line Exemption Certificate is issued for this 
exemption, it must have an endorsement that only seawater is allowed in 
the vessel's hoppers.
    (c) A vessel given one or more exemptions from load line 
requirements under the provisions of paragraph (b)(1) of this section 
will be issued the appropriate load line certificate, using Form A1, A2, 
or A3. In each case the exemptions shall be specified on the load line 
certificate together with the Convention authority which authorizes such 
exemptions.
    (d) A vessel given one or more exemptions under the provisions of 
paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section will be issued a Load Line 
Exemption Certificate, using Form E1. This certificate shall be in lieu 
of a regular load line certificate, and the vessel shall be considered 
as in compliance with applicable load line requirements.
    (e) The Commandant may exempt from any of the requirements of this 
part a vessel that engages on a domestic voyage by sea or a voyage 
solely on the Great Lakes and embodies features of a novel kind, if the 
novel features and any additional safety measures required are described 
on the face of the issued certificate.
    (f) A vessel that is not usually engaged on domestic voyages by sea 
or on voyages on the Great Lakes but that, in exceptional circumstances, 
is required to undertake a single such voyage between two specific ports 
is--
    (1) Subject to 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116 and the applicable regulations of 
this subchapter; and
    (2) Issued a single voyage load line authorization by the Commandant 
that states the conditions under which the voyage may be made and any 
additional safety measures required for a single voyage.

[CGFR 68-126, 34 FR 9011, June 5, 1969, as amended by CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 
12289, May 10, 1973; CGD 76-080, 54 FR 36976, Sept. 6, 1989; USCG-1998-
4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]

[[Page 11]]



Sec. 42.03-35  U.S.-flag vessels and Canadian vessels navigating on sheltered
waters of Puget Sound and contiguous west coast waters of United States and 

          Canada.

    (a) In a Treaty between the United States and Canada proclaimed on 
August 11, 1934, the respective Governments were satisfied of the 
sheltered nature of certain waters of the west coast of North America. 
It was agreed to exempt vessels of the United States and Canadian 
vessels from load line requirements when such vessels engage on 
international voyages originating on, wholly confined to, and 
terminating on such waters. In Article I of this Treaty these waters are 
described as follows: ``* * * the waters of Puget Sound, the waters 
lying between Vancouver Island and the mainland, and east of a line from 
a point 1 nautical mile west of the city limits of Port Angeles in the 
State of Washington to Race Rocks on Vancouver Island, and of a line 
from Hope Island, British Columbia, to Cape Calvert, Calvert Island, 
British Columbia, the waters east of a line from Cape Calvert to Duke 
Point on Duke Island, and the waters north of Duke Island and east of 
Prince of Wales Island, Baranof Island, and Chicagof Island, the waters 
of Peril, Neva, and Olga Straits to Sitka, and the waters east of a line 
from Port Althorp of Chicagof Island to Cape Spencer, Alaska, are 
sheltered waters * * *.''
    (b) U.S.-flag vessels and Canadian vessels navigating on the treaty 
waters on a voyage as described in paragraph (a) of this section are by 
virtue of this Treaty of August 11, 1934, not subject to load line 
requirements in 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116, the 1966 Convention, and the 
regulations in this subchapter. Vessels navigating these sheltered 
waters and passing outside their boundary on any voyage cannot claim the 
benefits of this Treaty and shall be in compliance with the applicable 
load line requirements in 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116, the 1966 Convention, and 
the regulations in this subchapter.
    (c) Since subdivision requirements apply to all passenger vessels 
subject to the 1960 International Convention on Safety of Life at Sea, 
those passenger vessels navigating on the waters described in paragraph 
(a) of this section shall be in compliance with such 1960 Convention 
requirements and the regulations in part 46 of this subchapter. The 
Coast Guard issues to such a vessel a stability letter. The assigning 
authority is authorized to issue to such a passenger vessel an 
appropriate load line certificate, modified to meet the conditions 
governing her service assignment, and marking.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9011, June 5, 1969; USCG-1998-4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



        Subpart 42.05_Definition of Terms Used in This Subchapter



Sec. 42.05-1  Approved.

    This term means approved by the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, unless 
otherwise stated.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.05-10  Assigning authority.

    This term means the ``American Bureau of Shipping'' or such other 
recognized classification society which the Commandant may approve as 
the load line assigning and issuing authority for a vessel, as provided 
in sections 3 of the load line acts.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.05-20  Commandant.

    This term means the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, Washington, DC 
20593-0001.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGD 88-070, 53 FR 
34534, Sept. 7, 1988]



Sec. 42.05-25  Coast Guard District Commander or District Commander.

    These terms mean an officer of the Coast Guard designated as such by 
the Commandant to command all Coast Guard activities within his 
district. This includes enforcement of load line requirements as 
described in this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.05-30  Existing vessel.

    (a) As used in this part 42, for a vessel engaged on international 
voyages or on

[[Page 12]]

domestic voyages by sea, the term existing vessel means a vessel which 
is not a new vessel. With few exceptions an existing vessel is a vessel 
the keel of which was laid, or which was at a similar stage of 
construction, prior to July 21, 1968. (See Sec. 42.05-50 for the 
definition of a new vessel.)
    (b)-(c) [Reserved]
    (d) As used in part 44 of this subchapter, for a vessel marked with 
load lines for special service on a coastwise or interisland voyage, the 
term existing vessel means one whose keel was laid prior to September 
28, 1937. (See Sec. 44.01-20 of this subchapter.)
    (e) As used in part 45 of this subchapter, existing vessel in all 
regulations pertaining to a vessel engaged solely on Great Lakes voyages 
before April 14, 1973, means a vessel whose keel was laid before August 
27, 1936. The regulations pertaining to these vessels that are in effect 
after April 14, 1973, do not use the term existing vessel.
    (f) As used in part 46 of this subchapter, for a passenger vessel 
marked with subdivision load lines, the term existing vessel means a 
vessel whose keel was laid or was converted to such service prior to May 
26, 1965. (See Sec. 46.05-30 of this subchapter.)

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 
12290, May 10, 1973; CGD 80-120, 47 FR 5722, Feb. 8, 1982]



Sec. 42.05-40  Great Lakes.

    (a) This term means the Great Lakes of North America.
    (b) As used in this part, the term solely navigating the Great Lakes 
includes any special service coastwise navigation performed by the 
vessel.
    (c) In concurrence with related Canadian regulations, the waters of 
the St. Lawrence River west of a rhumb line drawn from Cap de Rosiers to 
West Point, Anticosti Island, and west of a line along 63[deg] W. 
longitude from Anticosti Island to the north shore of the St. Lawrence 
River shall be considered as a part of the Great Lakes. In addition, the 
Victoria Bridge, Montreal, Canada, is the dividing line between fresh 
water and salt water in the St. Lawrence River.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 
12290, May 10, 1973]



Sec. 42.05-45  International voyage.

    (a) The term international voyage as used in this part shall have 
the same meaning as the term international voyage in Article 2(4) of the 
1966 Convention. Except for vessels operating solely on the waters 
indicated in Article 5(2) of the 1966 Convention, an international 
voyage means a sea voyage from any country to a port outside such 
country, or conversely. For this purpose, every territory for the 
international relations of which any specific Contracting Government is 
responsible or for which the United Nations are the administering 
authority is regarded as a separate country.
    (b) The 1966 Convention does not apply to vessels solely navigating 
the Great Lakes. Accordingly, such vessels shall not be considered as 
being on an international voyage for the purpose of this subchapter.
    (c) For the purpose of administration of load line requirements in 
this subchapter, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Territory of Guam, 
the Virgin Islands, and all possessions and lands held by the United 
States under a protectorate or mandate shall each be considered to be a 
territory of the United States.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.05-47  Marine inspector or inspector.

    These terms mean any person from the civilian or military branch of 
the Coast Guard assigned under the superintendence and direction of an 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, or any other person as may be 
designated for the performance of duties with respect to the inspection, 
enforcement, and administration of title 52, Revised Statutes, and acts 
amendatory thereof or supplemental thereto, and rules and regulations 
thereunder.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.05-50  New vessel.

    (a) As used in this part 42, for a vessel engaged on international 
voyages or on domestic voyages by sea, the term new vessel means a 
vessel, the keel of which is laid, or which is at a similar stage of 
construction, on or after July 21, 1968.

[[Page 13]]

(See Sec. 42.05-30 for definition of an existing vessel.)
    (1) This definition applies to all vessels of countries signatory to 
or acceding to the 1966 Convention prior to April 21, 1968, and to 
vessels of countries not adhering to an applicable Convention as 
indicated in Article 16(4) of the 1966 Convention.
    (2) For countries which accede to the 1966 Convention after April 
21, 1968, a new vessel (foreign) shall be one whose keel is 
constructively laid 3 months or more after such date.
    (b)-(c) [Reserved]
    (d) As used in part 44 of this subchapter, for a vessel marked with 
load lines for special service on a coastwise or interisland voyage, the 
term new vessel means one whose keel is laid on or after September 28, 
1937. (See Sec. 44.01-20 of this subchapter.)
    (e) As used in part 45 of this subchapter, for a vessel engaged 
solely on Great Lakes voyages, the term new vessel means one whose keel 
is laid on or after August 27, 1936. (See Sec. 45.01-10 of this 
subchapter.)
    (f) As used in part 46 of this subchapter, for a passenger vessel 
marked with subdivision load lines, the term new vessel means a vessel 
whose keel is laid or is converted to such service on or after May 26, 
1965. (See Sec. 46.05-25 of this subchapter.)

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10051, July 12, 1968 as amended by CGD 80-120, 47 FR 
5722, Feb. 8, 1982]



Sec. 42.05-55  Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection.

    This term means any person from the civilian or military branch of 
the Coast Guard designated as such by the Commandant and who, under the 
superintendence and direction of the Coast Guard District Commander, is 
in charge of a marine inspection zone, and may supervise or perform the 
duties of a marine inspector.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10052, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.05-60  Recognized classification society.

    The term recognized classification society means the American Bureau 
of Shipping or other classification society recognized by the 
Commandant, as provided in 46 U.S.C. 5107, and who also may be approved 
as a load line assigning and issuing authority.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10052, July 12, 1968, as amended by USCG-1998-4442, 
63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 42.05-63  Ship(s) and vessel(s).

    The terms ship(s) and vessel(s) are interchangeable or synonymous 
words, and include every description of watercraft, other than a 
seaplane on the water, used or capable of being used as a means of 
transportation on water.

[CGFR 68-126, 34 FR 9011, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.05-65  Surveyor.

    The term surveyor means any person designated by the American Bureau 
of Shipping or other classification society recognized by the Commandant 
as the person who actually examines the vessel and/or materials 
associated with such examination, and who ascertains such vessel 
complies with applicable load line requirements.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10052, July 12, 1968]



        Subpart 42.07_Control, Enforcement, and Rights of Appeal



Sec. 42.07-1  Load lines required.

    (a) The vessels listed in Sec. Sec. 42.03-5 and 42.03-10 as subject 
to the applicable requirements in this subchapter shall have load lines 
accurately marked amidships, port and starboard, as provided in this 
part 42 or the 1966 Convention, unless otherwise stated. Those vessels 
issued load line exemption certificates may not be required to have load 
line marks (see Sec. 42.03-30).
    (b) For vessels marked with international load lines and navigating 
the Great Lakes, such vessels are also subject to requirements in part 
45 of this subchapter while on the Great Lakes. See Sec. 45.9 of this 
subchapter for load line marks used by such vessels.
    (c) For Great Lakes vessels operating solely on Great Lakes voyages, 
the requirements for the applicable load line marks are in part 45 of 
this subchapter. Great Lakes vessels when making

[[Page 14]]

other international or unlimited coastwise voyages shall comply with the 
applicable requirements in parts 42, 44, and 45 of this subchapter.
    (d) For coastwise steam colliers, barges, and self-propelled barges 
in special services, the requirements for the applicable load line marks 
are in part 44 of this subchapter. These requirements also include 
certain regulations governing such vessels when they additionally engage 
in Great Lakes voyages, international voyages or unlimited coastwise 
voyages. Load line requirements in this part 42 also apply to such 
vessels when engaged on international or unlimited coastwise voyages.
    (e) Existing U.S.-flag vessels, as defined in Sec. 42.05-30(a) of 
this chapter, engaged in international or coastwise voyages, may retain 
the load line assigned under previous regulations, provided:
    (1) The vessel has not been assigned a reduced freeboard under the 
regulations in this part 42, and
    (2) The form of the load line certificate issued to and carried on 
board the vessel conforms to the requirements of subpart 42.50 of this 
part or Sec. 44.05-35 or Sec. 46.10-30 of this chapter.
    (f) This part applies to foreign vessels of countries--
    (1) Signatory to or adhering to the 1966 Convention;
    (2) Adhering to the 1930 Convention and not acceding to the 1966 
Convention, or;
    (3) Not adhering to either the 1930 Convention or the 1966 
Convention but subject to the load line acts.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10052, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9011, June 5, 1969; CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12290, May 10, 1973; CGD 80-
120, 47 FR 5722, Feb. 8, 1982]



Sec. 42.07-5  Marks placed on vessel to indicate load lines.

    (a) Load line marks to indicate the maximum amidship's draft to 
which a vessel can be lawfully submerged, in the various circumstances 
and seasons, shall be permanently marked on each side of the vessel in 
the form, manner, and location as required by this subchapter.
    (b) The load line marks placed on a vessel shall be attested to by a 
valid load line certificate as required by Sec. 42.07-45(b). The 
issuing authority shall not deliver any required load line certificate 
to the vessel until after its surveyor has ascertained that the vessel 
meets the applicable survey requirements and the correct placement of 
the marks on the vessel's sides has been confirmed.
    (c) The requirements for load line marks apply to all new and 
existing vessels as specified in Sec. Sec. 42.03-5 and 42.03-10, except 
when a vessel has been issued a load line exemption certificate in lieu 
of a load line certificate.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10052, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.07-10  Submergence of load line marks.

    (a) Except as provided otherwise in this section, vessels of the 
types described in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section 
shall not be so loaded as to submerge at any time when departing for a 
voyage by sea, or on the Great Lakes, or during the voyage, or on 
arrival, the applicable load lines marked on the sides of the vessel for 
the season of the year and the zone or area in which the vessel may be 
operating.
    (1) Merchant vessels of 150 gross tons or over, as described in 
Sec. 42.03-5 or Sec. 42.03-10, and on voyages subject to 46 U.S.C. 
5101-5116.
    (2) All new vessels of 79 feet or over in length on voyages subject 
to the 1966 Convention.
    (3) All vessels of 150 gross tons or over, other than merchant 
vessels covered by paragraph (a)(1) of this section, on voyages subject 
to the 1966 Convention.
    (b) When loading a vessel in a favorable zone for a voyage on which 
the vessel will enter a less favorable zone, such allowances must be 
made that the vessel when crossing into the less favorable zone, will 
conform to the regulations and freeboard for the less favorable zone.
    (c) When a vessel is in fresh water of unit density, the appropriate 
load line may be submerged by the amount of the fresh water allowance 
shown on the applicable load line certificate. Where

[[Page 15]]

the density is other than unity, an allowance shall be made proportional 
to the difference between 1.025 and the actual density. This paragraph 
does not apply to vessels when navigating the Great Lakes.
    (d) When a vessel departs from a port situated on a river or inland 
waters, deeper loading shall be permitted corresponding to the weight of 
fuel and all other materials required for consumption between the port 
of departure and the sea. This paragraph does not apply to vessels when 
navigating the Great Lakes.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10052, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969; USCG-1998-4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 42.07-15  Zones and seasonal areas.

    (a) A vessel subject to 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116 or the 1966 Convention 
shall comply, as applicable, with the requirements regarding the zones 
and seasonal areas described in subpart 42.30.
    (b) A port located on the boundary line between two zones or areas 
shall be regarded as within the zone or seasonal area from or into which 
the vessel arrives or departs.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10053, July 12, 1968, as amended by USCG-1998-4442, 
63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 42.07-20  Logbook entries.

    (a) As described in Sec. 3.13-35 of Subchapter A (Procedures 
Applicable to the Public) of this chapter, official logbooks (Form CG-
706-C), are furnished free to certain vessels, and after they have 
served their purpose they are filed with the applicable Officer in 
Charge, Marine Inspection.
    (b) The master shall be responsible for having entered in the 
vessel's ``official logbook'' if carried, otherwise in his own log 
considered as its official logbook, the data required by section 6 of 
the load line acts. These logbooks entries shall be made before a vessel 
departs from her loading port or place and consist of:
    (1) A statement of the load line marks applicable to the voyage; 
and,
    (2) A statement of the position of the load line marks, port and 
starboard, at the time of departing from a port or place; i.e., the 
distance in inches of the water surface above or below the applicable 
load line; and,
    (3) The actual drafts of the vessel, forward and aft, as nearly as 
the same can be ascertained, at the time of departing from a port or 
place.
    (c) Where the master uses his own log, it shall be kept by the 
master or owner for 1 year after the actions noted therein have been 
completed and upon request shall be furnished to any load line 
enforcement officer.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10053, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.07-25  Approval of the Commandant.

    (a) Where the requirements in this subchapter state that the 
approval of the Commandant is necessary, the owner or his agent shall 
furnish all information necessary, including background material, and/or 
final plans, calculations, and conclusions reached, as will enable the 
Commandant to obtain a comprehensive understanding of and reach a 
decision relative to the question or problem at issue prior to 
proceeding with the work. All information, plans and calculations 
submitted will remain with the Commandant as a part of the record on the 
vessel.
    (b) If the owner or his agent desires to have information, plans, 
and calculations returned with Commandant's actions noted thereon, or if 
distribution of such information is necessary or required by regulations 
in this subchapter to owners, masters of vessels, etc., then the owner 
or his agent shall furnish multiple copies of the information as 
required.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10053, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.07-30  Approval of the assigning authority.

    (a) Where the requirements in this subchapter state the approval of 
an assigning authority is required, the owner or his agent shall furnish 
the required information, including plans, etc., as required by and 
which will enable the assigning authority to obtain a comprehensive 
understanding of the matter and to reach pertinent decisions prior to 
proceeding with the work. When requested the assigning authority shall 
furnish the Coast Guard all information, etc., on any

[[Page 16]]

question at issue and decisions reached.
    (b) All information required under this subchapter by an assigning 
authority with respect to a specific vessel shall be retained until 5 
years after termination of certification by such authority.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10053, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.07-35  American Bureau of Shipping as an assigning authority.

    (a) The American Bureau of Shipping, with its home office at ABS 
Plaza, 16855 Northchase Drive, Houston, TX 77060, is hereby appointed as 
the prime assigning and issuing authority under the provisions of 
Articles 13 and 16(3) of the 1966 Convention and as directed by 46 
U.S.C. 5107. In this capacity the American Bureau of Shipping is 
empowered to assign load lines, to perform surveys required for load 
line assignments, and to determine that the position of and the manner 
of marking vessels has been done in accordance with applicable 
requirements.
    (b) On behalf of the United States of America, the American Bureau 
of Shipping is authorized to issue or reissue, under its own seal and 
signature of its officials, the appropriate load line certificates or 
International Load Line Exemption Certificate as described in subpart 
42.50 of this part or in parts 44 to 46, inclusive, of this subchapter. 
Except for the International Load Line Exemption Certificate, the 
required load line certificate issued to a specific vessel shall certify 
to the correctness of the load line marks assigned and marked on the 
vessel and compliance with authorized conditions, restrictions, and/or 
exemptions, if any. The International Load Line Exemption Certificate 
when issued to a vessel shall certify as to the compliance with the 
information applicable to the vessel.
    (c) The designation and delegation to the American Bureau of 
Shipping as an assigning and issuing authority shall be in effect 
indefinitely unless for due cause it shall be terminated by proper 
authority and notice of cancellation is published in the Federal 
Register.
    (d) The American Bureau of Shipping is authorized to revalidate from 
time to time by endorsement a load line certificate or an International 
Load Line Exemption Certificate.
    (e) Before revalidating any certificate by endorsement, the American 
Bureau of Shipping shall verify that the required load line marks 
assigned are marked on the vessel and the vessel is in compliance with 
authorized conditions, restrictions, and/or exemptions, if any.
    (f) The American Bureau of Shipping shall issue all load line 
certificates in duplicate; one copy shall be delivered to the owner or 
master of the vessel, and one copy (together with a summary of data used 
to determine the assigned load lines) shall be forwarded to the 
Commandant.
    (g) The American Bureau of Shipping shall prepare a load line survey 
report on each new vessel or existing vessel when brought into complete 
compliance with this part prior to issuing the required load line 
certificate described in subpart 42.50 of this part. At the time the 
certificate is delivered, one copy of this report shall be delivered to 
the master of the vessel, and one copy shall be forwarded to the 
Commandant. When a load line survey report is superseded or revised, one 
copy shall be delivered to the master of the vessel, and one copy shall 
be forwarded to the Commandant.
    (h) The load line survey report or stability information furnished 
to a specific vessel shall include a statement of the locations of all 
watertight subdivision bulkheads, including steps or recesses therein, 
which may be involved in the vessel's load line assignment.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10053, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969; CGD 80-143, 47 FR 25149, June 10, 1982; CGD 96-
041, 61 FR 50727, Sept. 27, 1996; USCG-1998-4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 
1998; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58459, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 42.07-40  Recognized classification society as an assigning authority.

    (a) On behalf of the United States of America, under the provisions 
of Articles 13 and 16(3) and as provided in 46 U.S.C. 5107, the 
Commandant, at the request of a shipowner, may appoint any other 
recognized classification society, which he may approve, as the 
assigning and issuing authority who shall perform the same functions and 
duties

[[Page 17]]

as indicated in Sec. 42.07-35 for the American Bureau of Shipping.
    (b) The appointment of a recognized classification society as the 
assigning and issuing authority will be limited to vessels specifically 
designated by the Commandant.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10053, July 12, 1968, as amended by USCG-1998-4442, 
63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 42.07-43  Change in assigning authority.

    (a) If the owner desires a change in assigning and issuing authority 
for a vessel, a special request shall be made in writing to the 
Commandant at least 90 days prior to the expiration date of the present 
certificate or the annual endorsement thereon.
    (b) A change in the assigning authority does not presume any change 
in assigned load lines.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10053, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.07-45  Load line certificates.

    (a) The load line certificates for which the Government of the 
United States of America assumes full responsibility may be issued by 
the Commandant, the American Bureau of Shipping, or a recognized 
classification society when appointed as an authorized assigning and 
issuing authority for specifically designated vessels.
    (b) The load line certificate shall certify to the correctness of 
the load line marks assigned to the vessel and that the vessel is in 
compliance with applicable requirements. A certificate issued under this 
subchapter also shall describe the applicable load line marks, 
conditions, restrictions, and/or exemptions, if any, the vessel shall 
observe, according to the season of the year and the zone or area in 
which the vessel may operate. The load line exemption certificate issued 
under Sec. 42.03-30 shall certify the special conditions the vessel 
shall observe.
    (c) A load line assignment and certificate issued to any vessel 
under the authority of the regulations in this subchapter (or under the 
authority of any Government adhering to the 1966 Convention, under the 
provisions of Article 19(5) of the 1966 Convention) shall cease to be 
valid upon the transfer of such vessel to the flag of another 
Government.
    (d) Each loadline certificate is issued for the following length of 
time:
    (1) An international and coastwise certificate is issued for 5 years 
and may be extended by the Commandant up to 150 days from the date of 
the--
    (i) Survey that is endorsed on the certificate by the surveyor 
authorized by the Coast Guard; or
    (ii) Last day of the 5-year period.
    (2) A Great Lakes certificate is issued for 5 years and may be 
extended by the Commander, Ninth Coast Guard District, up to 365 days 
from date of the--
    (i) Survey that is endorsed on the certificate by the surveyor 
authorized by the Coast Guard; or
    (ii) Last day of the 5-year period.
    (e) The form of certificate certifying to the correctness of the 
load line marks, assigned under the regulations in this part, may be in 
the form of temporary or provisional certificate, signed by the 
authorized surveyor pending early issuance of appropriate certificate as 
shown in subpart 42.50 of this part as follows:
    (1) International Load Line Certificate, 1966, issued to U.S. 
vessels engaged in foreign voyages, or engaged in coastwise or 
intercoastal voyages (provided such vessels qualify to engage in foreign 
voyages without restriction), as follows:
    (i) Form A1, For general use.
    (ii) Form A2, For sailing vessels.
    (iii) Form A3, For general use, combined with timber deck cargo.
    (2) Certificate issued to foreign vessels belonging to countries 
that have not ratified or acceded to the 1966 Convention as follows:
    (i) Form B, For general use.
    (3) Coastwise load line certificate (other than for special service 
as provided for by part 44 of this subchapter) issued to U.S. vessels 
engaged solely in coastwise and/or intercoastal voyages (which may be 
subject to restrictions as to manning, routes, seasons, waters of 
operations, etc., as shown on the face of the certificate), as follows:
    (i) Form C1, For general use.
    (ii) Form C2, For sailing ships.
    (iii) Form C3, For general use, combined with timber deck cargo.

[[Page 18]]

    (f) The form of certificate certifying to the correctness of 
exemptions granted under the regulations in this part shall be as shown 
in subpart 42.50 of this part as follows:
    (1) International load line exemption certificate issued under 
special conditions to U.S.-flag vessels engaged in foreign voyages, as 
follows:
    (i) Form E1, For general international use.
    (ii) Where this certificate is intended to expire after a single 
voyage, this information shall be noted on the face of the certificate.
    (2) International load line certificate Form A1, A2, or A3 issued 
under special conditions to U.S.-flag vessels on international voyages 
between the United States and near neighboring ports of its possessions 
or of foreign countries. Exemptions, if any, shall be specified on the 
certificate.
    (g) The issuing authority shall provide the printed forms it may use 
under the regulations in this subchapter. These forms shall be approved 
by the Commandant before final printing. The international load line 
certificate and exemption certificate forms shall exactly reproduce the 
arrangement of the printed part of the model Forms A1, A2, A3, and E1 
indicated in subpart 42.50 of this part for all official copies and any 
certified copies issued.
    (h) Where a vessel qualifies for and is issued a Form E1 
International Load Line Exemption Certificate for foreign voyages but is 
also or solely engaged in coastwise or intercoastal voyages by sea, this 
certificate shall be considered equivalent to a valid coastwise load 
line certificate. In such case the vessel shall be deemed in full 
compliance with 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116 and the regulations in this part 
promulgated thereunder.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10054, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969; CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12290, May 10, 1973; CGD-74; 
153, 39 FR 25324, July 10, 1974; CGD 80-120, 47 FR 5722, Feb. 8, 1982; 
CGD 96-006, 61 FR 35964, July 9, 1996; USCG-1998-4442, 63 FR 52190, 
Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 42.07-50  Penalties for violations.

    (a) The penalties for violation of various provisions of the load 
line acts or the regulations established thereunder are set forth in 46 
U.S.C. 5116. The Secretary of Transportation by 49 CFR 1.46(b) has 
transferred to the Commandant authority to assess, collect, remit or 
litigate any monetary penalty imposed under these laws.
    (b) The master and/or owner of a vessel that is operated, navigated, 
or used in violation of the provisions of the load line acts, or the 
regulations in this subchapter will be subject to the penalties as set 
forth in law, and the vessel shall also be liable therefor. Depending 
upon the gravity of the violations, the Coast Guard may do any one or 
more of the following:
    (1) Detain a vessel if deemed to be overloaded in violation of title 
46 U.S.C. 5112, in accordance with 46 U.S.C. 5113 and have the vessel 
surveyed by three disinterested surveyors.
    (2) Assess and collect applicable monetary penalties for certain 
violations as provided in 46 U.S.C. 5112 and 5116.
    (3) Initiate a criminal prosecution for certain violations when 
required by 46 U.S.C. 5112 or 5116.
    (4) Initiate an action of libel against the vessel involved if there 
is a failure to pay monetary penalties assessed.
    (5) Initiate a suspension or revocation proceeding, in addition to 
the foregoing actions described in this paragraph against any officer or 
seaman holding a valid Coast Guard license or merchant mariner's 
document and who may violate any provision of the load line acts, the 
1966 Convention, or the regulations in this subchapter, under the 
provisions of 46 U.S.C. Chapter 77, and the regulations in 46 CFR part 
5.
    (c) In determining offenses, 46 U.S.C. 5116 provides that `Each day 
of a continuing violation is a separate violation' and
    (d) The procedures governing the assessment, collection, remission 
and litigation of any monetary penalty proposed under 46 U.S.C. 5116 for 
a violation of either load line law or the applicable regulations in 
this subchapter, as well as the appeal procedures to be allowed, are in 
33 CFR subpart 1.07.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10054, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969; CGD 80-120, 47 FR 5722, Feb. 8, 1982; CGD 97-057, 
62 FR 51043, Sept. 30, 1997]

[[Page 19]]



Sec. 42.07-55  Cancellation of load line certificates or exemption certificates.

    (a) Since vessels described in Sec. 42.03-5 or Sec. 42.03-10 when 
found qualified are issued appropriate load line certificates or load 
line exemption certificates, under U.S. responsibility as indicated in 
Sec. 42.07-45 such certificates may be canceled by proper U.S. 
authority for due cause, including one or more of the causes listed in 
paragraph (b) of this section. Such action may occur prior to the 
expiration date on the certificate and normal certificate surrender. The 
cancellation of such certificate means that the correctness of load line 
marks and compliance with conditions of assignment for the named vessel 
no longer are recognized by the United States and that the existing 
assigned load line marks are voided.
    (b) Certain causes for automatic cancellation of certificates are:
    (1) The conditions of assignment have not been maintained as 
required by this subchapter.
    (2) Material alterations have taken place in the hull or 
superstructure of the vessel, which will necessitate the assignment of 
an increased freeboard.
    (3) The fittings and appliances have not been maintained in an 
effective condition for the protection of openings, guardrails, freeing 
ports, and means of access to crew's quarters.
    (4) The structural strength of the vessel is lowered to such an 
extent that the vessel is unsafe.
    (5) The load line certificate or International Load Line Exemption 
Certificate is not endorsed to show the vessel has been surveyed 
annually or periodically by the issuing authority as required by this 
part or the 1966 Convention.
    (6) Issuance of a new load line certificate for the same vessel.
    (7) Surrender of a certificate for cancellation when required.
    (8) The owner, master, or agent of the vessel has furnished false or 
fraudulent information in or with the application for a certificate.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10054, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.07-60  Control.

    (a) The District Director of Customs or the Coast Guard District 
Commander may detain a vessel for survey if there is reason to believe 
that the vessel is proceeding on her journey in excess of the draft 
allowed by the regulations in this subchapter as indicated by the 
vessel's load line certificate, or otherwise. The Coast Guard District 
Commander may detain a vessel if it is so loaded as to be manifestly 
unsafe to proceed to sea.
    (b) If the District Director of Customs orders a vessel detained, he 
shall immediately inform the Coast Guard District Commander thereof, who 
shall thereupon advise the District Director of Customs whether or not 
he deems that the vessel may proceed to sea with safety. If the Coast 
Guard District Commander orders a vessel detained, such officer will 
furnish the District Director of Customs immediate notification of such 
detention. The clearance shall be refused to any vessel which shall have 
been ordered detained, which shall be in effect until it is shown that 
the vessel is not in violation of the applicable law and the regulations 
in this subchapter.
    (1) Where a vessel is detained for noncompliance with ``material 
alteration'' and ``effective maintenance'' requirements of paragraph 
(f)(1) of this section, the detention shall only be exercised insofar as 
may be necessary to ensure that the vessel can proceed to sea without 
danger to passengers or crew.
    (c) The detention of a vessel will be by written order of either the 
Coast Guard District Commander or the District Director of Customs, 
depending on who orders the detention. The Coast Guard District 
Commander will immediately arrange for a survey in the manner prescribed 
by 46 U.S.C. 5113. Unless the owner or agent waives in writing and 
stipulates to accept the Coast Guard's survey, the Coast Guard District 
Commander shall appoint three disinterested surveyors and, where 
practicable, one of them shall be from the Surveying Staff of the 
American Bureau of Shipping. Such surveyors shall conduct a survey to 
ascertain whether or not the vessel is loaded

[[Page 20]]

in violation of the applicable provisions in the load line acts, and the 
regulations in this subchapter. If the survey confirms the allegation 
that the vessel is in violation of either law or the applicable 
regulations in this subchapter, ``the owner and agent shall bear the 
costs of the survey in addition to any penalty or fine imposed'', as 
provided in these laws.
    (d) Whenever a vessel is detained, the master or owner may, within 5 
days, appeal to the Commandant who may, if he desires, order a further 
survey, and may affirm, set aside, or modify the order of the detaining 
officer.
    (e) Where a foreign vessel is detained or intervention action of any 
other kind is taken against a foreign vessel, the officer carrying out 
the action shall immediately inform in writing the Consul or the 
diplomatic representative of the State whose flag the vessel is flying, 
of the decision involved together with all pertinent circumstances under 
which intervention was deemed necessary.
    (f) Under 46 U.S.C. 5109 a vessel of a foreign country which has 
ratified the 1966 Convention, or which holds a recognized and valid 1930 
Convention certificate, or which holds a valid Great Lakes Certificate, 
shall be exempt from the provisions of the regulations in this 
subchapter insofar as the marking of the load lines and the 
certificating thereof are concerned, so long as such country similarly 
recognizes the load lines established by this subchapter for the purpose 
of a voyage by sea subject to the proviso in paragraph (f)(1) of this 
section or the alternative proviso in paragraph (f)(2) of this section.
    (1) If the foreign vessel is marked with load lines and has on board 
a valid International or Great Lakes Load Line Certificate certifying to 
the correctness of the marks, the control provisions in this part which 
are in accord with Article 21 of the 1966 Convention shall be observed. 
In this connection, the vessel shall not be loaded beyond the limits 
allowed by the certificate. The position of the load lines on the vessel 
shall correspond with the certificate. The vessel shall not have been so 
materially altered as to make the vessel manifestly unfit to proceed to 
sea without danger to human life, in regard to:
    (i) The hull or superstructure (if necessitating assignment of an 
increased freeboard); and/or,
    (ii) The appliances and fittings for protection of openings, 
guardrails, freeing ports, and means of access to crew's quarters (if 
necessitating replacement or other effective maintenance).
    (2) (Alternatively provided) If the foreign vessel has on board an 
International Load Line Exemption Certificate in lieu of an 
International Load Line Certificate, 1966, in such case, verify that it 
is valid and any conditions stipulated therein are met.
    (g) A foreign vessel of a nation for which the 1966 Convention has 
not come into force does not qualify for an International Load Line 
Certificate, 1966. In lieu thereof, such a vessel shall be required to 
have on board a valid Form B load line certificate or a recognized 1930 
Convention certificate.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10055, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969; USCG-1998-4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 42.07-75  Right of appeal.

    Any person directly affected by a decision or action taken under 
this subchapter, by or on behalf of the Coast Guard, may appeal 
therefrom in accordance with subpart 1.03 of this chapter.

[CGD 88-033, 54 FR 50380, Dec. 6, 1989]



  Subpart 42.09_Load Line Assignments and Surveys_General Requirements



Sec. 42.09-1  Assignment of load lines.

    (a) The assignment of load lines is conditioned upon the structural 
efficiency and satisfactory stability of the vessel, and upon the 
provisions provided on the vessel for her effective protection and that 
of the crew. Certain vessels, such as vessels carrying all their cargo 
as deck cargo, or vessels where design or service require special 
conditions to be applicable, shall have certain stability limitations 
imposed on them, as may be necessary. When stability limitations for a 
vessel are

[[Page 21]]

prescribed, the assigning authority shall furnish the master the 
vessel's maximum draft permitted and other conditions, including 
reference to Commandant approved operating stability features, which may 
be applicable.
    (1) No load line assignment shall be made under this part to a 
vessel proceeding on a foreign voyage, or where the load line assignment 
is related to the flooded stability provisions and the vessel is 
proceeding on a domestic voyage, until the applicable light ship 
characteristics are established and incorporated into the vessel's 
stability data approved by the Commandant and furnished to the master of 
the vessel.
    (2) If load line assignments are made to vessels for coastwise 
voyages before the results of the required stability characteristics are 
determined and incorporated into the vessel's stability data approved by 
the Commandant, then such load line assignments shall be regarded as 
conditional and shall be subject to verification or modification for 
removal of the conditional status. Any vessel with a conditional load 
line assignment shall not be loaded beyond a conservative safe draft. 
Where the Commandant deems it unnecessary, the requirement for 
furnishing stability information to the masters of coastwise vessels 
assigned load lines not related to flooded stability may be omitted and 
the assigning authority and others concerned will be so notified.
    (b) Each vessel subject to load line requirements shall carry on 
board a valid certificate attesting to compliance with such 
requirements. (See Sec. Sec. 42.07-35 and 42.07-40 for additional data 
furnished to the vessel.)
    (c) The master of the vessel for which a load line certificate has 
been issued shall be responsible for the maintenance of such certificate 
on board such vessel and for compliance with its terms and conditions. 
Additionally, the master shall be responsible for having the current 
load line survey report on board the vessel. This report shall be made 
available to surveyors when carrying out subsequent load line surveys.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10055, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.09-5  All vessels--division into types.

    (a) For the purposes of this part, each vessel to which this part 
applies is either a Type ``A'' or a Type ``B'' vessel.
    (b) A Type ``A'' vessel is a vessel that--
    (1) Is designed to carry only liquid cargoes in bulk;
    (2) Has a high degree of watertight and structural integrity of the 
deck exposed to the weather, with only small openings to cargo 
compartments that are closed by watertight gasketed covers of steel or 
other material considered equivalent by the Commandant; and
    (3) Has a low permeability of loaded cargo compartments.
    (c) A Type ``B'' vessel is any vessel that is not a Type ``A'' 
vessel.
    (d) Requirements governing the assignment of freeboards for Types 
``A'' and ``B'' vessels are in subparts 42.20 and 42.25 of this part.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38647, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.09-10  Stability, subdivision, and strength.

    (a) All vessels. Where regulations in this part, or in part 46 of 
this subchapter, require or permit load line assignment on the basis of 
the vessel's ability to meet specified flooding, including damage 
stability requirements, the owner shall furnish the necessary plans and 
calculations demonstrating that the vessel is in compliance with the 
applicable requirements. This material shall be furnished to the 
assigning authority for approval review at the earliest practicable date 
except where specifically required by part 46 of this subchapter for 
passenger vessels to be submitted to the Commandant for approval.
    (1) When stability information is required, the plans shall include 
the location and extent of all watertight subdivision bulkheads, etc., 
involved.
    (2) Additional stability, subdivision, and strength requirements are 
in Sec. Sec. 42.09-1, 42.13-1, 42.13-5, and 42.15-1. The applicable 
flooded stability requirements are in Sec. Sec. 42.20-3 through 42.20-
13.

[[Page 22]]

    (b) Passenger vessels. In passenger vessels where the positions of 
the maximum load lines is subject to determination by the application of 
subdivision and stability requirements in this subchapter, the 
provisions of both parts 42 and 46 shall be accounted for and developed 
as necessary. See subchapter H (Passenger Vessels) of this chapter for 
related data required to be submitted to the Commandant.
    (c) Light ship data. All plans, etc., necessary for obtaining the 
Commandant's approval of test results (light ship data) and stability 
information shall be furnished by the owner. In the absence of existing 
acceptable light ship stability information, such data shall be obtained 
from a stability test performed under the supervision of the Commandant. 
Results of such tests, if satisfactory, will be approved by the 
Commandant.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10056, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969; CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38647, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.09-15  Surveys by the American Bureau of Shipping or assigning authority.

    (a) General. Before issuing a certificate or placement of load line 
marks on a vessel, the assigning and issuing authority shall make an 
initial or periodic survey of the vessel as required by this subchapter. 
A load line survey report shall be made, reflecting information and 
facts based on initial surveys, including required and special elements 
as may be deemed necessary by the assigning authority or the Commandant.
    (b) Initial survey. An initial survey shall be made before the 
vessel is put in service or the first time the assigning authority is 
requested to survey a vessel. The survey shall include a complete 
examination of its structure and equipment insofar as required by the 
applicable requirements in this subchapter. This survey shall be such as 
to ensure that the arrangements, materials, scantlings, and subsequent 
placement of load line marks fully comply with applicable requirements.
    (c) Periodical survey. A periodical survey shall be made at 
intervals not exceeding five (5) years from an initial or previous 
periodic survey. The survey shall be similar to the initial survey 
insofar as extent and purpose are concerned.
    (1) If the load line marks are found to be correct for the condition 
the vessel is then in, the assigning and issuing authority shall issue a 
new load line certificate, valid for such time as the condition of the 
vessel then warrants but in no case for a period of longer than 5 years. 
If, after a survey has been passed, a loadline certificate can not be 
issued before the current certificate expires, the current certificate 
may be extended by an endorsement in accordance with the requirements 
contained in Sec. 42.07-45(d). This endorsement of the assigning 
authority shall be placed on the back of the certificate, as shown on 
the forms in subpart 42.50. However, if there have been alterations 
which affect the vessel's freeboards, such extension shall not be 
granted. This prohibition is the same as in Article 19(2) of the 1966 
Convention.
    (2) The periodical survey, including certificate extension or 
reissue, for a vessel holding an international load line exemption 
certificate for more than one voyage, shall be the same as for any other 
vessel covered by this section except for load line marks. However, 
other conditions specified in the exemption certificate shall be 
verified.
    (d) Annual surveys for endorsements. Vessels subject to initial and 
periodic surveys shall have annual surveys, within 3 months either way 
of the certificate's anniversary date. The annual surveys shall be made 
by and prove satisfactory to the assigning and issuing authority prior 
to executing the required annual endorsements on load line certificates 
or exemption certificates. The scope shall be as defined in Sec. 42.09-
40 and such as to ensure that the applicable load line marks are found 
to be correct for the condition the vessel is then in.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10056, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9012, June 5, 1969; CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12290, May 10, 1973]



Sec. 42.09-20  Surveys of foreign vessels.

    (a) General. Foreign vessels of countries which have not ratified or 
acceded to the 1966 Convention, or which do not have valid certificates 
issued under

[[Page 23]]

other international convention or treaty and recognized by the United 
States of America, if desiring to depart from a port or place in the 
United States, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Territory of Guam, 
or other U.S. possessions, shall be subjected to survey, marking, and 
certification by a load line assigning and issuing authority as 
authorized under Sec. 42.07-35 or Sec. 42.07-40, unless:
    (1) The vessel is exempted by the provision of 46 U.S.C. 5102; or
    (2) The vessel is under tow and carrying neither passengers nor 
cargo.
    (b) Scope of survey. A periodical survey described in Sec. 42.09-
15(c) shall be conducted by and prove satisfactory to the assigning and 
issuing authority. It shall be made prior to issue or reissue of the 
applicable certificate.
    (c) Certification of load lines. The assigning and issuing authority 
after determining the vessel meets the applicable requirements in this 
part may issue a load line certificate subject to requirements in Sec. 
42.07-45 and on the applicable form described in subpart 42.50 of this 
part: Provided, That the load line certificate issued shall be valid for 
a period of 1 year. The certificate may be revalidated by endorsement 
for additional 1 year periods if the condition of the vessel so 
warrants, but in any event the certificate shall become void five (5) 
years from date of issue, or at the expiration of the fourth (4th) 
yearly validation, whichever occurs first. Whenever the condition of the 
vessel warrants special limitations, such information and facts shall be 
attested to on the front or back of the certificate as necessary, by the 
assigning and issuing authority.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10056, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969; CGD 80-120, 47 FR 5723, Feb. 8, 1982; USCG-1998-
4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 42.09-25  Initial or periodic survey requirements for all vessels.

    (a) Before a survey may be completed, the vessel shall be placed in 
a drydock or hauled out. The surveyor shall be given complete access to 
all parts of the vessel to ensure that the vessel complies with all 
applicable requirements.
    (b) The surveyor shall examine on all vessels the items, etc., 
listed in this paragraph to determine if in satisfactory condition and 
meeting applicable requirements in this subchapter.
    (1) Cargo hatch coamings, covers, beams and supports, gaskets, 
clamps, locking bars, tarpaulins, battens, cleats and wedges of hatches 
on exposed freeboard, quarter and superstructure decks, and elsewhere as 
may be necessary.
    (2) Structure of the vessel, coamings, closures, and all means of 
protection provided for openings, such as for ventilators, 
companionways, machinery casings, fiddleys, funnels, enclosed 
superstructures on the freeboard deck (and their end bulkheads) or 
equivalent protective deck houses, openings in the freeboard and 
superstructure decks, and significant openings at higher levels in the 
vessel.
    (3) Transverse watertight subdivision bulkheads, as fitted, 
including any openings therein and closures for such openings. They 
shall be examined throughout their vertical and transverse extent.
    (4) All air-pipe outlets, their closures, all scuppers, and all 
sanitary discharges in the vessel's sides, including nonreturn valves 
installed.
    (5) The main and auxiliary sea inlets and discharges in the 
machinery space, and elsewhere if existent, and the valves and controls 
for these items.
    (6) All gangways, cargo ports, and airports, including dead covers 
or other similar openings in the vessel's sides and their closures.
    (7) All guardrails, bulwarks, gangways, and freeing port shutters, 
including securing devices, and bars.
    (8) All eye plates or similar fittings for timber (or other) deck-
cargo lashings, including the lashings, sockets for uprights and 
protective devices as may be necessary for ventilators and steering 
arrangements.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10056, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.09-30  Additional survey requirements for steel-hull vessels.

    (a) In addition to the requirements in Sec. 42.09-25, the surveyor 
of the assigning authority shall examine the items,

[[Page 24]]

etc., listed in this section, to determine if in satisfactory condition 
and meeting applicable requirements in this subchapter.
    (b) When the vessel is in drydock, the hull plating, etc., shall be 
examined.
    (c) The holds, 'tween decks, peaks, bilges, machinery spaces, and 
bunkers shall be examined to determine the condition of the framing, 
etc.
    (d) The deep tanks and other tanks which form part of the vessel 
shall be examined internally.
    (e) If a double bottom is fitted, the tanks normally shall be 
examined internally. Where double bottom and other tanks are used for 
fuel-oil bunkers, such tanks need not be cleaned out, if the surveyor is 
able to determine by an external examination that their general 
condition is satisfactory.
    (f) The deck shall be examined.
    (g) Where, owing to the age and condition of the vessel or 
otherwise, the surveyor deems it necessary, the shell and deck plating 
may be required to be drilled or other acceptable means used, in order 
to ascertain the then thickness of such plating.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10057, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.09-35  Additional survey requirements for wood-hull vessels.

    (a) In addition to the requirements in Sec. 42.09-25, the surveyor 
of the assigning authority shall examine the items, etc., listed in this 
section, to determine if in satisfactory condition and meeting the 
applicable requirements in this subchapter.
    (b) When the vessel is in drydock or hauled out, the keel, stem, 
stern frame or sternpost, outside planking, and caulking shall be 
examined.
    (c) The fasteners shall be examined. Bolts, screws, or equivalent 
fastenings, as deemed necessary by the surveyor, must be backed out, or 
otherwise dealt with, to ensure soundness.
    (d) The holds, 'tween decks, peaks, bilges, machinery spaces, and 
bunkers shall be examined.
    (e) The entire structure, including decks, shall be examined. If 
considered necessary by the surveyor, borings shall be made, or other 
means may be used, to ascertain the condition of the materials. Should 
these measures disclose sufficient cause, further examination to satisfy 
the surveyor as to the true condition shall be made and check locations 
listed. This list shall be submitted to the assigning and issuing 
authority for record purposes, and for use in subsequent surveys.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10057, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.09-40  Annual surveys.

    (a) Relative to Sec. Sec. 42.09-15(d) and 42.09-20(c), the 
assigning and issuing authority shall make an annual survey of each 
vessel holding an appropriate certificate issued under this subchapter.
    (b) The annual survey shall be of such scope and extent so as to 
ensure:
    (1) The maintenance in an effective condition of the fittings and 
appliances for the:
    (i) Protection of openings;
    (ii) Guardrails;
    (iii) Freeing ports; and,
    (iv) Means of access to crew's quarters.
    (2) That there have not been alterations made to the hull or 
superstructure which would affect the calculations determining the 
position of the load line marks.
    (c) The assigning and issuing authority shall report on the annual 
survey made to the owner of the vessel.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10057, July 12, 1968 as amended by CGD 80-143, 47 FR 
25149, June 10, 1982]



Sec. 42.09-45  Correction of deficiencies.

    (a) During and after any survey made by the assigning and issuing 
authority, those items, fittings, etc., which are found to be in an 
unsatisfactory condition by the surveyor shall be repaired or renewed in 
order to place the vessel in a satisfactory condition.
    (b) No load line certificate shall be issued, endorsed, extended, or 
reissued or delivered to a vessel subject to this subchapter until after 
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected as required by paragraph 
(a) of this section.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10057, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969]

[[Page 25]]



Sec. 42.09-50  Repairs or alterations to vessel after it has been surveyed.

    (a) After any survey of the vessel made under Sec. Sec. 42.09-25 to 
42.09-40, inclusive, as applicable, has been completed and deficiencies 
corrected as provided in Sec. 42.09-45, no change shall be made in the 
vessel's structure, equipment, arrangement, material, or scantlings as 
covered by such survey, without the prior specific approval of the 
assigning and issuing authority.
    (b) To avoid a freeboard or other penalty, any vessel which 
undergoes repairs, alterations, or modifications, including outfitting 
related thereto, shall continue to comply with the applicable 
requirements consistent with the load line certificate held.
    (c) An existing vessel, which had a load line assigned under 
previous regulations which undergoes repairs, alterations, or 
modifications of a major character, shall meet the requirements for a 
new vessel in this part insofar as the assigning and issuing authority 
and the Commandant deem reasonable and practicable.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10057, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGD 80-120, 47 FR 
5723, Feb. 8, 1982]



   Subpart 42.11_Applications for Load Line Assignments, Surveys, and 
                              Certificates



Sec. 42.11-1  General.

    (a) As described in this subchapter under Sec. Sec. 42.07-35, 
42.07-40, 42.09-15, and 42.09-20, the American Bureau of Shipping or 
other recognized classification societies approved as load line 
assigning and issuing authorities perform the duties connected with 
making load line assignments to vessels.
    (b) The Commandant is responsible for the administration of the load 
line acts, the 1966 Convention, other treaties regarding load lines, and 
the implementing regulations in this subchapter which include prescribed 
form and content of applicable load line certificates.
    (c) Except in special instances for Coast Guard vessels, the 
Commandant does not perform the duties of a load line assigning 
authority.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10057, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969; CGD 80-120, 47 FR 5723, Feb. 8, 1982]



Sec. 42.11-5  Applications for load line assignments, surveys, 
and certificates for U.S.-flag vessels.

    (a) Normally, the owner, master, or agent of a vessel shall apply in 
writing, on a timely basis, to the American Bureau of Shipping for the 
assignment, survey, and certification of load lines. When nonconcurrent, 
a separate application shall be made for each function desired and 
submitted on a timely basis. The mailing address of the home office of 
American Bureau of Shipping is ABS Plaza, 16855 Northchase Drive, 
Houston, TX 77060.
    (b) After the Commandant has approved a recognized classification 
society as a load line assigning and issuing authority for a vessel, as 
described in a written request of the shipowner, the owner shall apply 
in writing, on a timely basis, direct to the approved assigning and 
issuing authority for the assignment, survey, and certification of load 
lines. When nonconcurrent, a separate application shall be made to such 
authority for each function desired, and submitted on a timely basis.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10057, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969; CGD 96-041, 61 FR 50727, Sept. 27, 1996; USCG-
2000-7790, 65 FR 58459, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 42.11-10  Applications for load line assignments and certificates
for vessels other than U.S.-flag vessels.

    (a) The application for the assignment of load lines and certificate 
for a foreign vessel belonging to (or which will belong to) either a 
country ratifying or acceding to the International Convention on Load 
Lines, 1966, or to a country with which the United States of America has 
a reciprocal load line agreement in effect shall be made by the 
Government whose flag the vessel flies, or will fly. The application may 
be made direct to the American Bureau of Shipping, or after receiving 
the Commandant's approval, to a recognized classification society which 
that country has requested as an assigning and issuing authority. When 
the load

[[Page 26]]

line assignment and certificate are authorized pursuant to the 
requirements in this part, the certificate must contain a statement that 
it has been issued at the request of a specific Government, which shall 
be named therein.
    (1) When the load line assignment is performed under the applicable 
regulations in this subchapter, the assigning and issuing authority 
shall transmit to the requesting Government at the earliest practicable 
date, one copy of each certificate issued, the load line survey report 
used for computing the freeboard, and the freeboard computations. For 
information, the assigning and issuing authority shall also notify the 
Commandant of the names of the vessel and the Government involved and 
the date and place where the work was done.
    (b) For a foreign vessel of a country not included in paragraph (a) 
of this section, the owner, master, or agent normally shall apply in 
writing to the American Bureau of Shipping, or to any other recognized 
assigning and issuing authority after it has been approved by the 
Commandant, for the assignment, survey, and certification of load lines, 
or for reissue of a load line certificate, as may be necessary for the 
vessel to clear ports of the United States, the Commonwealth of Puerto 
Rico, the Territory of Guam, or other U.S. possessions. Normally the 
same requirements, conditions, procedures, distribution of applicable 
certificates, etc., shall be applied to such foreign vessels which are 
applied to similar U.S.-flag vessels of 150 gross tons or over.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10058, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.11-15  Application for timber load lines.

    (a) The owner, master, or agent of a vessel having load lines 
assigned under this subchapter may apply to the assigning and issuing 
authority for timber load lines when making his application for a load 
line certificate. After the vessel has been found in compliance with the 
applicable requirements in this subchapter, it may be marked with timber 
load lines, which will also be certified to in the load line 
certificate.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10058, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.11-20  Application for annual survey.

    (a) The owner, master, or agent of a vessel holding a load line 
certificate shall apply to the assigning and issuing authority who 
issued the certificate for the annual survey required by Sec. 42.09-40 
or the International Convention on Load Lines, 1966.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10058, July 12, 1968]



         Subpart 42.13_General Rules for Determining Load Lines



Sec. 42.13-1  Assumptions.

    (a) The regulations in this part are based on the assumption that 
the nature and stowage of the cargo, ballast, etc., are such as will 
secure sufficient stability of the vessel and avoid excessive structural 
stress.
    (b) The regulations in this part are also based on the assumption 
that, where there are other international requirements relating to 
stability or subdivision applicable to vessels, these requirements have 
been met.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10058, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.13-5  Strength of vessel.

    (a) The assigning and issuing authority shall satisfy itself that 
the general structural strength of the vessel is sufficient for the 
draft corresponding to the freeboard assigned, and when requested shall 
furnish pertinent strength information to the Commandant.
    (b) Vessels built and maintained in conformity with the requirements 
of a classification society recognized by the Commandant are considered 
to possess adequate strength for the purpose of the applicable 
requirements in this subchapter unless deemed otherwise by the 
Commandant.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10058, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969]

[[Page 27]]



Sec. 42.13-10  Freeboards assigned vessels.

    (a) Vessels with mechanical means of propulsion, or lighters, 
barges, or other vessels without independent means of propulsion, shall 
be assigned freeboards in accordance with the provisions of Sec. Sec. 
42.13-1 to 42.20-75, inclusive.
    (b) Vessels carrying timber deck cargoes may be assigned, in 
addition to the freeboards required by paragraph (a) of this section, 
timber freeboards in accordance with the provisions of Sec. Sec. 42.25-
1 to 42.25-20, inclusive.
    (c) Vessels designed to carry sail, whether as the sole means of 
propulsion or as a supplementary means, and tugs, shall be assigned 
freeboards in accordance with the provisions of Sec. Sec. 42.13-1 to 
42.20-75, inclusive, and such additional freeboards as determined 
necessary by the Commandant under the procedure of paragraph (f) of this 
section.
    (d) Vessels of wood or of composite construction, or of other 
materials the use of which the Commandant has approved, or vessels whose 
constructional features are such as to render the application of the 
provisions of Sec. Sec. 42.13-1 to 42.25-20 unreasonable or 
impracticable, shall be assigned freeboards as determined necessary by 
the Commandant under the procedure of paragraph (f) of this section.
    (e) The requirements in Sec. Sec. 42.15-1 to 42.15-80, inclusive, 
shall apply to every vessel to which a minimum freeboard is assigned. 
Relaxations from these requirements may be granted to a vessel to which 
a greater than minimum freeboard is assigned provided the safety 
conditions of the vessel are determined to be satisfactory under 
paragraph (f) of this section.
    (f) In each case specified by paragraphs (c) to (e) inclusive of 
this section, the assigning authority shall report to the Commandant the 
specific matters in which the vessel is deficient or requires special 
freeboard consideration due to design, arrangement, construction 
materials, propulsive method, or relaxation of requirements in this 
part. The report shall also furnish background data and recommendations 
of the assigning authority (including freeboard additions), as will 
enable the Commandant to reach a decision.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10058, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.13-15  Definitions of terms.

    (a) Length. The length (L) shall be taken as 96 percent of the total 
length on a waterline at 85 percent of the least molded depth measured 
from the top of the keel, or as the length from the foreside of the stem 
to the axis of the rudder stock on that waterline, if that be greater. 
In vessels designed with a rake of keel the waterline on which this 
length is measured shall be parallel to the designed waterline.
    (b) Perpendiculars. The forward and after perpendiculars shall be 
taken at the forward and after ends of the length (L). The forward 
perpendicular shall coincide with the foreside of the stem on the 
waterline on which the length is measured.
    (c) Amidships. Amidships is at the middle of the length (L).
    (d) Breadth. Unless expressly provided otherwise, the breadth (B) is 
the maximum breadth of the vessel, measured amidships to the molded line 
of the frame in a vessel with a metal shell and to the outer surface of 
the hull in a vessel with a shell of any other material.
    (e) Molded depth. (1) The molded depth is the vertical distance 
measured from the top of the keel to the top of the freeboard deck beam 
at side. In wood and composite vessels the distance is measured from the 
lower edge of the keel rabbet. Where the form at the lower part of the 
midship section is of a hollow character, or where thick garboards are 
fitted, the distance is measured from the point where the line of the 
flat of the bottom continued inwards cuts the side of the keel.
    (2) In vessels having rounded gunwales, the molded depth shall be 
measured to the point of intersection of the molded lines of the deck 
and sides, the lines extending as though the gunwale were of angular 
design.
    (3) Where the freeboard deck is stepped and the raised part of the 
deck extends over the point at which the molded depth is to be 
determined, the molded depth shall be measured to a

[[Page 28]]

line of reference extending from the lower part of the deck along a line 
parallel with the raised part.
    (f) Depth for freeboard (D). (1) The depth for freeboard (D) is the 
molded depth amidships, plus the thickness of the freeboard deck 
stringer plate, where fitted, plus

T(L-S)/L

if the exposed freeboard deck is sheathed;

where:

T is the mean thickness of the exposed sheathing clear of deck openings; 
and
S is the total length of superstructures as defined in paragraph (j)(4) 
of this section.

    (2) The depth for freeboard (D) in a vessel having a rounded gunwale 
with a radius greater than 4 percent of the breadth (B) or having 
topsides of unusual form is the depth for freeboard of a vessel having a 
midship section with vertical topsides and with the same round of beam 
and area of topside section equal to that provided by the actual midship 
section.
    (g) Block coefficient. The block coefficient (Cb) is given by

Cb=[Delta]/L.B.d1

where [Delta] is the volume of the molded displacement of the vessel, 
excluding bossing, in a vessel with a metal shell, and is the volume of 
displacement to the outer surface of the hull in a vessel with a shell 
of any other material, both taken at a molded draft of d1; 
and, d1 is 85 percent of the least molded depth.

    (h) Freeboard. The freeboard assigned is the distance measured 
vertically downward amidships from the upper edge of the deck line to 
the upper edge of the related load line.
    (i) Freeboard deck. (1) The freeboard deck is normally the uppermost 
complete deck exposed to weather and sea, which has permanent means of 
closing all openings in the weather part thereof, and below which all 
openings in the sides of the vessel are fitted with permanent means of 
watertight closing. In a vessel having a discontinuance freeboard deck, 
the lowest line of the exposed deck and the continuation of that line 
parallel to the upper part of the deck is taken as the freeboard deck. 
At the option of the owner and subject to the approval of the assigning 
authority a lower deck may be designated as the freeboard deck, provided 
it is a complete and permanent deck continuous in a fore and aft 
direction at least between the machinery space and peak bulkheads and 
continuous athwartships. When this lower deck is stepped the lowest line 
of the deck and the continuation of that line parallel to the upper part 
of the deck is taken as the freeboard deck.
    (2) When a lower deck is designated as the freeboard deck, that part 
of the hull which extends above the freeboard deck is treated as a 
superstructure so far as concerns the application of the conditions of 
assignment and the calculation of freeboard. It is from this deck that 
the freeboard is calculated.
    (j) Superstructure. (1) A superstructure is a decked structure on 
the freeboard deck, extending from side to side of the vessel or with 
the side plating not being inboard of the shell plating more than 4 
percent to the breadth. (B). A raised quarter deck is regarded as a 
superstructure.
    (2) An enclosed superstructure is a superstructure with:
    (i) Enclosing bulkheads of efficient construction;
    (ii) Access openings, if any in these bulkheads fitted with doors 
complying with the requirements of Sec. 42.15-10; and,
    (iii) All other openings in sides or ends of the superstructure 
fitted with efficient weathertight means of closing.

    Note: A bridge or poop shall not be regarded as enclosed unless 
access is provided for the crew to reach machinery and other working 
spaces inside the superstructures by alternative means, which are 
available at all times when bulkhead openings are closed.

    (3) The height of a superstructure is the least vertical height 
measured at side from the top of the superstructure deck beams to the 
top of the freeboard deck beams.
    (4) The length of a superstructure (S) is the mean length of the 
part of the superstructure which lies within the length (L).
    (k) Flush deck vessel. A flush deck vessel is one which has no 
superstructure on the freeboard deck.

[[Page 29]]

    (l) Weathertight. Weathertight means that in any sea conditions 
water will not penetrate into the vessel.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10058, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9013, June 5, 1969; 43 FR 31928, July 24, 1978]



Sec. 42.13-20  Deck line.

    (a) The deck line is a horizontal line 12 inches in length and 1 
inch in breadth. It shall be marked amidships on each side of the 
vessel, and its upper edge shall normally pass through the point where 
the continuation outwards of the upper surface of the freeboard deck 
intersects the outer surface of the shell (as illustrated in Figure 
42.13-20(a)), provided that the deck line may be placed with reference 
to another fixed point on the vessel on condition that the freeboard is 
correspondingly corrected. The location of the reference point and the 
identification of the freeboard deck shall in all cases be indicated on 
the International Load Line Certificate (1966), and, as applicable, on 
all other load line certificates issued pursuant to this part 42.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.000

                      Figure 42.13-20(a)--Deck Line

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10059, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.13-25  Load line mark.

    (a) The load line mark shall consist of a ring 12 inches in outside 
diameter and 1 inch wide which is intersected by a horizontal line 18 
inches in length and 1 inch in breadth, the upper edge of which passes 
through the center of the ring. The center of the ring shall be placed 
amidships and at a distance equal to the assigned summer freeboard 
measured vertically below the upper edge of the deck line (as 
illustrated in Figure 42.13-25(a)).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.001

 Figure 42.13-25(a)--Load line mark and lines to be used with this mark

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10059, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.13-30  Lines to be used with the load line mark.

    (a) The lines which indicate the load line assigned in accordance 
with the regulations in this part shall be horizontal lines 9 inches in 
length and 1 inch in breadth which extend forward of, unless expressly 
provided otherwise, and at right angles to, a vertical line 1 inch in 
breadth marked at a distance 21 inches forward of the center of the ring 
(as illustrated in Figure 42.13-25(a)).
    (b) The following load lines shall be used:
    (1) The summer load line indicated by the upper edge of the line 
which passes through the center of the ring and also by a line marked S.
    (2) The winter load line indicated by the upper edge of a line 
marked W.
    (3) The winter North Atlantic load line indicated by the upper edge 
of a line marked WNA.
    (4) The tropical load line indicated by the upper edge of a line 
marked T.
    (5) The fresh water load line in summer indicated by the upper edge 
of a line marked F. The fresh water load line in summer is marked abaft 
the vertical line. The difference between the fresh water load line in 
summer and the summer load line is the allowance to be made for loading 
in fresh water at the other load lines.
    (6) The tropical fresh water load line indicated by the upper edge 
of a line marked TF, and marked abaft the vertical line.
    (c) If timber freeboards are assigned, the timber load lines shall 
be marked in addition to ordinary load lines.

[[Page 30]]

These lines shall be horizontal lines 9 inches in length and 1 inch in 
breadth which extend abaft unless expressly provided otherwise, and are 
at right angles to, a vertical line 1 inch in breadth marked at a 
distance 21 inches abaft the center of the ring (as illustrated in 
Figure 42.13-30(c)).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.002

Figure 42.13-30(c)--Timber load line mark and lines to be used with this 
                                  mark
    (d) The following timber load lines shall be used:
    (1) The summer timber load line indicated by the upper edge of a 
line marked LS.
    (2) The winter timber load line indicated by the upper edge of a 
line marked LW.
    (3) The winter North Atlantic timber load line indicated by the 
upper edge of a line marked LWNA.
    (4) The tropical timber load line indicated by the upper edge of a 
line marked LT.
    (5) The fresh water timber load line in summer indicated by the 
upper edge of a line marked LF and marked forward of the vertical line.

    Note: The difference between the fresh water timber load line in 
summer and the summer timber load line is the allowance to be made for 
loading in fresh water at the other timber load lines.

    (6) The tropical fresh water timber load line indicated by the upper 
edge of a line marked LTF and marked forward of the vertical line.
    (e) Where the characteristics of a vessel, or the nature of the 
vessel's service or navigational limits make any of the seasonal lines 
inapplicable, these lines may be omitted.
    (f) Where a vessel is assigned a greater than minimum freeboard so 
that the load line is marked at a position corresponding to, or lower 
than, the lowest seasonal load line assigned at minimum freeboard in 
accordance with the present Convention, only the fresh water load line 
need be marked.
    (g) On sailing vessels only the fresh water load line and the winter 
North Atlantic load line need be marked (as illustrated in Figure 42.13-
30(g)).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.003

  Figure 42.13-30(g)--Load line mark on sailing vessel and lines to be 
                           used with this mark
    (h) Where a winter North Atlantic load line is identical with the 
winter load line corresponding to the same vertical line, this load line 
shall be marked W.
    (i) Additional load lines required by other international 
conventions in force may be marked at right angles to and abaft the 
vertical line specified in paragraph (a) of this section.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10059, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.13-35  Mark of assigning authority.

    (a) The mark of the assigning authority by whom the load lines are 
assigned may be indicated alongside the load line ring above the 
horizontal line which passes through the center of the ring, or above 
and below it. This mark shall consist of not more than four initials to 
identify the assigning authority's name, each measuring approximately 
4\1/2\ inches in height and 3 inches in width.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10060, July 12, 1968]

[[Page 31]]



Sec. 42.13-40  Details of marking.

    (a) The ring, lines and letters shall be painted in white or yellow 
on a dark ground or in black on a light ground. They shall also be 
permanently marked on the sides of the vessels to the satisfaction of 
the assigning authority. The marks shall be plainly visible and, if 
necessary, special arrangements shall be made for this purpose.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10060, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.13-45  Verification of marks.

    (a) The International Load Line Certificate (1966) shall not be 
delivered to the vessel until Sec. 42.07-5 has been fully complied with 
under the authority and provisions of subparts 42.07 and 42.09 of this 
part.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10060, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



           Subpart 42.15_Conditions of Assignment of Freeboard



Sec. 42.15-1  Information to be supplied to the master.

    (a) The master of every new vessel shall be supplied with sufficient 
information in a form approved by the assigning and issuing authority, 
to enable him to arrange for the loading and ballasting of his vessel in 
such a way as to avoid the creation of any unacceptable stresses in the 
vessel's structure: Provided, That this requirement need not apply to 
any particular length, design or class of vessel where the Commandant 
considers it to be unnecessary and so notifies the assigning and issuing 
authority.
    (b) The master of every new vessel, which is not already provided 
with stability information under an international convention for the 
safety of life at sea in force, shall be supplied with sufficient 
information in a form approved by the Commandant, to give him guidance 
as to the stability of the vessel under varying conditions of service, 
and a copy shall be furnished to the Commandant.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10060, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-5  Superstructure end bulkheads.

    (a) Bulkheads at exposed ends of enclosed superstructures shall be 
of efficient construction and shall be to the satisfaction of the 
assigning authority.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10060, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-10  Doors.

    (a) All access openings in bulkheads at ends of enclosed 
superstructures shall be fitted with doors of steel or other equivalent 
material, permanently and strongly attached to the bulkhead, and framed, 
stiffened and fitted so that the whole structure is of equivalent 
strength to the unpierced bulkhead and weathertight when closed. The 
means for securing these doors weathertight shall consist of gaskets and 
clamping devices or other equivalent means and shall be permanently 
attached to the bulkhead or to the doors themselves, and the doors shall 
be so arranged that they can be operated from both sides of the 
bulkhead.
    (b) Except as otherwise provided in these regulations, the height of 
the sills of access openings in bulkheads at ends of enclosed 
superstructures shall be at least 15 inches above the deck.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10060, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.15-15  Positions of hatchways, doorways and ventilators.

    (a) For the purpose of this part two positions of hatchways, 
doorways and ventilators are defined as follows:
    (1) Position 1: Upon exposed freeboard and raised quarter decks, and 
upon exposed superstructure decks situated forward of a point located a 
quarter of the vessel's length from the forward perpendicular.
    (2) Position 2: Upon exposed superstructure decks situated abaft a 
quarter of the vessel's length from the forward perpendicular.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10060, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-20  Cargo and other hatchways.

    (a) The construction and the means for securing the weathertightness 
of

[[Page 32]]

cargo and other hatchways in positions 1 and 2 shall be at least 
equivalent to the requirements of Sec. Sec. 42.15-25 and 42.15-30.
    (b) Coamings and hatchway covers to exposed hatchways on decks above 
the superstructure deck shall comply with the requirements of the 
assigning authority.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10060, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-25  Hatchways closed by portable covers and secured weathertight
by tarpaulins and battening devices.

    (a) Hatchway coamings. (1) The coamings of hatchways closed by 
portable covers secured weathertight by tarpaulins and battening devices 
shall be of substantial construction, and their height above the deck 
shall be at least as follows:
    (i) 23\1/2\ inches if in position 1.
    (ii) 17\1/2\ inches if in position 2.
    (b) Hatchway covers. (1) The width of each bearing surface for 
hatchway covers shall be at least 2\1/2\ inches.
    (2) Where covers are made of wood, the finished thickness shall be 
at least 2\3/8\ inches in association with a span of not more than 4.9 
feet.
    (3) Where covers are made of mild steel, the strength shall be 
calculated with assumed loads not less than 358 pounds per square foot 
on hatchways in position 1, and not less than 266 pounds per square foot 
on hatchways in position 2, and the product of the maximum stress thus 
calculated and the factor 4.25 shall not exceed the minimum ultimate 
strength of the material. They shall be so designed as to limit the 
deflection to not more than 0.0028 times the span under these loads.
    (4) The assumed loads on hatchways in position 1 may be reduced to 
205 pounds per square foot for vessels of 79 feet in length and shall be 
not less than 358 pounds per square foot for vessels of 328 feet in 
length. The corresponding loads on hatchways in position 2 may be 
reduced to 154 pounds per square foot and 266 pounds per square foot 
respectively. In all cases values at intermediate lengths shall be 
obtained by linear interpolation.
    (c) Portable beams. (1) Where portable beams for supporting hatchway 
covers are made of mild steel the strength shall be calculated with 
assumed loads not less than 358 pounds per square foot on hatchways in 
position 1 and not less than 266 pounds per square foot on hatchways in 
position 2 and the product of the maximum stress thus calculated and the 
factor 5 shall not exceed the minimum ultimate strength of the material. 
They shall be so designed as to limit the deflection to not more than 
0.0022 times the span under these loads. For vessels of not more than 
328 feet in length the requirements of paragraph (b)(4) of this section 
are applicable.
    (d) Pontoon covers. (1) Where pontoon covers used in place of 
portable beams and covers are made of mild steel the strength shall be 
calculated with the assumed loads given in paragraph (b)(3) of this 
section, and the product of the maximum stress thus calculated and the 
factor 5 shall not exceed the minimum ultimate strength of the material. 
They shall be so designed as to limit the deflection to not more than 
0.0022 times the span. Mild steel plating forming the tops of covers 
shall be not less in thickness than 1 percent of the spacing of 
stiffeners or 0.24 inches if that be greater. For vessels of not more 
than 328 feet in length the requirements of paragraph (b)(4) of this 
section are applicable.
    (2) The strength and stiffness of covers made of materials other 
than mild steel shall be equivalent to those of mild steel to the 
satisfaction of the assigning authority.
    (e) Carriers or sockets. (1) Carriers or sockets for portable beams 
shall be of substantial construction, and shall provide means for the 
efficient fitting and securing of the beams. Where rolling types of 
beams are use, the arrangements shall ensure that the beams remain 
properly in position when the hatchway is closed.
    (f) Cleats. (1) Cleats shall be set to fit the taper of the wedges. 
They shall be at least 2\1/2\ inches wide and spaced not more than 23\1/
2\ inches center to center; the cleats along each side or end shall be 
not more than 6 inches from the hatch corners.

[[Page 33]]

    (g) Battens and wedges. (1) Battens and wedges shall be efficient 
and in good condition. Wedges shall be of tough wood or other equivalent 
material. They shall have a taper of not more than 1 in 6 and shall be 
not less than \1/2\-inch thick at the toes.
    (h) Tarpaulins. (1) At least two layers of tarpaulin in good 
condition shall be provided for each hatchway in positions 1 and 2.
    (2) The tarpaulins shall be waterproof and of ample strength. They 
shall be of a material of at least a standard weight and quality as 
approved by the assigning and issuing authority.
    (i) Security of hatchway covers. (1) For all hatchways in position 1 
or 2, steel bars or other equivalent means shall be provided in order 
efficiently and independently to secure each section of hatchway covers 
after the tarpaulins are battened down. Hatchway covers of more than 4.9 
feet in length shall be secured by at least two such securing 
appliances.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10060, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-30  Hatchways closed by weathertight covers of steel or other
equivalent material fitted with gaskets and clamping devices.

    (a) Hatchway coamings. At positions 1 and 2 the height above the 
deck of hatchway coamings fitted with weathertight hatch covers of steel 
or other equivalent material fitted with gaskets and clamping devices 
shall be as specified in Sec. 42.15-25(a)(1). The height of these 
coamings may be reduced, or the coamings omitted entirely, on condition 
that the assigning authority is satisfied that the safety of the vessel 
is not thereby impaired in any sea conditions. Where coamings are 
provided they shall be of substantial construction.
    (b) Weathertight covers. (1) Where weathertight covers are of mild 
steel the strength shall be calculated with assumed loads not less than 
358 pounds per square foot on hatchways in position 1, and not less than 
255 pounds per square foot on hatchways in position 2, and the product 
of the maximum stress thus calculated and the factor of 4.25 shall not 
exceed the minimum ultimate strength of the material. They shall be so 
designed as to limit the deflection to not more than 0.0028 times the 
span under these loads. Mild steel plating forming the tops of covers 
shall be not less in thickness than one percent of the spacing of 
stiffeners or 0.24 inches if that be greater. The provisions of Sec. 
42.15-25(b)(4) are applicable for vessels of not more than 328 feet in 
length.
    (2) The strength and stiffness of covers made of materials other 
than mild steel shall be equivalent to those of mild steel to the 
satisfaction of the assigning authority.
    (c) Means for securing weathertightness. (1) The means for securing 
and maintaining weathertightness shall be to the satisfaction of the 
assigning authority.
    (2) The arrangements shall ensure that the tightness can be 
maintained in any sea conditions. For this purpose tests for tightness 
shall be required at the initial surveys, and may be required at 
periodical surveys and at annual surveys or at more frequent intervals.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10061, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-35  Machinery space openings.

    (a) Machinery space openings in position 1 or 2 shall be properly 
framed and efficiently enclosed by steel casings of ample strength, and 
where the casings are not protected by other structures their strength 
shall be specifically considered. Access openings in such casings shall 
be fitted with doors complying with the requirements of Sec. 42.15-
10(a), the sills of which shall be at least 23\1/2\ inches above the 
deck if in position 1, and at least 15 inches above the deck if in 
position 2. Other openings in such casings shall be fitted with 
equivalent covers, permanently attached in their proper positions.
    (b) Coamings of any fiddley, funnel, or machinery space ventilators 
in an exposed position on the freeboard or superstructure deck shall be 
as high above the deck as is reasonable and practicable. Fiddley 
openings shall be fitted with strong covers of steel or other equivalent 
material permanently

[[Page 34]]

attached in their proper positions and capable of being secured 
weathertight.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10061, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.15-40  Miscellaneous openings in freeboard and superstructure decks.

    (a) Manholes and flush scuttles in position 1 or 2 or within 
superstructures other than enclosed superstructures shall be closed by 
substantial covers capable of being made watertight. Unless secured by 
closely spaced bolts, the covers shall be permanently attached.
    (b) Openings in freeboard decks other than hatchways, machinery 
space openings, manholes, and flush scuttles shall be protected by an 
enclosed superstructure, or by a deckhouse or companionway of equivalent 
strength and weathertightness. Any such opening in an exposed 
superstructure deck or in the top of a deckhouse on the freeboard deck 
which gives access to a space below the freeboard deck or a space within 
an enclosed superstructure shall be protected by an efficient deckhouse 
or companionway. Doorways in such deckhouses or companionways shall be 
fitted with doors complying with the requirements of Sec. 42.15-10(a).
    (c) In position 1 the height above the deck of sills to the doorways 
in companionways shall be at least 23\1/2\ inches. In position 2 they 
shall be at least 15 inches.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10061, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-45  Ventilators.

    (a) Ventilators in position 1 or 2 to spaces below the freeboard 
decks or decks of enclosed superstructures shall have coamings of steel 
or other equivalent material, substantially constructed and efficiently 
connected to the deck. Where the coaming of any ventilator exceeds 35\1/
2\ inches in height it shall be specially supported.
    (b) Ventilators passing through superstructures other than enclosed 
superstructures shall have substantially constructed coamings of steel 
or other equivalent material at the freeboard deck.
    (c) Ventilators in position 1 the coamings of which extend to more 
than 14.8 feet above the deck, and in position 2 the coamings of which 
extend to more than 7.5 feet above the deck, need not be fitted with 
closing arrangements unless specifically required by the assigning 
authority.
    (d) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section ventilator 
openings shall be provided with efficient weathertight closing 
appliances. In vessels of not more than 328 feet in length the closing 
appliances shall be permanently attached; where not so provided in other 
vessels, they shall be conveniently stowed near the ventilators to which 
they are to be fitted. Ventilators in position 1 shall have coamings of 
a height of at least 35\1/2\ inches above the deck; in position 2 the 
coamings shall be of a height at least 30 inches above the deck.
    (e) In exposed positions, the height of coamings may be required to 
be increased to the satisfaction of the assigning authority.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10061, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-50  Air pipes.

    (a) Where air pipes to ballast and other tanks extend above the 
freeboard or superstructure decks, the exposed parts of the pipes shall 
be of substantial construction; the height from the deck to the point 
where water may have access below shall be at least 30 inches on the 
freeboard deck and 17\1/2\ inches on the superstructure deck. Where 
these heights may interfere with the working of the vessel, a lower 
height may be approved, provided the assigning authority is satisfied 
that the closing arrangements and other circumstances justify a lower 
height. Satisfactory means permanently attached, shall be provided for 
closing the openings of the air pipes.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10062, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-55  Cargo ports and other similar openings.

    (a) Cargo ports and other similar openings in the sides of vessels 
below the freeboard deck shall be fitted with

[[Page 35]]

doors so designed as to ensure watertightness and structural integrity 
commensurate with the surrounding shell plating, to the satisfaction of 
the assigning authority. The arrangements shall be subject to tightness 
tests at the initial survey and at such subsequent surveys or more 
frequent intervals as deemed necessary. The number of such openings 
shall be the minimum compatible with the design and proper working of 
the vessel.
    (b) Unless permitted by the Commandant the lower edge of such 
openings shall not be below a line drawn parallel to the freeboard deck 
at side, which has at its lowest point the upper edge of the uppermost 
load line.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10062, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-60  Scuppers, inlets, and discharges.

    (a) Discharges led through the shell either from spaces below the 
freeboard deck or from within superstructures and deckhouses on the 
freeboard deck fitted with doors complying with the requirements of 
Sec. 42.15-10 shall be fitted with efficient and accessible means for 
preventing water from passing inboard. Normally, each separate discharge 
shall have one automatic nonreturn valve with a positive means of 
closing it from a position above the freeboard deck. Where, however, the 
vertical distance from the summer load waterline to the inboard end of 
the discharge pipe exceeds 0.01L, the discharge may have two automatic 
nonreturn valves without positive means of closing: Provided, That the 
inboard valve is always accessible for examination under service 
conditions; where that vertical distance exceeds 0.02L a single 
automatic nonreturn valve without positive means of closing may be 
accepted subject to the approval of the assigning authority. The means 
for operating the positive action valve shall be readily accessible and 
provided with an indicator showing whether the valve is open or closed.
    (b) In manned machinery spaces main and auxiliary sea inlets and 
discharges in connection with the operation of machinery may be 
controlled locally. The controls shall be readily accessible and shall 
be provided with indicators showing whether the valves are open or 
closed.
    (c) Scuppers and discharge pipes originating at any level and 
penetrating the shell either more than 17\1/2\ inches below the 
freeboard deck or less than 23\1/2\ inches above the summer load 
waterline shall be provided with a nonreturn valve at the shell. This 
valve, unless required by paragraph (a) of this section, may be omitted 
if the piping is of thickness as specified in Part 56 in Subchapter F 
(Marine Engineering) of this chapter.
    (d) Scuppers leading from superstructures or deckhouses not fitted 
with doors complying with the requirements of Sec. 42.15-10 shall be 
led overboard.
    (e) All valves and shell fittings required by this section shall be 
of steel, bronze, or other approved ductile material. Valves of ordinary 
cast iron or similar material are not acceptable. All pipes to which 
this section refers shall be of steel or other equivalent material to 
the satisfaction of the assigning authority.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10062, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-65  Side scuttles.

    (a) Side scuttles to spaces below the freeboard deck or to spaces 
within enclosed superstructures shall be fitted with efficient hinged 
inside deadlights arranged so that they can be effectively closed and 
secured watertight.
    (b) No side scuttle shall be fitted in a position so that its sill 
is below a line drawn parallel to the freeboard deck at side and having 
its lowest point 2.5 percent of the breadth (B) above the load 
waterline, or 19\1/2\ inches, which ever is the greater distance.
    (c) The side scuttles, together with their glasses, if fitted, and 
deadlights, shall be of substantial and approved construction.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10062, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.15-70  Freeing ports.

    (a) Where bulwarks on the weather portions of freeboard or 
superstructure decks form wells, ample provision shall be made for 
rapidly freeing the deck of

[[Page 36]]

water and for draining them. Except as provided in paragraphs (b) and 
(c) of this section, the minimum freeing port area (A) on each side of 
the vessel for each well on the freeboard deck shall be that given by 
the following formulae in cases where the sheer in way of the well is 
standard or greater than standard. The minimum area for each well on 
superstructure decks shall be one-half of the area given by the 
formulae.
    (1) Where the length of bulwark (l) in the well is 66 feet or less 
A=7.6+0.115l (square feet)
    (2) Where l exceeds 66 feet A=0.23l (square feet)
    (3) l need in no case be taken as greater than 0.7L.
    (4) If the bulwark is more than 3.9 feet in average height the 
required area shall be increased by 0.04 square feet per foot of length 
of well for each foot difference in height. If the bulwark is less than 
3 feet in average height, the required area may be decreased by 0.04 
square feet per foot of length for each foot difference in height.
    (b) In vessels with no sheer the area calculated according to 
paragraph (a) of this section shall be increased by 50 percent. Where 
the sheer is less than the standard the percentage shall be obtained by 
linear interpolation.
    (c) Where a vessel is fitted with a trunk which does not comply with 
the requirements of Sec. 42.20-55(a)(5) or where continuous or 
substantially continuous hatchway side coamings are fitted between 
detached superstructures the minimum area of the freeing port openings 
shall be calculated from Table 42.15-70(c):

                            Table 42.15-70(c)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              Area of freeing ports in
 Breadth of hatchway or trunk in relation    relation to the total area
         to the breadth of vessel                  of the bulwarks
------------------------------------------------------------------------
40 percent or less........................  20 percent.
75 percent or more........................  10 percent.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Note: The area of freeing ports at intermediate breadths shall be 
obtained by linear interpolation.

    (d) In vessels having superstructures which are open at either or 
both ends, adequate provision for freeing the space within such 
superstructures shall be provided to the satisfaction of the assigning 
authority.
    (e) The lower edges of the freeing ports shall be as near the deck 
as practicable. Two-thirds of the freeing port area required shall be 
provided in the half of the well nearest the lowest point of the sheer 
curve.
    (f) All such openings in the bulwarks shall be protected by rails or 
bars spaced approximately 9 inches apart. If shutters are fitted to 
freeing ports, ample clearance shall be provided to prevent jamming. 
Hinges shall have pins or bearings of noncorrodible material. If 
shutters are fitted with securing appliances, these appliances shall be 
of approved construction.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10062, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.15-75  Protection of the crew.

    (a) The strength of the deckhouses used for the accommodation of the 
crew shall be to the satisfaction of the assigning authority.
    (b) Efficient guard rails or bulwarks must be fitted on all exposed 
parts of the freeboard and superstructure decks as follows:
    (1) The height of the bulwarks or guard rails must be at least 39\1/
2\ inches from the deck, provided that where this height would interfere 
with the normal operation of the vessel, a lesser height may be approved 
if the Commandant and the assigning authority are satisfied that 
adequate protection is provided.
    (2) On each vessel that is initially surveyed for load line 
assignment after January 1, 1976, and that is exclusively engaged in 
towing operations, the minimum bulwark or rail height on the freeboard 
deck may be reduced to 30 inches provided the assigning authority is 
satisfied that adequate grabrails are provided around the periphery of 
the deckhouse.
    (3) Portable rails may be used when operating conditions warrant 
their use.
    (c) The opening below the lowest course of the guard rails shall not 
exceed 9 inches. The other courses shall be not more than 15 inches 
apart. In the case of vessels with rounded gunwales the guard rail 
supports shall be placed on the flat of the deck.
    (d) Satisfactory means (in the form of guard rails, life lines, 
gangways or

[[Page 37]]

underdeck passages, etc.) shall be provided for the protection of the 
crew in getting to and from their quarters, the machinery space and all 
other parts used in the necessary work of the vessel.
    (e) Deck cargo carried on any vessel shall be so stowed that any 
opening which is in way of the cargo and which gives access to and from 
the crew's quarters, the machinery space and all other parts used in the 
necessary work of the vessel, can be properly closed and secured against 
the admission of water. Effective protection for the crew in the form of 
guard rails or life lines shall be provided above the deck cargo if 
there is no convenient passage on or below the deck of the vessel.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10062, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969; CGD 74-164, 41 FR 1470, Jan. 8, 1976]



Sec. 42.15-80  Special conditions of assignment for Type ``A'' vessels.

    (a) Machinery casings. Machinery casings on Type ``A'' vessels as 
defined in Sec. 42.09-5(b) must be protected by an enclosed poop or 
bridge of at least standard height, or by a deckhouse of equal height 
and equivalent strength, except that machinery casings may be exposed if 
there are no openings giving direct access from the freeboard deck to 
the machinery space. A door complying with the requirements of Sec. 
42.15-10 is permitted in the machinery casing if it leads to a space or 
passageway which is as strongly constructed as the casing and is 
separated from the stairway to the engine room by a second weathertight 
door of steel or equivalent material.
    (b) Gangway and access. (1) An efficiently constructed fore and aft 
permanent gangway of sufficient strength shall be fitted on Type ``A'' 
vessels at the level of the superstructure deck between the poop and the 
midship bridge or deckhouse where fitted, or equivalent means of access 
shall be provided to carry out the purpose of the gangway, such as 
passages below deck. Elsewhere, and on Type ``A'' vessels without a 
midship bridge, arrangements to the satisfaction of the assigning 
authority shall be provided to safeguard the crew in reaching all parts 
used in the necessary work of the ship.
    (2) Safe and satisfactory access from the gangway level shall be 
available between separates crew accommodations and also between crew 
accommodations and the machinery space.
    (c) Hatchways. Exposed hatchways on the freeboard and forecastle 
decks or on the tops of expansion trunks on Type ``A'' vessels shall be 
provided with efficient watertight covers of steel or other equivalent 
material.
    (d) Freeing arrangements. (1) Type ``A'' vessels with bulwarks shall 
have open rails fitted for at least half the length of the exposed parts 
of the weather deck or other effective freeing arrangements. The upper 
edge of the sheer strake shall be kept as low as practicable.
    (2) Where superstructures are connected by trunks, open rails shall 
be fitted for the whole length of the exposed parts of the freeboard 
deck.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10063, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9014, June 5, 1969; CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38647, Aug. 25, 1983]



                        Subpart 42.20_Freeboards



Sec. 42.20-3  Freeboard assignment: Type ``A'' vessels.

    (a) A Type ``A'' vessel is assigned a freeboard not less than that 
based on Table 42.20-15(a)(1) provided that the vessel meets the 
flooding standard in Sec. 42.20-6.
    (b) A vessel that meets the requirements of Subpart D, F, or G of 
Part 172 of this chapter is considered by the Coast Guard as meeting the 
flooding standard referenced in paragraph (a) of this section.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38647, Aug. 25, 1983 as amended by CGD 79-023, 49 FR 
26593, June 28, 1984]



Sec. 42.20-5  Freeboard assignment: Type ``B'' vessels.

    (a) Each Type ``B'' vessel is assigned a freeboard from Table 42.20-
15(b)(1) that is increased or decreased by the provisions of this 
section.
    (b) Each Type ``B'' vessel that has a hatchway in position 1, must 
have the freeboard assigned in accordance with paragraph (a) of this 
section increased by the amount given in Table 42.20-5(b) unless the 
hatch cover complies with:
    (1) Section 42.15-25(d); or

[[Page 38]]

    (2) Section 42.15-30.

  Table 42.20-5(b)--Freeboard Increase Over Tabular Freeboard for Type
``B'' Vessels With Hatch Covers Not Complying With Sec. 42.15-25(d) or
                            Sec. 42.15-30.
                                [Metric]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Length of ship (meters)        Freeboard increase \1\ (millimeters)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
              \2\108                                 50
               109                                   52
               110                                   55
               111                                   57
               112                                   59
               113                                   62
               114                                   64
               115                                   68
               116                                   70
               117                                   73
               118                                   76
               119                                   80
               120                                   84
               121                                   87
               122                                   91
               123                                   95
               124                                   99
               125                                  103
               126                                  108
               127                                  112
               128                                  116
               129                                  121
               130                                  126
               131                                  131
               132                                  136
               133                                  142
               134                                  147
               135                                  153
               136                                  159
               137                                  164
               138                                  170
               139                                  175
               140                                  181
               141                                  186
               142                                  191
               143                                  196
               144                                  201
               145                                  206
               146                                  210
               147                                  215
               148                                  219
               149                                  224
               150                                  228
               151                                  232
               152                                  236
               153                                  240
               154                                  244
               155                                  247
               156                                  251
               157                                  254
               158                                  258
               159                                  261
               160                                  264
               161                                  267
               162                                  270
               163                                  273
               164                                  275
               165                                  278
               166                                  280
               167                                  283
               168                                  285
               169                                  287
               170                                  290
               171                                  292
               172                                  294
               173                                  297
               174                                  299
               175                                  301
               176                                  304
               177                                  306
               178                                  308
               179                                  311
               180                                  313
               181                                  315
               182                                  318
               183                                  320
               184                                  322
               185                                  325
               186                                  327
               187                                  329
               188                                  332
               189                                  334
               190                                  336
               191                                  339
               192                                  341
               193                                  343
               194                                  346
               195                                  348
               196                                  350
               197                                  353
               198                                  355
               199                                  357
              \3\200                                358
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Freeboards at intermediate lengths of ship shall be obtained by
  linear interpolation.
\2\ 108 and below.
\3\ Ships above 200 meters in length are subject to individual
  determination by the Commandant.


                                [English]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
       Length of ship (feet)           Freeboard increase \1\ (inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
              \2\350                                 2.0
                360                                  2.3
                370                                  2.6
                380                                  2.9
                390                                  3.3
                400                                  3.7
                410                                  4.2
                420                                  4.7
                430                                  5.2
                440                                  5.8
                450                                  6.4
                460                                  7.0
                470                                  7.6
                480                                  8.2
                490                                  8.7
                500                                  9.2
                510                                  9.6
                520                                 10.0
                530                                 10.4
                540                                 10.7
                550                                 11.0
                560                                 11.4
                570                                 11.8
                580                                 12.1
                590                                 12.5
                600                                 12.8
                610                                 13.1

[[Page 39]]

 
                620                                 13.4
                630                                 13.6
                640                                 13.9
                650                                 14.1
              \3\660                                14.3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Freeboards at intermediate lengths of ship be obtained by linear
  interpolation.
\2\ 350 and below.
\3\ Ships above 660 feet in length are subject to individual
  determination by the Commandant.

    (c) Any Type ``B'' vessel that is greater than 100 meters (328 feet) 
in length and any hopper dredge meeting the requirements in Subpart C of 
Part 44 of this chapter may have a reduced freeboard from that assigned 
under Table 42.20-15(b)(1) in accordance with paragraph (d) or paragraph 
(e) of this section if--
    (1) The measures provided for the protection of the crew are 
adequate;
    (2) The freeing arrangements are adequate; and
    (3) The hatchway covers in positions 1 and 2 comply with the 
provisions of Sec. 42.15-30 and have adequate strength, special care 
being given to their sealing and securing arrangements.
    (d) The freeboards for a Type ``B'' vessel which comply with 
paragraph (c) of this section may be reduced up to 60 percent of the 
total difference between the freeboards in Table 42.20-15(b)(1) and 
Table 42.20-15(a)(1) provided that the vessel meets the flooding 
standard in Sec. 42.20-7.
    (e) The freeboards for a Type ``B'' vessel which complies with 
paragraph (c) of this section may be reduced up to the total difference 
between the freeboard tables referenced in paragraph (d) of this section 
provided that the vessel meets the flooding standard in Sec. 42.20-8 
and the provisions of Sec. 42.15-80 (a), (b) and (d) as if it were a 
Type ``A'' vessel.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38647, Aug. 25, 1983, as amended by CGD 76-080, 54 FR 
36976, Sept. 6, 1989]



Sec. 42.20-6  Flooding standard: Type ``A'' vessels.

    (a) Design calculations must be submitted that demonstrate that the 
vessel will remain afloat in the conditions of equilibrium specified in 
Sec. 42.20-12 assuming the damage specified in Sec. 42.20-11 as 
applied to the following flooding standards:
    (1) If the vessel is over 150 meters (492 feet) in length it must be 
able to withstand the flooding of any one compartment, except the 
machinery space.
    (2) If the vessel is over 225 meters (738 feet) in length, it must 
be able to withstand the flooding of any one compartment, treating the 
machinery space as a floodable compartment.
    (b) When doing the calculations required in paragraph (a) of this 
section, the following permeabilities must be assumed:
    (1) 0.95 in all locations except the machinery space.
    (2) 0.85 in the machinery space.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38648, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.20-7  Flooding standard: Type ``B'' vessel, 60 percent reduction.

    (a) Design calculations must be submitted that demonstrate that the 
vessel will remain afloat in the conditions of equilibrium specified in 
Sec. 42.20-12 assuming the damage specified in Sec. 42.20-11 as 
applied to the following flooding standards:
    (1) If the vessel is 225 meters (738 feet) or less in length, it 
must be able to withstand the flooding of any one compartment, except 
the machinery space.
    (2) If the vessel is over 225 meters (738 feet) in length, it must 
be able to withstand the flooding of any one compartment, treating the 
machinery space as a floodable compartment.
    (b) When doing the calculations required in paragraph (a) of this 
section, the following permeabilities must be assumed:
    (1) 0.95 in all locations except the machinery space.
    (2) 0.85 in the machinery space.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38648, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.20-8  Flooding standard: Type ``B'' vessel, 100 percent reduction.

    (a) Design calculations must be submitted that demonstrate that the 
vessel will remain afloat in the conditions of equilibrium specified in 
Sec. 42.20-12 assuming the damage specified in Sec. 42.20-11 as 
applied to the following flooding standards:
    (1) If the vessel is 225 meters (738 feet) or less in length, it 
must be able to

[[Page 40]]

withstand the flooding of any two adjacent fore and after compartments 
excluding the machinery space;
    (2) If the vessel is over 225 meters (738 feet) in length, the 
flooding standard of paragraph (a)(1) of this section must be applied, 
treating the machinery space, taken alone, as a floodable compartment.
    (b) When doing the calculations required in paragraph (a) of this 
section, the following permeabilities must be assumed:
    (1) 0.95 in all locations except the machinery space.
    (2) 0.85 in the machinery space.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38648, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.20-9  Initial conditions of loading.

    When doing the calculations required in Sec. Sec. 42.20-6(a), 
42.20-7(a) and 42.20-8(a), the initial condition of loading before 
flooding must be assumed to be as specified in this section:
    (a) The vessel is assumed to be loaded to its summer load waterline 
with no trim.
    (b) When calculating the vertical center of gravity, the following 
assumptions apply:
    (1) The cargo is assumed to be homogeneous.
    (2) Except as specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, all 
cargo compartments are assumed to be fully loaded. This includes 
compartments intended to be only partially filled. In the case of liquid 
cargoes, fully loaded means 98 percent full.
    (3) If the vessel is intended to operate at its summer load 
waterline with empty compartments, these empty compartments are assumed 
to be empty rather than fully loaded if the resulting height of the 
vertical center of gravity is not less than the height determined in 
accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (4) Fifty percent of the total capacity of all tanks and spaces 
fitted to contain consumable liquids or stores must be assumed to be 
distributed to accomplish the following:
    (i) Each tank and space fitted to contain consumable liquids or 
stores must be assumed either completely empty or completely filled.
    (ii) The consumables must be distributed so as to produce the 
greatest possible height above the keel for the center of gravity.
    (5) Weights are calculated using the following values for specific 
gravities:

Salt water--1.025
Fresh water--1.000
Oil fuel--0.950
Diesel oil--0.900
Lube oil--0.900

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38648, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.20-10  Free surface.

    When doing the calculations required in Sec. Sec. 42.20-6(a), 
42.20-7(a) and 42.20-8(a), the effect of free surface of the following 
liquids must be included:
    (a) For each type of consumable liquid, the maximum free surface of 
at least one transverse pair of tanks or a single centerline tank must 
be included. The tank or combination of tanks must be that resulting in 
the greatest free surface effect.
    (b) For cargo liquids, unless the compartment is assumed to be empty 
as required by Sec. 42.20-9(b)(3), the free surface of those 
compartments containing liquids is calculated at an angle of heel of not 
more than 5 degrees.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38649, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.20-11  Extent of damage.

    When doing the calculations required by Sec. Sec. 42.20-6(a), 
42.20-7(a) and 42.20-8(a), the following must be assumed:
    (a) The vertical extent of damage in all cases must be assumed to be 
from the baseline upward without limit.
    (b) The transverse extent of damage is assumed to be equal to B/5 or 
11.5 meters (37.7 feet), whichever is less. The transverse extent is 
measured inboard from the side of the ship perpendicularly to the center 
line at the level of the summer load waterline.
    (c) If damage of a lesser extent than that specified in paragraph 
(a) or (b) of this section results in a more severe condition, the 
lesser extent must be assumed.
    (d) The following assumptions apply to the transverse damage 
specified in paragraph (b) of this section for a stepped or recessed 
bulkhead:
    (1) A transverse watertight bulkhead that has a step or recess 
located within the transverse extent of assumed damage may be considered 
intact if the

[[Page 41]]

step or recess is not more than 3.05 meters (10 feet) in length.
    (2) If a transverse watertight bulkhead has a step or recess of more 
than 3.05 meters (10 feet) in length, within the transverse extent of 
assumed damage, the two compartments adjacent to this bulkhead must be 
considered as flooded.
    (3) If within the transverse extent of damage, a transverse bulkhead 
has a step or recess more than 3.05 meters (10 feet) in length that 
coincides with the double bottom tank top or the inner boundary of a 
wing tank, respectively, all adjacent compartments within the transverse 
extent of assumed damage must be considered to be flooded 
simultaneously.
    (e) If a wing tank has openings into adjacent compartments, the wing 
tank and adjacent compartments must be considered as one compartment. 
This provision applies even where these openings are fitted with closing 
appliances except:
    (1) Valves fitted in bulkheads between tanks which are controlled 
from above the bulkhead deck.
    (2) Secured manhole covers fitted with closely spaced bolts.
    (f) Only transverse watertight bulkheads that are spaced apart at 
least \1/3\(L)\2/3\ or 14.5 meters (0.495(L)\2/3\ or 47.6 feet), 
whichever is less, may be considered effective. If transverse bulkheads 
are closer together, then one or more of these bulkheads must be assumed 
to be non-existent in order to achieve the minimum spacing between 
bulkheads.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38649, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.20-12  Conditions of equilibrium.

    The following conditions of equilibrium are regarded as 
satisfactory:
    (a) Downflooding. The final waterline after flooding, taking into 
account sinkage, heel, and trim, is below the lower edge of any opening 
through which progressive flooding can take place. Such openings include 
air pipes, ventilators, and openings which are closed by means of 
weathertight doors (even if they comply with Sec. 42.15-10) or covers 
(even if they comply with Sec. 42.15-30 or Sec. 42.15-45(d)) but may 
exclude those openings closed by means of:
    (1) Manhole covers and flush scuttles which comply with Sec. 42.15-
40;
    (2) Cargo hatch covers which comply with Sec. 42.09-5(b);
    (3) Hinged watertight doors in an approved position which are 
secured closed while at sea and so logged; and
    (4) Remotely operated sliding watertight doors, and side scuttles of 
the non-opening type which comply with Sec. 42.15-65.
    (b) Progressive flooding. If pipes, ducts, or tunnels are situated 
within the assumed extent of damage penetration as defined in Sec. 
42.20-11 (a) and (b), progressive flooding cannot extend to compartments 
other than those assumed to be floodable in the calculation for each 
case of damage.
    (c) Final angle of heel. The angle of heel due to unsymmetrical 
flooding does not exceed 15 degrees. If no part of the deck is immersed, 
an angle of heel of up to 17 degrees may be accepted.
    (d) Metacentric height. The metacentric height of the damaged 
vessel, in the upright condition, is positive.
    (e) Residual stability. Through an angle of 20 degrees beyond its 
position of equilibrium, the vessel must meet the following conditions:
    (1) The righting arm must be positive.
    (2) The maximum righting arm must be at least 0.1 meter (4 inches).
    (3) The area under the righting arm curve within the 20 degree range 
must not be less than 0.0175 meter-radians (0.689 inch-radians).
    (4) Each submerged opening must be weathertight (e.g. a vent fitted 
with a ball check valve).
    (f) Intermediate stages of flooding. The Commandant is satisfied 
that the stability is sufficient during intermediate stages of flooding.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38649, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.20-13  Vessels without means of propulsion.

    (a) A lighter, barge, or other vessel without independent means of 
propulsion is assigned a freeboard in accordance with the provisions of 
this subpart as modified by paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this 
section.
    (b) A barge that meets the requirements of Sec. 42.09-5(b) may be 
assigned

[[Page 42]]

Type ``A'' freeboard if the barge does not carry deck cargo.
    (c) An unmanned barge is not required to comply with Sec. 42.15-75, 
Sec. 42.15-80(b), or Sec. 42.20-70.
    (d) An unmanned barge that has only small access openings closed by 
watertight gasketed covers of steel or equivalent material on the 
freeboard deck, may be assigned a freeboard 25 percent less than that 
calculated in accordance with this subpart.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38649, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.20-15  Freeboard tables.

    (a) Type ``A'' vessel. (1) The tabular freeboard for Type ``A'' 
vessel shall be determined from Table 42.20-15(a)(1):

      Table 42.20-15(a)(1)--Freeboard Table for Type ``A'' Vessels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Freeboard
                   Length of vessel (feet)                        \1\
                                                                (inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
80...........................................................        8.0
90...........................................................        8.9
100..........................................................        9.8
110..........................................................       10.8
120..........................................................       11.9
130..........................................................       13.0
140..........................................................       14.2
150..........................................................       15.5
160..........................................................       16.9
170..........................................................       18.3
180..........................................................       19.8
190..........................................................       21.3
200..........................................................       22.9
210..........................................................       24.5
220..........................................................       26.2
230..........................................................       27.8
240..........................................................       29.5
250..........................................................       31.1
260..........................................................       32.8
270..........................................................       34.6
280..........................................................       36.3
290..........................................................       38.0
300..........................................................       39.7
310..........................................................       41.4
320..........................................................       43.2
330..........................................................       45.0
340..........................................................       46.9
350..........................................................       48.8
360..........................................................       50.7
370..........................................................       52.7
380..........................................................       54.7
390..........................................................       56.8
400..........................................................       58.8
410..........................................................       60.9
420..........................................................       62.9
430..........................................................       65.0
440..........................................................       67.0
450..........................................................       69.1
460..........................................................       71.1
470..........................................................       73.1
480..........................................................       75.1
490..........................................................       77.1
500..........................................................       79.0
510..........................................................       80.9
520..........................................................       82.7
530..........................................................       84.5
540..........................................................       86.3
550..........................................................       88.0
560..........................................................       89.6
570..........................................................       91.1
580..........................................................       92.6
590..........................................................       94.1
600..........................................................       95.5
610..........................................................       96.9
620..........................................................       98.3
630..........................................................       99.6
640..........................................................      100.9
650..........................................................      102.1
660..........................................................      103.3
670..........................................................      104.4
680..........................................................      105.5
690..........................................................      106.6
700..........................................................      107.7
710..........................................................      108.7
720..........................................................      109.7
730..........................................................      110.7
740..........................................................      111.7
750..........................................................      112.6
760..........................................................      113.5
770..........................................................      114.4
780..........................................................      115.3
790..........................................................      116.1
800..........................................................      117.0
810..........................................................      117.8
820..........................................................      118.6
830..........................................................      119.3
840..........................................................      120.1
850..........................................................      120.7
860..........................................................      121.4
870..........................................................      122.1
880..........................................................      122.7
890..........................................................      123.4
900..........................................................      124.0
910..........................................................      124.6
920..........................................................      125.2
930..........................................................      125.7
940..........................................................      126.2
950..........................................................      126.7
960..........................................................      127.2
970..........................................................      127.7
980..........................................................      128.1
990..........................................................      128.6
1,000........................................................      129.0
1,010........................................................      129.4
1,020........................................................      129.9
1,030........................................................      130.3
1,040........................................................      130.7
1,050........................................................      131.0
1,060........................................................      131.4
1,070........................................................      131.7
1,080........................................................      132.0
1,090........................................................      132.3
1,100........................................................      132.6
1,110........................................................      132.9
1,120........................................................      133.2
1,130........................................................      133.5
1,140........................................................      133.8
1,150........................................................      134.0
1,160........................................................      134.3
1,170........................................................      134.5
1,180........................................................      134.7
1,190........................................................      135.0
1,200........................................................      135.2
1,200 \2\....................................................
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Freeboards at intermediate lengths of vessels shall be obtained by
  linear interpolation.

[[Page 43]]

 
\2\ Vessels above 1,200 feet in length shall be dealt with by the
  Commandant.

    (b) Type ``B'' vessels. (1) The tabular freeboard for Type ``B'' 
vessels shall be determined from Table 42.20-15(b)(1):

      Table 42.20-15(b)(1)--Freeboard Table for Type ``B'' Vessels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Freeboard
                   Length of vessel (feet)                        \1\
                                                                (inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
80...........................................................        8.0
90...........................................................        8.9
100..........................................................        9.8
110..........................................................       10.8
120..........................................................       11.9
130..........................................................       13.0
140..........................................................       14.2
150..........................................................       15.5
160..........................................................       16.9
170..........................................................       18.3
180..........................................................       19.8
190..........................................................       21.3
200..........................................................       22.9
210..........................................................       24.7
220..........................................................       26.6
230..........................................................       28.5
240..........................................................       30.4
250..........................................................       32.4
260..........................................................       34.4
270..........................................................       36.5
280..........................................................       38.7
290..........................................................       41.0
300..........................................................       43.3
310..........................................................       45.7
320..........................................................       48.2
330..........................................................       50.7
340..........................................................       53.2
350..........................................................       55.7
360..........................................................       58.2
370..........................................................       60.7
380..........................................................       63.2
390..........................................................       65.7
400..........................................................       68.2
410..........................................................       70.7
420..........................................................       73.2
430..........................................................       75.7
440..........................................................       78.2
450..........................................................       80.7
460..........................................................       83.1
470..........................................................       85.6
480..........................................................       88.1
490..........................................................       90.6
500..........................................................       93.1
510..........................................................       95.6
520..........................................................       98.1
530..........................................................      100.6
540..........................................................      103.0
550..........................................................      105.4
560..........................................................      107.7
570..........................................................      110.0
580..........................................................      112.3
590..........................................................      114.6
600..........................................................      116.8
610..........................................................      119.0
620..........................................................      121.1
630..........................................................      123.2
640..........................................................      125.3
650..........................................................      127.3
660..........................................................      129.3
670..........................................................      131.3
680..........................................................      133.3
690..........................................................      135.3
700..........................................................      137.1
710..........................................................      139.0
720..........................................................      140.9
730..........................................................      142.7
740..........................................................      144.5
750..........................................................      146.3
760..........................................................      148.1
770..........................................................      149.8
780..........................................................      151.5
790..........................................................      153.2
800..........................................................      154.8
810..........................................................      156.4
820..........................................................      158.0
830..........................................................      159.6
840..........................................................      161.2
850..........................................................      162.8
860..........................................................      164.3
870..........................................................      165.9
880..........................................................      167.4
890..........................................................      168.9
900..........................................................      170.4
910..........................................................      171.8
920..........................................................      173.3
930..........................................................      174.7
940..........................................................      176.1
950..........................................................      177.5
960..........................................................      178.9
970..........................................................      180.3
980..........................................................      181.7
990..........................................................      183.1
1,000........................................................      184.4
1,010........................................................      185.8
1,020........................................................      187.2
1,030........................................................      188.5
1,040........................................................      189.8
1,050........................................................      191.0
1,060........................................................      192.3
1,070........................................................      193.5
1,080........................................................      194.8
1,090........................................................      196.1
1,100........................................................      197.3
1,110........................................................      198.6
1,120........................................................      199.9
1,130........................................................      201.2
1,140........................................................      202.3
1,150........................................................      203.5
1,160........................................................      204.6
1,170........................................................      205.8
1,180........................................................      206.9
1,190........................................................      208.1
1,200........................................................      209.3
1,200 \2\....................................................  .........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Freeboards at intermediate lengths of vessel shall be obtained by
  linear interpolation.
\2\ Vessels above 1,200 feet in length shall be dealt with by the
  Commandant.


[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10064, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9015, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.20-20  Correction to the freeboard for vessels under 328 feet in length.

    (a) The tabular freeboard for a Type ``B'' vessel of between 79 feet 
and 328 feet in length having enclosed superstructures with an effective 
length of

[[Page 44]]

up to 35 percent of the length of the vessel shall be increased by:

0.09 (328-L) [0.35-(E/L)] inches

where:

L=length of vessel in feet.
E=effective length of superstructure in feet as defined in Sec. 42.20-
50.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10064, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.20-25  Correction for block coefficient.

    If the block coefficient (Cb) exceeds 0.68, the tabular freeboard 
specified in Sec. 42.20-15 as modified, if applicable, by Sec. Sec. 
42.20-5 (b) and (d), and 42.20-20(a) must be multiplied by the factor 
(Cb+0.68)/1.36.

[CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38650, Aug. 25, 1983]



Sec. 42.20-30  Correction for depth.

    (a) Where D exceeds L\1/15\ the freeboard shall be increased by [D-
(L/15)] R inches, where R is L/131.2 at lengths less than 393.6 feet and 
3 at 393.6 feet length and above.
    (b) Where D is less than L/15 no reduction shall be made except in a 
vessel with an enclosed superstructure covering at least 0.6L amidships, 
with a complete trunk, or combination of detached enclosed 
superstructures and trunks which extend all fore and aft, where the 
freeboard shall be reduced at the rate prescribed in paragraph (a) of 
this section.
    (c) Where the height of superstructure or trunk is less than the 
standard height, the reduction shall be in the ratio of the actual to 
the standard height as defined in Sec. 42.20-40.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10064, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.20-35  Correction for position of deck line.

    (a) Where the actual depth to the upper edge of the deck line is 
greater or less than D, the difference between the depths shall be added 
to or deducted from the freeboard.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10065, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.20-40  Standard height of superstructure.

    (a) The standard height of a superstructure shall be as given in 
Table 42.20-40(a):

            Table 42.20-40(a) Standard Heights (in Feet) \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Raised    All other
               Length (L) (in feet)                  quarter     super
                                                      deck    structures
------------------------------------------------------------------------
98.5 or less......................................       3.0        5.9
246...............................................       3.9        5.9
410 or more.......................................       5.9       7.5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The standard heights at intermediate lengths of the vessel shall be
  obtained by linear interpolation.


[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10065, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9015, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.20-45  Length of superstructure.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, the length 
of a superstructure (S) shall be the mean length of the parts of the 
superstructure which lie within the length (L).
    (b) Where the end bulkhead of an enclosed superstructure extends in 
a fair convex curve beyond its intersection with the superstructure 
sides, the length of the superstructure may be increased on the basis of 
an equivalent plane bulkhead. This increase shall be two-thirds of the 
fore and aft extent of curvature. The maximum curvature which may be 
taken into account in determining this increase is one-half the breadth 
of the superstructure at the point of intersection of the curved end of 
the superstructure with its side.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10065, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9015, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.20-50  Effective length of superstructure.

    (a) Except as provided for in paragraph (b) of this section the 
effective length (E) of an enclosed superstructure of standard height 
shall be its length.
    (b) In all cases where an enclosed superstructure of standard height 
is set in from the sides of the vessel as permitted in Sec. 42.13-
15(j), the effective length shall be the length modified by the ratio of 
b/Bs,

where:

``b'' is the breadth of the superstructure at the middle of its length;
``Bs'' is the breadth of the vessel at the middle of the length of the 
superstructure.


[[Page 45]]


    (1) Where a superstructure is set in for a part of its length, this 
modification shall be applied only to the set in part.
    (c) Where the height of an enclosed superstructure is less than the 
standard height, the effective length shall be its length reduced in the 
ratio of the actual height to the standard height. Where the height 
exceeds the standard, no increase shall be made to the effective length 
of the superstructure.
    (d) The effective length of a raised quarter deck if fitted with an 
intact front bulkhead, shall be its length up to a maximum of 0.6L. 
Where the bulkhead is not intact, the raised quarter deck shall be 
treated as a poop of less than standard height.
    (e) Superstructures which are not enclosed shall have no effective 
length.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10065, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.20-55  Trunks.

    (a) A trunk or similar structure which does not extend to the sides 
of the vessel shall be regarded as efficient on the following 
conditions:
    (1) The trunk is at least as strong as a superstructure;
    (2) The hatchways are in the trunk deck, and the hatchway coamings 
and covers comply with the requirements of Sec. Sec. 42.15-15 to 42.15-
30, inclusive, and the width of the trunk deck stringer provides a 
satisfactory gangway and sufficient lateral stiffness; however, small 
access openings with watertight covers may be permitted in the freeboard 
deck;
    (3) A permanent working platform fore and aft fitted with guard 
rails is provided by the trunk deck, or by detached trunks connected to 
superstructures by efficient permanent gangways;
    (4) Ventilators are protected by the trunk by watertight covers or 
by other equivalent means;
    (5) Open rails are fitted on the weather parts of the freeboard deck 
in way of the trunk for at least half their length;
    (6) The machinery casings are protected by the trunk, by a 
superstructure of at least standard height, or by a deckhouse of the 
same height and of equivalent strength;
    (7) The breadth of the trunk is at least 60 percent of the breadth 
of the vessel; and,
    (8) Where there is no superstructure, the length of the trunk is at 
least 0.6L.
    (b) The full length of an efficient trunk reduced in the ratio of 
its mean breadth to B shall be its effective length.
    (c) The standard height of a trunk is the standard height of a 
superstructure other than a raised quarter deck.
    (d) Where the height of a trunk is less than the standard height, 
its effective length shall be reduced in the ratio of the actual to the 
standard height. Where the height of hatchway coamings on the trunk deck 
is less than that required under Sec. 42.15-25(a), a reduction from the 
actual height of trunk shall be made which corresponds to the difference 
between the actual and required height of coaming.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10065, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9015, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.20-60  Deduction for superstructures and trunks.

    (a) Where the effective length of superstructures and trunks is 
1.0L, the deduction from the freeboard shall be 14 inches at 79 feet 
length of vessel, 34 inches at 279 feet length, and 42 inches at 400 
feet length and above; deductions at intermediate lengths shall be 
obtained by linear interpolation.
    (b) Where the total effective length of superstructures and trunks 
is less than 1.0L the deduction shall be a percentage obtained from 
Table 42.20-60(b)(1) or Table 42.20-60(b)(2):

                      Table 42.20-60(b)(1)--Percentage of Deduction For Type ``A'' Vessels
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 Total effective length of superstructures and trunks
                                    ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       0     0.1L   0.2L   0.3L   0.4L   0.5L   0.6L   0.7L   0.8L   0.9L   1.0L
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Percentage of deduction for all          0      7     14     21     31     41     52     63   75.3   87.7   100
 types of superstructures \1\......
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Percentages at intermediate lengths of superstructures and trunks shall be obtained by linear interpolation.


[[Page 46]]


                      Table 42.20-60(b)(2)--Percentage of Deduction for Type ``B'' Vessels
                                          [Percentage of deduction \1\]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Total effective length of superstructures and trunks
                             -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                               Line    0     0.1L   0.2L   0.3L   0.4L   0.5L   0.6L   0.7L   0.8L   0.9L   1.0L
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vessels with forecastle and       I      0      5     10     15   23.5     32     46     63   75.3   87.7    100
 without detached bridge....
Vessels with forecasle and       II      0    6.3   12.7     19   27.5     36     46     63   75.3   87.7   100
 detached bridge............
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Percentages at intermediate lengths of superstructures and trunks shall be obtained by linear interpolation.

    (c) For vessels of Type ``B'':
    (1) Where the effective length of a bridge is less than 0.2L, the 
percentages shall be obtained by linear interpolation between lines I 
and II;
    (2) Where the effective length of a forecastle is more than 0.4L, 
the percentages shall be obtained from line II; and,
    (3) Where the effective length of a forecastle is less than 0.07L, 
the percentages in Table 42.20-60(b)(2) of this paragraph shall be 
reduced by:

5(0.07L-f)/0.07L

L is the length of vessel as defined in Sec. 42.13-15(a),
f is the effective length of the forecastle.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10065, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9015, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.20-65  Sheer.

    (a) General. (1) The sheer shall be measured from the deck at side 
to a line of reference drawn parallel to the keel through the sheer line 
amidships.
    (2) In vessels designed with a rake of keel, the sheer shall be 
measured in relation to a reference line drawn parallel to the design 
load waterline.
    (3) In flush deck vessels and in vessels with detached 
superstructures the sheer shall be measured at the freeboard deck.
    (4) In vessels with topsides of unusual form in which there is a 
step or break in the topsides, the sheer shall be considered in relation 
to the equivalent depth amidships.
    (5) In vessels with a superstructure of standard height which 
extends over the whole length of the freeboard deck, the sheer shall be 
measured at the superstructure deck. Where the height exceeds the 
standard the least difference (Z) between the actual and standard 
heights shall be added to each end ordinate. Similarly, the intermediate 
ordinates at distances of \1/6\L and \1/3\L from each perpendicular 
shall be increased by 0.444Z and 0.111Z respectively.
    (6) Where the deck of an enclosed superstructure has at least the 
same sheer as the exposed freeboard deck, the sheer of the enclosed 
portion of the freeboard deck shall not be taken into account.
    (7) Where an enclosed poop or forecastle is of standard height with 
greater sheer than that of the freeboard deck, or is of more than 
standard height, an addition to the sheer of the freeboard deck shall be 
made as provided in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
    (b) Standard sheer profile. (1) The ordinates of the standard sheer 
profile are given in Table 42.20-65(b)(1):

                                  Table 42.20-65(b)(1)--Standard Sheer Profile
                                              [Where L is in feet]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Station          Ordinate (in inches)   Ordinate (in inches)  Factor
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After half.........................  After Perpendicular..  0.1..................  L+10.................      1
                                     \1/6\ L from A.P.....  0.0444...............  L+4.44...............      3
                                     \1/3\ L from A.P.....  0.0111...............  L+1.11...............      3
                                     Amidships............  .....................  0....................      1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Forward half.......................  Amidships............  .....................  0....................      1
                                     \1/3\ L from F.P.....  0.0222...............  L+2.22...............      3
                                     \1/6\ L from F.P.....  0.0888...............  L+8.88...............      3
                                     Forward Perpendicular  0.2..................  L+20.................      1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Measurement of variation from standard sheer profile. (1) Where 
the sheer profile differs from the standard, the four ordinates of each 
profile in the forward or after half shall be multiplied by the 
appropriate factors given

[[Page 47]]

in the table of ordinates. The difference between the sums of the 
respective products and those of the standard divided by 8 measures the 
deficiency or excess of sheer in the forward or after half. The 
arithmetical mean of the excess or deficiency in the forward and after 
halves measures the excess or deficiency of sheer.
    (2) Where the after half of the sheer has an excess and the forward 
half of the sheer has a deficiency, no credit shall be allowed for the 
part in excess and deficiency only shall be measured.
    (3) Where the forward half of the sheer profile exceeds the 
standard, and the after portion of the sheer profile is not less than 75 
percent of the standard, credit shall be allowed for the part in excess; 
where the after part is less than 50 percent of the standard, no credit 
shall be given for the excess sheer forward. Where the after sheer is 
between 50 percent and 75 percent of the standard, intermediate 
allowances may be granted for excess sheer forward.
    (4) Where sheer credit is given for a poop or forecastle, the 
following formula shall be used:

s=(y/3)(L'/L)

where:

s=sheer credit, to be deducted from the deficiency or added to the 
excess of sheer.
y=difference between actual and standard height of superstructure at the 
end ordinate.
L'=mean enclosed length of poop or forecastle up to a maximum length of 
0.5L.
L=length of vessel as defined in Sec. 42.13-15(a).

    (i) The formula in this paragraph (c)(4) of this section provides a 
curve in the form of a parabola tangent to the actual sheer curve at the 
freeboard deck and intersecting the end ordinate at a point below the 
superstructure deck a distance equal to the standard height of a 
superstructure. The superstructure deck shall not be less than standard 
height above this curve at any point. This curve shall be used in 
determining the sheer profile for forward and after halves of the 
vessel.
    (d) Correction for variations from standard sheer profile. (1) The 
correction for sheer shall be the deficiency or excess of sheer (see 
paragraphs (c) (1) to (4) inclusive of this section) multiplied by:

0.75-(S/2L)

where:

S is the total length of enclosed superstructures.

    (e) Addition for deficiency in sheer. (1) Where the sheer is less 
than the standard, the correction for deficiency in sheer (see paragraph 
(d)(1) of this section) shall be added to the freeboard.
    (f) Deduction for excess sheer. (1) In vessels where an enclosed 
superstructure covers 0.1L before and 0.1L abaft amidships, the 
correction for excess of sheer as calculated under the provisions of 
paragraph (d)(1) of this section shall be deducted from the freeboard; 
in vessels where no enclosed superstructure covers amidships, no 
deduction shall be made from the freeboard; where an enclosed 
superstructure covers less than 0.1L before and 0.1L abaft amidships, 
the deduction shall be obtained by linear interpolation. The maximum 
deduction for excess sheer shall be at the rate of 1\1/2\ inches per 100 
feet of length.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10066, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.20-70  Minimum bow height.

    (a) The bow height defined as the vertical distance at the forward 
perpendicular between the waterline corresponding to the assigned summer 
freeboard and the designed trim and the top of the exposed deck at side 
shall be not less than:
    (1) For vessels below 820 feet in length,

0.672L[1-(L/1640)][1.36/(Cb+0.68)] inches;

where:

L is the length of the vessel in feet.
Cb is the block coefficient which is to be taken as not less 
than 0.68.

    (2) For vessels of 820 feet and above in length,

275.6[1.36/(Cb+0.68)] inches;

where:

Cb is the block coefficient which is to be taken as not less 
than 0.68.

    (b) Where the bow height required in paragraph (a) of this section 
is obtained by sheer, the sheer shall extend for at least 15 percent of 
the length of the vessel measured from the forward

[[Page 48]]

perpendicular. Where it is obtained by fitting a superstructure, such 
superstructure shall extend from the stem to a point at least 0.07L 
abaft the forward perpendicular, and it shall comply with the following 
requirements:
    (1) For vessels not over 328 feet in length it shall be enclosed as 
defined in Sec. 42.13-15(j); and,
    (2) For vessels over 328 feet in length it need not comply with 
Sec. 42.13-15(j) but shall be fitted with closing appliances to the 
satisfaction of the assigning authority.
    (c) Vessels which, to suit exceptional operational requirements, 
cannot meet the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section 
may be given special consideration by the assigning authority.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10066, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.20-75  Minimum freeboards.

    (a) Summer freeboard. (1) The minimum freeboard in summer must be 
the freeboard derived from the tables in Sec. 42.20-15 as modified by 
the corrections in Sec. Sec. 42.20-3 and 42.20-5, as applicable, and 
Sec. Sec. 42.20-20, 42.20-25, 42.20-30, 42.20-35, 42.20-60, 42.20-65 
and, if applicable, Sec. 42.20-70.
    (2) The freeboard in salt water, as calculated in accordance with 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section, but without the correction for deck 
line, as provided by Sec. 42.20-35, shall not be less than 2 inches. 
For vessels having in position 1 hatchways with covers which do not 
comply with the requirements of Sec. Sec. 42.15-25(d)(1), 42.15-30, or 
42.15-80, the freeboard shall be not less than 6 inches.
    (b) Tropical freeboard. (1) The minimum tropical freeboard shall be 
the freeboard obtained by a deduction from the summer freeboard of one 
forty-eighth of the summer draft measured from the top of the keel to 
the center of the ring of the load line mark.
    (2) The freeboard in salt water, as calculated in accordance with 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section, but without the correction for deck 
line, as provided by Sec. 42.20-35, shall not be less than 2 inches. 
For vessels having in position 1 hatchways with covers which do not 
comply with the requirements of Sec. 42.15-25(d)(1), Sec. 42.15-30, or 
Sec. 42.15-80, the freeboard shall be not less than 6 inches.
    (c) Winter freeboard. (1) The minimum winter freeboard shall be the 
freeboard obtained by an addition to the summer freeboard of one forty-
eighth of summer draft, measured from the top of the keel to the center 
of the ring of the load line mark.
    (d) Winter North Atlantic freeboard. (1) The minimum freeboard for 
vessels of not more than 328 feet in length which enter any part of the 
North Atlantic defined in Sec. 42.30-35 during the winter seasonal 
period shall be the winter freeboard plus 2 inches. For other vessels 
the winter North Atlantic freeboard shall be the winter freeboard.
    (e) Fresh water freeboard. (1) The minimum freeboard in fresh water 
of unit density shall be obtained by deducting from the minimum 
freeboard in salt water:

([Delta]/40 T) inches

where:

[Delta]=displacement in salt water in tons at the summer load waterline; 
and,
T=tons per inch immersion in salt water at the summer load waterline.

    (2) Where the displacement at the summer load waterline cannot be 
certified, the deduction shall be one forty-eighth of summer draft, 
measured from the top of the keel to the center of the ring of the load 
line mark.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10066, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969; CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38650, Aug. 25, 1983]



     Subpart 42.25_Special Requirements for Vessels Assigned Timber 
                               Freeboards



Sec. 42.25-1  Application of this subpart.

    (a) The provisions of this subpart 42.25 apply only to vessels to 
which timber load lines are assigned.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10067, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.25-5  Definitions of terms used in this subpart.

    (a) Timber deck cargo. The term ``timber deck cargo'' means a cargo 
of timber carried on an uncovered part of a freeboard or superstructure 
deck. The

[[Page 49]]

term does not include wood pulp or similar cargo.
    (b) Timber load line. A timber deck cargo may be regarded as giving 
a vessel a certain additional buoyancy and a greater degree of 
protection against the sea. For that reason, vessels carrying a timber 
deck cargo may be granted a reduction of freeboard calculated according 
to the provisions of Sec. 42.25-20 and marked on the vessel's side in 
accordance with the provisions of Sec. 42.13-30(c) and (d). However, in 
order that such special freeboard may be granted and used, the timber 
deck cargo shall comply with certain conditions which are laid down in 
Sec. 42.25-15, and the vessel itself shall also comply with certain 
conditions relating to its construction which are set out in Sec. 
42.25-10.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10067, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.25-10  Construction of vessel.

    (a) Superstructure. (1) Vessels, shall have a forecastle of at least 
standard height and a length of at least 0.07L. In addition, if the 
vessel is less than 328 feet in length, a poop of at least standard 
height, or a raised quarter deck with either a deckhouse or a strong 
steel hood of at least the same total height shall be fitted aft.
    (b) Double bottom tanks. (1) Double bottom tanks where fitted within 
the midship half length of the vessel shall have adequate watertight 
longitudinal subdivision.
    (c) Bulwarks. (1) The vessel shall be fitted either with permanent 
bulwarks at least 39\1/2\ inches in height, specially stiffened on the 
upper edge and supported by strong bulwark stays attached to the deck 
and provided with necessary freeing ports, or with efficient rails of 
the same height and of specially strong construction.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10067, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.25-15  Stowage.

    (a) General. (1) Openings in the weather deck over which cargo is 
stowed shall be securely closed and battened down. The ventilators shall 
be efficiently protected.
    (2) Timber deck cargo shall extend over at least the entire 
available length which is the total length of the well or wells between 
superstructures. Where there is no limiting superstructure at the after 
end, the timber shall extend at least to the after end of the aftermost 
hatchway. The timber shall be stowed as solidly as possible, to at least 
the standard height of a superstructure other than a raised quarter 
deck.
    (3) On a vessel within a seasonal winter zone in winter, the height 
of the deck cargo above the weather deck shall not exceed one-third of 
the extreme breadth of the vessel.
    (4) The timber deck cargo shall be compactly stowed, lashed, and 
secured. It shall not interfere in any way with the navigation and 
necessary work of the vessel.
    (b) Upright. (1) Uprights, when required by the nature of the 
timber, shall be of adequate strength considering the breadth of the 
vessel; the spacing shall be suitable for the length and character of 
timber carried, but shall not exceed 9.8 feet. Strong angles or metal 
sockets or equally efficient means shall be provided for securing the 
uprights.
    (c) Lashings. (1) Timber deck cargo shall be efficiently secured 
throughout its length by independent overall lashings spaced not more 
than 9.8 feet apart. Eye plates for these lashings shall be efficiently 
attached to the sheer strake or to the deck stringer plate at intervals 
of not more than 9.8 feet. The distance from an end bulkhead of a 
superstructure to the first eye plate shall be not more than 6.6 feet. 
Eye plates and lashings shall be provided 23\1/2\ inches and 4.9 feet 
from the ends of timber deck cargoes where there is no bulkhead.
    (2) Lashings shall be not less than \3/4\-inch close link chain or 
flexible wire rope of equivalent strength, fitted with sliphooks and 
turnbuckles, which shall be accessible at all times. Wire rope lashings 
shall have a short length of long link chain to permit the length of 
lashings to be regulated.
    (3) When timber is in lengths less than 11.8 feet the spacing of the 
lashings shall be reduced or other suitable

[[Page 50]]

provisions made to suit the length of timber.
    (4) All fittings required for securing the lashings shall be of 
strength corresponding to the length of the lashings.
    (d) Stability. (1) Provision shall be made for a safe margin of 
stability at all stages of the voyage, regard being given to additions 
of weight, such as those due to absorption of water and icing and to 
losses of weight such as those due to consumption of fuel and stores.
    (e) Protection of crew, access to machinery spaces, etc. (1) In 
addition to the requirements of Sec. 42.15-75(e) guardrails or life 
lines spaced not more than 13 inches apart vertically shall be provided 
on each side of the deck cargo to a height of at least 39\1/2\ inches 
above the cargo.
    (f) Steering arrangements. (1) Steering arrangements shall be 
effectively protected from damage by cargo and, as far as practicable, 
shall be accessible. Efficient provision, shall be made for steering in 
the event of a breakdown in the main steering arrangements.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10067, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.25-20  Computation for freeboard.

    (a) The minimum summer freeboards must be computed in accordance 
with Sec. Sec. 42.20-5 (a) and (b), 42.20-13, 42.20-15, 42.20-20, 
42.20-25, 42.20-30, 42.20-35, 42.20-60, and 42.20-65, except that Sec. 
42.20-60 is modified by substituting the percentages in Table 42.25-
20(a) for those given in Sec. 42.20-60:

                          Table 42.25-20(a)--Percentage of Deduction for Superstructure
                                   [Total Effective Length of Superstructure]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       0     0.1L   0.2L   0.3L   0.4L   0.5L   0.6L   0.7L   0.8L   0.9L   1.0L
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Percentage of deduction for all         20     31     42     53     64     70     76     82     88     94   100
 types of superstructure \1\.......
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Percentages at intermediate lengths of superstructures shall be obtained by linear interpolation.

    (b) The winter timber freeboard shall be obtained by adding to the 
summer timber freeboard one thirty-sixth of the molded summer timber 
draft.
    (c) The winter North Atlantic timber freeboard shall be the same as 
the winter North Atlantic freeboard prescribed in Sec. 42.20-75(d)(1).
    (d) The tropical timber freeboard shall be obtained by deducting 
from the summer timber freeboard one forty-eighth of the molded summer 
timber draft.
    (e) The fresh water timber freeboard shall be computed in accordance 
with Sec. 42.20-75(e) (1) or (2) based on the summer timber load 
waterline.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10067, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969; CGD 79-153, 48 FR 38650, Aug. 25, 1983]



            Subpart 42.30_Zones, Areas, and Seasonal Periods



Sec. 42.30-1  Basis.

    (a) The zones and areas in this subpart are, in general, based on 
the following criteria:
    (1) Summer: not more than 10 percent winds of force 8 Beaufort (34 
knots) or more.
    (2) Tropical: not more than 1 percent winds of force 8 Beaufort (34 
knots) or more. Not more than one tropical storm in 10 years in an area 
of 5[deg] square in any 1 separate calendar month.
    (b) In certain special areas, for practical reasons, some degree of 
relaxation has been found acceptable.
    (c) A chart is attached to the International Convention on Load 
Lines, 1966, which illustrates the zones and areas defined in this 
Convention and in this subpart.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10068, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]

[[Page 51]]



Sec. 42.30-5  Northern Winter Seasonal Zones and area.

    (a) North Atlantic Winter Seasonal Zones I and II. (1) The North 
Atlantic Winter Seasonal Zone I lies within the meridian of longitude 
50[deg] W. from the coast of Greenland to latitude 45[deg] N.; thence 
the parallel of latitude 45[deg] N. to longitude 15[deg] W.; thence the 
meridian of longitude 15[deg] W. to latitude 60[deg] N.; thence the 
parallel of latitude 60[deg] N. to the Greenwich Meridian, thence this 
meridian northwards.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Winter: October 16 to April 15.
Summer: April 16 to October 15.

    (2) The North Atlantic Winter Seasonal Zone II lies within the 
meridian of longitude 68[deg]30[min] W. from the coast of the United 
States to latitude 40[deg] N.; thence the rhumb line to the point 
latitude 36[deg] N., longitude 73[deg] W.; thence the parallel of 
latitude 36[deg] N. to longitude 25[deg] W.; and thence the rhumb line 
to Cape Torinana. Excluded from this zone are the North Atlantic Winter 
Seasonal Zone I and the Baltic Sea bounded by the parallel of the 
latitude of The Skaw in the Skagerrak.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Winter: November 1 to March 31.
Summer: April 1 to October 31.

    (b) North Atlantic Winter Seasonal Area. (1) The boundary of the 
North Atlantic Winter Seasonal Area is the meridian of longitude 
68[deg]30[min] W. from the coast of the United States to latitude 
40[deg] N.; thence the rhumb line to the southernmost intersection of 
the meridian of longitude 61[deg] W. with the coast of Canada; and 
thence the east coasts of Canada and the United States.
    (i) Seasonal periods:
    (a) For vessels over 328 feet in length:

Winter: December 16 to February 15.
Summer: February 16 to December 15.

    (b) For vessels of 328 feet and under in length:

Winter: November 1 to March 31.
Summer: April 1 to October 31.

    (c) North Pacific Winter Seasonal Zone. The southern boundary of the 
North Pacific Winter Seasonal Zone is the parallel of latitude 50[deg] 
N. from the east coast of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, to 
the west coast of Sakhalin; thence the west coast of Sakhalin to the 
southern extremity of Cape Kril'on: thence the rhumb line to Wakkanai, 
Hokkaido, Japan; thence the east and south coasts of Hokkaido to 
longitude 145[deg] E., thence the meridian of longitude 145[deg] E. to 
latitude 35[deg] N., thence the parallel of latitude 35[deg] N. to 
longitude 150[deg] W. and thence the rhumb line to the southern 
extremity of Dall Island, Alaska.
    (1) Seasonal periods:

Winter: October 16 to April 15.
Summer: April 16 to October 15.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10068, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.30-10  Southern Winter Seasonal Zone.

    (a) The northern boundary of the Southern Winter Seasonal Zone is 
the rhumb line from the east coast of the American continent at Cape 
Tres Puntas to the point latitude 34[deg] S., longitude 50[deg] W.; 
thence the parallel of latitude 34[deg] S. to longitude 17[deg] E.; 
thence the rhumb line to the point latitude 35[deg]10[min] S., longitude 
20[deg] E.; thence the rhumb line to the point latitude 34[deg] S. 
longitude 28[deg] E.; thence along the rhumb line to the point latitude 
35[deg]30[min] S., longitude 118[deg] E.; thence the rhumb line to Cape 
Grim on the northwest coast of Tasmania; thence along the north and east 
coasts of Tasmania to the southernmost point of Bruny Island; thence the 
rhumb line to Black Rock Point on Stewart Island; thence the rhumb line 
to the point latitude 47[deg] S., longitude 170[deg] E.; thence along 
the rhumb line to the point latitude 33[deg] S., longitude 170[deg] W.; 
and thence the parallel of latitude 33[deg] S. to the west coast of the 
American continent.
    (1) Valparaiso is to be considered as being on the boundary line of 
the Summer and the Winter Seasonal Zones.
    (2) Seasonal periods:

Winter: April 16 to October 15.
Summer: October 16 to April 15.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10068, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.30-15  Tropical Zone.

    (a) Northern boundary of the Tropical Zone. The northern boundary of 
the

[[Page 52]]

Tropical Zone is the parallel of latitude 13[deg] N. from the east coast 
of the American continent to longitude 60[deg] W.; thence the rhumb line 
to a point in latitude 10[deg] N., longitude 58[deg] W.; thence the 
parallel of latitude 10[deg] N. to longitude 20[deg] W.; thence the 
meridian of longitude 20[deg] W. to latitude 30[deg] N.; thence the 
parallel of latitude 30[deg] N. to the west coast of Africa; from the 
east coast of Africa the parallel of latitude 8[deg] N. to longitude 
70[deg] E.; thence the meridian of longitude 70[deg] E. to latitude 
13[deg] N.; thence the parallel of latitude 13[deg] N. to the west coast 
of India; thence around the south coast of India to latitude 
10[deg]30[min] N. on the east coast of India; thence the rhumb line to a 
point in latitude 9[deg] N., longitude 82[deg] E.; thence the meridian 
of longitude 82[deg] E. to latitude 8[deg] N.; thence the parallel of 
latitude 8[deg] N. to the west coast of Malaysia; thence the coast of 
Southeast Asia to the east coast of Vietnam at latitude 10[deg] N.; 
thence the parallel of latitude 10[deg] N. to longitude 145[deg] E.; 
thence the meridian of longitude 145[deg] E. to latitude 13[deg] N.; and 
thence the parallel of latitude 13[deg] N. to the west coast of the 
American continent.
    (1) Saigon is to be considered as being on the boundary line of the 
Tropical Zone and the Seasonal Tropical Area.
    (b) Southern boundary of the Tropical Zone. The southern boundary of 
the Tropical Zone is the rhumb line from the Port of Santos, Brazil, to 
the point where the meridian of longitude 40[deg] W. intersects the 
Tropic of Capricorn; thence the Tropic of Capricorn to the west coast of 
Africa; from the east coast of Africa the parallel of latitude 20[deg] 
S. to the west coast of Madagascar; thence the west and north coasts of 
Madagascar to longitude 50[deg] E.; thence the meridian of longitude 
50[deg] E. to latitude 10[deg] S.; thence the parallel of latitude 
10[deg] S. to longitude 98[deg] E.; thence the rhumb line to Port 
Darwin, Australia; thence the coasts of Australia and Wessel Island 
eastwards to Cape Wessel; thence the parallel of latitude 11[deg] S. to 
the west side of Cape York; from the east side of Cape York the parallel 
of latitude 11[deg] S. to longitude 150[deg] W.; thence the rhumb line 
to the point latitude 26[deg] S., longitude 75[deg] W.; and thence the 
rhumb line to the west coast of the American continent at latitude 
30[deg] S.
    (1) Coquimbo and Santos are to be considered as being on the 
boundary line of the Tropical and Summer Zones.
    (c) Areas to be included in the Tropical Zone. The following areas 
are to be treated as included in the Tropical Zone:
    (1) The Suez Canal, the Red Sea, and the Gulf of Aden, from Port 
Said to the meridian of longitude 45[deg] E.
    (i) Aden and Berbera are to be considered as being on the boundary 
line of the Tropical Zone and the Seasonal Tropical Area.
    (2) The Persian Gulf of the meridian of longitude 59[deg] E.
    (3) The area bounded by the parallel of latitude 22[deg] S. from the 
east coast of Australia to the Great Barrier Reef, thence the Great 
Barrier Reef to latitude 11[deg] S. The northern boundary of the area is 
the southern boundary of the Tropical Zone.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10068, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 42.30-20  Seasonal Tropical Areas.

    The following are Seasonal Tropical Areas:
    (a) In the North Atlantic. It is an area bounded on the north by the 
rhumb line from Cape Catoche, Yucatan, to Cape San Antonio, Cuba, the 
north coast of Cuba to latitude 20[deg] N., thence the parallel of 
latitude 20[deg] N. to longitude 20[deg] W.; on the west by the coast of 
the American continent; on the south and east by the northern boundary 
of the Tropical Zone.
    (1) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: November 1 to July 15.
Summer: July 16 to October 31.

    (b) In the Arabian Sea. An area bounded on the west by the coast of 
Africa, the meridian of longitude 45[deg] E. in the Gulf of Aden, the 
coast of South Arabia and the meridian of longitude 59[deg] E. in the 
Gulf of Oman; on the north and east by the coasts of Pakistan and India; 
on the south by the northern boundary of the Tropical Zone.
    (1) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: September 1 to May 31.
Summer: June 1 to August 31.


[[Page 53]]


    (c) In the Bay of Bengal. The Bay of Bengal north of the northern 
boundary of the Tropical Zone.
    (1) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: December 1 to April 30.
Summer: May 1 to November 30.

    (d) In the South Indian Ocean. (1) An area bounded on the north and 
west by the southern boundary of the Tropical Zone and the east coast of 
Madagascar; on the south by the parallel of latitude 20[deg] S.; on the 
east by the rhumb line from a point in latitude 20[deg] S., longitude 
50[deg] E., to a point in latitude 15[deg] S., longitude 51[deg]30[min] 
E., and thence by the meridian of longitude 51[deg]30[min] E. to 
latitude 10[deg] S.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: April 1 to November 30.
Summer: December 1 to March 31.

    (2) An area bounded on the north by the southern boundary of the 
Tropical Zone; on the east by the coast of Australia; on the south by 
the parallel of latitude 15[deg] S. from longitude 51[deg]30[min] E., to 
longitude 120[deg] E. and thence the meridian of longitude 120[deg] E. 
to the coast of Australia; on the west by the meridian of longitude 
51[deg]30[min] E.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: May 1 to November 30.
Summer: December 1 to April 30.

    (e) In the China Sea. An area bounded on the west and north by the 
coasts of Vietnam and China from latitude 10[deg] N. to Hong Kong; on 
the east by the rhumb line from Hong Kong to the Port of Sual (Luzon 
Island), and the west coasts of the Islands of Luzon, Samar, and Leyte 
to latitude 10[deg] N.; on the south by the parallel of latitude 10[deg] 
N.
    (1) Hong Kong and Sual are to be considered as being on the boundary 
of the Seasonal Tropical Area and Summer Zone.
    (2) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: January 21 to April 30.
Summer: May 1 to January 20.

    (f) In the North Pacific. (1) An area bounded on the north by the 
parallel of latitude 25[deg] N.; on the west by the meridian of 
longitude 160[deg] E.; on the south by the parallel of latitude 13[deg] 
N.; on the east by the meridian of longitude 130[deg] W.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: April 1 to October 31.
Summer: November 1 to March 31.

    (2) An area bounded on the north and east by the west coast of the 
American continent; on the west by the meridian of longitude 123[deg] W. 
from the coast of the American continent to latitude 33[deg] N., 
longitude 123[deg] W.; to the point latitude 13[deg] N., longitude 
105[deg] W.; on the south by the parallel of latitude 13[deg] N.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: March 1 to June 30, and November 1 to November 30.
Summer: July 1 to October 31, and December 1 to February 28/29.

    (g) In the South Pacific. (1) The Gulf of Carpentaria south of 
latitude 11[deg] S.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: April 1 to November 30.
Summer: December 1 to March 31.

    (2) An area bounded on the north and east by the southern boundary 
of the Tropical Zone; on the south by the Tropic of Capricorn from the 
east coast of Australia to longitude 150[deg] W.; thence by the meridian 
of longitude 150[deg] W. to latitude 20[deg] S. and thence by the 
parallel of latitude 20[deg] S. to the point where it intersects the 
southern boundary of the Tropical Zone; on the west by the boundaries of 
the area within the Great Barrier Reef included in the Tropical Zone, 
and by the east coast of Australia.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Tropical: April 1 to November 30.
Summer: December 1 to March 31.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10068, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.30-25  Summer Zones.

    (a) The remaining areas constitute the Summer Zones.
    (1) However, for vessels of 328 feet and under in length, the area 
bounded on the north and west by the east coast of the United States; on 
the east by the meridian of longitude 68[deg]30[min] W. from the coast 
of the United States to latitude 40[deg] N. and thence by the rhumb line 
to the point latitude 36[deg] N., longitude 73[deg] W.; on the south by 
the parallel of latitude 36[deg] N.; is a Winter Seasonal Area.
    (i) Seasonal periods:


[[Page 54]]


Winter: November 1 to March 31.
Summer: April 1 to October 31.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10069, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.30-30  Enclosed seas.

    (a) Baltic Sea. This sea bounded by the parallel of latitude of The 
Skaw in the Skagerrak is included in the Summer Zones.
    (1) However, for vessels of 328 feet and under in length, it is a 
Winter Seasonal Area.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Winter: November 1 to March 31.
Summer: April 1 to October 31.

    (b) Black Sea. This sea is included in the Summer Zones.
    (1) However, for vessels of 328 feet and under in length, the area 
north of latitude 44[deg] N. is a Winter Seasonal Area.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Winter: December 1 to February 28/29.
Summer: March 1 to November 30.

    (c) Mediterranean. This sea is included in the Summer Zones.
    (1) However, for vessels of 328 feet and under in length, the area 
bounded on the north and west by the coasts of France and Spain and the 
meridian of longitude 3[deg] E. from the coast of Spain to latitude 
40[deg] N.; on the south by the parallel of latitude 40[deg] N. from 
longitude 3[deg] E. to the west coast of Sardinia; on the east by the 
west and north coasts of Sardinia from latitude 40[deg] N. to longitude 
9[deg] E., thence by the meridian of longitude 9[deg] E. to the south 
coast of Corsica, thence by the west and north coasts of Corsica to 
longitude 9[deg] E. and thence by the rhumb line to Cape Sicie; is a 
Winter Seasonal Area.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Winter: December 16 to March 15.
Summer: March 16 to December 15.

    (d) Sea of Japan. This sea south of the parallel of latitude 50[deg] 
N. is included in the Summer Zones.
    (1) However, for vessels of 382 feet and under in length, the area 
between the parallel of latitude 50[deg] N. and the rhumb line from the 
east coast of Korea at latitude 38[deg] N. to the west coast of 
Hokkaido, Japan, at latitude 43[deg]12[min] N., is a Winter Seasonal 
Area.
    (i) Seasonal periods:

Winter: December 1 to February 28/29.
Summer: March 1 to November 30.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10069, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9016, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.30-35  The Winter North Atlantic Load Line.

    (a) The part of the North Atlantic referred to in Sec. 42.20-
75(d)(1) comprises:
    (1) That part of the North Atlantic Winter Seasonal Zone II which 
lies between the meridians of 15[deg] W. and 50[deg] W.; and
    (2) The whole of the North Atlantic Winter Seasonal Zone I, the 
Shetland Islands to be considered as being on the boundary.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10069, July 12, 1968]



            Subpart 42.50_Load Line Certificates_Model Forms



Sec. 42.50-1  General.

    (a) The provisions of this subpart set forth the requirements for 
the text of the various load line certificates issued to vessels 
complying with the applicable requirements in this part. See Sec. Sec. 
42.07-35 and 42.07-40 for requirements regarding load line assigning and 
issuing authorities. See Sec. 42.07-45 for requirements regarding load 
line certificates, their text and arrangement.
    (b) The 1966 international load line certificate and exemption 
certificate shall be the same as set forth in this subpart in the model 
Forms A1, A2, A3, and E1, except for the following authorized variations 
which shall also apply to model Forms B, C1, C2, and C3:
    (1) As indicated in Sec. 42.13-30, the freeboards and load line 
marks which are not applicable to a specific vessel need not be entered 
on the certificate issued.
    (2) The provisions of Note 3 on the front of the certificate forms 
(other than Model E1) may be changed to correctly describe the situation 
applicable to the vessel concerning information and instructions 
furnished the master about loading and ballasting the vessel to provide 
a guide as to stability under

[[Page 55]]

various conditions and as to avoid unacceptable stresses in the vessel's 
structure.
    (c) In the load line certificate the assigning and issuing authority 
shall set forth its full official designation; i.e., its legal name, 
address of home office, and reference to the authorization from the 
Commandant where an assigning and issuing authority other than the 
American Bureau of Shipping is designated.

[CGFR 68-126, 34 FR 9017, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.50-5  International load line certificates.

    (a) The various forms of certificates certifying to the correctness 
of the load line marks assigned under the regulations in this subchapter 
and/or certain exemptions therefrom for U.S.-flag vessels engaged in 
foreign voyages, or engaged in coastwise or intercoastal voyages 
(provided such vessels qualify to engage in foreign voyages without 
restriction), are A1, A2, A3, and E1. The detailed application of these 
forms is as specified in Sec. 42.07-45 (e), (f), and (h).
    (b) The text and arrangement of the printed portions of Form A1 
(printed front and back) are as follows:

               International Load Line Certificate (1966)

                                [Form A1]

    (Official seal of issuing authority.)
    (Certificate No. ------)

    Issued under the provisions of the International Convention on Load 
Lines, 1966, under the authority of the Government of the United States 
of America, and the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard:
    By

         (Insert full official designation of issuing authority)

________________________________________________________________________

    and duly authorized for assigning purposes under the provisions of 
the Convention.

 
                                                                                          Length (L) as defined
             Name of ship                 Official number or        Port of registry      in Article 2(8) i.e.,
                                         distinctive letters                                 46 CFR 42.13-15
 
Freeboard assigned as: \1\             A new ship.............  Type of ship: \1\        Type ``A''.
                                       An existing ship.......                           Type ``B''.
                                                                                         Type ``B'' with reduced
                                                                                          freeboard.
                                                                                         Type ``B'' with
                                                                                          increased freeboard.
 
 FREEBOARD FROM DECK LINE LOAD LINE
 
Tropical.............................  ---- (inches)..........  (T)....................  ---- (inches) above
                                                                                          (S).
Summer...............................  ---- (inches)..........  (S)....................  Upper edge of line at
                                                                                          level of center of
                                                                                          ring.
Winter...............................  ---- (inches)..........  (W)....................  ---- (inches) below
                                                                                          (S).
Winter (North Atlantic)..............  ---- (inches)..........  (WNA)..................  ---- (inches) below
                                                                                          (S).
Allowance for fresh water for all freeboards...........................................  ---- (inches).
 

 (All measurements are to upper edge of the respective horizontal lines)

    The upper edge of the deck line from which these freeboards are 
measured is ---- inches above or below the top of the ---- deck at side; 
i.e., freeboard \1\ deck.

[[Page 56]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.004

    Date of initial or periodical survey ----------------
    This is to certify that this ship has been surveyed and that the 
freeboards have been assigned and load lines shown above have been 
marked in accordance with the International Convention on Load Lines, 
1966.
    This certificate is valid until --------,\2\ subject to annual 
surveys in accordance with Article 14(1)(c) of the Convention, and 
endorsement thereof on the reverse side of the certificate.
    Issued at ------------------ (Place of issue of certificate), ------
--------------, 19---- (Date of issue)

________________________________________________________________________

             (Signature of official issuing the certificate)

                                                        [Seal of issuing
                                                              authority]
    The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said 
Government to issue this certificate.

                                                             (Signature)

                                  notes

    1. When a ship departs from a port situated on a river or inland 
waters, deeper loading shall be permitted corresponding to the weight of 
fuel and all other materials required for consumption between the point 
of departure and the sea.
    2. When a ship is in fresh water of unit density, the appropriate 
load line may be submerged by the amount of the fresh water allowance 
shown above. Where the density is other than unity, an allowance shall 
be made proportional to the difference between 1.025 and the actual 
density.
    3. It is the owner's responsibility to furnish the master with 
information and instructions for loading and ballasting this vessel to 
provide guidance as to stability of the vessel under varying conditions 
of service and to avoid unacceptable stresses in the vessel's structure.
    \1\ The issuing authority is authorized to delete or change words 
whenever it is inapplicable to a specific vessel and to arrange wording 
so appropriate word insertions may be made, which accurately describe 
the facts.
    \2\ At the expiration of this certificate, applicable reissuance 
should be obtained in accordance with the Load Line Regulations.

                      (Reverse Side of Certificate)

                             annual surveys

    This is to certify that at an annual survey required by Article 
14(1)(c) of the Convention, this ship was found to comply with the 
relevant provisions of the Convention.

  Place.................................  Date
 
 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
  Place.................................  Date
 
 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
  Place.................................  Date
 
 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
  Place.................................  Date
 
 

[[Page 57]]

 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
 
                   extension of load line certificate
 
The provisions of the Convention being fully complied with by this ship,
the validity of this certificate is, in accordance with Article 19(2) of
                     the Convention, extended until.
  Place.................................  Date
 
 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
 

                                  notes

    4. The Winter North Atlantic Load Line applies only to vessels of 
328 feet in length or less, which enter any part of the North Atlantic 
Ocean during the winter months as defined by the Load Line Regulations 
in 46 CFR 42.30-5 and 42.30-35. The periods during which the other 
seasonal load lines apply in different parts of the world are as stated 
in the Load Line Regulations in 46 CFR 42.30-5 to 42.30-30, inclusive.
    5. The Load Line Certificate will be canceled by the Commandant, 
U.S. Coast Guard, if:
    (a) The annual surveys have not been carried out within 3 months 
either way of each anniversary of the certificate date.
    (b) The certificate is not endorsed to show that the ship has been 
surveyed as indicated in (a).
    (c) Material alterations have been made to the hull or 
superstructure of the vessel, such as would necessitate the assignment 
of an increased freeboard.
    (d) The fittings and appliances for the protection of the openings, 
guardrails, freeing ports, or the means of access to the crew's quarters 
have not been maintained in as effective a condition as they were when 
the certificate was issued.
    (e) The structural strength of the ship is lowered to such an extent 
that the ship is unsafe.
    6. When this certificate has expired or has been canceled, it must 
be delivered to the issuing authority.

________________________________________________________________________
    (c) The text and arrangement of the printed portion of Form A2 shall 
be identical with the information on the face and reverse sides of Form 
A1 certificate in paragraph (b) of this section except for the 
identification of model form, description of the ``Freeboard from deck 
line,'' the ``Load Line,'' and the illustration of load line marks, 
which shall be as follows:

               International Load Line Certificate (1966)

                                [Form A2]

                              * * * * * * *

 
                                        FREEBOARD FROM DECK
                                                LINE                                            LOAD LINE
 
Tropical
Summer..............................  ---- (inches)..........  .......................  Upper edge of line at
                                                                                         level of center of
                                                                                         ring.
Winter
Winter--North Atlantic..............  ---- (inches)..........  (WNA)..................  Upper edge of line ----
                                                                                         (inches) below upper
                                                                                         edge at level of center
                                                                                         of ring.
  Allowance for fresh water for all freeboards........................................  ---- (inches).
 

 (All measurements are to upper edge of the respective horizontal lines)

    The upper edge of the deck line from which these freeboards are 
measured is ---- inches above or below the top of the -------- deck at 
side; i.e., freeboard \1\ deck.

[[Page 58]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.005

                              * * * * * * *

    \1\ The issuing authority is authorized to delete or change words 
whenever it is inapplicable to a specific vessel and to arrange wording 
so appropriate word insertions may be made, which accurately describe 
the facts.

________________________________________________________________________
    (d) The text and arrangement of the printed portion of Form A3 shall 
be identical with the information on the face and reverse sides of Form 
A1 certificate in paragraph (b) of this section except for the 
identification of model form, description of the ``Freeboard from deck 
line,'' the ``Load Line,'' and the illustration of load line marks, 
which shall be as follows:

               International Load Line Certificate (1966)

                                [Form A3]

                              * * * * * * *

    The timber freeboards given in this certificate are applicable only 
when this ship carries a timber deck cargo and complies with special 
requirements of the Load Line Regulations regarding timber deck cargoes.

 
                                         FREEBOARD FROM DECK
                                                 LINE                                           LOAD LINE
 
Tropical.............................  ---- (inches)..........  (T)....................  ---- (inches) above
                                                                                          (S).
Summer...............................  ---- (inches)..........  (S)....................  Upper edge of line at
                                                                                          level of center of
                                                                                          ring.
Winter...............................  ---- (inches)..........  (W)....................  ---- (inches) below
                                                                                          (S).
Winter--North Atlantic...............  ---- (inches)..........  (WNA)..................  ---- (inches) below (S)
Timber--tropical.....................  ---- (inches)..........  (LT)...................  ---- (inches) above
                                                                                          (LS).
Timber--summer.......................  ---- (inches)..........  (LS)...................  ---- (inches) above
                                                                                          (S).
Timber--winter.......................  ---- (inches)..........  (LW)...................  ---- (inches) below
                                                                                          (LS).
Timber--winter--North Atlantic.......  ---- (inches)..........  (LWNA).................  ---- (inches) below
                                                                                          (LS).
  Allowance for fresh water for all freeboards other than timber.......................  ---- (inches).
  Allowance for fresh water for all timber freeboards..................................  ---- (inches).
 

 (All measurements are to upper edge of the respective horizontal lines)

    The upper edge of the deck line from which these freeboards are 
measured is ---- inches above or below the top of the -------- deck at 
side; i.e., freeboard \1\ deck.

[[Page 59]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.006

                              * * * * * * *

    \1\ The issuing authority is authorized to delete or change words 
whenever it is inapplicable to a specific vessel and to arrange wording 
so appropriate word insertions may be made, which accurately describe 
the facts.

________________________________________________________________________

    (e) The text and arrangement of the printed portions of Form E1 are 
as follows:

              International Load Line Exemption Certificate

                                [Form E1]

    (Official seal of issuing authority.)
    (Certificate No. ---- )
    Issued under the provisions of the International Convention on Load 
Lines, 1966, under the authority of the Government of the United States 
of America, and the Commandant U.S. Coast Guard:
By______________________________________________________________________

         (Insert full official designation of issuing authority)

    and duly authorized for assigning and exemption purposes under the 
provisions of the Convention.

 
                                  Official numbers of
         Name of ship             distinctive letters   Port of registry
 
 
 
 

    This is to certify that the above-mentioned ship is exempted from 
the provisions of the 1966 Convention, under the authority conferred by 
Article 6(2),\1\ Article 6(4),\1\ of the Convention referred to above 
and that this ship has been surveyed accordingly.
    The provisions of the Convention from which the ship is exempted 
under Article 6(2) are:

    The voyage for which exemption is granted under Article 6(4) is:
From:___________________________________________________________________
To:_____________________________________________________________________
    Conditions, if any, on which the exemption is granted under either 
Article 6(2) or Article 6(4):


[[Page 60]]


    This certificate is valid until --------,\2\ subject, where 
appropriate, to annual surveys in accordance with Article 14(1)(c) of 
the Convention, and endorsement thereof on the reverse side of the 
certificate.

    Issued at

                     (Place of issue of certificate)

                             (Date of issue)

             (Signature of official issuing the certificate)

                                                        [Seal of issuing
                                                              authority]
    The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said 
Government to issue this certificate.

                                                             (Signature)
    \1\ The issuing authority is authorized to delete whichever 
reference is inapplicable.
    \2\ At the expiration of this certificate, applicable reissuance 
should be obtained in accordance with the Load Line Regulations, if 
permitted.

                 (Reverse side of exemption certificate)

                             annual surveys

    This is to certify that this ship continues to comply with the 
conditions under which this exemption was granted.

Place...................................  Date
 
 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
  Place.................................  Date
 
 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
  Place.................................  Date
 
 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
  Place.................................  Date
 
 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
 

                   extension of load line certificate

    This ship continues to comply with the conditions under which this 
exemption was granted and the validity of this certificate is, in 
accordance with Article 19(4)(a) of the Convention, extended until.

  Place.................................  Date
 
 
                (Signature and seal of issuing authority)
 


[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10070, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9017, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 42.50-10  Load line certificates for nonadherent foreign flag vessels.

    (a) The form of load line certificate certifying to the correctness 
of the load line marks assigned under the regulations in this subchapter 
to nonadherent foreign flag vessels as specified in Sec. 42.07-45(e)(2) 
is:
    (1) Form B for general use. The period of validity shall be as 
expressed in Sec. 42.09-20(c).
    (b) The text and arrangement of the printed portion of Form B shall 
be identical with the information on the

[[Page 61]]

face and reverse sides of Form A1 certificate in Sec. 42.50-5(b) except 
for title of certificate, model form, the first paragraph, and the 
wording of the certificate for issuance and revalidation, which shall be 
as follows:

                          Load Line Certificate

                                (Form B)

    (Official seal of issuing authority.)
    (Certificate No. ---- )
    Issued under the authority of the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, 
United States of America, under the provisions of the Load Line Act of 
March 2, 1929, as amended (46 U.S.C. 85-85g), and the Load Line 
Regulations in 46 CFR part 42:
By______________________________________________________________________

         (Insert full official designation of issuing authority)

    and duly authorized for assigning purposes under the provisions of 
the Load Line Act of March 2, 1929, as amended.

                              * * * * * * *

    This is to certify that this ship has been surveyed and the 
freeboards have been assigned and load lines shown above have been 
marked upon the vessel in manner and location as required by the Load 
Line Regulations of the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, in 46 CFR part 42.
    This certificate remains in force until --------,\2\ subject to 
annual revalidation in accordance with the Load Line Regulations, and 
endorsement thereof on the reverse side of this certificate.

    Issued at ------------------------ (Place of issue of certificate), 
--------------------, 19---- (Date of issue)

             (Signature of official issuing the certificate)

                                                        [Seal of issuing
    authority]

                              * * * * * * *

    \2\ Expiration date is not to exceed 5 years from original date of 
issue of this certificate. At expiration applicable reissuance of this 
certificate should be obtained in accordance with the Load Line 
Regulations.

                              * * * * * * *

                      (Reverse Side of Certificate)

                   annual revalidation of certificate

    This is to certify that the provisions of the Load Line Regulations 
of the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, are fully complied with by the 
condition of this ship on the dates indicated, and in each case this 
certificate is revalidated for a 1 year interval as follows:

  (1) Until..................
  Place......................  Date...........
                                                (Signature and seal
                                                 of issuing
                                                 authority)
  (1) Until..................
  Place......................  Date...........
                                                (Signature and seal
                                                 of issuing
                                                 authority)
  (1) Until..................
  Place......................  Date...........
                                                (Signature and seal
                                                 of issuing
                                                 authority)
  (1) Until..................
  Place......................  Date...........
                                                (Signature and seal
                                                 of issuing
                                                 authority)
 


[CGFR 68-126, 34 FR 9017, June 5, 1969]

[[Page 62]]



Sec. 42.50-15  Coastwise load line certificates for U.S.-flag vessels.

    (a) The forms of the coastwise load line certificate, other than for 
special service which are provided for in part 44 of this subchapter, 
certifying to the correctness of the load line marks assigned under the 
regulations in this part are C1, C2 and C3. The detailed application of 
these forms is as specified in Sec. 42.07-45(e).
    (b) Space shall be provided on the face of each of the coastwise 
load line certificates so that there may be entered thereon a record of 
the restrictions applicable to the vessel, if any.
    (c) The text and arrangement of the printed portions of Form C1 are 
as follows:

                     Coastwise Load Line Certificate

                                [Form C1]

    (Official seal of issuing authority.)
    (Certificate No. ---- )
    Issued under the authority of the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, 
under the provisions of the Coastwise Load Line Act, 1935, as amended 
(46 U.S.C. 88-88g), and the Load Line Regulations in 46 CFR part 42:
By______________________________________________________________________

         (Insert full official designation of issuing authority)

    and duly authorized for assigning purposes under the provisions of 
this law for vessels engaging in coastwise and/or intercoastal voyages.

 
                                          Official number or                              Length (L) as defined
             Name of ship                distinctive letters        Port or registry        in 46 CFR 42.13-15
 
Freeboard assigned as: \1\...........  A new ship.............  Type of ship: \1\......  Type ``A''.
                                       An existing ship.......                           Type ``B''.
                                                                                         Type ``B'' with reduced
                                                                                          freeboard.
                                                                                         Type ``B'' with
                                                                                          increased freeboard.
 
                                                                  freeboard from deck           load line
                                                                          line
 
Tropical.............................  ---- (inches)..........  (T)....................  ---- (inches) above
                                                                                          (S).
Summer...............................  ---- (inches)..........  (S)....................  ---- Upper edge of line
                                                                                          at level of center of
                                                                                          ring.
Winter...............................  ---- (inches)..........  (W)....................  ---- (inches) below
                                                                                          (S).
  Allowance for fresh water for all freeboards.........................................  ---- (inches)
 

 (All measurements are to upper edge of the respective horizontal lines)

    The upper edge of the deck line from which these freeboards are 
measured is ---- inches above or below the top of the -------- deck at 
side; i.e., freeboard \1\ deck.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.007

                              * * * * * * *

Date of initial or periodical survey____________________________________
    The following is a record of the restrictions applicable to the 
above named ship:


[[Page 63]]



             (List restrictions. If none, insert ``None.'')

    This is to certify that this ship has been surveyed and that the 
freeboards have been assigned and load lines shown above have been 
marked in accordance with the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, Coastwise 
Load Line Regulations in 46 CFR parts 42 to 46, inclusive as applicable.
    This certificate remains in force until --------,\2\ subject to 
annual surveys in accordance with applicable Load Line Regulations, and 
endorsement thereof on the reverse side of the certificate.

Issued at_______________________________________________________________

             (Place of issue of certificate) (Date of issue)

                                    By

             (Signature of official issuing the certificate)

                       [Seal of issuing authority]

                                  notes

    1. When a ship departs from a port situated on a river or inland 
waters, deeper loading shall be permitted corresponding to the weight of 
fuel and all other materials required for consumption between the point 
of departure and the sea.
    2. When a ship is in fresh water of unit density the appropriate 
load line may be submerged by the amount of the fresh water allowance 
shown above. Where the density is other than unity, an allowance shall 
be made proportional to the difference between 1.025 and the actual 
density.
    3. It is the owner's responsibility to furnish the master with 
information and instructions for loading and ballasting this vessel to 
provide guidance as to stability of the vessel under varying conditions 
of service and to avoid unacceptable stresses in the vessel's structure.

    \1\ The issuing authority is authorized to delete or change words 
inapplicable to a specific vessel and to arrange wording so appropriate 
word insertions may be made, which accurately describe the facts.
    \2\ At the expiration of this certificate, applicable reissuance 
should be obtained in accordance with the Load Line Regulations.

            (Reverse side of Coastwise Load Line Certificate)

                             annual surveys

    This is to certify that this ship has been surveyed on the dates 
indicated to determine in each case whether this certificate should 
remain in force for an additional 1 year and the survey has been 
completed to my satisfaction.

(1)............................
     Signature of Surveyor             Place               Date
(2)............................
     Signature of Surveyor             Place               Date
(3)............................
     Signature of Surveyor             Place               Date
(4)............................
     Signature of Surveyor             Place         Date
 

                   extension of load line certificate

    The provisions of the Coastwise Load Line Regulations of the 
Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, being fully complied with by this ship, 
this certificate is extended under the authority of 46 CFR 42.07-45 and 
42.09-15 until.

  Place...........................  Date.......  .......................
                                    ...........  .......................
 
 
          (Name of issuing authority and signature of Surveyor)
 


[[Page 64]]

                                  notes

    4. The periods and areas during which the seasonal load lines apply 
are as stated in the Load Line Regulations in 46 CFR Subpart 42.30, as 
appropriate.
    5. This Coastwise Load Line Certificate will be canceled by the 
Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, if:
    (a) The annual surveys have not been carried out within three months 
either way of each anniversary of the certificate date.
    (b) The certificate is not endorsed to show that the ship has been 
surveyed as indicated in (a).
    (c) Material alterations have been made to the hull or 
superstructure of the vessel, such as would necessitate the assignment 
of an increased freeboard.
    (d) The fittings and appliances for the protection of the openings, 
guardrails, freeing ports, or the means of access to the crew's quarters 
have not been maintained in as effective a condition as they were when 
the certificate was issued.
    (e) The structural strength of the ship is lowered to such an extent 
that the ship is unsafe.
    6. When this certificate has expired or has been canceled, it must 
be delivered to the issuing authority.

                              * * * * * * *

________________________________________________________________________
    (d) The text and arrangement of the printed portion of Form C2 shall 
be identical with the information on the face and revese sides of Form 
C1 certificate in paragraph (c) of this section except for the 
identification of model form, description of the ``Freeboard from deck 
line'', the ``Load Line'', and the illustration of load line marks, 
which shall be as follows:

                     Coastwise Load Line Certificate

                                [Form C2]

                              * * * * * * *

 
                                  freeboard from deck
                                         line               load line
 
Tropical......................  ---- (inches).........  Upper edge of
 Summer.......................  ......do..............   line at level
 Winter.......................  ......do..............   center of ring.
                                                         Do.
  Allowance for fresh water for all freeboards........  ---- (inches).
 

 (All measurements are to upper edge of the respective horizontal lines)

    The upper edge of the deck line from which these freeboards are 
measured is ---- inches above or below the top of the -------- deck at 
side; i.e., freeboard \1\ deck.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.008

                              * * * * * * *

    (e) The text and arrangement of the printed portion of Form C3 shall 
be identical with the information on the face and reverse sides of Form 
C1 certificate in paragraph (c) of this section except for the 
identification of model form, description of the ``Freeboard from deck 
line,'' the ``Load Line,'' and the illustration of load line marks, 
which shall be as follows:

[[Page 65]]

                     Coastwise Load Line Certificate

                                [Form C3]

                              * * * * * * *

    The timber freeboards given in this certificate are applicable only 
when this ship carries a timber deck cargo and complies with the special 
requirements of the Load Line Regulations regarding timber deck cargoes.

 
                                         freeboard from deck
                                            line load line                                      load line
 
Tropical.............................  ---- (inches)..........  (T)....................  ---- (inches) above
                                                                                          (S).
Summer...............................  ---- (inches)..........  (S)....................  Upper edge of line at
                                                                                          level of center of
                                                                                          ring.
Winter...............................  ---- (inches)..........  (W)....................  ---- (inches) below
                                                                                          (S).
Timber--tropical.....................  ---- (inches)..........  (LT)...................  ---- (inches) above
                                                                                          (LS).
Timber--summer.......................  ---- (inches)..........  (LS)...................  ---- (inches) above
                                                                                          (S).
Timber--winter.......................  ---- (inches)..........  (LW)...................  ---- (inches) below
                                                                                          (LS).
  Allowance for fresh water for all freeboards other than timber.......................  ---- (inches).
  Allowance for fresh water for all timber freeboards..................................  ---- (inches).
 

 (All measurements are to upper edge of the respective horizontal lines)

    The upper edge of the deck line from which these freeboards are 
measured is ---- inches above or below the top of the -------- deck at 
side; i.e., freeboard \1\ deck.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.009

                              * * * * * * *

    \1\ The issuing authority is authorized to delete or change words 
inapplicable to a specific vessel and to arrange wording so appropriate 
word insertions may be made, which accurately describe the facts.

[CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 10073, July 12, 1968, as amended by CGFR 68-126, 34 
FR 9018, June 5, 1969]

                           PART 43 [RESERVED]



PART 44_SPECIAL SERVICE LIMITED DOMESTIC VOYAGES--Table of Contents




                        Subpart A_Administration

Sec.
44.01-1 Establishment of load lines for special services.
44.01-5 Administration; special service.
44.01-10 Approval by Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, of special service.
44.01-11 Assignment and marking load lines; special service.
44.01-12 Voyage limits; special service.
44.01-13 Heavy weather plan.
44.01-15 Special service certificate.
44.01-20 New and existing vessels; special service.

        Subpart B_Rules for Assigning Special Service Load Lines

44.05-1 General.
44.05-5 Definitions.
44.05-10 Load line markings.
44.05-15 Existing vessels.
44.05-20 Conditions of assignment.
44.05-25 Freeboards.
44.05-30 Load line certificate.
44.05-35 Form of load line certificate.

   Subpart C_Rules for Assigning Working Freeboards to Hopper Dredges

44.300 Applicability.
44.310 Definitions.
44.320 Submission of plans and calculations.
44.330 Obtaining working freeboards for hopper dredges.
44.340 Operating restrictions.


[[Page 66]]


    Authority: 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116; Department of Homeland Security 
Delegation No. 0170.1.

    Source: CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16755, Dec. 30, 1965, unless otherwise 
noted.



                        Subpart A_Administration



Sec. 44.01-1  Establishment of load lines for special services.

    (a) Load lines are established for steam colliers, tugs, barges, and 
self-propelled barges engaged in special services in conformity with 
regulations in this part.
    (b) Load lines for steam colliers, barges, and self-propelled barges 
engaged on specially limited coastwise voyages as described in Sec. 
44.01-12 shall be established pursuant to the regulations in this part.
    (c) Variance for tugs is not permitted.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16755, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by USCG-1998-4442, 
63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 44.01-5  Administration; special service.

    (a) The administrative provisions of Sec. Sec. 42.01-1 to 42.11-20 
inclusive of this subchapter, relating to vessels engaged in foreign and 
coastwise voyages, where applicable, shall apply to vessels subject to 
this part except as modified in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b) Application for the assignment of load lines under this part for 
the types of vessels described in Sec. 44.01-1 shall be made in writing 
to the American Bureau of Shipping unless another society has been 
specifically approved by the Commandant as a load line assigning 
authority. In the latter case application shall be made to the society 
so approved. Applications shall state the following information:
    (1) Name of vessel and official number.
    (2) Type of vessel (steam collier, barge, or self-propelled barge).
    (3) Date keel was laid.
    (4) Normal sea speed of vessel.
    (5) Limits of voyage for which approval is requested.
    (6) Normal maximum distance offshore in course of voyage.
    (7) Length of voyage in days and nautical miles.
    (8) Statement of weather conditions to be expected.
    (9) Cargo to be carried.
    (10) Whether vessel is to be operated manned or unmanned.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16755, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10076, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 44.01-10  Approval by Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, of special service.

    (a) Subject to the conditions contained in this part, the 
Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, has determined that load lines at variance 
from the position fixed by the International Convention on Load Lines, 
1966, but not above the actual line of safety, may be assigned steam 
colliers, barges, or self-propelled barges (separately by class) for 
certain specifically limited coastwise voyages between ports of the 
continental United States or between islands of a group over which the 
United States has jurisdiction.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16755, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10076, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 44.01-11  Assignment and marking load lines; special service.

    (a) The assignment and marking of special service load lines and 
certifications thereof shall be in accordance with this part to the 
satisfaction of the American Bureau of Shipping. The load line 
certificate shall define the voyage limits and seasonal restrictions 
governing the validity of the load lines.



Sec. 44.01-12  Voyage limits; special service.

    (a) Special service load lines may be assigned for operation not 
more than a specified limited distance offshore which shall not exceed 
20 nautical miles. The offshore distance shall be measured from the 
coastline except where a line of inland waters has been otherwise 
established.
    (b) For continental United States ports, special service load lines 
may be issued for operation between but not to exceed the extreme port 
limits specified below, or for operation between intermediate ports 
within the extreme limits specified:

[[Page 67]]

    (1) Central and Northern Atlantic Coast--From Norfolk, Virginia, to 
Eastport, Maine.
    (2) Southeast Atlantic Coast--from Key West, Florida, to 
Jacksonville, Florida, except that the special service load line is not 
valid for manned vessels during the hurricane season, i.e., July 1st to 
November 15th, both dates inclusive, unless the vessel is operated in 
accordance with a Coast Guard approved heavy weather plan.
    (3) Gulf of Mexico Coast--from the mouth of the Rio Grande River, 
Texas, to Key West, Florida, except that the special service load line 
is not valid for manned vessels during the hurricane season, i.e., July 
1st to November 15th, both dates inclusive, unless the vessel is 
operated in accordance with a Coast Guard approved heavy weather plan.
    (4) Pacific Coast--From San Francisco, California, to San Diego, 
California.
    (c) Assignment of special service load lines for voyage limits 
between the islands of a group over which the United States has 
jurisdiction shall be made only upon authorization by the Commandant, 
U.S. Coast Guard, after submittal to him of the information called for 
by Sec. 44.01-5(b).

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16755, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGD 79-142, 45 FR 
57402, Aug. 28, 1980]



Sec. 44.01-13  Heavy weather plan.

    (a) Each heavy weather plan under Sec. 44.01-12(b) must be prepared 
by the vessel owner or operator and approved by the cognizant Officer in 
Charge, Marine Inspection. Approval of a heavy weather plan is limited 
to the current hurricane season.
    (b) The cognizant Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, is--
    (1) The Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, within whose area the 
work site is located for a vessel that will be operating in a limited 
geographical area; or
    (2) The Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, within whose area the 
point of departure is located for a transiting vessel.
    (c) The required content of the heavy weather plan is determined on 
a case-by-case basis by the cognizant Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection, based on knowledge of the local conditions. The heavy 
weather plan may contain weather radio frequencies and time schedules 
for seeking a harbor of safe refuge. A single heavy weather plan may be 
accepted for more than one vessel operating at a single work site or on 
a single route.
    (d) The vessel owner or operator must place a copy of the heavy 
weather plan on each vessel to which it applies and ensure that it 
remains there throughout the hurricane season.

[CGD 79-142, 45 FR 57402, Aug. 28, 1980]



Sec. 44.01-15  Special service certificate.

    (a) The use of the special service load line certificate issued 
under this part is limited to voyages only as described in the 
certificate. If the vessel engages on any voyage not contemplated by the 
certificate where a load line is required, the load line prescribed by 
part 42 of this subchapter shall govern.
    (b) Vessels engaged on special services in the coastwise trade and 
the interisland trade will be certificated on the form shown in Sec. 
44.05-35.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16755, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10076, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 44.01-20  New and existing vessels; special service.

    (a) A new vessel marked with load lines for special service on a 
coastwise or inter-island voyage is a vessel whose keel was laid on or 
after September 28, 1937. An existing vessel is one whose keel was laid 
before that date.



        Subpart B_Rules for Assigning Special Service Load Lines



Sec. 44.05-1  General.

    (a) The load line regulations in this part are complementary to 
those in part 42 or part 45 (Great Lakes load line regulations) of this 
subchapter, as reference is made thereto.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16755, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10076, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 44.05-5  Definitions.

    (a) A steam collier is a vessel mechanically propelled, and 
specially designed for the carriage of coal in bulk.

[[Page 68]]

    (b) A towed barge is a vessel without sufficient means of self-
propulsion and which requires to be towed.
    (c) A self-propelled barge is a vessel mechanically propelled of the 
type specially designed for use in limited coastwise and Great Lakes 
service and capable of transiting interconnecting canals.



Sec. 44.05-10  Load line markings.

    (a) The load line marks on the vessel's sides must be in accordance 
with Sec. 42.13-25(a) of this subchapter, except seasonal markings such 
as ``Winter North Atlantic'' which are not applicable to the voyage are 
omitted.
    (b) In the case of vessels which engage in special services on 
coastwise voyages and voyages on the Great Lakes, the marks on the 
vessel's sides are to be in accordance with Figure 44.05-10(b), except 
that the lines marked ``SW'' and ``MS'' shall be used only where 
applicable.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.010

                           Figure 44.05-10(b)
    (c) The load lines aft of the combined disk and diamond will be 
applicable for voyages on the Great Lakes and those on the forward side 
will be applicable to limited coastwise voyages. The summer line on the 
ocean will correspond to the summer line on the Lakes and the winter 
line on the ocean will correspond to the intermediate line on the Lakes.
    (d) In the case of vessels which operate both on special service 
coastwise voyages and on unlimited coastwise voyages, the marks on the 
ship's sides are to be in accordance with figure 44.05-10 (d). The load 
lines aft of the disk will be applicable to voyages in special service 
coastwise or inter-island voyages and those on the forward side will be 
applicable to unlimited coastwise voyages. (A vessel marked for both 
special service and unlimited coastwise voyages and furnished with a 
load line certificate on the international form shall, when entering the 
foreign trade, arrange that the load line markings are in accord with 
the vessel's international load line certificate by the elimination of 
the marks aft of the disk.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.011

                           Figure 45.05-10(d)

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16755, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGD 80-120, 47 FR 
5723, Feb. 8, 1982; USCG-2004-18884, 69 FR 58345, Sept. 30, 2004]



Sec. 44.05-15  Existing vessels.

    (a) In assigning load lines to an existing vessel the provisions of 
the regulations in this part shall be complied with in principle and 
detail insofar as is reasonable and practicable, having regard to the 
proven efficacy of existing arrangements for a special service voyage, 
and having particular regard to the provision of sufficient means for 
the protection and safety of the crew.
    (b) Where it is neither reasonable nor practicable to comply with 
this part in its entirety, the assigning authority will, in each case, 
report to the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, the specific matters in 
which the vessel is deficient with such recommendations as may seem 
desirable. Upon the receipt of this report the Commandant, U.S. Coast 
Guard, shall determine such addition to the freeboard as will, in the 
judgment of the Commandant, U.S.

[[Page 69]]

Coast Guard, make the vessel as safe as if it had fully complied with 
this part.



Sec. 44.05-20  Conditions of assignment.

    (a) Steam colliers. The conditions of assignment for steam colliers 
shall be in accordance with the requirements of part 42 of this 
subchapter, except that in the case of steam colliers constructed with 
bulwarks, the freeing port may be of a practically continuous slot type, 
located as low as possible, the clear area of the slot to be not less 
than 20 percent of the superficial area of the unpierced bulwarks. If, 
due to sheer, or other conditions, the assigning authority considers 
that extra local provision should be made for freeing decks of water, 
the slots are to be located so as to have maximum efficacy.
    (b) Towed barges. The conditions of assignment for towed cargo 
barges where the cargo is carried under deck shall be in accordance with 
Sec. Sec. 45.10-5 to 45.10-100 of this subchapter. In the case of tank 
barges and cargo barges carrying cargo only on deck, compliance will 
also be required with the supplementary conditions of Sec. Sec. 45.20-1 
to 45.20-70 of this subchapter. In the case of cargo barges of the open 
type, assignment will be limited to barges in unmanned operation and the 
construction of the vessel must be such as to satisfy the assigning 
authority that no unusual hazards will be experienced.
    (c) Self-propelled barges. The conditions of assignment for self-
propelled cargo barges carrying cargo under decks shall be in accordance 
with the provisions of Sec. Sec. 45.10-5 to 45.10-100 of this 
subchapter. In the case of self-propelled tank barges and self-propelled 
cargo barges carrying cargo only on deck, compliance will also be 
required with the supplementary conditions of Sec. Sec. 45.20-1 to 
45.20-70 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16755, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10076, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 44.05-25  Freeboards.

    (a) General. (1) When the assigning authority is satisfied that the 
requirements of this part as applicable to the type of vessel under 
consideration are complied with the freeboards will be computed as 
described in this section.
    (2) The requirements in Sec. Sec. 42.09-1 and 42.09-10 that relate 
to the assignment of freeboards and to stability are applicable to each 
vessel subject to the requirements in this part.
    (3) The assigning authority that assigns a vessel subject to the 
requirements in this part a freeboard under part 45 of this chapter 
shall do so in accordance with the requirements in effect as of October 
1, 1972.
    (b) Steam colliers. Steam colliers that have constructional features 
similar to those of a tanker which afford extra invulnerability against 
the sea may be assigned a reduction of freeboard from that determined 
under part 42 of this subchapter. The amount of such reduction shall be 
determined by the assigning authority, in relation to the freeboard 
assigned to tankers, having regard to the degree of compliance with the 
supplementary conditions of assignment laid down for these ships, but 
without regard to the degree of subdivision provided. The freeboard 
assigned to such a vessel shall in no case be less than would be 
assigned the vessel as a tanker, as determined under part 42 of this 
subchapter.
    (c) Towed cargo barges with cargo under deck. The freeboard is to be 
computed under Sec. Sec. 45.15-1 to 45.15-97 of this subchapter. The 
fresh water and seasonal markings where applicable are to be determined 
under part 42 of this subchapter.
    (d) Towed cargo barges with cargo only on deck. The freeboard for 
barges of this type is to be computed in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. Sec. 45.20-1 to 45.20-70 of this subchapter. The 
fresh water and seasonal markings where applicable are to be the same as 
determined under part 42 of this subchapter.
    (e) Towed cargo barges of the open type. The load line shall be 
placed where, in the judgment of the assigning authority, the draft will 
be such that no unusual hazard will be experienced. In general, drafts 
assigned will be such that the barge will remain afloat with a 
reasonable freeboard after flooding of the net available open space.
    (f) Towed tank barges. The freeboard is to be computed in accordance 
with Sec. Sec. 45.20-1 to 45.20-70 of this subchapter. The fresh water 
and seasonal markings

[[Page 70]]

where applicable are to be determined under part 42 of this subchapter.
    (g) Self-propelled cargo barges. The freeboard is to be computed 
under Sec. Sec. 45.15-1 to 45.20-15 of this subchapter. The fresh water 
and seasonal markings where applicable are to be determined under part 
42 of this subchapter.
    (h) Self-propelled tank barges. The freeboard is to be computed in 
accordance with Sec. Sec. 45.20-1 to 45.20-70 of this subchapter. The 
fresh water and seasonal markings where applicable are to be determined 
under part 42 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 17655, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10077, July 12, 1968; CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12290, May 10, 1973]



Sec. 44.05-30  Load line certificate.

    (a) The load line certificates for a special service coastwise or 
special inter-island voyage shall be issued in addition to any other 
applicable load line certificates and shall be on the form shown in 
Sec. 44.05-35.



Sec. 44.05-35  Form of load line certificate.

    (a) Where no other Load Line certificate is issued:

 Load Line Certificate for a Special Service Coastwise or Inter-Island 
                                 Voyage

    Issued under the authority of the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, 
United States of America, under the provisions of the Coastwise Load 
Line Act of August 27, 1935, as amended.
    [Seal]

Issued by_______________________________________________________________
Certificate No._________________________________________________________
    This certificate is valid only for coastwise or inter-island voyages 
that are between the limits of ---------- and ---------- provided the 
vessel is engaged solely in the trade stated herein.

Ship____________________________________________________________________
Official No.____________________________________________________________
Port of registry________________________________________________________
Trade of vessel_________________________________________________________
Gross tonnage___________________________________________________________

 
         Freeboard from deck line                     Load line
 
Tropical (T)..............................  Above (S).
Summer (S)................................  Upper edge of line through
                                             center of disk.
Winter (W)................................  Below (S).
 

*Allowance for fresh water for all freeboards (except on the Great 
Lakes)__________________________________________________________________

    *Where seagoing steamers navigate a river or inland water, deeper 
loading is permitted corresponding to the weight of fuel, etc., required 
for consumption between the point of departure and the open sea.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    The upper edge of the deck line from
which these freeboards are measured is__________________________________
inches above the top of the----deck at side.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.012

    This is to certify that this ship has been surveyed and the 
freeboards and load lines shown above have been found to be correctly 
marked upon the vessel in manner and location as provided by the Load 
Line Regulations of the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, applicable to 
vessels engaged on this special service voyage.

    **This certificate remains in force until ------------------. Issued 
at ------------------on the -------- day of ------------, 19----.

    **Upon the expiration of the certificate renewal must be obtained as 
provided by the Load Line Regulations and the certificate so endorsed. 
Endorsement should also be made in the spaces provided on the occasion 
of each annual inspection required by the Load Line Regulations.

    (Here follows the signature or seal and description of the assigning 
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
authority)

    Notes: (1) In accordance with the Load Line Regulations, the disk or 
diamond and the lines must be permanently marked by center punch marks 
or cutting.
    (2) The load line assignment given by this certificate necessarily 
assumes that the nature and stowage of cargo, balast, etc., are such as 
to secure sufficient stability for the vessel. Accordingly, it is the 
owner's responsibility to furnish the Master of the vessel with 
stability information and instructions when this is necessary to 
maintenance of sufficient stability.
    (On the reverse side of the load line certificate, the provision for 
annual inspection endorsement and for renewal of the certificate is to 
be the same as for vessels engaged in the foreign trade.)

    (b) Where the Special Service Load Line Certificate is issued in 
addition to

[[Page 71]]

a Great Lakes Load Line Certificate, the wording of the Special Service 
Load Line Certificate is to be identical to that given in paragraph (a) 
of this section, but the markings indicated in the form shall be 
replaced by the following markings:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.013

    (c) Where the Special Service Load Line Certificate is issued in 
addition to an Unlimited Coastwise or International Load Line 
Certificate, the wording of the Special Service Load Line Certificate is 
to be identical to that given in paragraph (a) of this section, but the 
markings indicated in the form shall be replaced by the following 
markings:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.014



   Subpart C_Rules for Assigning Working Freeboards to Hopper Dredges

    Source: CGD 76-080, 54 FR 36977, Sept. 6, 1989, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 44.300  Applicability.

    This subpart applies to each self-propelled hopper dredge--
    (a) For which a working freeboard assignment is desired after 
January 1, 1990; and
    (b) That operates with a working freeboard assigned under this 
subpart.



Sec. 44.310  Definitions.

    Hopper dredge means a self-propelled dredge with an open hold or 
hopper in the hull of the dredge that receives dredged material.
    Working freeboard means one-half the distance between the mark of 
the load line assigned under this subchapter and the freeboard deck.



Sec. 44.320  Submission of plans and calculations.

    To request a working freeboard, calculations, plans, and stability 
information necessary to demonstrate compliance with this subpart must 
be submitted to the:
    (a) Commanding Officer, U.S. Coast Guard Marine Safety Center 1900 
Half Street, SW., Suite 1000, Room 525, Washington, DC 20024 by 
visitors, or transmitted by mail to Commanding Officer, U.S. Coast Guard 
Marine Safety Center, JR10-0525, 2100 2nd Street, SW., Washington, DC 
20593, in a written or electronic format. Information for submitting the 
VSP electronically can be found at http://www.uscg.mil/HQ/MSC; or
    (b) American Bureau of Shipping, ABS Plaza, 16855 Northchase Drive, 
Houston, TX 77060.

[CGD 76-080, 54 FR 36977, Sept. 6, 1989, as amended by USCG-1998-4442, 
63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58459, Sept. 29, 
2000; USCG-2007-29018, 72 FR 53965, Sept. 21, 2007]



Sec. 44.330  Obtaining working freeboards for hopper dredges.

    A hopper dredge may be issued a working freeboard on a limited 
service domestic voyage load line certificate or a Great Lakes load line 
certificate if the following are met:
    (a) The hopper dredge structure must have adequate strength for any 
draft up to the working freeboard draft. Dredges built and maintained in 
conformity with the requirements of a classification society recognized 
by the Commandant usually meet this requirement.
    (b) The hopper dredge must--
    (1) Meet subpart I of part 174 of this chapter; and
    (2) Have on its bridge remote draft indicators that:

[[Page 72]]

    (i) Show the fore, aft, and mean draft of the dredge at all times 
while the dredge is operating; and
    (ii) Have each indicator marked with the assigned freeboard and the 
working freeboard.



Sec. 44.340  Operating restrictions.

    (a) Each hopper dredge assigned a working freeboard may be operated 
at drafts from the normal freeboard to the working freeboard if the--
    (1) Seas are not more than 10 feet;
    (2) Winds are not more than 35 knots;
    (3) Area of operation is not more than 20 nautical miles (37 
kilometers) from the mouth of a harbor of safe refuge; and
    (4) Specific gravity of the spoil carried is not more than the 
highest specific gravity of spoil used in the stability calculations 
required by subchapter S of this chapter.
    (b) The Assigning Authority designates on the face of the dredge's 
load line certificate--
    (1) Each restriction contained in paragraph (a)(1) through (a)(3) of 
this section; and
    (2) The maximum specific gravity of the spoils allowed to be 
carried.



PART 45_GREAT LAKES LOAD LINES--Table of Contents




                            Subpart A_General

Sec.
45.1 Purpose.
45.3 Definitions.
45.5 Seasonal application of load lines.
45.9 Seasonal application of load lines for vessels not marked under 
          this part.
45.11 Issue of load line certificate.
45.13 Form of certificate.
45.15 Exemptions.

                        Subpart B_Load Line Marks

45.31 Deck line.
45.33 Diamond.
45.35 Seasonal load lines.
45.37 Salt water load lines.
45.39 Marking.

                          Subpart C_Freeboards

45.51 Types of ships.
45.53 Summer freeboard.
45.55 Freeboard coefficient.
45.57 Correction: Position of deckline.
45.58 Correction: Short superstructure.
45.59 Definitions for superstructure corrections.
45.61 Correction for superstructures and trunks.
45.63 Correction for sheer.
45.65 Excess sheer limitations.
45.67 Sheer measurement.
45.69 Correction for bow height.
45.71 Midsummer freeboard.
45.73 Winter freeboard.
45.75 Intermediate freeboard.
45.77 Salt water freeboard.

                   Subpart D_Conditions of Assignment

45.101 Purpose.
45.103 Structural stress and stability.
45.105 Information supplied to the master.
45.107 Strength of hull.
45.109 Strength of superstructures and deckhouses.
45.111 Strength of bulkheads at ends of superstructures.
45.113 Access openings in bulkheads at ends of enclosed superstructures.
45.115 Bulwarks and guardrails.
45.117 Freeing port area: General.
45.119 Freeing port area; Changes from standard sheer.
45.121 Freeing port area: Changes for trunks and side coamings.
45.123 Freeing port area: Changes for bulwark height.
45.125 Crew passageways.
45.127 Position of structures, openings, and fittings.
45.129 Hull fittings: General.
45.131 Ventilators.
45.133 Air pipes.
45.135 Hull openings at or below freeboard deck.
45.137 Cargo ports.
45.139 Side scuttles.
45.141 Manholes and flush scuttles.
45.143 Hull openings above freeboard deck.
45.145 Hatchway covers.
45.147 Hatchway coamings.
45.149 Machinery space openings.
45.151 Other openings.
45.153 Through-hull piping: General.
45.155 Inlets and discharge piping: Valves.
45.157 Scuppers and gravity drains.
45.159 Special conditions of assignment for type A vessels.

         Subpart E_Unmanned River Barges on Lake Michigan Routes

45.171 Purpose.
45.173 Eligible barges.
45.175 Applicable routes.
45.177 Freeboard requirements.
45.179 Cargo limitations.
45.181 Load line exemption requirements for the Burns Harbor and 
          Milwaukee routes.
45.183 Load line requirements for the St. Joseph and Muskegon routes.

[[Page 73]]

45.185 Tow limitations.
45.187 Weather limitations.
45.191 Pre-departure requirements.
45.193 Towboat power requirements.
45.195 Additional equipment requirements for the Muskegon route.
45.197 Operational plan requirements for the Muskegon route.

Appendix A to Part 45--Load Line Certificate Form

    Authority: 46 U.S.C. 5104, 5108; Department of Homeland Security 
Delegation No. 0170.1.

    Source: CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12290, May 10, 1973, unless otherwise 
noted.



                            Subpart A_General



Sec. 45.1  Purpose.

    This part prescribes requirements for assignment of freeboards, 
issuance of loadline certificates, and marking of loadlines for service 
on the Great Lakes of North America.

[CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12290, May 10, 1973, as amended by USCG-1998-4442, 63 
FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 45.3  Definitions.

    As used in this part:
    (a) Length (L) means 96 percent of the total length on a waterline 
at 85 percent of the least moulded depth measured from the top of the 
keel or the length from the foreside of the stem to the axis of the 
rudder stock on that waterline, if that is greater. In ships designed 
with a rake of keel the waterline on which this length is measured must 
be parallel to the designed waterline.
    (b) Perpendiculars means the forward and after perpendiculars at the 
forward and after ends of the length (L). The forward perpendicular 
coincides with the foreside of the stem on the waterline on which the 
length is measured.
    (c) Amidships means the middle of the length (L).
    (d) Breadth unless expressly provided otherwise, means the maximum 
breadth of the ship, measured amidships to the moulded line of the frame 
in a ship with a metal shell and to the outer surface of the hull in a 
ship with a shell of any other material.
    (e) Moulded Depth means the vertical distance measured amidships 
from the top of the keel to the top of the freeboard deck beam at side 
except that--
    (1) In vessels of other than metal construction, the distance is 
measured from the lower edge of the keel rabbet;
    (2) Where the form at the lower part of the midship section is of a 
hollow character, or where thick garboards are fitted, the distance is 
measured from the point where the line of the flat of the bottom 
continued inwards cuts the side of the keel;
    (3) In ships having rounded gunwales, this distance is measured to 
the point of intersection of the moulded lines of the deck and side, the 
lines extending as though the gunwale were of angular design; and
    (4) Where the freeboard deck is stepped and the raised part of the 
deck extends over the point at which the moulded depth is to be 
determined, the distance is measured to a line of reference extending 
from the lower part of the deck along a line parallel with the raised 
part.
    (f) Depth for Freeboard (D) means--
    (1) Moulded depth amidships plus the thickness of the stringer plate 
with no allowance for sheathing; and
    (2) In a vessel having a rounded gunwale with a radius greater than 
4 percent of the breadth (B) or having topsides of unsual form, the 
depth for freeboard (D) of a vessel having a midship section with 
vertical topsides and with the same round of beam and area of topside 
section equal to that provided by the actual midship section.
    (g) Freeboard means the distance measured vertically downwards 
amidships from the upper edge of the deck line to the upper edge of the 
related load line.
    (h) Freeboard Deck means, normally, the uppermost complete deck 
exposed to weather and sea that has permanent means of closing all 
openings in the weather part thereof and below which all openings in the 
sides of the ship are fitted with permanent means of watertight closings 
except that--
    (1) In a ship having a discontinuous freeboard deck, the lowest line 
of the exposed deck and the continuation of that line parallel to the 
upper part of the deck is the freeboard deck.

[[Page 74]]

    (2) At the option of the owner and subject to the approval of the 
Commandant a lower deck may be designated as the freeboard deck, if it 
is a complete and permanent deck continuous in a fore and aft direction 
at least between the machinery space and peak bulkheads and continuous 
athwartships;
    (3) When this lower deck is stepped the lowest line of the deck and 
the continuation of that line parallel to the upper part of the deck is 
taken as the freeboard deck.
    (i) Superstructure means a deck structure on the freeboard deck, 
extending from side to side of the ship or with the side plating not 
being inboard of the shell plating more than 4 percent of the breadth 
(B). A raised quarterdeck is a superstructure.
    (j) Enclosed superstructure means a superstructure with enclosing 
bulkheads.
    (k) Height of a superstructure means the least vertical height 
measured at side from the top of the superstructure deck beams to the 
top of the freeboard deck beams.
    (l) Length of a superstructure (S) means the mean length of the part 
of the superstructure which extends to the sides of the vessel and lies 
within the length (L).
    (m) Flush deck ship means a ship that has no superstructure on the 
freeboard deck.
    (n) Weathertight means that in any sea conditions water will not 
penetrate into the ship.
    (o) Watertight means designed to withstand a static head of water.
    (p) Exposed positions means exposed to weather and sea.
    (q) Intact bulkhead with respect to superstructure means a bulkhead 
with no openings.
    (r) Steel means steel and materials with which structures can be 
made equivalent to steel with respect to such parameters as yield 
strength, total deflection, flexural life, or resistance to galvanic or 
stress corrosion.



Sec. 45.5  Seasonal application of load lines.

    For the purposes of the law and regulations prohibiting submergence 
of load lines (46 U.S.C. 88c; 46 CFR 42.07-10), the fresh water and salt 
water load lines marked under this part apply during the following 
seasons:
    (a) Summer load lines apply April 16 through April 30 and September 
16 through September 30.
    (b) Except for hopper dredges operating at working freeboards in 
accordance with subpart C of part 44 of this chapter, the Assigning 
Authority may not allow for lesser freeboards.
    (c) Intermediate load lines apply October 1 through October 31 and 
April 1 through April 15.
    (d) Winter load lines apply November 1 through March 31.



Sec. 45.9  Seasonal application of load lines for vessels not marked under this part.

    (a) For the purposes of the law and regulations prohibiting 
submergence of load lines (46 U.S.C. 88c; 46 CFR 42.07-10) the marks 
assigned to vessels holding international load line certificates apply 
during the following seasons:
    (1) Vessels assigned freeboards as new vessels under the 
International Load Line Convention, 1966--
    (i) Winter--November 1 through March 31.
    (ii) Summer--April 1 through April 30 and October 1 through October 
31.
    (iii) Tropical--May 1 through September 30;
    (2) Vessels assigned freeboards as existing vessels under the 
International Load Line Convention, 1966--
    (i) Winter--November 1 through March 31;
    (ii) Summer--April 1 through April 30 and October 1 through October 
31;
    (iii) Tropical--September 16 through September 30;
    (iv) Tropical Fresh--May 1 through September 15.
    (b) Except for hopper dredges operating at working freeboards in 
accordance with subpart C of part 44 of this chapter, the Assigning 
Authority may not allow for lesser freeboards.

[CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12290, May 10, 1973, as amended by CGD 76-080, 54 FR 
36977, Sept. 6, 1989]



Sec. 45.11  Issue of load line certificate.

    (a) A vessel 79 feet in length and more, and 150 gross tons or over, 
the keel of which is laid or which has reached a similar stage of 
construction

[[Page 75]]

after April 14, 1973, must meet the requirements of this part.
    (b) Except as prescribed in paragraph (a) of this section, any 
vessel that meets the requirements in subparts C and D of this part and 
the survey requirements in Sec. Sec. 42.09-15 through 42.09-50 of this 
subchapter is entitled to assignment of freeboards and issue of a load 
line certificate under this part by the Commandant or his authorized 
representative.
    (c) A vessel, the keel of which was laid or was at a similar stage 
of construction before April 14, 1973, that meets the requirements of 
this part that were in effect before April 14, 1973, and the survey 
requirements in Sec. Sec. 42.09-15 through 42.09-50 of this subchapter 
is entitled to the assignment of freeboards calculated under the 
provisions of this part in effect before April 14, 1973, and to a load 
line certificate issued under this part by the Commandant or his 
authorized representative.



Sec. 45.13  Form of certificate.

    The form of a load line certificate issued under this part is 
specified in appendix A to this part.



Sec. 45.15  Exemptions.

    (a) The Commandant may exempt a ship from any of the requirements in 
this part if the chairman of the board of Steamship Inspections, 
Department of Transport, Canada, and the Commandant agree that the 
sheltered nature or the condition of that voyage make it unreasonable or 
impracticable to apply requirements of this part.
    (b) The Commandant may exempt a vessel that embodies features of a 
novel kind from any of the requirements of this part if those 
requirements might seriously impede research into the development of 
such features and their incorporation in ships. Any such vessel must 
comply with the safety requirements that, in the opinion of the 
Commandant, are adequate for the service for which the vessel is 
intended and will insure the overall safety of the vessel. If the 
Commandant grants an exemption pursuant to this paragraph he 
communicates the details of the exemption and the reasons therefor to 
the chairman of the board of Steamship Inspections.
    (c) A vessel that is not normally engaged on voyages to which this 
part applies but that, in exceptional circumstances, is required to 
undertake a single such voyage between two specific ports may be 
exempted by the Commandant from any of the requirements of this part, if 
the ship complies with safety requirements that, in the opinion of the 
Commandant are adequate for the voyage that is to be undertaken by the 
vessel.
    (d) Unmanned dry cargo river barges carrying non-hazardous cargoes 
on certain routes on Lake Michigan may be exempted from load line 
requirements in accordance with the conditions specified in subpart E of 
this part.

[CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12290, May 10, 1973, as amended by CGD 84-058, 50 FR 
19533, May 9, 1985; USCG-1998-4623, 67 FR 19690, Apr. 23, 2002]



                        Subpart B_Load Line Marks



Sec. 45.31  Deck line.

    (a) Each vessel must be marked with a deck line on the outer surface 
of the shell on each side of the vessel with the upper edge of the line 
passing through the point where the upper surface of the freeboard deck 
intersects the outer surface of the shell or if the summer freeboard is 
correspondingly adjusted under Sec. 45.57, the deck line may be placed 
above or below the freeboard deck. Figure 1 illustrates the deck line 
markings.
    (b) Each deck line must be at least 12-inches long and 1-inch wide.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.015
    

[[Page 76]]





Sec. 45.33  Diamond.

    (a) Each vessel must be marked with the diamond mark described in 
figure 2 of Sec. 45.35 amidships below the upper edge of the deck line 
on each side with the center of the loadline mark at a distance below 
the deck line equal to the summer freeboard assigned under this part.
    (b) The width of each line in the loadline mark must be 1 inch.



Sec. 45.35  Seasonal load lines.

    Each vessel must have the summer (S), midsummer (MS), intermediate 
(I), and winter (W) loadlines for fresh water freeboards calculated 
under Sec. Sec. 45.71 through 45.75 marked in accordance with Sec. 
45.39.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.016



Sec. 45.37  Salt water load lines.

    Each vessel that operates in the salt water of the St. Lawrence 
River must--
    (a) Be marked with the summer (S), midsummer (MS), intermediate (I) 
and winter (W) load line marks under Sec. 45.77 for salt water; and
    (b) Be marked with the letters ``FW'' above the fresh water marks 
and the letters ``SW'' above the salt water marks as described in figure 
2.



Sec. 45.39  Marking.

    (a) The diamond, lines, and letters must be painted in white or 
yellow on a dark ground or in black on a light ground and permanently 
marked on the sides of the vessel.
    (b) The upper edge of the line that passes through the center of the 
diamond must indicate summer freeboard assigned under Sec. 45.53.
    (c) Unless otherwise authorized the seasonal load lines must be 
horizontal lines extending forward of, and at right angles to, a 
vertical line marked at a distance 26 inches forward of the vertical 
centerline of the diamond as described in figure 2.
    (d) The salt water load lines must be horizontal lines extending 
abaft the vertical line required by paragraph (b) of this section as 
described in figure 2.
    (e) The upper edge of each seasonal and salt water load line mark 
must indicate the minimum freeboard for that mark.
    (f) When two freeboards assigned under this part differ by 2 inches 
or less, the line for the lesser freeboard must be omitted and the line 
for the greater freeboard must be identified with the seasonal letters 
for both freeboards.
    (g) Seasonal freeboards that are limited by a summer freeboard 
assigned under Sec. 45.53(c) must not be marked but the identifying 
letter must be marked adjacent to the summer mark.
    (h) The identity of the authority that assigns the freeboard must be 
indicated alongside the load line diamond above the horizontal line that 
passes through the center of the diamond with two initials approximately 
4\1/2\ inches high and 3 inches wide.



                          Subpart C_Freeboards



Sec. 45.51  Types of ships.

    (a) For the purpose of this subpart, a type A vessel has--
    (1) No cargo ports or similar sideshell openings below the freeboard 
deck;
    (2) Only small freeboard deck openings fitted with watertight 
gasketed hatch covers of steel;
    (3) No dimension of a freeboard deck cargo opening greater than 6 
feet and the total area not exceeding 18 ft\2\; and
    (4) No more than two freeboard deck cargo openings to a single cargo 
space.
    (b) For the purposes of this subpart a type B vessel is a vessel 
that does not

[[Page 77]]

meet the requirements in paragraph (a) of this section.



Sec. 45.53  Summer freeboard.

    (a) Except as required in paragraph (c) of this section, the minimum 
freeboard in summer for a type A vessel is F in the following formula 
modified by the corrections in this subpart:

F (inches)=10.2xP1xD

where P1 is defined in Sec. 45.55 and D is the depth for 
freeboard in feet.

    (b) Except as required in paragraph (c) of this section, the minimum 
freeboard in summer for a type B vessel is F in the formula modified by 
the corrections in this subpart:

F (inches)=12xP1xD

where P1 is defined by Sec. 45.55 and D is the depth for 
freeboard in feet.

    (c) Seasonal freeboards assigned under Sec. Sec. 45.71 through 
45.75 must be calculated on the basis of the summer freeboard calculated 
under paragraph (a) or (b) of this section.
    (d) If a minimum freeboard is required for a vessel under this part 
which is greater than that required by paragraph (a) or (b) of this 
section because of scantling or subdivision requirements, the summer 
freeboard and the seasonal freeboards assigned under this subpart must 
be no less than that minimum freeboard, except the midsummer seasonal 
freeboard may be calculated on the basis of the summer freeboard 
assigned under this paragraph.
    (e) If a greater than the calculated minimum freeboard is requested 
by the applicant for the load line certificate, that greater freeboard 
may be assigned as the summer freeboard and--
    (1) The intermediate and winter seasonal freeboards assigned must be 
calculated under paragraph (a) or (b) of this section; and
    (2) The midsummer seasonal freeboard must be calculated on the basis 
of the summer freeboard assigned under this paragraph.



Sec. 45.55  Freeboard coefficient.

    (a) For ships less than 350 feet in length (L), the freeboard 
coefficient is P1 in the formula:

P1=P+A[(L/D)-(L/Ds)]

where P is a factor, which is a function of the length from table 1 and 
``A'' is a coefficient, which is a function of length (L), from table 2; 
L/D is the ratio of the length (L) to the depth for freeboard (D); L/
Ds is the ratio of the length (L) to a standard depth 
(Ds) from table 3.
    D is not to be used as less than that which will give a ration of L 
to D that is:
    (a) More than 15 when L=400 feet or less, or
    (b) More than 21 when L=700 feet or more, with the ratio for 
intermediate lengths being calculated proportionately.

    (b) For ships 350 feet or more in length (L), the coefficient ``A'' 
is zero and the formula is:

P1=P

where P is a factor, which is a function of length from table (1).



Sec. 45.57  Correction: Position of deckline.

    (a) Where the depth to the upper edge of the deckline is greater or 
less than D, the difference between the depths must be added to or 
deducted from the freeboard.
    (b) When the Commandant or the approved assigning authority approves 
a location for the deckline that is above or below the freeboard deck, 
the minimum summer freeboard must be corrected by--
    (1) Adding the difference between the depth and D if the depth is 
greater than D; and
    (2) Subtracting the difference between the depth and D, if the depth 
is less than D.
    (c) Except for the adjustment allowed in paragraph (b) of this 
section, no freeboard of less than 2 in. may be assigned.



Sec. 45.58  Correction: Short superstructure.

    The minimum freeboard in summer for a type B vessel that is 79 ft. 
or more but less than 500 ft. in length and has enclosed superstructures 
with an effective length of 25 percent or less of the length of the 
vessel must be increased by--

0.03 (500--L) (0.25--E/L) inches

where:

(L)=length of vessel in feet;

[[Page 78]]

(E)=effective length of superstructure in feet as defined in Sec. 
45.59.



Sec. 45.59  Definitions for superstructure corrections.

    For the purpose of Sec. Sec. 45.58 through 45.61--
    (a) The standard height of a superstructure (Hs) other than a raised 
quarter deck and the standard height of a trunk (Hs) is determined by 
the formula:

Hs=[6.0+(L/300)] ft

    (b) The length of superstructure (S) is the length of those parts of 
the superstructure which extends to the sides of the vessel and that lie 
within the length (L).
    (c) The effective length (E) of a trunk is its length in the ratio 
of its mean breadth to B.
    (d) The effective length (E) of an enclosed superstructure of 
standard height or greater is its length ``S''.
    (e) Where the height of an enclosed superstructure or trunk is less 
than the standard height (Hs),the effective length (E) is its length 
reduced in the ratio of its height to Hs.
    (f) The effective length (E) of a raised quarter deck of \2/3\ Hs or 
greater that has no openings in the front bulkhead is its length up to a 
maximum of 0.6L.
    (g) The effective length (E) of a raised quarter deck of less than 
\2/3\ Hs or that does not have an intact front bulkhead is 
its length reduced by the ratio of its height to Hs.

                               Table 12(1)
                           tables of p values
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Value of
                    Length of Ship (feet)                          P
------------------------------------------------------------------------
80...........................................................     0.1100
90...........................................................     0.1136
100..........................................................     0.1172
110..........................................................     0.1208
120..........................................................     0.1244
130..........................................................     0.1281
140..........................................................     0.1318
150..........................................................     0.1355
160..........................................................     0.1393
170..........................................................     0.1430
180..........................................................     0.1468
190..........................................................     0.1506
200..........................................................     0.1545
210..........................................................     0.1583
220..........................................................     0.1622
230..........................................................     0.1661
240..........................................................     0.1700
250..........................................................     0.1740
260..........................................................     0.1780
270..........................................................     0.1820
280..........................................................     0.1860
290..........................................................     0.1900
300..........................................................     0.1941
310..........................................................     0.1982
320..........................................................     0.2023
330..........................................................     0.2065
340..........................................................     0.2106
350..........................................................     0.2148
360..........................................................     0.2190
370..........................................................     0.2233
380..........................................................     0.2275
390..........................................................     0.2318
400..........................................................     0.2361
410..........................................................     0.2400
420..........................................................     0.2437
430..........................................................     0.2472
440..........................................................     0.2506
450..........................................................     0.2537
460..........................................................     0.2567
470..........................................................     0.2595
480..........................................................     0.2621
490..........................................................     0.2645
500..........................................................     0.2667
510..........................................................     0.2688
520..........................................................     0.2706
530..........................................................     0.2723
540..........................................................     0.2738
550..........................................................     0.2751
560..........................................................     0.2762
570..........................................................     0.2772
580..........................................................     0.2779
590..........................................................     0.2785
600..........................................................     0.2788
610..........................................................     0.2790
620..........................................................     0.2790
630..........................................................     0.2789
640..........................................................     0.2785
650..........................................................     0.2779
660..........................................................     0.2772
670..........................................................     0.2768
680..........................................................     0.2760
690..........................................................     0.2751
700..........................................................     0.2740
710..........................................................     0.2728
720..........................................................     0.2715
730..........................................................     0.2700
740..........................................................     0.2684
750..........................................................     0.2667
760..........................................................     0.2648
770..........................................................     0.2628
780..........................................................     0.2607
790..........................................................     0.2584
800..........................................................     0.2560
810..........................................................     0.2532
820..........................................................     0.2504
830..........................................................     0.2476
840..........................................................     0.2448
850..........................................................     0.2420
860..........................................................     0.2392
870..........................................................     0.2364
880..........................................................     0.2336
890..........................................................     0.2308
900..........................................................     0.2280
910..........................................................     0.2252
920..........................................................     0.2224
930..........................................................     0.2196
940..........................................................     0.2168
950..........................................................     0.2140
960..........................................................     0.2112

[[Page 79]]

 
970..........................................................     0.2084
980..........................................................     0.2056
990..........................................................     0.2028
1000.........................................................     0.2000
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                               Table 12(2)
                values of ``a'' for use in the expression
                         P1=P+``A'' (L/D--L/Ds)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Value of
                   Length of Ship (feet)                        ``A''
------------------------------------------------------------------------
80.........................................................      0.00864
90.........................................................      0.00806
100........................................................      0.00750
110........................................................      0.00696
120........................................................      0.00644
130........................................................      0.00594
140........................................................      0.00546
150........................................................      0.00500
160........................................................      0.00456
170........................................................      0.00414
180........................................................      0.00374
190........................................................      0.00336
200........................................................      0.00300
210........................................................      0.00266
220........................................................      0.00234
230........................................................      0.00204
240........................................................      0.00176
250........................................................      0.00150
260........................................................      0.00126
270........................................................      0.00104
280........................................................      0.00084
290........................................................      0.00066
300........................................................      0.00050
310........................................................      0.00036
320........................................................      0.00024
330........................................................      0.00014
340........................................................      0.00006
350........................................................      0.00000
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                               Table 12(3)
                             values of l/ds
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Length of Ship (feet)                    Value of L/D5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
80......................................................         6.50000
90......................................................         6.76563
100.....................................................         7.03125
110.....................................................         7.29688
120.....................................................         7.56250
130.....................................................         7.82813
140.....................................................         8.09375
150.....................................................         8.35938
160.....................................................         8.62500
170.....................................................         8.89063
180.....................................................         9.19625
190.....................................................         9.42188
200.....................................................         9.68750
210.....................................................         9.95313
220.....................................................        10.21875
230.....................................................        10.48438
240.....................................................        10.75000
250.....................................................        11.01563
260.....................................................        11.28125
270.....................................................        11.54688
280.....................................................        11.81250
290.....................................................        12.07813
300.....................................................        12.34375
310.....................................................        12.60938
320.....................................................        12.87500
330.....................................................        13.14063
340.....................................................        13.40625
350.....................................................        13.67188
360.....................................................        13.93750
370.....................................................        14.20313
380.....................................................        14.46875
390.....................................................        14.73438
400.....................................................        15.00000
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (h) Superstructures which are not enclosed have no effective length.
    (i) When a lower deck is designated as the freeboard deck, that part 
of the hull which extends above the freeboard deck is treated as a 
superstructure so far as concerns the application of the conditions of 
assignment and the calculation of freeboard.
    (j) A bridge or poop is enclosed only when access is provided 
whereby the crew may reach accommodations, machinery, or other working 
spaces inside the superstructure by alternative means that are available 
at all times when bulkhead openings are closed.



Sec. 45.61  Correction for superstructures and trunks.

    (a) Where the effective length E of superstructures and trunks that 
meet the requirements of subpart D of this part is 1.0L, the minimum 
summer freeboard may be corrected by subtracting \1/2\Hs.
    (b) Where the effective length of superstructures and trunks is less 
than 1.0L the minimum summer freeboard may be corrected by subtracting a 
percentage of one-half of the standard superstructure height (Hs) 
determined by the formula:

Percentage=(E/2L) (1+E/L)x100

    (c) To be eligible for the correction a trunk must--
    (1) Be at least as strong and as stiff as a superstructure;
    (2) Have no opening in the freeboard deck in way of the trunk, 
except small access openings;
    (3) Have hatchway coamings and covers that meet Sec. Sec. 45.143 
through 45.147;
    (4) Provide a permanent working platform fore and aft with 
guardrails;

[[Page 80]]

    (5) Provide fore and aft access between detached trunks and 
superstructures by permanent gangways;
    (6) Be at least 60 percent of the breadth of the ship in way of the 
trunk; and
    (7) Be at least 0.6 L in length, if no superstructure, is provided.



Sec. 45.63  Correction for sheer.

    (a) The minimum summer freeboard must be increased by the 
deficiency, or may be decreased by the excess as limited by Sec. 45.65, 
of sheer calculated from table 4, multiplied by:

0.75--(S/2L)

where S is the total length of enclosed superstructures. Trunks are not 
included.



Sec. 45.65  Excess sheer limitations.

    The decrease in freeboard allowed in Sec. 45.63 is limited as 
follows:

                                           Sheer Calculation--Table 4
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Station                        Actual ordinate         S. M.                Product
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After Half:
  AP....................................  ...........................        1
  L/6-AP................................  ...........................        3
  L/3-AP................................  ...........................        3
  Midship...............................  ...........................        1  --------------
 
                              Sum of Aft Products
 
  After Standard Sheer .2665L+26.65\1\..  ...........................  .......  --------------
  Difference: Sum-STD...................  ...........................  .......  -------------- +Excess/-
                                                                                 Deficiency
  AFT Sheer: Diff/8.....................  ...........................  .......  -------------- Excess/Deficiency
Fwd. Half:
  FP....................................  ...........................        1
  L/6-FP................................  ...........................        3
  L/3-FP................................  ...........................        3
  Midships..............................  ...........................        1  --------------
 
                              Sum of Fwd Products
 
   Fwd Standard Sheer .5330L+53.30\1\...  ...........................  .......  --------------
  Difference: Sum-STD...................  ...........................  .......  -------------- +Excess/-
                                                                                 Deficiency
  FWD Sheer: Diff/8.....................  ...........................  .......  -------------- Excess/Deficiency
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ L in Standard Sheer=L or 500 whichever is less.


                             Sheer Summation
Aft Sheer              --------------
Fwd Sheer              --------------
Net Sheer              --------------
Mean: Net-2                                  -------------- Excess/
                                              Deficiency
 

    (a) In vessels having no enclosed superstructure from 0.1 L abaft 
amidships to 0.1 L forward of amidships, no decrease is allowed.
    (b) In vessels having enclosed superstructures amidships less than 
0.1 L before and abaft amidships, the decrease must be reduced by linear 
interpolation.
    (c) If excess sheer exists in the forward half, and the after half 
is at least 75 percent of standard sheer, the full decrease is allowed. 
If the after sheer is between 50 percent and 75 percent of standard 
sheer an intermediate decrease, determined by linear interpolation, is 
allowed for the excess sheer forward. If the after sheer is 50 percent 
of standard or less, no decrease is allowed for the excess sheer 
forward.
    (d) Where an enclosed poop or forecastle is of standard height with 
greater sheer than that of the freeboard deck, or is greater than 
standard height, an addition to the sheer of the freeboard deck may be 
made using the following formula:

S=vL'/3L

Where

s=sheer credit, to be deducted from the deficiency or added to the 
excess of sheer.
v=difference between actual and standard height of superstructure at the 
end ordinate.
L'=mean enclosed length of poop or forecastle up to a maximum length of 
0.5 L.


[[Page 81]]



The superstructure deck must not be less than standard height above this 
curve at any point. This curve must be used in determining the sheer 
profile for forward and after halves of the vessel.
    (e) The maximum decreased for excess sheer must be no more than 1\1/
2\ inches per 100 feet of length.
    (f) Where the deck of an enclosed superstructure has at least the 
same sheer as the exposed freeboard deck, the sheer of the enclosed 
portion of the freeboard deck cannot be taken into account.



Sec. 45.67  Sheer measurement.

    (a) The sheer is measured from the freeboard deck at side to a line 
of reference drawn parallel to the keel through the sheer line at 
amidships;
    (b) In ships designed with a rake of keel or designed to trim by the 
stern, the sheer must be measured in reference to a line drawn through 
the sheer line at amidships parallel to the design load waterline.
    (c) In flush deck ships and in ships with detached superstructures, 
the sheer must be measured at the freeboard deck.
    (d) In ships with a step or break in the topsides, the sheer must be 
measured from the equivalent depth amidships.
    (e) In vessels with a superstructure of standard height that extends 
over the whole length of the freeboard deck, the sheer must be measured 
on the superstructure deck. Where the height of superstructure exceeds 
the standard, the least difference (Z) between the actual and standard 
heights must be added to each end ordinate. Similarly, the intermediate 
ordinates at distance of \1/6\ L and \1/3\ L from each perpendicular 
must be increased by 0.444 Z and 0.111 Z respectively.



Sec. 45.69  Correction for bow height.

    (a) The minimum summer freeboard of all manned vessels must be 
increased by the same amount in inches as any deficiency which may be 
shown by the following formulas:
    (1) For vessels having a length of not less than 79 feet and not 
greater than 550 feet,

0.593 L (1.0-L/1640) inches--actual bow height

    (2) For vessels having a length greater than 550 feet,

(341.6--0.227 L) inches--actual bow height

    (b) Where the bow height is obtained by sheer, the sheer must extend 
for at least 15 percent of the length of the vessel measured from the 
forward perpendicular.
    (c) Where the bow height is obtained by a superstructure, the 
superstructure must be enclosed and extend from the stem to a point at 
least 0.06 L abaft the forward perpendicular.
    (d) Vessels which, to suit exceptional operational requirements, 
cannot meet the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section may be 
given special consideration by the Commandant.
    (e) The bow height is defined as the vertical distance at the 
forward perpendicular between the waterline corresponding to the 
assigned summer freeboard at the designed trim and the top of the 
exposed deck at side.



Sec. 45.71  Midsummer freeboard.

    The minimum midsummer freeboard (fms) in inches is obtained by the 
formula:

fms=f(s)-0.3Ts

where:

f(s)=summer freeboard in inches
Ts=distance in feet between top of keel and the summer load line.



Sec. 45.73  Winter freeboard.

    The minimum winter freeboard (fw) in inches is obtained by the 
formula:

fw=f(s)+T s (200)/L

where:

L=length L in feet but not less than 400 feet.



Sec. 45.75  Intermediate freeboard.

    The minimum intermediate freeboard (fI) in inches is 
obtained by the formula:

fI=f(s)+T s(100)/L

where:

L=length L in feet but not less than 400 feet.



Sec. 45.77  Salt water freeboard.

    (a) The salt water addition in inches to freeboard applicable to 
each fresh water mark is obtained by the formula:

Addition=[Delta]/41T


[[Page 82]]


where:

[Delta]=displacement in fresh water, in tons of 2,240 pounds, at the 
summer load waterline.
T=tons per inch immersion, of 2,240 pounds, in fresh water at the summer 
load waterline.

    (b) When the displacement at the summer load waterline cannot be 
certified, the addition in inches to the minimum freeboard in fresh 
water may be obtained by multiplying 0.25 by the summer draught in feet 
measured from the top of the keel to the center of the load line 
diamond.



                   Subpart D_Conditions of Assignment



Sec. 45.101  Purpose.

    This subpart prescribes conditions that a vessel must meet to be 
eligible for assignment of a loadline under this part.



Sec. 45.103  Structural stress and stability.

    (a) The nature and stowage of the cargo, ballast, and other variable 
weights must be such as to make the vessel stable and avoid unacceptable 
structural stress.
    (b) The vessel must meet all applicable stability and subdivision 
requirements of this chapter.



Sec. 45.105  Information supplied to the master.

    Unless otherwise authorized by the Commandant, the vessel must have 
onboard, in a form approved by the Commandant, sufficient information.
    (a) To enable the master to load and ballast the vessel in a manner 
that avoids unacceptable stresses in the vessel's structure; and
    (b) To guide the master as to the stability of the ship under 
varying conditions of service.



Sec. 45.107  Strength of hull.

    The general structural strength of the hull must be sufficient for 
the draught corresponding to the freeboard assigned and must be approved 
by the Commandant. Ships built and maintained in conformity with the 
requirements of a classification society may be recognized by the 
Commandant as possessing adequate strength.



Sec. 45.109  Strength of superstructures and deckhouses.

    Each superstructure or deckhouse used for accommodations of the crew 
must be approved by the Commandant or the approved assigning authority 
with regard to general strength and weathertightness. The Commandant may 
use the requirements of the assigning authority as a guide.



Sec. 45.111  Strength of bulkheads at ends of superstructures.

    Bulkheads at ends of enclosed superstructures must have sufficient 
strength to withstand impact of boarding seas.



Sec. 45.113  Access openings in bulkheads at ends of enclosed superstructures.

    (a) Access openings in bulkheads at ends of enclosed superstructures 
must have doors of steel or material as strong as steel that are 
permanently attached to the bulkhead and framed, stiffened, and fitted 
so that the bulkhead and door are as strong as the bulkhead and weather 
tight when closed.
    (b) The means for securing the doors weathertight must be 
permanently attached to the doors or bulkheads and arranged so that the 
doors can be secured weathertight from both sides of the bulkhead.
    (c) Access openings in bulkheads at ends of enclosed superstructures 
must have sills that are at least 12 inches above the deck.



Sec. 45.115  Bulwarks and guardrails.

    (a) The exposed parts of freeboard and superstructures decks and 
deckhouses on the freeboard deck must have guardrails or bulwarks that 
are at least 36 inches high above the deck.
    (b) Guardrails must have at least three courses with no more than a 
9-inch opening below the lowest course and no more than 15 inches 
between other courses. If the sheer strake projection is at least 8 
inches above the deck, a guardrail may have two courses with no more 
than 15 inches between courses.
    (c) In way of trunks at least half the protection required by 
paragraph (a) of this section must be in the form of open rails.

[[Page 83]]



Sec. 45.117  Freeing port area: General.

    (a) Where bulwarks on the weather portins of freeboard or 
superstructure decks form wells, the bulwarks must have the area 
prescribed in this section and Sec. Sec. 45.119 and 45.121 for rapidly 
freeing and draining the decks of water.
    (b) Except as required in Sec. Sec. 45.119 and 45.121 the minimum 
freeing port area in square feet on each side of the ship for each well 
on the freeboard deck and on the raised quarterdeck must be at least as 
great as A in the following formulas:
    (1) Where the length of bulwark (l) in the well is 66 feet or less, 
A=7.6+0.115 (l)
    (2) Where (l) exceeds 66 feet, A=0.23 (l)

but (l) need in no case be taken as greater than 0.7L.
    (c) In ships having erections on deck that are open at either or 
both ends, provision for freeing the space within such erections must be 
approved by the Commandant or the assigning authority.
    (d) The lower edges of the freeing ports must be as near the deck as 
practicable. Two-thirds of the freeing port area required must be 
provided in the half of the well nearest the lowest point of the sheer 
curve.
    (e) All freeing port openings in the bulwarks must be protected by 
rails or bars spaced approximately 9 inches. If shutters are fitted to 
freeing ports, ample clearance must be provided to prevent jamming. 
Hinges must have pins or bearings of noncorrodible material. If shutters 
are fitted with securing appliances, these appliances must be of 
approved construction.
    (f) The minimum freeing port area for each well on superstructure 
decks must be one-half of the area required by paragraph (b) of this 
section.



Sec. 45.119  Freeing port area: Changes from standard sheer.

    The freeing port area required by Sec. 45.117(b) must be multiplied 
by the factor in the following table 5 if the sheer differs from the 
standard sheer defined in Sec. 45.63. Table 4.

                                 Table 5
                  Freeing port area: Sheer correction.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Multiplier
                                                               for area
 Ratio of sums of actual sheer ord./std. sheer ord. Greater    required
                            than:                               by Sec.
                                                               45.117(b)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0.........................................................         1.0
1.0.........................................................        1.00
0.9.........................................................        1.05
0.8.........................................................        1.10
0.7.........................................................        1.15
0.6.........................................................        1.20
0.5.........................................................        1.25
0.4.........................................................        1.30
0.3.........................................................        1.35
0.2.........................................................        1.40
0.1.........................................................        1.45
No sheer....................................................        1.50
------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 45.121  Freeing port area: Changes for trunks and side coamings.

    If a vessel has a trunk and does not meet the requirements of Sec. 
45.61 or has continuous or substantially continuous hatchway side 
coamings between detached superstructures, the minimum area of the 
freeing port openings must be obtained from the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Area of
                                                                freeing
                                                                ports in
                                                                relation
  Breadth of hatchway or trunk in relation to the breadth of     to the
                             ship                                total
                                                                area of
                                                                  the
                                                                bulwarks
                                                               (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
40 percent or less...........................................         20
75 percent or more...........................................         10
------------------------------------------------------------------------


The area of freeing ports at intermediate breadths must be obtained by 
linear interpolation.



Sec. 45.123  Freeing port area: Changes for bulwark height.

    (a) For the purposes of freeing port area only, bulwark height is 
considered standard at 24 in for ships 240 ft in length and less; and 48 
in for ships 480 ft in length or greater. The standard bulwark height 
for ships of intermediate length is obtained by direct interpolation.
    (b) If the bulwark is more than standard height, the area required 
by Sec. 45.117 must be increased by 0.04 square feet per foot (ft\2\/
ft) of length of well for each foot difference in height.
    (c) For ships greater than 480 ft in length that have an average 
bulwark height less than 3 ft, the area required by Sec. 45.117 may be 
decreased by 0.04 ft\2\/

[[Page 84]]

ft of length for each foot difference in height.



Sec. 45.125  Crew passageways.

    The vessel must have means for protection of the crew from boarding 
seas such as life lines, gangways, and underdeck passages to facilitate 
passing between their quarters and machinery spaces and other spaces 
essential to the operation of the ship.



Sec. 45.127  Position of structures, openings, and fittings.

    For the purposes of this part--
    (a) Position 1 means in an exposed position on--
    (1) The freeboard deck or a raised quarter deck;
    (2) A superstructure deck or a trunk deck and forward of a point \1/
4\ L from the forward perpendicular; or
    (3) A trunk deck whose height is less than Hs.
    (b) Position 2 means--
    (1) On a superstructure deck aft of a point \1/4\ L abaft the 
forward perpendicular; or
    (2) On a superstructure and trunk combination, that is Hs 
or more n height, aft or a point \1/4\ L abaft the forward 
perpendicular.



Sec. 45.129  Hull fittings: General.

    Hull fittings must be securely mounted in the hull so as to avoid 
increases in hull stresses and must be protected from local damage 
caused by movement of equipment or cargo.



Sec. 45.131  Ventilators.

    (a) Ventilators passing through superstructures other than enclosed 
superstructures must have coamings of steel or equivalent material at 
the freeboard deck.
    (b) Ventilators in position 1 must have coamings at least 30 in. 
above the deck and ventilators in position 2 must have coamings at least 
24 in. above the deck. The Commandant or the assigning authority may 
also require coamings in other exposed positions.
    (c) Ventilators in position 1 or 2 to spaces below freeboard decks 
or decks of enclosed superstructures or trunks must have coamings of 
steel permanently connected to the deck and any ventilator coaming that 
is more than 36 in. high must be specially supported.
    (d) Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section ventilator 
openings must have weathertight closing appliances that are permanently 
attached or, where approved by the Commandant or the assigning authority 
conveniently stowed near the ventilators to which they are to be fitted.
    (e) Ventilators in position 1, the coamings of which extend to more 
than 12.5 ft above the deck, and in position 2, the coamings of which 
extend to more than 6 ft above the deck, need not have closing 
appliances unless specifically required by the Commandant.



Sec. 45.133  Air pipes.

    (a) Where an air pipe to any tank extends above the freeboard or 
superstructure deck--
    (1) The exposed part of the air pipe must be made of steel and of 
sufficient thickness to avoid breaking from impact of boarding seas.
    (2) The air pipe must have a permanently attached means of closing 
its opening; and
    (3) The height from the deck to any point where water may obtain 
access below deck must be at least 30 in above the freeboard deck, 24 in 
above raised quarter decks, and 12 in above other superstructure decks.
    (b) If the height required in paragraph (a) of this section 
interferes with working the ship, the Commandant may approve a lower 
height after considering the closing arrangements.



Sec. 45.135  Hull openings at or below freeboard deck.

    Closures for hull openings at or below the freeboard deck must be as 
strong as the structure to which they are attached and must be 
watertight.



Sec. 45.137  Cargo ports.

    (a) Unless otherwise authorized by the Commandant, the lower edge of 
any opening for cargo, personnel, machinery access, or similar opening 
in the side of a ship must be above a line that is drawn parallel to the 
freeboard deck at side and has as its lowest point the upper edge of the 
uppermost loadline.

[[Page 85]]

    (b) The number of cargo ports in the sides of a ship must be--
    (1) No more than the minimum necessary for working the ship; and
    (2) Approved by the Commandant.



Sec. 45.139  Side scuttles.

    (a) The sill of each side scuttle must be above a line that is drawn 
parallel to the freeboard deck at side having its lowest point 2.5 
percent of the breadth or 20 in above the summer load waterline, 
whichever is higher.
    (b) Except as provided for in paragraph (c) of this section, each 
side scuttle to a space below the freeboard deck, or to a space within 
an enclosed superstructure, must have a hinged inside deadlight which is 
designed so that it can be secured watertight over the side scuttle.
    (c) A side scuttle of a superstructure end bulkhead door, 
companionway door, or deckhouse door may have a portable inside 
deadlight which is designed so that it can be:
    (1) Secured watertight over the side scuttle; and
    (2) Stowed inside the superstructure, companionway, or deckhouse 
when not in use, in a readily accessible location on or adjacent to the 
door.

[CGD 73-49R, 38 FR 12290, May 10, 1973, as amended by CCGD 80-116, 46 FR 
56788, Nov. 19, 1981]



Sec. 45.141  Manholes and flush scuttles.

    Manholes and flush scuttles in position 1 or 2 or within any 
superstructure other than an enclosed superstructure must have 
permanently attached covers, unless the cover is secured by closely 
spaced bolts around its entire perimeter.



Sec. 45.143  Hull openings above freeboard deck.

    Closures for openings above the freeboard deck must be as strong as 
the structure to which they are attached and must be weathertight.



Sec. 45.145  Hatchway covers.

    (a) Hatchways in position 1 and 2 must have weathertight hatch 
covers with gaskets and clamping devices.
    (b) The maximum ultimate strength of the hatchway cover material 
must be at least 4.25 times the maximum stress in the structure 
calculated with the following assumed loads:
    (1) For ships 350 ft or more in length, at least 250 lb/ft\2\ in 
position 1 and 200 lb/ft\2\ in position 2.
    (2) For ships less than 350 ft in length, at least AL in the 
following formula:
    (i) Position 1:

AL=200+C

where C=50(L-79)/271

    (ii) Position 2:

Al=150+C

    (c) Hatchway covers must be so designed as to limit the deflection 
to not more than 0.0028 times the span under the loads described in 
paragraph (b) of this section and the thickness of mild steel plating 
forming the tops of covers must be at least 1 percent of the spacing of 
stiffeners or 0.24 in, whichever is greater.



Sec. 45.147  Hatchway coamings.

    (a) Except where the Commandant determines that the safety of the 
vessel will not be impaired in any sea condition, each hatchway must 
have a coaming that is at least--
    (1) 18 inches in position 1; and
    (2) 12 inches in position 2.
    (b) Each hatchway coaming required by this section must be made of 
steel or equivalent material.
    (c) The height of these coamings may be reduced or omitted if the 
Commandant is satisfied that safety of the ship is not thereby impaired 
in any sea conditions.



Sec. 45.149  Machinery space openings.

    (a) Machinery space openings in position 1 or 2 must be framed and 
enclosed by steel casings, and where the casings are not protected by 
other structures that meet the requirements of Sec. 45.109, their 
strength must be approved by the Commandant or the assigning authority.
    (b) Access openings in casings required by paragraph (a) of this 
section must have doors complying with the requirements of Sec. 45.113. 
Other openings in such casings shall be fitted with equivalent covers, 
permanently attached.

[[Page 86]]

    (c) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, coamings of 
any funnel or machinery space ventilator that must be kept open for the 
essential operations of the ship must--
    (1) In position 1, extend at least 12.5 ft above the deck; and
    (2) In position 2, extend at least 6 ft above the deck.
    (d) The Commandant may approve a lesser height for protected 
coamings.
    (e) Coamings of any fiddley or skylight over a machinery space 
opening in the freeboard or superstructure deck or the top of a 
deckhouse on the freeboard deck, must have covers of steel permanently 
attached and capable of being secured weathertight.



Sec. 45.151  Other openings.

    Each opening other than hatchways, machinery space openings, 
manholes, or flush scuttles--
    (a) In freeboard decks, must be protected by an enclosed 
superstructure or by a deckhouse or companionway that is equal in 
strength and weathertightness to an enclosed superstructure; or
    (b) In exposed superstructure decks or in the top of a deckhouse on 
freeboard decks that gives access to a space below the freeboard deck or 
a space within an enclosed superstructure, must be protected by a 
deckhouse or companionway.



Sec. 45.153  Through-hull piping: General.

    (a) All through-hull pipes required by this subpart must be made of 
steel or material equivalent to the hull in strength and fatigue 
resistance.
    (b) All valves used as shell fittings and all shell fittings on 
which such valves are mounted must be made of steel, or bronze or other 
ductile material approved by the Commandant.



Sec. 45.155  Inlets and discharge piping: Valves.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section 
each pipe that discharges overboard through the hull of the ship must 
have--
    (1) An automatic nonreturn valve with a positive means for closing; 
or
    (2) Two automatic nonreturn valves with the inboard valve accessible 
for examination in service.
    (b) The means for operating a valve described by paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section must be readily accessible and have indicators that show 
when the valve is not closed.
    (c) If the pipe discharges from a space that is not manned or does 
not have continuous bilge water monitoring, a valve described in 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section must be operable above the freeboard 
deck.
    (d) Each pipe that discharges from a space within an enclosed 
superstructure or deckhouse may have at least one accessible automatic 
nonreturn valve if the space is regularly visited by the crew.
    (e) Through-hull piping systems in machinery spaces may have valves 
with positive means for closing at the shell if the controls are readily 
accessible and have indicators showing when the valves are not closed 
(nonreturn valves are not required).



Sec. 45.157  Scuppers and gravity drains.

    Scuppers and gravity deck drains from spaces above the freeboard 
deck that penetrate the shell below a line 24 or .05B above 
the summer loadline, whichever is greater, must have an automatic 
nonreturn valve. This valve may be omitted if the piping is of thickness 
not less than extra heavy pipe.



Sec. 45.159  Special conditions of assignment for type A vessels.

    The lower freeboards allowed for type A vessels allow water on deck 
for greater percentages of time. Therefore the following additional 
requirements must be met to qualify for type A freeboards:
    (a) Machinery casings must be protected by an enclosed 
superstructure or deckhouse unless intact bulkheads are used on all 
sides on the freeboard deck.
    (b) Exposed machinery casings may be fitted with weathertight doors 
providing they lead to a space or passageway as strong as an enclosed 
superstructure from which a second interior weathertight door is 
provided for access to the engine room.
    (c) Hatchways on the exposed freeboard or forecastle decks must be 
provided with watertight covers of steel.

[[Page 87]]

    (d) Unless a separate fore and aft access is provided below the 
freeboard deck, a permanent fore and aft gangway must be fitted at the 
superstructure deck level between poop and all other deckhouses used in 
the essential operation of the vessel.
    (e) Type ``A'' vessels must be fitted with open rails for at least 
half the length of the exposed parts of the weather deck. Where 
superstructures are connected by trunks, open rails must be fitted for 
the whole length of the exposed parts of the freeboard deck.



         Subpart E_Unmanned River Barges on Lake Michigan Routes

    Source: USCG-1998-4623, 67 FR 19690, Apr. 23, 2002, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 45.171  Purpose.

    (a) This subpart establishes a special load line regime under which 
certain unmanned, river-service, dry-cargo barges may be exempted from 
the normal Great Lakes load line requirements while operating on certain 
Lake Michigan routes. Depending upon the route, the barge may only need 
a limited service domestic voyage load line, or may be conditionally 
exempted from load line assignment.
    (b) Except as provided in this subpart, barges operating on Lake 
Michigan must have either an international load line assignment issued 
in accordance with the International Convention on Load Lines, 1966, as 
amended, or a Great Lakes load line assignment issued in accordance with 
the requirements of this part.
    (c) The requirements of this subpart are summarized in Table 45.171:

[[Page 88]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23AP02.007



Sec. 45.173  Eligible barges.

    Only barges meeting the following requirements are eligible for the 
special load line regime under this subpart:
    (a) Unmanned, river service, dry-cargo barges;
    (b) Barges that have been designed and built to at least the minimum 
scantlings of the American Bureau of Shipping River Rules which were in 
effect at the time of construction;

[[Page 89]]

    (c) Barges with a length-to-depth ratio less than 22; and
    (d) Barges on the Milwaukee route must not be more than 10 years 
old.



Sec. 45.175  Applicable routes.

    This subpart applies to the following routes on Lake Michigan, 
between Chicago (Calumet Harbor), IL, and--
    (a) Milwaukee, WI (the ``Milwaukee route'');
    (b) Burns Harbor, IN (the ``Burns Harbor route'');
    (c) St. Joseph, MI (the ``St. Joseph route''); and
    (d) Muskegon, MI (the ``Muskegon route'').



Sec. 45.177  Freeboard requirements.

    (a) All barges must have a minimum freeboard of 24 inches (610 mm).
    (b) Additionally, open hopper barges must have a combined freeboard 
plus cargo box coaming height of at least 54 inches (1,372 mm).



Sec. 45.179  Cargo limitations.

    (a) Only dry cargoes may be carried. Liquid cargoes, even in drums 
or tank containers, may not be carried.
    (b) Hazardous materials, as defined in part 148 of this chapter and 
49 CFR chapter 1, subchapter C, may not be carried.



Sec. 45.181  Load line exemption requirements for the Burns Harbor and Milwaukee routes.

    Barges operating on the Burns Harbor and Milwaukee routes may be 
conditionally exempted from load line assignment provided that the 
following requirements are met:
    (a) Registration. Before the barge's first voyage onto Lake 
Michigan, the owner or operator must register the barge (in writing) 
with the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection (OCMI), U.S. Coast Guard 
Sector Office, 215 W. 83rd St--Suite D, Burr Ridge, IL, 60521. The 
registration may be faxed to the OCMI in advance (at (630) 986-2120), 
with the original following by mail. The registration may be in any 
form, but must be signed by the owner or operator. No load line 
exemption certificate will be returned. However, the registration will 
be kept on file.
    (b) The registration must include the following information:
    (1) Barge name and official number (or other identification number);
    (2) Owner and operator (points-of-contact, company addresses and 
telephone numbers);
    (3) Service route (Milwaukee and/or Burns Harbor);
    (4) Design type (covered/uncovered hopper, deck, etc.);
    (5) External dimensions;
    (6) Types of cargo; and
    (7) Place built and original delivery date.
    (c) The registration must include a statement certifying that:
    (1) The barge has been designed and built to at least the minimum 
scantlings of the ABS River Rules which were in effect at the time of 
construction; and
    (2) The owner or operator agrees to maintain the barge in 
serviceable condition and comply with the applicable provisions of 46 
CFR part 45, subpart E.
    (d) Expiration. Registration is valid only until the earliest of the 
following events:
    (1) The tenth anniversary of the delivery date (for barges on the 
Milwaukee route),
    (2) The barge no longer is fit for this service (due to damage), or
    (3) The barge changes ownership or operators (registration is not 
transferable to new owners or operators; the barge must be re-registered 
if it is to continue in Lake Michigan service).
    (e) Notification. The owner or operator of an exempted barge must 
notify the OCMI of the transfer of ownership or change of operator, 
withdrawal from Lake Michigan service (due to damage, age, or other 
circumstances), or other disposition of the barge.

[USCG-1998-4623, 67 FR 19690, Apr. 23, 2002, as amended by USCG-2006-
25556, 72 FR 36330, July 2, 2007]



Sec. 45.183  Load line requirements for the St. Joseph and Muskegon routes.

    (a) Load line certificate. (1) The load line issued under this 
subpart must be a limited-service, domestic-voyage load line.
    (2) Except as provided under paragraph (b)(2)(vi) of this section, 
the term of the certificate is five years.

[[Page 90]]

    (3) The load line certificate is valid for the St. Joseph and 
Muskegon routes, and intermediate ports. However, operators must comply 
with the route-specific requirements on the certificate.
    (4) The freeboard assignment, operational limitations, and towboat 
requirements of this subpart must appear on the certificate.
    (b) Conditions of assignment. (1) An initial load line survey under 
Sec. 42.09-25 of this chapter and subsequent annual surveys under Sec. 
42.09-40 of this chapter are required.
    (2) At the request of the barge owner, the initial load line survey 
may be conducted with the barge afloat if the following conditions are 
met:
    (i) The barge is less than 10 years old;
    (ii) The draft during the survey does not exceed 15 inches (380 
millimeters);
    (iii) The barge is empty and thoroughly cleaned of all debris, 
excessive rust, scale, mud, and water. All internal structure must be 
accessible for inspection;
    (iv) Gaugings are taken to the extent necessary to verify that the 
scantlings are in accordance with approved drawings;
    (v) The hull plating (bottom and sides) and stiffeners below the 
light waterline are closely examined internally. If the surveyor 
determines that sufficient cause exists, the surveyor may require that 
the barge be drydocked or hauled out and further external examination 
conducted; and
    (vi) The initial load line certificate is to be issued for a term of 
5 years or until the barge reaches 10 years of age, whichever occurs 
first. Once this certificate expires, the barge must be drydocked or 
hauled out and be fully examined internally and externally.



Sec. 45.185  Tow limitations.

    (a) Barges must not be manned.
    (b) No more than three barges per tow on the Milwaukee, St. Joseph, 
and Muskegon routes.
    (c) Barges must not be more than 5 nautical miles from shore.



Sec. 45.187  Weather limitations.

    (a) Tows on the Burns Harbor route must operate during fair weather 
conditions only.
    (b) The weather limits (ice conditions, wave height, and sustained 
winds) for the Milwaukee, St. Joseph, and Muskegon routes are specified 
in Sec. 45.171, table 45.171.
    (c) If weather conditions are expected to exceed these limits at any 
time during the voyage, the tow must not leave harbor or, if already 
underway, must proceed to the nearest appropriate harbor of safe refuge.



Sec. 45.191  Pre-departure requirements.

    Before beginning each voyage, the towing vessel master must conduct 
the following:
    (a) Weather forecast. Determine the marine weather forecast along 
the planned route, and contact the dock operator at the destination port 
to get an update on local weather conditions.
    (b) Inspection. Inspect each barge of the tow to ensure that they 
meet the following requirements:
    (1) A valid load line certificate, if required, is on board;
    (2) The barge is not loaded deeper than permitted;
    (3) The deck and side shell plating are free of visible holes, 
fractures, or serious indentations, as well as damage that would be 
considered in excess of normal wear;
    (4) The cargo box side and end coamings are watertight;
    (5) All manholes are covered and secured watertight;
    (6) All voids are free of excess water; and
    (7) Precautions have been taken to prevent shifting of cargo.
    (c) Verifications. On voyages north of St. Joseph, the towing vessel 
master must contact a mooring/docking facility in St. Joseph, Holland, 
Grand Haven, and Muskegon to verify that sufficient space is available 
to accommodate the tow. The tow cannot venture onto Lake Michigan 
without confirmed space available.
    (d) Log entries. Before getting underway, the towing vessel master 
must note in the logbook that the pre-departure barge inspections, 
verification of mooring/docking space availability, and weather forecast 
checks were performed, and record the freeboards of each barge.

[[Page 91]]



Sec. 45.193  Towboat power requirements.

    The towing vessel must meet the following requirements:
    (a) General. The towing vessel must have adequate horsepower to 
handle the tow, but not less than the amount specified for the routes 
below.
    (b) Milwaukee and St. Joseph routes: a minimum of 1,000 HP.
    (c) Muskegon route: a minimum of 1,500 HP.



Sec. 45.195  Additional equipment requirements for the Muskegon route.

    Towboats on the Muskegon route must meet these additional equipment 
requirements:
    (a) Communication equipment. Two independent voice communication 
systems in operable condition, such as Very High Frequency (VHF) radio, 
radiotelephone, or cellular phone. At least two persons aboard the 
vessel must be capable of using the communication systems.
    (b) Cutting gear. Equipment that can quickly cut the towline at the 
towing vessel. The cutting gear must be in operable condition and 
appropriate for the type of towline being used, such as wire, 
polypropylene, or nylon. At least two persons aboard the vessel must be 
capable of using the cutting gear.



Sec. 45.197  Operational plan requirements for the Muskegon route.

    Towing vessels on the Muskegon route must have aboard an operational 
plan that is available for ready reference by the master. The plan must 
include the following:
    (a) The cargo limitations, the general operational requirements, and 
the special operational requirements of this subpart.
    (b) A list of mooring and docking facilities (with phone numbers) in 
St. Joseph, Holland, Grand Haven, and Muskegon, that can accommodate the 
tow.
    (c) A list of towing firms (with phone numbers) that have the 
capability to render assistance to the tow, if required.
    (d) Guidelines for possible emergency situations, such as barge 
handling under adverse weather conditions, and other emergency 
procedures.

            Appendix A to Part 45--Load Line Certificate Form

                    great lakes load line certificate

No. ------
    Issued under the authority of the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, 
United States of America, under the provisions of the Act of August 27, 
1935, as amended to establish load lines on the Great Lakes of North 
America and the Load Line regulations in force on ----------------------
------, 19----, By ------------------------, duly authorized by the 
Commandant to issue said load line certificate.

Ship____________________________________________________________________
Certificate No._________________________________________________________
Official No_____________________________________________________________
Length (LBP)____________________________________________________________
Gross tonnage___________________________________________________________
Port of registry________________________________________________________

                              Type of Ship:

TYPE ``A''
TYPE ``B''
TYPE ``B'' with increased freeboard

                        freeboard from deck line
Midsummer.....................................................        MS
Summer........................................................         S
Intermediate..................................................         I
Winter........................................................         W
                                load line
 
                                                                 above S
Upper edge of line through center of diamond                    ........
                                                                 below S
                                                                 below S
 

    Increase for salt water for all freeboards ---- inches.
    The upper edge of the deck line from which these freeboards are 
measured is ---- inches above or below the top of the -------- deck at 
side.
    This is to certify that this ship has been surveyed and the 
freeboards and load lines shown above have been found to be correctly 
marked upon the vessel in manner and location as provided by the load 
line regulations of the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, applicable to the 
Great Lakes.
    This certificate \1\ remains in force until --------------. Issued 
at ---------- on the -------------- day of ------------------, 19----. 
(Here follows the signature, seal, if any, and the name of the authority 
issuing the certificate.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Upon the expiration of the certificate, renewal must be obtained 
as provided by the Great Lakes Load Line Regulations and the certificate 
so endorsed.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                  notes

    (1) In accordance with the Great Lakes Load Line Regulations the 
diamond and

[[Page 92]]

lines must be permanently marked. The ``MS'' loadline shall be assigned 
only to those particular vessels that qualify under the regulations.
    (2) The ``SW'' marks need only be assigned to Great Lakes vessels 
loading in salt water of the St. Lawrence River west of a straight line 
from Cap de Rosiers to West Point Anticosti Island, and west of a line 
along longitude 63 degrees west from Anticosti Island to the north shore 
of the St. Lawrence River. In such cases these limits shall be indicated 
on the certificate.
    (3) The load line assignment given by this certificate necessarily 
assumes that the nature and stowage of cargo, ballast, etc., are such as 
to secure sufficient stability for the vessel. Accordingly, it is the 
owner's responsibility to furnish the Master of the vessel with 
stability information and instructions when this is necessary to 
maintenance of sufficient stability.
    (On the reverse side of the load line certificate, or on a separate 
sheet, attached and forming part of the certificate, provision is to be 
made for annual inspection and renewal endorsements.)



PART 46_SUBDIVISION LOAD LINES FOR PASSENGER VESSELS--
Table of Contents




                          Subpart 46.01_Purpose

Sec.
46.01-1 Purpose.
46.01-15 Application of regulations.
46.01-20 Penalties for violations.

               Subpart 46.05_Definitions Used in This Part

46.05-1 Passenger vessel.
46.05-10 Foreign voyage.
46.05-15 Coastwise voyages.
46.05-20 Great Lakes voyage.
46.05-25 New passenger vessel.
46.05-30 Existing passenger vessel.

                      Subpart 46.10_Administration

46.10-1 Relaxation from regulations.
46.10-5 Load line requirements for subdivision.
46.10-10 Marks to indicate subdivision load lines.
46.10-15 Survey for the establishment and renewal of subdivision load 
          line marks.
46.10-20 Application for the assignment and renewal of subdivision load 
          lines.
46.10-25 Equivalents.
46.10-30 Subdivision load line certificates.
46.10-35 Validity of subdivision load line certificates.
46.10-40 Nonsubmergence subdivision load line (Great Lakes).
46.10-45 Nonsubmergence subdivision load lines in salt water.
46.10-50 Drills and inspections.
46.10-55 Logbook entries.
46.10-60 Control.
46.10-65 Construction.
46.10-70 Plans and inspections of new and converted vessels.

 Subpart 46.15_Subdivision Load Lines for Passenger Vessels Engaged in 
               Foreign, Coastwise, and Great Lakes Voyages

46.15-1 Procedure for determination of subdivision load line.
46.15-5 Engineering requirements.
46.15-10 Subdivision load lines.

    Authority: 46 U.S.C. 3306; 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116; E.O. 12234, 3 CFR, 
1980 Comp., p. 277; Department of Homeland Security Delegation No. 
0170.1.

    Source: CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, unless otherwise 
noted.



                          Subpart 46.01_Purpose



Sec. 46.01-1  Purpose.

    (a) The purpose of the regulations in this part is to set forth 
uniform minimum requirements applicable to passenger vessels required to 
have subdivision load lines. These requirements deal with the following:
    (1) Load line requirements applicable before a passenger vessel will 
be marked with and certificated as to subdivision load lines.
    (2) Assigning, marking, and recording of subdivision load lines.
    (3) Administration of subdivision load lines.
    (4) Application of requirements to passenger vessels.



Sec. 46.01-15  Application of regulations.

    (a) The regulations in this part establish subdivision load lines 
required on passenger vessels engaged in foreign voyages, as well as on 
passenger vessels of 150 gross tons or over engaged in coastwise or 
Great Lakes voyages.
    (b) When engaged in voyages subject to this part, no passenger 
vessel required to be marked with subdivision load lines shall depart 
from or arrive at any port or place under the jurisdiction of the United 
States, nor shall such United States vessel operate on the high seas nor 
the Great Lakes, unless such vessel has been marked with subdivision 
load lines in accordance with the regulations in this part, has on board 
a valid certificate certifying to

[[Page 93]]

the correctness of the location of such subdivision load line marks, and 
is otherwise in compliance with the applicable requirements of law and 
regulations in this part.
    (c) No passenger vessel of the United States of 150 gross tons or 
over and subject to 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116, shall engage in coastwise 
voyages or voyages on the Great Lakes unless such vessel has been marked 
with subdivision load lines in accordance with the regulations in this 
part and has on board a valid certificate certifying to the correctness 
of the location of such subdivision load line marks.
    (d) No foreign passenger vessel belonging to a country that has 
ratified or acceded to the applicable International Convention for 
Safety of Life at Sea shall arrive or depart from any port or place 
under the jurisdiction of the United States, and no foreign passenger 
vessel subject to 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116, shall arrive or depart from any 
port or place under the jurisdiction of the United States, including 
ports on the Great Lakes, unless that vessel has been marked with 
subdivision load lines in accordance with the regulations in this part 
and has on board a valid certificate certifying to the correctness of 
the location of such subdivision load line marks.
    (e) Subdivision load lines shall be marked on both sides of 
passenger vessels where determined and in a manner described in subpart 
46.15 as applicable to the vessel's service. The subdivision load line 
certificates shall be in accordance with Sec. Sec. 46.10-30 and 46.10-
35.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965 as amended by CGD 80-120, 47 FR 
5723, Feb. 8, 1982; CGD 97-057, 62 FR 51044, Sept. 30, 1997; USCG-1998-
4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



Sec. 46.01-20  Penalties for violations.

    (a) Penalties for violations of the regulations in this part by 
passenger vessels of the United States engaged in foreign voyages shall 
be in accordance with those laws which require the inspection and 
certification of the vessel. In addition, for passenger vessels subject 
to 46 U.S.C. 5101-5116, which engage in voyages described in Sec. 
42.03-5, Sec. 42.03-10, or Sec. 45.01-1, the penalties for violations 
of the regulations in this part shall be those set forth in the load 
line act applicable to the vessel.
    (b) For a further description of the actions which may be taken see 
Sec. 42.07-50, of this subchapter. The procedures governing the 
assessment, collection, remission and mitigation of any monetary penalty 
imposed for a violation of a law or the regulations prescribed 
thereunder in this part, as well as the appeal procedures followed, are 
in subpart 2.50 of part 2 of subchapter A (Procedures Applicable to the 
Public) of this chapter.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10077, July 12, 1968; CGD 80-120, 47 FR 5723, Feb. 8, 1982; CGD 97-057, 
62 FR 51044, Sept. 30, 1997]



               Subpart 46.05_Definitions Used in This Part



Sec. 46.05-1  Passenger vessel.

    (a) For the purpose of the regulations in this part, a vessel is a 
passenger vessel if:
    (1) Engaged on an international voyage by sea, it carries or is 
authorized to carry more than 12 passengers; or,
    (2) Engaged on a coastwise voyage by sea or a voyage on the Great 
Lakes, it carries or is authorized to carry more than 16 persons in 
addition to the crew.



Sec. 46.05-10  Foreign voyage.

    (a) A foreign voyage for the purpose of marking passenger vessels 
with subdivision load lines is a voyage by sea between a port under the 
jurisdiction of the United States and a port of a foreign country, its 
colonies, territories, or protectorates, or conversely (a voyage 
exclusively on the Great Lakes excepted).



Sec. 46.05-15  Coastwise voyages.

    (a) A coastwise voyage by sea, for the purpose of marking passenger 
vessels with subdivision load lines, is a voyage in which a vessel in 
the usual course of her employment proceeds from one port or place in 
the United States to another port or place in the United States or from 
a port or place in a possession to another port or place in the same 
possession, and passes outside the line dividing inland waters from the 
high seas (a voyage exclusively on the

[[Page 94]]

Great Lakes excepted), as well as a voyage in which a vessel proceeds 
from a port or place in the United States or her possessions and passes 
outside the line dividing inland waters from the high seas and navigates 
on the high seas, and then returns to the same port or place.



Sec. 46.05-20  Great Lakes voyage.

    A Great Lakes voyage is any voyage from a United States port or 
place on the Great Lakes to another United States port or place on the 
Great Lakes or to a Canadian port or place on the Great Lakes, or 
conversely.



Sec. 46.05-25  New passenger vessel.

    A new passenger vessel is a vessel whose keel was laid or was a 
vessel converted into a passenger vessel on or after May 26, 1965.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10077, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 46.05-30  Existing passenger vessel.

    An existing passenger vessel in respect to its voyage is any 
passenger vessel that is not a new passenger vessel as defined in Sec. 
46.05-25.



                      Subpart 46.10_Administration



Sec. 46.10-1  Relaxation from regulations.

    (a) New passenger vessels making foreign voyages by sea shall comply 
with the requirements in this part. An existing passenger vessel engaged 
in foreign voyages by sea may be permitted relaxation from the 
requirements of this part if, in the opinion of the Commandant, U.S. 
Coast Guard, such requirements are unreasonable or impracticable.
    (b) A new passenger vessel making coastwise voyages by sea or making 
Great Lakes voyages shall comply with the requirements in this part. An 
existing passenger vessel making coastwise voyages by sea or Great Lakes 
voyages may be permitted relaxation from the requirements of this part 
if, in the opinion of the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, such 
requirements are unreasonable or impracticable.



Sec. 46.10-5  Load line requirements for subdivision.

    (a) The load line requirements of parts 42, 44, 45 of this 
subchapter as applicable to the passenger vessel and her service, shall 
be complied with before a passenger vessel will be marked with and 
certificated as to subdivision load lines.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10077, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 46.10-10  Marks to indicate subdivision load lines.

    (a) Marks to indicate the maximum mean draft to which a passenger 
vessel may be lawfully submerged shall be permanently marked on each 
side of the passenger vessel in the form, manner, and location provided 
in this part.
    (b) The Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, will determine the position of 
the subdivision load lines by the application of the requirements 
contained in this part and parts 170 and 171 of this chapter. The 
correct marking of subdivision load lines will be certified by the 
American Bureau of Shipping or a classification society approved by the 
Commandant for that purpose.
    (c) Certificates certifying to the correctness of subdivision load 
line marks shall not be furnished until it is determined that the marks 
have been correctly placed upon the passenger vessel.
    (d) In the case of passenger vessels that are required by the 
International Convention for Safety of Life at Sea to have on board a 
safety certificate, the certification of subdivision, load line marks 
shall be made by letter to the Commandant (G-M), U.S. Coast Guard, 
Washington, DC 20593-0001.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10077, July 12, 1968; CGD 79-023, 48 FR 51007, Nov. 4, 1983; CGD 88-070, 
53 FR 34534, Sept. 7, 1988]



Sec. 46.10-15  Survey for the establishment and renewal of subdivision load line marks.

    (a) Every passenger vessel to be marked with and certificated for 
subdivision load lines must comply with the requirements as set forth in 
subchapter H (Passenger Vessels) of this chapter for ocean, coastwise, 
and Great

[[Page 95]]

Lakes service as applicable to the particular vessel and the service in 
which she is to be employed.
    (b) Every passenger vessel marked with a subdivision load line shall 
be subjected to the surveys specified in this paragraph. The details of 
the surveys or inspections indicated in paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) of 
this section shall be as set forth in the applicable sections of part 71 
of subchapter H (Passenger Vessels) of this chapter.
    (1) A survey before the vessel is put in service.
    (2) A periodical survey once every 12 months.
    (3) Additional surveys as occasion arises.
    (4) Surveys required by part 42, part 44, or part 45 of this 
subchapter.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10077, July 12, 1968]



Sec. 46.10-20  Application for the assignment and renewal of subdivision load lines.

    (a) Application for assignment and renewal of subdivision load lines 
and certification thereof shall be made in writing to the Commandant, 
U.S. Coast Guard, Washington, D.C. 20593-0001.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10077, July 12, 1968; CGD 88-070, 53 FR 34534, Sept. 7, 1988]



Sec. 46.10-25  Equivalents.

    (a) Where in the regulations in this part it is provided that a 
particular fitting, appliance, apparatus, or type thereof, shall be 
fitted or carried in a vessel engaged on foreign voyages by sea or that 
any particular arrangement shall be adopted, there may be substituted 
any other fitting or appliance or type thereof or any other arrangement 
provided that the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, shall have been 
satisfied by suitable trials that the fitting, appliance, or apparatus, 
or type thereof, or that the arrangement substituted is at least as 
effective as that specified in this part.
    (b) Where, in the application of the regulations in this part to 
passenger vessels engaged in coastwise voyages by sea and on Great Lakes 
voyages, it is desired to substitute other construction, arrangement, 
fitting, or appliance, or type thereof, such substitution may be made if 
approved by the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, provided the degree of 
safety provided by this part is obtained.



Sec. 46.10-30  Subdivision load line certificates.

    (a) Passenger vessels engaged in foreign voyages by sea shall have 
their subdivision load lines certified on the safety certificate 
required by the International Convention for Safety of Life at Sea, 
1960. Safety certificates shall be issued by the Commandant, U.S. Coast 
Guard, for a period not to exceed one year. These vessels will also be 
provided with the load line certificate required by part 42 of this 
subchapter, the minimum freeboard shown thereon to be not less than the 
minimum freeboard corresponding to the principal passenger condition. 
The fact that they are subdivision load lines is to be noted on the load 
line certificate.
    (b) Passenger vessels engaged on coastwise voyages by sea or Great 
Lakes voyages shall have the position of their subdivision load lines 
recorded on a load line certificate in the form required by part 42 or 
part 45 of this subchapter. The fact that they are subdivision load 
lines is to be noted on the load line certificate.
    (c) A note shall be added to the load line certificate below the 
signature of the assigning--authority in the following form:

    The bulkhead deck used for determining the position of the 
subdivision load lines certified above is -------------------------- 
(here described bulkhead deck).

    (d) Annual inspections of passenger vessels shall be as required by 
Sec. Sec. 42.09-40 and 46.10-15 of this subchapter and renewal of 
passenger vessels' load line certificates shall be as required by 
Sec. Sec. 42.09-15 and 42.09-20.
    (e) Each new passenger vessel which receives its first load line 
certificate shall also be provided with a copy of the load line survey 
report as required by Sec. 42.09-1(c) or Sec. 45.01-30 of this 
subchapter.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10077, July 12, 1968; CGFR 68-126, 34 FR 9019, June 5, 1969; CGD 80-120, 
47 FR 5723, Feb. 8, 1982; CGD 88-070, 53 FR 34534, Sept. 7, 1988]

[[Page 96]]



Sec. 46.10-35  Validity of subdivision load line certificates.

    (a) Subdivision load line certificates issued to passenger vessels 
shall only be valid during the time for which the certificates are 
issued.
    (b) If, due to any cause, the conditions as required by this part 
are changed, or the regulations in this part are not carried out, the 
load line certificate may be cancelled and the load lines considered 
nonexistent: Provided, That if the conditions causing the cancellation 
of the certificate are satisfactorily corrected, the load line 
certificate shall be reinstated for the remainder of its term.
    (c) A valid subdivision load line certificate for foreign voyages by 
sea shall be valid for coastwise voyages by sea and Great Lakes voyages. 
A valid subdivision load line certificate for coastwise voyages by sea 
shall be valid for Great Lakes voyages but not for foreign voyages by 
sea. A valid subdivision load line certificate for Great Lakes voyages 
shall not be valid for foreign or coastwise voyages by sea.



Sec. 46.10-40  Nonsubmergence subdivision load line (Great Lakes).

    (a) Passenger vessels on the Great Lakes of 150 gross tons or over 
shall not submerge the subdivision load line applicable to the voyage.



Sec. 46.10-45  Nonsubmergence subdivision load lines in salt water.

    (a) Passenger vessels required to be marked with subdivision load 
lines, engaged on foreign and coastwise voyages other than the Great 
Lakes voyages, shall not submerge in salt water the subdivision load 
line applicable to the voyage. Passenger vessels engaged on ocean, 
foreign or coastwise voyages may be marked with fresh water load lines. 
A passenger vessel on foreign or coastwise voyages (except Great Lakes 
voyages) may have an allowance made for the degree of brackishness of 
the water in which the vessel is floating but not for the weight of 
fuel, water, etc., required for consumption between the point of 
departure and the open sea, and no allowance is to be made for bilge or 
ballast water that may be in the passenger vessel at the time of 
departure.



Sec. 46.10-50  Drills and inspections.

    (a) For the required drills and inspections to be conducted on 
passenger vessels, see subpart 78.17 of subchapter H (Passenger Vessels) 
of this chapter.



Sec. 46.10-55  Logbook entries.

    (a) For required logbook entries to be made on passenger vessels, 
see subpart 78.17 of subchapter H (Passenger Vessels) of this chapter.



Sec. 46.10-60  Control.

    (a) The District Director of Customs or the Coast Guard District 
Commander may detain a passenger vessel for a survey if there is reason 
to believe that such a vessel is proceeding on her journey in excess of 
the draft allowed by the regulations in this part as indicated by the 
vessel's load lines certified on the safety certificate, load line 
certificate, or otherwise. The Coast Guard District Commander may detain 
a passenger vessel if it is so loaded as to be manifestly unsafe to 
proceed to sea. Except as otherwise required by this section, Sec. 
42.07-60 if this subchapter applies to all passenger vessels assigned 
load lines under the load line acts and the regulations of this 
subchapter.

[CGFR 68-126, 34 FR 9019, June 5, 1969]



Sec. 46.10-65  Construction.

    (a) The watertight subdivision of every passenger vessel must be as 
efficient as possible, having regard to its intended service. This 
principle is given effect by applying the requirements in part 171 of 
this chapter.
    (b) Passenger vessels engaged in foreign voyages by sea or coastwise 
voyages by sea or voyages on the Great Lakes, to be marked with 
subdivision load lines shall comply with the requirements in this part.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGD 79-023, 48 FR 
51007, Nov. 4, 1983]



Sec. 46.10-70  Plans and inspections of new and converted vessels.

    (a) Plans for a new passenger vessel or a vessel to be converted to 
a passenger vessel shall be submitted to the Commandant as required by 
subpart

[[Page 97]]

71.65 of subchapter H (Passenger Vessels) of this chapter.
    (b) Inspections shall be made during the construction or conversion 
of the vessel as required by subpart 71.20 of subchapter H (Passenger 
Vessels) of this chapter.
    (c) Upon completion of construction or conversion of a passenger 
vessel, a stability test must be performed and stability information 
must be supplied to the operator as required by part 170 of this 
chapter.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGD 79-023, 48 FR 
51007, Nov. 4, 1983]



 Subpart 46.15_Subdivision Load Lines for Passenger Vessels Engaged in 
               Foreign, Coastwise, and Great Lakes Voyages



Sec. 46.15-1  Procedure for determination of subdivision load line.

    The procedure for determining the subdivision load line as well as 
special construction features of the vessel must be as set forth in 
subpart 72.01 and parts 170 and 171 of this chapter.

[CGD 79-023, 48 FR 51007, Nov. 4, 1983]



Sec. 46.15-5  Engineering requirements.

    (a) Bilge and ballast systems, piping, inlets and discharges, ash 
chutes, astern power, and auxiliary steering shall be in accordance with 
the provisions of subchapter F (Marine Engineering) of this chapter.



Sec. 46.15-10  Subdivision load lines.

    (a) Subdivision load lines shall be located by measuring vertically 
down from the deck line required by part 42 of this subchapter.
    (b) The length, width, and manner of marking the lines shall be as 
provided in subpart 42.13 of this subchapter.
    (c) No subdivision load line is to be placed so that the freeboard 
is reduced from that determined by the highest seasonal mark permitted 
by part 42.
    (d) When the highest subdivision load line is located on a vessel 
used as a passenger vessel in a position between the highest and lowest 
seasonal load line marks, the seasonal load line marks above the 
subdivision load line will be omitted and those below will be marked.
    (e) When the freeboard from the highest subdivision load line on a 
vessel used as a passenger vessel is greater than the freeboard from the 
lowest load line permitted by part 42 of this subchapter, the load lines 
required by part 42 of this subchapter shall be omitted and the disk 
with its horizontal line located in line with the highest subdivision 
load line.
    (f) One fresh water line shall be marked. When a subdivision and a 
normal load line are combined, the normal fresh water line only shall be 
used unless the position of the subdivision load line is such that 
confusion will result, in which case a subdivision fresh water line may 
be used, marked FC1 and the normal fresh water line omitted.
    (g) Subdivision load lines shall be aft of the vertical line. The 
vertical line shall be extended as necessary to connect the lowest and 
highest load lines marked on the vessel.
    (h) When a vessel has spaces used for cargo and passengers 
alternatively so that the position of the subdivision load line varies 
with the service, subdivision load lines for the principal passenger 
condition shall be marked and denoted by C1 and the 
alternative conditions marked and denoted by C2, 
C3, etc. The position of each load line and the conditions 
under which a particular load line is applicable shall be noted in the 
certificate.
    (i) The principal passenger condition for a vessel having spaces 
used for passengers and cargo alternatively is the condition where only 
those spaces appropriated exclusively to passengers are taken into 
consideration for determination of the subdivision load line.
    (j) For Great Lakes vessels, references to part 42 shall read part 
45 and a ``diamond'' shall be substituted for the ``disk''. No ``fresh 
water'' line will be marked.

[CGFR 65-50, 30 FR 16769, Dec. 30, 1965, as amended by CGFR 68-60, 33 FR 
10077, July 12, 1968]

[[Page 98]]



PART 47_COMBINATION LOAD LINES--Table of Contents




                            Subpart A_General

Sec.
47.100 Purpose.
47.110 Definitions used in this part.

Subparts B-E [Reserved]

Subpart F_International and Great Lakes Service; Stability Limited Deck 
                              Cargo Barges

47.600 Description of service.
47.610 Conditions of assignment.
47.620 Load line marks.
47.630 Restrictions.
47.640 Form of certificate.

Subpart G [Reserved]

    Authority: 46 U.S.C. 5115; Department of Homeland Security 
Delegation No. 0170.1.

    Source: CGD 86-016, 51 FR 9962, Mar. 24, 1986, unless otherwise 
noted.



                            Subpart A_General



Sec. 47.100  Purpose.

    (a) The purpose of the regulations in this part is to set forth 
simplified alternative marking schemes for those vessels operating in 
more than one service. Operating requirements for a given vessel could 
vary depending on the service, the season of the year, stability 
requirements, manning requirements and tonnage requirements. The 
conditions of assignment, restrictions applicable, form of the 
certificate and the load line marks are described.



Sec. 47.110  Definitions used in this part.

    (a) International service means:
    (1) A voyage by sea between a port under the jurisdiction of the 
United States and a port of a foreign country, its colonies, 
territories, or protectorates, or conversely (a voyage exclusively on 
the Great Lakes is excepted); or
    (2) A voyage that proceeds beyond 20 nautical miles from the 
territorial sea baseline.
    (b) Great Lakes service means a voyage from a United States port or 
place on the Great Lakes to another United States port or place on the 
Great Lakes or to a Canadian port or place on the Great Lakes, or 
conversely. In concurrence with related Canadian regulations, the waters 
of the St. Lawrence River west of a rhumb line drawn from Cap de Rosiers 
to West Point, Anticosti Island, and west of a line along 63[deg] W. 
Longitude from Anticosti Island to the north shore of the St. Lawrence 
River shall be considered as part of the Great Lakes. In addition, the 
Victoria Bridge, Montreal, Canada, is the dividing line between fresh 
water and salt water in the St. Lawrence River.

Subparts B-E [Reserved]



Subpart F_International and Great Lakes Service; Stability Limited Deck 
                              Cargo Barges



Sec. 47.600  Description of service.

    This subpart applies to deck cargo barges operating in International 
and Great Lakes service and meeting the conditions of assignment in 
Sec. 47.610 of this subpart.



Sec. 47.610  Conditions of assignment.

    Owners or operators of deck cargo barges which are draft limited by 
the intact stability requirements of 46 CFR 174.015 (a)(1) and (a)(2) 
may elect to be assigned load lines under this subpart in order to load 
to a draft corresponding to the intact stability requirement of 10 foot-
degrees (46 CFR 174.015(a)(2)) while engaging in Great Lakes service 
during the summer season.



Sec. 47.620  Load line marks.

    (a) A plimsoll mark (disc and line through center) applicable to 
International service must be placed at the draft corresponding to 15-
degrees of righting energy as calculated in fulfilling the requirements 
of 46 CFR 174.015(a)(1).
    (b) The seasonal ladder representing summer, winter, and winter 
North Atlantic seasons must be as shown in Figure 1 below.
    (c) An equivalent Great Lakes summer seasonal line must be placed on 
the seasonal ladder at the draft corresponding to 10 foot-degrees of 
righting energy as calculated in fulfilling

[[Page 99]]

the requirements of 46 CFR 174.015(a)(2) and be marked with a (T).
    (d) The fresh water mark may be omitted by request of the owner or 
operator.



Sec. 47.630  Restrictions.

    (a) The mark (T) applies only to Great Lakes service from May 1 
through September 30.
    (b) Notations are to be placed on the face of the load line 
certificate to the effect that:
    (1) The barge must be operated in compliance with the draft vs. 
cargo vertical center of gravity tables in the U.S. Coast Guard approved 
stability letter, and
    (2) The mark (T) is applicable only for Great Lakes service from May 
1 through September 30 as per 46 CFR 45.9



Sec. 47.640  Form of certificate.

    The form of the certificate is as specified in Sec. 42.50-5(b) of 
this subchapter with the exception that the illustrated load line marks 
are as shown in Figure 1 below.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.017

Subpart G [Reserved]

[[Page 101]]

                                  INDEX

                           SUBCHAPTER E_LOAD LINES

  Editorial Note: This listing is provided for informational purposes 
only. It is compiled and kept current by the U.S. Coast Guard, 
Department of Homeland Security. This index is updated as of October 1, 
2007.

                                               Part, subpart, or section

                                 A

Access openings in bulkheads at ends of superstructure............45.113
Additional survey requirements for steel-hull vessels...........42.09-30
Additional survey requirements for wood-hull vessels............42.09-35
Administration.....................................................46.10
Administration; special service..................................44.01-5
Air pipes...............................................42.15-50; 45.133
All vessels - division into types................................42.09-5
American Bureau of Shipping as an assigning authority...........42.07-35
Annual surveys..................................................42.09-40
Applicability.....................................................44.300
Application...............................................42.03, 42.25-1
Application for the assignment and renewal of subdivision load 
line marks......................................................46.10-20
Application for:
Annual survey...................................................42.11-20
Load line assignments and certificates for vessels other than 
U.S.-flag vessels...............................................42.11-10
Load line assignments, surveys, and certificates for U.S.-flag 
vessels..........................................................42.11-5
Timber load lines...............................................42.11-15
Applications for Load Lines Assignments, Surveys, and Certificates
                                                                   42.11
Application of regulations......................................46.01-15
Approval by Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, of special service....44.01-10
Approval of the assigning authority.............................42.07-30
Approval of the Commandant......................................42.07-25
Approved.........................................................42.05-1
Assigning authority.............................................42.05-10
Assignment and marking load lines; special service..............44.01-11
Assignment of load lines.........................................42.09-1
Assumptions......................................................42.13-1
Authority and Purpose..............................................42.01
Authority for regulations........................................42.01-1

                                 B

Bulwarks and guardrails...........................................45.115

                                 C

Cancellation of load line certificates or exemption certificates 
                                                                42.07-55
Cargo and other hatchways.......................................42.15-20
Cargo ports.......................................................45.137

[[Page 102]]

Cargo ports and other similar openings..........................42.15-55
Certification......................................................45.11
Change in Assigning authority...................................42.07-43
Coast Guard District Commander or District Commander............42.05-25
Coastwise load line certificates for U.S.-flag vessels..........42.50-15
Coastwise voyages...............................................46.05-15
Commandant......................................................42.05-20
Computation for freeboard.......................................42.25-20
Conditions of assignment................................44.05-20; 47.610
Conditions of assignment for self-propelled barges...........44.05-20(c)
Conditions of assignment for steam colliers..................44.05-20(a)
Conditions of assignment for towed barges....................44.05-20(b)
Conditions of assignment of Freeboard..............................42.15
Conditions of equilibrium:......................................42.20-12
Downflooding.................................................42.20-12(a)
Construction....................................................46.10-65
Construction of vessel:.........................................42.25-10
Bulwarks.....................................................42.25-10(c)
Double bottom tanks..........................................42.25-10(b)
Superstructure...............................................42.25-10(a)
Control...............................................42.07-60; 46.10-60
Control, Enforcement, and Rights of Appeal.........................42.07
Correction:
For block coefficient...........................................42.20-25
For bow height.....................................................45.69
For depth.......................................................42.20-30
For position of deck line.......................................42.20-35
For sheer..........................................................45.63
For superstructure and trunks......................................45.61
Position of deckline...............................................45.57
Short superstructure...............................................45.58
To the freeboard for vessels under 328 feet in length...........42.20-20
Correction of deficiencies......................................42.09-45
Crew passageways..................................................45.125

                                 D

Deck line................................................42.13-20; 45.31
Deduction for superstructures and trunks........................42.20-60
Definitions:.....42.05; 42.13-15; 42.25-5; 44.05-5, 44.310; 45.3; 46.05; 
                                                                  47.110
Amidships...........................................42.13-15(c); 45.3(c)
Block coefficient............................................42.13-15(g)
Breadth.............................................42.13-15(d); 45.3(d)
Depth for freeboard (D).............................42.13-15(f); 45.3(f)
Enclosed superstructure..........................................45.3(j)
Exposed positions................................................45.3(p)
Flush deck ship..................................................45.3(m)
Flush deck vessel............................................42.13-15(k)
Freeboard...........................................42.13-15(h); 45.3(g)
Freeboard deck......................................42.13-15(i); 45.3(h)
Great Lakes....................................................47.110(b)
Height...........................................................45.3(k)
Hopper dredge.....................................................44.310
Intact bulkhead..................................................45.3(q)
International service..........................................47.110(a)
Length.......................................................42.13-15(a)
Length (L).......................................................45.3(a)
Length of a superstructure (S)...................................45.3(l)

[[Page 103]]

Molded depth.................................................42.13-15(e)
Moulded Depth....................................................45.3(e)
Perpendiculars......................................42.13-15(b); 45.3(b)
Self-propelled barge..........................................44.05-5(c)
Steam collier.................................................44.05-5(a)
Steel............................................................45.3(r)
Superstructure...................................................45.3(I)
Timber deck cargo.............................................42.25-5(a)
Timber load line..............................................42.25-5(b)
Towed barge...................................................44.05-5(b)
Watertight.......................................................45.3(o)
Weathertight.....................................................45.3(n)
Working freeboard.................................................44.310
Definitions for superstructure corrections.........................45.59
Description of service............................................47.600
Details of marking..............................................42.13-40
Diamond............................................................45.33
Domestic voyages by sea..........................................Part 42
Doors...........................................................42.15-10
Drills and inspections..........................................46.10-50

                                 E

Effective length of superstructure..............................42.20-50
Eligible barges...................................................45.173
Equivalents.....................................................42.03-20
Equivalents.....................................................46.10-25
Establishment of load lines for special service..................44.01-1
Excess sheer limitations...........................................45.65
Exemptions for vessels..........................................42.03-30
Existing passenger vessel.......................................46.05-30
Existing vessel.......................................42.05-30; 44.05-15
Experimental installations......................................42.03-25
Extent of damage................................................42.20-11

                                 F

Flooding standard:
Type ``A'' vessels...............................................42.20-6
Type ``B'' vessel, 60 percent reduction..........................42.20-7
Type ``B'' vessel, 100 percent reduction.........................42.20-8
Foreign vessels subject to this subchapter......................42.03-10
Canadian vessels.............................................42.03-10(b)
General......................................................42.03-10(a)
Vessels of countries not signatory to or adhering to the 1966 
Convention...................................................42.03-10(d)
Vessels of countries signatory to or adhering to the 1966 
Convention...................................................42.03-10(c)
Foreign voyage..................................................46.05-10
Foreign voyages by sea...........................................Part 42
Form of certificate...............................................47.640
Form of load line certificate...................................44.05-35
Free surface....................................................42.20-10
Freeboards.........................................................42.20
Final angle of heel..........................................42.20-12(c)
Intermediate stages of flooding..............................42.20-12(f)
Metacentric height...........................................42.20-12(d)
Progressive flooding.........................................42.20-12(b)

[[Page 104]]

Residual stability...........................................42.20-12(e)
Freeboard assignment:
Type ``A'' vessels...............................................42.20-3
Type ``B'' vessels...............................................42.20-5
Freeboard coefficient..............................................45.55
Freeboard tables................................................42.20-15
Freeboards:.....................................................44.05-25
General......................................................44.05-25(a)
Self-propelled cargo barges..................................44.05-25(g)
Self-propelled tank barges...................................44.05-25(h)
Steam colliers...............................................44.05-25(b)
Towed cargo barges of the open type..........................44.05-25(e)
Towed cargo barges with cargo only on deck...................44.05-25(d)
Towed cargo barges with cargo under deck.....................44.05-25(c)
Towed tank barges............................................44.05-25(f)
Freeboards assigned vessels.....................................42.13-10
Freeing port area:
Changes for bulwark height........................................45.123
Changes for trunks and side coamings..............................45.121
Changes from standard sheer.......................................45.119
General...........................................................45.117
Freeing ports...................................................42.15-70

                                 G

General......................................Subpart A; 42.11-1; 42.50-1
General Rules for Determining Load Lines...........................42.13
Superstructure...............................................42.13-15(j)
Weathertight.................................................42.13-15(l)
Great Lakes.....................................................42.05-40
Great Lakes voyage..............................................46.05-20

                                 H

Hatchway:
Coamings..........................................................45.147
Covers............................................................45.145
Hatchways closed by:
Portable covers and secured weathertight by tarpaulins and 
battening devices...............................................42.15-25
Weathertight covers of steel or other equivalent material fitted 
with gaskets and clamping devices...............................42.15-30
Heavy weather plan..............................................44.01-13
Hull fittings; General............................................45.129
Hull openings:
Above freeboard deck..............................................45.143
At or below freeboard deck........................................45.135

                                 I

Information supplied to the master................................45.105
Information to be supplied to the master.........................42.15-1
Initial conditions of loading....................................42.20-9
Initial or periodic survey requirements for all vessels.........42.09-25
Inlets and discharge piping; Valves...............................45.155
Intermediate freeboard.............................................45.75
International and Great Lakes Service; Stability Limited Deck 
Cargo Barges...................................................Subpart F
International voyage............................................42.05-45

[[Page 105]]

                                 L

Length of superstructure........................................42.20-45
Lines to be used with the load line mark........................42.13-30
Load line:
Certificates....................................................42.07-45
Required.........................................................42.07-1
Load Line Assignments and Surveys - General Requirements...........42.09
Load line certificate...........................................44.05-30
Load Line Certificates - Model Forms...............................42.50
Load line certificates for nonadherent foreign flag vessels.....42.50-10
Load line mark..........................................42.13-25; 47.620
Load line markings..............................................44.05-10
Load line requirements for subdivision...........................46.10-5
Logbook entries.......................................42.07-20; 46.10-55

                                 M

Machinery space openings................................42.15-35; 45.149
Manholes and flush scuttles.......................................45.141
Marine inspector or inspector...................................42.05-47
Mark of assigning authority.....................................42.13-35
Marking............................................................45.39
Marks placed on vessel to indicate load lines....................42.07-5
Marks to indicate subdivision load lines........................46.10-10
Midsummer freeboard................................................45.71
Minimum bow height..............................................42.20-70
Minimum freeboards..............................................42.20-75
Fresh water freeboard........................................42.20-75(e)
Summer freeboard.............................................42.20-75(a)
Tropical freeboard...........................................42.20-75(b)
Winter freeboard.............................................42.20-75(c)
Winter North Atlantic freeboard..............................42.20-75(d)
Miscellaneous openings in freeboard and superstructure decks....42.15-40

                                 N

New and existing vessels; special service.......................44.01-20
New passenger vessel............................................46.05-25
New vessel......................................................42.05-50
Nonsubmergence subdivision load line (Great Lakes)..............46.10-40
Nonsubmergence subdivision load lines in salt water.............46.10-45

                                 O

Obtaining working freeboards for hopper dredges...................44.330
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection............................42.05-55
OMB control numbers assigned pursuant to the Paperwork Reduction 
Act..............................................................42.01-5
Operating restrictions:...........................................44.340
Area of operation...........................................44.340(a)(3)
Seas........................................................44.340(a)(1)
Specific gravity of the dredge spoil........................44.340(a)(4)
Winds.......................................................44.340(a)(2)
Other openings....................................................45.151

                                 P

Passenger vessel.................................................46.05-1
Plans and inspections of new and converted vessels..............46.10-70

[[Page 106]]

Penalties for violation.........................................46.01-20
Penalties for violations........................................42.07-50
Positions of hatchways, doorways and ventilators................42.15-15
Position of structures, openings, and fittings....................45.127
Protection of the crew..........................................42.15-75
Purpose...................................45.171; 46.01; 46.01-1; 47.100
Purpose of regulations..........................................42.01-10

                                 R

Recognized classification society...............................42.05-60
Recognized classification society as an assigning authority.....42.07-40
Relaxation from regulations......................................46.10-1
Repairs or alterations to vessel after it has been surveyed.....42.09-50
Restrictions......................................................47.630
Right of appeal.................................................42.07-75

                                 S

Salt water freeboard...............................................45.77
Salt water load lines..............................................45.37
Scuppers and gravity drains.......................................45.157
Scuppers, inlets, and discharges................................42.15-60
Seasonal load lines................................................45.35
Sheer measurement..................................................45.67
Ship(s) and vessel(s)...........................................42.05-63
Side scuttles...........................................42.15-65; 45.139
Special conditions of assignment for Type ``A'' vessels........42.15-80; 
                                                                  45.159
Special load lines marks for vessels carrying timber deck cargo 
                                                                42.03-17
Special requirements for vessels assigned timber freeboards........42.25
Special service certificate.....................................44.01-15
Stability, subdivision, and strength............................42.09-10
Standard height of superstructure...............................42.20-40
Stowage:........................................................42.25-15
General......................................................42.25-15(a)
Lashings.....................................................42.25-15(c)
Protection of crew, access to machinery spaces, etc..........42.25-15(e)
Stability....................................................42.25-15(d)
Upright......................................................42.25-15(b)
Strength of:
Bulkheads at ends of superstructure...............................45.111
Hull..............................................................45.107
Superstructure and deckhouses.....................................45.109
Strength of vessel...............................................42.13-5
Structural stress and stability...................................45.103
Subdivision load line certificates..............................46.10-30
Submergence of load line marks..................................42.07-10
Submission of plans and calculations:.............................44.320
American Bureau of Shipping....................................44.320(b)
USCG...........................................................44.320(a)
Summer freeboard...................................................45.53
Superstructure end bulkheads.....................................42.15-5
Surveyor........................................................42.05-65
Survey for the establishment and renewal of subdivision load line 
marks...........................................................46.10-15
Surveys:
By the American Bureau of Shipping or assigning authority.......42.09-15
Of foreign vessels..............................................42.09-20

[[Page 107]]

                                 T

The Great Lakes of North America................................42.03-15
Through-hull piping, general......................................45.153
Trunks..........................................................42.20-55
Types of ships.....................................................45.51

                                 U

U.S. flag vessels and Canadian vessels navigating on sheltered 
waters of Puget Sound and contiguous west coast waters of the 
United States and Canada........................................42.03-35
U.S. flag vessels subject to the requirements of this subchapter: 
                                                                 42.03-5
Barges....................................................42.03-5(b)(iv)
Existing vessels.........................................42.03-5(a)(iii)
Fishing vessels............................................42.03-5(a)(v)
Hopper dredges................................................42.03-5(e)
Merchant vessels of less than 150 gross tons...............42.03-5(b)(i)
New vessels of less than 79 feet in length................42.03-5(a)(ii)
Pleasure yachts not engaged in trade.....42.03-5(a)(iv), 42.03-5(b)(iii)
Ships of war...............................42.03-5(a)(i), 42.03-5(b)(vi)
Special service coastwise voyage..............................42.03-5(d)
Vessels engaged in domestic voyages by sea....................42.03-5(b)
Vessels engaged in foreign voyages or international voyages other 
than solely Great Lakes voyages...............................42.03-5(a)
Vessels engaged solely on Great Lakes voyages.................42.03-5(c)
Vessels which are mechanically propelled and numbered by a State 
or USCG under the Federal Boating Safety Act of 1971 and not 
required by other laws to be inspected or certified by the USCG. 
                                                          42.03-5(b)(ii)
U.S. public vessels other than those vessels of 150 gross tons or 
over and engaged in commercial activities................42.03-5(b)(vii)

                                 V

Validity of subdivision load line certificates..................46.10-35
Ventilators.............................................42.15-45; 45.131
Verification of marks...........................................42.13-45
Vessels without means of propulsion.............................42.20-13
Voyage limits; special service..................................44.01-12

                                 W

Winter freeboard...................................................45.73
Winter North Atlantic Load Line.................................42.30-35

                                 Z

Zones, Areas, and Seasonal Periods.................................42.30
Basis:
Basis............................................................42.30-1
Summer.....................................................42.30-1(a)(1)
Tropical...................................................42.30-1(a)(2)
Enclosed areas:
Baltic Sea...................................................42.30-30(a)
Black Sea....................................................42.30-30(b)
Enclosed areas..................................................42.30-30
Mediterranean................................................42.30-30(c)
Sea of Japan.................................................42.30-30(d)
Northern Winter Seasonal Zones and area:
North Atlantic Seasonal Area..................................42.30-5(b)

[[Page 108]]

North Atantic Winter Seasonal Zone I and II...................42.30-5(a)
North Atlantic Winter Seasonal Zone II.....................42.30-5(a)(2)
Northern Winter Seasonal Zones and area..........................42.30-5
North Pacific Winter Seasonal Zone............................42.30-5(c)
Seasonal Tropical Areas:
Arabian Sea..................................................42.30-20(b)
Bay of Bengal................................................42.30-20(c)
China Sea....................................................42.30-20(e)
North Atlantic...............................................42.30-20(a)
North Pacific................................................42.30-20(f)
Seasonal Tropical Areas.........................................42.30-20
South Indian Ocean...........................................42.30-20(d)
South Pacific................................................42.30-20(g)
Southern Winter Seasonal Zone:
Southern Winter Seasonal Zone...................................42.30-10
Summer Zones:
Summer Zones....................................................42.30-25
Tropical Zone:
Areas to be included in the Tropical Zone....................42.30-15(c)
Northern boundary of the Tropical Zone.......................42.30-15(a)
Southern boundary of the Tropical Zone.......................42.30-15(b)
Tropical Zone...................................................42.30-15

[[Page 109]]



                     SUBCHAPTER F_MARINE ENGINEERING





PART 50_GENERAL PROVISIONS--Table of Contents




             Subpart 50.01_Basis and Purpose of Regulations

Sec.
50.01-10 Purpose of regulations.
50.01-15 Scope of regulations.
50.01-20 OMB control numbers assigned pursuant to the Paperwork 
          Reduction Act.

                        Subpart 50.05_Application

50.05-1 General.
50.05-5 Existing boilers, pressure vessels or piping systems.
50.05-10 Alterations or repairs.
50.05-15 Vessels subject to regulations in this subchapter.
50.05-20 Steam-propelled motorboats.

        Subpart 50.10_Definition of Terms Used in This Subchapter

50.10-1 Commandant.
50.10-5 Coast Guard District Commander or District Commander.
50.10-10 Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, (OCMI).
50.10-15 Marine inspector or inspector.
50.10-20 Headquarters.
50.10-23 Marine Safety Center.
50.10-25 Coast Guard Symbol.
50.10-30 Coast Guard number.
50.10-35 Constructed.

                Subpart 50.20_Plan Submittal and Approval

50.20-1 General.
50.20-5 Procedures for submittal of plans.
50.20-10 Number of copies of plans required.
50.20-15 Previously approved plans.
50.20-25 Calculations.
50.20-30 Alternative materials or methods of construction.
50.20-33 Correspondence regarding approved plans.
50.20-35 Marine inspector's decisions.
50.20-40 Right of appeal.

       Subpart 50.25_Acceptance of Material and Piping Components

50.25-1 General.
50.25-3 Manufacturer or mill certification.
50.25-5 Products requiring manufacturer or mill certification.
50.25-7 Testing of products required to be certified in presence of 
          marine inspector.
50.25-10 Acceptance of piping components by specific letter or approved 
          plan.

                  Subpart 50.30_Fabrication Inspection

50.30-1 Scope.
50.30-10 Class I, I-L and II-L pressure vessels.
50.30-15 Class II pressure vessels.
50.30-20 Class III pressure vessels.

    Authority: 43 U.S.C. 1333; 46 U.S.C. 3306, 3703; E.O. 12234, 45 FR 
58801, 3 CFR, 1980 Comp., p. 277; Department of Homeland Security 
Delegation No. 0170.1; Section 50.01-20 also issued under the authority 
of 44 U.S.C. 3507.

    Source: CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, unless otherwise 
noted.



             Subpart 50.01_Basis and Purpose of Regulations



Sec. 50.01-10  Purpose of regulations.

    (a) The purpose of the regulations in this subchapter is to set 
forth minimum requirements for marine engineering details for various 
types of vessels in accordance with the intent of title 52 of the 
Revised Statutes and acts amendatory thereof or supplemental thereto as 
well as to implement various international conventions for safety of 
life at sea and other treaties, which contain requirements affecting 
marine engineering. The regulations in this subchapter have the force of 
law.
    (b) All marine engineering details, such as boilers, pressure 
vessels, main and auxiliary machinery, piping, valves, and fittings, 
shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the 
provisions of this subchapter, except when specifically modified by the 
regulations in another subchapter in this chapter for a particular type 
of vessel or where a specific installation may be required or permitted.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48049, Sept. 
18, 1995]



Sec. 50.01-15  Scope of regulations.

    (a) This subchapter provides the specifications, standards and 
requirements for strength and adequacy of design, construction, 
installation, inspection, and choice of materials for machinery, 
boilers, pressure vessels, safety valves,

[[Page 110]]

and piping systems upon which safety of life is dependent.
    (b) Since this subchapter contains the marine engineering details, 
it implements the requirements for inspection and certification of 
vessels as set forth in other subchapters for specific types of vessels.



Sec. 50.01-20  OMB control numbers assigned pursuant to the Paperwork Reduction Act.

    (a) Purpose. This section collects and displays the control numbers 
assigned to information collection and recordkeeping requirements in 
this subchapter by the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) pursuant to 
the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (44 U.S.C. 3501 et seq.). The Coast 
Guard intends that this section comply with the requirements of 44 
U.S.C. 3507(f) which requires that agencies display a current control 
number assigned by the Director of the OMB for each approved agency 
information collection requirement.
    (b) Display.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Current OMB
  46 CFR Part or Section where Identified or Described      Control No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parts 50 through 64.....................................       1625-0097
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[49 FR 38120, Sept. 27, 1984, as amended by CGD 88-072, 53 FR 34297, 
Sept. 6, 1988; USCG-2004-18884, 69 FR 58345, Sept. 30, 2004]



                        Subpart 50.05_Application



Sec. 50.05-1  General.

    (a) The regulations in this subchapter shall apply to the marine 
engineering details of installations on vessels required to be inspected 
and certificated under other subchapters in this chapter as described in 
Sec. 50.01-10.
    (b) The regulations in this subchapter are not retroactive in 
effect, except as provided in Sec. 50.05-5 or Sec. 50.05-10, or if 
specifically so provided for at the time specific regulations are 
amended or added.
    (c) The requirements in this subchapter revised or added subsequent 
to July 1, 1969, shall be applicable to the installations contracted for 
after the effective dates of such requirements. Normally, materials, 
items of equipment, or installations in vessels which have been accepted 
and passed as satisfactory and meeting the applicable requirements in 
this subchapter then in effect and which are maintained in good and 
serviceable condition to the satisfaction of the Officer in Charge, 
Marine Inspection, may be continued in use until replacement is deemed 
necessary by such officer or as specified in the regulations.
    (d) Items of equipment, which are in use on vessels, previously 
approved by the Commandant but not complying with the latest 
specification requirements may be continued in use so long as they are 
maintained in good and serviceable condition to the satisfaction of the 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, until replacement is deemed 
necessary by such officer or as specified in the regulations.
    (e) Industrial systems and components on mobile offshore drilling 
units must meet subpart 58.60 of this chapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-251, 43 FR 
56799, Dec. 4, 1978; CGD 77-147, 47 FR 21809, May 20, 1982; USCG-2000-
7790, 65 FR 58459, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 50.05-5  Existing boilers, pressure vessels or piping systems.

    (a) Whenever doubt exists as to the safety of an existing boiler, 
pressure vessel, or piping system, the marine inspector may require that 
it be gaged or checked to determine the extent of deterioration, and if 
necessary for safety may require the recalculation and reduction of the 
maximum allowable working pressure.
    (b) For the purpose of recalculating the maximum allowable working 
pressure of boilers, pressure vessels, or piping which have deteriorated 
in service, the applicable design formulas in effect at the time it was 
contracted for or built or the currently effective design formulas in 
this subchapter shall be used: Provided, That such recalculation based 
on currently effective design formulas in this subchapter does not 
permit a higher pressure than that originally allowed by the regulations 
in effect at the time such work was contracted for or built.
    (c) When existing vessels are reboilered, the mountings and 
attachments shall be renewed in accordance

[[Page 111]]

with the regulations in this subchapter in effect at the time such 
reboilering work is contracted for. The existing steam piping shall be 
examined. Those portions which are in good condition and comply with 
minimum thickness requirements in effect at the time such reboilering 
work is contracted for may be continued in service. The steam piping 
replaced shall be in accordance with the regulations in this subchapter 
in effect for new construction.
    (d) For the purpose of this section, existing equipment includes 
only items which have previously met all Coast Guard requirements for 
installation aboard a vessel certificated by the Coast Guard, including 
requirements for design, fabrication, testing, and inspection at the 
time the equipment was new.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9430, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 50.05-10  Alterations or repairs.

    (a) When alteration or repair of boilers, pressure vessels, 
machinery, safety valves or piping systems becomes necessary, the work 
shall be done under the cognizance of the Officer in Charge Marine 
Inspection. It shall be done in accordance with the regulations in 
effect at the time such vessel or installation was contracted for or 
built (whichever is latest), or in accordance with the regulations in 
effect for new construction.
    (b) When alterations or repairs are made to a U.S. flag vessel in a 
port or place not in the United States, a notice containing details of 
the proposed alterations or repairs must be submitted to the appropriate 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-251, 43 FR 
56799, Dec. 4, 1978]



Sec. 50.05-15  Vessels subject to regulations in this subchapter.

    (a) Passenger vessels, tank vessels, cargo and miscellaneous 
vessels, nautical schoolships, mobile offshore drilling units, and 
oceanographic vessels are subject to the regulations in this subchapter 
to the extent prescribed by various laws and regulations as described in 
Sec. 50.01-1. The applicable provisions in this subchapter shall apply 
to all such U.S. flag vessels, and to all such foreign vessels which 
carry passengers from any port in the United States except as follows:
    (1) Any vessel of a foreign nation signatory to the International 
Convention for Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, and which has on board a 
current, valid Convention certificate attesting to the sufficiency of 
the marine engineering details as prescribed by applicable regulations 
in this chapter.
    (2) Any vessel of a foreign nation having inspection laws 
approximating those of the United States together with reciprocal 
inspection arrangements with the United States, and which has on board a 
current, valid certificate of inspection issued by its government under 
such arrangements.
    (3) Any vessel operating exclusively on inland waters which are not 
navigable waters of the United States.
    (4) Any vessel laid up and dismantled and out of commission.
    (5) With the exception of vessels of the U.S. Maritime 
Administration, any vessel with the title vested in the United States 
and which is used for public purposes.
    (b) Notwithstanding the exceptions previously noted in paragraphs 
(a) (1) and (2) of this section, foreign vessels of novel design or 
construction or whose operation involves potential unusual risks shall 
be subject to inspection to the extent necessary to safeguard life and 
property in U.S. ports, as further provided by Sec. 2.01-13 in 
subchapter A (Procedures Applicable to the Public) of this chapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-251, 43 FR 
56799, Dec. 4, 1978; CGD 80-161, 48 FR 15472, Apr. 11, 1983; CGD 90-008, 
55 FR 30660, July 26, 1990; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48049, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 50.05-20  Steam-propelled motorboats.

    (a) The requirements covering design of the propelling engine, 
boiler, and the auxiliary machinery, and the inspection thereof on all 
motor boats which are more than 40 feet in length and which are 
propelled by machinery driven by steam shall be in accordance with the 
applicable provisions of this subchapter.

[[Page 112]]

    (b) If the engines, boilers, and auxiliary machinery are found to be 
in safe operating condition at the initial or subsequent periodical 
inspection, the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, shall issue a 
letter to that effect. Such letter shall be posted on the vessel under 
glass. The letter will be valid for a specified period of time, as 
determined by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection. The owner, 
within 30 days prior to its expiration, shall make application to the 
nearest Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection for a renewal thereof.



        Subpart 50.10_Definition of Terms Used in This Subchapter



Sec. 50.10-1  Commandant.

    The term Commandant means the Commandant U.S. Coast Guard.



Sec. 50.10-5  Coast Guard District Commander or District Commander.

    The term Coast Guard District Commander or District Commander means 
an officer of the Coast Guard designated as such by the Commandant to 
command all Coast Guard activities within his district, which include 
the inspections, enforcement, and administration of Subtitle II, Title 
46, U.S. Code, Title 46 and Title 33 U.S. Code, and regulations under 
these statutes.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 95-028, 62 FR 
51200, Sept. 30, 1997]



Sec. 50.10-10  Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, (OCMI).

    The term Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, (OCMI) means any 
person from the civilian or military branch of the Coast Guard 
designated as such by the Commandant and who, under the superintendence 
and direction of the Coast Guard District Commander, is in charge of an 
inspection zone for the performance of duties with respect to the 
inspections, enforcement, and administration of Subtitle II, Title 46, 
U.S. Code, Title 46 and Title 33 U.S. Code, and regulations under these 
statutes.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 95-028, 62 FR 
51200, Sept. 30, 1997]



Sec. 50.10-15  Marine inspector or inspector.

    The term marine inspector or inspector means any person from the 
civilian or military branch of the Coast Guard assigned under the 
superintendence and direction of an Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection, or any other person as may be designated for the performance 
of duties with respect to the inspections, enforcement and the 
administration of Subtitle II, Title, 46, U.S. Code, Title 46 and Title 
33, U.S. Code, and regulations under these statutes.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 95-028, 62 FR 
51200, Sept. 30, 1997]



Sec. 50.10-20  Headquarters.

    The term Headquarters means the Office of the Commandant, U.S. Coast 
Guard, Washington, D.C. 20593-0001.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 88-070, 53 FR 
34534, Sept. 7, 1988]



Sec. 50.10-23  Marine Safety Center.

    The term Marine Safety Center refers to the Commanding Officer, U.S. 
Coast Guard Marine Safety Center, 1900 Half Street, SW., Suite 1000, 
Room 525, Washington, DC 20024 for visitors. Send all mail to Commanding 
Officer, U.S. Coast Guard Marine Safety Center, JR10-0525, 2100 2nd 
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20593, in a written or electronic format. 
Information for submitting the VSP electronically can be found at http:/
/www.uscg.mil/HQ/MSC.

[USCG-2007-29018, 72 FR 53965, Sept. 21, 2007]



Sec. 50.10-25  Coast Guard Symbol.

    (a) The term Coast Guard Symbol means that impression stamped on the 
nameplates of boilers, pressure vessels, and safety valves by a marine 
inspector upon the satisfactory completion of the tests and inspection 
of the product. It may also be used by a marine inspector to identify 
workmanship test plates and welding samples.
    (b) The impression of the Coast Guard Symbol for stamping nameplates 
and specimens is shown in Figure 50.10-25(b).

[[Page 113]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.018

                 Figure 50.10-25(b)--Coast Guard Symbol



Sec. 50.10-30  Coast Guard number.

    (a) The Coast Guard number means that number assigned to boilers and 
pressure vessels by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, who makes 
the final tests and inspections.
    (b) The Coast Guard number shall be stamped on the nameplates of 
boilers and pressure vessels.
    (c) The Coast Guard number is comprised of the following:
    (1) Three capital letters which identify the office of the issuing 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection (see Table 50.10-30); followed by,
    (2) An OCMI serial number, by which the particular boiler or 
pressure vessel can be identified; the first two digits of which will 
identify the calendar year the number was assigned.

 Table 50.10-30--Previous Sector Office Identification Letters in Coast
             Guard Numbers for Boilers and Pressure Vessels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Identification                        Sector Office
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ALB.......................................  Albany.
ANC.......................................  Anchorage.
BAL.......................................  Baltimore.
BOS.......................................  Boston.
BUF.......................................  Buffalo.
CHA.......................................  Charleston.
CHI.......................................  Chicago.
CIN.......................................  Cincinnati.
CLE.......................................  Cleveland.
COR.......................................  Corpus Christi.
DET.......................................  Detroit.
DUL.......................................  Duluth.
GAL.......................................  Galveston.
GUA.......................................  Guam.
HON.......................................  Honolulu.
HOU.......................................  Houston.
HRV.......................................  Hampton Roads, VA.
HUN.......................................  Huntington.
JAC.......................................  Jacksonville.
JUN.......................................  Juneau.
LIS.......................................  Long Island.
LOS.......................................  Los Angeles.
LOU.......................................  Louisville.
MEM.......................................  Memphis.
MIA.......................................  Miami.
MIL.......................................  Milwaukee.
MIN.......................................  Minneapolis.
MOB.......................................  Mobile.
MOR.......................................  Morgan City.
NAS.......................................  Nashville.
NEW.......................................  New Orleans.
NYC.......................................  New York.
PAD.......................................  Paducah.
PAT.......................................  Port Arthur.
PHI.......................................  Philadelphia.
PIT.......................................  Pittsburgh.
POM.......................................  Portland, ME.
POR.......................................  Portland, OR.
PRO.......................................  Providence.
ROT.......................................  Rotterdam.
SAV.......................................  Savannah.
SDC.......................................  San Diego.
SEA.......................................  Seattle.
SFC.......................................  San Francisco.
SIM.......................................  Saint Ignace.
SJP.......................................  San Juan.
SLM.......................................  St. Louis.
STB.......................................  Sturgeon Bay.
TAM.......................................  Tampa.
TOL.......................................  Toledo.
VAL.......................................  Valdez.
WNC.......................................  Wilmington, NC.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9975, June 17, 1970; CGD 74-219, 39 FR 40158, Nov. 14, 1974; CGD 78-
161, 44 FR 13492, Mar. 12, 1979; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58459, Sept. 29, 
2000; USCG-2006-25556, 72 FR 36330, July 2, 2007]



Sec. 50.10-35  Constructed.

    The term constructed means the keel has been laid or, for vessels 
with no keel, assembly of at least 50 tons or 1% of the estimated mass 
of all structural material, whichever is less, has been completed.

[CGD 83-043, 60 FR 24772, May 10, 1995]



                Subpart 50.20_Plan Submittal and Approval



Sec. 50.20-1  General.

    (a) The required vessel, equipment, or installation plans, as listed 
in this subchapter, are general in character, but include all plans 
which normally show the intended construction and safety features coming 
under the cognizance

[[Page 114]]

of the Coast Guard. In a particular case, however, not all of the plans 
enumerated may be applicable, and in such cases the Coast Guard will so 
notify the submitter.
    (b) Manufacturers of pressure vessels and other components, which 
require specific fabrication inspection in accordance with the 
requirements of this subchapter, shall submit and obtain approval of the 
applicable construction plans prior to the commencement of such 
fabrication. Manufacturers of automatically controlled boilers shall 
submit and obtain approval of the applicable control system plans prior 
to installation of the boiler. Manufacturers of boilers which must meet 
the requirements of part 52 of this subchapter shall submit the 
applicable construction plans for review prior to installation.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9431, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 50.20-5  Procedures for submittal of plans.

    (a) As the relative locations of shipyards, design offices, and 
Coast Guard offices vary throughout the country, no specific routing 
will be required in the submittal of plans. In general, one of the 
procedures outlined in this section apply, but if a more expeditious 
procedure can be used, there will normally be no objection to it.
    (b) The plans may be submitted in duplicate to the Officer in 
Charge, Marine Inspection, at or nearest the place where the vessel is 
to be built. Alternatively, the plans may be submitted in triplicate to 
the Marine Safety Center.
    (c) In the case of classed vessels, upon specific request by the 
submitter, the American Bureau of Shipping will arrange to forward the 
necessary plans to the Coast Guard indicating its action thereon. In 
this case, the plans will be returned directly to the submitter as noted 
in paragraph (c) of this section.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 88-070, 53 FR 
34534, Sept. 7, 1988; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40598, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-012, 
60 FR 48049, Sept. 18, 1995; CGD 95-072, 60 FR 50462, Sept. 29, 1995]



Sec. 50.20-10  Number of copies of plans required.

    (a) Three copies of each plan are normally required so that one copy 
can be returned to the submitter. If the submitter desires additional 
copies of approved plans, a suitable number should be submitted to 
permit the required distribution.



Sec. 50.20-15  Previously approved plans.

    (a) A manufacturer wishing to fabricate equipment in accordance with 
a plan previously approved (including work accomplished under a 
different contract) shall not be required to resubmit such plans 
provided:
    (1) Certification is submitted that the proposed equipment conforms 
in every respect to the plan previously approved, and such certification 
contains the drawing number, title, date, and last revision or change 
date, and date of previous approval;
    (2) The current regulations, including adopted specifications, 
standards or codes, pertaining to the proposed equipment are the same as 
those current when the original plan was approved; and
    (3) A copy of the approved plan is available for review by the 
approving office.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40598, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 50.20-25  Calculations.

    (a) Calculations shall be forwarded with plans submitted for 
approval and shall clearly substantiate compliance with the regulations 
in this subchapter. Care shall be taken to identify sources of 
equations, factors and other information upon which the calculations are 
based.
    (b) The results of the calculations, such as the maximum allowable 
working pressure (MAWP), test pressure, and safety device settings, 
shall be clearly identified.



Sec. 50.20-30  Alternative materials or methods of construction.

    (a) When new or alternative procedures, designs, or methods of 
construction are submitted for approval and for

[[Page 115]]

which no regulations have been provided, the Commandant will act 
regarding the approval or disapproval thereof.
    (b) If, in the development of industrial arts, improved materials or 
methods of construction are developed, their use in lieu of those 
specified will be given consideration upon formal application to the 
Commandant, with full information as to their characteristics, together 
with such scientific data and evidence as may be necessary to establish 
the suitability of such materials or methods of construction for the 
purpose intended.



Sec. 50.20-33  Correspondence regarding approved plans.

    (a) The Coast Guard maintains records concerning plans, 
calculations, etc., of equipment approved in accordance with the 
regulations in this subchapter for 5 years. After 5 years from the date 
of original approval of a drawing, plan or calculation and related 
correspondence, any submittal or correspondence which refers to such 
documents shall be accompanied by copies of the documents, including 
pertinent correspondence.



Sec. 50.20-35  Marine inspector's decisions.

    (a) When it becomes necessary for a marine inspector to make 
decisions on matters covered by the regulations in this subchapter or by 
requirements in referenced specifications, standards or codes, the 
inspector shall inform the owner or his representative of the 
requirement, which will be identified by source, section and paragraph 
number, on which the decisions are based. Whenever it is necessary to 
make decisions in matters not specifically covered by the regulations in 
this subchapter or by referenced requirements, the marine inspector 
shall clearly state the reasons which caused him to arrive at such 
decisions.
    (b) If the owner or his representative disagrees with a decision 
made by the marine inspector, he shall take up the matter with the local 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection. The owner or his representative 
may appeal the decision of the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in 
accordance with Sec. 50.20-40.



Sec. 50.20-40  Right of appeal.

    Any person directly affected by a decision or action taken under 
this subchapter, by or on behalf of the Coast Guard, may appeal 
therefrom in accordance with subpart 1.03 of this chapter.

[CGD 88-033, 54 FR 50380, Dec. 6, 1989]



       Subpart 50.25_Acceptance of Material and Piping Components



Sec. 50.25-1  General.

    (a) Materials and piping components used in the construction of 
boilers, pressure vessels, pressure piping systems, and related 
components are accepted by review of manufacturer or mill certificates 
under Sec. 50.25-3 of this part, product marking in accordance with an 
adopted industry standard, or technical information indicating their 
compliance with the requirements of this subchapter.
    (b) Plate, bar stock, pipe, tube, pipe joining fittings (tees, 
elbows, reducers, etc.), bolting, castings, forgings, and flanges, are 
accepted by review of manufacturer or mill certificates under Sec. Sec. 
50.25-3, 50.25-5, and 50.25-7 of this part.
    (c) Valves, fluid conditioner fittings, and special purpose fittings 
complying with an adopted industry standard and marked in accordance 
with the standard are accepted through review of the marking indicating 
compliance with the adopted industry standard.
    (d) Valves, fluid conditioner fittings, special purpose fittings, 
and pipe joining fittings not complying with an adopted industry 
standard are accepted for use on a case-by-case basis. Acceptance is 
granted by the Marine Safety Center or the Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection, having cognizance over the installation of the product. To 
obtain acceptance of a product, the manufacturer must submit, via the 
vessel owner or representative, the information described in Sec. 
50.25-10 of this part to the Marine Safety Center or the cognizant 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection.

[[Page 116]]

    (e) Components designed for hydraulic service which require shock 
testing under Sec. 58.30-15(f) of this chapter and nonmetallic flexible 
hose assemblies must be accepted by the Commandant (G-MSE). 
Manufacturers desiring acceptance of these products must submit 
information necessary to show compliance with Sec. Sec. 56.60-25(c) or 
58.30-15 of this chapter, as applicable. Acceptance of specific 
installations of acceptable nonmetallic flexible hose assemblies and 
shock tested hydraulic components is granted by the Marine Safety Center 
or the cognizant Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, as described in 
paragraph (d) of this section.
    (f) The vessel owner or representative shall make available to the 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, the manufacturer or mill 
certificates, specific letters of acceptance, or approved plans 
necessary to verify that piping components comply with the requirements 
of this subchapter.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40598, Oct. 2, 1989, as amended by CGD 95-072, 60 FR 
50462, Sept. 29, 1995; CGD 96-041, 61 FR 50727, Sept. 27, 1996; USCG-
2004-18884, 69 FR 58345, Sept. 30, 2004]



Sec. 50.25-3  Manufacturer or mill certification.

    (a) A manufacturer or mill producing materials used in certain 
products for installation on inspected vessels, shall issue a 
certificate or mill test report which shall report the results of 
chemical analysis and mechanical properties required by the ASTM 
specification.
    (b) This certificate shall be made available to the marine inspector 
and Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, upon request to the 
fabricator. (For exception refer to Sec. 50.25-5(d).)

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40598, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 50.25-5  Products requiring manufacturer or mill certification.

    (a) Products required to be certified by a manufacturer or by mill 
certificate shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with the 
applicable specifications. Such products will not normally be subject to 
mill inspection by the Coast Guard except as required by Sec. 50.25-7.
    (b) The Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, having cognizance over 
the installation of the products required to be certified shall ensure 
that adequate control has been exercised to identify the product with 
its manufacturer or mill certificate.
    (c) In the event that the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, 
determines that handling of a product has been such that proper 
identification is not possible, he may:
    (1) Require testing in his presence based on the applicable material 
or fabrication specification; or
    (2) Reject the product on the basis that it cannot be properly 
identified.
    (d) A product conforming to an acceptable material specification 
may, at the discretion of the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, be 
accepted without referring to its manufacturer or mill certification, 
if:
    (1) The product is marked in accordance with the identification 
marking requirements of the specification;
    (2) The marking alone is sufficient to identify that specification; 
and
    (3) In the opinion of the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, the 
application of the product does not require knowledge of the exact 
chemical analysis or mechanical properties enumerated on the 
manufacturer or mill certificate.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40598, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 50.25-7  Testing of products required to be certified in presence of marine inspector.

    (a) Certified products are not normally tested in the presence of a 
marine inspector. The Commandant may, however, assign a marine inspector 
to witness tests required by the applicable specifications to satisfy 
himself that the requirements are met.
    (b) Marine inspectors shall have free entry at all times to those 
parts of the plant where material subject to the regulations in this 
subchapter is being manufactured. The manufacturer shall provide marine 
inspectors all reasonable facilities to satisfy them that the material 
is being manufactured in accordance with the requirements of the 
Commandant.

[[Page 117]]

    (c) Unless otherwise authorized, required tests and inspections 
described in applicable specifications shall be made at the place of 
manufacture prior to shipment. Unless otherwise specified, tests shall 
be performed at room temperature. These tests when performed in the 
presence of a marine inspector will be so conducted as not to interfere 
unnecessarily with the operation of the plant.
    (d) Marine inspectors shall assure themselves that test specimens 
are marked for positive identification with the materials which they 
represent.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40599, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 50.25-10  Acceptance of piping components by specific letter or approved plan.

    (a) A manufacturer of a piping component which does not comply with 
an adopted industry standard and requires acceptance by specific letter 
or approved plan must do the following:
    (1) Submit an engineering type catalog or representative drawings of 
the component which includes the pressure and temperature ratings of the 
component and identify the service for which it is intended.
    (2) Identify materials used to fabricate the component. Materials 
must meet the requirements of subpart 56.60 of this chapter. If the 
component is not manufactured to accepted material specifications, the 
manufacturer must prove equivalency to accepted material specifications 
by comparing details of the materials' chemical composition, mechanical 
properties, method of manufacture, and complete chemical and mechanical 
test results with an accepted material specification.
    (3) Identify the industry standard, if any, to which the component 
is manufactured.
    (4) Submit a description of nondestructive testing performed on the 
component.
    (5) Submit a description of the marking applied to the component.
    (6) Submit information showing compliance with the requirements of 
part 56, subparts 56.15, 56.20, 56.25, 56.30, or 56.35 of this chapter, 
as applicable.
    (7) Submit any additional information necessary to evaluate the 
component's acceptability for its intended application.
    (b) If the component is found to comply with the requirements of 
this subchapter, the component is designated as acceptable for its 
intended installation. This acceptance is in the form of a specific 
letter relating directly to the particular component or in the form of 
an approved piping system plan in which the component is identified as 
an integral part.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40599, Oct. 2, 1989]



                  Subpart 50.30_Fabrication Inspection



Sec. 50.30-1  Scope.

    (a) The manufacturer shall notify the Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection, of the intended fabrication of pressure vessels that will 
require Coast Guard inspection.
    (b) For exemption of certain pressure vessels from shop inspection 
see Sec. 54.01-15 of this subchapter.
    (c) For a classification delineation of boilers and pressure vessels 
refer to Tables 54.01-5(a) and 54.01-5(b) of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18808, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9431, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 50.30-10  Class I, I-L and II-L pressure vessels.

    (a) Classes I, I-L and II-L pressure vessels shall be subject to 
shop inspection at the plant where they are being fabricated, or when 
determined necessary by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection.
    (b) The manufacturer shall submit Class I, I-L and II-L pressure 
vessels, as defined in Parts 54 and 56 of this subchapter for shop 
inspection at such stages of fabrication as may be requested by the 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection.

[CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48049, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 50.30-15  Class II pressure vessels.

    (a) Class II pressure vessels shall be subject to shop inspections 
at the plant where they are being fabricated, as or

[[Page 118]]

when determined necessary by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection. 
The inspections described in this section are required, unless 
specifically exempted by other regulations in this subchapter.
    (b) The first inspection of Class II welded pressure vessels shall 
be performed during the welding of the longitudinal joint. At this time 
the marine inspector shall check the material and fit-up of the work, 
and ascertain that only welders who have passed the required tests are 
employed.
    (c) A second inspection of Class II welded pressure vessels shall be 
made during the welding of the circumferential joints. At this time the 
marine inspector shall check any new material being used which may not 
have been examined at the time of the first inspection, also the fit-up 
of the vessel at this stage of fabrication, and in addition, observe the 
welding and ascertain that only welders who have passed the required 
tests are employed.



Sec. 50.30-20  Class III pressure vessels.

    (a) Class III pressure vessels shall be subject to shop inspection 
at the plant where they are being fabricated, as or when determined 
necessary by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection. The inspection 
described in this section is required, unless specifically exempted by 
other regulations in this subchapter.
    (b) For Class III welded pressure vessels, one inspection shall be 
made during the welding of the longitudinal joint. If there is no 
longitudinal joint, the inspection shall be made during the welding of a 
circumferential joint. At this time the marine inspector shall check the 
material and fit-up of the work and see that only welders who have 
passed the required tests are employed.

                           PART 51 [RESERVED]



PART 52_POWER BOILERS--Table of Contents




                   Subpart 52.01_General Requirements

Sec.
52.01-1 Incorporation by reference.
52.01-2 Adoption of section I of the ASME Code.
52.01-3 Definitions of terms used in this part.
52.01-5 Plans.
52.01-10 Automatic controls.
52.01-35 Auxiliary, donkey, fired thermal fluid heater, and heating 
          boilers.
52.01-40 Materials and workmanship.
52.01-50 Fusible plugs (modifies A-19 through A-21).
52.01-55 Increase in maximum allowable working pressure.
52.01-90 Materials (modifies PG-5 through PG-13).
52.01-95 Design (modifies PG-16 through PG-31 and PG-100).
52.01-100 Openings and compensation (modifies PG-32 through PG-39, PG-42 
          through PG-55).
52.01-105 Piping, valves and fittings (modifies PG-58 and PG-59).
52.01-110 Water-level indicators, water columns, gauge-glass 
          connections, gauge cocks, and pressure gauges (modifies PG-
          60).
52.01-115 Feedwater supply (modifies PG-61).
52.01-120 Safety valves and safety relief valves (modifies PG-67 through 
          PG-73).
52.01-130 Installation.
52.01-135 Inspection and tests (modifies PG-90 through PG-100).
52.01-140 Certification by stamping (modifies PG-104 through PG-113).
52.01-145 Manufacturers' data report forms (modifies PG-112 and PG-113).

      Subpart 52.05_Requirements for Boilers Fabricated by Welding

52.05-1 General (modifies PW-1 through PW-54).
52.05-15 Heat treatment (modifies PW-10).
52.05-20 Radiographic and ultrasonic examination (modifies PW-11 and PW-
          41.1).
52.05-30 Minimum requirements for attachment welds (modifies PW-16).
52.05-45 Circumferential joints in pipes, tubes and headers (modifies 
          PW-41).

            Subpart 52.15_Requirements for Watertube Boilers

52.15-1 General (modifies PWT-1 through PWT-15).
52.15-5 Tube connections (modifies PWT-9 and PWT-11).

             Subpart 52.20_Requirements for Firetube Boilers

52.20-1 General (modifies PFT-1 through PFT-49).
52.20-17 Opening between boiler and safety valve (modifies PFT-44).
52.20-25 Setting (modifies PFT-46).

[[Page 119]]

                    Subpart 52.25_Other Boiler Types

52.25-1 General.
52.25-3 Feedwater heaters (modifies PFH-1).
52.25-5 Miniature boiler (modifies PMB-1 through PMB-21).
52.25-7 Electric boilers (modifies PEB-1 through PEB-19).
52.25-10 Organic fluid vaporizer generators (modifies PVG-1 through PVG-
          12).
52.25-15 Fired thermal fluid heaters.
52.25-20 Exhaust gas boilers.

    Authority: 46 U.S.C. 3306, 3307, 3703; E.O. 12234, 45 FR 58801, 3 
CFR, 1980 Comp., p. 277; Department of Homeland Security Delegation No. 
0170.1.

    Source: CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, unless otherwise 
noted.



                   Subpart 52.01_General Requirements



Sec. 52.01-1  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part 
with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance 
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a). To enforce any edition other than that specified 
in paragraph (b) of this section, the Coast Guard must publish notice of 
change in the Federal Register and make the material available to the 
public. All approved material is on file at the U.S. Coast Guard, Office 
of Design and Engineering Standards (G-MSE), 2100 Second Street SW., 
Washington, DC 20593-0001 and is available from the sources indicated in 
paragraph (b) of this section or at the National Archives and Records 
Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this 
material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/
federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (b) The material approved for incorporation by reference in this 
part and the sections affected are:

      American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) International

Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990

  Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section I, Power Boilers, July 1989 
                        with 1989 addenda

 52.01-2; 52.01-5; 52.01-50; 52.01-90; 52.01-95; 52.01-100; 52.01-105; 
52.01-110; 52.01-115; 52.01-120; 52.01-135; 52.01-140; 52.01-145; 52.05-
 1; 52.05-15; 52.05-20; 52.05-30; 52.05-45; 52.15-1; 52.15-5; 52.20-1; 
         52.20-17; 52.20-25; 52.25-3; 52.25-5; 52.25-7; 52.25-10

[CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35821, July 29, 1991, as amended by CGD 95-072, 60 FR 
50462, Sept. 29, 1995; CGD 96-041, 61 FR 50727, Sept. 27, 1996; USCG-
1999-6216, 64 FR 53224, Oct. 1, 1999]



Sec. 52.01-2  Adoption of section I of the ASME Code.

    (a) Main power boilers and auxiliary boilers shall be designed, 
constructed, inspected, tested, and stamped in accordance with section I 
of the ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) Code, as limited, 
modified, or replaced by specific requirements in this part. The 
provisions in the appendix to section I of the ASME Code are adopted and 
shall be followed when the requirements in section I make them 
mandatory. For general information Table 52.01-1(a) lists the various 
paragraphs in section I of the ASME Code which are limited, modified, or 
replaced by regulations in this part.

   Table 52.01-1(a)--Limitations and Modifications in the Adoption of
                       Section I of the ASME Code
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paragraphs in section I, ASME Code\1\ and
               disposition                       Unit of this part
------------------------------------------------------------------------
PG-1 replaced by.........................  54.01-5(a)
PG-5 through PG-13 modified by...........  52.01-90
PG-16 through PG-31 modified by..........  52.01-95
PG-32 through PG-39 modified by..........  52.01-100
PG-42 through PG-55 modified by..........  52.01-100
PG-58 and PG-59 modified by..............  52.01-105
PG-60 modified by........................  52.01-110
PG-61 modified by........................  52.01-115
                                           (56.50-30)
PG-67 through PG-73 modified by..........  52.01-120
PG-90 through PG-100 modified by.........  52.01-135
                                           (52.01-95)
PG-91 modified by........................  52.01-135(b)
PG-99 modified by........................  52.01-135(c)
PG-100 modified by.......................  52.01-95(e)
PG-104 through PG-113 modified by........  52.01-140(a)
PG-112 and PG-113 modified by............  52.01-145
PW-1 through PW-54 modified by...........  52.05-1
PW-10 modified by........................  52.05-15
PW-11.1 modified by......................  52.05-20
PW-16 modified by........................  52.05-30
PW-41 modified by........................  52.05-20, 52.05-45
PWT-1 through PWT-15 modified by.........  52.15-1
PWT-9 modified by........................  52.15-5
PWT-9.2 replaced by......................  52.15-5(b)
PWT-11 modified by.......................  52.15-5
PWT-11.3 replaced by.....................  52.15-5(b)
PFT-1 through PFT-49 modified by.........  52.20-1
PFT-44 modified by.......................  52.20-17
PFT-46. modified by......................  52.20-25
PFH-1 modified by........................  52.25-3
PMB-1 through PMB-21 modified by.........  52.25-5
PEB-1 through PEB-19 modified by.........  52.25-7
PVG-1 through PVG-12 modified by.........  52.25-10

[[Page 120]]

 
A-19 through A-21 modified by............  52.01-50
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The references to specific provisions in the ASME Code are coded.
  The first letter ``P'' refers to section I, while the letter ``A''
  refers to the appendix to section I. The letter or letters following
  ``P'' refer to a specific subsection of section I. The number
  following the letter or letters refers to the paragraph so numbered in
  the text.

    (b) References to the ASME Code, such as paragraph PG-1, indicate:

P=Section I, Power Boilers ASME Code.
G=Subsection--General.
1=Paragraph 1.

    (c) When a section or paragraph of the regulations in this part 
relates to material in section I of the ASME Code, the relationship with 
the code will be shown immediately following the heading of the section 
or at the beginning of the paragraph as follows:
    (1) (Modifies P ------.) This indicates that the material in P ----
-- is generally applicable but is being altered, amplified or augmented.
    (2) (Replaces P ------.) This indicates that P ------ does not 
apply.
    (3) (Reproduces P ------.) This indicates that P ------ is being 
identically reproduced for convenience, not for emphasis.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9975, June 17, 1970; CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9431, Mar. 8, 1985. 
Redesignated and amended by CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35821, July 29, 1991]



Sec. 52.01-3  Definitions of terms used in this part.

    (a) Types of boilers--(1) Main power boiler. A main power boiler is 
a steam boiler used for generating steam for main propulsion.
    (2) Auxiliary or donkey boiler. An auxiliary or donkey boiler is a 
steam boiler used for all purposes, including emergency propulsion, for 
which steam may be required other than main propulsion.
    (3) Watertube boiler. A watertube boiler is a steam boiler in which 
the boiler tubes contain water and steam. The heat is applied to the 
outside surface of the tubes.
    (4) Internally fired firetube boiler (scotch boiler). An internally 
fired firetube boiler is a steam boiler containing furnaces, one or more 
combustion chambers and tubes or flues, which are surrounded by water 
and through which the products of combustion pass from the furnace to 
the uptake. In such boilers no part of the shell is in contact with the 
fire or products of combustion.
    (5) Externally fired firetube or flue boiler (horizontal return 
tubular). An externally fired firetube or flue boiler is a steam boiler, 
part of the outer shell of which is exposed to fire or to the products 
of combustion, and containing flues through which such products pass 
from the furnace to the uptake.
    (6) High temperature water boiler. A high temperature water boiler 
is a boiler containing water at a temperature exceeding 250 [deg]F.
    (7) Packaged boiler. A packaged boiler is a steam boiler equipped, 
and shipped complete with fuel burning equipment, mechanical draft 
equipment, feed water apparatus and all necessary controls for manual or 
automatic operation, all completely mounted on a common base and 
requiring only to be connected to fuel, water and electric supplies to 
be ready for use.
    (8) Fired steam boiler. A pressure vessel in which steam is 
generated by the application of heat resulting from the combustion of 
fuel is classed as a fired steam boiler.
    (9) Unfired steam boiler. A pressure vessel in which steam is 
generated by means other than fuel combustion is classed as an unfired 
steam boiler. (See Sec. 54.01-10 of this subchapter.)
    (10) Hybrid boiler. A hybrid boiler is a steam boiler whose design 
employs features from both watertube and firetube boilers.
    (b) Parts of boilers--(1) Shell. The shell is the structure forming 
the outer envelope of a boiler drum, or pressure vessel consisting of 
one or more plates properly joined (or of seamless construction) as 
specified in this part. This does not include tube sheets or heads.
    (2) Heads. The heads are the ends of a boiler or pressure vessel. 
They may be flat or dished, stayed or unstayed.
    (i) Dished heads. Dished heads are heads formed to a segment of a 
sphere

[[Page 121]]

or to a hemispherical or elliptical section and may be attached to the 
shell so that the pressure will be either on the concave or on the 
convex side.
    (ii) Stayed heads. Stayed heads are heads supported in whole or in 
part by stays, furnaces, flues, tubes, etc.
    (3) Water wall. A water wall is a series of tubes or elements spaced 
along or integral with a wall of a furnace to protect the wall and 
provide additional heating surface.
    (4) Header. A header is a hollow forging, pipe, or welded plate of 
cylindrical, square, or rectangular cross section, serving as a manifold 
to which tubes are connected.
    (5) Superheater. A superheater is an appliance for the purpose of 
increasing the temperature of steam.
    (6) Economizer. An economizer is a feed-water heater usually located 
in the uptake or casing of a boiler to absorb heat from the waste gases.
    (7) Domes. Domes are superstructures of shells, attached by 
riveting, bolting, or welding. They generally consist of a cylindrical 
shell with one end flanged for attachment to the main shell and the 
other end closed by a head which may be integral with, riveted, or 
welded to the shell.
    (8) Steam chimneys. Steam chimneys are superstructures of steam 
boilers which are fitted with a lining inside of which the products of 
combustion pass to the smokestack. They may be constructed in the form 
of a dome integral with the boiler or as independent steam vessels 
connected by piping to the boiler.
    (9) Furnace. A furnace is a firebox or a large flue in which the 
fuel is burned.
    (i) Corrugated furnace. A corrugated furnace is a cylindrical shell 
wherein corrugations are formed circumferentially for additional 
strength and to provide for expansion.
    (ii) Plain furnace. A plain furnace is a cylindrical shell usually 
made in sections joined by means of riveting or welding.
    (10) Combustion chamber. A combustion chamber is that part of an 
internally fired boiler in which combustible gases may be burned after 
leaving the furnace.
    (i) Separate combustion chamber. A separate combustion chamber is a 
combustion chamber which is connected to one furnace only.
    (ii) Common combustion chamber. A common combustion chamber is a 
combustion chamber connected to two or more furnaces in a boiler.
    (iii) Crown or top plate. A crown or top plate is the top of a 
combustion chamber and is usually supported by girder stays or by sling 
stays or braces.
    (iv) Curved bottom plate. A curved bottom plate is the bottom of a 
separate combustion chamber formed to an arc of a circle and usually 
designed to be self-supporting.
    (v) Combustion chamber tube sheet. A combustion chamber tube sheet 
is the plate forming the end of a combustion chamber in which the tubes 
are secured.
    (vi) Combustion chamber back sheet. A combustion chamber back sheet 
is the plate opposite the tube sheet forming the back of the combustion 
chamber. It is usually stayed to the back head of the boiler by means of 
screw staybolts, or, in the case of double-ended boilers, to the back of 
the combustion chamber of the other end of the boiler.
    (11) Flues. Flues are cylindrical shells made of seamless or welded 
tubing, or with a riveted longitudinal joint, the ends being attached by 
riveting or welding. Their purpose is to provide additional heating 
surface and to form a path for the products of combustion.
    (12) Tubes. Tubes are cylindrical shells of comparatively small 
diameter constituting the main part of the heating surface of a boiler 
or superheater.
    (i) Seamless tube. A seamless tube is a tube without any 
longitudinal joint.
    (ii) Electric-resistance-welded tube. An electric-resistance-welded 
tube is a tube the longitudinal joint of which is made by the electric-
resistance butt welding process.
    (iii) Stay tube. A stay tube is a thickwalled tube, the end of which 
is usually thickened by upsetting to compensate for threading. Such 
tubes are used for staying tube sheets into which they are screwed and 
expanded.
    (13) Tube sheet. A tube sheet is a portion of a boiler drum, or 
header perforated for the insertion of tubes.
    (14) Ligament. The ligament is the section of metal between the 
holes in a tube sheet.

[[Page 122]]

    (i) Longitudinal ligament. A longitudinal ligament is the minimum 
section of metal between two tube holes on a line parallel with the axis 
of the drum.
    (ii) Circumferential ligament. A circumferential ligament is the 
minimum section of metal between two tube holes on a line around the 
circumference of the drum.
    (iii) Diagonal ligament. A diagonal ligament is the minimum section 
of metal between two tube holes in adjacent rows, measured diagonally 
from one row to the other.
    (c) Stays and supports--(1) Surfaces to be stayed. Surfaces to be 
stayed or reinforced include flat plates, heads, or areas thereof, such 
as segments of heads, wrapper sheets, furnace plates, side sheets, 
combustion chamber tops, etc., which are not self-supporting; and curved 
plates, constituting the whole or parts of a cylinder subject to 
external pressure, which are not entirely self-supporting.
    (2) Through stay. A through stay is a solid bar extending through 
both heads of a boiler and threaded at the ends for attachment by means 
of nuts. With this type of stay the ends are usually upset to compensate 
for the threading. (See Figure 52.01-3(a).)
    (3) Solid screw staybolt. A solid screw staybolt is a threaded bar 
screwed through the plates, the ends being riveted over or fitted with 
nuts or welded collars. (See Figure 52.01-3(b).)
    (4) Welded collar. A welded collar is a beveled ring formed around 
the end of a screw stay by means of arc- or gas-welding. It is used in 
lieu of a nut. (See Figure 52.01-3(1).)
    (5) Hollow screw staybolt. A hollow screw staybolt is a hollow 
threaded bar screwed through the plate, the ends being riveted over or 
fitted with nuts or welded collars. (See Figure 52.01-3(c).)
    (6) Flexible staybolt. A flexible staybolt is a bar made with ball-
and-socket joint on one end, the cup of the socket being screwed into 
the outside sheet and covered with a removable cap, the plain end of the 
staybolt being threaded, screwed through the inside sheet and riveted 
over. (See Figure 52.01-3(d).)
    (7) Sling stay. A sling stay is a flexible stay consisting of a 
solid bar having one or both ends forged for a pin connection to a 
crowfoot or other structural fitting secured to the stayed plate. (See 
Figure 52.01-3(e).)
    (8) Crowfoot. A crowfoot is a forged fitting with palms or lugs 
secured to the head to form a proper connection with a sling stay. (See 
Figure 52.01-3(f).)
    (9) Crowfoot stay. A crowfoot stay is a solid bar stay terminating 
in a forged fork with palms or lugs for attachment to the plate. (See 
Figure 52.01-3(g).)
    (10) Diagonal stay. A diagonal stay is a bar or formed plate forged 
with palms or lugs for staying the head of the boiler to the shell 
diagonally. (See Figure 52.01-3(h).)
    (11) Gusset stay. A gusset stay is a triangular plate used for the 
same purpose as a diagonal stay and attached to the head and the shell 
by angles, flanges, or other suitable means of attachment. (See Figure 
52.01-3(i).)
    (12) Dog stay. A dog stay is a staybolt, one end of which extends 
through a girder, dog, or bridge, and is secured by a nut, the other end 
being screwed through the plate which it is supporting and riveted over 
or fitted with a nut or welded collar. (See Figure 52.01-3(j).)
    (13) Girder. A girder is a bridge, built up of plates of structural 
shapes separated by distance pieces, a forging, or a formed plate, which 
spans an area requiring support, abutting thereon and supporting the 
girder stays or staybolts. (See Figure 52.01-3(k).)
    (14) Structural stiffeners. Structural stiffeners are rolled shapes 
or flanged plates which are used to stiffen a surface which is not 
entirely self-supporting.
    (15) Reinforcement. A reinforcement is a doubling plate, washer, 
structural shape, or other form for stiffening or strengthening a plate.
    (d) Pressure relief devices. For boilers, pressure vessels, and 
pressure piping, a pressure relief device is designed to open to prevent 
a rise of internal fluid pressure in excess of a specified value due to 
exposure to emergency or abnormal conditions. It may also be designed to 
prevent excessive internal vacuum. It may be a pressure relief valve, a 
nonreclosing pressure relief device or a vacuum relief valve.

[[Page 123]]

    (1) Pressure relief valve. A pressure relief valve is a pressure 
relief device which is designed to reclose and prevent the further flow 
of fluid after normal conditions have been restored.
    (i) Safety valve. A safety valve is a pressure relief valve actuated 
by inlet static pressure and characterized by rapid opening or pop 
action. Examples of types used on boilers include:
    (A) Spring-loaded safety valve. A spring-loaded safety valve is a 
safety valve fitted with a spring which normally holds the valve disk in 
a closed position against the seat and allows it to open or close at 
predetermined pressures. Spring-loaded safety valves are characterized 
by pop action.
    (B) Pressure loaded pilot actuated safety valve. A pressure loaded 
pilot actuated safety valve is one which is held in a closed position by 
steam pressure and controlled in operation by a pilot actuator valve.
    (C) Spring loaded pilot actuated safety valve. A spring loaded, 
pilot actuated safety valve is one in which a spring is used in the 
conventional way to hold the disk against the seat, but which has a 
piston attached to the spindle and enclosed within a cylinder, which 
when subjected to a limiting or set pressure, unbalances the spring load 
thereby opening the valve.
    (D) Spring loaded pilot valve. A spring loaded pilot valve is a 
conventional safety valve designed to actuate another spring loaded 
safety valve through a pressure transmitting line led from the body of 
the pilot valve.
    (ii) Relief valve. A relief valve is a pressure relief valve 
actuated by inlet static pressure which opens in proportion to the 
increase in pressure over the opening pressure.
    (iii) Safety relief valve. A safety relief valve is a pressure 
relief valve characterized by rapid opening or pop action, or by opening 
in proportion to the increase in pressure over the opening pressure, 
depending on application.
    (A) Conventional safety relief valve. A conventional safety relief 
valve has its spring housing vented to the discharge side of the valve. 
The performance characteristics (opening pressure, closing pressure, 
lift and relieving capacity) are directly affected by changes of the 
back pressure on the valve.
    (B) Balanced safety relief valve. A balanced safety relief valve 
incorporates means of minimizing the effect of back pressure on the 
operational characteristics (opening pressure, closing pressure, lift 
and relieving capacity).
    (C) Internal spring safety relief valve. An internal spring safety 
relief valve incorporates the spring and all or part of the operating 
mechanism within the pressure vessel.
    (iv) Pilot operated pressure relief valve. A pilot operated pressure 
relief valve is a pressure relief valve in which the major relieving 
device is combined with and is controlled by a self-actuated auxiliary 
pressure relief valve.
    (v) Power actuated relief valve. A power actuated pressure relief 
valve is a pressure relief valve in which the major relieving device is 
combined with and controlled by a device requiring an external source of 
energy.
    (vi) Temperature actuated pressure relief valve. A temperature 
actuated pressure relief valve is a pressure relief valve. A spring 
loaded, pilot actuated internal temperature.
    (2) Nonreclosing pressure relief device. A nonreclosing pressure 
relief device is a pressure relief device not designed to reclose after 
operation.
    (i) Rupture disk device. A rupture disk device is a device actuated 
by inlet static pressure and designed to function by the bursting of a 
pressure retaining disk.
    (ii) Explosion rupture disk device. An explosion rupture disk device 
is a rupture disk device designed for use at high rates of pressure 
rise.
    (iii) Breaking pin device. A breaking pin device is a device 
actuated by inlet static pressure and designed to function by the 
breakage of a load carrying section of a pin which supports a pressure 
retaining member.
    (iv) Shear pin device. A shear pin device is a device actuated by 
inlet static pressure and designed to function by the shearing of a load 
carrying pin which supports the pressure retaining member.
    (v) Fusible plug device. A fusible plug device is a device designed 
to function by the yielding or melting of a plug of suitable melting 
temperature.

[[Page 124]]

    (vi) Frangible disk device. A frangible disk device is the same as a 
rupture disk device.
    (vii) Bursting disk device. A bursting disk device is the same as a 
rupture disk device.
    (3) Vacuum relief valve. A vacuum relief valve is a valve designed 
to admit fluid to prevent an excessive internal vacuum.
    (e) Other boiler attachments--(1) Mountings. Mountings are nozzle 
connections, distance pieces, valves, or fittings attached directly to 
the boiler.
    (2) Main steam stop valve. A main steam stop valve is a valve 
usually connected directly to the boiler for the purpose of shutting off 
the steam from the main steam line.
    (3) Auxiliary steam stop valve. An auxiliary steam stop valve is a 
valve usually connected directly to the boiler for the purpose of 
shutting off the steam from the auxiliary lines (including the whistle 
lines).
    (4) Manifold. A manifold is a fitting with two or more branches 
having valves either attached by bolting or integral with the fitting.
    (5) Feed valve. A feed valve is a valve in the feed-water line which 
controls the boiler feed.
    (6) Blowoff valve. A blowoff valve is a valve connected directly to 
the boiler for the purpose of blowing out water, scum or sediment.
    (7) Dry pipe. A dry pipe is a perforated or slotted pipe placed in 
the highest part of the steam space of a boiler to prevent priming.
    (8) Water column. A water column is a fitting or tube equipped with 
a water glass attached to a boiler for the purpose of indicating the 
water level.
    (9) Test cocks. Test cocks are small cocks on a boiler for 
indicating the water level.
    (10) Salinometer cocks. Salinometer cocks are cocks attached to a 
boiler for the purpose of drawing off a sample of water for salinity 
tests.
    (11) Fusible plugs. Fusible plugs are plugs made with a bronze 
casing and a tin filling which melts at a temperature of 445[deg] to 450 
[deg]F. They are intended to melt in the event of low water and thus 
warn the engineer on watch.
    (f) Boiler fabrication--(1) Repair. Repair is the restoration of any 
damaged or impaired part to an effective and safe condition.
    (2) Alteration. Alteration is a structural modification to or 
departure from an approved design or existing construction.
    (3) Expanding. Expanding is the process of enlarging the end of a 
tube to make it fit tightly in the tube sheet.
    (4) Beading. Beading is the process of turning over the protruding 
end of a tube after expanding to form a supporting collar for the tube 
sheet.
    (5) Bell-mouthing. Bell-mouthing is the process of flaring the end 
of a tube beyond where it is expanded in the tube sheet.
    (6) Telltale hole. A telltale hole is a small hole having a diameter 
not less than three-sixteenths inch drilled in the center of a solid 
stay, and extending to at least one-half inch beyond the inside surface 
of the sheet.
    (7) Access or inspection openings. Access or inspection openings are 
holes cut in the shells or heads of boilers or boiler pressure part for 
the purpose of inspection and cleaning.
    (8) Openings. Openings are holes cut in shells or heads of boilers 
or boiler pressure parts for the purpose of connecting nozzles, domes, 
steam chimneys, or mountings.
    (g) Pressure. The term pressure is an abbreviation of the more 
explicit expression ``difference in pressure intensity.'' It is measured 
in terms such as pounds per square inch (p.s.i.).
    (1) Gage (or gauge) pressure. Gage pressure is the difference 
between the pressure at the point being measured and the ambient 
pressure for the gage. It is measured in units such as pounds per square 
inch gage (p.s.i.g.).
    (2) Absolute pressure. Absolute pressure is the difference between 
the pressure at the point being measured and that of a perfect vacuum. 
It is measured in units such as pounds per square inch absolute 
(p.s.i.a.).
    (3) Internal pressure. Internal pressure refers to a situation where 
the pressure inside exceeds that outside the volume being described.
    (4) External pressure. External pressure refers to a situation where 
the pressure outside exceeds that inside the volume being described.

[[Page 125]]

    (5) Maximum allowable working pressure. For a definition of maximum 
allowable working pressure, see Sec. 54.10-5 of this subchapter.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.019

            Figure 52.01-3--Acceptable Types of Boiler Stays

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9976, June 17, 1970; CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9431, Mar. 8, 1985; CGD 83-043, 
60 FR 24772, May 10, 1995]



Sec. 52.01-5  Plans.

    (a) Manufacturers intending to fabricate boilers to be installed on 
vessels shall submit detailed plans as required by subpart 50.20 of this 
subchapter. The plans, including design calculations, must be certified 
by a registered professional engineer as meeting the design requirements 
in this part and in section I of the ASME Code.
    (b) The following information must be included:
    (1) Calculations for all pressure containment components including 
the maximum allowable working pressure and temperature, the hydrostatic 
or pneumatic test pressure, the maximum steam generating capacity and 
the intended safety valve settings.

[[Page 126]]

    (2) Joint design and methods of attachment of all pressure 
containment components.
    (3) A bill of material meeting the requirements of section I of the 
ASME Code, as modified by this subpart.
    (4) A diagrammatic arrangement drawing of the assembled unit 
indicating the location of internal and external components including 
any interconnecting piping.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
1625-0097)

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9432, Mar. 8, 1985, as amended by USCG-2006-25697, 71 
FR 55746, Sept. 25, 2006]



Sec. 52.01-10  Automatic controls.

    (a) Each main boiler must meet the special requirements for 
automatic safety controls in Sec. 62.35-20(a)(1) of this chapter.
    (b) Each automatically controlled auxiliary boiler having a heat 
input rating of less than 12,500,000 Btu/hr. (3.66 megawatts) must meet 
the requirements of part 63 of this chapter.
    (c) Each automatically controlled auxiliary boiler with a heat input 
rating of 12,500,000 Btu/hr. (3.66 megawatts) or above, must meet the 
requirements for automatic safety controls in part 62 of this chapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-030, 53 FR 
17837, May 18, 1988; CGD 88-057, 55 FR 24236, June 15, 1990]



Sec. 52.01-35  Auxiliary, donkey, fired thermal fluid heater, and heating boilers.

    (a) To determine the appropriate part of the regulations where 
requirements for miscellaneous boiler types, such as donkey, fired 
thermal fluid heater, heating boiler, etc., may be found, refer to Table 
54.01-5(a) of this subchapter.
    (b) Fired vessels in which steam is generated at pressures exceeding 
103 kPa gage (15 psig) shall meet the requirements of this part.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9432, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.01-40  Materials and workmanship.

    All materials to be used in any of the work specified in the various 
sections of this part shall be free from injurious defects and shall 
have a workmanlike finish. The construction work shall be executed in a 
workmanlike manner with proper tools or equipment and shall be free from 
defects which would impair strength or durability.



Sec. 52.01-50  Fusible plugs (modifies A-19 through A-21).

    (a) All boilers, except watertube boilers, with a maximum allowable 
working pressure in excess of 206 kPa gage (30 psig), if fired with 
solid fuel not in suspension, or if not equipped for unattended waterbed 
operation, must be fitted with fusible plugs. Fusible plugs must comply 
with only the requirements of A19 and A20 of the ASME Code and be 
stamped on the casing with the name of the manufacturer, and on the 
water end of the fusible metal ``ASME Std.''. Fusible plugs are not 
permitted where the maximum steam temperature to which they are exposed 
exceeds 218 [deg]C (425 [deg]F).
    (b) Vertical boilers shall be fitted with one fusible plug located 
in a tube not more than 2 inches below the lowest gage cock.
    (c) Externally fired cylindrical boilers with flues shall have one 
plug fitted to the shell immediately below the fire line not less than 4 
feet from the front end.
    (d) Firebox, Scotch, and other types of shell boilers not 
specifically provided for, having a combustion chamber common to all 
furnaces, shall have one plug fitted at or near the center of the crown 
sheet of the combustion chamber.
    (e) Double-ended boilers, having individual combustion chambers for 
each end, in which combustion chambers are common to all the furnaces in 
one end of the boiler, shall have one plug fitted at or near the center 
of the crown sheet of each combustion chamber.
    (f) Boilers constructed with a separate combustion chamber for each 
individual furnace shall be fitted with a fusible plug in the center of 
the crown sheet of each combustion chamber.
    (g) Boilers of types not provided for in this section shall be 
fitted with at least one fusible plug of such dimensions and located in 
a part of the boiler as will best meet the purposes for which it is 
intended.

[[Page 127]]

    (h) Fusible plugs shall be so fitted that the smaller end of the 
filling is in direct contact with the radiant heat of the fire, and 
shall be at least 1 inch higher on the water side than the plate or flue 
in which they are fitted, and in no case more than 1 inch below the 
lowest permissible water level.
    (i) The lowest permissible water level shall be determined as 
follows:
    (1) Vertical firetube boilers, one-half of the length of the tubes 
above the lower tube sheets.
    (2) Vertical submerged tube boilers 1 inch above the upper tube 
sheet.
    (3) Internally fired firetube boilers with combustion chambers 
integral with the boiler, 2 inches above the highest part of the 
combustion chamber.
    (4) Horizontal-return tubular and dry back Scotch boilers, 2 inches 
above the top row of tubes.
    (j) [Reserved]
    (k)(1) Fusible plugs shall be cleaned and will be examined by the 
marine inspector at each inspection for certification, periodic 
inspection, and oftener if necessary. If in the marine inspector's 
opinion the condition of any plug is satisfactory, it may be continued 
in use.
    (2) When fusible plugs are renewed at other than the inspection for 
certification and no marine inspector is in attendance, the Chief 
Engineer shall submit a written report to the Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection, who issued the certificate of inspection informing him of 
the renewal. This letter report shall contain the following information:
    (i) Name and official number of vessel.
    (ii) Date of renewal of fusible plugs.
    (iii) Number and location of fusible plugs renewed in each boiler.
    (iv) Manufacturer and heat number of each plug.
    (v) Reason for renewal.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9432, Mar. 8, 1985; USCG-1999-4976, 65 FR 6500, Feb. 9, 2000]



Sec. 52.01-55  Increase in maximum allowable working pressure.

    (a) When the maximum allowable working pressure of a boiler has been 
established, an increase in the pressure settings of its safety valves 
shall not be granted unless the boiler design meets the requirements of 
this subchapter in effect at the time the boiler was contracted for or 
built; but in no case will a pressure increase be authorized for boilers 
constructed prior to the effective date of the regulations dated 
November 19, 1952, if the minimum thickness found by measurement shows 
that the boiler will have a factor of safety of less than 4\1/2\. The 
piping system, machinery, and appurtenances shall meet the present 
requirements of this subchapter for the maximum allowable working 
pressure requested. An increase in pressure shall be granted only by the 
Commandant upon presentation of data or plans proving that the requested 
increase in pressure is justified.
    (b) When an existing boiler is replaced by a new boiler designed to 
operate at pressures in excess of the pressure indicated on the 
certificate of inspection for the previous boiler, an analysis of the 
complete system shall be made, including machinery and piping, to insure 
its compatibility with the increased steam pressure. The maximum 
allowable working pressure on the certificate of inspection shall be 
based on the results of this analysis.



Sec. 52.01-90  Materials (modifies PG-5 through PG-13).

    (a) Materials subject to stress due to pressure shall conform to 
specifications as indicated in paragraph PG-5 through PG-13 of the ASME 
Code except as noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) Material not fully identified with an ASME Code approved 
specification may be accepted as meeting Coast Guard requirements 
provided it satisfies the conditions indicated in paragraph PG-10 of the 
ASME Code.
    (c) (Modifies PG-5.5.) When the maximum allowable working pressure 
(See PG-21) exceeds 15 pounds per square inch, cross pipes connecting 
the steam and water drums of water tube boilers, headers, cross boxes 
and all pressure parts of the boiler proper shall be made of a wrought 
or cast steel listed in Table PG-23.1 of the ASME Code.
    (d) (Modifies PG-8.2.2.) The use of cast iron for mountings, 
fittings, valves, or

[[Page 128]]

cocks attached directly to boilers operating at pressures exceeding 15 
pounds per square inch is prohibited.
    (e) (Modifies PG-11.1.1.) The material, design, construction and 
workmanship of pumps shall be at least equivalent to the standards 
established by the American Bureau of Shipping or other recognized 
classification society. See part 58 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-254, 40 FR 
40163, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9432, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.01-95  Design (modifies PG-16 through PG-31 and PG-100).

    (a) Requirements. Boilers required to be designed to this part shall 
meet the requirements of PG-16 through PG-31 of the ASME Code except as 
noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) Superheater. (1) The design pressure of a superheater integral 
with the boiler shall not be less than the lowest setting of the drum 
safety valve.
    (2) Controls shall be provided to insure that the maximum 
temperature at the superheater outlets does not exceed the allowable 
temperature limit of the material used in the superheater outlet, in the 
steam piping, and in the associated machinery under all operating 
conditions including boiler overload. Controls need not be provided if 
the operating superheater characteristic is demonstrated to be such that 
the temperature limits of the material will not be exceeded. Visible and 
audible alarms indicating excessive superheat shall be provided in any 
installation in which the superheater outlet temperature exceeds 454 
[deg]C (850 [deg]F). The setting of the excessive superheat alarms must 
not exceed the maximum allowable temperature of the superheater outlet, 
which may be limited by the boiler design, the main steam piping design, 
or the temperature limits of other equipment subjected to the 
temperature of the steam.
    (3) Arrangement shall be made for venting and draining the 
superheater in order to permit steam circulation through the superheater 
when starting the boiler.
    (c) Economizer. The design pressure of an economizer integral with 
the boiler and connected to the boiler drum without intervening stop 
valves shall be at least equal to 110 percent of the highest setting of 
the safety valves on the drum.
    (d) Brazed boiler steam air heaters. Boiler steam air heaters 
utilizing brazed construction are permitted at temperature not exceeding 
525 [deg]F. Refer to Sec. 56.30-30(b)(1) of this subchapter for 
applicable requirements.
    (e) Stresses. (Modifies PG-22.) The stresses due to hydrostatic head 
shall be taken into account in determining the minimum thickness of the 
shell or head of any boiler pressure part unless noted otherwise. 
Additional stresses, imposed by effects other than internal pressure or 
static head, which increase the average stress over substantial sections 
of the shell or head by more than 10 percent of the allowable stress 
shall be taken into account. These effects include the weight of the 
vessel and its contents, method of support, impact loads, superimposed 
loads, localized stresses due to the reactions of supports, stresses due 
to temperature gradients and dynamic effects.
    (f) Cylindrical components under internal pressure. (Modifies PG-
27.) The minimum required thickness and maximum allowable working 
pressure of boiler piping, tubes, drums and headers shall be as required 
by the formula in PG-27 of the ASME Code except that threaded boiler 
tubes are not permitted.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9432, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.01-100  Openings and compensation 
(modifies PG-32 through PG-39, PG-42 through PG-55).

    (a) The rules for openings and compensation shall be as indicated in 
PG-32 through PG-55 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this 
section.
    (b) (Modifies PG-39.) Pipe and nozzle necks shall be attached to 
vessel walls as indicated in PG-39 except that threaded connections 
shall not be used under any of the following conditions:
    (1) Pressures greater than 4137 kPa (600 psig);
    (2) Nominal diameters greater than 51mm (2 in.); or
    (3) Nominal diameters greater than 19mm (0.75 in.) and pressures 
above 1034 kPa (150 psig).

[[Page 129]]

    (c) (Modifies PG-42.) Butt welding flanges and fittings must be used 
when full radiography is required by Sec. 56.95-10.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9432, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.01-105  Piping, valves and fittings (modifies PG-58 and PG-59).

    (a) Boiler external piping within the jurisdiction of the ASME Code 
must be as indicated in PG-58 and PG-59 of the ASME Code except as noted 
otherwise in this section. Piping outside the jurisdiction of the ASME 
Code must meet the appropriate requirements of part 56 of this 
subchapter.
    (b) In addition to the requirements in PG-58 and PG-59 of the ASME 
Code, boiler external piping must:
    (1) Meet the design conditions and criteria in Sec. 56.07-10 of 
this subchapter, except Sec. 56.07-10(b);
    (2) Be included in the pipe stress calculations required by Sec. 
56.31-1 of this subchapter;
    (3) Meet the nondestructive examination requirements in Sec. 56.95-
10 of this subchapter;
    (4) Have butt welding flanges and fittings when full radiography is 
required; and
    (5) Meet the requirements for threaded joints in Sec. 56.30-20 of 
this subchapter.
    (c) Steam stop valves, in sizes exceeding 152mm (6 inch) NPS, must 
be fitted with bypasses for heating the line and equalizing the pressure 
before the valve is opened.
    (d) Feed connections. (1) Feed water shall not be discharged into a 
boiler against surfaces exposed to hot gases or radiant heat of the 
fire.
    (2) Feed water nozzles of boilers designed for pressures of 2758 kPa 
(400 psi), or over, shall be fitted with sleeves or other suitable means 
employed to reduce the effects of metal temperature differentials.
    (e) Blowoff connections. (1) Firetube and drum type boilers shall be 
fitted with a surface and a bottom blowoff valve or cock attached 
directly to the boiler or to a short distance piece. The surface blowoff 
valve shall be located within the permissible range of the water level, 
or fitted with a scum pan or pipe at this level. The bottom blowoff 
valve shall be attached to the lowest part of the boiler or fitted with 
an internal pipe leading to the lowest point inside the boiler. 
Watertube boilers designed for pressures of 2413 kPa (350 psig) or over 
are not required to be fitted with a surface blowoff valve. Boilers 
equipped with a continuous blowdown valve on the steam drum are not 
required to be fitted with an additional surface blowoff connection.
    (2) Where blowoff pipes are exposed to radiant heat of the fire, 
they must be protected by fire brick or other suitable heat-resisting 
material.
    (f) Dry pipes. Internal dry pipes may be fitted to the steam drum 
outlet provided the dry pipes have a diameter equal to the steam drum 
outlet and a wall thickness at least equal to standard commercial pipe 
of the same diameter. Openings in dry pipes must be as near as 
practicable to the drum outlet and must be slotted or drilled. The width 
of the slots must not be less than 6mm (0.25 in.). The diameter of the 
holes must not be less than 10mm (0.375 in.). Where dry pipes are used, 
they must be provided with drains at each end to prevent an accumulation 
of water.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9432, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.01-110  Water-level indicators, water columns, gauge-glass
connections, gauge cocks, and pressure gauges (modifies PG-60).

    (a) Boiler water level devices. Boiler water level devices shall be 
as indicated in PG-60 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this 
section.
    (b) Water level indicators. (Modifies PG-60.1.) (1) Each boiler, 
except those of the forced circulation type with no fixed water line and 
steam line, shall have two independent means of indicating the water 
level in the boiler connected directly to the head or shell. One shall 
be a gage lighted by the emergency electrical system (See Subpart 112.15 
of Subchapter J (Electrical Engineering) of this chapter) which will 
insure illumination of the gages under all normal and emergency 
conditions. The secondary indicator may consist of a gage glass, or 
other acceptable device. Where the allowance pressure exceeds 1724 kPa 
(250 psi), the gage glasses shall be of the flat type instead of the 
common tubular type.

[[Page 130]]

    (2) Gage glasses shall be in continuous operation while the boiler 
is steaming.
    (3) Double-ended firetube boilers shall be equipped as specified in 
this paragraph and paragraph (e) of this section except that the 
required water level indicators shall be installed on each end of the 
boiler.
    (4) Externally fired flue boilers, such as are used on central 
western river vessels, shall be equipped as specified in paragraphs (b) 
(1) through (3) of this section except that float gages may be 
substituted for gage glasses.
    (c) Water columns. (Modifies PG-60.2.) The use of water columns is 
generally limited to firetube boilers. Water column installations shall 
be close hauled to minimize the effect of ship motion on water level 
indication. When water columns are provided they shall be fitted 
directly to the heads or shells of boilers or drums by 1 inch minimum 
size pipes with shutoff valves attached directly to the boiler or drums, 
or if necessary, connected thereto by a distance piece both at the top 
and bottom of the water columns. Shutoff valves used in the pipe 
connections between the boiler and water column or between the boiler 
and the shutoff valves required by PG-60.6 of the ASME Code for gage 
glasses, shall be locked or sealed open. Water column piping shall not 
be fitted inside the uptake, the smoke box, or the casing. Water columns 
shall be fitted with suitable drains. Cast iron fittings are not 
permitted.
    (d) Gage glass connections. (Modifies PG-60.3.) Gage glasses and 
gage cocks shall be connected directly to the head or shell of a boiler 
as indicated in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. When water columns are 
authorized, connections to the columns may be made provided a close 
hauled arrangement is utilized so that the effect of ship roll on the 
water level indication is minimized.
    (e) Gage cocks. (Modifies PG-60.4.) (1) When the steam pressure does 
not exceed 250 pounds per square inch, three test cocks attached 
directly to the head or shell of a boiler may serve as the secondary 
water level indicator.
    (2) See paragraph (d) of this section for restrictions on cock 
connections.
    (f) Pressure gages. (Modifies PG-60.6.) Each double-ended boiler 
shall be fitted with two steam gages, one on either end on the boiler.
    (g) Salinometer cocks. In vessels operating in salt water, each 
boiler shall be equipped with a salinometer cock or valve which shall be 
fitted directly to the boiler in a convenient position. They shall not 
be attached to the water gage or water column.
    (h) High-water-level alarm. Each watertube boiler for propulsion 
must have an audible and a visible high-water-level alarm. The alarm 
indicators must be located where the boiler is controlled.

[CG FR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9433, Mar. 8, 1985; CGD 83-043, 60 FR 24772, May 10, 1995]



Sec. 52.01-115  Feedwater supply (modifies PG-61).

    Boiler feedwater supply must meet the requirements of PG-61 of the 
ASME Code and Sec. 56.50-30 of this subchapter.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9433, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.01-120  Safety valves and safety relief valves (modifies PG-67 through PG-73).

    (a)(1) Boiler safety valves and safety relief valves must be as 
indicated in PG-67 through PG-73 of the ASME Code except as noted 
otherwise in this section.
    (2) A safety valve must:
    (i) Be stamped in accordance with PG-110 of the ASME Code;
    (ii) Have its capacity certified by the National Board of Boiler and 
Pressure Vessel Inspectors;
    (iii) Have a drain opening tapped for not less than 6mm (\1/4\ in.) 
NPS; and
    (iv) Not have threaded inlets for valves larger than 51mm (2 in.) 
NPS.
    (3) On river steam vessels whose boilers are connected in batteries 
without means of isolating one boiler from another, each battery of 
boilers shall be treated as a single boiler and equipped with not less 
than two safety valves of equal size.
    (4) (Modifies PG-70.) The total rated relieving capacity of drum and 
superheater safety valves as certified by the valve manufacturer shall 
not be less

[[Page 131]]

than the maximum generating capacity of the boiler which shall be 
determined and certified by the boiler manufacturer. This capacity shall 
be in compliance with PG-70 of the ASME Code.
    (5) In the event the maximum steam generating capacity of the boiler 
is increased by any means, the relieving capacity of the safety valves 
shall be checked by an inspector, and, if determined to be necessary, 
valves of increased relieving capacity shall be installed.
    (6) (Modifies PG-67.) Drum safety valves shall be set to relieve at 
a pressure not in excess of that allowed by the Certificate of 
Inspection. Where for any reason this is lower than the pressure for 
which the boiler was originally designed and the revised safety valve 
capacity cannot be recomputed and certified by the valve manufacturer, 
one of the tests described in PG-70(3) of the ASME Code shall be 
conducted in the presence of the Inspector to insure that the relieving 
capacity is sufficient at the lower pressure.
    (7) On new installations the safety valve nominal size for 
propulsion boilers and superheaters must not be less than 38mm (1\1/2\ 
in.) nor more than 102mm (4 in.). Safety valves 38mm (1\1/2\ in.) to 
114mm (4\1/2\ in.) may be used for replacements on existing boilers. The 
safety valve size for auxiliary boilers must be between 19mm (\3/4\ in.) 
and 102mm (4 in.) NPS. The nominal size of a safety valve is the nominal 
diameter (as defined in 56.07-5(b)) of the inlet opening.
    (8) Lever or weighted safety valves now installed may be continued 
in use and may be repaired, but when renewals are necessary, lever or 
weighted safety valves shall not be used. All such replacements shall 
conform to the requirements of this section.
    (9) Gags or clamps for holding the safety valve disk on its seat 
shall be carried on board the vessel at all times.
    (10) (Modifies PG-73.2.) Cast iron may be used only for caps and 
lifting bars. When used for these parts, the elongation must be at least 
5 percent in 51mm (2 inch) gage length. Nonmetallic material may be used 
only for gaskets and packing.
    (b)(1) (Modifies PG-68.) Superheater safety valves shall be as 
indicated in PG-68 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this 
paragraph.
    (2) The setting of the superheater safety valve shall not exceed the 
design pressure of the superheater outlet flange or the main steam 
piping beyond the superheater. To prevent damage to the superheater, the 
drum safety valve shall be set at a pressure not less than that of the 
superheater safety valve setting plus 5 pounds minimum plus 
approximately the normal load pressure drop through the superheater and 
associated piping, including the controlled desuperheater if fitted. See 
also Sec. 52.01-95(b) (1).
    (3) Drum pilot actuated superheater safety valves are permitted 
provided the setting of the pilot valve and superheater safety valve is 
such that the superheater safety valve will open before the drum safety 
valve.
    (c)(1) (Modifies PG-71.) Safety valves shall be installed as 
indicated in PG-71 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this 
paragraph.
    (2) The final setting of boiler safety valves shall be checked and 
adjusted under steam pressure and, if possible, while the boiler is on 
the line and the steam is at operating temperatures, in the presence of 
and to the satisfaction of a marine inspector who, upon acceptance, 
shall seal the valves. This regulation applies to both drum and 
superheater safety valves of all boilers.
    (3) The safety valve body drains required by PG-71 of the ASME Code 
shall be run as directly as possible from the body of each boiler safety 
valve, or the drain from each boiler safety valve may be led to an 
independent header common only to boiler safety valve drains. No valves 
of any type shall be installed in the leakoff from drains or drain 
headers and they shall be led to suitable locations to avoid hazard to 
personnel.
    (d)(1) (Modifies PG-72.) The operation of safety valves shall be as 
indicated in PG-72 of the ASME Code except as noted in paragraph (d)(2) 
of this section.
    (2) (Modifies PG-73.) The lifting device required by PG-73.1.3 of 
the ASME

[[Page 132]]

Code shall be fitted with suitable relieving gear so arranged that the 
controls may be operated from the fireroom or engineroom floor.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9433, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.01-130  Installation.

    (a) Foundations. (1) Plans showing details of proposed foundations 
and support for boilers and the proposed means of bracing boilers in the 
vessel shall be submitted for approval to the Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection, in the district where the installation is being made.
    (2) Provision shall be made in foundations for expansion of the 
boilers when heated.
    (3) Boilers shall be provided with chocks to prevent movement in the 
event of collision unless a bolted or riveted construction 
satisfactorily provides for this contingency.
    (b) Protection of adjacent structure. (1) Boilers shall be so placed 
that all parts are readily accessible for inspection and repair.
    (2) In vessels having a double bottom or other extensive surfaces 
directly below the boiler, the distance between such surface and a 
boiler shall in no case be less than 18 inches at the lowest part.
    (3) In certain types of vessels where the boiler foundation forms 
the ashpit, such foundations shall be efficiently ventilated, except in 
cases where the ashpit is partially filled with water at all times.
    (4) The pans of oil-burning, watertube boilers shall be arranged to 
prevent oil from leaking into the bilges and shall be lined with 
firebrick or other heat resisting material.
    (5) The distance between a boiler and a compartment containing fuel 
oil shall not be less than 24 inches at the back end of a boiler and 18 
inches elsewhere, except that for a cylindrical part of a boiler or a 
knuckle in the casing of a water-tube boiler, these distances may be 
reduced to 18 inches, provided all parts are readily accessible for 
inspection and repair.
    (6) All oil-burning boilers shall be provided with oiltight drip 
pans under the burners and elsewhere as necessary to prevent oil 
draining into the bilges.
    (c) Boiler uptakes. (1) Where dampers are installed in the uptakes 
or funnels, the arrangement shall be such that it will not be possible 
to shut off the gas passages from the operating boilers.
    (2) Each main power boiler and auxiliary boiler shall be fitted with 
a separate gas passage.



Sec. 52.01-135  Inspection and tests (modifies PG-90 through PG-100).

    (a) Requirements. Inspection and test of boilers and boiler pressure 
parts shall be as indicated in PG-90 through PG-100 of the ASME Code 
except as noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) The inspections required by PG-90 through PG-100 of the ASME 
Code shall be performed by the ``Authorized Inspector'' as defined in 
PG-91 of the ASME Code. The Authorized Inspector shall hold a valid 
commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel 
Inspectors. After installation, boilers will be inspected for compliance 
with this part by the ``Marine Inspector'' as defined in Sec. 50.10-15 
of this subchapter.
    (c) Hydrostatic test (Modifies PG-99). Each new boiler shall be 
hydrostatically tested after installation to 1\1/2\ times the maximum 
allowable working pressure as indicated in PG-99 of the ASME Code. 
Before the boilers are insulated, accessible parts of the boiler shall 
be emptied, opened up and all interior surfaces shall be examined by the 
marine inspector to ascertain that no defects have occurred due to the 
hydrostatic test.
    (d) Operating tests. In addition to hydrostatic tests prescribed in 
paragraph (c) of this section, automatically controlled auxiliary 
boilers must be subjected to operating tests as specified in Sec. Sec. 
61.30-20, 61.35-1, 61.35-3, 62.30-10, 63.15-9, 63.25-3, and 63.25-5 of 
this chapter, as appropriate, or as directed by the Officer in Charge, 
Marine Inspection, for propulsion boilers, These tests are to be 
performed after final installation.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9976, June 17, 1970; CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9433, Mar. 8, 1985; CGD 88-057, 
55 FR 24236, June 15, 1990]

[[Page 133]]



Sec. 52.01-140  Certification by stamping (modifies PG-104 through PG-113).

    (a) All boilers built in accordance with this part must be stamped 
with the appropriate ASME Code symbol as required by PG-104 through PG-
113 of the ASME Code.
    (b)(1) Upon satisfactory completion of the tests and Coast Guard 
inspections, boilers must be stamped with the following:
    (i) Manufacturer's name and serial number;
    (ii) ASME Code Symbol;
    (iii) Coast Guard symbol, which is affixed only by marine inspector 
(see Sec. 50.10-15 of this subchapter);
    (iv) Maximum allowable working pressure ------ at ------ [deg]C 
([deg]F): and
    (v) Boiler rated steaming capacity in kilograms (pounds) per hour 
(rated joules (B.T.U.) per hour output for high temperature water 
boilers).
    (2) The information required in paragraph (b)(1) of this section 
must be located on:
    (i) The front head or shell near the normal waterline and within 610 
mm (24 inches) of the front of firetube boilers; and
    (ii) The drum head of water tube boilers.
    (3) Those heating boilers which are built to section I of the ASME 
Code, as permitted by Sec. 53.01-10(e) of this subchapter, do not 
require Coast Guard stamping and must receive full ASME stamping 
including the appropriate code symbol.
    (c) The data shall be legibly stamped and shall not be obliterated 
during the life of the boiler. In the event that the portion of the 
boiler upon which the data is stamped is to be insulated or otherwise 
covered, a metal nameplate as described in PG-106.6 of the ASME Code 
shall be furnished and mounted. The nameplate is to be maintained in a 
legible condition so that the data may be easily read.
    (d) Safety valves shall be stamped as indicated in PG-110 of the 
ASME Code.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9433, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.01-145  Manufacturers' data report forms (modifies PG-112 and PG-113).

    The manufacturers' data report forms required by PG-112 and PG-113 
of the ASME Code must be made available to the marine inspector for 
review. The Authorized Inspector's National Board commission number must 
be included on the manufacturers' data report forms.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9434, Mar. 8, 1985]



      Subpart 52.05_Requirements for Boilers Fabricated by Welding



Sec. 52.05-1  General (modifies PW-1 through PW-54).

    (a) Boilers and component parts, including piping, that are 
fabricated by welding shall be as indicated in PW-1 through PW-54 of the 
ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this subpart.



Sec. 52.05-15  Heat treatment (modifies PW-10).

    (a) Vessels and vessel parts shall be preheated and postweld heat 
treated in accordance with PW-38 and PW-39 of the ASME Code (reproduces 
PW-10). This includes boiler parts made of pipe material even though 
they may be nondestructively examined under Sec. 52.05-20.



Sec. 52.05-20  Radiographic and ultrasonic examination (modifies PW-11 and PW-41.1).

    Radiographic and ultrasonic examination of welded joints shall be as 
described in PW-11 of the ASME Code except that parts of boilers 
fabricated of pipe material, such as drums, shells, downcomers. risers, 
cross pipes, headers and tubes containing only circumferentially welded 
butt joints, shall be nondestructively examined as required by Sec. 
56.95-10 of this subchapter even though they may be exempted by the size 
limitations specified in PW-11.1.2 and PW-41.1 of the ASME Code.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9434, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.05-30  Minimum requirements for attachment welds (modifies PW-16).

    (a) The location and minimum size of attachment welds for nozzles 
and other connections shall be as required by PW-16 of the ASME Code 
except as noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) When nozzles or couplings are attached to boilers, as shown in 
Figure PW-16 (a) and (c) of the ASME Code and are welded from one side 
only,

[[Page 134]]

backing strips shall be used unless it can be determined visually or by 
acceptable nondestructive test methods that complete penetration has 
been obtained.
    (c) When attachments as shown in Figure PW-16 (y) and (z) of the 
ASME Code are employed they shall be limited to 2-inch pipe size for 
pressure exceeding 150 pounds per square inch.



Sec. 52.05-45  Circumferential joints in pipes, tubes and headers (modifies PW-41).

    (a) Circumferential welded joints of pipes, tubes and headers shall 
be as required by PW-41 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in 
this section.
    (b) (Modifies PW-41.1) Circumferential welded joints in pipes, 
tubes, and headers of pipe material must be nondestructively examined as 
required by Sec. 56.95-10 of this subchapter and PW-41 of the ASME 
Code.
    (c) (Modifies PW-41.5) Butt welded connections shall be provided 
whenever radiography is required by Sec. 56.95-10 of this subchapter 
for the piping system in which the connection is to be made. When 
radiography is not required, welded socket or sleeve type joints meeting 
the requirements of PW-41.5 of the ASME Code may be provided.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9434, Mar. 8, 1985]



            Subpart 52.15_Requirements for Watertube Boilers



Sec. 52.15-1  General (modifies PWT-1 through PWT-15).

    Watertube boilers and parts thereof shall be as indicated in PWT-1 
through PWT-15 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this 
subpart.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9434, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.15-5  Tube connections (modifies PWT-9 and PWT-11).

    (a) Tubes, pipe and nipples shall be attached to sheets, heads, 
headers, and fittings as indicated in PWT-11 of the ASME Code except as 
noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) (Replaces PWT-9.2 and PWT-11.3.) Threaded boiler tubes shall not 
be permitted as described by PWT-9.2 and PWT-11.3 of the ASME Code.
    (c) In welded wall construction employing stub and welded wall 
panels which are field welded, approximately 10 percent of the field 
welds shall be checked using any acceptable nondestructive test method.
    (d) Nondestructive testing of the butt welded joints shall meet the 
requirements of Sec. 56.95-10 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9976, June 17, 1970; CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9434, Mar. 8, 1985]



             Subpart 52.20_Requirements for Firetube Boilers



Sec. 52.20-1  General (modifies PFT-1 through PFT-49).

    (a) Firetube boilers and parts thereof shall be as indicated in PFT-
1 through PFT-49 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this 
subpart.



Sec. 52.20-17  Opening between boiler and safety valve (modifies PFT-44).

    When a discharge pipe is used, it must be installed in accordance 
with the requirements of Sec. 52.01-105.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9434, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 52.20-25  Setting (modifies PFT-46).

    (a) The method of supporting firetube boilers shall be as indicated 
in PFT-46 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) The foundations shall meet the requirements of Sec. 52.01-130.



                    Subpart 52.25_Other Boiler Types

    Source: CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9434, Mar. 8, 1985, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 52.25-1  General.

    Requirements for fired boilers of various sizes and uses are 
referenced in Table 54.01-5(a) of this subchapter.



Sec. 52.25-3  Feedwater heaters (modifies PFH-1).

    In addition to the requirements in PFH-1 of the ASME Code, feedwater 
heaters must meet the requirements in this part or the requirements in 
part 54.

[[Page 135]]



Sec. 52.25-5  Miniature boilers (modifies PMB-1 through PMB-21).

    Miniature boilers must meet the applicable provisions in this part 
for the boiler type involved and the mandatory requirements in PMB-1 
through PMB-21 of the ASME Code.



Sec. 52.25-7  Electric boilers (modifies PEB-1 through PEB-19).

    Electric boilers required to comply with this part must meet the 
applicable provisions in this part and the mandatory requirements in 
PEB-1 through PEB-19 except PEB-3 of the ASME Code.



Sec. 52.25-10  Organic fluid vaporizer generators (modifies PVG-1 through PVG-12).

    (a) Organic fluid vaporizer generators and parts thereof shall meet 
the requirements of PVG-1 through PVG-12 of the ASME Code except as 
noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) The application and end use of organic fluid vaporizer 
generators shall be approved by the Commandant.



Sec. 52.25-15  Fired thermal fluid heaters.

    (a) Fired thermal fluid heaters shall be designed, constructed, 
inspected, tested, and stamped in accordance with the applicable 
provisions in this part.
    (b) Each fired thermal fluid heater must be fitted with a control 
which prevents the heat transfer fluid from being heated above its flash 
point.
    (c) The heat transfer fluid must be chemically compatible with any 
cargo carried in the cargo tanks serviced by the heat transfer system.
    (d) Each fired thermal fluid heater must be tested and inspected in 
accordance with the requirements of subpart 61.30 of this chapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18815, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 88-057, 55 FR 
24236, June 15, 1990]



Sec. 52.25-20  Exhaust gas boilers.

    Exhaust gas boilers with a maximum allowable working pressure 
greater than 103 kPa gage (15 psig) or an operating temperature greater 
than 454 [deg]C. (850 [deg]F.) must be designed, constructed, inspected, 
tested and stamped in accordance with the applicable provisions in this 
part. The design temperature of parts exposed to the exhaust gas must be 
the maximum temperature that could normally be produced by the source of 
the exhaust gas. This temperature must be verified by testing or by the 
manufacturer of the engine or other equipment producing the exhaust. 
Automatic exhaust gas boiler control systems must be designed, 
constructed, tested, and inspected in accordance with Sec. 63.25-7 of 
this chapter.

[CGD 88-057, 55 FR 24236, June 15, 1990]



PART 53_HEATING BOILERS--Table of Contents




                   Subpart 53.01_General Requirements

Sec.
53.01-1 Incorporation by reference.
53.01-3 Adoption of section IV of the ASME Code.
53.01-5 Scope (modifies HG-100).
53.01-10 Service restrictions and exceptions (replaces HG-101).

          Subpart 53.05_Pressure Relieving Devices (Article 4)

53.05-1 Safety valve requirements for steam boilers (modifies HG-400 and 
          HG-401).
53.05-2 Relief valve requirements for hot water boilers (modifies HG-
          400.2).
53.05-3 Materials (modifies HG-401.2).
53.05-5 Discharge capacities and valve markings.

  Subpart 53.10_Tests, Inspection, Stamping, and Reporting (Article 5)

53.10-1 General.
53.10-3 Inspection and tests (modifies HG-500 through HG-540).
53.10-10 Certification by stamping.
53.10-15 Manufacturers' data report forms.

            Subpart 53.12_Instruments, Fittings, and Controls

53.12-1 General (modifies HG-600 through HG-640).

    Authority: 46 U.S.C. 3306, 3703; E.O. 12234, 45 FR 58801, 3 CFR, 
1980 Comp., p. 277; Department of Homeland Security Delegation No. 
0170.1.

    Source: CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18826, Dec. 18, 1968, unless otherwise 
noted.

[[Page 136]]



                   Subpart 53.01_General Requirements



Sec. 53.01-1  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part 
with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance 
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a). To enforce any edition other than that specified 
in paragraph (b) of this section, the Coast Guard must publish notice of 
change in the Federal Register and make the material available to the 
public. All approved material is on file at the U.S. Coast Guard, Office 
of Design and Engineering Standards (G-MSE), 2100 Second Street SW., 
Washington, DC 20593-0001 and is available from the sources indicated in 
paragraph (b) of this section or at the National Archives and Records 
Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this 
material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/
federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (b) The material approved for incorporation by reference in this 
part and the sections affected are:

      American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) International

Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV, Heating Boilers, July 1989 
                       with 1989 addenda.

 53.01-5; 53.01-10; 53.05-1; 53.05-3; 53.05-5; 53.10-1; 53.10-3; 53.10-
                          10; 53.10-15; 53.12-1

[CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35821, July 29, 1991, as amended by CGD 95-072, 60 FR 
50462, Sept. 29, 1995; CGD 96-041, 61 FR 50727, Sept. 27, 1996; USCG-
1999-6216, 64 FR 53224, Oct. 1, 1999]



Sec. 53.01-3  Adoption of section IV of the ASME Code.

    (a) Heating boilers shall be designed, constructed, inspected, 
tested, and stamped in accordance with section IV of the ASME (American 
Society of Mechanical Engineers) Code as limited, modified, or replaced 
by specific requirements in this part. The provisions in the appendices 
to section IV of the ASME Code are adopted and shall be followed when 
the requirements in section IV make them mandatory. For general 
information Table 53.01-1(a) lists the various paragraphs in section IV 
of the ASME Code which are limited, modified, or replaced by regulations 
in this part.

   Table 53.01-1(a)--Limitations and Modifications in the Adoption of
                       Section IV of the ASME Code
------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Paragraphs in section IV, ASME Code\1\
             and disposition                     Unit of this part
------------------------------------------------------------------------
HG-100 modified by.......................  53.01-5(b)
HG-101 replaced by.......................  53.01-10
HG-400 modified by.......................  53.05-1
HG-400.2 modified by.....................  53.05-2
HG-401 modified by.......................  53.05-1
HG-401.2 modified by.....................  53.05-3
HG-500 through HG-540 modified by........  53.10-3
HG-600 through HG-640 modified by........  53.12-1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\The references to specific provisions in the ASME Code are coded. The
  first letter ``H'' refers to section IV. The letter following ``H''
  refers to a part or subpart in section IV. The number following the
  letters refers to the paragraph so numbered in the text of the part or
  subpart in section IV.

    (b) References to the ASME Code, such as paragraph HG-307, indicate:

H=Section IV, Heating Boilers, ASME Code.
G=Part containing general requirements.
3=Article in part.
307=Paragraph within Article 3.

    (c) When a paragraph or a section of the regulations in this part 
relates to material in section IV of the ASME Code, the relationship 
with the code will be shown immediately following the heading of the 
section or at the beginning of the paragraph as follows:
    (1) (Modifies H------.) This indicates that the material in H------ 
is generally applicable but is being altered, amplified or augmented.
    (2) (Replaces H------.) This indicates that H------ does not apply.
    (3) (Reproduces H------.) This indicates that H------ is being 
identically reproduced for convenience, not for emphasis.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18826, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9976, June 17, 1970; CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9435, Mar. 8, 1985. 
Redesignated and amended by CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35821, July 29, 1991]



Sec. 53.01-5  Scope (modifies HG-100).

    (a) The regulations in this part apply to steam heating boilers, hot 
water boilers (which include hot water heating boilers and hot water 
supply boilers), and to appurtenances thereto. The requirements in this 
part shall be used in conjunction with section IV of the ASME Code. 
Table 54.01-5(a) of this

[[Page 137]]

subchapter gives a breakdown by parts in this subchapter of the 
regulations governing various types of pressure vessels and boilers.
    (b) (Modifies HG-100.) The requirements of Part HG of section IV, 
Heating Boilers, of the ASME Code shall be used except as noted 
otherwise in this part.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18826, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9435, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 53.01-10  Service restrictions and exceptions (replaces HG-101).

    (a) General. The service restrictions and exceptions shall be as 
indicated in this section in lieu of the requirements in HG-101 of the 
ASME Code.
    (b) Service restrictions. (1) Boilers of wrought materials shall be 
restricted to a maximum of 103 kPa gage (15 psig) for steam and a 
maximum of 689 kPa (100 psig) or 121 [deg]C (250 [deg]F) for hot water. 
If operating conditions exceed these limits, design and fabrications 
shall be in accordance with part 52 of this subchapter.
    (2) Boilers of cast iron materials shall be restricted to a maximum 
of 103 kPa gage (15 psig) for steam and to a maximum of 206 kPa gage (30 
psig) or 121 [deg]C (250 [deg]F) for hot water.
    (c) Hot water supply boilers. (1) Electrically fired hot water 
supply boilers which have a capacity not greater than 454 liters (120 
gallons), a heat input not greater than 58.6 kilowatts (200,000 B.t.u. 
per hour), and are listed as approved under Underwriters' Laboratories 
Standard 174 or 1453 are exempted from the requirements of this part 
provided they are protected by a pressure relief device. This relief 
device need not comply with Sec. 53.05-2.
    (2) Oil fired hot water supply boilers shall not be exempted from 
the requirements of this part on the basis of size or heat input.
    (d) Exhaust gas type boilers shall be restricted to a working 
pressure equal to or less than 103 kPa gage (15 psig) and an operating 
temperature equal to or less than 454 [deg]C (850 [deg]F). The design 
temperature of parts exposed to the exhaust gas must be the maximum 
temperature that could normally be produced by the source of exhaust 
gas. This temperature shall be verified by testing or by the 
manufacturer of the engine or other equipment producing the exhaust.
    (e) Heating boilers whose operating conditions are within the 
service restrictions of Sec. 53.01-10(b)(1) may be constructed in 
accordance with section I of the ASME Code. In addition, these heating 
boilers must:
    (1) Be stamped with the appropriate ASME Code symbol in accordance 
with PG-104 through PG-113 of the ASME Code;
    (2) Meet the service restrictions of Sec. 53.01-10(b)(2) if made of 
cast iron;
    (3) Have safety valves which meet the requirements of Sec. 52.01-
120 of this subchapter;
    (4) If a hot water supply boiler, have a temperature relief valve or 
a pressure-temperature relief valve in accordance with Sec. 53.05-2(c);
    (5) If automatically controlled, meet the applicable requirements in 
part 63 of this subchapter; and
    (6) Meet the inspection and test requirements of Sec. 53.10-3.
    (f) Controls and miscellaneous accessories. Refer to part 63 of this 
subchapter for the requirements governing controls and miscellaneous 
accessories.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18826, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9435, Mar. 8, 1985]



          Subpart 53.05_Pressure Relieving Devices (Article 4)

    Source: CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9435, Mar. 8, 1985, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 53.05-1  Safety valve requirements for steam boilers (modifies HG-400 and HG-401).

    (a) The pressure relief valve requirements and the safety valve 
requirements for steam boilers must be as indicated in HG-400 and HG-401 
except as noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) Each steam boiler must have at least one safety valve.



Sec. 53.05-2  Relief valve requirements for hot water boilers (modifies HG-400.2).

    (a) The relief valve requirements for hot water boilers must be as 
indicated in article 4 of section IV of the ASME

[[Page 138]]

Code except as noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) Hot water heating boilers. Each hot water heating boiler must 
have at least one safety relief valve.
    (c) Hot water supply boilers. Each hot water supply boiler must have 
at least one safety relief valve and a temperature relief valve or a 
pressure-temperature relief valve. The valve temperature setting must 
not be more than 99 [deg]C (210 [deg]F).



Sec. 53.05-3  Materials (modifies HG-401.2).

    (a) Materials for valves must be in accordance with HG-401.2 of the 
ASME Code except nonmetallic materials may be used only for gaskets and 
packing.



Sec. 53.05-5  Discharge capacities and valve markings.

    (a) The discharge capacities and valve markings must be as indicated 
in HG-402 of the ASME Code. The discharge capacities must be certified 
by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.



  Subpart 53.10_Tests, Inspection, Stamping, and Reporting (Article 5)



Sec. 53.10-1  General.

    (a) The tests, inspection, stamping, and reporting of heating 
boilers shall be as indicated in Article 5, Part HG of section IV of the 
ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this subpart.



Sec. 53.10-3  Inspection and tests (modifies HG-500 through HG-540).

    (a) The inspections required by HG-500 through HG-540 must be 
performed by the ``Authorized Inspector'' as defined in HG-575 of the 
ASME Code. The Authorized Inspector shall hold a valid commission issued 
by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. After 
installation, heating boilers must be inspected for compliance with this 
part by a marine inspector.
    (b) Automatically controlled boilers must be subjected to the 
operating tests prescribed in part 63 of this subchapter.
    (c) All heating boilers must have the operation of their pressure 
relieving devices checked after the final installation.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9436, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 53.10-10  Certification by stamping.

    Stamping of heating boilers shall be as indicated in HG-530 of the 
ASME Code.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9436, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 53.10-15  Manufacturers' data report forms.

    The manufacturers' data report forms required by HG-520 of the ASME 
Code must be made available to the marine inspector for review. The 
Authorized Inspector's National Board commission number must be included 
on the manufacturers' data report forms.

[CGD 81-79, 50 FR 9436, Mar. 8, 1985]



            Subpart 53.12_Instruments, Fittings, and Controls



Sec. 53.12-1  General (modifies HG-600 through HG-640).

    (a) The instruments, fittings and controls for heating boilers shall 
be as indicated in HG-600 through HG-640 of section IV of the ASME Code 
except as noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) For control systems for automatic auxiliary heating equipment, 
the requirements in part 63 of this subchapter govern and shall be 
followed.



PART 54_PRESSURE VESSELS--Table of Contents




                   Subpart 54.01_General Requirements

Sec.
54.01-1 Incorporation by reference
54.01-2 Adoption of division 1 of section VIII of the ASME Code.
54.01-5 Scope (modifies U-1 and U-2).
54.01-10 Steam generating pressure vessels (modifies U-1(e)).
54.01-15 Exemptions from shop inspection and plan approval (replaces U-
          1(c) (6) through (9)).
54.01-17 Pressure vessel for human occupancy (PVHO).
54.01-18 Plan approval.
54.01-25 Miscellaneous pressure components (modifies UG-11).
54.01-30 Loadings (modifies UG-22).
54.01-35 Corrosion (modifies UG-25).

[[Page 139]]

54.01-40 External pressure (modifies UG- 28).

                 Subpart 54.03_Low Temperature Operation

54.03-1 Scope.
54.03-5 General.

                      Subpart 54.05_Toughness Tests

54.05-1 Scope (replaces UG-84).
54.05-3 Tests required.
54.05-5 Toughness test specimens.
54.05-6 Toughness test temperatures.
54.05-10 Certification of material toughness tests.
54.05-15 Weldment toughness tests--procedure qualifications.
54.05-16 Production toughness testing.
54.05-17 Weld toughness test acceptance criteria.
54.05-20 Impact test properties for service of 0 [deg]F. and below.
54.05-25 [Reserved]
54.05-30 Allowable stress values at low temperatures.

             Subpart 54.10_Inspection, Reports, and Stamping

54.10-1 Scope (modifies UG-90 through UG-103 and UG-115 through UG-120).
54.10-3 Marine inspectors (replaces UG-90 and UG-91, and modifies UG-92 
          through UG-103).
54.10-5 Maximum allowable working pressure (reproduces UG-98).
54.10-10 Standard hydrostatic test (modifies UG-99).
54.10-15 Pneumatic test (modifies UG-100).
54.10-20 Marking and stamping.
54.10-25 Manufacturers' data report forms (modifies UG-120).

                  Subpart 54.15_Pressure-Relief Devices

54.15-1 General (modifies UG-125 through UG-136).
54.15-3 Definitions (modifies UA-60).
54.15-5 Protective devices (modifies UG- 125).
54.15-10 Safety and relief valves (modifies UG-126).
54.15-13 Rupture disks (modifies UG-127).
54.15-15 Relief devices for unfired steam boilers, evaporators, and heat 
          exchangers (modifies UG-126).
54.15-25 Minimum relief capacities for cargo tanks containing compressed 
          or liquefied gas.

                  Subpart 54.20_Fabrication by Welding

54.20-1 Scope (modifies UW-1 through UW-65).
54.20-2 Fabrication for hazardous materials (replaces UW-2(a)).
54.20-3 Design (modifies UW-9, UW-11(a), UW-13, and UW-16).
54.20-5 Welding qualification tests and production testing (modifies UW-
          26, UW-28, UW-29, UW-47, and UW-48).

                  Subpart 54.23_Fabrication by Brazing

54.23-1 Scope (modifies UB-1).

 Subpart 54.25_Construction With Carbon, Alloy, and Heat Treated Steels

54.25-1 Scope.
54.25-3 Steel plates (modifies UCS-6).
54.25-5 Corrosion allowance (replaces UCS-25).
54.25-7 Requirements for postweld heat treatment (modifies UCS-56).
54.25-8 Radiography (modifies UW-11(a), UCS-57, UNF-57, UHA-33, and UHT-
          57).
54.25-10 Low temperature operation--ferritic steels (replaces UCS-65 
          through UCS-67).
54.25-15 Low temperature operation--high alloy steels (modifies UHA-
          23(b) and UHA-51).
54.25-20 Low temperature operation--ferritic steels with properties 
          enhanced by heat treatment (modifies UHT-5(c), UHT-6, UHT-23, 
          and UHT-82).
54.25-25 Welding of quenched and tempered steels (modifies UHT-82).

                 Subpart 54.30_Mechanical Stress Relief

54.30-1 Scope.
54.30-3 Introduction.
54.30-5 Limitations and requirements.
54.30-10 Method of performing mechanical stress relief.
54.30-15 Requirement for analysis and computation.

    Authority: 33 U.S.C. 1509; 43 U.S.C. 1333; 46 U.S.C. 3306, 3703; 
E.O. 12234, 45 FR 58801, 3 CFR, 1980 Comp., p. 277; Department of 
Homeland Security Delegation No. 0170.1.

    Source: CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, unless otherwise 
noted.



                   Subpart 54.01_General Requirements



Sec. 54.01-1  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part 
with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance 
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a). To enforce any edition other than that specified 
in paragraph (b) of this section, the Coast Guard must publish notice of 
change in the Federal Register and make the material available to the 
public. All approved

[[Page 140]]

material is on file at the U.S. Coast Guard, Office of Design and 
Engineering Standards (G-MSE), 2100 Second Street SW., Washington, DC 
20593-0001 and is available from the sources indicated in paragraph (b) 
of this section or at the National Archives and Records Administration 
(NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, 
call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/
code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (b) The material approved for incorporation by reference in this 
part and the sections affected are:

      American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) International

Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990

  Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, section VIII, Division 1, Pressure 
              Vessels, July 1989 with 1989 addenda

  54.01-2; 54.01-5; 54.01-15; 54.01-18; 54.01-25; 54.01-30; 54.01-35; 
 54.03-1; 54.03-5; 54.05-1; 54.10-1; 54.10-3; 54.10-5; 54.10-10; 54.10-
  15; 54.15-1; 54.15-5; 54.15-10; 54.15-13; 54.20-1; 54.20-3; 54.25-1; 
   54.25-3; 54.25-5; 54.25-8; 54.25-10; 54.25-15; 54.25-20; 54.25-25; 
                       54.30-3; 54.30-5; 54.30-10

            American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.

ASTM A 20/A 20M-97a, Standard Specification for General Requirements for 
         Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels

                           54.05-10; 54.25-10

ASTM A 203/A 203M-97, Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, 
    Alloy Steel, Nickel

                                54.05-20

  ASTM A 370-97a, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical 
    Testing of Steel Products

                                54.25-20

 ASTM E 23-96, Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of 
    Metallic Materials

                                 54.05-5

ASTM E 208-95a, Standard Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test to 
   Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of Ferritic Steels 
                                                                 54.05-5

                    Compressed Gas Association (CGA)

500 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10036

  S-1.2, Safety Relief Device Standards--Cargo and Portable Tanks for 
    Compressed Gases, 1979

                                54.15-25

    S-1.2.5.2, Flow Test of Safety Relief Valves, 1979

                                54.15-10

               Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)

127 Park Street, NE. Vienna, VA 22180

SP-25, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions, 
    1978

                                54.01-25

[CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35822, July 29, 1991 as amended by CGD 95-072, 60 FR 
50462, Sept. 29, 1995; CGD 95-027, 61 FR 26000, May 23, 1996; CGD 96-
041, 61 FR 50727, Sept. 27, 1996; CGD 97-057, 62 FR 51044, Sept. 30, 
1997; USCG-1999-6216, 64 FR 53224, Oct. 1, 1999; USCG-1999-5151, 64 FR 
67177, Dec. 1, 1999; USCG-2002-13058, 67 FR 61278, Sept. 30, 2002]



Sec. 54.01-2  Adoption of division 1 of section VIII of the ASME Code.

    (a) Pressure vessels shall be designed, constructed, and inspected 
in accordance with division 1 of section VIII of the ASME (American 
Society of Mechanical Engineers) Code, as limited, modified, or replaced 
by specific requirements in this part. The provisions in the appendices 
to division 1 of section VIII of the ASME Code are adopted and shall be 
followed when the requirements in section VIII make them mandatory. For 
general information Table 54.01-1(a) lists the various paragraphs in 
division 1 of section VIII of the ASME Code which are limited, modified, 
or replaced by regulations in this part.

   Table 54.01-1(a)--Limitations and Modifications in the Adoption of
                  Division 1 of Section VIII, ASME Code
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Paragraphs in Section VIII, ASME Code \1\
              and disposition                     Unit of this part
------------------------------------------------------------------------
U-1 and U-2 modified by...................  54.01-5 through 54.01-16.
U-1(c) replaced by........................  54.01-5.
U-1(d) replaced by........................  54.01-5(a) and 54.01-15.
U-1(e) modified by........................  54.01-10.
U-1(h) replaced by........................  54.01-15.
UG-11 modified by.........................  54.01-25.
UG-22 modified by.........................  54.01-30.
UG-25 modified by.........................  54.01-35.
UG-28 modified by.........................  54.01-40.
UG-84 replaced by.........................  54.05-1.
UG-90 through UG-103 modified by..........  54.10-1.
UG-90 and UG-91 replaced by...............  54.10-3.
UG-92 through UG-103 modified by..........  54.10-3.
UG-98 reproduced by.......................  54.10-5.
UG-99 modified by.........................  54.10-10.
UG-100 modified by........................  54.10-15.
UG-115 through UG-120 modified by.........  54.10-1.
UG-116, except (k) replaced by............  54.10-20(a).
UG-116(k) replaced by.....................  54.10-20(b).
UG-117 replaced by........................  54.10-20(c).
UG-118 replaced by........................  54.10-20(a).

[[Page 141]]

 
UG-119 modified by........................  54.10-20(d).
UG-120 modified by........................  54.10-25.
UG-125 through UG-134 modified by.........  54.15-1 through 54.15-15.
UG-125 modified by........................  54.15-5.
UG-125 modified by........................  54.15-10, 54.15-15.
UG-127 modified by........................  54.15-13.
UW-1 through UW-65 modified by............  54.20-1.
UW-2(a) replaced by.......................  54.01-5(b) and 54.20-2.
UW-2(b) replaced by.......................  54.01-5(b).
UW-9, UW-11(a), UW-13, UW-16 modified by..  54.20-3.
UW-11(a) modified by......................  54.25-8.
UW-26, UW-27, UW-29, UW-47, UW-48 modified  54.20-5.
 by.
UW-52(c)(3) replaced by...................  54.20-10.
UB-1 modified by..........................  54.23-1
UB-2 modified by..........................  52.01-95(d) and 56.30-
                                             30(b)(1).
UCS-6 modified by.........................  54.25-3.
UCS-25 replaced by........................  54.25-5.
UCS-56 modified by........................  54.25-7.
UCS-57, UNF-57, UHA-33, and UHT-57          54.25-8.
 modified by.
UCS-65 through UCS-67 replaced by.........  54.25-10.
UHA-23(b) and UHA-51 modified by..........  54.25-15.
UHT-5(c), UHT-6, UHT-23 modified by.......  54.25-20.
UHT-82 modified by........................  54.25-20, 54.25-25.
UA-60 modified by.........................  54.15-3.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The references to specific provisions in the ASME Code are coded.
  The first letter ``U'' refers to division 1 of section VIII. The
  second letter, such as ``G'', refers to a subsection within section
  VIII. The number refers to the paragraph within the subsection.

    (b) References to the ASME Code, such as paragraph UG-125, indicate:

U=Division 1 of section VIII, Pressure Vessels, ASME Code.
G=Part containing general requirements.
125=Paragraph within part.

    (c) When a paragraph or a section of the regulations in this part 
relates to material in division 1 of section VIII of the ASME Code, the 
relationship with the code will be shown immediately following the 
heading of the section or at the beginning of the paragraph as follows:
    (1) (Modifies U------.) This indicates that the material in U------ 
is generally applicable but is being altered, amplified or augmented.
    (2) (Replaces U------.) This indicates that U------ does not apply.
    (3) (Reproduces U------.) This indicates that U------ is being 
identically reproduced for convenience, not for emphasis.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9976, June 17, 1970; CGFR 72-59R, 37 FR 6188, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 72-
206R, 38 FR 17226, June 29, 1973; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40163, Sept. 2, 
1975; CGD 77-147, 47 FR 21809, May 20, 1982; CGD 85-061, 54 FR 50963, 
Dec. 11, 1989. Redesignated by CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35822, July 29, 1991]



Sec. 54.01-5  Scope (modifies U-1 and U-2).

    (a) This part contains requirements for pressure vessels. Table 
54.01-5(a) gives a breakdown by parts in this subchapter of the 
regulations governing various types of pressure vessels, boilers, and 
thermal units.
    (b) Pressure vessels are divided into Classes I, I-L (low 
temperature), II, II-L (low temperature), and III. Table 54.01-5(b) 
describes these classes and sets out additional requirements for welded 
pressure vessels.
    (c) The requirements for pressure vessels by class are as follows:
    (1) Class I-L and II-L pressure vessels must meet the applicable 
requirements in this part.
    (2) Pressure vessels containing hazardous materials as defined in 
Sec. 150.115 of this chapter must meet the requirements of this part 
or, as applicable, the requirements in 49 CFR parts 171-177 or part 64 
of this chapter.
    (3) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4) of this section, Classes 
I, II, and III pressure vessels not containing hazardous materials must 
be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements in 
Section VIII, division 1, of the ASME Code and must be stamped with the 
ASME ``U'' symbol. These pressure vessels must also comply with the 
requirements that are listed or prescribed in paragraphs (d) through (g) 
of this section. Compliance with other provisions in this part is not 
required.
    (4) Classes II and III pressure vessels that have a net internal 
volume of less than 0.14 cubic meters (5 cubic feet) and do not contain 
hazardous materials must be stamped with either the ASME ``U'' or ``UM'' 
symbol. Compliance with other provisions in this part is not required.
    (d) Pressure vessels described in paragraph (c)(3) of this section 
must--

[[Page 142]]

    (1) Have detailed plans that include the information required by 
Sec. 54.01-18 (approved by the Office of Management and Budget under 
OMB control number 2130-0181);
    (2) Meet Sec. 54.01-35, Sec. 54.20-3(c), and Sec. 54.25-3 of this 
part;
    (3) Have pressure relief devices required by subpart 54.15;
    (4) Meet the applicable requirements in Sec. Sec. 54.10-3, 54.10-
20, and 54.10-25 for inspection, reports, and stamping;
    (5) If welded, meet the post weld heat treatment and minimum joint 
and radiography requirement in Table 54.01-5(b); and
    (6) If a steam generating pressure vessel, meet Sec. 54.01-10.
    (e) The plans required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section must be 
certified by a registered professional engineer to meet the design 
requirements in paragraph (d) of this section and in section VIII, 
division 1, of the ASME Code. The certification must appear on all 
drawings and analyses. The plans must be made available to the Coast 
Guard prior to the inspection required by Sec. 54.10-3(c).
    (f) If a pressure vessel has more than one independent chamber and 
the chambers have different classifications, each chamber must, as a 
minimum, meet the requirements for its classification. If a single 
classification for the entire pressure vessel is preferred, the 
classification selected must be one that is required to meet all of the 
regulations applicable to the classification that is not selected. For 
example, if one chamber is Class I and one chamber is Class II-L, the 
only single classification that can be selected is Class I-L.
    (g) The design pressure for each interface between two chambers in a 
multichambered pressure vessel must be--
    (1) The maximum allowable working pressure (gauge) in the chamber 
with the higher pressure; or
    (2) If one chamber is a vacuum chamber, the maximum allowable 
working pressure (absolute) in the other chamber minus the least 
operating pressure (absolute) in the vacuum chamber.

  Table 54.01-5(a)--Regulation Reference for Boilers, Pressure Vessels,
                            and Thermal Units
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  Part of      Part of
                                                 subchapter   subchapter
  Service and pressure temperature boundaries    regulating   regulating
                                                 mechanical   automatic
                                                   design      control
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Main (power) boiler: All......................           52           62
Pressure vessel: All..........................           54           NA
Fired auxiliary boiler \1\ (combustion
 products or electricity):
  (a) Steam:
    More than 103 kPa (15 psig)...............           52    \2\ 62 or
                                                                      63
    Equal to or less than 103 kPa (15 psig)...           53           63
  (b) Hot water heating:
    More than 689 kPa (100 psig) or 121 [deg]C           52           63
     (250 [deg]F).............................
    Equal to or less than 689 kPa (100 psig)             53           63
     and 121 [deg]C (250 [deg]F)..............
  (c) Hot water supply:
    More than 689 kPa (100 psig) or 121 [deg]C           52           63
     (250 [deg]F).............................
    Equal to or less than 689 kPa (100 psig)             53           63
     and 121 [deg]C (250 [deg]F)..............
Other:
  (a) Fired thermal fluid heaters: All........           52           63
  (b) Unfired steam boiler:
    More than 206 kPa (30 psig) or 454 [deg]C            52           NA
     (850 [deg]F) \3\.........................
    Equal to or less than 206 kPa (30 psig)              54           NA
     and 454 [deg]C (850 [deg]F)..............
  (c) Evaporators and heat exchangers: More              54           NA
   than 103 kPa (15 psig) \4\.................
  (d) Unfired hot water supply or heating                54           NA
   boiler: More than 103 kPa (15 psig) \4\....
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Including exhaust gas types.
\2\ Boilers with heat input ratings =12,500,000 Btu/hr. must
  have controls that meet part 62. Boilers with heat input ratings
  <12,500,000 Btu/hr. must have controls that meet part 63.
\3\ Temperature of working fluid.
\4\ Relief device is required even if designed for less than 103 kPa (15
  psig).


[[Page 143]]


                                                    Table 54.01-5(b)--Pressure Vessel Classification
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                        Radiography
                                             Class limits on    Joint requirements     requirements,      Post weld heat    Shop inspect.  Plan approval
        Class           Service contents       pressure and           \1,6,7\       section VIII, ASME  treatment required     required       required
                                               temperature                              Code \3,7\             \5,7\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I...................  (a) Vapor or gas...  Over 600 p.s.i. or   (1) For category    Full on all butt    For carbon or low   Yes \4\......  Yes \4\.
                      (b) Liquid.........   700 [deg]F           A; (1) or (2) For   joints regardless   alloy steel, in
                      (c) Hazardous        Over 600 p.s.i. or    category B. All     of thickness.       accordance with
                       materials \2\.       400 [deg]F.          categories C and    Exceptions listed   Table UCS-56,
                                                                 D must have full    in Table UCS-57     regardless of
                                                                 penetration welds   of ASME Code do     thickness. For
                                                                 extending through   not apply.          other materials,
                                                                 the entire                              in accordance
                                                                 thickness of the                        with section
                                                                 vessel wall or                          VIII, ASME Code.
                                                                 nozzle wall.
I-L Low temperature.  (a) Vapor or gas...  Over 250 p.s.i. and  (1) for categories  Full on all butt    For carbon or low   Yes..........  Yes.
                      ...................   service              A and B. All        joints regardless   alloy steel, in
                      (b) Liquid.........   temperature below    categories C and    of thickness.       accordance with
                      (c) Hazardous         0 [deg]F             D must have full    Exceptions listed   Table UCS-56,
                       materials \2\.      Over 250 p.s.i. and   penetration welds   in Table UCS-57     regardless of
                                            service              extending through   of ASME Code do     thickness. For
                                            temperature below    the entire          not apply.          other materials,
                                            0 [deg]F.            thickness of the                        in accordance
                                                                 vessel wall or                          with section
                                                                 nozzle wall. No                         VIII, ASME Code.
                                                                 backing rings or
                                                                 strips left in
                                                                 place.
II..................  (a) Vapor or gas...  30 through 600       (1) or (2) for      Spot, unless        In accordance with  Yes \4\......  Yes \4\.
                      ...................   p.s.i. or 275[deg]   category A. (1),    exempted by UW-     section, VIII of
                      (b) Liquid.........   through 700 [deg]F   (2), or (3) for     11(c) of ASME       ASME Code.
                      (c) Hazardous        200 through 600       category B.         Code.
                       materials \2,3,6\.   p.s.i. or 250[deg]   Categories C and
                                            through 400 [deg]F.  D in accordance
                                                                 with UW-16 of
                                                                 ASME Code.
II-L Low temperature  (a) Vapor or gas...  0 through 250        (1) for category    Spot. The           Same as for I-L     Yes..........  Yes.
                      ...................   p.s.i. and service   A; (1) or (2) for   exemption of UW-    except that
                      (b) Liquid.........   temperature below    category B. All     II(c) of ASME       mechanical stress
                      (c) Hazardous         0 [deg]F             categories C and    Code does not       relief may be
                       materials \2\.      0 through 250         D must have full    apply.              substituted if
                                            p.s.i. and service   penetration welds                       allowed under
                                            temperature below    extending through                       subpart 54.30 of
                                            0 [deg]F.            the entire                              this chapter.
                                                                 thickness of the
                                                                 vessel wall or
                                                                 nozzle wall.
III.................  (a) Vapor or gas...  Under 30 p.s.i. and  In accordance with  Spot, unless        In accordance with  Yes \4\......  Yes \4\.
                      (b) Liquid.........   0[deg] through 275   Section VIII of     exempted UW-II(c)   Section VIII of
                      (c) Hazardous         [deg]F               AMSE Code.          of ASME Code.       ASME Code.
                       materials \2,3,6\.  Under 200 p.s.i.
                                            and 0[deg] through
                                            250 [deg]F.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Welded joint categories are defined under UW-3 of the ASME Code. Joint types are described in Table UW-12 of the ASME Code, and numbered ``(1),''
  ``(2)'', etc.
\2\ See Sec. 54.20-2.
\3\ See Sec. Sec. 54.25-8(c) and 54.25-10(d).
\4\ See Sec. Sec. 54.01-15 and 54.10-3 for exemptions.
\5\ Specific requirements modifying Table UCS-56 of the ASME Code are found in Sec. 54.25-7.
\6\ See Sec. 54.20-3 (c) and (f)
\7\ Applies only to welded pressure vessels.


[[Page 144]]


(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB control 
number 2130-0181)

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9976, June 17, 1970; CGD 77-147, 47 FR 21809, May 20, 1982; 55 FR 
696, Jan. 8, 1990; CGD 88-057, 55 FR 24236, June 15, 1990; CGD 85-061, 
55 FR 41917, Oct. 16, 1990; CGD 95-027, 61 FR 26000, May 23, 1996; USCG-
2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 54.01-10  Steam generating pressure vessels (modifies U-1(e)).

    (a) Pressure vessels in which steam is generated are classed as 
``Unfired Steam Boilers'' except as required otherwise by paragraph (b) 
of this section. Unfired steam boilers must be fitted with an efficient 
water level indicator, a pressure gage, a blowdown valve, and an 
approved safety valve as required by Sec. 54.15-15. Unfired steam 
boilers must be constructed in accordance with this part other than when 
the pressures are more than 206 kPa (30 psig) or the temperatures of the 
working fluid are more than 454 [deg]C (850 [deg]F) when such boilers 
must be constructed in accordance with part 52 of this subchapter.
    (b) Vessels known as ``Evaporators'' or ``Heat Exchangers'' are not 
classified as unfired steam boilers. They shall be fitted with an 
approved safety device as required under Sec. 54.15-15 and constructed 
in accordance with this part.
    (c) An evaporator in which steam is generated shall be fitted with 
an efficient water level indicator, a pressure gage, and a blowdown 
valve.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9436, Mar. 8, 1985; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48044, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 54.01-15  Exemptions from shop inspection and plan approval 
(replaces U-1(c) (6) through (9)).

    (a) The following classifications are exempt from shop inspection 
and plan approval requirements of this part:
    (1) Vessels containing water at a pressure not greater than 100 
pounds per square inch gage, nor a temperature above 200 [deg]F., 
including those containing air, the compression of which serves only as 
a cushion. Air charging lines may be permanently attached provided the 
air pressure does not exceed 15 pounds per square inch gage.
    (2) Hot water supply storage tanks heated by steam or any other 
indirect means when none of the following limitations is exceeded:
    (i) A heat input of 200,000 B.t.u. per hour;
    (ii) A water temperature of 200 [deg]F.;
    (iii) A nominal water-containing capacity of 120 gallons; or
    (iv) A pressure of 100 pounds per square inch gage.

The exemption of any tank under this subparagraph requires that it shall 
be fitted with a safety relief valve of at least 1-inch diameter, set to 
relieve below the maximum allowable working pressure of the tank.
    (3)(i) Vessels having an internal operating pressure not exceeding 
15 pounds per square inch gage with no limitation on size. (See UG-28(e) 
of the ASME Code.)
    (ii) Cargo tanks of pressure vessel configuration are not included 
in the exemption in paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section.
    (4) Class I, II, and III pressure vessels that meet the requirements 
of Sec. 54.01-5 (c)(3) and (c)(4).
    (5) Condensers and heat exchangers, regardless of size, where the 
design is such that the liquid phase is not greater than 100 pounds per 
square inch gage and 200 [deg]F. and the vapor phase is not greater than 
15 pounds per square inch gage provided system over pressure conditions 
are considered.
    (b) For fluid conditioner fittings see Sec. 56.15-1 of this 
subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9977, June 17, 1970; CGFR 70-143, 35 FR 19906, Dec. 30, 1970; CGD 77-
147, 47 FR 21810, May 20, 1982]



Sec. 54.01-17  Pressure vessel for human occupancy (PVHO).

    Pressure vessels for human occupancy (PVHO's) must meet the 
requirements of subpart B (Commercial Diving Operations) of part 197 of 
this chapter.

[CGD 76-009, 43 FR 53683, Nov. 16, 1978]

[[Page 145]]



Sec. 54.01-18  Plan approval.

    (a) Manufacturers intending to fabricate pressure vessels, heat 
exchangers, evaporators, and similar appurtenances, covered by the 
regulations in this part shall submit detailed plans in accordance with 
subpart 50.20 of this subchapter.
    (b) The following information shall be submitted:
    (1) Calculations for all pressure containment components including 
the maximum allowable working pressure, the hydrostatic or pneumatic 
test pressure, and the intended safety device setting.
    (2) Joint design and methods of attachment of all pressure 
containment components.
    (3) Foundations and supports (design and attachment).
    (4) Pertinent calculations for pressure vessel foundations and/or 
supports.
    (5) A bill of material meeting the requirements of section VIII of 
the ASME Code, as modified by this part.
    (6) A diagrammatic arrangement drawing of the assembled unit 
indicating location of internal and external components.



Sec. 54.01-25  Miscellaneous pressure components (modifies UG-11).

    (a) Pressure components for pressure vessels shall be as required by 
UG-11 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) All pressure components conforming to an accepted ANSI (American 
National Standards Institute) Standard referred to in an adopted code, 
specification or standard or in this subchapter shall also be marked in 
accordance with MSS (Manufacturers' Standardization Society) Standard 
SP-25.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9977, June 17, 1970]



Sec. 54.01-30  Loadings (modifies UG-22).

    (a) The loadings for pressure vessels shall be as required by UG-22 
of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this section.
    (b) In evaluating loadings for certain pressure vessel applications, 
the Commandant may require consideration of the following loads in 
addition to those listed in UG-22 of the ASME Code:
    (1) Loading imposed by vessel's attitude in roll, list, pitch and 
trim.
    (2) Dynamic forces due to ship motions.



Sec. 54.01-35  Corrosion (modifies UG- 25).

    (a) Vessels or portions of vessels subject to corrosion shall be as 
required by UG-25 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this 
section.
    (b) The pressure portions of pressure vessels shall:
    (1) Normally have a corrosion allowance of one-sixth of the 
calculated thickness, or one-sixteenth inch, whichever is smaller, added 
to the calculated thickness as determined by the applicable design 
formula.
    (2) Be specifically evaluated in cases where unusually corrosive 
cargoes will be involved, for the possible increase of this corrosion 
allowance.
    (3) Have no additional thickness required when acceptable corrosion 
resistant materials are used.
    (4) Not normally need additional thickness allowance when the 
effective stress (either S or SE depending on the design formula used) 
is 80 percent or less of the allowable stress listed in section VIII of 
the ASME Code for calculating thickness.
    (c) Telltale holes shall not be permitted in pressure vessels 
containing dangerous fluids, such as acid, poison, corrosives, etc.
    (d) Exemption from these corrosion allowance requirements will be 
granted by the Commandant in those cases where:
    (1) The contents of the pressure vessel is judged to be sufficiently 
noncorrosive; and,
    (2) Where the external surface is also protected from corrosion. A 
suitable vapor barrier is adequate protection, while paint or other thin 
coatings exposed to weather or mechanical damage are not acceptable.

    Note: No applied linings except as provided in Part UCL of the ASME 
Code shall be acceptable.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 72-59R, 37 
FR 6189, Mar. 25, 1972]

[[Page 146]]



Sec. 54.01-40  External pressure (modifies UG-28).

    (a) The exemption from external pressure consideration provided by 
the note under UG-28(f) does not apply.
    (b) Vessels which may at times be subjected to partial vacuum due to 
nature of the contents, temperature, unloading operations, or other 
facet of employment shall either have vacuum breaker protection or be 
designed for not less than one-half atmosphere of external pressure.

[CGFR 70-143, 35 FR 19906, Dec. 30, 1970]



                 Subpart 54.03_Low Temperature Operation



Sec. 54.03-1  Scope.

    (a) The pressure vessels for low temperature operation shall be as 
required by section VIII of the ASME Code as modified by this subpart.



Sec. 54.03-5  General.

    (a) Requirements for ferritic steels, high alloy steels, and heat 
treated ferritic steels are contained in Sec. Sec. 54.25-10, 54.25-15, 
and 54.25-20 respectively of this subchapter.
    (b) Requirements for toughness testing of material product forms and 
weldments (including weld procedure qualification and production 
toughness tests) are contained in subpart 54.05.
    (c) Materials suitable for a given minimum service temperature may 
be used in warmer service. Steels differing in chemical composition, 
mechanical properties, or heat treatments from those specified may be 
specially approved by the Commandant. Similarly, aluminum alloys and 
other nonferrous materials not intended to be covered by these sections 
may be specially considered by the Commandant for service at any low 
temperature.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9977, June 17, 1970]



                      Subpart 54.05_Toughness Tests



Sec. 54.05-1  Scope (replaces UG-84).

    (a) The toughness tests of materials used in pressure vessels shall 
be as required by this subpart in lieu of requirements in UG-84 of the 
ASME Code.



Sec. 54.05-3  Tests required.

    (a) Where material or welding toughness tests are required by 
Sec. Sec. 54.25-10, 54.25-15, 54.25-20, and subpart 57.03 or 57.06 of 
this subchapter, the following requirements shall apply:
    (1) Additional requirements for ferritic steels with properties 
enhanced by heat treatment are in Sec. 54.25-20.
    (2) Certified reports of toughness tests by the material 
manufacturer will be acceptable evidence provided the specimens taken 
are representative of the material delivered and that the material is 
not subject to treatment during or following fabrication that will 
reduce its impact properties. If such treatment is subsequently applied 
to the material, test specimens shall be so taken and treated as to be 
representative of the material in the finished vessel.
    (b) The requirements of this subpart are also applicable to 
nonpressure vessel type low temperature tanks and associated secondary 
barriers, as defined in Sec. 38.05-4 of subchapter D (Tank Vessels) of 
this chapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9977, June 17, 1970]



Sec. 54.05-5  Toughness test specimens.

    (a) Charpy V-notch impact tests. Where required, Charpy V-notch 
tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Specification E 23 
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 54.01-1), ``Notched Bar Impact 
Testing of Metallic Materials'', using the Type A specimen shown in 
Figure 4 of the specification. Special attention is drawn to the fact 
that the Charpy Keyhole and U-notch specimens are not acceptable 
substitutes for the Charpy V-notch specimen and shall not be used to 
qualify materials within the scope of this subpart. Each set of Charpy 
impact tests shall consist of three specimens. For materials \1/2\-inch 
thick or less, the largest possible Charpy specimens for that thickness 
shall be cut centered at the material's mid-thickness. For materials 
thicker than \1/2\-inch, full size Charpy specimens shall be cut 
centered at a location as near as practicable to a point

[[Page 147]]

midway between the material's surface and half-thickness. Except where 
otherwise specified, transversely oriented specimens must be used. When 
longitudinal specimens are used, the required energy values may not be 
less than 1.5 times the values required for transversely oriented 
specimens. In all cases the notch shall be cut normal to the material's 
surface. Test specimens shall be taken at least one ``t'' from any heat 
treated edge (where ``t'' is the material's nominal thickness).
    (b) Drop weight tests. Where required, drop weight tests shall be 
conducted for no-break performance in accordance with ASTM Specification 
E 208 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 54.01-1), ``Conducting Drop-
Weight Test to Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of 
Ferritic Steels''. For material thicknesses between \1/2\-inch and \5/
8\-inch, the ASTM E-208 specimen P-3, machined to \1/2\-inch thickness, 
shall be used with a stop distance of 0.090-inch. In preparing weld 
specimens for dropweight testing, weld reinforcement shall be ground 
flush, the hard facing bead centered on and transverse to the weld, and 
the notch centered on and parallel to the weld axis.
    (c) Retest procedures. (1) When Charpy V-notch impact specimens are 
used and the average value of the three initial specimens fails to meet 
the stated requirements by an amount not exceeding 15 percent, or the 
value for more than one specimen is below the required average value of 
when the value for one specimen is below the minimum value permitted for 
a single specimen by an amount not exceeding 15 percent, three 
additional specimens from the same material may be tested and the 
results combined with those previously obtained to form a new average. 
This new average of six specimens must exceed the specified minimum 
average. In the event the Charpy retests fail, the material may still be 
qualified by exhibiting a no-break performance when tested in accordance 
with the drop weight procedure, if applicable. Two drop weight specimens 
shall be tested for each Charpy V-notch set of three initial specimens 
which failed to qualify. Failure of either or both of these drop weight 
specimens will constitute rejection of the material or weldments 
represented, except as outlined in paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
    (2) When drop weight specimens are used, retests shall be permitted 
only within the limits prescribed in ASTM Specification E 208 
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 54.01-1), except as outlined in 
paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
    (3) If, for heat treated base material, the required toughness 
results are not obtained in the initial test or in the retest, the 
material may be reheat treated one time and tested again in accordance 
with the initial requirements for the material.
    (d) Alternate toughness tests. The Charpy V-notch impact values of 
Sec. Sec. 54.05-20(a) and 54.05-25(a) are representative of those which 
correlate with the nil-ductility transition temperature determined by 
the drop-weight tests for the steels specified in Sec. 54.25-10. For 
materials for which there are other data showing suitable correlation 
between Charpy V-notch and drop-weight tests, V-notch acceptance limits 
different from those tabulated herein may be specially approved by the 
Commandant, based upon the actual correlation. In the case of steels for 
which the tabulated Charpy V-notch values can be shown to be 
inapplicable or in the case of specially considered steels, or as an 
alternative to complying with the tabulated impact requirements, 
acceptance may be based upon the material exhibiting a no-break 
performance when tested in accordance with the drop-weight procedure. 
Whenever the drop-weight test is used as an alternative to the Charpy V-
notch test, two drop-weight specimens shall be tested for each set of 
three Charpy V-notch specimens otherwise required. If the drop-weight 
test cannot be performed because of material thickness limitations (less 
than one-half inch) or product shape, or is otherwise inapplicable 
(because of heat treatment, chemistry, etc.), other tests and/or test 
criteria will be specified by the Commandant to assure the adequacy of 
the material for the intended application.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-254, 40 FR 
40163, Sept. 2, 1975; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]

[[Page 148]]



Sec. 54.05-6  Toughness test temperatures.

    Each toughness test must be conducted at temperatures not warmer 
than -20 [deg]F or 10 [deg]F below the minimum service temperature, 
whichever is lower, except that for service at or below -320 [deg]F, the 
tests may be conducted at the service temperature in accordance with 
Sec. 54.25-10(a)(2).

[CGD 85-061, 54 FR 50964, Dec. 11, 1989]



Sec. 54.05-10  Certification of material toughness tests.

    (a) Plate material. The manufacturer of plates may certify such 
material, provided it has been given an appropriate heat-treatment, by 
reporting the results of tests of one set of Charpy impact specimens or 
of two drop weight specimens, as applicable, taken from each plate as 
rolled. Impact specimens shall be taken as outlined in section 12 of 
ASTM A 20 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 54.01-1). The long axis 
of the Charpy specimen must be perpendicular to the final direction of 
rolling. When the direction of maximum stress is unknown, the 
manufacturer may certify on the basis of specimens taken parallel to the 
final direction of rolling.
    (b) Pipe or tube material. (1) The manufacturer of pipe, tube, or 
welded fittings formed from pipe or tube may certify such material by 
reporting the results of tests of one set of Charpy impact specimens, 
provided the requirement for production in this paragraph (b)(1) or 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section, as well as the requirement for 
sampling in paragraph (b)(3) of this section are met. The specimens 
shall have the major axis parallel to the length of pipe or tube. In the 
case of welding fittings, the specimens may be taken from the tubing 
prior to forming provided the fittings are normalized after forming. 
Such specimens shall be normalized before testing.
    (2) One set of specimens may represent each five (5) short tons, or 
less, of the pipe, tubes, or welding fittings produced from one heat of 
steel poured from a single melting furnace charge and subsequently 
processed in the same manner, provided all are given a normalizing heat-
treatment in a continuous treating furnace in which the temperature is 
automatically controlled and checked by recording pyrometer.
    (3) One set of specimens may represent each five (5) short tons, or 
less, of the pipe, tubes, or welding fittings that have been given a 
normalizing heat-treatment as a single charge in a batch-treating 
furnace equipped with recording pyrometer provided all have been 
produced from a single melting furnace heat and are subsequently 
processed in the same manner. If more than one melting furnace heat is 
present in the batch heat-treating furnace, means of identification 
shall be provided and one set of specimens shall be taken from each 
heat.
    (4) One set of impact specimens shall be taken from one pipe or tube 
picked at random from each heat or furnace batch or portion thereof to 
be certified.
    (c) Forgings and forged or rolled fittings. (1) The manufacturer of 
forgings for any purpose may certify them by reporting the results of 
tests of one set of Charpy impact specimens or two drop-weight 
specimens, as applicable, taken from each 5 short tons of product from 
each melting heat provided the requirements in this paragraph for 
production and sampling are met.
    (2) One or more test blocks shall be cut from billets or blooms 
selected at random from each heat of material. Each test block shall be 
forge-reduced in thickness to the thickness of the finished forgings to 
be certified, within the limitations set below. After forging to the 
reduced thickness, the test block shall be heat-treated in the same 
manner as the finished forgings represented, which heat-treatment of 
test blocks may be carried out in the furnace with the forgings, or 
separately. If carried out separately, both heat-treatments shall be 
done in automatically controlled furnaces equipped with calibrated 
recording pyrometers, the certified records of which shall be made 
available to the inspector.
    (3) One set of Charpy impact specimens or two drop-weight specimens, 
as applicable, shall be cut from each such test block and these 
specimens shall represent all forgings (up to 5 short tons) that are 
from the same heat of material and given the same heat-treatment as the 
test block, and the

[[Page 149]]

thickness of which does not differ from that of the test block by more 
than plus or minus 50 percent of 1\1/2\ inches, whichever is less, 
except that forged flanges and tube sheets thicker than 5\1/2\ inches 
may be qualified from a 4-inch test block.
    (4) As many test blocks shall be made as are required under the 
foregoing rule in paragraph (c)(3) of this section to cover the weight 
of product and range of thickness found in the forgings represented. The 
major axis of the test specimens shall be parallel to the length of the 
test block.
    (d) Bars and shapes, rolled or forged. (1) The manufacturer of 
forged or rolled bars and shapes may certify such by reporting the 
results of one set of Charpy impact specimens, or two drop-weight 
specimens, as applicable, produced from each 5 short tons from a single 
melting furnace heat, processed in a similar manner and heat-treated as 
a single furnace batch, if heat-treated. The impact specimens shall be 
cut from the heaviest section, clear of fillets, of the shape being 
tested with the axis of the specimens parallel to the axis of the bar or 
shape.
    (e) Castings. (1) The manufacturer of castings may certify them by 
reporting the results of one set of Charpy impact specimens or two drop-
weight specimens, as applicable, taken from each 5 short tons of product 
from each melting furnace heat. These specimens shall be taken either 
directly from a production casting or from test coupons cast attached 
thereto provided the additional requirements in this paragraph are met.
    (2) One set of Charpy impact or two drop-weight specimens may 
represent all castings (up to 5 short tons) that are from the same heat 
of material and that have a thickness that does not differ from the 
thickness of the section from which the specimens were taken by more 
than plus or minus 25 percent, or 1\1/2\ inches, whichever is less. A 
wider range of thicknesses from one heat may be covered by taking 
additional sets of specimens from thicker or thinner material as may be 
required.
    (3) The test specimens shall be heat-treated in the same manner as 
the castings represented, which heat-treatment of specimens may be 
carried out in the furnace with the castings represented, or separately, 
but if carried out separately both heat-treatments shall be done in 
automatically controlled furnaces equipped with calibrated recording 
pyrometers, the certified records of which shall be made available to 
the marine inspector.
    (f) Small parts. The manufacturer of small parts, either cast or 
forged, may certify a lot of not more than 20 duplicate parts or 5 short 
tons, whichever is less, by reporting the results of one set of Charpy 
impact specimens, or two drop-weight specimens, as applicable, taken 
from one such part selected at random, provided the same kind of 
material and the same process of production were used for all of the 
lot. When the part is too small to provide the specimens of at least 
minimum size, no impact test need be made. For such parts too small to 
impact test, toughness qualifications shall be determined by the 
Commandant based on material, chemical, and mechanical properties.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CFR 73-254, 40 FR 
40164, Sept. 2, 1975; USCG-1999-5151, 64 FR 67178, Dec. 1, 1999]



Sec. 54.05-15  Weldment toughness tests--procedure qualifications.

    (a) Plate for which Charpy V-notch impact testing is required in the 
parent material and for which V-notch minima are specified shall 
similarly have welding procedures qualified for toughness by Charpy V-
notch testing. For these tests, the test plates shall be oriented with 
their final rolling direction parallel to the weld axis (i.e., so that 
transverse impact specimens result), and with the V-notch normal to the 
plate surface. The sample weld joint preparation shall be the same as 
that used in production. The number of test specimens and the location 
of their notches shall be as shown in Figure 54.05-15(a) and as 
described in paragraphs (a) (1) through (5) of this section.
    (1) Three specimens with the notch centered in the weld metal.
    (2) Three specimens with the notch centered on the fusion line 
between parent plate and weld. (The fusion line may be identified by 
etching the specimen with a mild reagent.)

[[Page 150]]

    (3) Three specimens with the notch centered in the heat affected 
zone, 1 mm from the fusion line.
    (4) Same as paragraph (a)(3) of this section, but 3 mm from the 
fusion line.
    (5) Same as paragraph (a)(3) of this section, but 5 mm from the 
fusion line.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.020

       Figure 54.05-15(a)--Charpy V-notch specimen removal details
    (b) Plate materials for which Charpy V-notch minimums are not 
specified, or for which a Charpy V-notch correlation with NDT is not 
known, and which are themselves tested for toughness by the drop-weight 
procedure, shall have

[[Page 151]]

welding procedures similarly qualified by the drop-weight test. For such 
qualifications, two drop-weight specimens are to be tested, with the 
notch positioned directly above and parallel to the centerline of the 
weld.
    (c) Piping welding toughness tests shall be qualified, by making 
Charpy V-notch impact tests as prescribed in paragraph (a) of this 
section.
    (d) Materials which are specially approved based on toughness 
criteria or tests, other than those discussed in paragraphs (a) and (b) 
of this section, shall have welding procedures tested and qualified for 
toughness as deemed appropriate and necessary by the Commandant.
    (e) In the case of stainless steels, weld procedure toughness tests 
may be limited to weld metal only if this is all that is required by 
Sec. 54.25-15.



Sec. 54.05-16  Production toughness testing.

    (a) For vessels of welded construction, production toughness test 
plates shall be prepared for each 50 feet of longitudinal and 
circumferential butt weld in each Class I-L vessel, or for each 150 feet 
in each Class II-L vessel, except for material other than stainless 
steel that is exempted from impact test requirements by this subchapter. 
In the case of stainless steels, weld production toughness tests may be 
limited to weld metal only if this is all that is required be Sec. 
54.25-15. The test-plate thickness shall be the same as that of the 
vessel wall at the location of the production weld being sampled. The 
test plates shall be prepared, wherever possible, as run-off tabs 
attached at the ends of weld butts or seams. The rolling direction of 
the run-off tabs should be oriented parallel to the rolling direction of 
the adjacent production material. The test-plate material shall be taken 
from one of the heats of material used in the vessel, and both the 
electrodes and welding procedures shall be the same as used in the 
fabrication of the vessel. From each test plate, one set of three Charpy 
impact bars or two drop-weight specimens, as applicable according to the 
test used in procedure qualification, shall be taken transverse to the 
weld axis. For Charpy V-notch specimens, the notch shall be normal to 
the material surface and its location alternated (approximately) on 
successive tests between the weld metal and heat affected zone. Thus, 
approximately half of all weld production impact tests will be of weld 
metal and half of heat affected zone material. For the weld metal tests, 
the V-notch is to be centered between the fusion lines. For the heat 
affected zone tests, the notch is to be centered so as to sample, as 
nearly as practicable, the most critical location for toughness observed 
in the weld procedure qualification tests. Where the drop weight 
specimen is used in production weld testing, it shall be prepared in the 
same manner as specified for procedure qualification testing, Sec. 
54.05-15(b).
    (b) For vessels not exceeding 5 cubic feet in volume, one set of 
impact specimens, or two drop-weight specimens, as applicable according 
to the test used in procedure qualification, may represent all vessels 
from the same heat of material not in excess of 100 vessels, or one 
heat-treatment furnace batch. In addition, when such vessels are welded, 
one weld test plate made from one of the heats of material used, and two 
sets of impact specimens or two drop-weight specimens, as applicable, 
cut therefrom, may represent the weld metal in the smallest of: One lot 
of 100 vessels or less; or each heat-treatment furnace batch; or each 50 
feet of welding for Class I-L vessels; or each 150 feet of welding for 
Class II-L vessels.
    (c) For several vessels or parts of vessels being welded in 
succession, the plate thickness of which does not vary by more than one-
fourth inch, and which are made of the same grade of material, a test 
plate shall be furnished for each 50 feet of welding for Class I-L 
vessels or 150 feet of welding for Class II-L vessels. For each 50- or 
150-foot increment of weld, as applicable, the test plates shall be 
prepared at the time of fabrication of the first vessel involving that 
increment.
    (d) The test plates and any other test material from which toughness 
test specimens are cut shall be given the same heat-treatment as the 
production material they represent. Test specimens representing other 
material than the weld toughness test plates shall preferably be cut 
from a part of the

[[Page 152]]

vessel material but may be cut from like material that has been heat-
treated within the temperature range specified by the producer in 
treating the actual vessel material.
    (e) For nonpressure vessel type tanks and associated secondary 
barriers, as defined in Sec. 38.05-4, subchapter D (Tank Vessels) of 
this chapter, production toughness test plates shall be prepared in 
accordance with paragraphs (a) and (d) of this section. One set of 
toughness test plates shall be prepared for each 165 feet (50 meters) of 
production butt type welds.



Sec. 54.05-17  Weld toughness test acceptance criteria.

    (a) For Charpy V-notch impact tests the energy absorbed in both the 
weld metal and heat affected zone impact tests in weld qualification and 
production shall be:
    (1) For weld metal specimens, not less than the transverse values 
required for the parent material.
    (2) For heat affected zone specimens, when the specimens are 
transversely oriented, not less than the transverse values required for 
the parent material.
    (3) For heat affected zone specimens, when the specimens are 
longitudinally oriented, not less than 1.5 times the transverse values 
required for the parent material.
    (b) For drop-weight tests both specimens from each required set 
shall exhibit a no-break performance.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-254, 40 FR 
40164, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 54.05-20  Impact test properties for service of 0 [deg]F and below.

    (a) Test energy. The impact energies of each set of transverse 
Charpy specimens may not be less than the values shown in Table 54.05-
20(a). Only one specimen in a set may be below the required average and 
the value of that specimen must be above the minimum impact value 
permitted on one specimen only. See Sec. 54.05-5(c) for retest 
requirements.

          Table 54.05-20(a)--Charpy v-notch impact requirements
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                      Minimum impact
                                      value required     Minimum impact
                                      for average of    value permitted
         Size of specimen             each set of 3     on one specimen
                                     specimens foot-     only of a set,
                                        pounds \1\        foot-pounds
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 x 10 mm........................               20.0               13.5
10 x 7.5 mm.......................               16.5               11.0
10 x 5 mm.........................               13.5                9.0
10 x 2.5 mm.......................               10.0               6.5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Straight line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.

    (b) Transversely oriented Charpy V-notch impact specimens of ASTM A 
203 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 54.01-1) nickel steels must 
exhibit energies not less than the values shown in Sec. 54.05-20 (a). 
Requirements for 9 percent nickel steels are contained in Sec. 54.25-
20. Other nickel alloy steels, when specially approved by the 
Commandant, must exhibit a no-break performance when tested in 
accordance with the drop weight procedure. If, for such materials, there 
are data indicating suitable correlation with drop-weight tests, Charpy 
V-notch tests may be specially considered by the Commandant in lieu of 
drop-weight tests. If the drop-weight test cannot be performed because 
of material thickness limitations (less than one-half inch), or product 
shape, or is otherwise inapplicable (because of heat treatment, 
chemistry etc.) other tests or test criteria will be specified by the 
Commandant.
    (c) Where sufficient data are available to warrant such waiver, the 
Commandant may waive the requirements for toughness testing austenitic 
stainless steel materials. Where required, austenitic stainless steels 
are to be tested using the drop-weight procedure and must exhibit a no-
break performance. Where data are available indicating suitable 
correlation of Charpy V-notch results with drop-weight NDT or no-break 
performance, Charpy V-notch tests may be specially considered by the 
Commandant in lieu of dropweight tests. If the dropweight test cannot be 
performed because of material thickness limitations (less than one-half 
inch), or product shape, or is otherwise inapplicable (because of heat 
treatment, chemistry, etc.) other

[[Page 153]]

tests and/or test criteria will be specified by the Commandant.

[CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40164, Sept. 2, 1975, as amended by USCG-2000-7790, 
65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 54.05-25  [Reserved]



Sec. 54.05-30  Allowable stress values at low temperatures.

    (a) The Coast Guard will give consideration to the enhanced yield 
and tensile strength properties of ferrous and nonferrous materials at 
low temperature for the purpose of establishing allowable stress values 
for service temperature below 0 [deg]F.
    (b) The use of such allowable stress values must be specially 
approved by the Coast Guard for each application. Further information 
may be obtained by writing to the Coast Guard (G-MSE).
    (c) Submittals must include information and calculations specified 
by the Coast Guard (G-MSE) to demonstrate that the allowable stress for 
the material cannot be exceeded under any possible combination of vessel 
loads and metal temperature.

[CGD 73-133R, 39 FR 9179, Mar. 8, 1974, as amended by CGD 82-063b, 48 FR 
4781, Feb. 3, 1983; CGD 95-072, 60 FR 50462, Sept. 29, 1995; CGD 96-041, 
61 FR 50727, 50728, Sept. 27, 1996]



             Subpart 54.10_Inspection, Reports, and Stamping



Sec. 54.10-1  Scope (modifies UG-90 through UG-103 and UG-115 through UG-120).

    (a) The inspection, tests, stamping, and reports for pressure 
vessels shall be as required by paragraphs UG-90 through UG-103 and UG-
115 through UG-120 of the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this 
subpart.



Sec. 54.10-3  Marine inspectors (replaces UG-90 and UG-91, and modifies UG-92 through UG-103).

    (a) Only marine inspectors shall apply the Coast Guard Symbol. They 
will not apply any other code symbol to pressure vessels.
    (b) All pressure vessels not exempted under provisions of Sec. 
54.01-15 shall be inspected by a marine inspector referring to 
procedures outlined in UG-92 through UG-103 of the ASME Code and 
Sec. Sec. 50.30-10, 50.30-15, and 50.30-20 of this subchapter. The 
marine inspector will then stamp the vessel with the Coast Guard Symbol.
    (c) Pressure vessels described in Sec. 54.01-5(c)(3), except 
pressure vessels in systems regulated under Sec. 58.60 of this chapter, 
must be visually examined by a marine inspector prior to installation. 
The marine inspector also reviews the associated plans and 
manufacturers' data reports. If, upon inspection, the pressure vessel 
complies with the applicable requirements in Sec. 54.01-5, the marine 
inspector stamps the pressure vessel with the Coast Guard Symbol.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-147, 47 FR 
21810, May 20, 1982]



Sec. 54.10-5  Maximum allowable working pressure (reproduces UG-98).

    (a) The maximum allowable working pressure for a vessel is the 
maximum pressure permissible at the top of the vessel in its normal 
operating position at the operating temperature specified for that 
pressure. It is the least of the values found for maximum allowable 
working pressure for any of the essential parts of the vessel by the 
principles given in paragraph (b) of this section and adjusted for any 
difference in static head that may exist between the part considered and 
the top of the vessel. (See UA-60 (a) of the ASME Code.)
    (b) The maximum allowable working pressure for a vessel part is the 
maximum internal or external pressure, including the static head 
thereon, as determined by the rules and formulas in this Division (ASME 
Code), together with the effect of any combination of loadings listed in 
UG-22 of the ASME Code (see Sec. 54.01-30) which are likely to occur, 
for the designated coincident operating temperature, excluding any metal 
thickness specified as corrosion allowance. (See UG-25 of the ASME 
Code.)
    (c) Maximum allowable working pressure may be determined for more 
than one designated operating temperature, using for each temperature 
the applicable allowable stress value.

    Note: Table 54.10-5 gives pictorially the interrelation among the 
various pressure

[[Page 154]]

levels pertinent to this part of the regulations. It includes reference 
to section VIII of the ASME Code for definitions and explanations.

 Table 54.10-5--Pictorial Inter-Relation Among Various Pressure Levels With References to Specific Requirements
                                                       \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                       Pressures upon which
   Pressure differential, psi \2\       Test pressures \3\    Relief device pressure    relief device flow
                                                                     settings            capacity is based
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                     Burst proof test (UG-    ......................
                                      101(m) of ASME Code).
                                     Yield proof test (UG-    ......................
                                      101(j) of ASME Code).
                                     Standard hydrostatic     ......................
                                      test (UG-99 of ASME
                                      Code).
                                     .......................  ......................  Fire exposure, 120%
                                                                                       MAWP.
                                     Pneumatic test (UG-100   ......................
                                      of ASME Code).
                                     .......................  Rupture disk burst
                                                               (Sec. 54.15-13).
                                     .......................  ......................  Normal, 110% MAWP.....
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                     Maximum allowable        Maximum allowable       Maximum allowable
                                      working pressure         working pressure        working pressure
                                      (MAWP), UG-98 and UA-    (MAWP), UG-98 and UA-   (MAWP), UG-98 and UA-
                                      60(a) of ASME Code.      60(a) of ASME Code.     60(a) of ASME Code.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                     Design pressure, UG-21,  Design pressure, UG-21  Design pressure, UG-21
                                      and UA-60(b) of ASME     and UA-60(b) of ASME    and UA-60(b) of ASME
                                      Code.                    Code.                   Code.
                                     .......................  Safety or relief value
                                                               setting (UG-133 of
                                                               ASME Code).
                                     Operating pressure (UA-  Operating pressure (UA- Operating pressure (UA-
                                      60(f) of ASME Code).     60(f) of ASME Code).    60(f) of ASME Code).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For basic pressure definitions see Sec. 52.01-3(g) of this subchapter.
\2\ For pressure differentials above 3,000 pounds per square inch (p.s.i.), special requirements may apply.
\3\ For the basis for calculating test pressures, see UA-60(e) of the ASME Code.



Sec. 54.10-10  Standard hydrostatic test (modifies UG-99).

    (a) All pressure vessels shall satisfactorily pass the hydrostatic 
test prescribed by this section, except those pressure vessels noted 
under Sec. 54.10-15(a).
    (b) The hydrostatic test pressure shall be at least one and one-half 
times the maximum allowable working pressure stamped on the pressure 
vessel, multiplied by the ratio of the stress value ``S'' at the test 
temperature to the stress value ``S'' at the design temperature for the 
materials of which the pressure vessel is constructed. The values for 
``S'' shall be taken from Tables UCS 23, UNF 23, UHA 23, or UHT 23 of 
the ASME Code. The value of ``S'' at test temperature shall be that 
taken for the material of the tabulated value of temperature closest to 
the test temperature. The value of ``S'' at design temperature shall be 
as interpolated from the appropriate table. No ratio less than one shall 
be used. The stress resulting from the hydrostatic test shall not exceed 
90 percent of the yield stress of the material at the test temperature. 
External loadings which will exist in supporting structure during the 
hydrostatic test should be considered. The design shall consider the 
combined stress during hydrostatic testing due to pressure and the 
support reactions. This stress shall not exceed 90 percent of the yield 
stress of the material at the test temperature. In addition the adequacy 
of the supporting structure during hydrostatic testing should be 
considered in the design.
    (c) The hydrostatic test pressure shall be applied for a sufficient 
period of time to permit a thorough examination of all joints and 
connections. The test shall not be conducted until the vessel and liquid 
are at approximately the same temperature.
    (d) Defects detected during the hydrostatic test or subsequent 
examination shall be completely removed and then inspected. Provided the 
marine inspector gives his approval, they may then be repaired.
    (e) Vessels requiring stress relieving shall be stress relieved 
after any welding repairs have been made. (See UW-40 of the ASME Code.)

[[Page 155]]

    (f) After repairs have been made the vessel shall again be tested in 
the regular way, and if it passes the test, the marine inspector may 
accept it. If it does not pass the test, the marine inspector can order 
supplementary repairs, or, if in his judgment the vessel is not suitable 
for service, he may permanently reject it.



Sec. 54.10-15  Pneumatic test (modifies UG-100).

    (a) Pneumatic testing of welded pressure vessels shall be permitted 
only for those units which are so designed and/or supported that they 
cannot be safely filled with water, or for those units which cannot be 
dried and are to be used in a service where traces of the testing medium 
cannot be tolerated.
    (b) Proposals to pneumatically test shall be submitted to the 
cognizant Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, for approval.
    (c) Except for enameled vessels, for which the pneumatic test 
pressure shall be at least equal to, but need not exceed, the maximum 
allowable working pressure to be marked on the vessel, the pneumatic 
test pressure shall be at least equal to 1.25 times the maximum 
allowable working pressure to be stamped on the vessel multiplied by the 
lowest ratio (for the materials of which the vessel is constructed) of 
the stress value ``S'' for the test temperature of the vessel to the 
stress value ``S'' for the design temperature (see UG-21 of the ASME 
Code). In no case shall the pneumatic test pressure exceed 1.25 times 
the basis for calculated test pressure as defined in UA-60(e) of the 
ASME Code.
    (d) The pneumatic test of pressure vessels shall be accomplished as 
follows:
    (1) The pressure on the vessel shall be gradually increased to not 
more than half the test pressure.
    (2) The pressure will then be increased at steps of approximately 
one-tenth the test pressure until the test pressure has been reached.
    (3) The pressure will then be reduced to the maximum allowable 
working pressure of the vessel to permit examination.
    (e) Pressure vessels pneumatically tested shall also be leak tested. 
The test shall be capable of detecting leakage consistent with the 
design requirements of the pressure vessel. Details of the leak test 
shall be submitted to the Commandant for approval.
    (f) After satisfactory completion of the pneumatic pressure test, 
the vessel may be stamped in accordance with Sec. 54.10-20. A marine 
inspector shall observe the pressure vessel in a loaded condition at the 
first opportunity following the pneumatic test. The tank supports and 
saddles, connecting piping, and insulation if provided shall be examined 
to determine if they are satisfactory and that no leaks are evident.
    (g) The pneumatic test is inherently more hazardous than a 
hydrostatic test, and suitable precautions shall be taken to protect 
personnel and adjacent property.



Sec. 54.10-20  Marking and stamping.

    (a) Pressure vessels (replaces UG-116, except paragraph (k), and UG-
118). Pressure vessels that are required by Sec. 54.10-3 to be stamped 
with the Coast Guard Symbol must also be stamped with the following 
information:
    (1) Manufacturer's name and serial number.
    (2) Coast Guard number, see Sec. 50.10-30 of this subchapter.
    (3) Coast Guard Symbol, which is affixed only by the marine 
inspector.
    (4) Maximum allowable working pressure ---- kPa (---- psig) at ---- 
[deg]C (---- [deg]F).
    (5) Class.
    (6) Minimum service temperature allowed, if below -18 [deg]C (0 
[deg]F)
    (7) Water capacity in liters (U.S. gallons), if a cargo carrying 
pressure vessel.
    (b) Multichambered pressure vessels (replaces UG-116(k)). In cases 
where more than one pressure vessel is involved in an integral 
construction, as with a heat exchanger, the manufacturer may elect to 
class the component pressure vessels differently. In such cases he shall 
stamp the combined structures as required in paragraph (a) of this 
section with information for each pressure vessel. Where an item for 
stamping is identical for both vessels, as with name and address of 
manufacturer, it need not be duplicated. However, where differences 
exist, each

[[Page 156]]

value and the vessel to which it applies shall be clearly indicated.
    (c) Stamping data (replaces UG-117). Except as noted in paragraph 
(d) of this section, the data shall be stamped directly on the pressure 
vessel. The data shall be legibly stamped and shall not be obliterated 
during the service life of the pressure vessel. In the event that the 
portion of the pressure vessel upon which the data is stamped is to be 
insulated or otherwise covered, the data shall be reproduced on a metal 
nameplate. This plate shall be securely attached to the pressure vessel. 
The nameplate shall be maintained in a legible condition such that it 
may be easily read.
    (1) Those parts of pressure vessels requiring Coast Guard shop 
inspection under this part which are furnished by other than the shop of 
the manufacturer responsible for the completed vessel shall be stamped 
with the Coast Guard Symbol, the Marine Inspection Office identification 
letters (see Sec. 50.10-30 of this subchapter) and the word ``Part'', 
the manufacturer's name and serial number, and the design pressure.
    (d) Thin walled vessels (Modifies UG-119). In lieu of direct 
stamping on the pressure vessel, the information required by paragraph 
(a) of this section shall be stamped on a nameplate permanently attached 
to the pressure vessel when the pressure vessel is constructed of--
    (1) Steel plate less than one-fourth inch thick; or
    (2) Nonferrous plate less than one-half inch thick.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9977, June 17, 1970; CGD 72-206R, 38 FR 17226, June 29, 1973; CGD 77-
147, 47 FR 21810, May 20, 1982]



Sec. 54.10-25  Manufacturers' data report forms (modifies UG-120).

    (a) The Manufacturers' data report form, as provided by the Coast 
Guard, shall be completed in duplicate and certified by the manufacturer 
for each pressure vessel required to be shop inspected under these 
regulations. The original of this form shall be delivered to the Coast 
Guard inspector.
    (b) Data forms for those parts of a pressure vessel requiring 
inspection, which are furnished by other than the shop of the 
manufacturer responsible for the completed unit, shall be executed in 
triplicate by the manufacturer of the parts. The original and one copy 
shall be delivered to the Coast Guard inspector who shall forward one 
copy of the report to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, having 
cognizance over the final assembly. These partial data reports, together 
with the final inspection and tests, shall be the final Coast Guard 
inspector's authority to apply the Coast Guard symbol and number. A 
final data report shall be executed by the manufacturer or assembler who 
completes the final assembly and tests.
    (c) If a pressure vessel is required to be inspected in accordance 
with Sec. 54.10-3(c), the manufacturer's data reports required by UG-
120 must be made available to the Coast Guard inspector for review prior 
to inspection of the pressure vessel.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
2130-0181)

[CGFR 69-127, 35 FR 9977, June 17, 1970 as amended by CGD 77-147, 47 FR 
21810, May 20, 1982]



                  Subpart 54.15_Pressure-Relief Devices



Sec. 54.15-1  General (modifies UG-125 through UG-136).

    (a) All pressure vessels built in accordance with applicable 
requirements in Division 1 of section VIII of the ASME Code must be 
provided with protective devices as indicated in UG-125 through UG-136 
except as noted otherwise in this subpart.
    (b) The markings shall be in accordance with this chapter for 
devices covered by Sec. 54.15-10.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 88-032, 56 FR 
35822, July 29, 1991]



Sec. 54.15-3  Definitions (modifies UA-60).

    (a) Definitions applicable to this subpart are in Sec. 52.01-3 of 
this subchapter.



Sec. 54.15-5  Protective devices (modifies UG-125).

    (a) All pressure vessels must be provided with protective devices. 
The protective devices must be in accordance with the requirements of 
UG-125

[[Page 157]]

through UG-136 of the ASME Code except as modified in this subpart.
    (b) An unfired steam boiler evaporator or heat exchanger (see Sec. 
54.01-10) shall be equipped with protective devices as required by Sec. 
54.15-15.
    (c) All pressure vessels other than unfired steam boilers shall be 
protected by pressure-relieving devices that will prevent the pressure 
from rising more than 10 percent above the maximum allowable working 
pressure, except when the excess pressure is caused by exposure to fire 
or other unexpected source of heat.
    (d) Where an additional hazard can be created by exposure of a 
pressure vessel to fire or other unexpected sources of external heat 
(for example, vessels used to store liquefied flammable gases), 
supplemental pressure-relieving devices shall be installed to protect 
against excessive pressure. Such supplemental pressure-relieving devices 
shall be capable of preventing the pressure from rising more than 20 
percent above the maximum allowable working pressure of the vessel. The 
minimum required relief capacities for compressed gas pressure vessels 
are given under Sec. 54.15-25. A single pressure-relieving device may 
be used to satisfy the requirements of this paragraph and paragraph (c) 
of this section, provided it meets the requirements of both paragraphs.
    (e) Pressure-relieving devices should be selected on the basis of 
their intended service. They shall be constructed, located, and 
installed so that they are readily accessible for inspection and repair 
and so arranged that they cannot be readily rendered inoperative.
    (f) Where pressure-indicating gages are used, they shall be chosen 
to be compatible with the pressure to be indicated. The size of the 
visual display, the fineness of graduations, and the orientation of the 
display will be considered. In no case shall the upper range of the gage 
be less than 1.2 times nor more than 2 times the pressure at which the 
relieving device is set to function.
    (g) The Commandant may authorize or require the use of a rupture 
disk in lieu of a relief or safety valve under certain conditions of 
pressure vessel use and design. See Sec. 54.15-13.
    (h) Vessels that are to operate completely filled with liquid shall 
be equipped with liquid relief valves unless otherwise protected against 
overpressure.
    (i) The protective devices required under paragraph (a) of this 
section shall be installed directly on a pressure vessel except when the 
source of pressure is external to the vessel, and is under such positive 
control that the pressure in the vessel cannot exceed the maximum 
allowable working pressure at the operating temperature except as 
permitted in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
    (j) Pressure-relieving devices shall be constructed of materials 
suitable for the pressure, temperature, and other conditions of the 
service intended.
    (k) The opening through all pipes and fittings between a pressure 
vessel and its pressure-relieving device shall have at least the area of 
the pressure-relieving device inlet, and in all cases shall have 
sufficient area so as not to unduly restrict the flow to the pressure-
relieving device. The opening in the vessel shall be designed to provide 
direct and unobstructed flow between the vessel and its pressure-
relieving device.
    (l) Safety devices need not be provided by the pressure vessel 
manufacturer. However, overpressure protection shall be provided prior 
to placing the vessel in service.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 88-032, 56 FR 
35822, July 29, 1991; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48049, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 54.15-10  Safety and relief valves (modifies UG-126).

    (a) All safety and relief valves for use on pressure vessels or 
piping systems shall be designed to meet the protection and service 
requirements for which they are intended and shall be set to relieve at 
a pressure which does not exceed the ``maximum allowable working 
pressure'' of the pressure vessel or piping system. Relief valves are 
not required to have huddling chambers for other than steam service. In 
addition, safety valves used on vessels in which steam is generated 
shall meet Sec. 52.01-120 of this subchapter except Sec. 52.01-
120(a)(9). For steam service

[[Page 158]]

below 206 kPa (30 psig), bodies of safety valves may be made of cast 
iron. Safety relief valves used in liquefied compressed gas service 
shall meet subpart 162.017 or 162.018 in subchapter Q (Specifications) 
of this chapter as appropriate.
    (b) Pilot-valve control or other indirect operation of safety valves 
is not permitted unless the design is such that the main unloading valve 
will open automatically at not over the set pressure and will discharge 
its full rated capacity if some essential part of the pilot or auxiliary 
device should fail. All other safety and relief valves shall be of the 
direct spring loaded type.
    (c) Safety and relief valves for steam or air service shall be 
provided with a substantial lifting device so that the disk can be 
lifted from its seat when the pressure in the vessel is 75 percent of 
that at which the valve is set to blow.
    (d) Safety and relief valves for service other than steam and air 
need not be provided with a lifting device although a lifting device is 
desirable if the vapors are such that their release will not create a 
hazard.
    (e) If the design of a safety or relief valve is such that liquid 
can collect on the discharge side of the disk, the valve shall be 
equipped with a drain at the lowest point where liquid can collect (for 
installation, see UG-134 of section VIII of the ASME Code).
    (f) Cast iron may be employed in the construction of relief valves 
for pressures not exceeding 125 pounds per square inch and temperatures 
not exceeding 450 [deg]F. Seats or disks of cast iron are prohibited.
    (g) The spring in a relief valve in service for pressures up to and 
including 250 pounds per square inch shall not be reset for any pressure 
more than 10 percent above or 10 percent below that for which the relief 
valve is marked. For higher pressures, the spring shall not be reset for 
any pressure more than 5 percent above or 5 percent below that for which 
the relief valve is marked.
    (h) The rated relieving capacity of safety and relief valves for use 
on pressure vessels shall be based on actual flow test data and the 
capacity shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with one 
of the following:
    (1) 120 percent of the valve set pressure for valves rated in 
accordance with Compressed Gas Association Standard S-1.2.5.2.
    (2) 110 percent of the valve set pressure for valves rated in 
accordance with UG-131 of section VIII of the ASME Code.
    (3) 103 percent of the valve set pressure for steam in accordance 
with PG-69 of the ASME Code.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 81-79, 50 FR 
9436, Mar. 8, 1985]



Sec. 54.15-13  Rupture disks (modifies UG-127).

    (a) Paragraph UG-127 of the ASME Code provides for the use of 
rupture disks in series with spring loaded safety or relief valves.
    (b) For certain pressure vessels containing substances which may 
render a relief or safety valve inoperative, or where the installation 
of a valve is considered impractical, the Commandant may authorize or 
require the use of a rupture disk in parallel with or in lieu of a 
spring loaded safety or relief valve. These rupture disks shall:
    (1) Comply with the general provisions of Sec. 54.15-5 except as 
noted otherwise in this section;
    (2) Have a capacity for discharge such that the volume of release is 
sufficient to prevent the internal pressure from exceeding 120 percent 
of the ``maximum allowable working pressure'' with the pressure vessel 
exposed to fire conditions (see Sec. 54.15-25); and,
    (3) Operate at a pressure level which does not produce fatigue 
failure of the disk. The normal maximum operating pressure multiplied by 
1.3 shall not exceed the nominal disk burst pressure. (Notice that this 
restriction for protection of the rupture disk will usually require 
operation below the ``maximum allowable working pressure'' of the 
pressure vessel and therefore should be considered in design.)
    (c) All disks shall be oriented so that if rupture occurs, the disk 
fragments and pressure vessel discharge will be directed away from 
operating personnel and vital machinery.

[[Page 159]]



Sec. 54.15-15  Relief devices for unfired steam boilers, evaporators,
and heat exchangers (modifies UG-126).

    (a) An approved safety valve set to relieve at a pressure not 
exceeding the ``maximum allowable working pressure'' of the shell shall 
be fitted to all unfired steam boilers and evaporators except for 
evaporators of the atmospheric type designed for vapor discharge direct 
to a distiller with no shutoff valve in the discharge line. The 
distiller connected to atmospheric evaporators shall be fitted with a 
vent to prevent a buildup in pressure. In no case shall the vent be less 
than 1\1/2\ inches in diameter. Evaporators operating between 
atmospheric pressure and 15 p.s.i.g., may use a rupture disc as an 
alternative to the safety valve.
    (b) Safety valves for use on pressure vessels in which steam or 
pressure is generated shall comply with the requirements of Sec. 54.15-
10. Rupture discs used in lieu of these safety valves, as provided for 
in paragraph (a) of this section, shall comply with the requirements of 
Sec. 54.15-13.
    (c) The relieving capacity of evaporator safety valves required by 
paragraph (a) of this section shall be at least equal to the capacity of 
the orifice fitted in the steam supply to the evaporator. The orifice 
capacity shall be determined in accordance with the formula in paragraph 
(c) (1) or (2) of this section as appropriate:
    (1) Where the set pressure of the evaporator shell safety valve is 
58 percent or less than the setting of the safety valve in the steam 
supply:
W=51.45AP
    (2) Where the set pressure of the evaporator shell safety valve 
exceeds 58 percent of the setting of the safety valve on the steam 
supply:

W=105.3A[radic] P1(P-P1)

where:

W=The required orifice capacity, in pounds per hour.
A=Cross-sectional area of rounded entrance orifice, in square inches. 
The orifice shall be installed near the steam inlet or the coils or 
tubes and where no orifice is employed the area used in the formula 
shall be that of the inlet connection or manifold.
P=Set pressure of steam supply safety valve, in pounds per square inch, 
absolute.
P1=Set pressure of evaporator shell safety valve, in pounds 
per square inch, absolute.

    (d) The relieving capacity of safety valves on unfired steam boilers 
shall not be less than the maximum generating capacity of the unfired 
steam boiler as certified by the manufacturer.
    (e) On new installations and where the orifice size of an existing 
unfired steam boiler or evaporator is increased, an accumulation test 
shall be made by closing all steam outlet connections except the safety 
valves for a period of five minutes. When conducting the accumulation 
test, the water shall be at the normal operating level and the steam 
pressure shall be at the normal operating pressure, and while under this 
test the pressure shall not rise more than 6 percent above the safety 
valve setting.
    (f) A heat exchanger with liquid in the shell and the heating medium 
in the tubes or coils, shall be fitted with a liquid relief valve 
meeting the requirement of Sec. 54.15-5.
    (g)(1) A heat exchanger with steam in the shell and liquid in the 
tubes or coils at a pressure exceeding that in the shell, shall have a 
liquid relief valve fitted to protect the shell against excess pressure.
    (2) The discharge capacity of such relief valves shall be calculated 
on the basis of the discharge from one tube using the difference in 
pressures between that in the shell and that in the tubes and shall be 
not less than that determined by the following formula:

Q=29.81KD 2[radic] P1-P2

where:

Q=Required relief valve discharge capacity, in gallons per minute, based 
on relief valve set pressure.
P1=Pressure in the tube or coils, in pounds per square inch.
P2=Set pressure of the shell relief valve, in pounds per 
square inch.
D=Internal diameter of the largest tube or coil, in inches.
K=Coefficient of discharge=0.62.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 72-206R, 38 
FR 17226, June 29, 1973]

[[Page 160]]



Sec. 54.15-25  Minimum relief capacities for cargo tanks containing 
compressed or liquefied gas.

    (a) Each tank shall be fitted with one or more safety relief valves 
designed, constructed, and flow tested in accordance with subpart 
162.017 or 162.018 in subchapter Q (Specifications) of this chapter. 
Valves conforming to specification subpart 162.017 shall be limited to 
use on tanks whose maximum allowable working pressure is not in excess 
of 10 pounds per square inch. With specific approval of the Commandant, 
such valves may be connected to the vessel in lieu of being directly 
fitted to the tanks.
    (b) The discharge pressure and the maximum overpressure permitted 
shall be in accordance with Sec. 54.15-5.
    (c) The rate of discharge for heat input of fire must meet the 
following formula:

Q=FGA\0.82\

where:

Q=minimum required rate of discharge in cubic meters (cubic feet) per 
minute of air at standard conditions 15 [deg]C and 103 kPa (60 [deg]F 
and 14.7 psia).
F=fire exposure factor for the following tank types:
F=1.0 for tanks without insulation located on the open deck.
F=0.5 for tanks on the open deck having insulation that has approved 
fire proofing, thermal conductance, and stability under fire exposure.
F=0.5 for uninsulated independent tasks installed in holds.
F=0.2 for insulated independent tanks in holds or for uninsulated 
independent tanks in insulated holds.
F=0.1 for insulated independent tanks in inerted holds or for 
uninsulated independent tanks in inerted, insulated holds.
F=0.1 for membrane and semi-membrane tanks.
G=gas factor of:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE07.045

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE07.044

where:
L=latent heat of the material being vaporized at the relieving 
conditions, in Kcal/kg (Btu per pound).
C=constant based on relation of specific heats (k), Table Sec. 54.15-
25(c) (if k is not known, C=.606(315)).
Z=compressibility factor of the gas at the relieving conditions (if not 
known, Z=1.0).
T=temperature in degrees K=(273 + degrees C) (R=(460 + degrees F)) at 
the relieving conditions (120% of the pressure at which the pressure 
relief valve is set).
M=molecular weight of the product.
A=external surface area of the tank in m\2\ (sq. ft.) for the following 
tank types:
    For a tank of a body of revolution shape:
    A=external surface area.
    For a tank other than a body of revolution shape:
    A=external surface area less the projected bottom surface area.
    For a grouping of pressure vessel tanks having insulation on the 
vessel's structure:
    A=external surface area of the hold without the projected bottom 
area.
    For a grouping of pressure tanks having insulation on the tank:
    A=external surface area of the pressure tanks excluding insulation, 
and without the projected bottom area. \1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Figure 54.15-25(c) shows a method of determining the side 
external surface area of a grouping of vertical pressure tanks.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 161]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.022


                      Table 54.15-25(c)--Constant C
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       k                             C
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.00..........................................         .606        (315)
1.02..........................................         .611        (318)
1.04..........................................         .615        (320)
1.06..........................................         .620        (322)
1.08..........................................         .624        (324)
1.10..........................................         .628        (327)
1.12..........................................         .633        (329)
1.14..........................................         .637        (331)
1.16..........................................         .641        (333)
1.18..........................................         .645        (335)
1.20..........................................         .649        (337)
1.22..........................................         .652        (339)
1.24..........................................         .658        (341)
1.26..........................................         .660        (343)
1.28..........................................         .664        (345)
1.30..........................................         .667        (347)
1.32..........................................         .671        (349)
1.34..........................................         .674        (351)
1.36..........................................         .677        (352)
1.38..........................................         .681        (354)
1.40..........................................         .685        (356)
1.42..........................................         .688        (358)
1.44..........................................         .691        (359)
1.46..........................................         .695        (361)
1.48..........................................         .698        (363)
1.50..........................................         .701        (364)
1.52..........................................         .704        (366)
1.54..........................................         .707        (368)
1.56..........................................         .710        (369)
1.58..........................................         .713        (371)
1.60..........................................         .716        (372)
1.62..........................................         .719        (374)
1.64..........................................         .722        (376)
1.66..........................................         .725        (377)
1.68..........................................         .728        (379)
1.70..........................................         .731        (380)
1.72..........................................         .734        (382)
1.74..........................................         .736        (383)
1.76..........................................         .739        (384)
1.78..........................................         .742        (386)
1.80..........................................         .745        (387)
1.82..........................................         .747        (388)
1.84..........................................         .750        (390)
1.86..........................................         .752        (391)
1.88..........................................         .755        (392)
1.90..........................................         .758        (394)
1.92..........................................         .760        (395)
1.94..........................................         .763        (397)
1.96..........................................         .765        (398)
1.98..........................................         .767        (399)
2.00..........................................         .770        (400)
2.02..........................................         .772        (401)
2.20..........................................         .792        (412)
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c-1) For an independent tank that has a portion of the tank 
protruding above the open deck, the fire exposure factor must be 
calculated for the surface area above the deck and the surface area 
below the deck, and this calculation must be specially approved by the 
Commandant (G-MSE).
    (d) In determining the total safety valve relieving capacity, the 
arrangement and location of the valves on the tank will be evaluated. 
The valves shall be placed so that a number of valves sufficient to 
provide the required relieving capacity shall always be in communication 
with the cargo vapor phase. The possible motions which the tank may see 
in its intended service and attendant changes in cargo liquid level will 
be considered. Shut off valves shall not be installed between

[[Page 162]]

the vessel and the safety relief valves. Manifolds for mounting multiple 
relief valves may be fitted with acceptable interlocking shut off valves 
so arranged that the required capacity of discharge will be ``lined up'' 
at all times.
    (e)(1) Each safety relief valve shall be tested in the presence of a 
marine inspector before being placed in service except as noted 
otherwise in paragraph (e)(2) of this section. The test shall 
satisfactorily show that the valve will start to discharge at the 
required minimum pressure.
    (2) Each safety relief valve fitted with a breaking pin and rupture 
disk need not be tested in the presence of a marine inspector before 
being placed in service. In lieu thereof, a certificate shall be 
furnished with the valve attested to by the manufacturer that the test 
requirements of paragraph (e)(1) of this section have been met.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 74-289, 44 FR 
26007, May 3, 1979; CGD 82-063b, 48 FR 4781, Feb. 3, 1983; CGD 95-072, 
60 FR 50462, Sept. 29, 1995; CGD 96-041, 61 FR 50728, Sept. 27, 1996; 
USCG-2004-18884, 69 FR 58346, Sept. 30, 2004; USCG-2007-29018, 72 FR 
53965, Sept. 21, 2007]



                  Subpart 54.20_Fabrication by Welding



Sec. 54.20-1  Scope (modifies UW-1 through UW-65).

    (a) Pressure vessels and vessel parts that are fabricated by welding 
shall be as required by paragraphs UW-1 through UW-65 of section VIII of 
the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this subchapter.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 54.20-2  Fabrication for hazardous materials (replaces UW-2(a)).

    (a) Pressure vessels containing hazardous materials as defined in 
Sec. 150.115 of this chapter must be of the class and construction 
required by subchapter D, I, O, or, when not specified, of a class 
determined by the Commandant.
    (b) Class III pressure vessels must not be used for the storage or 
stowage of hazardous materials unless there is specific authorization in 
subchapters D, I, or O.

[CGD 77-147, 47 FR 21810, May 20, 1982]



Sec. 54.20-3  Design (modifies UW-9, UW-11(a), UW-13, and UW-16).

    (a) Fabrication by welding shall be in accordance with the 
provisions of this part and with part 57 of this subchapter.
    (b) Welding subject to UW-11(a) of the ASME Code shall be modified 
as described in Sec. 54.25-8 for radiographic examination.
    (c) A butt welded joint with one plate edge offset, as shown in 
Figure UW-13.1(k) of the ASME Code, may only be used for circumferential 
joints of Class II and Class III pressure vessels.
    (d) Attachment welds for nozzles and other connections shall be in 
accordance with UW-16 of the ASME Code. When nozzles or connections are 
made to pressure vessels, as shown in Figure UW-16.1 (a) and (c) of the 
ASME Code, and are welded from one side only, backing strips shall be 
used unless it can be determined visually that a full penetration weld 
has been achieved.
    (e) When fabricating by welding the minimum joint requirements shall 
be as specified under the column headed ``minimum joint requirements'' 
in Table 54.01-5(b) for various classes of pressure vessels.
    (f) Joints in Class II or III pressure vessel cargo tanks must meet 
the following:
    (1) Category A and B joints must be type (1) or (2).
    (2) Category C and D joints must have full penetration welds 
extending through the entire thickness of the vessel wall or nozzle 
wall.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-147, 47 FR 
21810, May 20, 1982; CGD 85-061, 54 FR 50964, Dec. 11, 1989]



Sec. 54.20-5  Welding qualification tests and production testing 
(modifies UW-26, UW-28, UW-29, UW-47, and UW-48).

    (a) Performance and procedure qualification. No production welding 
shall be done until welding procedures and welders have been qualified 
in accordance with part 57 of this subchapter.
    (b) Tests. Production tests are required in accordance with Sec. 
57.06-1 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9977, June 17, 1970]

[[Page 163]]



                  Subpart 54.23_Fabrication by Brazing



Sec. 54.23-1  Scope (modifies UB-1).

    (a) Fabrication by brazing shall be in accordance with the 
provisions of this part and with part 57 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 69-127, 35 FR 9977, June 17, 1970]



 Subpart 54.25_Construction With Carbon, Alloy, and Heat Treated Steels



Sec. 54.25-1  Scope.

    (a) The carbon, alloy, and heat treated steels used in construction 
of pressure vessels and parts shall be as indicated in section VIII of 
the ASME Code except as noted otherwise in this subpart.



Sec. 54.25-3  Steel plates (modifies UCS-6).

    (a) The steels listed in UCS-6(b) and UCS-6(c) of the ASME Code will 
be allowed only in Class III pressure vessels (see Table 54.01-5(b)).



Sec. 54.25-5  Corrosion allowance (replaces UCS-25).

    (a) The corrosion allowance shall be as required in Sec. 54.01-35 
in lieu of requirements in UCS-25 of the ASME Code.



Sec. 54.25-7  Requirement for postweld heat treatment (modifies UCS-56).

    (a) Postweld heat treatment is required for all carbon and low alloy 
steel Class I, I-L, and II-L vessels regardless of thickness. (Refer to 
Table 54.01-5(b) for applicable requirements.)
    (b) Cargo tanks which are fabricated of carbon or low alloy steel as 
Class II pressure vessels, designed for pressures exceeding 100 pounds 
per square inch gage and used in the storage or transportation of 
liquefied compressed gases shall be postweld heat treated regardless of 
thickness.

[CGFR 69-127, 35 FR 9977, June 17, 1970]



Sec. 54.25-8  Radiography (modifies UW-11(a), UCS-57, UNF-57, UHA-33, and UHT-57).

    (a) Full radiography is required for all Class I and Class I-L 
vessels regardless of thickness. (Refer to Table 54.01-5(b) for 
applicable requirements.)
    (b) Class II-L vessels shall be spot radiographed. The exemption 
provided in UW-11(c) of the ASME Code does not apply. (Refer to Table 
54.01-5(b) for applicable requirements.)
    (c) Each butt welded joint in a Class II or III pressure vessel 
cargo tank must be spot radiographed, in accordance with UW-52, 
regardless of diameter or thickness, and each weld intersection or 
crossing must be radiographed for a distance of at least 10 thicknesses 
from the intersection.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 85-061, 54 FR 
50964, Dec. 11, 1989]



Sec. 54.25-10  Low temperature operation--ferritic steels (replaces UCS-65 through UCS-67).

    (a) Scope. (1) This section contains requirements for pressure 
vessels and nonpressure vessel type tanks and associated secondary 
barrier, as defined in Sec. 38.05-4 and Sec. 154.7 of this chapter, 
and their parts constructed of carbon and alloy steels which are 
stressed at operating or hydrostatic test temperatures below 0 [deg]F.
    (2) The service temperature is the minimum temperature of a product 
at which it may be contained, loaded and/or transported. However, the 
service temperature shall in no case be taken higher than given by the 
following formula:

ts=tw-0.25(tw-tB)

where:

ts=Service temperature.
tw=Boiling temperature of gas at normal working pressure of 
container but not higher than +32 [deg]F.
tB=Boiling temperature of gas at atmospheric pressure.


Only temperatures due to refrigerated service usually need to be 
considered in determining the service temperature, except pressure 
vessel type cargo tanks operating at ambient temperatures must meet 
paragraph (d) of this section. ``Refrigerated service'', as used in this 
paragraph, means a service in which the temperature is controlled by the 
process and not by atmospheric conditions.

[[Page 164]]

    (b) Specifications. Materials used in the construction of vessels to 
operate below 0 [deg]F. (but not below the designated minimum service 
temperature) shall conform to a specification given in Table UCS-23 in 
the ASME Code and the following additional requirements:

    Note: For high alloy steels refer to Sec. 54.25-15. For heat 
treated steels refer to Sec. 54.25-20.

    (1)(i) For minimum service temperatures not lower than -67 [deg]F., 
ferritic steels shall be made with fine grain practice and shall have an 
austenitic grain size of 5 or finer, and shall be normalized. 
Consideration will be given to other heat treatments. Refer to Sec. 
57.03-1(d) of this subchapter. Plate for pressure vessel applications 
shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 20 (incorporated by 
reference, see Sec. 54.01-1). It may be produced by the open hearth, 
basic oxygen or electric furnace process and shall conform to the 
requirements of Table 54.25-10(b)(1). (Other alloying elements may only 
be present in trace amounts.)
    (ii) Mechanical properties shall be within the following limits:

Ultimate strength........................  --58,000 \1\-85,000 \1\
                                            p.s.i.
Yield strength...........................  --Minimum 35,000 p.s.i.
                                           --Maximum 80 percent of
                                            ultimate.
Elongation minimum.......................  --20 percent in 8 inches, or
                                           --24 percent in 2 inches, or
                                           --22 percent in 5.65
                                            [radic]A, where ``A'' is the
                                            test specimen cross
                                            sectional area.
 


                          Table 54.25-10(b)(1)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Manganese
    Minimum service \1\ temperature [deg]F       Max. C \1\   range \1\
                                                  percent      percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-30...........................................         0.20    0.70-1.35
-50...........................................          .16    1.15-1.50
-67...........................................          .12   1.30-1.60
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ At service temperatures intermediate between those specified,
  intermediate amounts of carbon and manganese will be allowed (in
  proportion to the actual service temperature variation from that
  listed), provided all other chemical and mechanical properties
  specified for steels in this temperature range are satisfied.


 
                                                                 Range
                                                                percent
 
Si..........................................................   0.10-0.50
 
                                                                 Maximum
 
S...........................................................       0.035
P...........................................................       0.035
Ni..........................................................        0.80
Cr..........................................................        0.25
Mo..........................................................        0.08
Cu..........................................................       0.035
Nb..........................................................        0.05
V...........................................................        0.08
 

    (2) For minimum service temperature below -67 [deg]F., but not below 
the designated minimum service temperature, ferritic steels shall be 
normalized, low carbon, fully killed, fine grain, nickel alloy type, 
conforming to any one of the specifications in Table 54.25-10(b)(2). 
Consideration will be given to other heat treatments. Refer to Sec. 
57.03-1(d) of this subchapter for quenched and tempered steels. The 
ultimate and yield strengths shall be as shown in the applicable 
specification and shall be suitable to the design stress levels adopted. 
The service temperature shall not be colder than the minimum specified 
in Table 54.25-10(b)(2) for each steel.

                          Table 54.25-10(b)(2)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Steel                     Minimum service temperature
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A-203, 2\1/4\ percent, Ni, normalized....  -80 [deg]F. for Grade A.
                                           -75 [deg]F. for Grade B.
A-203, 3\1/2\ percent, Ni, normalized....  -130 [deg]F. for Grade D.
                                           -110 [deg]F. for Grade E.
5 percent Ni, normalized.................  Dependent on chemical and
                                            physical properties.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) The materials permitted under paragraphs (b) (1) and (2) of this 
section shall be tested for toughness in accordance with and shall 
satisfy the applicable requirements of subpart 54.05.
    (4) Welded pressure vessels or nonpressure vessel type tanks and 
associated secondary barriers, as defined in Sec. 38.05-4 of subchapter 
D (Tank Vessels) of this chapter shall meet the toughness requirements 
of subparts 57.03 and 57.06 of this subchapter with regard to weld 
procedure qualifications and production testing.
    (5) The material manufacturer's identification marking required by 
the material specification shall not be die-stamped on plate material 
less than one-fourth inch in thickness.
    (c) Design. Pressure vessels must meet the requirements for Class I-
L and II-L construction. (See Table 54.01-5(b) for applicable 
requirements). Except as permitted by Sec. 54.05-30, the allowable 
stress values used in the design of low temperature pressure vessels may 
not exceed those given in Table UCS-23 of the ASME Code for temperatures 
of 0 [deg]F. to 650 [deg]F. For materials not listed in this Table 
allowable stress values are determined in accordance

[[Page 165]]

with Appendix P of Section VIII of the ASME Code.
    (d) Weldments and all materials used in pressure vessel type cargo 
tanks operating at ambient temperatures and constructed of materials 
listed in Table UCS-23 must pass Charpy impact tests in accordance with 
UG-84 at a temperature of -20 [deg]F or colder, except as provided by 
paragraphs (d)(1), (d)(2), and (d)(3) of this section.
    (1) Charpy impact tests are not required for any of the following 
ASTM materials if the thickness for each is \5/8\ inch or less, unless 
otherwise indicated:
    (i) A-182, normalized and tempered.
    (ii) A-302, Grades C and D.
    (iii) A-336, Grades F21 and F22 that are normalized and tempered.
    (iv) A-387, Grades 21 and 22 that are normalized and tempered.
    (v) A-516, Grades 55 and 60.
    (vi) A-533, Grades B and C.
    (vii) All other plates, structural shapes and bars, and other 
product forms, except for bolting, if produced to a fine grain practice 
and normalized.
    (2) Charpy impact tests are not required for any of the following 
ASTM materials if the thickness for each is 1\1/4\ inch or less:
    (i) A-203.
    (ii) A-508, Class 1.
    (iii) A-516, normalized.
    (iv) A-524.
    (v) A-537.
    (vi) A-612, normalized.
    (vii) A-662, normalized.
    (viii) A-724, normalized.
    (3) Charpy impact tests are not required for any of the following 
bolt materials:
    (i) A-193, Grades B5, B7, B7M, and B16.
    (ii) A-307, Grade B
    (iii) A-325, Type 1.
    (iv) A-449.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9977, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-133R, 39 FR 9178, Mar. 8, 1974; CGD 74-
289, 44 FR 26007, May 3, 1979; CGD 77-069, 52 FR 31626, Aug. 21, 1987; 
CGD 85-061, 54 FR 50964, Dec. 11, 1989; USCG-1999-5151, 64 FR 67178, 
Dec. 1, 1999; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 54.25-15  Low temperature operation--high alloy steels (modifies UHA-23(b) and UHA-51).

    (a) Toughness tests for the materials listed in UHA-51(a) of the 
ASME Code for service temperatures below -425 [deg]F., UHA-51(b)(1) 
through (5) for service temperatures below 0 [deg]F., and UHA-51(c) for 
all service temperatures, shall be performed in accordance with the 
requirements of subpart 54.05. These requirements are also applicable to 
nonpressure vessel type, low temperature tanks and associated secondary 
barriers, as defined in Sec. 38.05-4 in subchapter D (Tank Vessels) of 
this chapter. Such tests are required regardless of the vessel's design 
stress. Service temperature is defined in Sec. 54.25-10(a)(2).
    (b) Materials for pressure vessels with service temperatures below -
320 [deg]F. shall be of the stabilized or low carbon (less than 0.10 
percent) austenitic stainless steel type, produced according to the 
applicable specifications of Table UHA-23 of the ASME Code. These 
materials and their weldments shall be tested for toughness according to 
the requirements of subpart 54.05 except that the Charpy V-notch testing 
acceptance criteria will be in accordance with UHT-6(a)(4) and (5) of 
the ASME Code.''
    (c) Except as permitted by Sec. 54.05-30, the allowable stress 
values used in the design of low temperature pressure vessels may not 
exceed those given in Table UHA-23 of the ASME Code for temperatures of 
-20 [deg]F. to 100 [deg]F.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-133R, 39 
FR 9178, Mar. 8, 1974; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40164, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 54.25-20  Low temperature operation--ferritic steels with properties
enhanced by heat treatment (modifies UHT-5(c), UHT-6, UHT-23, and UHT-82).

    (a) For service temperatures below 0 [deg]F. but not below the 
designated minimum service temperature, steel conforming to the 
specifications of Table 54.25-20(a) may be used in the fabrication of 
pressure vessels and nonpressure vessel tanks and associated secondary 
barriers, as defined in Sec. 38.05-4 of subchapter D (Tank Vessels) of 
this chapter. The ultimate and yield

[[Page 166]]

strengths shall be as shown in the applicable specification and shall be 
suitable for the design stress levels adopted. The service temperature 
shall not be colder than -320 [deg]F. Service temperature is defined in 
Sec. 54.25-10(a) (2).

                            Table 54.25-20(a)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Minimum
                                                               service
                           Steel                            temperature,
                                                               [deg]F.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A-333, 9 percent Ni, grade 8..............................         -320
A-334, 9 percent Ni, grade 8..............................         -320
A-353, 9 percent Ni, double normalized and tempered.......         -320
A-522, 9 percent Ni, NNT, Q and T, forging................         -320
A-553, 9 percent Ni, quenched and tempered................         -320
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) The materials permitted under paragraph (a) of this section 
shall be tested for toughness in accordance with the requirements of 
UHT-6 of the ASME Code except that tests shall be conducted at the 
temperature specified in Sec. 54.05-6 in lieu of that in UHT-5(c) of 
the ASME Code. Lateral expansion in a broken Charpy V-notch specimen is 
illustrated in Figure 54.25-20(b) and shall be measured in accordance 
with the procedure outlined in ASTM A 370 (incorporated by reference, 
see Sec. 54.01-1).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.023


[[Page 167]]


    (c) The qualification of welding procedures and welders and weld 
production testing for the steels of Table 54.25-20(a) shall conform to 
the requirements of part 57 of this subchapter and subpart 54.05 except 
that the Charpy V-notch testing acceptance criteria shall be in 
accordance with UHT-6(a) (4) and (5) of the ASME Code.
    (d) The values of absorbed energy in foot-pounds and of fracture 
appearance in percentage shear, which are recorded for information when 
complying with paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section shall also be 
reported to the marine inspector or the Commandant, as applicable.
    (e) Except as permitted by Sec. 54.05-30, the allowable stress 
values may not exceed those given in Table UHT-23 of the ASME Code for 
temperatures of 150 [deg]F. and below.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-133R, 39 
FR 9179, Mar. 8, 1974; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 54.25-25  Welding of quenched and tempered steels (modifies UHT-82).

    (a) The welding requirements in UHT-82 of the ASME Code shall be 
modified to require that the qualification of welding procedures and 
welders and weld production testing shall conform to the requirements of 
part 57 of this subchapter. The requirements are Sec. 57.03-1(d) of 
this subchapter are applicable to welded pressure vessels and 
nonpressure vessel type tanks of quenched and tempered steels other than 
9 percent nickel.
    (b) [Reserved]



                 Subpart 54.30_Mechanical Stress Relief



Sec. 54.30-1  Scope.

    (a) Certain pressure vessels may be mechanically stress relieved in 
accordance with the requirements in this subpart.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 54.30-3  Introduction.

    (a) Large conventional pressure vessels used to transport liquefied 
petroleum and natural gases, at ``low temperatures'' may often be 
difficult to thermally stress relieve. Where no other problem, such as 
corrosion exists, mechanical stress relief will be permitted for Class 
II-L pressure vessels.
    (b) Mechanical stress relief serves to cause small flaws, 
particularly in the weld zone, to yield plastically at the flaw tip 
resulting in a local relief of stress and a blunting of the crack tip. 
To achieve the maximum benefit from mechanical stress relief, it is 
necessary that the stresses so imposed be more severe than those 
expected in normal service life. At the same time, it is necessary that 
the stresses which are imposed are not so high as to result in 
appreciable deformation or general yielding.
    (c) The weld joint efficiencies as listed in Table UW-12 of the ASME 
Code shall apply except that a minimum of spot radiography will be 
required. UW-12(c) of the ASME Code which permits omitting all 
radiography does not apply. Spot examination shall follow UW-52 of the 
ASME Code and in addition these vessels will be required to have 
radiographic examination of intersecting circumferential and 
longitudinal joints for a distance of at least 20 times the plate 
thickness from the junction. See Sec. 54.25-8 on spot radiography.
    (d) Severe cold forming will not be permitted unless thermal stress 
relief is used. For example, parts of the vessels which are individually 
cold formed, such as heads, must be thermally stress relieved, where the 
extreme fiber strain measured at the surface exceeds 5 percent as 
determined by:

Percent strain=(65t/Rf)[1-(Rf/Ro)]

where:

t=Plate thickness.
Rf=Final radius.
Ro=Original radius (equals infinity for flat plate).

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18828, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by USCG-2000-7790, 
65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 54.30-5  Limitations and requirements.

    (a) Class II-L pressure vessels which require stress relief (see 
Table 54.01-5(b)) may be mechanically stress relieved provided:

[[Page 168]]

    (1) The steels from which they are fabricated do not specifically 
require thermal stress relief in UCS-56 of the ASME Code and have a 
ratio of yield to ultimate tensile strength not greater than 0.8. For 
example: A-537 steels could be mechanically stress relieved.
    (2) Pressure difference across the shell is not greater than 100 
pounds per square inch, thickness of shell is not greater than 1 inch, 
and the design temperature is not greater than 115 [deg]F.
    (3) It will carry liquids of specific gravity no greater than 1.05.
    (4) Design details are sufficient to eliminate stress concentrators: 
Mechanical stress relief is not acceptable in designs involving the 
following types of welded connections shown in UW-16.1 of the ASME Code:
    (i) Types l, m, n, and p because of nonintegral reinforcement. Type 
o will be acceptable provided the plate, nozzle, and reinforcement 
assembly are furnace stress relieved and the reinforcement is at least 6 
inches or 10t, whichever is larger, from the plate head.
    (ii) Types d, e, and f because expansion and contraction stresses 
are concentrated at the junction points.
    (5) That no slip-on flanges in sizes greater than 2 inches are used.
    (6) The categories A and B joints are type one as described in Table 
UW-12 of the ASME Code and all categories C and D joints are full 
penetration welds. See UW-3 of the ASME Code for definition of 
categories.
    (b) When a pressure vessel is to be mechanically stress relieved in 
accordance with Sec. 54.30-10(a)(1), its maximum allowable working 
pressure will be 40 percent of the value which would otherwise be 
determined. However, an increase of this 40 percent factor may be 
permitted if the stress relief is carried out at a pressure higher than 
that required by Sec. 54.30-10(a)(1) and an experimental strain 
analysis is carried out during stress relief. This evaluation should 
provide information as to the strains at the saddles, welded seams and 
nozzles as well as the body of the vessel. The hydrostatic pressure 
applied during stress relief should be such that, except in the case of 
welds, the stresses in the vessel shall closely approach but not exceed 
90 percent of the yield stress of the material at the test temperature. 
The proposed experimental program should be submitted to the Commandant 
for approval prior to its use. Photo-elastic coating, strain gaging, or 
a brittle coating technique is suggested for the experimental analysis.



Sec. 54.30-10  Method of performing mechanical stress relief.

    (a) The mechanical stress relief shall be carried out in accordance 
with the following stipulations using water as the pressurizing medium:
    (1) At a hydrostatic pressure (measured at the tank top) of 1\1/2\ 
times the design pressure. (See UA-60(e) of the ASME Code.)
    (2) At a temperature of 70 [deg]F. or the service temperature plus 
50 [deg]F., whichever is higher. Where the ambient temperature is below 
70 [deg]F., and use of water at that temperature is not practical, the 
minimum temperature for mechanical stress relief may be below 70 [deg]F. 
but shall not be less than 50 [deg]F. above service temperature.
    (3) The stress relief shall be at the required temperature and 
pressure and held for a period not less than 2 hours per inch of metal 
thickness, but in no case less than 2 hours.
    (b) It is considered preferable that mechanical stress relief be 
accomplished with the tanks in place on their saddles or supporting 
structure in the barge or ship in which they will be utilized. In any 
case, it is considered mandatory that the tank be supported only by its 
regular saddles or supporting structure, without any auxiliary or 
temporary supports.



Sec. 54.30-15  Requirement for analysis and computation.

    (a) A stress analysis shall be performed to determine if the tank 
may be exposed to excessive loadings during the mechanical stress relief 
process. This analysis should include consideration of the local 
stresses in way of saddles or other supporting structure and additional 
bending stresses due to the weight of the pressurizing liquid 
particularly in areas of high stress concentration. While it is 
necessary that the general stress level during the process be in excess 
of the normal

[[Page 169]]

working level, the calculated maximum stress during test shall not 
exceed 90 percent of the yield strength of the material at test 
temperature. The supporting structure shall be analyzed to verify its 
adequacy.
    (b) In all cases where the tanks are mechanically stress relieved in 
place in the ship or barge and the tanks are designed to carry cargoes 
with a specific gravity less than 1.05, the ship or barge shall be shown 
to have adequate stability and buoyancy, as well as strength to carry 
the excess weight of the tank during the stress relief procedure.



PART 56_PIPING SYSTEMS AND APPURTENANCES--Table of Contents




                          Subpart 56.01_General

Sec.
56.01-1 Scope (replaces 100.1).
56.01-2 Incorporation by reference.
56.01-3 Power boiler external piping (Replaces 100.1.1, 100.1.2, 111.6, 
          122.1, 132 and 133).
56.01-5 Adoption of ANSI (American National Standards Institute) Code 
          B31.1 for pressure and power piping, and other standards.
56.01-10 Plan approval.

                   Subpart 56.04_Piping Classification

56.04-1 Scope.
56.04-2 Piping classification according to service.
56.04-10 Other systems.

                          Subpart 56.07_Design

56.07-5 Definitions (modifies 100.2).
56.07-10 Design conditions and criteria (modifies 101-104.7).

                        Subpart 56.10_Components

56.10-1 Selection and limitations of piping components (replaces 105 
          through 108).
56.10-5 Pipe.

                         Subpart 56.15_Fittings

56.15-1 Pipe joining fittings.
56.15-5 Fluid-conditioner fittings.
56.15-10 Special purpose fittings.

                          Subpart 56.20_Valves

56.20-1 General.
56.20-5 Marking (reproduces 107.2).
56.20-7 Ends.
56.20-9 Valve construction.
56.20-15 Valves employing resilient material.
56.20-20 Valve bypasses.

Subpart 56.25_Pipe Flanges, Blanks, Flange Facings, Gaskets, and Bolting

56.25-5 Flanges.
56.25-7 Blanks.
56.25-10 Flange facings.
56.25-15 Gaskets (reproduces 108.4).
56.25-20 Bolting.

        Subpart 56.30_Selection and Limitations of Piping Joints

56.30-1 Scope (replaces 110 through 118).
56.30-3 Piping joints (reproduces 110).
56.30-5 Welded joints.
56.30-10 Flanged joints (modifies 104.5.1 (a)).
56.30-15 Expanded or rolled joints.
56.30-20 Threaded joints.
56.30-25 Flared, flareless, and compression fittings.
56.30-27 Caulked joints.
56.30-30 Brazed joints.
56.30-35 Gasketed mechanical couplings.
56.30-40 Flexible pipe couplings of the compression or slip-on type.

            Subpart 56.35_Expansion, Flexibility and Supports

56.35-1 Pipe stress calculations (replaces 119.7).
56.35-10 Nonmetallic expansion joints (replaces 119.5.1).
56.35-15 Metallic expansion joints (replaces 119.5.1).

    Subpart 56.50_Design Requirements Pertaining to Specific Systems

56.50-1 General (replaces 122.6 through 122.10).
56.50-10 Special gaging requirements.
56.50-15 Steam and exhaust piping.
56.50-20 Pressure relief piping.
56.50-25 Safety and relief valve escape piping.
56.50-30 Boiler feed piping.
56.50-35 Condensate pumps.
56.50-40 Blowoff piping (replaces 102.2.5 (d)).
56.50-45 Circulating pumps.
56.50-50 Bilge and ballast piping.
56.50-55 Bilge pumps.
56.50-57 Bilge piping and pumps, alternative requirements.
56.50-60 Systems containing oil.
56.50-65 Burner fuel-oil service systems.
56.50-70 Gasoline fuel systems.
56.50-75 Diesel fuel systems.
56.50-80 Lubricating-oil systems.
56.50-85 Tank-vent piping.
56.50-90 Sounding devices.
56.50-95 Overboard discharges and shell connections.

[[Page 170]]

56.50-96 Keel cooler installations.
56.50-97 Instrument, control and sampling piping (modifies 122.3).
56.50-103 Fixed oxygen-acetylene distribution piping.
56.50-105 Low-temperature piping.
56.50-110 Diving support systems.

                         Subpart 56.60_Materials

56.60-1 Acceptable materials and specifications (replaces 123 and Table 
          126.1 in ANSI-B31.1).
56.60-2 Limitations on materials.
56.60-3 Ferrous materials.
56.60-5 Steel (High temperature applications).
56.60-10 Cast iron and malleable iron.
56.60-15 Ductile iron.
56.60-20 Nonferrous materials.
56.60-25 Nonmetallic materials.

            Subpart 56.65_Fabrication, Assembly and Erection

56.65-1 General (replaces 127 through 135.4).

                          Subpart 56.70_Welding

56.70-1 General.
56.70-3 Limitations.
56.70-5 Material.
56.70-10 Preparation (modifies 127.3).
56.70-15 Procedure.
56.70-20 Qualification, general.

                          Subpart 56.75_Brazing

56.75-5 Filler metal.
56.75-10 Joint clearance (reproduces 128.2.2).
56.75-15 Heating (reproduces 128.2.3).
56.75-20 Brazing qualification.
56.75-25 Detail requirements.
56.75-30 Pipe joining details.

                    Subpart 56.80_Bending and Forming

56.80-5 Bending.
56.80-10 Forming (reproduces 129.2).
56.80-15 Heat treatment of bends and formed components.

                  Subpart 56.85_Heat Treatment of Welds

56.85-5 Heating and cooling method (reproduces 131.1).
56.85-10 Preheating.
56.85-15 Postheat treatment.

                         Subpart 56.90_Assembly

56.90-1 General.
56.90-5 Bolting procedure.
56.90-10 Threaded piping (reproduces 135.4).

                        Subpart 56.95_Inspection

56.95-1 General (replaces 136).
56.95-5 Rights of access of marine inspectors.
56.95-10 Type and extent of examination required.

                      Subpart 56.97_Pressure Tests

56.97-1 General (replaces 137).
56.97-5 Pressure testing of nonstandard piping system components.
56.97-25 Preparation for testing (reproduces 137.3).
56.97-30 Hydrostatic tests (reproduces 137.4).
56.97-35 Pneumatic tests (replaces 137.5).
56.97-38 Initial service leak test (reproduces 137.7).
56.97-40 Installation tests.

    Authority: 33 U.S.C. 1321(j), 1509; 43 U.S.C. 1333; 46 U.S.C. 3306, 
3703; E.O. 12234, 45 FR 58801, 3 CFR, 1980 Comp., p. 277; E.O. 12777, 56 
FR 54757, 3 CFR, 1991 Comp., p. 351; Department of Homeland Security 
Delegation No. 0170.1.

    Source: CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, unless otherwise 
noted.



                          Subpart 56.01_General

    Note: See Sec. 50.15-10 for general adoption of standards of the 
ANSI (American National Standards Institute). The printing of portions 
of the ``American National Standard Code for Pressure Piping, Power 
Piping,'' ANSI-B31.1, is with the permission of the publisher, The 
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) International, Three 
Park Avenue, New York, N.Y. 10016-5990. The adoption of this standard 
ANSI-B31.1 for pressure piping and power piping is subject to specific 
limitations or modifications as described in this part. Those 
requirements in ANSI-B31.1 which are not referred to in this part are 
adopted without change. Table 56.01-5(a) sets forth a general reference 
to various paragraphs in ANSI-B31.1 which are limited, modified, or 
replaced by regulations in this part.



Sec. 56.01-1  Scope (replaces 100.1).

    (a) This part contains requirements for the various ships' and 
barges' piping systems and appurtenances.
    (b) The respective piping systems installed on ships and barges 
shall have the necessary pumps, valves, regulation valves, safety 
valves, relief valves, flanges, fittings, pressure gages, liquid level 
indicators, thermometers, etc., for safe and efficient operation of the 
vessel.
    (c) Piping for industrial systems on mobile offshore drilling units 
need not fully comply with the requirements of

[[Page 171]]

this part but must meet Subpart 58.60 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-251, 43 FR 
56799, Dec. 4, 1978]



Sec. 56.01-2  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) Certain standards and specifications are incorporated by 
reference into this part with the approval of the Director of the 
Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a). To enforce any 
edition other than the one listed in paragraph (b) of this section, 
notice of the change must be published in the Federal Register and the 
material made available to the public. All approved material is 
available from the sources indicated in paragraph (b) or at the National 
Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the 
availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: 
http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--
regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (b) The standards and specifications approved for incorporation by 
reference in this part, and the sections affected are:

              American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

                 11 West 42nd Street, New York, NY 10036

ANSI B1.1-82 Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form) 
                                                       56.60-1; 56.25-20
ANSI B1.20.1-83 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).............56.60-1
ANSI B1.20.3-76 (reaffirmed 1982) Dryseal Pipe Threads (Inch)....56.60-1
ANSI B16.1-75 Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 
and 800................................................56.60-1; 56.60-10
ANSI B16.3-85 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300 
                                                                 56.60-1
ANSI B16.4-85 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250...56.60-1
ANSI B16.5-81 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings......56.25-20; 56.30-10; 
                                                                 56.60-1
ANSI B16.9-86 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings....56.60-1
ANSI B16.10-86 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves 
                                                                 56.60-1
ANSI B16.11-80 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded 
                                                        56.30-5; 56.60-1
ANSI B16.14-83 Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings, and Locknuts with Pipe 
Threads..........................................................56.60-1
ANSI B16.15-85 Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250 
                                                                 56.60-1
ANSI B16.18-84 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 
                                                                 56.60-1
ANSI B16.20-73 Ring-Joint Gaskets and Grooves for Steel Pipe Flanges 
VIII, Division 1, Pressure Vessels, 1986 with addenda...........56.15-1; 
        56.15-5; 56.15-10; 56.25-5; 56.30-10; 56.30-30; 56.60-15; 56.60-
                                                             1; 56.95-10
 Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications, 1986 with addenda 
                                     56.70-5; 56.70-20; 56.75-20; 56.0-1
ANSI B16.24-79 Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and 
300..............................................................56.60-1
ANSI B16.25-86 Buttwelding Ends...............56.60-1; 56.30-5; 56.70-10
ANSI B16.28-86 Wrought Steel Buttwelding Short Radius Elbows and Returns
                                                                 56.60-1
ANSI B16.29-86 Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint 
Drainage Fittings--DWV...........................................56.60-1
ANSI B16.34-88 Valves-Flanged, Threaded and Welding End.........56.20-1; 
                                                                 56.60-1
ANSI B16.42-87 Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 
150 and 300......................................................56.60-1
ANSI B18.2.1-81 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series...56.25-20; 
                                                                 56.60-1
ANSI B18.2.2-87 Square and Hex Nuts....................56.25-20; 56.60-1
ANSI B31.1-86 Power Piping.......................................56.01-5
ANSI B36.10M-85 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe..........56.07-5; 
                                                       56.30-20; 56.60-1
ANSI B36.19M-85 Stainless Steel Pipe....................56.07-5; 56.60-1

      American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) International

               Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990

                    Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

 Section I, Power Boilers, 1986 with addenda56.15-5; 56.15-10; 56.60-1; 
56.60-1; 56.70-15; 56.95-10 56.15-1
 Section VIII, Division 1, Pressure Vessels, 1986 with addenda 
     56.15-1; 56.15-5; 56.15-10; 56.25-5; 56.30-10; 56.30-30; 56.60-15; 
                                                       56.60-1; 56.95-10
 Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications, 1986 with addenda 
                                   56.70-5; 56.70-20; 56.75-20; 56.85-10

            American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

        100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.

ASTM A 36/A 36M-97a, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 
                                                                56.30-10

[[Page 172]]

ASTM A 47-90 (1995), Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron 
Castings.........................................................56.60-1
ASTM A 53-98, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless................56.10-5; 56.60-1
ASTM A 106-95, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for 
High-Temperature Service.........................................56.60-1
ASTM A 126-95, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, 
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.......................................56.60-1
ASTM A 134-96, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion 
(Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over).............................56.60-1
ASTM A 135-97c, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded 
Steel Pipe.......................................................56.60-1
ASTM A 139-96, Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded 
Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over)......................................56.60-1
ASTM A 178/A 178M-95, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-
Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel Boiler and Superheater 
Tubes............................................................56.60-1
ASTM A 179/A 179M-90a (1996), Standard Specification for Seamless Cold-
Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes........56.60-1
ASTM A 182/A 182M-97c, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled 
Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for 
High-Temperature Service.......................................56.50-105
ASTM A 192/A 192M-91 (1996), Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon 
Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service.....................56.60-1
ASTM A 194/A 194M-98b, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel 
Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both 
                                                               56.50-105
ASTM A 197-87 (1992), Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron 
                                                                 56.60-1
ASTM A 210/A 210M-96, Standard Specification for Seamless Medium-Carbon 
Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes...............................56.60-1
ASTM A 213/A 213M-95a, Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic and 
Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-Exchanger Tubes 
                                                                 56.60-1
ASTM A 214/A 214M-96, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-
Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes...........56.60-1
ASTM A 226/A 226M-95, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-
Welded Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes for High-Pressure 
Service..........................................................56.60-1
ASTM A 234/A 234M-97, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of 
Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature 
Service..........................................................56.60-1
ASTM A 249/A 249M-96a, Standard Specification for Welded Austenitic 
Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes...56.60-1
ASTM A 268/A 268M-96, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded 
Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service 
                                                                 56.60-1
ASTM A 276-98, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and 
Shapes...........................................................56.60-2
ASTM A 307-97, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 
60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.....................................56.25-20
ASTM A 312/A 312M-95a, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded 
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes......................56.50-105; 56.60-1
ASTM A 320/A 320M-97, Standard Specification for Alloy/Steel Bolting 
Materials for Low-Temperature Service..........................56.50-105
ASTM A 333/A 333M-94, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded 
Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service................56.50-105; 56.60-1
ASTM A 334/A 334M-96, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded 
Carbon and Alloy-Steel Tubes for Low-Temperature Service......56.50-105; 
                                                                 56.60-1
ASTM A 335/A 335M-95a, Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic 
Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service....................56.60-1
ASTM A 350/A 350M-97, Standard Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy 
Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness Testing for Piping Components 
                                                               56.50-105
ASTM A 351/A 351M-94a, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, 
Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts....56.50-105
ASTM A 352/A 352M-93 (1998), Standard Specification for Steel Castings, 
Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts, Suitable for 
Low-Temperature Service........................................56.50-105
ASTM A 358/A 358M-95a, Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded 
Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service
                                                                 56.60-1

[[Page 173]]

ASTM A 369/A 369M-92, Standard Specification for Carbon and Ferritic 
Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-Temperature Service...56.60-1
ASTM A 376/A 376M-96, Standard Specification for Seamless Austenitic 
Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-Station Service........56.07-10; 
                                                        56.60-1; 56.60-2
ASTM A 395/A 395M-98, Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron 
Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures...56.50-60; 
                                                       56.60-1; 56.60-15
ASTM A 403/A 403M-98, Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic 
Stainless Steel Piping Fittings..................................56.60-1
ASTM A 420/A 420M-96a, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of 
Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Low-Temperature Service 
                                                      56.50-105; 56.60-1
ASTM A 520-97, Standard Specification for Supplementary Requirements for 
Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Tubular Products 
for High-Temperature Service Conforming to ISO Recommendations for 
Boiler Construction..............................................56.60-1
ASTM A 522/A 522M-95b, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled 8 and 
9% Nickel Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Low-
Temperature Service............................................56.50-105
ASTM A 536-84 (1993), Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings 
                                                                 56.60-1
ASTM A 575-96, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant 
Quality, M-Grades................................................56.60-2
ASTM A 576-90b (1995), Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, 
Hot-Wrought, Special Quality.....................................56.60-2
ASTM B 16-92, Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar, 
and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines.............................56.60-2
ASTM B 21-96, Standard Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and 
Shapes...........................................................56.60-2
ASTM B 26/B 26M-97, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand 
Castings.........................................................56.60-2
ASTM B 42-96, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard 
Sizes............................................................56.60-1
ASTM B 43-96, Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, 
Standard Sizes...................................................56.60-1
ASTM B 68-95, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright 
Annealed.........................................................56.60-1
ASTM B 75-97, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube....56.60-1
ASTM B 85-96, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings 
                                                                 56.60-2
ASTM B 88-96, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube 
                                                                 56.60-1
ASTM B 96-93, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Plate, 
Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar for General Purposes and Pressure Vessels 
                                                                 56.60-2
ASTM B 111-95, Standard Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy 
Seamless Condenser Tubes and Ferrule Stock.......................56.60-1
ASTM B 124-96, Standard Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy 
Forging Rod, Bar, and Shapes.....................................56.60-2
ASTM B 161-93, Standard Specification for Nickel Seamless Pipe and Tube 
                                                                 56.60-1
ASTM B 165-93, Standard Specification of Nickel-Copper Alloy (UNS 
NO4400) Seamless Pipe and Tube...................................56.60-1
ASTM B 167-97a, Standard Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys 
(UNS NO6600, NO6601, NO6603, NO6690, NO6025, and NO6045) Seamless Pipe 
and Tube.........................................................56.60-1
ASTM B 171-95, Standard Specification for Copper-Alloy Plate and Sheet 
for Pressure Vessels, Condensers, and Heat Exchangers............56.60-2
ASTM B 210-95, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy 
Drawn Seamless Tubes.............................................56.60-1
ASTM B 234-95, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy 
Drawn Seamless Tubes for Condensers and Heat Exchangers..........56.60-1
ASTM B 241/B 241M-96, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube...................56.60-1
ASTM B 280-97, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air 
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.....................56.60-1
ASTM B 283-96, Standard Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Die 
Forgings (Hot-Pressed)...........................................56.60-2
ASTM B 315-93, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Alloy Pipe and 
Tube.............................................................56.60-1
ASTM B 361-95, Standard Specification for Factory-Made Wrought Aluminum 
and Aluminum-Alloy Welding Fittings..............................56.60-1
ASTM B 858M-95, Standard Test Method for Determination of Susceptibility 
to Stress Corrosion Cracking in Copper Alloys Using an Ammonia Vapor 
Test.............................................................56.60-2
ASTM D 635-97, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent

[[Page 174]]

and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position........56.60-25
ASTM D 1785-96b, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) 
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.........................56.60-25
ASTM D 2241-96b, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) 
Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)................................56.60-25
ASTM D 2464-96a, Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl 
Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80................56.60-25
ASTM D 2466-97, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) 
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40..............................56.60-25
ASTM D 2467-96a, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) 
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80..............................56.60-25
ASTM D 2665-97b, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl 
Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings 
                                                                56.60-25
ASTM D 2863-95, Standard Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen 
Concentration to Support Candle-like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen 
Index)..........................................................56.60-25
ASTM E 23-96, Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of 
Metallic Materials.............................................56.50-105
ASTM F 682-82a (1993), Standard Specification for Wrought Carbon Steel 
Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings.......................................56.60-1
ASTM F 1006-86 (1992), Standard Specification for Entrainment Separators 
for Use in Marine Piping Applications............................56.60-1
ASTM F 1007-86 (1996), Standard Specification for Pipe-Line Expansion 
Joints of the Packed Slip Type for Marine Application............56.60-1
ASTM F 1020-86 (1996), Standard Specification for Line-Blind Valves for 
Marine Applications..............................................56.60-1
ASTM F 1120-87 (1993), Standard Specification for Circular Metallic 
Bellows Type Expansion Joints for Piping Applications............56.60-1
ASTM F 1123-87 (1993), Standard Specification for Non-Metallic Expansion 
Joints...........................................................56.60-1
ASTM F 1139-88 (1993), Standard Specification for Steam Traps and Drains
                                                                 56.60-2
ASTM F 1172-88 (1993), Standard Specification for Fuel Oil Meters of the 
Volumetric Positive Displacement Type............................56.60-1
ASTM F 1173-95, Standard Specification for Thermosetting Resin 
Fiberglass Pipe and Fittings to be Used for Marine Applications 
                                                                 56.60-1
ASTM F 1199-88 (1993), Standard Specification for Cast (All Temperature 
and Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers (150 psig and 150 Degrees 
F Maximum).......................................................56.60-1
ASTM F 1200-88 (1993), Standard Specification for Fabricated (Welded) 
Pipe Line Strainers (Above 150 psig and 150 Degrees F)...........56.60-1
ASTM F 1201-88 (1993), Standard Specification for Fluid Conditioner 
Fittings in Piping Applications above 0 Degrees F................56.60-1
ASTM F 1387-93, Standard Specification for Performance of Mechanically 
Attached Fittings...............................................56.30-25
ASTM F 1476-95a, Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed 
Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications.............56.30-35
ASTM F 1548-94, Standard Specification for the Performance of Fittings 
for Use with Gasketed Mechanical Couplings, Used in Piping Applications 
                                                                56.30-35

          Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association Inc. (EJMA)

                 25 North Broadway, Tarrytown, NY 10591

Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, 1980 
                                                                 56.60-1

    International Maritime Organization (IMO), Publications Section,

           4 Albert Embankment, London, SE1 7SR United Kingdom

Resolution A.753(18) Guidelines for the Application of Plastic Pipes on 
Ships...........................................................56.60-25

                   Fluid Controls Institute Inc. (FCI)

            31 South Street, Suite 303, Morristown, NJ 07960

FCI 69-1 Pressure Rating Standard for Steam Traps................56.60-1

    Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings 
                          Industry, Inc. (MSS)

                  127 Park Street NE, Vienna, VA 22180

SP-6-85 Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanges and 
Connecting-End Flanges of Valves and Fittings..........56.25-10; 56.60-1
SP-9-87 Spot Facing for Bronze, Iron and Steel Flanges...........56.60-1
SP-25-88 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and 
Unions.........................................56.15-1; 56.20-5; 56.60-1
SP-44-85 Steel Pipe Line Flanges.................................56.60-1
SP-45-87 Bypass and Drain Connection Standard..........56.20-20; 56.60-1
SP-51-86 Class 150LW Corrosion Resistant Cast Flanges and Flanged 
Fittings.........................................................56.60-1

[[Page 175]]

SP-53-85 Quality Standard for Steel Castings and Forgings for Valves, 
Flanges and Fittings and Other Piping Components--Magnetic Particle 
Examination Method...............................................56.60-1
SP-55-85 Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges and 
Fittings and Other Piping Components--Visual Method..............56.60-1
SP-58-83 Pipe Hangers and Supports--Materials, Design and Manufacture 
                                                                 56.60-1
SP-61-85 Pressure Testing of Steel Valves........................56.60-1
SP-67-83 Butterfly Valves........................................56.60-1
SP-69-83 Pipe Hangers and Supports--Selection and Application....56.60-1
SP-72-87 Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General 
Service..........................................................56.60-1
SP-73-86 Brazing Joints for Wrought and Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint 
Pressure Fittings................................................56.60-1
SP-83-87 Steel Pipe Unions, Socket-Welding and Threaded..........56.60-1

                  Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)

              400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, Pa 15096

J1475-84 Hydraulic Hose Fittings for Marine Applications........56.60-25
J1942-89 Hose and Hose Assemblies for Marine Applications.......56.60-25

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40599, Oct. 2, 1989; 55 FR 39968, Oct. 1, 1990, as 
amended by CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35822, July 29, 1991; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 
48049, Sept. 18, 1995; CGD 95-027, 61 FR 26000, May 23, 1996; CGD 96-
041, 61 FR 50728, Sept. 27, 1996; CGD 97-057, 62 FR 51044, Sept. 30, 
1997; CGD 95-028, 62 FR 51200, Sept. 30, 1997; USCG-1999-6216, 64 FR 
53224, Oct. 1, 1999; USCG-1999-5151, 64 FR 67178, Dec. 1, 1999; USCG-
2004-18884, 69 FR 58346, Sept. 30, 2004]



Sec. 56.01-3  Power boiler external piping (Replaces 100.1.1, 100.1.2, 111.6, 122.1, 132 and 133).

    (a) Power boiler external piping and components must meet the 
requirements of this part and Sec. Sec. 52.01-105, 52.01-110, 52.01-
115, and 52.01-120 of this chapter.
    (b) Specific requirements for power boiler external piping and 
appurtenances, as defined in Sec. Sec. 100.1.1 and 100.1.2, appearing 
in the various paragraphs of ANSI B31.1, are not adopted unless 
specifically indicated elsewhere in this part.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989; 55 FR 39968, Oct. 1, 1990]



Sec. 56.01-5  Adoption of ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
Code B31.1 for pressure and power piping, and other standards.

    (a) Piping systems for ships and barges shall be designed, 
constructed, and inspected in accordance with B31.1, the ``Code for 
Pressure Piping, Power Piping,'' of the ANSI (American National 
Standards Institute), as limited, modified, or replaced by specific 
requirements in this part. The provisions in the appendices to ANSI-
B31.1 are adopted and shall be followed when the requirements in ANSI-
B31.1 or the regulations in this part make them mandatory. For general 
information Table 56.01-5(a) lists the various paragraphs, etc., in 
ANSI-B31.1 which are limited, modified, replaced, or reproduced by 
regulations in this part.

Table 56.01-5(a)--Limitations and Modifications in the Adoption of ANSI-
                B31.1 Code for Pressure and Power Piping
------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Section or paragraph in ANSI-B31.1, and
                disposition                       Unit in this part
------------------------------------------------------------------------
100.1 replaced by.........................  56.01-1.
100.2 modified by.........................  56.07-5.
101 through 104.7 modified by.............  56.07-10.
101.2 modified by.........................  56.07-10(a), (b).
101.5 replaced by.........................  56.07-10(c).
102.2 modified by.........................  56.07-10(d).
102.2.5(d) replaced by....................  56.50-40.
102.3 and 104.1.2 modified by.............  56.07-10(e).
104.3 modified by.........................  56.07-10(f).
104.4 modified by.........................  56.07-10(e).
104.5.1 modified by.......................  56.30-10.
105 through 108 replaced by...............  56.10-1 through 56.25-20.
110 through 118 replaced by...............  56.30-1 through 56.30-35.
119.5.1 replaced by.......................  56.35-10, 56.35-15, 56.35-
                                             35.
119.7 replaced by.........................  56.35-1.
122.3 modified by.........................  56.50-97.
122.6 through 122.10 replaced by..........  56.50-1 through 56.50-80.
123 replaced by...........................  56.60-1.
Table 126.1 is replaced by................  56.30-5(c)(3), 56.60-1.
127 through 135.4 replaced by.............  56.65-1, 56.70-1 through
                                             56.90-10.
136 replaced by...........................  56.95-1 through 56.95-10.
137 replaced by...........................  56.97-1 through 56.97-40.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) When a section or paragraph of the regulations in this part 
relates to material in ANSI-B31.1 Code (American National Standard Code 
for Pressure Piping, Power Piping), the relationship with this code will 
be shown immediately following the heading of the

[[Page 176]]

section or at the beginning of the paragraph as follows:
    (1) (Modifies ------.) This indicates that the material in the ANSI-
B31.1 so numbered for identification is generally applicable but is 
being altered, amplified or augmented.
    (2) (Replaces ------.) This indicates that the material in the ANSI-
B31.1 so numbered for identification does not apply.
    (3) (Reproduces ------.) This indicates that the material in the 
ANSI-B31.1 so numbered for identification is being identically 
reproduced for convenience, not for emphasis.
    (c) As stated in Sec. 50.15-10 of this chapter, the standards of 
the ANSI (American National Standards Institute) specifically referred 
to in this part shall be the governing requirements for the subject 
matters covered unless specifically limited, modified or replaced by 
other regulations in this subchapter. See Sec. 56.60-1(b) for the other 
adopted commercial standards applicable to piping systems which also 
form a part of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGFR 72-59R, 37 FR 6189, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 73-
254, 40 FR 40164, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.01-10  Plan approval.

    (a) Plans and specifications for new construction and major 
alterations showing the respective piping systems shall be submitted, as 
required by subpart 50.20 of this subchapter.
    (b) Piping materials and appliances, such as pipe, tubing, fittings, 
flanges, and valves, except safety valves and safety relief valves 
covered in part 162 of subchapter Q (Specifications) of this chapter, 
are not required to be specifically approved by the Commandant, but 
shall comply with the applicable requirements for materials, 
construction, markings, and testing. These materials and appliances 
shall be certified as described in part 50 of this subchapter. Drawings 
listing material specifications and showing details of welded joints for 
pressure-containing appurtenances of welded construction shall be 
submitted in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section.
    (c)(1) Prior to installation aboard ship, diagrams of the following 
systems shall be submitted for approval:
    (i) Steam and exhaust piping.
    (ii) Boiler feed and blowoff piping.
    (iii) Safety valve escape piping.
    (iv) Fuel oil service, transfer and filling piping. (Service 
includes boiler fuel and internal combustion engine fuel piping.)
    (v) Fire extinguishing systems including fire main and sprinkler 
piping, inert gas and foam.
    (vi) Bilge and ballast piping.
    (vii) Tank cleaning piping.
    (viii) Condenser circulating water piping.
    (ix) Vent, sound and overflow piping.
    (x) Sanitary drains, soil drains, deck drains, and overboard 
discharge piping.
    (xi) Internal combustion engine exhaust piping. (Refer to part 58 of 
this subchapter for requirements.)
    (xii) Cargo piping.
    (xiii) Hot water heating systems if the temperature is greater than 
121 [deg]C(250 [deg]F).
    (xiv) Compressed air piping.
    (xv) Fluid power and control systems (hydraulic, pneumatic). (Refer 
to subpart 58.30 of this subchapter for specific requirements.)
    (xvi) Lubricating oil piping.
    (xvii) Refrigeration and air conditioning piping. (Refer to part 58 
of this subchapter for specific requirements.)
    (2) Arrangement drawings of the following systems shall also be 
submitted prior to installation:
    (i) All Classes I, I-L, and II-L systems.
    (ii) All Class II firemain, foam, sprinkler, bilge and ballast, vent 
sounding and overflow systems.
    (iii) Other Class II systems only if specifically requested or 
required by regulations in this subchapter.
    (d)(1) The drawings or diagrams shall include a list of material, 
furnishing pipe diameters, wall thicknesses, design pressure, fluid 
temperature, applicable ASTM material or ANSI component specification, 
type, size, design standard, and rating of valves, flanges, and 
fittings.
    (2) Pump rated capacity and pump shutoff head shall appear on piping 
diagrams. Pump characteristic curves shall be submitted for all pumps in 
the

[[Page 177]]

firemain and foam systems. These curves need not be submitted if the 
following information is shown on the drawing:
    (i) Rated capacity and head at rated capacity.
    (ii) Shutoff head.
    (iii) Head at 150 percent rated capacity.
    (3) Standard drawings of the following fabrication details shall be 
submitted:
    (i) Welding details for piping connections.
    (ii) Welding details for nonstandard fittings (when appropriate).
    (d-1) Plans of piping for industrial systems on mobile offshore 
drilling units must be submitted under subpart 58.60 of this subchapter.
    (e) Where piping passes through watertight bulkheads and/or fire 
boundaries, plans of typical details of piping penetrations shall be 
submitted.
    (f) Arrangement drawings specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section are not required if--
    (1) The location of each component for which there is a location 
requirement (i.e., shell penetration, fire station, foam monitor, etc.) 
is indicated on the piping diagram;
    (2) The diagram includes, or is accompanied by and makes reference 
to, a material schedule which describes components in sufficient detail 
to substantiate their compliance with the regulations of this 
subchapter;
    (3) A thermal stress analysis is not required; and
    (4) A dynamic analysis is neither required nor elected in lieu of 
allowable stress reduction.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGFR 72-59R, 37 FR 6189, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 73-
251, 43 FR 56799, Dec. 4, 1978, CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989; 
CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48049, Sept. 18, 1995]



                   Subpart 56.04_Piping Classification



Sec. 56.04-1  Scope.

    Piping shall be classified as shown in Table 56.04-1.

                  Table 56.04-1--Piping Classifications
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Section in
               Service                         Class           this part
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Normal..............................  I, II.................  56.04-2
Low temperature.....................  I-L, II-L.............  56.50-105
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[CGD 72-206R, 38 FR 17229, June 29, 1973, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 
FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48049, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 56.04-2  Piping classification according to service.

    The designation of classes according to service is found in Table 
56.04-2.

                                  Table 56.04-2--Pressure Piping Classification
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Pressure
             Service                   Class \1\          (p.s.i.g.)                            Temp. ([deg]F)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class B and C poisons \2\.......  I.................  any...............  and...............  0 and above.
                                  I-L...............  any...............  and...............  below 0.
                                  II................  (\3\ )............  (\3\ )............  (\3\ )
                                  II-L..............  (\3\ )............  (\3\ )............  (\3\ )
Gases and vapors \2\............  I.................  above 150.........  or................  above 650.
                                  I-L...............  above 150.........  and...............  below 0.
                                  II................  150 and below.....  and...............  0 to 650.
                                  II-L..............  150 and below.....  and...............  below 0.
Liquefied flammable gases \2\...  I.................  above 150.........  and...............  0 and above. \1\
                                  I-L...............  above 150.........  and...............  below 0.
                                  II................  150 and below.....  and...............  0 and above.
                                  II-L..............  150 and below.....  and...............  below 0.
Molten sulphur..................  I.................  above 225.........  or................  above 330.
                                  II................  225 and below.....  and...............  330 and below.
Cargo liquids Grades A through D  I.................  above 225.........  or................  above 150.
 \2\.
                                  I-L...............  above 225.........  and...............  below 0.
                                  II................  225 and below.....  and...............  0 to 150.
                                  II-L..............  225 and below.....  and...............  below 0.
Cargo liquids Grade E...........  I.................  above 225.........  or................  above 400.
                                  I-L...............  above 225.........  and...............  below 0.
                                  II................  225 and below.....  and...............  0 to 400.
                                  II-L..............  225 and below.....  and...............  below 0.

[[Page 178]]

 
Water...........................  I.................  above 225.........  or................  above 350.
                                  II................  225 and below.....  and...............  350 and below.
Fuels (Bunker, diesel, gasoline,  I.................  above 150.........  or................  above 150.
 etc.).
                                  II................  150 and below.....  and...............  150 and below.
Lubricating oil.................  I.................  above 225.........  or................  above 400.
                                  II................  225 and below.....  and...............  400 and below.
Asphalt.........................  I.................  above 225.........  or................  above 400.
                                  II................  225 and below.....  and...............  400 and below.
Heat transfer oil...............  I.................  above 225.........  or................  above 400.
                                  II................  225 and below.....  and...............  400 and below.
Hydraulic fluid.................  I.................  above 225.........  or................  above 400.
                                  II................  225 and below.....  and...............  400 and below.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Flammable or combustible dangerous   Refer to specific requirements of
 cargoes..                            part 40 of this chapter.
Other dangerous cargoes............  Refer to specific requirements of
                                      part 98 of this chapter.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
\1\ Where doubt exists as to proper classification, refer to the
  Commandant for resolution.
\2\ For definitions, see 46 CFR parts 30, 151, and 154. Note that the
  category ``B and C'' poisons is not used in the rules applying to self-
  propelled vessels (46 CFR part 153).
\3\ Not permitted except inside cargo tanks approved for Class B and C
  poisons.


[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-254, 40 FR 
40164, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 73-96, 42 FR 49024, Sept. 26, 1977]



Sec. 56.04-10  Other systems.

    Piping systems and appurtenances not requiring plan approval may be 
accepted by the marine inspector if:
    (a) The system is suitable for the service intended,
    (b) There are guards, shields, insulation and similar devices where 
needed for protection of personnel,
    (c) Failure of the systems would not hazard the vessel, personnel or 
vital systems, and
    (d) The system is not manifestly unsafe.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989]



                          Subpart 56.07_Design



Sec. 56.07-5  Definitions (modifies 100.2).

    (a) Piping. The definitions contained in 100.2 of ANSI-B31.1 apply, 
as well as the following:
    (1) The word piping within the meaning of the regulations in this 
subchapter refers to fabricated pipes or tubes with flanges and fittings 
attached, for use in the conveyance of vapors, gases or liquids, 
regardless of whether the diameter is measured on the inside or the 
outside.
    (b) Nominal diameter. The term nominal diameter or diameter as used 
in this part, means the commercial diameter of the piping, i.e., pipe 
size.
    (c) Schedule. The word Schedule when used in this part refers to 
specific values as given in American National Standards B36.10 and 
B36.19.
    (d) Fittings and appurtenances. The word fitting and the phrase 
fittings and appurtenances within the meaning of the regulations in this 
subchapter refer to pressure containing piping system components other 
than valves and pipe. This includes piping system components whose 
function is to join branches of the system (such as tees, wyes, elbows, 
unions, bushings, etc.) which are referred to as pipe joining fittings, 
as well as components which operate on the fluid contained in the system 
(such as traps, drains, strainers, separators, filters, meters, etc.), 
which are referred to as ``fluid conditioner'' fittings. Thermometer 
wells and other similar fittings which form part of the pressure barrier 
of any system are included under this heading. Expansion joints, slip 
joints, rotary joints, quick disconnect couplings, etc., are referred to 
as special purpose fittings, and may be subject to such special design 
and testing requirements as prescribed by the Commandant. Refer to 
subpart 56.15 for design requirements for fittings.
    (e) Nonstandard fittings. ``Nonstandard fitting'' means a component

[[Page 179]]

of a piping system which is not fabricated under an adopted industry 
standard.
    (f) Vital system. A vital system is one which is essential to the 
safety of the vessel, its passengers and crew.
    (g) Plate flange. The term plate flange, as used in this subchapter, 
means a flange made from plate material, and may have a raised face and/
or a raised hub.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.07-10  Design conditions and criteria (modifies 101-104.7).

    (a) Maximum allowable working pressure (modifies 101.2). (1) The 
maximum allowable working pressure of a piping system shall not be 
greater than the internal design pressure defined in 104.1.2 of ANSI-
B31.1.
    (2) Where the maximum allowable working pressure of a system 
component, such as a valve or a fitting, is less than that computed for 
the pipe or tubing, the system pressure shall be limited to the lowest 
of the component maximum allowable working pressures.
    (b) Relief valves (modifies 101.2). (1) Every system which may be 
exposed to pressures higher than the system's maximum allowable working 
pressure shall be safeguarded by appropriate relief devices. (See Sec. 
52.01-3 of this subchapter for definitions.) Relief valves are required 
at pump discharges except for centrifugal pumps so designed and applied 
that a pressure in excess of the maximum allowable working pressure for 
the system cannot be developed.
    (2) The relief valve setting shall not exceed the maximum allowable 
working pressure of the system. Its relieving capacity shall be 
sufficient to prevent the pressure from rising more than 20 percent 
above the system maximum allowable working pressure. The rated relieving 
capacity of safety and relief valves used in the protection of piping 
systems only shall be based on actual flow test data and the capacity 
shall be certified by the manufacturer at 120 percent of the set 
pressure of the valve.
    (3) Relief valves shall be certified as required in part 50 of this 
subchapter for valves, and shall also meet the requirements of Sec. 
54.15-10 of this subchapter.
    (c) Ship motion dynamic effects (replaces 101.5.3). Piping system 
designs shall account for the effects of ship motion and flexure, 
including weight, yaw, sway, roll, pitch, heave, and vibration.
    (d) Pressure temperature ratings (modifies 102.2). The material in 
102.2 of ANSI-B31.1 is applicable with the following exceptions:
    (1) The details of components not having specific ratings as 
described in 102.2.2 of ANSI B31.1 must be furnished to the Marine 
Safety Center for approval.
    (2) Boiler blowoff piping must be designed in accordance with Sec. 
56.50-40 of this part.
    (e) Pressure design (modifies 102.3, 104.1.2 and 104.4). (1) 
Materials for use in piping must be selected as described in Sec. 
56.60-1(a) of this part. Tabulated allowable stress values for these 
materials shall be measured as indicated in 102.3.1 of ANSI-B31.1, 
Tables 56.60-1 and 56.60-2(a).
    (2) Allowable stress values, as found in the ASME Code, which are 
restricted in application by footnote or are italicized shall not be 
used. Where multiple stresses are listed for a material, the lowest 
value of the listing shall be used unless otherwise approved by the 
Commandant. In all cases the temperature is understood to be the actual 
temperature of the component.
    (3) Where the operator desires to use a material not listed, 
permission must be obtained from the Commandant. Requirements for 
testing found in Sec. 56.97-40(a)(2) and Sec. 56.97-40(a)(4) may 
affect design and should be considered. Special design limitations may 
be found for specific systems. Refer to subpart 56.50 for specific 
requirements.
    (f) Intersections (modifies 104.3). The material of ANSI-B31.1 in 
104.3 is applicable with the following additions:
    (1) Reinforcement calculations where applicable shall be submitted.

[[Page 180]]

    (2) Wherever possible the longitudinal joint of a welded pipe should 
not be pierced.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; 37 FR 16803, Aug. 19, 1972; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 
40164, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-012, 
60 FR 48050, Sept. 18, 1995; CGD 95-028 62 FR 51200, Sept. 30, 1997; 
USCG-1998-4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998]



                        Subpart 56.10_Components



Sec. 56.10-1  Selection and limitations of piping components (replaces 105 through 108).

    (a) Pipe, tubing, pipe joining fittings, and piping system 
components, shall meet material and standard requirements of subpart 
56.60 and shall meet the certification requirements of part 50 of this 
subchapter.
    (b) The requirements in this subpart and subparts 56.15 through 
56.25 shall be followed in lieu of those in 105 through 108 in ANSI-
B31.1; however, certain requirements are marked ``reproduced.''

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970]



Sec. 56.10-5  Pipe.

    (a) General. Pipe and tubing shall be selected as described in Table 
56.60-1(a).
    (b) Ferrous pipe. ASTM Specification A 53 (incorporated by 
reference, see Sec. 56.01-2) furnace welded pipe shall not be used for 
combustible or flammable liquids within machinery spaces. (See 
Sec. Sec. 30.10-15 and 30.10-22 of this chapter.)
    (c) Nonferrous pipe. (See also Sec. 56.60-20.) (1) Copper and brass 
pipe for water and steam service may be used for design pressures up to 
250 pounds per square inch and for design temperatures to 406 [deg]F.
    (2) Copper and brass pipe for air may be used in accordance with the 
allowable stresses found from Table 56.60-1(a).
    (2-a) Copper-nickel alloys may be used for water and steam service 
within the design stress and temperature limitations indicated in ANSI-
B31.1.
    (3) Copper tubing may be used for dead-end instrument service up to 
1,000 pounds per square inch.
    (4) Copper, brass, or aluminum pipe or tube shall not be used for 
flammable fluids except where specifically permitted by this part.
    (5) Aluminum alloy pipe or tube may be used within the limitation 
stated in 123.2.7 of ANSI-B31.1 and paragraph (4) of this section (c)5.
    (d) Nonmetallic pipe. Plastic pipe may be used subject to the 
conditions described in Sec. 56.60-25.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGFR 72-59R, 37 FR 6189, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 77-
140, 54 FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-028, 62 FR 51200, Sept. 30, 1997; 
USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



                         Subpart 56.15_Fittings

    Source: CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 56.15-1  Pipe joining fittings.

    (a) Pipe joining fittings certified in accordance with subpart 50.25 
of this subchapter are acceptable for use in piping systems.
    (b) Threaded, flanged, socket-welding, buttwelding, and socket-
brazing pipe joining fittings, made in accordance with the applicable 
standards in Tables 56.60-1(a) and 56.60-1(b) of this part and of 
materials complying with subpart 56.60 of this part, may be used in 
piping systems within the material, size, pressure, and temperature 
limitations of those standards and within any further limitations 
specified in this subchapter. Fittings must be designed for the maximum 
pressure to which they may be subjected, but in no case less than 50 
pounds per square inch gage.
    (c) Pipe joining fittings not accepted for use in piping systems in 
accordance with paragraph (b) of this section must meet the following:
    (1) All pressure-containing materials must be accepted in accordance 
with Sec. 56.60-1 of this part.
    (2) Fittings must be designed so that the maximum allowable working 
pressure does not exceed one-fourth of the burst pressure or produce a 
primary stress greater than one-fourth of the

[[Page 181]]

ultimate tensile strength of the material for Class II systems and for 
all Class I, I-L, and II-L systems receiving ship motion dynamic 
analysis and nondestructive examination. For Class I, I-L, or II-L 
systems not receiving ship motion dynamic analysis and nondestructive 
examination under Sec. 56.07-10(c) of this part, the maximum allowable 
working pressure must not exceed one-fifth of the burst pressure or 
produce a primary stress greater than one-fifth of the ultimate tensile 
strength of the material. The maximum allowable working pressure may be 
determined by--
    (i) Calculations comparable to those of ANSI B31.1 or Section VIII 
of the ASME Code;
    (ii) Subjecting a representative model to a proof test or 
experimental stress analysis described in paragraph A-22 of Section I of 
the ASME Code; or
    (iii) Other means specifically accepted by the Marine Safety Center.
    (3) Fittings must be tested in accordance with Sec. 56.97-5 of this 
part.
    (4) If welded, fittings must be welded in accordance with subpart 
56.70 of this part and part 57 of this chapter or by other processes 
specifically approved by the Marine Safety Center. In addition, for 
fittings to be accepted for use in piping systems in accordance with 
this paragraph, the following requirements must be met:
    (i) For fittings sized three inches and below--
    (A) The longitudinal joints must be fabricated by either gas or arc 
welding;
    (B) One fitting of each size from each lot of 100 or fraction 
thereof must be flattened cold until the opposite walls meet without the 
weld developing any cracks;
    (C) One fitting of each size from each lot of 100 or fraction 
thereof must be hydrostatically tested to the pressure required for a 
seamless drawn pipe of the same size and thickness produced from 
equivalent strength material, as determined by the applicable pipe 
material specification; and
    (D) If a fitting fails to meet the test in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B) or 
(c)(4)(i)(C) of this section, no fitting in the lot from which the test 
fitting was chosen is acceptable.
    (ii) For fittings sized above three inches--
    (A) The longitudinal joints must be fabricated by arc welding;
    (B) For pressures exceeding 150 pounds per square inch, each fitting 
must be radiographically examined as specified in Section VIII of the 
ASME Code;
    (C) For pressures not exceeding 150 pounds per square inch, the 
first fitting from each size in each lot of 20 or fraction thereof must 
be examined by radiography to ensure that the welds are of acceptable 
quality;
    (D) One fitting of each size from each lot of 100 or fraction 
thereof must be hydrostatically tested to the pressure required for a 
seamless drawn pipe of the same size and thickness produced from 
equivalent strength material, as determined by the applicable pipe 
material specification; and
    (E) If a fitting fails to meet the test in paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(C) 
or (c)(4)(ii)(D) of this section, no fitting in the lot from which the 
test fitting was chosen is acceptable.
    (d) Single welded butt joints without the use of backing strips may 
be employed in the fabrication of pipe joining fittings of welded 
construction provided radiographic examination indicates that complete 
penetration is obtained.
    (e) Each pipe joining fitting must be marked in accordance with MSS 
Standard SP-25.



Sec. 56.15-5  Fluid-conditioner fittings.

    (a) Fluid conditioner fittings certified in accordance with subpart 
50.25 of this subchapter are acceptable for use in piping systems.
    (b) Fluid conditioner fittings, not containing hazardous materials 
as defined in Sec. 150.115 of this chapter, which are made in 
accordance with the applicable standards listed in Table 56.60-1(b) of 
this part and of materials complying with subpart 56.60 of this part, 
may be used within the material, size, pressure, and temperature 
limitations of those standards and within any further limitations 
specified in this subchapter.
    (c) The following requirements apply to nonstandard fluid 
conditioner fittings which do not contain hazardous

[[Page 182]]

materials as defined in Sec. 150.115 of this chapter:
    (1) The following nonstandard fluid conditioner fittings must meet 
the applicable requirements in Sec. 54.01-5 (c)(3), (c)(4), and (d) of 
this chapter or the remaining provisions in part 54 of this chapter, 
except that Coast Guard shop inspection is not required:
    (i) Nonstandard fluid conditioner fittings that have a net internal 
volume greater than 0.04 cubic meters (1.5 cubic feet) and that are 
rated for temperatures and pressures exceeding those specified as 
minimums for Class I piping systems.
    (ii) Nonstandard fluid-conditioner fittings that have an internal 
diameter exceeding 15 centimeters (6 inches) and that are rated for 
temperatures and pressures exceeding those specified as minimums for 
Class I piping systems.
    (2) All other nonstandard fluid conditioner fittings must meet the 
following:
    (i) All pressure-containing materials must be accepted in accordance 
with Sec. 56.60-1 of this part.
    (ii) Nonstandard fluid conditioner fittings must be designed so that 
the maximum allowable working pressure does not exceed one-fourth of the 
burst pressure or produce a primary stress greater than one-fourth of 
the ultimate tensile strength of the material for Class II systems and 
for all Class I, I-L, and II-L systems receiving ship motion dynamic 
analysis and nondestructive examination. For Class I, I-L, or II-L 
systems not receiving ship motion dynamic analysis and nondestructive 
examination under Sec. 56.07-10(c) of this part, the maximum allowable 
working pressure must not exceed one-fifth of the burst pressure or 
produce a primary stress greater than one-fifth of the ultimate tensile 
strength of the material. The maximum allowable working pressure may be 
determined by--
    (A) Calculations comparable to those of ANSI B31.1 or Section VIII 
of the ASME Code;
    (B) Subjecting a representative model to a proof test or 
experimental stress analysis described in paragraph A-22 of Section I of 
the ASME Code; or
    (C) Other means specifically accepted by the Marine Safety Center.
    (iii) Nonstandard fluid conditioner fittings must be tested in 
accordance with Sec. 56.97-5 of this part.
    (iv) If welded, nonstandard fluid conditioner fittings must be 
welded in accordance with subpart 56.70 of this part and part 57 of this 
chapter or by other processes specifically approved by the Marine Safety 
Center.
    (d) All fluid conditioner fittings that contain hazardous materials 
as defined in Sec. 150.115 of this chapter must meet the applicable 
requirements of part 54 of this chapter, except subpart 54.10.
    (e) Heat exchangers having headers and tubes and brazed boiler steam 
air heaters are not considered fluid conditioner fittings and must meet 
the requirements in part 54 of this chapter regardless of size. For 
brazed boiler steam air heaters, see also Sec. 56.30-30(b)(1) of this 
part.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40602, Oct. 2, 1989, as amended by CGD 83-043, 60 FR 
24772, May 10, 1995]



Sec. 56.15-10  Special purpose fittings.

    (a) Special purpose fittings certified in accordance with subpart 
50.25 of this subchapter are acceptable for use in piping systems.
    (b) Special purpose fittings made in accordance with the applicable 
standards listed in Table 56.60-1(b) of this part and of materials 
complying with subpart 56.60 of this part, may be used within the 
material, size, pressure, and temperature limitations of those standards 
and within any further limitations specified in this subchapter.
    (c) Nonstandard special purpose fittings must meet the requirements 
of Sec. Sec. 56.30-25, 56.30-40, 56.35-10, 56.35-15, or 56.35-35 of 
this part, as applicable.



                          Subpart 56.20_Valves



Sec. 56.20-1  General.

    (a) Valves certified in accordance with subpart 50.25 of this 
subchapter are acceptable for use in piping systems.
    (b) Non-welded valves complying with the standards listed in Sec. 
56.60-1 of this part may be used within the specified pressure and 
temperature ratings

[[Page 183]]

of those standards, provided the limitations of Sec. 56.07-10(c) of 
this part are applied. Materials must comply with subpart 56.60 of this 
part. Welded valves complying with the standards and specifications 
listed in Sec. 56.60-1 of this part may be used in Class II systems 
only unless they meet paragraph (c) of this section.
    (c) All other valves must meet the following:
    (1) All pressure-containing materials must be accepted in accordance 
with Sec. 56.60-1 of this part.
    (2) Valves must be designed so that the maximum allowable working 
pressure does not exceed one-fourth of the burst pressure or produce a 
primary stress greater than one-fourth of the ultimate tensile strength 
of the material for Class II systems and for all Class I, I-L, and II-L 
systems receiving ship motion dynamic analysis and nondestructive 
examination. For Class I, I-L, or II-L systems not receiving ship motion 
dynamic analysis and nondestructive examination under Sec. 56.07- 10(c) 
of this part, the maximum allowable working pressure must not exceed 
one-fifth of the burst pressure or produce a primary stress greater than 
one-fifth of the ultimate tensile strength of the material. The maximum 
allowable working pressure may be determined by--
    (i) Calculations comparable to those of ANSI B31.1 or Section VIII 
of the ASME Code, if the valve shape permits this;
    (ii) Subjecting a representative model to a proof test or 
experimental stress analysis described in paragraph A-22 of Section I of 
the ASME Code; or
    (iii) Other means specifically accepted by the Marine Safety Center.
    (3) Valves must be tested in accordance with Sec. 56.97-5 of this 
part.
    (4) If welded, valves must be welded in accordance with subpart 
56.70 of this part and part 57 of this chapter or by other processes 
specifically approved by the Marine Safety Center.
    (d) Where liquid trapped in any closed valve can be heated and an 
uncontrollable rise in pressure can result, means must be provided in 
the design, installation, and operation of the valve to ensure that the 
pressure in the valve does not exceed that allowed by this part for the 
attained temperature. (For example, if a flexible wedge gate valve with 
the stem installed horizontally is closed, liquid from testing, 
cleaning, or condensation can be trapped in the bonnet section of the 
closed valve.) Any resulting penetration of the pressure wall of the 
valve must meet the requirements of this part and those for threaded and 
welded auxiliary connections in ANSI B16.34.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40604, Oct. 2, 1989; 55 FR 39968, Oct. 1, 1990]



Sec. 56.20-5  Marking (reproduces 107.2).

    (a) Each valve shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark and 
reference symbol to indicate the service conditions for which the 
manufacturer guarantees the valve. The marking shall be in accordance 
with MSS-SP-25.



Sec. 56.20-7  Ends.

    (a) Valves may be used with flanged, threaded, butt welding, socket 
welding or other ends in accordance with applicable standards as 
specified in subpart 56.60.



Sec. 56.20-9  Valve construction.

    (a) All valves must close with a right-hand (clockwise) motion of 
the handwheel or operating lever when facing the end of the valve stem. 
Gate, globe and angle valves must generally be of the rising-stem type, 
preferably with the stem threads external to the valve body. Where 
operating conditions will not permit such installations, the use of 
nonrising-stem valves will be permitted. Nonrising-stem valves, lever 
operated valves, and any other valve where, due to design, the position 
of the disc or closure mechanism is not obvious shall be fitted with 
indicators to show whether the valve is opened or closed. See Sec. 
56.50-1(g)(2)(iii). Such indicators are not required for valves located 
in tanks or similar inaccessible spaces where indication is provided at 
the remote valve operator. Operating levers of the quarter-turn (rotary) 
valves must be parallel to the fluid flow in the open position and 
perpendicular to the fluid flow in the closed position.
    (b) Valves of Class I piping systems (for restrictions in other 
classes refer

[[Page 184]]

to sections on low temperature service), having diameters exceeding 2 
inches must have bolted, pressure seal, or breech lock bonnets and 
flanged or welding ends, except that socket type welding ends shall not 
be used where prohibited by Sec. 56.30-5(c) of this part, Sec. 56.30-
10(b)(4) of this part for the same pressure class, or elsewhere in this 
part. For diameters not exceeding 2 inches, screwed union bonnet or 
bolted bonnet, or bonnetless valves of a type which will positively 
prevent the stem from screwing out of the body may be employed. Outside 
screw and yoke design must be used for valves 3 inches and larger for 
pressures above 600 pounds per square inch gage. Cast iron valves with 
screwed-in or screwed-over bonnets are prohibited. Union bonnet type 
cast iron valves must have the bonnet ring made of steel, bronze, or 
malleable iron.
    (c) Valves must be designed for the maximum pressure to which they 
may be subjected, but in no case shall the design pressure be less than 
50 pounds per square inch gage. The use of wafer type resilient seated 
valves is not permitted for shell connections unless they are so 
arranged that the piping immediately inboard of the valve can be removed 
without affecting the watertight integrity of the shell connection. 
Refer also to Sec. 56.20-15(b)(2)(iii) of this part. Large fabricated 
ballast manifold connecting lines exceeding 8 inches nominal pipe size 
must be designed for a pressure of not less than 25 pounds per square 
inch gage.
    (d) Disks or disk faces, seats, stems and other wearing parts of 
valves shall be made of material possessing corrosion and heat-resisting 
qualities suitable for the service conditions to which they may be 
subjected.
    (e) Plug cocks shall be constructed with satisfactory and positive 
means of preventing the plug from becoming loosened or removed from the 
body when the plug is operated. Cocks having plug locking arrangements 
depending on cotter pins are prohibited.
    (f) Cocks shall be marked in a straight line with the body to 
indicate whether they are open or closed.
    (g) Materials forming a portion of the pressure barrier shall comply 
with the applicable provisions of this part.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40604, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48050, Sept. 18, 1995; USCG-2004-
18884, 69 FR 58346, Sept. 30, 2004]



Sec. 56.20-15  Valves employing resilient material.

    (a) A valve in which the closure is accomplished by resilient 
nonmetallic material instead of a metal to metal seat shall comply with 
the design, material, construction and testing for valves specified in 
this part.
    (b) Valves employing resilient material shall be divided into three 
categories, Positive shutoff, Category A, and Category B, and shall be 
tested and used as follows:
    (1) Positive shutoff valves. The closed valve must pass less than 10 
ml/hr (0.34 fluid oz/hr) of liquid or less than 3 l/hr (0.11 cubic ft/
hr) of gas per inch nominal pipe size through the line after removal of 
all resilient material and testing at full rated pressure. Packing 
material must be fire resistant. Piping subject to internal head 
pressure from a tank containing oil must be fitted with positive shutoff 
valves located at the tank in accordance with Sec. 56.50-60(d). 
Otherwise positive shutoff valves may be used in any location in lieu of 
a required Category A or Category B valve.
    (2) Category A valves. The closed valve must pass less than the 
greater of 5 percent of its fully open flow rate or 15 percent divided 
by the square root of the nominal pipe size (NPS) of its fully open flow 
rate through the line after complete removal of all resilient seating 
material and testing at full rated pressure; as represented by the 
formula: (15% / SQRT x (NPS)) (Fully open flow rate). Category A valves 
may be used in any location except where positive shutoff valves are 
required by Sec. 56.50-60(d). Category A valves are required in the 
following locations:
    (i) Valves at vital piping system manifolds;
    (ii) Isolation valves in cross-connects between two piping systems, 
at least one of which is a vital system, where

[[Page 185]]

failure of the valve in a fire would prevent the vital system(s) from 
functioning as designed.
    (iii) Valves providing closure for any opening in the shell of the 
vessel.
    (3) Category B valves. The closed valve will not provide effective 
closure of the line or will permit appreciable leakage from the valve 
after the resilient material is damaged or destroyed. Category B valves 
are not required to be tested and may be used in any location except 
where a Category A or positive shutoff valve is required.
    (c) If a valve designer elects to use either calculations or actual 
fire testing in lieu of material removal and pressure testing, the 
proposed calculation method or test plan must be accepted by the 
Commandant (G-MSE).

[CGD 95-028, 62 FR 51200, Sept. 30, 1997]



Sec. 56.20-20  Valve bypasses.

    (a) Sizes of bypasses shall be in accordance with MSS-SP-45.
    (b) Pipe for bypasses should be at least Schedule 80 seamless, and 
of a material of the same nominal chemical composition and physical 
properties as that used for the main line. Lesser thickness may be 
approved depending on the installation and service conditions.
    (c) Bypasses may be integral or attached.



Subpart 56.25_Pipe Flanges, Blanks, Flange Facings, Gaskets, and Bolting



Sec. 56.25-5  Flanges.

    Flanges must conform to the design requirements of the applicable 
standards of Table 56.60-1(b) of this part or Appendix 2 of section VIII 
of the ASME Code. Plate flanges must meet the requirements of Sec. 
56.30-10(b)(5) of this part and the material requirements of Sec. 
56.60-1(a) of this part. Flanges may be integral or may be attached to 
pipe by threading, welding, brazing, or other means within the 
applicable standards specified in Table 56.60-1(b) of this part and the 
requirements of this subpart. For flange facing gasket combinations 
other than those specified above, calculations must be submitted 
indicating that the gaskets will not result in a higher bolt loading or 
flange moment than for the acceptable configurations.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40605, Oct. 2, 1989, as amended by USCG-2002-13058, 
67 FR 61278, Sept. 30, 2002]



Sec. 56.25-7  Blanks.

    (a) Blanks shall conform to the design requirements of 104.5.3 of 
ANSI-B31.1.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970]



Sec. 56.25-10  Flange facings.

    (a) Flange facings shall be in accordance with the applicable 
standards listed in Table 56.60-1(b) and MSS-SP-6.
    (b) When bolting class 150 standard steel flanges to flat face cast 
iron flanges, the steel flange must be furnished with a flat face, and 
bolting must be in accordance with Sec. 56.25-20 of this part. Class 
300 raised face steel flanges may be bolted to class 250 raised face 
cast iron flanges with bolting in accordance with Sec. 56.25-20(b) of 
this part.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40605, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.25-15  Gaskets (reproduces 108.4).

    (a) Gaskets shall be made of materials which are not injuriously 
affected by the fluid or by temperature.
    (b) Only metallic and suitable asbestos-free nonmetallic gaskets may 
be used on flat or raised face flanges if the expected normal operating 
pressure exceeds 720 pounds per square inch or the operating temperature 
exceeds 750 [deg]F.
    (c) The use of metal and nonmetallic gaskets is not limited as to 
pressure provided the gasket materials are suitable for the maximum 
fluid temperatures.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 86-035, 54 FR 
36316, Sept. 1, 1989]



Sec. 56.25-20  Bolting.

    (a) General. (1) Bolts, studs, nuts, and washers must comply with 
applicable standards and specifications listed in Sec. 56.60-1 of this 
part. Unless otherwise specified, bolting must be in accordance with 
ANSI B16.5.

[[Page 186]]

    (2) Bolts and studs must extend completely through the nuts.
    (3) See Sec. 58.30-15(c) of this chapter for exceptions on bolting 
used in fluid power and control systems.
    (b) Carbon steel bolts or bolt studs may be used if expected normal 
operating pressure does not exceed 300 pounds per square inch gage and 
the expected normal operating temperature does not exceed 400 [deg]F. 
Carbon steel bolts must have heavy hexagon heads in accordance with ANSI 
B18.2.1 and must have heavy semifinished hexagonal nuts in accordance 
with ANSI B18.2.2, unless the bolts are tightly fitted to the holes and 
flange stress calculations taking the bolt bending stresses into account 
are submitted. When class 250 cast iron flanges are used or when class 
125 cast iron flanges are used with ring gaskets, the bolting material 
must be carbon steel conforming to ASTM Specification A 307 
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 56.01-2), Grade B.
    (c) Alloy steel stud bolts must be threaded full length or, if 
desired, may have reduced shanks of a diameter not less than that at the 
root of the threads. They must have heavy semifinished hexagonal nuts in 
accordance with ANSI B18.2.2.
    (d) All alloy bolts or bolt studs and accompanying nuts are 
recommended to be threaded in accordance with ANSI B1.1, Class 2A 
external threads, and Class 2B internal threads (8-thread series 8UN for 
1 inch and larger).
    (e) (Reproduces 108.5.6.) Washers, when used under nuts, shall be of 
forged or rolled steel.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec.18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40605, Oct. 2, 1989; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



        Subpart 56.30_Selection and Limitations of Piping Joints



Sec. 56.30-1  Scope (replaces 110 through 118).

    (a) The selection and limitation of piping joints shall be as 
required by this subpart in lieu of requirements in 110 through 118 of 
ANSI-B31.1; however certain requirements are marked ``reproduced'' in 
this subpart.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970]



Sec. 56.30-3  Piping joints (reproduces 110).

    The type of piping joint used shall be suitable for the design 
conditions and shall be selected with consideration of joint tightness, 
mechanical strength and the nature of the fluid handled.



Sec. 56.30-5  Welded joints.

    (a) General. Welded joints may be used for materials for which 
welding procedures, welders, and welding machine operators have been 
qualified in accordance with part 57 of this subchapter.
    (b) Butt welds--general. Butt welds may be made with or without 
backing or insert rings within the limitations established in Sec. 
56.70-15. When the use of backing rings will result in undesirable 
conditions such as severe stress concentrations, corrosion or erosion, 
then:
    (1) The backing rings shall be removed and the inside of the joint 
ground smooth, or
    (2) The joint shall be welded without backing rings, or
    (3) Consumable insert rings must be used. Commonly used types of 
butt welding end preparations are shown in ANSI B16.25.
    (4) Restrictions as to the use of backing rings appear for the low 
temperature piping systems and should be checked when designing for 
these systems.
    (c) Socket welds (Modifies 127.3.3A.). (1) Socket welds must conform 
to ANSI B16.11, applicable standards listed in Table 56.60-1(b) of this 
part, and Figure 127.4.4C in ANSI B31.1 as modified by Sec. 56.30-
10(b)(4) of this part. A gap of approximately one-sixteenth inch between 
the end of the pipe and the bottom of the socket must be provided before 
welding. This may best be provided by bottoming the pipe and backing off 
slightly before tacking.
    (2) Socket welds must not be used where severe erosion or crevice 
corrosion is expected to occur. Restrictions on the use of socket welds 
appear in

[[Page 187]]

Sec. 56.70-15(d)(3) of this part for Class I service and in Sec. 
56.50-105 of this part for low temperature service. These sections 
should be checked when designing for these systems. See Sec. 56.70-
15(d)(4) of this part for Class II service.
    (3) (Reproduces 111.3.4.) Drains and bypasses may be attached to a 
valve of fitting by socket welding provided the socket depth, bore 
diameter, and shoulder thickness conform to ANSI B16.11.
    (d) Fillet welds. Fillet welds may vary from convex to concave. The 
size of a fillet weld is determined as shown in Figure 127.4.4A of ANSI 
B31.1. Fillet weld details for socket-welding components must meet Sec. 
56.30-5(c) of this part. Fillet weld details for flanges must meet Sec. 
56.30-10 of this part. See also Sec. 56.70-15(d)(3) and (d)(4) of this 
part for applications of fillet welds.
    (e) Seal welds. Seal welds may be used but shall not be considered 
as contributing any strength to the joint.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40605, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-
012, 60 FR 48050, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 56.30-10  Flanged joints (modifies 104.5.1(a)).

    (a) Flanged or butt-welded joints are required for Classes I and I-L 
piping for nominal diameters exceeding 2 inches, except as otherwise 
specified in this subchapter.
    (b) Flanges may be attached by any method shown in Figure 56.30-
10(b) or by any additional means that may be approved by the Marine 
Safety Center. Pressure temperature ratings of the appropriate ANSI 
standard must not be exceeded.
    (1) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 1. Flanges with screw threads may be 
used in accordance with Table 56.30-20(c) of this part.
    (2) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 2. ANSI B16.5 class 150 and class 300 
low-hubbed flanges with screw threads, plus the addition of a strength 
fillet weld of the size as shown, may be used in Class I systems not 
exceeding 750 [deg]F or 4 NPS, in Class II systems without diameter 
limitations, and in Class II-L systems not exceeding 1 NPS. If 100 
percent radiography is required by Sec. 56.95-10 of this part for the 
class, diameter, wall thickness, and material of pipe being joined, the 
use of the threaded flanges is not permitted and buttwelding flanges 
must be provided. For Class II piping systems, the size of the strength 
fillet may be limited to a maximum of 0.525 inch instead of 1.4T.
    (3) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 3. ANSI B16.5 slip-on flanges may be 
used in Class I, Class II, or Class II-L systems not to exceed the 
service pressure-temperature ratings for the class 300 and lower class 
flanges, within the temperature limitations of the material selected for 
use, and not to exceed 4 NPS in Class I and Class II-L systems. If 100 
percent radiography is required by Sec. 56.95-10 of this part for the 
class, diameter, wall thickness, and material of the pipe being joined, 
the use of slip-on flanges is not permitted and a butt welding flange 
must be provided. The configuration in Figure 127.4.4B(b) of ANSI B31.1. 
utilizing a face and backweld may be preferable in those applications 
where it is desirable to eliminate void spaces. For Class II piping 
systems, the size of the strength fillet may be limited to a maximum of 
0.525 inch instead of 1.4T and the distance from the face of the flange 
to the end of the pipe may be a maximum of three-eighths inch. 
Restrictions on the use of slip-on flanges appear in Sec. 56.50-105 of 
this part for low temperature piping systems.
    (4) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 4. ANSI B16.5 socket welding flanges 
may be used in Class I or II-L systems not exceeding 3 NPS for class 600 
and lower class flanges and 2\1/2\ NPS for class 900 and class 1500 
flanges within the service pressure-temperature ratings of the standard. 
Whenever full radiography is required by Sec. 56.95-10 for the class, 
diameter, and wall thickness of the pipe being joined, the use of socket 
welding flanges in not permitted and a butt weld type connection must be 
provided. For Class II piping, socket welding flanges may be used 
without diameter limitation, and the size of the fillet weld may be 
limited to a maximum of 0.525 inch instead of 1.4T. Restrictions on the 
use of socket welds appear in Sec. 56.50-105 for low temperature piping 
systems.
    (5) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 5. Flanges fabricated from steel 
plate meeting the requirements of part 54 of

[[Page 188]]

this chapter may be used for Class II piping for pressures not exceeding 
150 pounds per square inch and temperatures not exceeding 450 [deg]F. 
Plate material listed in UCS-6(b) Section VIII of the ASME Code may not 
be used in this application, except that material meeting ASTM 
Specification A 36 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 56.01-2) may be 
used. The fabricated flanges must conform at least to the American 
National Standard class 150 flange dimensions. The size of the strength 
fillet weld may be limited to a maximum of 0.525 inches instead of 1.4T 
and the distance from the face of the flange to the end of the pipe may 
be a maximum of three-eighths inch.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.024

                Figure 56.30-10(b)--Methods of attachment

[[Page 189]]

    Note: T is nominal pipe wall thickness used. Refer to text in Sec. 
56.30-10(b) for modifications on Class II piping systems. Fillet weld 
leg size need not exceed the thickness of the applicable ANSI hub.
    (6) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 6. Steel plate flanges meeting the 
material and construction requirements listed in subparagraph (5) of 
this paragraph may be used for Class II piping for pressures not 
exceeding 150 pounds per square inch or temperatures not exceeding 650 
[deg]F. The flange shall be attached to the pipe as shown by Figure 
56.30-10(b). Method 6. The pressure shall not exceed the American 
National Standard Service pressure temperature rating. The size of the 
strength fillet weld may be limited to a maximum of 0.525 inch instead 
of 1.4T and the distance from the face of the flange to the end of the 
pipe may be a maximum of three-eighths inch.
    (7) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 7. Lap joint flanges (Van Stone) may 
be used for Class I and Class II piping. The Van Stone equipment shall 
be operated by competent personnel. The ends of the pipe shall be heated 
from 1,650[deg] to 1,900 [deg]F. dependent on the size of the pipe prior 
to the flanging operation. The foregoing temperatures shall be carefully 
adhered to in order to prevent excess scaling of the pipe. The extra 
thickness of metal built up in the end of the pipe during the forming 
operation shall be machined to restore the pipe to its original 
diameter. The machined surface shall be free from surface defects and 
the back of the Van Stone lap shall be machined to a fine tool finish to 
furnish a line contact with the mating surface on the flange for the 
full circumference as close as possible to the fillet of the flange. The 
number of heats to be used in forming a flange shall be determined by 
the size of the pipe and not more than two pushups per heat are 
permitted. The width of the lap flange shall be at least three times the 
thickness of the pipe wall and the end of the pipe shall be properly 
stress relieved after the flanging operation is completed. Manufacturers 
desiring to produce this type of joint shall demonstrate to a marine 
inspector that they have the proper equipment and personnel to produce 
an acceptable joint.
    (8) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 8. Welding neck flanges may be used 
on any piping provided the flanges are butt-welded to the pipe. The 
joint shall be welded as indicated by Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 8, and 
a backing ring employed which will permit complete penetration of the 
weld metal. If a backing ring is not used, refer to Sec. 56.30-5(b) for 
requirements.
    (9) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 9. Welding neck flanges may also be 
attached to pipe by a double-welded butt joint as shown by Figure 56.30-
10(b), Method 9.
    (10) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 10. Flanges may be attached by 
shrinking the flange on to the end of the pipe and flaring the end of 
the pipe to an angle of not less than 20[deg]. A fillet weld of the size 
shown by Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 10, shall be used to attach the hub 
to the pipe. This type of flange is limited to a maximum pressure of 300 
pounds per square inch at temperatures not exceeding 500 [deg]F.
    (11) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 11. The flange of the type described 
and illustrated by Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 10, except with the fillet 
weld omitted, may be used for Class II piping for pressures not 
exceeding 150 pounds per square inch and temperatures not exceeding 450 
[deg]F.
    (12) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 12. High-hub bronze flanges may be 
used for temperatures not exceeding 425 [deg]F. The hub of the flange 
shall be bored to a depth not less than that required for a threaded 
connection of the same diameter leaving a shoulder for the pipe to butt 
against. A preinserted ring of silver brazing alloy having a melting 
point not less than 1,000 [deg]F. and of sufficient quantity to fill the 
annular clearance between the flange and the pipe shall be inserted in 
the groove. The pipe shall then be inserted in the flange and sufficient 
heat applied externally to melt the brazing alloy until it completely 
fills the clearance between the hub and the flange of the pipe. A 
suitable flux shall be applied to the surfaces to be joined to produce a 
satisfactory joint.
    (13) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 13. The type of flange as described 
for Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 12, may be employed and in lieu of an 
annular groove being machined in the hub of the flange

[[Page 190]]

for the preinserted ring of silver brazing alloy, a bevel may be 
machined on the end of the hub and the silver brazing alloy introduced 
from the end of the hub to attach the pipe to the flange.
    (14) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 14. Flanges may be attached to 
nonferrous pipe by inserting the pipe in the flange and flanging the end 
of the pipe into the recess machined in the face of the flange to 
receive it. The width of the flange shall be not less than three times 
the pipe wall thickness. In addition, the pipe shall be securely brazed 
to the wall of the flange.
    (15) Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 15. The flange of the type described 
and illustrated by Figure 56.30-10(b), Method 14, except with the 
brazing omitted, may be used for Class II piping and where the 
temperature does not exceed 250 [deg]F.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40605, Oct. 2, 1989; USCG-
2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 56.30-15  Expanded or rolled joints.

    (a) Expanded or rolled joints may be used where experience or test 
has demonstrated that the joint is suitable for the design conditions 
and where adequate provisions are made to prevent separation of the 
joint. Specific application for use must be made to the Commandant.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 56.30-20  Threaded joints.

    (a) Threaded joints may be used within the limitations specified in 
subpart 56.15 of this chapter and within other limitations specified in 
this section.
    (b) (Reproduces 114.1.) All threads on piping components must be 
taper pipe threads in accordance with the applicable standard listed in 
Table 56.60-1(b). Threads other than taper pipe threads may be used for 
piping components where tightness of the joint depends on a seal weld or 
a seating surface other than the threads, and where experience or test 
has demonstrated that such threads are suitable.
    (c) Threaded joints may not be used where severe erosion, crevice 
corrosion, shock, or vibration is expected to occur; or at temperatures 
over 925 [deg]F. Size limitations are given in Table 56.30-20(c) of this 
section.

                Table 56.30-20(c)--Threaded Joints \1,2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
       Maximum nominal size, inches          Maximum pressure, p.s.i.g.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Above 2........................  (Not permitted in Class I
                                             piping service.)
Above 1 up to 2.....  600.
Above \3/4\ up to 1.  1,200.
\3/4\ and below................  1,500.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Further restrictions on the use of threaded joints appear in the low
  temperature piping section.
\2\ Threaded joints in hydraulic systems are permitted above the
  pressures indicated for the nominal sizes shown when commercially
  available components such as pumps, valves and strainers may only be
  obtained with threaded connections.

    (d) Pipe with a wall thickness less than that of standard weight of 
ANSI B36.10 steel pipe must not be threaded regardless of service. For 
additional threading limitations for pipe used in steam service over 250 
pounds per square inch or water service over 100 pounds per square inch 
and 200 [deg]F, see part 104.1.2(c)(1) of ANSI B31.1. Restrictions as to 
the use of threaded joints appear for low temperature piping and should 
be checked when designing for these systems.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40164, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-
140, 54 FR 40606, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.30-25  Flared, flareless, and compression fittings.

    (a) This section applies to pipe fittings that are mechanically 
connected to pipe by such means as ferrules, flared ends, swaging, 
elastic strain preload, crimping, bite-type devices, and shape memory 
alloys. Fittings to which this section applies must be designed, 
constructed, tested, and marked in accordance with ASTM F 1387 
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 56.01-2). Previously approved 
fittings may be retained as long as they are maintained in good 
condition to the satisfaction of the Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection.
    (b) Flared, flareless and compression fittings may be used within 
the service limitations of size, pressure, temperature, and vibration 
recommended by the manufacturer and as specified in this section.
    (c) Flared, flareless, and compression type tubing fittings may be 
used for

[[Page 191]]

tube sizes not exceeding 50 millimeters (2 inches) outside diameter 
within the limitations of applicable standards and specifications listed 
in this section and Sec. 56.60-1 of this part.
    (d) Flareless fittings must be of a design in which the gripping 
member or sleeve must grip or bite into the outer surface of the tube 
with sufficient strength to hold the tube against pressure, but without 
appreciably distorting the inside tube diameter or reducing the wall 
thickness. The gripping member must also form a pressure seal against 
the fitting body.
    (e) For fluid services, other than hydraulic systems, using a 
combustible fluid as defined in Sec. 30.10-15 of this chapter and for 
fluid services using a flammable fluid as defined in Sec. 30.10-22 of 
this chapter, flared fittings must be used; except that flareless 
fittings of the nonbite type may be used when the tubing system is of 
steel, nickel copper or copper nickel alloy. When using copper or copper 
zinc alloy, flared fittings are required. (See also Sec. 56.50-70 for 
gasoline fuel systems, Sec. 56.50-75 for diesel fuel systems, and Sec. 
58.25-20 for hydraulic systems for steering gear.)

[CGD 95-027, 61 FR 26000, May 23, 1996; 61 FR 35138, July 5, 1996, as 
amended by USCG-1999-5151, 64 FR 67180, Dec. 1, 1999; USCG-2000-7790, 65 
FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 56.30-27  Caulked joints.

    Caulked joints may not be used in marine installations.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40606, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.30-30  Brazed joints.

    (a) General (refer also to subpart 56.75). Brazed socket-type joints 
shall be made with suitable brazing alloys. The minimum socket depth 
shall be sufficient for the intended service. Brazing alloy shall either 
be end-fed into the socket or shall be provided in the form of a 
preinserted ring in a groove in the socket. The brazing alloy shall be 
sufficient to fill completely the annular clearance between the socket 
and the pipe or tube.
    (b) Limitations. (1) Brazed socket-type joints shall not be used on 
systems containing flammable or combustible fluids in areas where fire 
hazards are involved or where the service temperature exceeds 425 
[deg]F. When specifically approved by the Commandant, brazed 
construction may be used for service temperatures up to 525 [deg]F. in 
boiler steam air heaters provided the requirements of UB-12 of section 
VIII of the ASME Code are satisfied at the highest temperature desired.
    (2) Brazed joints depending solely upon a fillet, rather than 
primarily upon brazing material between the pipe and socket are not 
acceptable.



Sec. 56.30-35  Gasketed mechanical couplings.

    (a) This section applied to pipe fittings that form a seal by 
compressing a resilient gasket onto the pipe joint primarily by threaded 
fasteners and where joint creep is only restricted by such means as 
machined grooves, centering pins, or welded clips. Fittings to which 
this section applies must be designed, constructed, tested, and marked 
in accordance with ASTM F 1476 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 
56.01-2) and ASTM F 1548 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 56.01-2). 
Previously approved fittings may be retained as long as they are 
maintained in good condition to the satisfaction of the Officer in 
Charge, Marine Inspection.
    (b) Gasketed mechanical couplings may be used within the service 
limitations of pressure, temperature and vibration recommended by the 
manufacturer, except that gasketed mechanical couplings must not be used 
in--
    (1) Any location where leakage, undetected flooding or impingement 
of liquid on vital equipment may disable the vessel; or
    (2) In tanks where the liquid conveyed in the piping system is not 
chemically compatible with the liquid in the tank.
    (c) Gasketed mechanical couplings must not be used as expansion 
joints. Positive restraints must be included, where necessary, to 
prevent the coupling from creeping on the pipe and uncovering the joint. 
Bite-type devices do not provide positive protection against creep and 
are generally not accepted for this purpose. Machined grooves, centering 
pins, and welded clips are

[[Page 192]]

considered positive means of protection against creep.

[CGD 95-027, 61 FR 26001, May 23, 1996, as amended by USCG-1999-5151, 64 
FR 67180, Dec. 1, 1999]



Sec. 56.30-40  Flexible pipe couplings of the compression or slip-on type.

    (a) Flexible pipe couplings of the compression or slip-on type must 
not be used as expansion joints. To ensure that the maximum axial 
displacement (approximately \3/8\ maximum) of each coupling 
is not exceeded, positive restraints must be included in each 
installation.
    (b) Positive means must also be provided to prevent the coupling 
from ``creeping'' on the pipe and uncovering the joint. Bite type 
devices do not provide positive protection against creeping and are not 
generally accepted for this purpose unless other means are also 
incorporated. Machined grooves or centering pins are considered positive 
means, and other positive means will be considered.
    (c) Couplings which employ a solid sleeve with welded attachments on 
both pipes will require the removal of one set of attachments before 
dismantling. Rewelding of the attachments may require gas freeing of the 
line.
    (d) The installation shall be such as to preclude appreciable 
difference in the vibration magnitudes of the pipes joined by the 
couplings. The couplings shall not be used as a vibration damper. The 
vibration magnitude and frequency should not exceed that recommended by 
the coupling manufacturer.
    (e) Flexible couplings made in accordance with the applicable 
standards listed in Table 56.60-1(b) of this part and of materials 
complying with subpart 56.60 of this part may be used within the 
material, size, pressure, and temperature limitations of those standards 
and within any further limitations specified in this subchapter. 
Flexible couplings fabricated by welding must also comply with part 57 
of this chapter.
    (f) Flexible couplings must not be used in cargo holds or in any 
other space where leakage, undetected flooding, or impingement of liquid 
on vital equipment may disable the ship, or in tanks where the liquid 
conveyed in the piping system is not compatible with the liquid in the 
tank. Where flexible couplings are not allowed by this subpart, joints 
may be threaded, flanged and bolted, or welded.
    (g) Damaged or deteriorated gaskets shall not be reinstalled.
    (h) Each coupling shall be tested in accordance with Sec. 56.97-5.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40606, Oct. 2, 1989]



            Subpart 56.35_Expansion, Flexibility and Supports



Sec. 56.35-1  Pipe stress calculations (replaces 119.7).

    (a) A summary of the results of pipe stress calculations for the 
main and auxiliary steam piping where the design temperatures exceed 800 
[deg]F shall be submitted for approval. Calculations shall be made in 
accordance with one of the recognized methods of stress analysis 
acceptable to the Marine Safety Center to determine the magnitude and 
direction of the forces and movements at all terminal connections, 
anchor and junction points, as well as the resultant bending stress, 
longitudinal pressure stress, torsional stress, and combined expansion 
stress at all such points. The location of the maximum combined stress 
shall be indicated in each run of pipe between anchor points.
    (b) Special consideration will be given to the use of the full 
tabulated value of S in computing Sh and Sc where 
all material used in the system is subjected to additional 
nondestructive testing as specified by the Marine Safety Center, and 
where the calculations prescribed in 119.6.4 and 102.3.2 of ANSI-B31.1 
and Sec. 56.07-10 are performed. The nondestructive testing procedures 
and method of stress analysis shall be approved by the Marine Safety 
Center prior to the submission of computations and drawings for 
approval.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40607, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.35-10  Nonmetallic expansion joints (replaces 119.5.1).

    (a) Nonmetallic expansion joints certified in accordance with 
subpart 50.25

[[Page 193]]

of this subchapter are acceptable for use in piping systems.
    (b) Nonmetallic expansion joints must conform to the standards 
listed in Table 56.60-1(b) of this part. Nonmetallic expansion joints 
may be used within their specified pressure and temperature rating in 
vital and nonvital machinery sea connections inboard of the skin valve. 
These joints must not be used to correct for improper piping workmanship 
or misalignment. Joint movements must not exceed the limits set by the 
joint manufacturer.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40607, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.35-15  Metallic expansion joints (replaces 119.5.1).

    (a) Metallic expansion joints certified in accordance with subpart 
50.25 of this subchapter are acceptable for use in piping systems.
    (b) Metallic expansion joints must conform to the standards listed 
in Table 56.60-1(b) of this part and may be used within their specified 
pressure and temperature rating.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40607, Oct. 2, 1989]



    Subpart 56.50_Design Requirements Pertaining to Specific Systems



Sec. 56.50-1  General (replaces 122.6 through 122.10).

    The piping requirements in this subpart shall apply in lieu of 
requirements in 122.6 through 122.10 of ANSI-B31.1. Installation 
requirements applicable to all systems:
    (a) Where pipes and scuppers are carried through watertight or 
oiltight bulkheads, decks or tank tops, or are carried through fire 
control bulkheads and decks, the integrity of the structure shall be 
maintained. Lead or other heat sensitive materials shall not be used in 
piping systems which make such bulkhead or deck penetrations where the 
deterioration of such systems in the event of fire would impair the 
integrity of the bulkheads or decks. (For plastic pipe installations, 
see Sec. 56.60-25(a).) Where plate insert pads are used, bolted 
connections shall have threads tapped into the plate to a depth of not 
less than the diameter of the bolt. If welded, the pipe or flange shall 
be welded to both sides of the plating. Openings in structure through 
which pipes pass shall be reinforced where necessary. Flanges shall not 
be bolted to bulkheads so that the plate forms a part of the joint. 
Metallic materials having a melting point of 1,700 [deg]F. or less are 
considered heat sensitive and if used must be suitably insulated.
    (b)(1) Pipes piercing the collision bulkhead shall be fitted with 
screwdown valves operable from above the bulkhead deck and the valve 
shall be fitted inside the forepeak tank adjacent to the collision 
bulkhead. The pipe penetrating the collision bulkhead shall be welded to 
the bulkhead on both sides. On new installations or replacement in 
vessels of 150 gross tons and over, the valve body shall be of steel or 
ductile cast iron.
    (2) Passenger vessels shall not have the collision bulkhead pierced 
below the margin line by more than one pipe conveying liquids in the 
forepeak tank except that if the forepeak tank is divided to hold two 
different kinds of liquids, the collision bulkhead may be pierced below 
the margin line by two pipes, provided there is no practical alternative 
to the fitting of the second pipe and further provided the safety of the 
vessel is maintained.
    (c) Valves and cocks not forming part of a piping system are not 
permitted in watertight subdivision bulkheads, however, sluice valves or 
gates in oiltight bulkheads of tankships may be used if approved by the 
Marine Safety Center.
    (d) Piping shall not be run over or in the vicinity of switchboards 
or other electrical equipment if avoidable. When such leads are 
necessary, welded joints only shall be used and provision shall be made 
to prevent leakage from damaging the equipment.
    (e) Stuffing boxes shall not be used on deep tank bulkheads, double 
bottoms or in any position where they cannot be easily examined. This 
requirement does not apply to ore carriers operating on the Great Lakes 
or cargo lines of oil tankers.
    (f) Piping systems shall be installed so that under no condition 
will the operation of safety or relief valves be impaired.

[[Page 194]]

    (g)(1) Power actuated valves in systems other than as specified in 
Sec. 56.50-60 of this part may be used if approved for the system by 
the Marine Safety Center. All power actuated valves required in an 
emergency to operate the vessel's machinery, to maintain its stability, 
and to operate the bilge and firemain systems must have a manual means 
of operation.
    (2)(i) Remote valve controls that are not readily identifiable as to 
service must be fitted with nameplates.
    (ii) Remote valve controls must be accessible under service 
conditions.
    (iii) Remote valve controls, except reach rods, must be fitted with 
indicators that show whether the valves they control are open or closed. 
Valve position indicating systems must be independent of valve control 
systems.
    (iv) Valve reach rods must be adequately protected.
    (v) Solid reach rods must be used in tanks containing liquids, 
except that tank barges having plug cocks inside cargo tanks may have 
reach rods of extra-heavy pipe with the annular space between the 
lubricant tube and the pipe wall sealed with a nonsoluble to prevent 
penetration of the cargo.
    (3) Air operated remote control valves must be provided with self-
indicating lines at the control boards which indicate the desired valve 
positions, i.e., open or closed.
    (h) Suitable drains shall be provided at low points of piping 
systems.
    (i) Valves and cocks shall be located so as to be easily accessible 
and valves or cocks attached to the shell of the vessel or to sea chests 
located below the floorplating shall be operable from above the 
floorplates.
    (j) When welded fabrication is employed, a sufficient number of 
detachable joints shall be provided to facilitate overhauling and 
maintenance of machinery and appurtenances. The joints shall be located 
so that adequate space is provided for welding, and the location of the 
welds shall be indicated on the plans.
    (k) Piping, including valves, pipe fittings and flanges, conveying 
vapors, gases or liquids whose temperature exceeds 150 [deg]F., shall be 
suitably insulated where necessary to preclude injury to personnel.
    (l) Where pipes are run through dry cargo spaces they must be 
protected from mechanical injury by a suitable enclosure or other means.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40607, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.50-10  Special gaging requirements.

    (a) Where pressure reducing valves are employed (see 102.2.5(b) of 
ANSI-B31.1) a pressure gage shall be provided on the low pressure side 
of the reducing station.
    (b) Fuel oil service, fire, cargo and fuel oil transfer and boiler 
feed pumps must be provided with a pressure gage on the discharge side 
of the pump. Additional information pertaining to fire pumps is in Sec. 
34.10-5 of subchapter D (Tank Vessels), Sec. 76.10-5 of subchapter H 
(Passenger Vessels), Sec. 95.10-5 of subchapter I (Cargo and 
Miscellaneous Vessels), and Sec. 108.417 of subchapter IA (Mobile 
Offshore Drilling Units) of this chapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-251, 43 FR 56799, Dec. 4, 1978]



Sec. 56.50-15  Steam and exhaust piping.

    (a) The design pressures of the steam piping connected to the boiler 
drum or to the superheater inlet header shall not be less than the 
lowest pressure setting of any drum safety valve. The value of allowable 
stress for the material shall not exceed that corresponding to the 
saturated steam temperature at drum pressure and shall be selected as 
described in Sec. 56.07-10(e).
    (b) Main superheater outlet piping systems, desuperheated piping 
systems, and other auxiliary superheated piping systems led directly 
from the boiler superheater shall be designed for a pressure not less 
than the pressure at which the superheater safety valve is set. In the 
case of a superheated safety valve which is drum pilot actuated, the 
design pressure of such piping systems shall not be less than the 
pressure setting of the actuator valve on the drum. Where it can be 
shown that the limitations set forth in 102.2.4 of ANSI-B31.1 will not 
be exceeded, the design pressure of such piping systems may be reduced 
but shall not be less than the

[[Page 195]]

pressure setting of the actuator valve on the drum less the pressure 
drop through the superheater, including associated piping and a control 
desuperheater if fitted, at the normal rated operating condition. In 
both cases, the value of allowable stress shall be selected using a 
temperature not less than that of the steam at the superheater outlet at 
the normal rated operating conditions in accordance with Sec. 56.07-
10(e). Valves and fittings shall be selected for the above temperature 
and pressure from the accepted standards in Table 56.60-1(b), using the 
pressure-temperature rating in the standard.
    (c) Steam stop valves in sizes exceeding 6 inches shall be fitted 
with bypasses for heating the line and equalizing the pressure before 
the valve is opened.
    (d) In multiple boiler installations each boiler's main, auxiliary 
and desuperheated steam lines shall be fitted with two valves, one a 
stop valve and one a stop check valve.
    (e) Main and auxiliary steam stop valves must be readily accessible, 
operable by one person and arranged to seat against boiler pressure.
    (f) Where vessels are equipped with more than one boiler, the 
auxiliary steam piping shall be so arranged that steam for the whistle, 
steering gear, and electric-lighting plant may be supplied from any 
power boiler.
    (g) Steam and exhaust pipes shall not be led through coal bunkers or 
dry cargo spaces unless approved by the Commandant.
    (h)(1) Steam piping, with the exception of the steam heating system, 
must not be led through passageways, accommodation spaces, or public 
spaces unless the arrangement is specifically approved by the Marine 
Safety Center.
    (2) Steam pressure in steam heating systems must not exceed 150 
pounds per square inch gage, except that steam pressure for 
accommodation and public space heating must not exceed 45 pounds per 
square inch gage.
    (3) Steam lines and registers in non-accommodation and non-public 
spaces must be suitably located and/or shielded to minimize hazards to 
any personnel within the space. Where hazards in a space cannot be 
sufficiently minimized, the pressure in the steam line to that space 
must be reduced to a maximum of 45 pounds per square inch gage.
    (4) High temperature hot water for heating systems may not exceed 
375 [deg]F.
    (i) Where positive shutoff valves are fitted in the exhaust lines of 
machinery, and the exhaust side, including engine steam cylinders and 
chests, turbine casings, exhaust piping and shutoff valves, is not 
designed for the full inlet pressure, the exhaust side must be protected 
from over pressure by one of the following means:
    (1) A full flow relief valve in the exhaust side so set and of 
sufficient capacity to prevent the exhaust side from being accidentally 
or otherwise subjected to a pressure in excess of its maximum allowable 
pressure.
    (2) A sentinel relief valve or other warning device fitted on the 
exhaust side together with a back pressure trip device which will close 
the inlet valve prior to the exhaust side pressure exceeding the maximum 
allowable pressure. A device that will throttle the inlet valve, so that 
the exhaust side does not exceed the maximum allowable pressure, may be 
substituted for the back pressure trip.
    (j) Shore steam connections shall be fitted with a relief valve set 
at a pressure not exceeding the design pressure of the piping.
    (k) Means must be provided for draining every steam pipe in which 
dangerous water hammer might otherwise occur.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGFR 72-59R, 37 FR 6189, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 73-
254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40607, Oct. 2, 1989; 
CGD 83-043, 60 FR 24772, May 10, 1995]



Sec. 56.50-20  Pressure relief piping.

    (a) General. There must be no intervening stop valves between the 
vessel or piping system being protected and its protective device or 
devices, except as specifically provided for in other regulations or as 
specifically authorized by the Marine Safety Center.
    (b) Discharge lines (reproduces 122.6.2(d)). Discharge lines from 
pressure-relieving safety devices shall be designed to facilitate 
drainage.

[[Page 196]]

    (c) Stop valves. Stop valves between the safety or relief valve and 
the point of discharge are not permitted, except as specifically 
provided for in other regulations or as specifically approved by the 
Marine Safety Center.
    (d) Reference. See also Sec. 56.07-10(a) and (b) for specific 
requirements.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9979, June 17, 1970; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40607, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.50-25  Safety and relief valve escape piping.

    (a) Escape piping from unfired steam generator, boiler, and 
superheater safety valves shall have an area of not less than that of 
the combined areas of the outlets of all valves discharging thereto and 
shall be led as near vertically as practicable to the atmosphere.
    (b) Expansion joints or flexible pipe connections shall be fitted in 
escape piping. The piping shall be adequately supported and installed so 
that no stress is transmitted to the safety valve body.
    (c) Safety or relief valve discharges, when permitted to terminate 
in the machinery space, shall be led below the floorplates or to a 
remote position to minimize the hazardous effect of the escaping steam.
    (d) The effect of the escape piping on the operation of the relief 
device shall be considered. The back pressure in the escape piping from 
the main propulsion steam generator should not exceed 10 percent of the 
relief device setting unless a compensated relief device is used. Back 
pressure must be calculated with all relief valves which discharge to a 
common escape pipe relieving simultaneously at full capacity.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40608, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48050, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 56.50-30  Boiler feed piping.

    (a) General requirements. (1) Steam vessels, and motor vessels 
fitted with steam driven electrical generators shall have at least two 
separate means of supplying feed water for the boilers. All feed pumps 
shall be fitted with the necessary connections for this purpose. The 
arrangement of feed pumps shall be in accordance with paragraph (d) or 
(e) of this section.
    (2) Feed pump supply to power boilers may utilize the group feed 
system or the unit feed system.
    (3) Feed discharge piping from the pump up to, but not including the 
required stop and stop-check valves, shall be designed for either the 
feed pump relief valve setting or the shutoff head of the pump if a 
relief valve is not fitted. (Refer to Sec. 56.07-10(b) for specific 
requirements.) Feed piping from the boiler, to and including the 
required stop and stop-check valves (see paragraph (b) of this section), 
shall have a design pressure which exceeds the maximum allowable working 
pressure of the boiler by either 25 percent or 225 pounds per square 
inch whichever is less. The value of allowable stress for design 
purposes shall be selected as described in Sec. 56.07-10(e) at a 
temperature not below that for saturated steam at the maximum allowable 
working pressure of the boiler.
    (4) Feed pumps for water tube boilers shall have fresh water 
connections only. Care shall be taken to prevent the accidental 
contamination of feed water from salt water or oil systems.
    (b) Feed valves. (1) Stop and stop-check valves shall be fitted in 
the main feed line and shall be attached as close as possible to drum 
feed inlet nozzles or to the economizer feed inlet nozzles on boilers 
fitted with integral economizers.
    (2) Where the installation will not permit the feed stop valve to be 
attached directly to the drum inlet nozzle on boilers not fitted with 
economizers, a distance piece may be installed between the stop valve 
and the inlet nozzle.
    (3) Feed stop or stop-check valves may be located near the operating 
platform on boilers fitted with economizers provided the piping between 
the valves and the economizer, exclusive of the feed valves and the 
economizer inlet nozzles, is installed with a minimum of intervening 
flanged connections.
    (4) Auxiliary feed lines shall be fitted with stop valves and stop-
check valves. Boilers not having auxiliary feed water nozzles, or where 
independent auxiliary feed lines are not installed, shall have the 
auxiliary feed line to the drum or economizer connected to the main feed 
line as close as possible to the main

[[Page 197]]

feed stop valves; and the valves in the auxiliary feed line shall be 
fitted as close as possible to the junction point.
    (5) Boilers fitted with economizers shall have a check valve fitted 
in the economizer discharge and located as close as possible to the drum 
fed inlet nozzle. When economizer bypasses are fitted, a stop-check 
valve shall be installed in lieu of the aforementioned check valve.
    (6) A sentinel valve is not required for vessels constructed after 
September 30, 1997, and for other vessels to which it has been shown to 
the satisfaction of the cognizant Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection 
or the Coast Guard Marine Safety Center, that a sentinel valve is not 
necessary for the safe operation of the particular boiler.
    (c) Feed water regulators, heaters, and grease extractors. (1) Where 
feed water regulators, tubular feed water heaters, and grease extractors 
are installed, an alternate means of operation with these devices 
bypassed shall be provided.
    (2) Feed water regulators designed with a built-in bypass for 
emergency use need not be fitted with an external bypass when installed 
in a feed system provided with an auxiliary feed line. All feed water 
regulators installed in a unit feed system shall be fitted with an 
external bypass. Feed water regulators bypasses shall be so arranged 
that the regular feed valves are in operation while the bypass is in 
use.
    (3) A feed water regulator may be interposed between the stop and 
stop-check valves in the feed lines.
    (d) Group feed system. Group feed systems shall be provided with 
pumps and piping as follows:
    (1) Oceangoing and Great Lakes steam vessels, having a feed pump 
attached to the main propelling unit, shall be provided with at least 
one independently driven feed pump. Each of these pumps shall be used 
exclusively for feed purposes and shall be capable of supplying the 
operating boilers at their normal capacity. In addition, a second 
independently driven pump, capable of supplying such boilers at 75 
percent of their normal capacity, shall be provided for emergency use. 
This second pump may be used for other purposes.
    (2) If two independently driven pumps are provided, each capable of 
supplying the boilers at their normal required operating capacity, and 
neither of which is used for other purposes, the third or emergency feed 
pump is not required. Where more than two independently driven feed 
pumps are provided, their aggregate capacity shall not be less than 200 
percent of that demanded by the boilers at their required normal 
operating capacity.
    (3) River or harbor steam vessels shall have at least two means for 
feeding the boilers; one of which shall be an independently driven pump, 
the other may be an attached pump, an additional independently driven 
pump, or an injector.
    (e) Unit feed system. Unit feed systems shall be provided with pumps 
and piping as follows:
    (1) The unit feed system may be used on vessels having two or more 
boilers. When the unit feed system is employed each boiler shall have 
its own independently driven main feed pump capable of supplying the 
boiler at its normal operating capacity. In addition these shall be an 
auxiliary independently driven feed pump of the same capacity which can 
be operated in place of and in conjunction with the main feed pump. In 
vessels with three or more boilers, not more than two boilers may be 
served by any one auxiliary pump. The auxiliary pump may be so 
interconnected that any pump can feed any boiler.
    (2) In the unit feed system, a separate feed line shall be provided 
for each boiler from its pumps. A separate auxiliary feed line is not 
required. The discharge from each pump and the feed supply to each 
boiler shall be automatically controlled by the level of the water in 
that boiler. In addition to the automatic control, manual control shall 
be provided.
    (f) Feedwater. The feedwater shall be introduced into a boiler as 
required by Sec. 52.01-105(b) of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 95-028, 62 FR 
51201, Sept. 30, 1997; USCG-2002-13058, 67 FR 61278, Sept. 30, 2002]

[[Page 198]]



Sec. 56.50-35  Condensate pumps.

    Two means shall be provided for discharging the condensate from the 
main condenser, one of which shall be mechanically independent of the 
main propelling machinery. If one of the independent feed pumps is 
fitted with a direct suction from the condenser and a discharge to the 
feed tank, it may be accepted as an independent condensate pump. On 
vessels operating on lakes (including Great Lakes), bays, sounds, or 
rivers, where provision is made to operate noncondensing, only one 
condensate unit will be required.



Sec. 56.50-40  Blowoff piping (replaces 102.2.5(d)).

    (a)(1) The requirements for blowoff piping in this section shall be 
followed in lieu of the requirements in 102.2.5(d) in ANSI-B31.1.
    (2) Where blowoff valves are connected to a common discharge from 
two or more boilers, a nonreturn valve shall be provided in the line 
from each boiler to prevent accidental blowback in the event the boiler 
blowoff valve is left open.
    (b) Blowoff piping external to the boiler shall be designed for not 
less than 125 percent of the maximum allowable working pressure of the 
boiler, or the maximum allowable working pressure of the boiler plus 225 
pounds per square inch, whichever is less. When the required blowoff 
piping design pressure exceeds 100 pounds per square inch gage, the wall 
thickness of the piping shall not be less than Schedule 80. The value of 
allowable stress for design purposes shall be selected as described in 
Sec. 56.07-10(e) at a temperature not below that of saturated steam at 
the maximum allowable working pressure of the boiler.
    (c) Boiler blowoff piping which discharges above the lightest 
loadline of a vessel shall be arranged so that the discharge is 
deflected downward.
    (d) Valves such as the globe type so designed as to form pockets in 
which sediment may collect shall not be used for blowoff service.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.50-45  Circulating pumps.

    (a) A main circulating pump and emergency means for circulating 
water through the main condenser shall be provided. The emergency means 
may consist of a connection from an independent power pump fitted 
between the main circulating pump and the condenser.
    (b) Independent sea suctions shall be provided for the main 
circulating and the emergency circulating pumps.
    (c) A cross connection between the circulating pumps in the case of 
multiple units will be acceptable in lieu of an independent power pump 
connection.
    (d) On vessels operating on lakes (including Great Lakes), bays, 
sounds, or rivers, where provision is made to operate noncondensing, 
only one circulating unit will be required.



Sec. 56.50-50  Bilge and ballast piping.

    (a)(1) All vessels except unmanned barges shall be provided with a 
satisfactory bilge pumping plant capable of pumping from and draining 
any watertight compartment except for ballast, oil and water tanks which 
have acceptable means for filling and emptying independent of the bilge 
system. The bilge pumping system shall be capable of operation under all 
practicable conditions after a casualty whether the ship is upright or 
listed. For this purpose wing suctions will generally be necessary 
except in narrow compartments at the ends of the vessel where one 
suction may be sufficient. In compartments of unusual form, additional 
suctions may be required.
    (2) Arrangements shall be made whereby water in the compartments 
will drain to the suction pipes. Efficient means shall be provided for 
draining water from all tank tops, other watertight flats and insulated 
holds. Peak tanks, chain lockers and decks over peak tanks may be 
drained by eductors, ejectors, or hand pumps. Where piping is led 
through the forepeak, see Sec. 56.50-1(b).
    (3) Where drainage from particular compartments is considered 
undesirable, the provisions for such drainage may be omitted, provided 
it can be shown by calculations that the safety of the vessel will not 
be impaired.

[[Page 199]]

    (4) Where the vessel is to carry Class 3 flammable liquids with a 
flashpoint below 23 [deg]C (74 [deg]F), Class 6, Division 6.1, poisonous 
liquids, or Class 8 corrosive liquids with a flashpoint below 23 [deg]C 
(74 [deg]F) as defined in 49 CFR part 173, in enclosed cargo spaces, the 
bilge-pumping system must be designed to ensure against inadvertent 
pumping of such liquids through machinery-space piping or pumps.
    (5) For each vessel constructed on or after June 9, 1995, and on an 
international voyage, arrangements must be made to drain the enclosed 
cargo spaces on either the bulkhead deck of a passenger vessel or the 
freeboard deck of a cargo vessel.
    (i) If the deck edge, at the bulkhead deck of a passenger vessel or 
the freeboard deck of a cargo vessel, is immersed when the vessel heels 
5[deg] or less, the drainage of the enclosed cargo spaces must discharge 
to a space, or spaces, of adequate capacity, each of which has a high-
water-level alarm and a means to discharge overboard. The number, size 
and arrangement of the drains must prevent unreasonable accumulation of 
water. The pumping arrangements must take into account the requirements 
for any fixed manual or automatic sprinkling system. In enclosed cargo 
spaces fitted with carbon-dioxide extinguishing systems, the drains must 
have traps or other means to prevent escape of the smothering gas. The 
enclosed cargo spaces must not drain to machinery spaces or other spaces 
where sources of ignition may be present if water may be contaminated 
with Class 3 flammable liquids; Class 6, Division 6.1, poisonous 
liquids; or Class 8 corrosive liquids with a flashpoint below 23 [deg]C 
(74 [deg]F).
    (ii) If the deck edge, at the bulkhead deck of a passenger vessel or 
the freeboard deck of a cargo vessel, is immersed only when the vessel 
heels more than 5[deg], the drainage of the enclosed cargo spaces may be 
by means of a sufficient number of scuppers discharging overboard. The 
installation of scuppers must comply with Sec. 42.15-60 of this 
chapter.
    (b) Passenger vessels shall have provision made to prevent the 
compartment served by any bilge suction piping from being flooded in the 
event the pipe is severed or otherwise damaged by collision or grounding 
in any other compartment. Where the piping is located within one-fifth 
of the beam of the side of the vessel (measured at right angles to the 
centerline at the level of the deepest subdivision loadline or deepest 
loadline where a subdivision loadline is not assigned) or is in a 
ductkeel, a nonreturn valve shall be fitted to the end of the pipe in 
the compartment which it serves.
    (c)(1) Each bilge suction must lead from a manifold except as 
otherwise approved by the Commanding Officer, Marine Safety Center. As 
far as practicable, each manifold must be in, or be capable of remote 
operation from, the same space as the bilge pump that normally takes 
suction on that manifold. In either case, the manifold must be capable 
of being locally controlled from above the floorplates and must be 
easily accessible at all times. As far as practicable, each overboard-
discharge valve for a bilge system must comply with the requirements 
governing location and accessibility for suction manifolds. Except as 
otherwise permitted by paragraph (c)(4) of this section for a vessel 
employing a common-rail bilge system, each bilge-manifold valve 
controlling a bilge suction from any compartment must be of the stop-
check type.
    (2) Each passenger vessel on an international voyage must comply 
with the provisions of SOLAS II-1/21.
    (3) A common-rail bilge system may be installed as an acceptable 
alternative to the system required by paragraph (c)(1) of this section, 
provided it satisfies all of the following criteria:
    (i) The common-rail main runs inboard at least one-fifth of the beam 
of the vessel.
    (ii) A stop-check valve or both a stop valve and a check valve are 
provided in each branch line and located inboard at least one-fifth of 
the beam of the vessel.
    (iii) The stop valve or the stop-check valve is power-driven, is 
capable of remote operation from the space where the pump is, and, 
regardless of the status of the power system, is capable of manual 
operation to both open and close the valve.

[[Page 200]]

    (iv) The stop valve or the stop-check valve is accessible for both 
manual operation and repair under all operating conditions, and the 
space used for access contains no expansion joint or flexible coupling 
that, upon failure, would cause flooding and prevent access to the 
valve.
    (v) A port and a starboard suction serve each space protected 
unless, under the worst conditions of list and trim and with liquid 
remaining after pumping, the vessel's stability remains acceptable, in 
accordance with subchapter S of this chapter.
    (vi) For each vessel designed for the carriage of combinations of 
both liquid and dry bulk cargoes (O/B/O), no bilge pump or piping is 
located in a machinery space other than in a pump room for cargo, and no 
liquid and other cargoes are carried simultaneously.
    (vii) For each cargo vessel in Great Lakes service, each common-rail 
piping for the bilge and ballast system serving cargo spaces, if 
installed and if connected to a dedicated common-rail bilge system, must 
lead separately from a valved manifold located at the pump.
    (d) The internal diameter of bilge suction pipes including strainers 
shall be determined by formulas (1) and (2), except that the nearest 
commercial size not more than one-fourth inch under the required 
diameter may be used. Bilge suction pipes shall be suitably faired to 
pump inlets.
    (1) For suctions to each main bilge pump:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.025
    
    (2) For branch suctions to cargo and machinery spaces:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.026
    
where:

L=Length of vessel on loadwater line, in feet.
B=Breadth of vessel, in feet. (5)
D=Molded depth (in feet) to the bulkhead deck. (6)
c=Length of compartment, in feet.
d=Required internal diameter of suction pipe, in inches.

    Note 1. For tank vessels, ``L'' may be reduced by the combined 
length of the cargo oil tanks.
    Note 2. For bulk carriers with full depth wing tanks served by a 
ballast system where the beam of the vessel is not representative of the 
breadth of the compartment, ``B'' may be appropriately modified to the 
breadth of the compartment.
    Note 3. In the calculation for a vessel with more than one hull, 
such as a catamaran, the breadth of the unit is the breadth of one hull.
    Note 4. In the calculation for a mobile offshore drilling unit, 
``L'' is reducible by the combined length of spaces that can be pumped 
by another piping system meeting Sec. Sec. 56.50-50 and 56.50-55, where 
``L'' is the length of the unit at the waterline.
    Note 5. For mobile offshore drilling units employing unusual hull 
forms, ``B'' may be modified to the average breadth rather than the 
maximum breadth.
    Note 6. For each passenger vessel constructed on or after June 9, 
1995, and being on an international voyage, D must be measured to the 
next deck above the bulkhead deck if an enclosed cargo space on the 
bulkhead deck that is internally drained in accordance with paragraph 
(a)(4) of this section extends the entire length of the vessel. Where 
the enclosed cargo space extends a lesser length, D must be taken as the 
sum of the molded depth (in feet) to the bulkhead deck plus lh/L where l 
and h are the aggregate length and height (in feet) of the enclosed 
cargo space.

    (3) For vessels of 150 gross tons and over, no main suction piping 
shall be less than 2\1/2\ inches internal diameter. Branch piping need 
not be more than 4 inches and shall not be less than 2 inches in 
diameter except for drainage of small pockets or spaces in which case 
1\1/2\-inch diameter may be used. For vessels less than 150 gross tons 
no bilge suction shall be less than 1\1/2\ inches internal diameter and 
no branch piping shall be less than 1 inch nominal pipe size.
    (4) For vessels of 65 feet in length or less and not engaged on an 
international voyage, the bilge pipe sizes computed by Formulas (1) and 
(2) of this paragraph are not mandatory, but in no case shall the size 
be less than 1 inch nominal pipe size.
    (5) The number, location, and size of bilge suctions in the boiler 
and machinery compartments shall be determined when the piping plans are 
submitted for approval and shall be based

[[Page 201]]

upon the size of the compartments and the drainage arrangements.
    (e) Independent bilge suction. One of the independent bilge pumps 
must have a suction of a diameter not less than that given by Formula 
(2) in paragraph (d) of this section that is led directly from the 
engine room bilge entirely independent of the bilge main, and on 
passenger vessels each independent bilge pump located in the machinery 
spaces must have such direct suctions from these spaces, except that not 
more than two pumps are required to have direct suctions from any one 
space. A suction that is led directly from a suitably located pump 
manifold may be considered to be independent of the bilge main. Where 
two direct suctions are required in any one compartment on passenger 
vessels, one suction must be located on each side of the compartment. If 
watertight bulkheads separate the engine and boiler rooms, a direct 
suction or suctions must be fitted to each compartment unless the pumps 
available for bilge service are distributed throughout these 
compartments, in which case at least one pump in each such compartment 
must be fitted with direct suction in its compartment. In a vessel with 
more than one hull, there must be one bilge pump that has an independent 
bilge suction in each hull. In a column stabilized mobile offshore 
drilling unit, the independent bilge suction must be from the pumproom 
bilge.
    (f) Emergency bilge suctions. In addition to the independent bilge 
suction(s) required by paragraph (e) of this section, an emergency bilge 
suction must be provided in the machinery space for all self-propelled 
vessels as described in the following subparagraphs. Emergency suctions 
must be provided from pumps other than those required by Sec. 56.50-
55(a) of this part. Such suctions must have nonreturn valves, and must 
meet the following criteria as appropriate:
    (1) On passenger vessels propelled by steam and operating on an 
international voyage or on ocean, coastwise, or Great Lakes routes, the 
main circulating pump is to be fitted with a direct bilge suction for 
the machinery space. The diameter of such suctions shall not be less 
than two-thirds the diameter of the main sea injection. When it can be 
shown to the satisfaction of the Commandant that the main circulating 
pump is not suitable for emergency bilge service, a direct emergency 
bilge suction is to be led from the largest available independent power 
driven pump to the drainage level of the machinery space. The suction is 
to be of the same diameter as the main inlet of the pump used and the 
capacity of the pump shall exceed that of a required main bilge pump.
    (2) On passenger vessels propelled by internal combustion engines 
and operating on an international voyage or on ocean, coastwise, or 
Great Lakes routes, the largest available pump in the engine room is to 
be fitted with the direct bilge suction in the machinery space except 
that a required bilge pump may not be used. The area of the suction pipe 
is to be equal to the full suction inlet of the pump. The discharge 
capacity of the pump selected shall exceed the capacity of the required 
main bilge pump.
    (3) Vessels over 180 feet in length which are not passenger vessels 
and which operate on international voyages or in ocean, coastwise, or 
Great Lakes service, must be provided with a direct emergency bilge 
suction from any pump in the machinery space, except that a required 
bilge pump may not be used. The discharge capacity of the pump selected 
must exceed the capacity of the required main bilge pump and the area of 
the suction inlet is to be equal to the full suction inlet of the pump.
    (4) Vessels under 180 feet in length need not provide an emergency 
bilge suction, except that passenger vessels shall comply with the 
requirements of paragraphs (f) (1) and (2) of this section.
    (5) Each vessel with more than one hull must have an emergency bilge 
suction in each hull.
    (6) Each column stabilized mobile offshore drilling unit must have--
    (i) An emergency bilge suction in each hull; and
    (ii) A remote control for the emergency pump and associated valves 
that can be operated from the ballast control room.

[[Page 202]]

    (g) Each individual bilge suction shall be fitted with a suitable 
bilge strainer having an open area of not less than three times at of 
the suction pipe. In addition a mud box or basket strainer shall be 
fitted in an accessible position between the bilge suction manifold and 
the pump.
    (h) Pipes for draining cargo holds or machinery spaces must be 
separate from pipes which are used for filling or emptying tanks where 
water or oil is carried. Bilge and ballast piping systems must be so 
arranged as to prevent oil or water from the sea or ballast spaces from 
passing into cargo holds or machinery spaces, or from passing from one 
compartment to another, whether from the sea, water ballast, or oil 
tanks, by the appropriate installation of stop and non-return valves. 
The bilge and ballast mains must be fitted with separate control valves 
at the pumps. Except as allowed by paragraph (c)(4)(vii) of this 
section, piping for draining a cargo hold or machinery space must be 
separate from piping used for filling or emptying any tank where water 
or oil is carried. Piping for bilge and ballast must be arranged so as 
to prevent, by the appropriate installation of stop and non-return 
valves, oil or water from the sea or ballast spaces from passing into a 
cargo hold or machinery space, or from passing from one compartment to 
another, regardless of the source. The bilge and ballast mains must be 
fitted with separate control valves at the pumps.
    (i) Ballast piping shall not be installed to any hull compartment of 
a wood vessel. Where the carriage of liquid ballast in such vessels is 
necessary, suitable ballast tanks, structurally independent of the hull, 
shall be provided.
    (j) When dry cargo is to be carried in deep tanks, arrangement shall 
be made for disconnecting or blanking-off the oil and ballast lines, and 
the bilge suctions shall be disconnected or blanked-off when oil or 
ballast is carried. Blind flanges or reversible pipe fittings may be 
employed for this purpose.
    (k) Where bilge and ballast piping is led through tanks, except 
ballast piping in ballast tanks, means must be provided to minimize the 
risk of flooding of other spaces due to pipe failure within the tanks. 
In this regard, such piping may be in an oiltight or watertight pipe 
tunnel, or the piping may be of Schedule 80 pipe wall thickness, fitted 
with expansion bends, and all joints within the tanks are welded. 
Alternative designs may be installed as approved by the Marine Safety 
Center. Where a pipe tunnel is installed, the watertight integrity of 
the bulkheads must be maintained. No valve or fitting may be located 
within the tunnel if the pipe tunnel is not of sufficient size to afford 
easy access. These requirements need not be met provided the contents of 
the tank and piping system are chemically compatible and strength and 
stability calculations are submitted showing that crossflooding 
resulting from a pipe, the tank, and the spaces through which the piping 
passes will not seriously affect the safety of the ship, including the 
launching of lifeboats due to the ship's listing. Bilge lines led 
through tanks without a pipe tunnel must be fitted with nonreturn valves 
at the bilge suctions.
    (l) When bilge pumps are utilized for other services, the piping 
shall be so arranged that under any condition at least one pump will be 
available for drainage of the vessel through an overboard discharge, 
while the other pump(s) are being used for a different service.
    (m) All bilge pipes used in or under fuel storage tanks or in the 
boiler or machinery space, including spaces in which oil settling tanks 
or oil pumping units are located, shall be of steel or other acceptable 
material.
    (n) Oil pollution prevention requirements for bilge and ballast 
systems are contained in subpart B of part 155, Title 33, Code of 
Federal Regulations.

    Note: For the purposes of this section, a pumproom is a machinery 
space on a column stabilized mobile offshore drilling unit.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9979, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-58R, 39 FR 18767, May 30, 1974; 79-165a, 
45 FR 64188, Sept. 29, 1980; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40608, Oct. 2, 1989; 55 
FR 39968, Oct. 1, 1990; CGD 83-043, 60 FR 24772, May 10, 1995; CGD 95-
028, 62 FR 51201, Sept. 30, 1997]



Sec. 56.50-55  Bilge pumps.

    (a) Self-propelled vessels. (1) Each self-propelled vessel must be 
provided with

[[Page 203]]

a power-driven pump or pumps connected to the bilge main as required by 
Table 56.50-55(a).

                    Table 56.50-55(a)--Power Bilge Pumps Required for Self-Propelled Vessels
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                        Passenger vessels \1\           Dry-cargo vessels      Tank      Mobile
                                -------------------------------------          \2\           vessels    offshore
                                                                     ---------------------------------  drilling
                                                  Ocean,                Ocean,                           units
     Vessel length, in feet      International    coast-   All other    coast-                        ----------
                                  voyages \3\    wise and    waters    wise and     All        All
                                                  Great                 Great      waters     waters      All
                                                  Lakes                 Lakes                            waters
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
180[foot] or more..............        \4\ 3        \4\ 3          2          2          2          2          2
Below 180[foot] and exceeding          \4\ 3        \5\ 2      \5\ 2      \5\ 2      \5\ 2          2          2
 65[foot]......................
65[foot] or less...............            3            1          1          1          1          1  .........
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Small passenger vessels under 100 gross tons refer to Subpart 182.520 of Subchapter T (Small Passenger
  Vessel) of this chapter.
\2\ Dry-bulk carriers having ballast pumps connected to the tanks outside the engineroom and to the cargo hold
  may substitute the appropriate requirements for tank vessels.
\3\ Not applicable to passenger vessels which do not proceed more than 20 mile from the nearest land, or which
  are employed in the carriage of large numbers of unberthed passengers in special trades.
\4\ When the criterion numeral exceeds 30, an additional independent power-driven pump is required. (See Part
  171 of this chapter for determination of criterion numeral.)
\5\ Vessels operating on lakes (including Great Lakes), bays, sounds, or rivers where steam is always available,
  or where a suitable water supply is available from a power-driven pump of adequate pressure and capacity, may
  substitute siphons or eductors for one of the required power-driven pumps, provided a siphon or eductor is
  permanently installed in each hold or compartment.

    (b) Nonself-propelled vessels. (1) Ocean going sailing vessels and 
barges shall be provided with pumps connected to the bilge main as 
required in Table 56.50-55(b)(1).

                    Table 56.50-55(b)(1)--Bilge Pumps Required for Nonself-Propelled Vessels
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Type of vessel                   Waters navigated              Power pumps (1)           Hand pumps
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sailing.............................  Ocean and coastwise.........  Two........................  (2)
Manned barges.......................  ......do....................  Two........................  (2)
Manned barges.......................  Other than ocean and          (3)........................  (3)
                                       coastwise.
Unmanned barges.....................  All waters..................  (3)........................  (3)
Mobile offshore drilling units......  All waters..................  Two........................  None.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Where power is always available, independent power bilge pumps shall be installed as required and shall be
  connected to the bilge main.
\2\ Efficient hand pumps connected to the bilge main may be substituted for the power pumps. Where there is no
  common bilge main, one hand pump will be required for each compartment.
\3\ Suitable hand or power pumps or siphons, portable or fixed, carried either on board the barge or on the
  towing vessel shall be provided.

    (2) The pumps and source of power for operation on oceangoing 
sailing vessels and barges shall be located above the bulkhead deck or 
at the highest convenient level which is always accessible.
    (3) Each hull of a vessel with more than one hull, such as a 
catamaran, must meet Table 56.50-55(b).
    (c) Capacity of independent power bilge pump. Each power bilge pump 
must have the capacity to develop a suction velocity of not less than 
400 feet per minute through the size of bilge main piping required by 
Sec. 56.50-50(d)(1) of this part under ordinary conditions; except 
that, for vessels of less than 65 feet in length not engaged on 
international voyages, the pump must have a minimum capacity of 25 
gallons per minute and need not meet the velocity requirement of this 
paragraph.
    (d) Priming. Suitable means shall be provided for priming 
centrifugal pumps which are not of the self-priming type.
    (e) Location. (1) For self-propelled vessels, if the engines and 
boilers are in two or more watertight compartments, the bilge pumps must 
be distributed throughout these compartments. On other self-propelled 
vessels and mobile offshore drilling units, the bilge pumps must be in 
separate compartments to the extent practicable. When the location of 
bilge pumps in separate watertight compartments is not practicable,

[[Page 204]]

alternative arrangements may be submitted for consideration by the 
Marine Safety Center.
    (2) For nonself-propelled vessels requiring two bilge pumps, these 
pumps, insofar as practicable, shall be located in separate watertight 
machinery spaces. When the location of bilge pumps in separate 
watertight compartments is not possible, the Commandant will consider 
alternate arrangements of the bilge pumps.
    (3) The emergency bilge pumps shall not be installed in a passenger 
ship forward of the collision bulkhead.
    (4) Each hull of a vessel with more than one hull must have at least 
two means for pumping the bilges in each hull. No multi-hulled vessel 
may operate unless one of these means is available to pump each bilge.
    (f) Other pumps. Sanitary, ballast, and general service pumps having 
the required capacity may be accepted as independent power bilge pumps 
if fitted with the necessary connections to the bilge pumping system.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 79-023, 48 FR 
51007, Nov. 4, 1983; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40608, Oct. 2, 1989; 55 FR 39968, 
Oct. 1, 1990; CGD 83-043, 60 FR 24773, May 10, 1995; USCG-2004-18884, 69 
FR 58346, Sept. 30, 2004]



Sec. 56.50-57  Bilge piping and pumps, alternative requirements.

    (a) If a passenger vessel complies with Sec. Sec. 171.075 and 
171.082 of this chapter, its bilge pumping and piping systems must meet 
Sec. Sec. 56.50-50 and 56.50-55, except as follows:
    (1) Each bilge pumping system must comply with--
    (i) Regulation 19(b) of the Annex to IMCO Resolution A.265 (VIII) in 
place of Sec. Sec. 56.50-55(a)(1), 56.50-55(a)(3), and 56.50-55(f);
    (ii) Regulation 19(d) of the Annex to IMCO Resolution A.265 (VIII) 
in place of Sec. 56.50-55(a)(2).
    (2) Each bilge main must comply with Regulation 19(i) of the Annex 
to IMCO Resolution A.265 (VIII) in place of Sec. 56.50-50(d) except--
    (i) The nearest commercial pipe size may be used if it is not more 
than one-fourth inch under the required diameter; and
    (ii) Each branch pipe must comply with Sec. 56.50-50(d)(2).
    (b) The standards referred to in this section, which are contained 
in the Inter-governmental Maritime Consultative Organization (IMCO) 
Resolution A.265 (VIII), dated December 10, 1973, are incorporated by 
reference. This document is available from the National Technical 
Information Service, Springfield, Virginia, 22151, under the title 
``Regulations on Subdivision and Stability of Passenger Ships as 
Equivalent to part B of chapter II of the International Convention for 
the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960'' (Volume IV of the U.S. Coast Guard's 
``Commandant's International Technical Series'', USCG CITS-74-1-1.)

[CGD 76-053, 47 FR 37553, Aug. 26, 1982, as amended by CGD 79-023, 48 FR 
51007, Nov. 4, 1983]



Sec. 56.50-60  Systems containing oil.

    (a)(1) Oil-piping systems for the transfer or discharge of cargo or 
fuel oil must be separate from other piping systems as far as 
practicable, and positive means shall be provided to prevent 
interconnection in service.
    (2) Fuel oil and cargo oil systems may be combined if the cargo oil 
systems contain only Grade E oils and have no connection to cargo 
systems containing grades of oil with lower flash points or hazardous 
substances.
    (3) Pumps used to transfer oil must have no discharge connections to 
fire mains, boiler feed systems, or condensers unless approved positive 
means are provided to prevent oil from being accidentally discharged 
into any of the aforementioned systems.
    (b) When oil needs to be heated to lower its viscosity, heating 
coils must be properly installed in each tank.
    (1) Each drain from a heating coil as well as each drain from an oil 
heater must run to an open inspection tank or other suitable oil 
detector before returning to the feed system.
    (2) As far as practicable, no part of the fuel-oil system containing 
heated oil under pressure exceeding 180 KPa (26 psi) may be placed in a 
concealed position so that defects and leakage cannot be readily 
observed. Each machinery space containing a part of the

[[Page 205]]

system must be adequately illuminated.
    (c) Filling pipes may be led directly from the deck into the tanks 
or to a manifold in an accessible location permanently marked to 
indicate the tanks to which they are connected. A shutoff valve must be 
fitted at each filling end. Oil piping must not be led through 
accommodation spaces, except that low pressure fill piping not normally 
used at sea may pass through accommodation spaces if it is of steel 
construction, all welded, and not concealed.
    (d) Piping subject to internal head pressure from oil in the tank 
must be fitted with positive shutoff valves located at the tank.
    (1) Valves installed on the outside of the oil tanks must be made of 
steel, ductile cast iron ASTM A395, or a ductile nonferrous alloy having 
a melting point above 1,700 [deg]F and must be arranged with a means of 
manual control locally at the valve and remotely from a readily 
accessible and safe location outside of the compartment in which the 
valves are located.
    (i) In the special case of a deep tank in any shaft tunnel, piping 
tunnel, or similar space, one or more valves must be fitted on the tank, 
but control in the event of fire may be effected by means of an 
additional valve on the piping outside the tunnel or similar space. Any 
such additional valve installed inside a machinery space must be capable 
of being operated from outside this space.
    (ii) [Reserved]
    (2) If valves are installed on the inside of the tank, they may be 
made of cast iron and arranged for remote control only. Additional 
valves for local control must be located in the space where the system 
exits from the tank or adjacent tanks. Valves for local control outside 
the tanks must be made of steel, ductile cast iron ASTM A 395 
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 56.01-2), or a ductile nonferrous 
alloy having a melting point above 1,700 [deg]F.
    (3) Power operated valves installed to comply with the requirements 
of this section must meet the following requirements:
    (i) Valve actuators must be capable of closing the valves under all 
conditions, except during physical interruption of the power system 
(e.g., cable breakage or tube rupture). Fluid power actuated valves, 
other than those opened against spring pressure, must be provided with 
an energy storage system which is protected, as far as practicable, from 
fire and collision. The storage system must be used for no other purpose 
and must have sufficient capacity to cycle all connected valves from the 
initial valve position to the opposite position and return. The cross 
connection of this system to an alternate power supply will be given 
special consideration by the Marine Safety Center.
    (ii) The valve shall have a local power actuator to both open and 
close the valve unless local manual opening operation will not prevent 
remote closing of the valve.
    (iii) The positioning of the valve by either the local or remote 
actuators shall not void the ability of the other actuator to close the 
valve.
    (iv) The valve shall be provided with a means of emergency manual 
operation to both open and close the valve regardless of the status of 
the power operating system. Such manual operation may interfere with the 
power operation, and if so, shall be protected from causal use by means 
of covers, locking devices, or other suitable means. Instructions and 
warnings regarding the emergency system shall be conspicuously posted at 
the valve.
    (4) Remote operation for shutoff valves on small independent oil 
tanks will be specially considered in each case where the size of tanks 
and their location may warrant the omission of remote operating rods.
    (e) Fuel oil tanks overhanging boilers are prohibited.
    (f) Valves for drawing fuel or draining water from fuel are not 
permitted in fuel oil systems except that a single valve may be 
permitted in the case of diesel driven machinery if suitably located 
within the machinery space away from any potential source of ignition. 
Such a valve shall be fitted with a cap or a plug to prevent leakage.
    (g) Test cocks must not be fitted to fuel oil or cargo oil tanks.
    (h) Oil piping must not run through feed or potable water tanks. 
Feed or

[[Page 206]]

potable water piping must not pass through oil tanks.
    (i) Where flooding equalizing cross-connections between fuel or 
cargo tanks are required for stability considerations, the arrangement 
must be approved by the Marine Safety Center.
    (j) Piping conveying oil must be run well away from hot surfaces 
wherever possible. Where such leads are unavoidable, only welded joints 
are to be used, or alternatively, suitable shields are to be fitted in 
the way of flanged or mechanical pipe joints when welded joints are not 
practicable. Piping that conveys fuel oil or lubricating oil to 
equipment and is in the proximity of equipment or lines having an open 
flame or having parts operating above 500 [deg]F must be of seamless 
steel. (See Sec. 56.50-65 of this part.)
    (k) Oil piping drains, strainers and other equipment subject to 
normal oil leakage must be fitted with drip pans or other means to 
prevent oil draining into the bilge.
    (l) Where oil piping passes through a non-oil tank without stop 
valves complying with paragraph (d) of this section installed at all 
tank penetrations, the piping must comply with Sec. 56.50-50(k).
    (m) Each arrangement for the storage, distribution, and use of oil 
in a pressure-lubrication system must--
    (1) As well as comply with Sec. 56.50-80, be such as to ensure the 
safety of the vessel and all persons aboard; and
    (2) In a machinery space, meet the applicable requirements of 
Sec. Sec. 56.50-60 (b)(2) and (d), 56.50-85(a)(11), 56.50-90 (c) and 
(d), and 58.01-55(f) of this subchapter. No arrangement need comply with 
Sec. 56.50-90 (c)(1) and (c)(3) of this subchapter if the sounding pipe 
is fitted with an effective means of closure, such as a threaded cap or 
plug or other means acceptable to the Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection. The use of flexible piping or hose is permitted in 
accordance with the applicable requirements of Sec. Sec. 56.35-10, 
56.35-15, and 56.60-25(c).
    (n) Each arrangement for the storage, distribution, and use of any 
other flammable oil employed under pressure in a power transmission-
system, control and activating system, or heating system must be such as 
to ensure the safety of the vessel and all persons aboard by--
    (1) Complying with Subpart 58.30 of this subchapter; and,
    (2) Where means of ignition are present, meeting the applicable 
requirements of Sec. Sec. 56.50-85(a)(11), 56.50-90 (c) and (d), and 
58.01-55(f) of this subchapter. Each pipe and its valves and fittings 
must be of steel or other approved material, except that the use of 
flexible piping or hose is permitted in accordance with the applicable 
requirements of Sec. Sec. 56.35-10, 56.35-15, and 56.60-25(c).

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9979, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-
140, 54 FR 40609, Oct. 2, 1989; 55 FR 39968, Oct. 1, 1990; CGD 83-043, 
60 FR 24774, May 10, 1995; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000; 
USCG-2004-18884, 69 FR 58346, Sept. 30, 2004]



Sec. 56.50-65  Burner fuel-oil service systems.

    (a) All discharge piping from the fuel oil service pumps to burners 
must be seamless steel with a thickness of at least Schedule 80. If 
required by Sec. 56.07-10(e) of this part or paragraph 104.1.2 of ANSI 
B31.1, the thickness must be greater than Schedule 80. Short lengths of 
steel, or annealed copper nickel, nickel copper, or copper pipe and 
tubing may be used between the fuel oil burner front header manifold and 
the atomizer head to provide flexibility. All material used must meet 
the requirements of subpart 56.60 of this part. The use of non-metallic 
materials is prohibited. The thickness of the short lengths must not be 
less than the larger of 0.9 mm (0.35 inch) or that required by Sec. 
56.07-10(e) of this part. Flexible metallic tubing for this application 
may be used when approved by the Marine Safety Center. Tubing fittings 
must be of the flared type except that flareless fittings of the nonbite 
type may be used when the tubing is steel, nickel copper or copper 
nickel.
    (b)(1) All vessels having oil fired boilers must have at least two 
fuel service pumps, each of sufficient capacity to supply all the 
boilers at full power, and arranged so that one may be overhauled while 
the other is in service. At

[[Page 207]]

least two fuel oil heaters of approximately equal capacity must be 
installed and so arranged that any heater may be overhauled while the 
other(s) is (are) in service. Suction and discharge strainers must be of 
the duplex or other type capable of being cleaned without interrupting 
the oil supply.
    (2) All auxiliary boilers, except those furnishing steam for vital 
equipment and fire extinguishing purposes other than duplicate 
installations, may be equipped with a single fuel oil service pump and a 
single fuel oil heater. Such pumps need not be fitted with discharge 
strainers.
    (3) Strainers must be located so as to preclude the possibility of 
spraying oil on the burner or boiler casing, or be provided with spray 
shields. Coamings, drip pans, etc., must be fitted under fuel oil 
service pumps, heaters, etc., where necessary to prevent oil drainage to 
the bilge.
    (4) Boilers burning fuel oils of low viscosity need not be equipped 
with fuel oil heaters, provided acceptable evidence is furnished to 
indicate that satisfactory combustion will be obtained without the use 
of heaters.
    (c) Piping between service pumps and burners shall be located so as 
to be readily observable, and all bolted flange joints shall be provided 
with a wrap around deflector to deflect spray in case of a leak. The 
relief valve located at the pump and the relief valves fitted to the 
fuel oil heaters shall discharge back into the settling tank or the 
suction side of the pump. The return line from the burners shall be so 
arranged that the suction piping cannot be subjected to discharge 
pressure.
    (d) If threaded-bonnet valves are employed, they shall be of the 
union-bonnet type capable of being packed under pressure.
    (e) Unions shall not be used for pipe diameters of 1 inch and above.
    (f) Boiler header valves of the quick closing type shall be 
installed in the fuel supply lines as close to the boiler front header 
as practicable. The location is to be accessible to the operator or 
remotely controlled.
    (g) Bushings and street ells are not permitted in fuel oil discharge 
piping.
    (h) Each fuel-oil service pump must be equipped with controls as 
required by Sec. 58.01-25 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40609, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 83-
043, 60 FR 24774, May 10, 1995]



Sec. 56.50-70  Gasoline fuel systems.

    (a) Material. (1) Fuel supply piping to the engines shall be of 
seamless drawn annealed copper pipe or tubing, nickel copper, or copper 
nickel pipe or tubing meeting the requirements of subpart 56.60.
    (2) Tubing wall thicknesses shall not be less than the larger of 
that shown in Table 56.50-70(a), or as required by Sec. 56.07-10(e) and 
104.1.2 of ANSI-B31.1.
    (3) Tubing fittings shall be of nonferrous drawn or forged metal and 
of the flared type except that the flareless fittings of the nonbite 
type may be used when the tubing system is of nickel copper or copper 
nickel. Tubing shall be cut square and flared by suitable tools. Tube 
ends shall be annealed before flaring. Pipe fittings shall be of 
nonferrous material. Pipe thread joints shall be made tight with a 
suitable compound.
    (4) Valves for fuel lines shall be of nonferrous material of the 
union bonnet type with ground seats except that cocks may be used if 
they are the solid bottom type with tapered plugs and union bonnets.

                Table 56.50-70(a)--Tubing Wall Thickness
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          Thickness
       Outside diameter of tubing in inches        ---------------------
                                                      B.W.G.      Inch
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/8\, \3/16\, \1/4\..............................        0.032
                                                           21
\5/16\, \3/8\.....................................         .035
                                                           20
\7/16\, \1/2\.....................................         .042
                                                           19
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Installation. (1) All fuel pipes, pipe connections, and 
accessories shall be readily accessible. The piping shall run in sight 
wherever practicable, protected against mechanical injury, and 
effectively secured against excessive movement and vibration by the use 
of soft nonferrous metal liners or straps without sharp edges. Where 
passing through steel decks or bulkheads, fuel lines shall be protected 
by close fitting ferrules or stuffing boxes. Refer to Sec. 56.30-25 for 
tubing joint installations.

[[Page 208]]

    (2) A short length of suitable metallic or nonmetallic flexible 
tubing or hose, or a loop of annealed copper tubing shall be installed 
in the fuel supply line at or near the engine to prevent damage by 
vibration. If nonmetallic flexible hose is used it shall meet the 
requirements of Sec. 56.60-25(b) for fuel service. Flexible hose 
connections should maintain metallic contact between the sections of the 
fuel supply lines; however, if such contact is not maintained, the fuel 
tank shall be grounded.
    (3) Valves in fuel lines shall be installed to close against the 
flow.
    (c) Shutoff valves. Shutoff valves of a suitable type shall be 
installed in the fuel supply lines, one as close to each tank as 
practicable, and one as close to each carburetor as practicable. Where 
fuel tanks are installed below the weather deck, arrangements shall be 
provided for operating all shutoff valves at the tanks from outside the 
compartments in which they are located, preferably from an accessible 
position on the weather deck. The operating gear for the shutoff valves 
at the tanks shall be accessible at all times and shall be suitably 
marked.
    (d) Strainers. A suitable twin strainer shall be fitted in the fuel 
supply line in the engine compartment. Strainers shall be of the type 
opening on top for cleaning screens. A drip pan shall be fitted under 
the strainer.
    (e) Outlets and drains. Outlets in fuel lines for drawing gasoline 
for any purpose are prohibited. Valved openings in the bottom of fuel 
tanks are prohibited; however, openings fitted with threaded plug or cap 
can be used for cleaning purposes.
    (f) Fuel suction connections. All fuel suction and return lines 
shall enter the top of the fuel tanks and connections shall be fitted 
into spuds. Such lines shall extend nearly to the bottom of the tank.
    (g) Filling and sounding pipes. Filling and sounding pipes shall be 
so arranged that vapors or possible overflow when filling cannot escape 
to the inside of the vessel but will discharge overboard. Such pipes 
shall terminate on the weather deck clear of any coamings and shall be 
fitted with suitable shutoff valves or deck plugs. Filling and sounding 
pipes shall extend to within one-half of their diameter from the bottom 
of the tank or from the surface of the striking plate in case of a 
sounding pipe. A flame screen of noncorrodible wire mesh shall be fitted 
in the throat of the filling pipe. Sounding pipes shall be kept closed 
at all times except during sounding.
    (h) Vent pipes. Each tank shall be fitted with a vent, the cross-
sectional area of which shall not be less than that of the filling pipe. 
The vent pipes shall terminate at least 2 feet above the weather deck 
and not less than 3 feet from any opening into living quarters or other 
below deck space. The ends of vent pipes shall terminate with U-bends 
and shall be fitted with flame screens or flame arresters. The flame 
screens shall consist of a single screen of corrosion resistant wire of 
at least 30 by 30 mesh.
    (i) Gasoline tanks. For requirements pertaining to independent 
gasoline fuel tanks see subpart 58.50 of this subchapter.
    (j) Fuel pumps. Each fuel pump must be equipped with controls as 
required by Sec. 58.01-25 of this subchapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGFR 72-59R, 37 FR 6189, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 83-
043, 60 FR 24774, May 10, 1995; USCG-2002-13058, 67 FR 61278, Sept. 30, 
2002]



Sec. 56.50-75  Diesel fuel systems.

    (a) Vessels greater than 100 gross tons. (1) The diesel fuel system 
shall comply with Sec. Sec. 56.50-60, 56.50-85, and 56.50-90. The fuel 
supply piping to engines shall be of seamless steel, annealed seamless 
copper or brass pipe or tubing, or of nickel copper or copper nickel 
alloy meeting the requirements of subpart 56.60 for materials and Sec. 
56.50-70(a)(2) for thickness. Fuel oil service or unit pumps shall be 
equipped with controls to comply with Sec. 58.01-25 of this subchapter.
    (2) The installation shall comply with Sec. 56.50-70(b).
    (3) Tubing connections and fittings shall be drawn or forged metal 
of the flared type except that flareless fittings of the nonbite type 
may be used when the tubing system is steel, nickel-copper, or copper-
nickel. When making flared tube connections the tubing

[[Page 209]]

shall be cut square and flared by suitable tools. Tube ends shall be 
annealed before flaring.
    (b) Vessels of 100 gross tons and less and tank barges--(1) 
Materials. Fuel supply piping shall be of copper, nickel copper or 
copper nickel having a minimum wall thickness of 0.035 inch except that 
piping of other materials such as seamless steel pipe or tubing which 
provides equivalent safety may be used.
    (2) Tubing connections and fittings. Tubing connections shall comply 
with the provisions of Sec. 56.50-75(a)(3).
    (3) Installation. The installation of diesel fuel piping shall 
comply with the requirements of Sec. 56.50-70(b).
    (4) Shutoff valves. Shutoff valves shall be installed in the fuel 
supply lines, one as close to each tank as practicable, and one as close 
to each fuel pump as practicable. Valves shall be accessible at all 
times.
    (5) Outlets and drains. Valves for removing water or impurities from 
fuel oil systems will be permitted in the machinery space provided such 
valves are fitted with caps or plugs to prevent leakage.
    (6) Filling pipe. Tank filling pipes on motorboats and motor vessels 
of less than 100 gross tons and tank barges shall terminate on an open 
deck and shall be fitted with suitable shutoff valves, deck plugs, or 
caps.
    (7) Vent pipes. Each tank shall be fitted with a vent pipe complying 
with Sec. 56.50-85.
    (8) Independent diesel fuel tanks. See subpart 58.50 of this 
subchapter for specific requirements.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40610, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.50-80  Lubricating-oil systems.

    (a) The lubricating oil system shall be designed to function 
satisfactorily when the vessel has a permanent 15[deg] list and a 
permanent 5[deg] trim.
    (b) When pressure or gravity-forced lubrication is employed for the 
steam driven main propelling machinery, an independent auxiliary 
lubricating pump shall be provided.
    (c) Oil coolers on steam driven machinery shall be provided with two 
separate means of circulating water through the coolers.
    (d) For internal combustion engine installations, the requirements 
of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section shall be met, but they do not 
apply to vessels in river and harbor service, nor to any vessel below 
300 gross tons. Where the size and design of an engine is such that 
lubrication before starting is not necessary and an attached pump is 
normally used, the independent auxiliary pump is not required if a 
duplicate of the attached pump is carried as spare. In meeting the 
requirements of paragraph (c) of this section in the case of internal 
combustion engines, two separate means are to be provided for 
circulating coolant on those engines on which oil coolers are fitted. 
One of those means must be independently driven and may consist of a 
connection from a pump of adequate size normally used for other purposes 
utilizing the required coolant. Where the design of an engine will not 
readily accommodate an independent pump connection, the independent 
auxiliary pump will not be required if a duplicate of the attached pump 
is carried as a spare. Oil filters shall be provided on all internal 
combustion engine installations. On main propulsion engines which are 
fitted with full-flow type filters, the arrangement shall be such that 
the filters may be cleaned without interrupting the oil supply except 
that such an arrangement is not required on vessels having more than a 
single main propulsion engine.
    (e) The lubricating oil piping shall be independent of other piping 
systems and shall be provided with necessary coolers, heaters, filters, 
etc., for proper operation. Oil heaters shall be fitted with bypasses.
    (f) Diesel engine lubrication systems shall be so arranged that 
vapors from the sump tank may not be discharged back into the engine 
crank case of engines of the dry sump type.
    (g) Steam turbine driven propulsion and auxiliary generating 
machinery depending on forced lubrication shall be arranged to shut down 
automatically upon failure of the lubricating system.
    (h) Sight-flow glasses may be used in lubricating-oil systems 
provided it has been demonstrated, to the satisfaction

[[Page 210]]

of the Commanding Officer, Marine Safety Center, that they can withstand 
exposure to a flame at a temperature of 927 [deg]C (1700 [deg]F) for one 
hour, without failure or appreciable leakage.
    (i) Steam driven propulsion machinery must be provided with an 
emergency supply of lubricating oil that must operate automatically upon 
failure of the lubricating oil system. The emergency oil supply must be 
adequate to provide lubrication until the equipment comes to rest during 
automatic shutdown.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9979, June 17, 1970; CGD 81-030, 53 FR 17837, May 18, 1988; CGD 83-
043, 60 FR 24774, May 10, 1995]



Sec. 56.50-85  Tank-vent piping.

    (a) This section applies to vents for all independent, fixed, non-
pressure tanks or containers or for spaces in which liquids, such as 
fuel, ship's stores, cargo, or ballast, are carried.
    (1) The structural arrangement in double bottom and other tanks 
shall be such as to permit the free passage of air and gases from all 
parts of the tanks to vent pipes.
    (2) Tanks having a comparatively small surface, such as fuel oil 
settling tanks, need be fitted with only one vent pipe, but tanks having 
a comparatively large surface shall be fitted with at least two vent 
pipes. The vents shall be located so as to provide venting of the tanks 
under any service condition.
    (3) Vent pipes for fuel oil tanks shall, wherever possible, have a 
slope of no less than 30[deg]. Header lines, where both ends are 
adequately drained to a tank, are excluded from this requirement.
    (4) Tank vents must extend above the weather deck, except vents from 
fresh water tanks, bilge oily-water holding tanks, bilge slop tanks, and 
tanks containing Grade E combustible liquids, such as lubricating oil, 
may terminate in the machinery space, provided--
    (i) The vents are arranged to prevent overflow on machinery, 
electrical equipment, and hot surfaces;
    (ii) Tanks containing combustible liquids are not heated; and
    (iii) The vents terminate above the deep load waterline if the tanks 
have boundaries in common with the hull.
    (5) Vents from oil tanks must terminate not less than three feet 
from any opening into living quarters.
    (6) Vents extending above the freeboard deck or superstructure deck 
from fuel oil and other tanks must be at least Schedule 40 in wall 
thickness. Except for barges in inland service and for Great Lakes 
vessels, the height from the deck to any point where water may gain 
access through the vent to below deck must be at least 30 inches (760mm) 
on the freeboard deck and 17\1/2\ inches (450mm) on the superstructure 
deck. On Great Lakes vessels, the height from the deck to any point 
where water may gain access through the vent to below deck must be at 
least 30 inches (760mm) on the freeboard deck, 24 inches (610mm) on the 
raised quarterdeck, and 12 inches (305mm) on other superstructure decks. 
Where the height of vents on Great Lakes vessels may interfere with the 
working of the vessel, a lower height may be approved by the Marine 
Safety Center provided the vent cap is properly protected from 
mechanical damage. For barges in inland service, the vents must extend 
at least six inches above the deck. A lesser amount may be approved by 
the Marine Safety Center if evidence is provided that a particular vent 
has proven satisfactory in service.
    (7) Satisfactory means, permanently attached, shall be provided for 
closing the openings of all vents, except that barges in inland service 
may be exempted. Acceptable means of closure are:
    (i) A ball check valve where the ball float, normally in the open 
position, will float up and close under the action of a submerging wave. 
The valve shall be designed so that the effective clear discharge area 
through the valve with the float in the open position is not less than 
the inlet area of the vent pipe to which the valve is connected.
    (ii) A hinged closure normally open on the outlet of the return 
bend, which must close automatically by the force of a submerging wave; 
or
    (iii) Another suitable device acceptable to the Commanding Officer, 
Marine Safety Center.
    (8) Vent outlets from all tanks which may emit flammable or 
combustible

[[Page 211]]

vapors, such as bilge slop tanks and contaminated drain tanks, must be 
fitted with a single screen of corrosion-resistant wire of at least 30 
by 30 mesh, or two screens of at least 20 by 20 mesh spaced not less 
than one-half inch (13mm) nor more than 1\1/2\ inches (38mm) apart. The 
clear area through the mesh must not be less than the internal 
unobstructed area of the required pipe.
    (9) Where vents are provided with flame screens, the closure device 
shall be situated so as not to damage these screens.
    (10) The diameter of each vent pipe must not be less than 1\1/2\ 
inches nominal pipe size for fresh water tanks, 2 inches nominal pipe 
size for water ballast tanks, and 2\1/2\ inches nominal pipe size for 
fuel oil tanks, except that small independent tanks need not have a vent 
more than 25% greater in cross-sectional area than the fill line.
    (11)(i) If a tank may be filled by a pressure head exceeding that 
for which the tank is designed, the aggregate cross-sectional area of 
the vents in each tank must be not less than the cross-sectional area of 
the filling line unless the tank is protected by overflows, in which 
case the aggregate cross-sectional area of the overflows must be not 
less than the cross-sectional area of the filling line.
    (ii) Provision must be made to guard against liquids rising in the 
venting system to a height that would exceed the design head of a cargo 
tank or fuel-oil tank. It may be made by high-level alarms or overflow-
control systems or other, equivalent means, together with gauging 
devices and procedures for filling cargo tanks.
    (12) Where deep tanks are intended for the occasional carriage of 
dry or liquid cargo, a ``spectacle'' or ring and blank flange may be 
fitted in the overflow pipe so arranged as not to interfere with venting 
when the tanks contain oil.
    (13) Vents from fresh water or water ballast tanks shall not be 
connected to a common header with vents from oil or oily ballast tanks.
    (b) Tank vents must remain within the watertight subdivision 
boundaries in which the tanks they vent are located. Where the 
structural configuration of a vessel makes meeting this requirement 
impracticable, the Marine Safety Center may permit a tank vent to 
penetrate a watertight subdivision bulkhead. All tank vents which 
penetrate watertight subdivision bulkheads must terminate above the 
weather deck.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40610, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 83-043, 60 FR 24774, May 10, 1995; CGD 95-012, 
60 FR 48050, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 56.50-90  Sounding devices.

    (a) Each tank must be provided with a suitable means of determining 
liquid level. Except for a main cargo tank on a tank vessel, each 
integral hull tank and compartment, unless at all times accessible while 
the vessel is operating, must be fitted with a sounding pipe.
    (b) Where sounding pipes terminate below the freeboard deck on cargo 
vessels, they shall be fitted with gate valves. On passenger vessels, 
where sounding pipes terminate below the bulkhead deck, they shall be 
fitted with self-closing gate valves.
    (c) Except as allowed by this paragraph, on each vessel constructed 
on or after June 9, 1995, no sounding pipe used in a fuel-oil tank may 
terminate in any space where the risk of ignition of spillage from the 
pipe might arise. None may terminate in a space for passengers or crew. 
When practicable, none may terminate in a machinery space. When the 
Commanding Officer, Marine Safety Center, determines it impracticable to 
avoid terminating a pipe in a machinery space, a sounding pipe may 
terminate in a machinery space if all the following requirements are 
met:
    (1) In addition to the sounding pipe, the fuel-oil tank has an oil-
level gauge complying with paragraph (d) of this section.
    (2) The pipe terminates in a place remote from ignition hazards 
unless precautions are taken such as fitting an effective screen 
(shield) to prevent the fuel oil, in case of spillage through the end of 
the pipe, from coming into contact with a source of ignition.
    (3) The end of the pipe is fitted with a self-closing blanking 
device and a small-diameter, self-closing control cock located below the 
blanking device

[[Page 212]]

for the purpose of ascertaining before the blanking device is opened 
that no fuel oil is present. Provision must be made to ensure that no 
spillage of fuel oil through the control cock involves an ignition 
hazard.
    (d) On each vessel constructed on or after June 9, 1995, other oil-
level gauges may be used instead of sounding pipes if all the following 
requirements are met:
    (1) In a passenger vessel, no such gauge may require penetration 
below the top of the tank, and neither the failure of a gauge nor an 
overfilling of the tank may permit release of fuel into the space.
    (2) In a cargo vessel, neither the failure of such a gauge nor an 
overfilling of the tank may permit release of fuel into the space. The 
use of cylindrical gauge-glasses is prohibited. The use of oil-level 
gauges with flat glasses and self-closing valves between the gauges and 
fuel tanks is acceptable.
    (e) The upper ends of sounding pipes terminating at the weather deck 
shall be closed by a screw cap or plug. Great Lakes dry cargo carriers 
may have the sounding pipes which service ballast water tanks terminate 
at least 4 inches above the deck if closure is provided by a tight 
fitting hinged cover making metal-to-metal contact with the hinge on the 
forward side. Positive means to secure these caps in the closed position 
shall be provided. Provision shall be made to prevent damage to the 
vessels' plating by the striking of the sounding rod.
    (f) On mobile offshore drilling units where installation of sounding 
pipes may not be practicable for some tanks, alternate means of 
determining liquid level may be used if approved by the Commandant.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-251, 43 FR 
56800, Dec. 4, 1978; CGD 83-043, 60 FR 24774, May 10, 1995; CGD 95-028, 
62 FR 51201, Sept. 30, 1997]



Sec. 56.50-95  Overboard discharges and shell connections.

    (a)(1) All inlets and discharges led through the vessel's side shall 
be fitted with efficient and accessible means, located as close to the 
hull penetrations as is practicable, for preventing the accidental 
admission of water into the vessel either through such pipes or in the 
event of fracture of such pipes.
    (2) The number of scuppers, sanitary discharges, tank overflows, and 
other similar openings in the vessel's side shall be reduced to a 
minimum, either by making each discharge serve for as many as possible 
of the sanitary and other pipes, or in any other satisfactory manner.
    (3) In general, when the bulkhead deck is above the freeboard deck, 
the requirements of this section apply relative to the bulkhead deck. 
For vessels not assigned load lines, such as certain inland vessels and 
barges, the weather deck shall be taken as the freeboard deck.
    (b)(1) Scuppers and discharge pipes originating at any level and 
penetrating the shell either more than 17\1/2\ inches (450mm) below the 
freeboard deck or less than 23\1/2\ inches (600mm) above the summer load 
waterline must be provided with an automatic nonreturn valve at the 
shell. This valve, unless required by paragraph (b)(2) of this section, 
may be omitted if the piping is not less than Schedule 80 in wall 
thickness for nominal pipe sizes through 8 inches, Schedule 60 for 
nominal pipe sizes above 8 inches and below 16 inches, and Schedule 40 
for nominal pipe sizes 16 inches and above.
    (2) Discharges led through the shell originating either from spaces 
below the freeboard deck or from within enclosed superstructures and 
equivalent deckhouses on the freeboard deck as defined in Sec. 42.13-
15(i) of subchapter E (Load Lines) of this chapter, shall be fitted with 
efficient and accessible means for preventing water from passing 
inboard. Normally each separate discharge shall have one automatic 
nonreturn valve with a positive means of closing it from a position 
above the freeboard deck. Where, however, the vertical upward distance 
from the summer load line to the inboard end of the discharge pipe 
through which flooding can take place exceed 0.01L, the discharge may 
have two automatic nonreturn valves without positive means of closing, 
provided that the inboard valve is always accessible for examination 
under service conditions. Where that vertical distance exceeds 0.02L a

[[Page 213]]

single automatic nonreturn valve without positive means of closing is 
acceptable. In an installation where the two automatic nonreturn valves 
are used, the inboard valve must be above the tropical load line. The 
means for operating the positive action valve shall be readily 
accessible and provided with an indicator showing whether the valve is 
open or closed. A suitable arrangement shall be made to insure the valve 
is not closed by unauthorized persons, and a notice shall be posted in a 
conspicuous place at the operating station to the effect that the valve 
shall not be closed except as required in an emergency.
    (3) Where scuppers and drains are installed in superstructures or 
deckhouses not enclosed as defined in Sec. 42.13-15(j) of subchapter E 
(Load Lines) of this chapter, they shall be led overboard. Refer to 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section for any nonreturn valve requirement.
    (4) Sanitary pump discharges leading directly overboard or via a 
holding tank must meet the standards prescribed by this paragraph. The 
location of the sanitary system openings within the vessel determines 
whether the requirements of paragraph (b)(2) or (3) of this section are 
applicable.
    (c) Overflow pipes which discharge through the vessel's side must be 
located as far above the deepest load line as practicable and fitted 
with valves as required by paragraph (b) of this section. Two automatic 
nonreturn valves must be used unless it is impracticable to locate the 
inboard valve in an accessible position, in which case a nonreturn valve 
with a positive means of closure from a position above the freeboard 
deck will be acceptable. Overflows which extend at least 30 inches above 
the freeboard deck before discharging overboard may be fitted with a 
single automatic nonreturn valve at the vessel's side. Overflow pipes 
which serve as tank vents must not be fitted with positive means of 
closure without the specific approval of the Marine Safety Center. 
Overflow pipes may be vented to the weather.
    (d)(1) Sea inlets and discharges, such as used in closed systems 
required for the operation of main and auxiliary machinery, as in pump 
connections or scoop injection heat exchanger connections, need not meet 
the requirements of paragraphs (b) (1) and (2) of this section but 
instead shall be fitted with a shutoff valve located as near the shell 
plating as practicable, and may be locally controlled if the valve is 
located in a manned machinery space. These controls shall be readily 
accessible above the floor plates and shall be provided with indication 
showing whether the valve is opened or closed. Manned machinery spaces 
include the main machinery space and are either attended by the crew or 
are automated in accordance with part 62 of this subchapter to be 
comparable to an attended space.
    (2) In unmanned machinery spaces, all machinery inlets and 
discharges as described in paragraph (d)(1) of this section shall be 
remotely operable from a position above the freeboard deck unless 
otherwise approved and shall meet the access and marking requirements of 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (e)(1) Pipes terminating at the shell plating shall be fitted with 
bends or elbows between the outboard openings and the first rigid 
connection inboard. In no case shall such pipes be fitted in a direct 
line between the shell opening and the first inboard connection.
    (2) Seachests and other hull fittings shall be of substantial 
construction and as short as possible. They shall be located as to 
minimize the possibility of being blocked or obstructed.
    (3) The thickness of inlet and discharge connections outboard of the 
shutoff valves, and exclusive of seachests, must be not less than that 
of Schedule 80 for nominal pipe sizes through 8 inches, Schedule 60 for 
nominal pipe sizes above 8 inches and below 16 inches, and Schedule 40 
for nominal pipe sizes 16 inches and above.
    (f) Valves required by this section and piping system components 
outboard of such required valves on new vessel installations or 
replacements in vessels of 150 gross tons and over shall be of a steel, 
bronze, or ductile cast iron specification listed in Table 56.60-1(a). 
Lead or other heat sensitive materials having a melting point of 1,700 
[deg]F. or less shall not be used in such service, or in any other 
application where the deterioration of the piping system

[[Page 214]]

in the event of fire would give rise to danger of flooding. Brittle 
materials such as cast iron shall not be used in such service. Where 
nonmetallic materials are used in a piping system, and shell closures 
are required by this section, a positive closure metallic valve is 
required (see also Sec. 56.60-25).
    (g) The inboard openings of ash and rubbish-chute discharges shall 
be fitted with efficient covers. If the inboard opening is located below 
the freeboard deck, the cover shall be watertight, and in addition, an 
automatic nonreturn valve shall be fitted in the chute in any easily 
accessible position above the deepest load line. Means shall be provided 
for securing both the cover and the valve when the chute is not in use. 
When ash-ejectors or similar expelling devices located in the boilerroom 
have the inboard openings below the deepest load line, they shall be 
fitted with efficient means for preventing the accidental admission of 
water. The thickness of pipe for ash ejector discharge shall be not less 
than Schedule 80.
    (h) Where deck drains, soil lines, and sanitary drains discharge 
through the shell in way of cargo tanks on tank vessels, the valves 
required by this section shall be located outside the cargo tanks. These 
valves shall meet the material requirements of paragraph (f) of this 
section. The piping led through such tanks shall be fitted with 
expansion bends where required, and shall be of steel pipe having a wall 
thickness of not less than five-eighths inch, except that the use of 
suitable corrosion-resistant material of lesser thickness will be given 
special consideration by the Commandant. All pipe joints within the 
tanks shall be welded. Soil lines and sanitary drains which pass through 
cargo tanks shall be provided with nonreturn valves with positive means 
of closing or other suitable means for preventing the entrance of gases 
into living quarters.
    (i) Except as provided for in Sec. 58.20-20(c) of this chapter, sea 
valves must not be held open with locks. Where it is necessary to hold a 
discharge or intake closed with a lock, either a locking valve may be 
located inboard of the sea valve, or the design must be such that there 
is sufficient freedom of motion to fully close the locked sea valve 
after an event, such as fire damage to the seat, causes significant 
leakage through the valve. Valves which must be opened in and emergency, 
such as bilge discharges or fire pump suctions must not be locked 
closed, whether they are sea valves or not.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843; Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9979, June 17, 1970; CGFR 72-59R, 37 FR 6189, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 81-
030, 53 FR 17837, May 18, 1988; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40610, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.50-96  Keel cooler installations.

    (a) Keel cooler installations shall meet the requirements of Sec. 
56.50-95(d)(1) and (2), and (e)(3), and (f) except that shutoff or 
isolation valves will not be required for the inlet and discharge 
connections if:
    (1) The installation is forward of the collision bulkhead; or,
    (2) The installation is integral with the ship's hull such that the 
cooler tubes are welded directly to the hull of the vessel with the hull 
forming part of the tube and satisfies all of the following:
    (i) The cooler structure is fabricated from material of the same 
thickness and quality as the hull plating to which it is attached except 
that in the case of half round pipe lesser thickness may be used if 
specifically approved by the Commandant. In any case the structure, with 
the exception of the hull proper, need not exceed three-eighths inch in 
thickness.
    (ii) The flexible connections and all openings internal to the 
vessel, such as expansion tank vents and fills, in the installation are 
above the deepest load line and all piping components are Schedule 80 or 
thicker below the deepest load line.
    (iii) Full penetration welds are employed in the fabrication of the 
structure and its attachment to the hull.
    (iv) The forward end of the structure must be faired to the hull 
such that the horizontal length of the fairing is no less than four 
times the height of the structure, or be in a protected location such as 
inside a bow thruster trunk.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 72-59R, 37 
FR 6189, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40611, Oct. 2, 1989]

[[Page 215]]



Sec. 56.50-97  Instrument, control and sampling piping (modifies 122.3).

    (a) Instrument, control and sampling piping must comply with 
paragraph 122.3 of ANSI-B31.1 except that:
    (1) Soldered type fittings may not be used.
    (2) The outside diameter of takeoff connections may not be less than 
0.840 inches for service conditions up to 900 psi or 800 [deg]F., and 
1.050 inches for conditions that exceed either of these limits.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.50-103  Fixed oxygen-acetylene distribution piping.

    (a) This section applies to fixed piping installed for the 
distribution of oxygen and acetylene carried in cylinders as vessels 
stores.
    (b) The distribution piping shall be of at least standard wall 
thickness and shall include a means, located as close to the supply 
cylinders as possible, of regulating the pressure from the supply 
cylinders to the suitable pressure at the outlet stations.
    (c) Acetylene distribution piping and pipe fittings must be seamless 
steel. Copper alloys containing less than 65 percent copper may be used 
in connection with valves, regulators, gages, and other equipment used 
with acetylene.
    (d) Oxygen distribution piping and pipe fittings must be seamless 
steel or copper.
    (e) When more than two cylinders are connected to a manifold, the 
supply pipe between each cylinder and manifold shall be fitted with a 
non-return valve.
    (f) Except for the cylinder manifolds, acetylene is not to be piped 
at a pressure in excess of 100 kPa (14.7 psi).
    (g) Pipe joints on the low pressure side of the regulators shall be 
welded.
    (h) Branch lines shall not run through unventilated spaces or 
accommodation spaces.
    (i) Relief valves or rupture discs shall be installed as relief 
devices in the piping system if the maximum design pressure of the 
piping system can be exceeded. The relief device set pressure shall not 
exceed the maximum design pressure of the piping system. Relief devices 
shall discharge to a location in the weather at least 3 m (10 ft) from 
sources of ignition or openings to spaces or tanks.
    (j) Outlet stations are to be provided with suitable protective 
devices which will prevent the back flow of gas into the supply lines 
and prevent the passage of flame into the supply lines.
    (k) Shutoff valves shall be fitted at each outlet.

[CGD 95-028, 62 FR 51201, Sept. 30, 1997]



Sec. 56.50-105  Low-temperature piping.

    (a) Class I-L. Piping systems designated to operate at temperatures 
below 0 [deg]F. and pressures above 150 pounds per square inch gage 
shall be of Class I-L. Exceptions to this rule may be found in the 
individual requirements for specific commodities in subchapters D, I, 
and O of this chapter. The following requirements for Class I-L piping 
systems shall be satisfied:
    (1) Materials. All materials used in low temperature piping systems 
shall be selected from among those specifications listed in Table 56.50-
105 and shall satisfy all of the requirements of the specifications, 
except that:
    (i) The minimum service temperature as defined in Sec. 54.25-
10(a)(2) of this subchapter shall not be colder than that shown in Table 
56.50-105; and
    (ii) The material shall be tested for low temperature toughness 
using the Charpy V-notch specimen of ASTM E 23 (incorporated by 
reference, see Sec. 56.01-2), ``Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic 
Materials'', Type A, Figure 4. The toughness testing requirements of 
subpart 54.05 of this subchapter shall be satisfied for each particular 
product form. Charpy V-notch tests shall be conducted at temperatures 
not warmer than 10 [deg]F. below the minimum service temperature of the 
design, except that for service temperatures of -320 [deg]F. and below, 
the impact test may be conducted at the service temperature. The minimum 
average energy shall not be less than that shown in Table 56.50-105. In 
the case of steels conforming to the specifications of Table 54.25-20(a) 
of this subchapter the minimum lateral expansion shall not be less than 
that required in Sec. 54.25-20 of this subchapter. The minimum energy 
permitted for a single specimen and the minimum subsize energies shall 
be those obtained

[[Page 216]]

by multiplying the average energy shown in Table 56.50-105 by the 
applicable fraction shown in Table 56.50-105(a).

      Table 56.50-105(a)--Charpy V-Notch Energy Multiplying Factors
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 Factor for   Factor for
                                                  minimum      minimum
                                                  energy,       energy
       Charpy V-notch specimen size \1\          average of     single
                                                3 specimens    specimen
                                                    \1\          \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10x10 mm......................................            1          2/3
10x7.5 mm.....................................          5/6          5/9
10x5.0 mm.....................................          2/3          4/9
10x2.5 mm.....................................          1/2         1/3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Straight line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.

    (iii) Steels equivalent to those listed in Table 56.50-105 of this 
part, but not produced according to a particular ASTM specification, may 
be used only with the prior consent of the Marine Safety Center. Steels 
differing in chemical composition, mechanical properties or heat 
treatments from those specified may be specially approved by the Marine 
Safety Center. Similarly, aluminum alloys and other nonferrous materials 
not covered in Table 56.50-105 of this part may be specifically approved 
by the Marine Safety Center for service at any low temperature. There 
are restrictions on the use of certain materials in this part and in 
subchapter O of this chapter.
    (2) Piping weldments. Piping weldments shall be fabricated to 
satisfy the requirements of Sec. 57.03-1(b) of this subchapter in 
addition to subpart 56.70. Toughness testing of production weldments for 
low temperature piping systems and assemblies is not required.
    (3) Postweld heat treatment. All piping weldments shall be postweld 
heat treated for stress relief in accordance with the procedures of 
subpart 56.85. The only exceptions to this requirement are for materials 
which do not require postweld heat treatment as shown in Table 56.85-10. 
Relief from postweld heat treatment shall not be dependent upon pipe 
thickness or weld joint type.
    (4) Nonacceptable joints. Single welded butt joints with backing 
ring left in place, socket welds, slip-on flanges, pipe joining sleeves, 
and threaded joints shall not be used, except in small diameter 
instrument lines.
    (5) Other requirements. All other requirements of this part for 
Class I piping apply to Class I-L piping. Pressure testing must comply 
with subpart 56.97 of this part, and nondestructive testing of 
circumferentially welded joints must comply with Sec. 56.95-10. 
Seamless tubular products must be used except that, when the service 
pressure does not exceed 1724 KPa (250 psi), the Commanding Officer, 
Marine Safety Center, may give special consideration to appropriate 
grades of piping and tubing that are welded without the addition of 
filler metal in the root pass. Each production procedure and quality-
control program for welded products must be acceptable to the Officer in 
Charge, Marine Inspection.
    (b) Class II-L. Piping systems designed to operate at temperatures 
below 0 [deg]F. and pressures not higher than 150 pounds per square inch 
gage shall be of Class II-L. Exceptions to this rule may be found in the 
individual requirements for specific commodities in subchapter D (Tank 
Vessels) and I (Cargo and Miscellaneous Vessels) of this chapter. The 
following requirements for Class II-L piping systems shall be satisfied:
    (1) Materials must be the same as those required by paragraph (a)(1) 
of this section except that pipe and tubing of appropriate grades welded 
without the addition of a filler metal may be used. The Commandant may 
give special consideration to tubular products welded with the addition 
of filler metal.
    (2) Piping weldments shall be fabricated to satisfy the requirements 
of Sec. 57.03-1(b) of this subchapter in addition to subpart 56.70. 
Toughness testing of production weldments for low temperature piping 
systems and assemblies is not required.
    (3) All piping weldments shall be postweld heat treated for stress 
relief in accordance with the procedures of subpart 56.85. The only 
exceptions to this requirement are for materials which do not require 
postweld heat treatment as shown in Table 56.85-10 and for socket weld 
joints and slip-on flange weld attachments where the weld thickness does 
not exceed that exempted by this table. Otherwise, relief from post-weld 
heat treatment shall

[[Page 217]]

not be dependent upon pipe thickness or weld joint type.
    (4) Socket welds in nominal sizes above 3 inches, slip-on flanges in 
nominal sizes above 4 inches, and threaded joints in sizes above 1 inch 
shall not be used.
    (5) Pressure testing must comply with Subpart 56.97, and 
nondestructive testing of welded joints must comply with Sec. 56.95-10.
    (6) All other requirements contained in this part for Class II 
piping shall be applicable to Class II-L systems, except that Sec. 
56.70-15(b)(3)(iv) shall not apply.

                      Table 56.50-105--Acceptable Materials and Toughness Test Criteria \2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                  ASTM specification                        Minimum service   Minimum avg Charpy
          Product form                    \3\              Grade \4\          temperature       V notch energy
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe............................                      1.................  -30 [deg]F........  20 ft. lb.
                                                      3.................  -150 [deg]F.......  25 ft. lb.
Tube (carbon and low              A-333 and           4 (A-333 only)....  -100 [deg]F.......  25 ft. lb.
 alloy steels).                   A-334.............  6.................  -30 [deg]F........  20 ft. lb.
                                                      7.................  -100 [deg]F.......  25 ft. lb.
                                                      8.................  -320 [deg]F.......  Refer to Sec.
                                                                                               54.25-20 of this
                                                                                               subchapter.
Pipe (Austenitic stainless        A-312.............  All Grades........  No limit..........  Austenitic
 steel).                                                                                       stainless steel
                                                                                               piping need be
                                                                                               impact tested
                                                                                               only when
                                                                                               toughness tests
                                                                                               are specified in
                                                                                               subpart 54.25 of
                                                                                               this subchapter
                                                                                               for plating of
                                                                                               the same alloy
                                                                                               designation. When
                                                                                               such toughness
                                                                                               tests are
                                                                                               required, the
                                                                                               minimum average
                                                                                               energy is 25 ft.
                                                                                               lb.
Wrought welding fittings                              WPL1..............  -30 [deg]F........  20 ft. lb.
 (carbon and low alloy            A-420.............  WPL3..............  -150 [deg]F.......  25 ft. lb.
 steels).                                             WPL4..............  -100 [deg]F.......  25 ft. lb.
Forged or rolled flanges,                             LF1...............  -30 [deg]F........  20 ft. lb.
 forged fittings, valves          A-350 \1\.........  LF2...............  -30 [deg]F........  20 ft. lb.
 and pressure parts                                   LF3...............  -150 [deg]F.......  25 ft. lb.
 (carbon and low alloy                                LF4...............  -100 [deg]F.......  25 ft. lb.
 steels).
Forged or rolled flanges, forged  A-182.............  Austenitic grades   No limit..........  These products
 fittings, valves and pressure                         only (304, 304H,                        need be impact
 parts (high alloy steels).                            304L, 310, 316,                         tested only when
                                                       316H, 316L, 321,                        toughness tests
                                                       321H, 347, 347H,                        are specified in
                                                       348, 348H).                             subpart 54.25 of
                                                                                               this subchapter
                                                                                               for plating of
                                                                                               the same alloy
                                                                                               designation. When
                                                                                               such toughness
                                                                                               tests are
                                                                                               required, the
                                                                                               minimum average
                                                                                               energy is 25 ft.
                                                                                               lb.
Forged flanges, fittings,         A-522.............  9% Ni.............  -320 [deg]F.......  Refer to Sec.
                                                                                               54.25-20 of
 and valves (9% nickel).                                                                       this subchapter.
Castings for valves and                               LCB...............  -30 [deg]F........  20 ft. lb.
 pressure parts (carbon           A-352\1\..........  LC1...............  -50 [deg]F........  20 ft. lb.
 and low alloy steels).                               LC2...............  -100 [deg]F.......  25 ft. lb.
                                                      LC3...............  -150 [deg]F.......  25 ft. lb.
Castings for valves and pressure  A-351.............  Austenitic grades   No limit, except -  No toughness
 parts (high alloy steel).                             CF3, CF3A, CF8,     325 [deg]F for      testing required
                                                       CF8A, CF3M, CF8M,   grades CF8C and     except for
                                                       CF8C, CK20 only.    CK20.               service
                                                                                               temperatures
                                                                                               colder than -425
                                                                                               [deg]F for grades
                                                                                               CF3, CF3A, CF8,
                                                                                               CF8A, CF3M, and
                                                                                               CF8M. 25 ft. lb.
                                                                                               average must be
                                                                                               attained in these
                                                                                               tests.

[[Page 218]]

 
Bolting.........................  A-320.............  L7, L9, L10, L43..  -150 [deg]F.......  20 ft. lb.
                                                      B8D, B8T, B8F, B8M  -325 [deg]F.......  No test required.
                                                      2B8, B8C..........  No limit..........  No test required,
                                                                                               except for
                                                                                               service
                                                                                               temperatures
                                                                                               colder than -425
                                                                                               [deg]F. In such
                                                                                               case the minimum
                                                                                               average energy is
                                                                                               25 ft. lb.
                                                      4.................  -150 [deg]F.......  20 ft. lb.
Nuts, bolting...................  A-194.............  8T, 8F............  -325 [deg]F.......  No test required.
                                                      8, 8C.............  No limit..........  Same requirement
                                                                                               as comparable
                                                                                               grades (B8, B8C)
                                                                                               of bolting listed
                                                                                               above.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Quench and temper heat treatment may be permitted when specifically authorized by the Commandant. In those
  cases the minimum average Charpy V-notch energy shall be specially designated by the Commandant.
\2\ Other material specifications for product forms acceptable under part 54 for use at low temperatures may
  also be used for piping systems provided the applicable toughness requirements of this Table are also met.
\3\ Any repair method must be acceptable to the Commandant (G-MSE), and welding repairs as well as fabrication
  welding must be in accordance with part 57 of this chapter.
\4\ The acceptability of several alloys for low temperature service is not intended to suggest acceptable
  resistance to marine corrosion. The selection of alloys for any particular shipboard location must take
  corrosion resistance into account and be approved by the Marine Safety Center.


[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 72-59R, 37 
FR 6189, 6190, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975; CG 
79-108, 43 FR 46545, Oct. 10, 1978; CGD 74-289, 44 FR 26008, May 3, 
1979; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40611, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 83-043, 60 FR 24775, 
May 10, 1995; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 56.50-110  Diving support systems.

    (a) In addition to the requirements of this part, piping for diving 
installations which is permanently installed on the vessel must meet the 
requirements of subpart B (Commercial Diving Operations) of part 197 of 
this chapter.
    (b) Piping for diving installations which is not permanently 
installed on the vessel need not meet the requirements of this part, but 
must meet the requirements of subpart B of part 197 of this chapter.
    (c) Piping internal to a pressure vessel for human occupancy (PVHO) 
need not meet the requirements of this part, but must meet the 
requirements of subpart B of part 197 of this chapter.

[CGD 76-009, 43 FR 53683, Nov. 16, 1978]



                         Subpart 56.60_Materials



Sec. 56.60-1  Acceptable materials and specifications (replaces 123 and Table 126.1 in ANSI-B31.1).

    (a)(1) The material requirements in this subpart shall be followed 
in lieu of those in 123 in ANSI-B31.1.
    (2) Materials used in piping systems must be selected from the 
specifications which appear in Table 56.60-1(a) of this section or Table 
56.60-2(a) of this part, or they may be selected from the material 
specifications of section I, III, or VIII of the ASME Code if not 
prohibited by a regulation of this subchapter dealing with the 
particular section of the ASME Code. Table 56.60-1(a) of this section 
contains only pipe, tubing, and fitting specifications. Determination of 
acceptability of plate, forgings, bolting, nuts, and castings may be 
made by reference to the ASME Code as previously described. 
Additionally, accepted materials for use as piping system components 
appear in Table 56.60-2(a) of this part. Materials conforming to 
specifications not described in this subparagraph must receive the 
specific approval of the Marine Safety Center before being used. 
Materials listed in Table 126.1 of ANSI B31.1 are not accepted unless 
specifically permitted by this paragraph.
    (b) Components made in accordance with the commercial standards 
listed in Table 56.60-1(b) of this section and made of materials 
complying with paragraph (a) this section may be used

[[Page 219]]

in piping systems within the limitations of the standards and within any 
further limitations specified in this subchapter.

         Table 56.60-1(a)--Adopted Specifications and Standards
Note: Table 56.60-1(A) replaces Table 126.1 in ANSI B31.1 and sets forth
specifications of pipes, tubing, and fittings intended for use in piping-
   systems. The first column lists acceptable standards from ASTM; the
   second lists those from ANSI. The Coast Guard will consider use of
 alternative pipes, tubing, and fittings when it receives certification
   of their mechanical properties. Without this certification it will
     restrict use of such alternatives to piping-systems inside heat
   exchangers that ensure containment of the material inside pressure
                                 shells.
Pipe, seamless:
  A106 Carbon steel............  ANSI-B31.1............  ...............
  A335 Ferritic alloys.........  ANSI-B31.1............  ...............
  A376 Austenitic alloys.......  ANSI-B31.1............  (\1\).
Pipe, seamless and welded:
  A53 Types S, F, and E steel    ANSI-B31.1............  (\2,3,4\).
   pipe.
  A312 Austenitic steel (welded  ANSI-B31.1............  (\1,4\).
   with no filler metal).
  A333 Low temperature steel     Sec. VIII, ASME Code..  (\5\).
   pipe.
Pipe, welded:
  A134 Fusion welded steel       See footnote 7........  (\7\).
   plate pipe.
  A135 ERW pipe................  ANSI-B31.1............  (\3\).
  A139 Grade B only, fusion      ANSI-B31.1............  (\8\).
   welded steel pipe.
  A358 Electric fusion welded    ANSI-B31.1............  (\1,4,9\).
   pipe, high temperature,
   austenitic.
Pipe, forged and bored:
  A369 Ferritic alloy..........  ANSI-B31.1............  ...............
Pipe, centrifugally cast:......  (None applicable).....  (\1,9\)
Tube, seamless:
  A179 Carbon steel heat         UCS23, Sec. VIII, ASME  (\11\).
   exchanger and condenser        Code.
   tubes.
  A192 Carbon steel boiler       PG23.1, Sec. I, ASME    (\10\).
   tubes.                         Code.
  A210 Medium carbon boiler      PG23.1, Sec. I, ASME    ...............
   tubes.                         Code.
  A213 Ferritic and austenitic   PG23.1, Sec. I, ASME    (\1\).
   boiler tubes.                  Code.
Tube, seamless and welded:
  A268 Seamless and ERW          PG23.1, Sec. I, ASME    (\4\).
   ferritic stainless tubing.     Code.
  A334 Seamless and welded (no   UCS23, Sec. VIII, ASME  (\4,5\).
   added filler metal) carbon     Code.
   and low alloy tubing for low
   temperature.
Tube, welded:
  A178 (Grades A and C only)     PG23.1, Sec. I, ASME    (\10\ Grade A)
   ERW boiler tubes.              Code.                   (\4\).
  A214 ERW heat exchanger and    UCS27, Sec. VIII, ASME  ...............
   condenser tubes.               Code.
  A226 ERW boiler and            PG23.1, Sec. I, ASME    (\4,10\).
   superheater tubes.             Code.
  A249 Welded austenitic boiler  PG23.1, Sec. I, ASME    (\1,4\).
   and heat exchanger tubes (no   Code.
   added filler metal).
Wrought fittings (factory
 made):
  A234 Carbon and ferritic       Conforms to applicable  (\12\).
   alloys.                        American National
                                  Standards (ANSI-B16.9
                                  and ANSI-B16.11).
  A403 Austenitic alloys.......  ......do..............  (\12\).
  A420 Low temperature carbon    ......do..............  (\12\).
   and steel alloy.
Castings,\13\ iron:
  A47 Malleable iron...........  Conform to applicable   (\14\).
                                  American National
                                  Standards or refer to
                                  UCI-23 or UCD-23,
                                  Sec. VIII, ASME Code.
  A126 Gray iron...............  ......do..............  (\14\).
  A197 Malleable iron..........  ......do..............  (\14\).
  A395 Ductile iron............  UCD-23, Sec. VIII,      (\14\).
                                  ASME Code.
  A536 Ductile iron............  See footnote 20.......  (\20\).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
                        Nonferrous Materials \15\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe, seamless:
  B42 Copper...................  UNF23, Sec. VIII, ASME  (\16\).
                                  Code.
  B43 Red brass................  ......do..............  ...............
  B241 Aluminum alloy..........  ......do..............  ...............
Pipe and tube, seamless:
  B161 Nickel..................  ......do..............  ...............
  B165 Nickel-copper...........  ......do..............  ...............
  B167 Ni-Cr-Fe................  ......do..............  ...............
  B315 Copper-silicon..........  ......do..............  ...............
Tube, seamless:
  B68 Copper...................  See footnote 17.......  (\16,17,18\).
  B75 Copper...................  UNF23, Sec. VIII, ASME  (\16\).
                                  Code.
  B88 Copper...................  See footnote 17.......  (\16,17\).
  B111 Copper and copper alloy.  UNF23, Sec. VIII, ASME  ...............
                                  Code.
  B210 Aluminum alloy, drawn...  ......do..............  ...............

[[Page 220]]

 
  B234 Aluminum alloy, drawn...  ......do..............  ...............
  B280 Copper tube for           See footnote 17.......  (\16,17\).
   refrigeration service.
Welding fittings:
  B361 Wrought aluminum welding  Shall meet ANSI         ...............
   fittings.                      Standards.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Longitudinal
           ASTM specification              Minimum tensile      joint       P No.    Allowable stresses (p.s.i.)
                                                             efficiency
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A134:
  Grade 285A............................            45,000         0.80           1            11,250x0,8=9,000.
  Grade 285B............................            50,000         0.80           1           12,500x0,8=10,000.
  Grade 285C............................            55,000         0.80           1          13,750x0,8=11,000.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: When using 104.1.2 in ANSI-B31.1 to compute wall thickness, the stress shown here shall be applied as
  though taken from the stress tables. An additional factor of 0.8 may be required by Sec. 56.07-10(c) and
  (e).
 
\1\ For austenitic materials where two sets of stresses appear, use the lower values.
\2\ Type F (Furnace welded, using open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace only) limited to Class II
  applications with a maximum service temperature of 450 [deg]F. Type E (ERW grade) limited to maximum service
  temperature of 650 [deg]F, or less.
\3\ Electric resistance welded pipe or tubing of this specification may be used to a maximum design pressure of
  350 pounds per square inch gage.
\4\ Refer to limitations on use of welded grades given in Sec. 56.60-2(b).
\5\ Use generally considered for Classes I-L and II-L applications. For Class I-L service only, the seamless
  grade is permitted. For other service refer to footnote 4 and to Sec. 56.50-105.
\6\ Furnace lap or furnace butt grades only. Limited to Class II applications only where the maximum service
  temperature is 450 [deg]F, or less.
\7\ Limited to Grades 285A, 285B, and 285C only (straight and spiral seam). Limited to Class II applications
  only where maximum service temperature is 300 [deg]F or less for straight seam, and 200 [deg]F or less for
  spiral seam.
\8\ Limited to Class II applications where the maximum service temperature is 300 [deg]F or less for straight
  seam and 200 [deg]F or less for spiral seam.
\9\ For Class I applications only the Class I Grade of the specification may be used.
\10\ When used in piping systems, a certificate shall be furnished by the manufacturer certifying that the
  mechanical properties at room temperature specified in ASTM A520 have been met. Without this certification,
  use is limited to applications within heat exchangers.
\11\ When used in piping systems, a certificate shall be furnished by the manufacturer certifying that the
  mechanical properties for A192 in ASTM A520 have been met. Without this certification, use is limited to
  applications within heat exchangers.
\12\ Hydrostatic testing of these fittings is not required but all fittings shall be capable of withstanding
  without failure, leakage, or impairment of serviceability, a hydrostatic test of 1\1/2\ times the designated
  rating pressure.
\13\ Other acceptable iron castings are in UCI-23 and UCD-23 of section VIII of the ASME Code. (See also Sec.
  Sec. 56.60-10 and 56.60-15.) Acceptable castings of materials other than cast iron may be found in section I
  or VIII of the ASME Code.
\14\ Acceptable when complying with American National Standards. Ductile iron is acceptable for temperatures not
  exceeding 650 [deg]F. For pressure temperature limitations refer to UCD-3 of section VIII of the ASME Code.
  Other grades of cast iron are acceptable for temperatures not exceeding 450 [deg]F. For pressure temperature
  limitations refer to UCI-3 of section VIII of the ASME Code.
\15\ For limitations in use refer to Sec. Sec. 56.10-5(c) and 56.60-20.
\16\ Copper pipe must not be used for hot oil systems except for short flexible connections at burners. Copper
  pipe must be annealed before installation in Class I piping systems. See also Sec. Sec. 56.10-5(c) and
  56.60-20.
\17\ The stress values shall be taken from UNF23 of section VIII of the ASME Code for B75 annealed and light
  drawn temper as appropriate.
\18\ B68 shall be acceptable if provided with a mill hydrostatic or eddy current test.
\19\ Centrifugally cast pipe must be specifically approved by the Marine Safety Center.
\20\ Limited to pipe fittings and valves. See Sec. 56.60-15(d) for additional information.


    Table 56.60-1(b)--Adopted Standards Applicable to Piping Systems
                         (Replaces Table 126.1)
  ANSI Standards (American National Standards Institute), 11 West 42nd
                       Street, New York, NY 10036.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
B1.1..................................  Unified Screw Threads.
B1.20.1...............................  Pipe Threads, General Purpose.
B1.20.3...............................  Dryseal Pipe Threads.
B2.1..................................  Pipe Threads.
B2.2..................................  [Reserved]
B16.1.................................  C.I. Flanges and Fittings--
                                         Classes 125 and 250 Only.
B16.3.................................  M.I. Threaded Fittings--Classes
                                         150 and 300.
B16.4.................................  C.I. Threaded Fittings--Classes
                                         125 and 250.
B16.5.................................  Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged
                                         Fittings.\3\
B16.9.................................  Steel Buttwelding Fittings.\3\
B16.10................................  Dimensions of Ferrous Valves.
B16.11................................  Steel S.W. and Threaded
                                         Fittings.
B16.14................................  Ferrous-Threaded Plugs, Bushings
                                         and Locknuts.\4\
B16.15................................  Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings--
                                         Classes 125 & 250.\4\
B16.18................................  Cast Copper Alloy Solder
                                         Joints.\4\
B16.20................................  Ring Joint Gaskets--Steel
                                         Flanges.
B16.21................................  Non-metallic Gaskets for
                                         Flanges.
B16.22................................  Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy
                                         Solder Joint Fittings.\4\
B16.23................................  Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint
                                         Drainage Fittings.\4\
B16.24................................  Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged
                                         Fittings--Class 150 and 300.\3\
B16.25................................  Butt Welding Ends--Pipe, Valves,
                                         Flanges, & Fittings.

[[Page 221]]

 
B16.28................................  Wrought Steel Buttwelding Short
                                         Radius Elbows and Returns.\4\
B16.29................................  Wrought Copper and Wrought-
                                         Copper Alloy Solder Joint
                                         Drainage Fittings.\4\
B16.34................................  Valves--Flanged, Threaded and
                                         Welding end.\3\
B16.42................................  Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and
                                         Fittings.\3\
B18.2.................................  [Reserved]
B18.2.1...............................  Square and Hex Bolts and Screws,
                                         Inch series.
B18.2.2...............................  Square and Hex Nuts.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
  ASTM Standards (American Society for Testing and Materials), 100 Barr
               Harbor Drive, Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
F682..................................  Wrought Carbon Steel Sleeve-Type
                                         Couplings.
F1006.................................  Entrainment Separators for Use
                                         in Marine Piping
                                         Applications.\4\
F1007.................................  Pipe Line Expansion Joints of
                                         the Packed Slip Type for Marine
                                         Applications.
F1020.................................  Line Blind Valves for Marine
                                         Applications.\4\
F1120.................................  Circular Metallic Bellows Type
                                         Expansion Joints.
F1123.................................  Non-Metallic Expansion Joints.
F1139.................................  Steam Traps and Drains.
F1172.................................  Fuel Oil Meters of the
                                         Volumetric Positive
                                         Displacement Type.
F1173.................................  Epoxy Resin Fiberglass Pipe and
                                         Fittings to be Used for Marine
                                         Applications.
F1199.................................  Cast and Welded Pipe Line
                                         Strainers.
F1200.................................  Fabricated (Welded) Pipe Line
                                         Strainers.
F1201.................................  Fluid Conditioner Fittings in
                                         Piping Applications Above 0
                                         [deg]F.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
  EJMA Standards (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.), 25
                   North Broadway, Tarrytown, NY 10591
------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 FCI Standards (Fluid Controls Institute, Inc.), 31 South Street, Suite
                       303, Morristown, NJ 07960.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
FCI 69-1..............................  Pressure Rating Standard for
                                         Steam Traps.\4\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 MSS Standards (Manufacturers' Standardization Society of the Valve and
        Fittings Industry), 127 Park Street NE, Vienna, VA 22180.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
B36.10................................  Wrought-Steel & Iron Pipe.
B36.19................................  Stainless Steel Pipe.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 MSS Standards (Manufacturers' Standardization Society of the Valve and
  Fittings Industry), 1815 North Fort Myer Drive, Arlington, Va. 22209.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SP-6..................................  Finishes-On Flanges, Valves &
                                         Fittings.
SP-9..................................  Spot-Facing.
SP-25.................................  Standard Marking System for
                                         Valves, Fittings, Flanges and
                                         Unions.
SP-37.................................  [Reserved]
SP-42.................................  [Reserved]
SP-44.................................  Steel Pipe Line Flanges.\4\
SP-45.................................  Bypass and Drain Connection.
SP-51.................................  Class 150LW Corrosion Resistant
                                         Cast Flanges and Flanged
                                         Fittings.\4\
SP-53.................................  Magnetic Particle Inspection--
                                         Steel Castings.
SP-55.................................  Visual Inspection--Steel
                                         Castings.
SP-58.................................  Pipe Hangers & Supports.
SP-61.................................  Hydrostatic Testing Steel
                                         Valves.
SP-66.................................  [Reserved]
SP-67.................................  Butterfly Valves.\2,4\
SP-69.................................  Pipe Hangers and Supports--
                                         Selection and Application.
SP-72.................................  Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-
                                         Welding Ends for General
                                         Service.\4\
SP-73.................................  Silver Brazing Joints for
                                         Wrought and Cast Solder Joint
                                         Fittings.
SP-83.................................  Carbon Steel Pipe Unions Socket-
                                         Welding and Threaded.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ [Reserved]
\2\ In addition, for bronze valves, adequacy of body shell thickness
  shall be satisfactory to the Marine Safety Center. Refer to Sec.
  56.60-10 of this part for cast iron valves.
\3\ Mill or manufacturer's certification is not required, except where a
  needed portion of the required marking is deleted due to size or is
  absent due to age of existing stocks.
\4\ Because this standard offers the option of several materials, some
  of which are not generally acceptable to the Coast Guard, compliance
  with the standard does not necessarily indicate compliance with these
  regulations. The marking on the component or the manufacturer or mill
  certificate must indicate the material specification and/or grade as
  necessary to fully identify the materials used. The material used must
  comply with the requirements in this subchapter relating to the
  particular application.


[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGFR 72-59R, 37 FR 6190, Mar. 25, 1972; CGD 72-
206R, 38 FR 17229, June 29, 1973; CGD 73-248, 39 FR 30839, Aug. 26, 
1974; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40611, 
Oct. 2, 1989; 55 FR 39968, 39969, Oct. 1, 1990; CGD 95-027, 61 FR 26001, 
May 23, 1996; USCG-1999-6216, 64 FR 53224, Oct. 1, 1999; USCG-1999-5151, 
64 FR 67180, Dec. 1, 1999]



Sec. 56.60-2  Limitations on materials.

    Welded pipe and tubing. The following restrictions apply to the use 
of welded pipe and tubing specifications when utilized in piping 
systems, and not when utilized in heat exchanger, boiler, pressure 
vessel, or similar components:
    (a) Longitudinal joint. Wherever possible, the longitudinal joint of 
a welded pipe shall not be pierced with holes for branch connections or 
other purposes.
    (b) Class II. Use unlimited except as restricted by maximum 
temperature or pressure specified in Table 56.60-1(a) or by the 
requirements contained in Sec. 56.10-5(b) of this chapter.
    (c) Class I. (1) For those specifications in which a filler metal is 
used, the following applies to the material as furnished prior to any 
fabrication:
    (i) For use in service above 800 [deg]F. full welding procedure 
qualifications by the Coast Guard are required. See part 57 of this 
subchapter.
    (ii) Ultrasonic examination as required by item S-6 in ASTM A-376 
shall be certified as having been met in all applications except where 
100 percent

[[Page 222]]

radiography is a requirement of the particular material specification.
    (2) For those specifications in which no filler material is used in 
the welding process, the ultrasonic examination as required by item S-6 
in ASTM A-376 shall be certified as having been met for service above 
800 [deg]F.

  Table 56.60-2(a)--Adopted Specifications Not Listed in the ASME Code
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Source of
       ASTM specifications         allowable stress          Notes
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                          Ferrous Materials \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bar stock:
 A276 (Grades                     See footnote 4....  (\4\).
   304-A, 304L-A, 310-A, 316-A,
   316L-A, 321-A, 347-A, and 348-
   A).
 A575 and A576
   (Grades 1010-1030)...........  See footnote 2....  (\2,3\).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                          Nonferrous Materials
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bar stock:
  B16 (soft and half hard         See footnote 5....  (\5,7\).
   tempers).
  B21 (alloys A, B, and C)......  See footnote 8....  (\8\).
  B124:
    Alloy 377...................  See footnotes 5     (\5,9\).
                                   and 9.
    Alloy 464...................  See footnote 8....  (\8,10\).
    Alloy 655...................  See footnote 11...  (\11\).
    Alloy 642...................  See footnote 12...  (\7,12\).
    Alloy 630...................  See footnote 13...  (\7,13\).
    Alloy 485...................  See footnote 8....  (\8,10\).
Forgings:
  B283 (forging brass)..........  See footnotes 5     (\5 9\).
                                   and 9.
Castings:
  B26...........................  See footnotes 5,    (\5,14,15\).
                                   14, and 15.
  B85...........................  See footnotes 5,    (\5,14,15\).
                                   14, and 15.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For limitations in use refer to Sec. 56.60-5.
\2\ Allowable stresses shall be the same as those listed in UCS23 of
  section VIII of the ASME Code for SA-675 material of equivalent
  tensile strength.
\3\ Physical testing shall be performed as for material manufactured to
  ASME Specification SA-675, except that the bend test shall not be
  required.
\4\ Allowable stresses shall be the same as those listed in UCS23 of
  section VIII of the ASME Code for the corresponding SA-182 material.
\5\ Limited to air and hydraulic service with a maximum design
  temperature of 150 [deg]F. The material must not be used for salt
  water service or other fluids that may cause dezincification or stress
  corrosion cracking.
\6\ [Reserved]
\7\ An ammonia vapor test, in accordance with ASTM B 858M (incorporated
  by reference, see Sec. 56.01-2), shall be performed on a
  representative model of each finished product design.
\8\ Allowable stresses shall be the same as those listed in UNF23 of
  section VIII of the ASME Code for SB-171, naval brass.
\9\ An ammonia vapor test, in accordance with ASTM B 858 (incorporated
  by reference, see Sec. 56.01-2), shall be performed on a
  representative model for each finished product design. Tension tests
  shall be performed to determine tensile strength, yield strength, and
  elongation. Minimum values shall be those listed in table 3 of ASTM
  B283.
\10\ Physical testing, including mercurous nitrate test, shall be
  performed as for material manufactured to ASTM B21.
\11\ Physical testing shall be performed as for material manufactured to
  ASTM B96. Allowable stresses shall be the same as those listed in
  UNF23 of section VIII of the ASME Code for SB-96 and shall be limited
  to a maximum allowable temperature of 212 [deg]F.
\12\ Physical testing shall be performed as for material manufactured to
  ASTM B171, alloy D. Allowable stresses shall be the same as those
  listed in UNF23 of section VIII of the ASME Code for SB-171, aluminum
  bronze D.
\13\ Physical testing shall be performed as for material manufactured to
  ASTM B171, alloy E. Allowable stresses shall be the same as those
  listed in UNF23 of section VIII of the ASME Code for SB-171, aluminum
  bronze, alloy E.
\14\ Tension tests shall be performed to determine tensile strength,
  yield strength, and elongation. Minimum values shall be those listed
  in table X-2 of ASTM B85.
\15\ Those alloys with a maximum copper content of 0.6 percent or less
  shall be acceptable under this specification. Cast aluminum shall not
  be welded or brazed.
 
Note: This Table 56.60-2(a) is a listing of adopted bar stock and
  nonferrous forging and casting specifications not listed in the ASME
  Code. Particular attention should be given to the supplementary
  testing requirements and service limitations contained in the
  footnotes.


[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 72-104R, 37 FR 14233, July 18, 1972; CGD 73-
248, 39 FR 30839, Aug. 26, 1974; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975; 
CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40612, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48050, Sept. 
18, 1995; CGD 95-027, 61 FR 26001, May 23, 1996; CGD 95-028, 62 FR 
51201, Sept. 30, 1997; USCG-1998-4442, 63 FR 52190, Sept. 30, 1998; 
USCG-1999-5151, 64 FR 67180, Dec. 1, 1999]



Sec. 56.60-3  Ferrous materials.

    (a) Ferrous pipe used for salt water service must be protected 
against corrosion by hotdip galvanizing or by the use of extra heavy 
schedule material.
    (b) (Reproduces 123.2.3(c)). Carbon or alloy steel having a carbon 
content of more than 0.35 percent may not be used in welded construction 
or be shaped by oxygen cutting process or other thermal cutting process.

[CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.60-5  Steel (High temperature applications).

    (a) (Reproduces 123.2.3(a).) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures 
above 775 [deg]F., the carbide phase of plain carbon steel, plain nickel 
alloy steel, carbon-manganese alloy steel, manganese-vanadium alloy 
steel, and carbon-silicon steel may be converted to graphite.
    (b) (Reproduces 123.2.3(b).) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures 
above 875 [deg]F., the carbide phase of alloy steels, such as carbon-
molybdenum, manganese-molybdenum-vanadium, manganese-chromium-vanadium 
and

[[Page 223]]

chromium-vanadium, may be converted to graphite.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) The design temperature of a piping system employing one or more 
of the materials listed in paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section 
shall not exceed the lowest graphitization temperature specified for 
materials used.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 72-104R, 37 FR 14233, July 18, 1972; CGD 73-
248, 39 FR 30839, Aug. 26, 1974; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.60-10  Cast iron and malleable iron.

    (a) The low ductility of cast iron and malleable iron should be 
recognized and the use of these metals where shock loading may occur 
should be avoided. Cast iron and malleable iron components shall not be 
used at temperatures above 450 [deg]F. Cast iron and malleable iron 
fittings conforming to the specifications of Table 56.60-1(a) of this 
part may be used at pressures not exceeding the limits of the applicable 
standards of Table 56.60-1(b) of this part at temperatures not exceeding 
450 [deg]F. Valves of either of these materials may be used if they 
conform to the standards for class 125 and class 250 flanges and flanged 
fittings in ANSI B16.1 and if their service does not exceed the rating 
as marked on the valve.
    (b) Cast iron and malleable iron shall not be used for valves or 
fittings in lines carrying flammable or combustible fluids \1\ which are 
directly connected to, or in the proximity of, equipment or other lines 
having open flame, or any parts operating at temperatures above 500 
[deg]F. Cast iron shall not be used for hull fittings, or in systems 
conducting lethal products.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ For definitions of flammable or combustible fluids, see 
Sec. Sec. 30.10-15 and 30.10-22 of subchapter D (Tank Vessels) of this 
chapter.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Malleable iron and cast iron valves and fittings, designed and 
marked for Class 300 refrigeration service, may be used for such service 
provided the pressure limitation of 300 pounds per square inch is not 
exceeded. Malleable iron flanges of this class may also be used in sizes 
4 inches and smaller (oval and square design).

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-
140, 54 FR 40612, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-027, 61 FR 26001, May 23, 1996]



Sec. 56.60-15  Ductile iron.

    (a) Ductile cast iron components made of material conforming to ASTM 
A 395 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 56.01-2) may be used within 
the service restrictions and pressure-temperature limitations of UCD-3 
of section VIII of the ASME Code.
    (b) Ductile iron castings conforming to ASTM A 395 (incorporated by 
reference, see Sec. 56.01-2) may be used in hydraulic systems at 
pressures in excess of 7500 kilopascals (1000 pounds per square inch) 
gage, provided the following:
    (1) The castings receive a ferritizing anneal when the as-cast 
thickness does not exceed one inch;
    (2) Large castings for components, such as hydraulic cylinders, are 
examined as specified for a casting quality factor of 90 percent in 
accordance with UG-24 of section VIII of the ASME Code; and
    (3) The castings are not welded, brazed, plugged, or otherwise 
repaired.
    (c) After machining, ductile iron castings must be hydrostatically 
tested to twice their maximum allowable working pressure and must show 
no leaks.
    (d) Ductile iron castings exhibiting less than 12 percent elongation 
in 50 millimeters (2 inches) when subjected to a tensile test must meet 
the requirements for cast iron in this part.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40612, Oct. 2, 1989, as amended by CGD 95-027, 61 FR 
26001, May 23, 1996; USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 56.60-20  Nonferrous materials.

    Nonferrous materials listed in this subpart may be used in piping 
systems under the following conditions (see also Sec. 56.10-5(c)):
    (a) The low melting points of many nonferrous metals and alloys, 
such as aluminum and aluminum alloys, must be recognized. These types of 
heat sensitive materials must not be used to

[[Page 224]]

conduct flammable, combustible, or dangerous fluids, or for vital 
systems unless approved by the Marine Safety Center.

    Note: For definitions of flammable or combustible fluids, see 
Sec. Sec. 30.10-15 and 30.10-22 or parts 151-154 of this chapter. 
Dangerous fluids are those covered by regulations in part 98 of this 
chapter.

    (b) The possibility of galvanic corrosion due to the relative 
solution potentials of copper and aluminum and their alloys should be 
considered when used in conjunction with each other or with steel or 
with other metals and their alloys when an electrolyte is present.
    (c) A suitable thread compound must be used in making up threaded 
joints in aluminum pipe to prevent seizing which might cause leakage and 
perhaps prevent disassembly. Pipe in the annealed temper should not be 
threaded.
    (d) The corrosion resistance of copper bearing aluminum alloys in a 
marine atmosphere is poor and alloys with copper contents exceeding 0.6 
percent should not be used. Refer to Table 56.60-2(a) of this part for 
further guidance.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40612, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-027, 61 FR 26001, May 23, 1996]



Sec. 56.60-25  Nonmetallic materials.

    (a) Plastic pipe installations shall be in accordance with the 
International Maritime Organization (IMO) resolution A.753(18), 
Guidelines for the Application of Plastic Pipes on Ships and the 
following supplemental requirements:
    (1) Materials used in the fabrication of plastic pipe shall comply 
with the appropriate standards listed in Sec. 56.01-2 of this chapter.
    (2) Plastic pipe is not permitted in a concealed space in an 
accommodation or service area, such as behind ceilings or linings or 
between double bulkheads, unless--
    (i) Each trunk or duct containing such piping is completely 
surrounded by ``A'' class divisions; or
    (ii) An approved smoke-detection system is fitted in the concealed 
space and each penetration of a bulkhead or deck and each installation 
of a draft stop is made in accordance with IMO resolution A.753(18) to 
maintain the integrity of fire divisions.
    (3) Plastic pipe used outboard of the required metallic shell valve 
in any piping system penetrating the vessel's shell (see Sec. 56.50-
95(f)) shall have the same fire endurance as the metallic shell valve. 
Where the shell valve and the plastic pipe are in the same unmanned 
space, the valve shall be operable from above the freeboard deck.
    (4) Pipe that is to be used for potable water shall bear the seal of 
approval or NSF mark of the National Sanitation Foundation Testing 
Laboratory, Incorporated, School of Public Health, University of 
Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI 48103.
    (b) Nonmetallic flexible hose. (1) Nonmetallic flexible hose must be 
in accordance with SAE J-1942 and may be installed only in vital and 
nonvital fresh and salt water systems, nonvital pneumatic systems, lube 
oil and fuel systems, and fluid power systems.
    (2) Nonmetallic flexible hose may be used in vital fresh and salt 
water systems at a maximum service pressure of 150 psi. Nonmetallic 
flexible hose may be used in lengths not exceeding 30 inches where 
flexibility is required subject to the limitations of paragraphs (a) (1) 
through (4) of this section. Nonmetallic flexible hose may be used for 
plastic pipe in duplicate installations in accordance with paragraph (a) 
of this section.
    (3) Nonmetallic flexible hose may be used for plastic pipe in 
nonvital fresh and salt water systems and nonvital pneumatic systems 
subject to the limitations of paragraphs (a) (1) through (4) of this 
section. Unreinforced hoses are limited to a maximum service pressure of 
50 psi, reinforced hoses are limited to a maximum service pressure of 
150 psi.
    (4) Nonmetallic flexible hose may be used in lube oil, fuel oil and 
fluid power systems only where flexibility is required and in lengths 
not exceeding 30 inches.
    (5) Nonmetallic flexible hose must be complete with factory-
assembled end fittings requiring no further adjustment of the fittings 
on the hose, except that field attachable type fittings may be used. 
Hose end fittings must comply

[[Page 225]]

with SAE J-1475. Field attachable fittings must be installed following 
the manufacturer's recommended practice. If special equipment is 
required, such as crimping machines, it must be of the type and design 
specified by the manufacturer. A hydrostatic test of each hose assembly 
must be conducted in accordance with Sec. 56.97-5 of this part.
    (c) Plastic valves, fittings, and flanges may be used in systems 
employing plastic pipe. Such valves, fittings, and flanges shall be 
designed, fabricated, tested, and installed so as to satisfy the intent 
of the requirements for plastic pipe contained in this section.
    (d) If it is desired to use nonmetallic materials other than those 
specified in this section, a request furnishing the chemical and 
physical properties of the material shall be submitted to the Commandant 
for consideration.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9979, June 17, 1970; CGD 72-104R, 37 FR 14234, July 18, 1972; CGD 73-
254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40613, Oct. 2, 1989; 
CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35822, July 29, 1991; CGD 83-043, 60 FR 24775, May 10, 
1995; CGD 95-072, 60 FR 50462, Sept. 29, 1995; CGD 96-041, 61 FR 50728, 
Sept. 27, 1996; CGD 95-028, 62 FR 51201, Sept. 30, 1997; USCG-2002-
13058, 67 FR 61278, Sept. 30, 2002]



            Subpart 56.65_Fabrication, Assembly and Erection



Sec. 56.65-1  General (replaces 127 through 135.4).

    (a) The requirements for fabrication, assembly and erection in 
subparts 56.70 through 56.90 shall apply in lieu of 127 through 135.4 of 
ANSI-B31.1. Those paragraphs reproduced are so noted.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970]



                          Subpart 56.70_Welding



Sec. 56.70-1  General.

    (a) The following generally applies to all types of welding, such as 
stud welding, casting repair welding and all processes of fabrication 
welding. Where the detailed requirements are not appropriate to a 
particular process, alternatives must be approved by the Marine Safety 
Center.

[CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40614, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.70-3  Limitations.

    Backing rings. Backing strips used at longitudinal welded joints 
must be removed.

[CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.70-5  Material.

    (a) Filler metal. All filler metal, including consumable insert 
material, must comply with the requirements of section IX, ASME Boiler 
and Pressure Vessel Code and Sec. 57.02-5 of this subchapter.
    (b) Backing rings. When metallic backing rings are used they shall 
be made from material of weldable quality compatible with the base 
metal, whether subsequently removed or not. When nonmetallic backing 
rings are used they shall be of material which does not deleteriously 
affect either base or weld metal, and shall be removed after welding is 
completed. Backing rings may be of the consumable insert type, removable 
ceramic type, of solid or split band type. A ferrous backing ring which 
becomes a permanent part of the weld shall not exceed 0.05 percent 
sulphur. If two abutting surfaces are to be welded to a third member 
used as a backing ring and one or two of the three members are ferritic 
and the other member or members are austenitic, the satisfactory use of 
such materials shall be determined by procedure qualifications.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 73-254, 40 FR 
40165, Sept. 2, 1975; USCG-2002-13058, 67 FR 61278, Sept. 30, 2002]



Sec. 56.70-10  Preparation (modifies 127.3).

    (a) Butt welds (reproduces 127.3.1)--(1) End preparation. (i) Oxygen 
or arc cutting is acceptable only if the cut is reasonably smooth and 
true, and all slag is cleaned from the flame cut surfaces. Discoloration 
which may remain on the flame cut surface is not considered to be 
detrimental oxidation.
    (ii) Butt-welding end preparation dimensions contained in ANSI-
B16.25 or any other end preparation which meets

[[Page 226]]

the procedure qualification requirements are acceptable.
    (iii) If piping component ends are bored, such boring shall not 
result in the finished wall thickness after welding being less than the 
minimum design thickness. Where necessary, weld metal of the appropriate 
analysis may be deposited on the inside or outside of the piping 
component to provide sufficient material for machining to insure 
satisfactory fitting of rings.
    (iv) If the piping component ends are upset they may be bored to 
allow for a completely recessed backing ring, provided the remaining net 
thickness of the finished ends is not less than the minimum design 
thickness.
    (2) Cleaning. Surfaces for welding shall be clean and shall be free 
from paint, oil, rust, scale, or other material which is detrimental to 
welding.
    (3) Alignment. The inside diameters of piping components to be 
joined must be aligned as accurately as practicable within existing 
commercial tolerances on diameters, wall thicknesses, and out of 
roundness. Alignment must be preserved during welding. Where ends are to 
be joined and the internal misalignment exceeds \1/16\-inch, it is 
preferred that the component with the wall extending internally be 
internally trimmed (see Fig. 127.3.1) so that adjoining internal 
surfaces are approximately flush. However, this trimming must not reduce 
a piping component wall thickness below the minimum design thickness and 
the change in the contour may not exceed 30[deg].
    (4) Spacing. The root opening of the joint shall be as given in the 
procedure specification.
    (b) Fillet welds (Modifies 127.3.2). In making fillet welds, the 
weld metal must be deposited in such a way as to obtain adequate 
penetration into the base metal at the root of the weld. Piping 
components which are to be joined utilizing fillet welds must be 
prepared in accordance with applicable provisions and requirements of 
this section. For typical details, see Figures 127.4.4A and 127.4.4C of 
ANSI B31.1 and Figure 56.30-10(b) of this part. See Sec. 56.30-5(d) of 
this part for additional requirements.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-
140, 54 FR 40614, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.70-15  Procedure.

    (a) General. (1) Qualification of the welding procedures to be used, 
and of the performance of welders and operators, is required, and shall 
comply with the requirements of part 57 of this subchapter.
    (2) No welding shall be done if there is direct impingement of rain, 
snow, sleet, or high wind on the piping component weldment.
    (3) Sections of pipe shall be welded insofar as possible in the 
fabricating shop. Prior to welding Class I piping or low temperature 
piping, the fabricator shall request a marine inspector to visit his 
plant to examine his fabricating equipment and to witness the 
qualification tests required by part 57 of this subchapter. One test 
specimen shall be prepared for each process and welding position to be 
employed in the fabrication.
    (b) Girth butt welds. (1) (Reproduces 127.4.2(a)). Girth butt welds 
must be complete penetration welds and may be made with a single vee, 
double vee, or other suitable type of groove, with or without backing 
rings or consumable inserts.''
    (2) Girth butt welds in Class I, I-L, and II-L piping systems shall 
be double welded butt joints or equivalent single welded butt joints for 
pipe diameters exceeding three-fourth inch nominal pipe size. The use of 
a single welded butt joint employing a backing ring (note restrictions 
in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section) on the inside of the pipe is an 
acceptable equivalent for Class I and Class II-L applications, but not 
permitted for Class I-L applications. Single welded butt joints 
employing either an inert gas for first pass backup or a consumable 
insert ring may be considered the equivalent of a double welded butt 
joint for all classes of piping and is preferable for Class I-L and II-L 
systems where double butt welds cannot be used. Appropriate welding 
procedure qualification tests shall be conducted as specified in

[[Page 227]]

part 57 of this subchapter. A first pass inert gas backup is intended to 
mean that the inside of the pipe is purged with inert gas and that the 
root is welded with the inert gas metal arc (mig) or inert gas tungsten 
arc (tig) processes. Classes I, I-L, and II-L piping are required to 
have the inside of the pipe machined for good fit up if the misalignment 
exceeds that specified in Sec. 56.70-10(a)(3). In the case of Class II 
piping the machining of the inside of the pipe may be omitted. For 
single welded joints, where possible, the inside of the joint shall be 
examined visually to assure full penetration. Radiographic examination 
of at least 20 percent of single welded joints to check for penetration 
is required for all Class I and Class I-L systems regardless of size 
following the requirements of Sec. 56.95-10. Ultrasonic testing may be 
utilized in lieu of radiographic examination if the procedures are 
approved.
    (3) For Class II piping, the type of joints shall be similar to 
Class I piping, with the following exceptions:
    (i) Single-welded butt joints may be employed without the use of 
backing rings in all sizes provided that the weld is chipped or ground 
flush on the root side of the weld.
    (ii) For services such as vents, overflows, and gravity drains, the 
backing ring may be eliminated and the root of the weld need not be 
ground.
    (iii) Square-groove welds without edge preparation may be employed 
for butt joints in vents, overflows, and gravity drains where the pipe 
wall thickness does not exceed three-sixteenth inch.
    (iv) The crimped or forged backing ring with continuous projection 
around the outside of the ring is acceptable only for Class II piping. 
The projection must be completely fused.
    (4) Tack welds which become part of the finished weld, shall be made 
by a qualified welder. Tack welds made by an unqualified welder shall be 
removed. Tack welds which are not removed shall be made with an 
electrode which is the same as or equivalent to the electrode to be used 
for the first pass. Their stopping and starting ends must be properly 
prepared by grinding or other suitable means so that they may be 
satisfactorily incorporated into the final weld. Tack welds which have 
cracked shall be removed.
    (5) (Reproduces 127.2(c)). When components of different outside 
diameters are welded together, the weld joint must be filled to the 
outside surface of the component having the larger diameter. There must 
be a gradual transition, not exceeding a slope of 1:3, in the weld 
between the two surfaces. To avoid unnecessary weld deposit, the outside 
surface of the component having the larger diameter must be tapered at 
an angle not to exceed thirty degrees with the axis of the pipe. (See 
Fig. 127.4.2.)
    (6) (Modifies 127.4.2(d)). As-welded surfaces are permitted, 
however, the surface of welds must be sufficiently free from coarse 
ripple, grooves, overlaps, abrupt ridges and valleys to meet the 
following:
    (i) The surface condition of the finished welds must be suitable for 
the proper interpretation of radiographic and other nondestructive 
examinations when nondestructive examinations are required by Sec. 
56.95-10. In those cases where there is a question regarding the surface 
condition on the interpretation of a radiographic film, the film must be 
compared to the actual weld surface for interpretation and determination 
of acceptability.
    (ii) Reinforcements are permitted in accordance with Table 56.70-15.
    (iii) Undercuts must not exceed \1/32\-inch and must not encroach on 
the minimum required section thickness.
    (iv) If the surface of the weld requires grinding to meet the above 
criteria, care must be taken to avoid reducing the weld or base material 
below the minimum required thickness.
    (7) The type and extent of examination required for girth butt welds 
is specified in Sec. 56.95-10.
    (8) Sections of welds that are shown by radiography or other 
examination to have any of the following type of imperfections shall be 
judged unacceptable and shall be repaired as provided in paragraph (f) 
of this section:
    (i) Any type of crack or zone of incomplete fusion or penetration.
    (ii) Any slag inclusion or porosity greater in extent than those 
specified as acceptable set forth in PW-51 of section I of the ASME 
Code.

[[Page 228]]

    (iii) Undercuts in the external surfaces of butt welds which are 
more than \1/32\-inch deep.
    (iv) Concavity on the root side of full penetration girth butt welds 
where the resulting weld thickness is less than the minimum pipe wall 
thickness required by this subchapter. Weld reinforcement up to a 
maximum of \1/32\-inch thickness may be considered as pipe wall 
thickness in such cases.
    (c) Longitudinal butt welds. Longitudinal butt welds in piping 
components not made in accordance with the standards and specifications 
listed in 56.60-1 (a) and (b) must meet the requirements of paragraph 
104.7 of ANSI-B31.1 and may be examined nondestructively by an 
acceptable method. Imperfections shall not exceed the limits established 
for girth butt welds except that no undercutting shall be permitted in 
longitudinal butt welds. See also Sec. 56.60-2(b).
    (d) Fillet welds. (1) Fillet welds may vary from convex to concave. 
The size of a fillet weld is determined as shown in Figure 127.4.4A in 
ANSI B31.1. Fillet weld details for socket-welding components must meet 
Sec. 56.30-5(c) of this part. Fillet weld details for flanges must meet 
Sec. 56.30-10(c) of this part. Fillet weld details for flanges must 
meet Sec. 56.30-10 of this part.
    (2) The limitations on cracks and undercutting set forth in 
paragraph (b)(8) of this section for girth welds are also applicable to 
fillet welds.
    (3) Class I piping not exceeding 3 inches nominal pipe size and not 
subject to full radiography by Sec. 56.95-10 of this part may be joined 
by sleeves fitted over pipe ends or by socket type joints. Where full 
radiography is required, only butt type joints may be used. The inside 
diameter of the sleeve must not exceed the outside diameter of the pipe 
or tube by more than 0.080 inch. Fit between socket and pipe must 
conform to applicable standards for socket weld fittings. Depth of 
insertion of pipe or tube within the socket or sleeve must not be less 
than three-eighths inch. The fillet weld must be deposited in a minimum 
of two passes, unless specifically approved otherwise in a special 
procedure qualification. Requirements for joints employing socket weld 
and slip-on flanges are in Sec. 56.30-10 of this part.
    (4) Sleeve and socket type joints may be used in Class II piping 
systems without restriction as to size of pipe or tubing joined. 
Applicable standards must be followed on fit. The fillet welds must be 
deposited in a minimum of two passes, unless specifically approved 
otherwise in a special procedure qualification. Requirements for joints 
employing socket weld and slip-on flanges are in Sec. 56.30-10 of this 
part.
    (e) Seal welds (reproduces 127.4.5). (1) Where seal welding of 
threaded joints is performed, threads shall be entirely covered by the 
seal weld. Seal welding shall be done by qualified welders.
    (2) The limitation on cracks and undercutting set forth in Sec. 
56.70-15(b)(8) for girth welds are also applicable to seal welds.
    (f) Weld defect repairs (reproduces 127.4.11). (1) All defects in 
welds requiring repair must be removed by a flame or arc-gouging, 
grinding, chipping, or machining. Repair welds must be made in 
accordance with the same procedures used for original welds, or by 
another welding process if it is a part of a qualified procedure, 
recognizing that the cavity to be repaired may differ in contour and 
dimensions from the original joint. The types, extent, and method of 
examination and limits of imperfections of repair welds shall be the 
same as for the original weld.
    (2) Preheating may be required for flame-gouging or arc-gouging 
certain alloy materials of the air hardening type in order to prevent 
surface checking or cracking adjacent to the flame or arc-gouged 
surface.
    (g) Welded branch connections (reproduces 127.4.8). (1) Figure 
127.4.8A, Figure 127.4.8B, and Figure 127.4.8C of ANSI-B31.1 show 
typical details of branch connections with and without added 
reinforcement. However, no attempt has been made to show all acceptable 
types of construction and the fact that a certain type of construction 
is illustrated does not indicate that it is recommended over other types 
not illustrated. See also Figure 56.70-15(g) for additional pipe 
connections.
    (2) Figure 127.4.8D of ANSI-B31.1 shows basic types of weld 
attachments used in the fabrication of branch connections. The location 
and minimum size of these attachment welds shall

[[Page 229]]

conform to the requirements of this paragraph. Weld sizes shall be 
calculated in accordance with 104.3.1 of ANSI-B31.1, but shall not be 
less than the sizes shown in Figure 127.4.8D and F of ANSI-B31.1.
    (3) The notations and symbols used in this paragraph and in Figure 
127.4.8D and F of ANSI-B31.1 are as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.027

     Figure 56.70-15(g)--Acceptable types of welded pipe connections
tn=nominal thickness of branch wall less corrosion allowance, 
inches.
tc=the smaller of \1/4\ inch or 0.7tn.
te=nominal thickness of reinforcing element (ring or saddle), 
inches (te=0 if there is no added reinforcement).
tmin=the smaller of tn or te.
tw=dimension of partial penetration weld, inches.

    (4) Branch connections (including specially made integrally 
reinforced branch connection fittings) which abut the outside surface of 
the run wall, or which are inserted through an opening cut in the run 
wall, shall have opening and branch contour to provide a good fit and 
shall be attached by means of full penetration groove welds except as 
otherwise permitted in paragraph (g)(7) of this section. The full 
penetration groove welds shall be finished with cover fillet welds 
having a minimum throat dimension not less than tc. The 
limitation as to imperfection of these groove welds shall be as set 
forth in 127.4.2(e) of ANSI-B31.1 for girth welds.
    (5) In branch connections having reinforcement pads or saddles, the 
reinforcement shall be attached by welds at the outer edge and at the 
branch periphery as follows:
    (i) If the weld joining the added reinforcement to the branch is a 
full penetration groove weld, it shall be finished with a cover fillet 
weld having a minimum throat dimension not less than tc the 
weld at the outer edge, joining the added reinforcement to the run, 
shall be a fillet weld with a minimum throat dimension of 0.5 
te.
    (ii) If the weld joining the added reinforcement to the branch is a 
fillet weld, the throat dimension shall not be less than 0.7 
tmin. The weld at the outer edge joining the outer 
reinforcement to the run shall also be a fillet weld with a minimum 
throat dimension of 0.5 te.
    (6) When rings or saddles are used, a vent hole shall be provided 
(at the side and not at the crotch) in the ring or saddle to reveal 
leakage in the weld between branch and main run and to provide venting 
during welding and heat treating operations. Rings or saddles may be 
made in more than one piece if the joints between the pieces have 
strength equivalent to ring or saddle parent metal and if each piece is 
provided with a vent hole. A good fit shall be provided between 
reinforcing rings or saddles and the parts to which they are attached.

[[Page 230]]

    (7) Branch connections 2 in. NPS and smaller that do not require 
reinforcement may be constructed as shown in Fig. 127.4.8F of ANSI-
B31.1. This construction is limited to use in Class I and II piping 
systems at a maximum design temperature of 750 [deg]F. or a maximum 
pressure of 1025 psi.
    (h) Heat treatment. Heat treatment for welds shall be in accordance 
with subpart 56.85.

   Table 56.70-15--Reinforcement of Girth and Longitudinal Butt Welds
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                      Maximum thickness (in inches) of
                                    reinforcement for design temperature
                                  --------------------------------------
  Thickness (in inches) of base                                0 [deg]F
              metal                  Below 0                  and above
                                    [deg]F or   350[deg] to    but less
                                    above 750    750 [deg]F    than 350
                                      [deg]F                    [deg]F
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to \1/8\, inclusive...........       \1/16\       \3/32\       \3/16\
Over \1/8\ to \3/16\, inclusive..       \1/16\        \1/8\       \3/16\
Over \3/16\ to \1/2\, inclusive..       \1/16\       \5/32\       \3/16\
Over \1/2\ to 1, inclusive.......       \3/32\       \3/16\       \3/16\
Over 1 to 2, inclusive...........        \1/8\        \1/4\        \1/4\
Over 2...........................       \5/32\        (\1\)        (\1\)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The greater of \1/4\ in. or \1/8\ times the width of the weld in
  inches.
 
Notes: 1. For double welded butt joints, this limitation on
  reinforcement given above applies separately to both inside and
  outside surfaces of the joint.
2. For single welded butt joints, the reinforcement limits given above
  apply to the outside surface of the joint only.
3. The thickness of weld reinforcement is based on the thickness of the
  thinner of the materials being joined.
4. The weld reinforcement thicknesses must be determined for the higher
  of the abutting surfaces involved.
5. For boiler external piping use the column titled ``Below 0 [deg]F. or
  above 750 [deg]F.'' for weld reinforcement thicknesses.


[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9978, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40165, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 77-
140, 54 FR 40614, Oct. 2, 1989; 55 FR 39969, Oct. 1, 1990; CGD 95-012, 
60 FR 48050, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 56.70-20  Qualification, general.

    (a) Qualification of the welding procedures to be used, and of the 
performance of welders and welding operators, is required, and shall 
comply with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 
(section IX) except as modified by part 57 of this subchapter.
    (b) Each butt-welded joint of Class I of Class I-L piping shall be 
marked with the welder's identification symbol. Dies shall not be used 
to mark the pipe where the pressure exceeds 600 pounds per square inch 
or the temperature exceeds 750 [deg]F. or in Class I-L systems.



                          Subpart 56.75_Brazing



Sec. 56.75-5  Filler metal.

    (a) The filler metal used in brazing must be a nonferrous metal or 
alloy having a melting point above 1,000 [deg]F. and below that of the 
metal being joined. The filler metal must meet and flow freely within 
the desired temperature range and, in conjunction with a suitable flux 
or controlled atmosphere, must wet and adhere to the surfaces to be 
joined. Prior to using a particular brazing material in a piping system, 
the requirements of Sec. 56.60-20 of this part should be considered.
    (b) The brazing material used shall have a shearing strength of at 
least 10,000 pounds per square inch. The maximum allowable working 
pressure for brazing piping shall be determined by this part.
    (c) (Reproduces 128.1.2.) Fluxes that are fluid and chemically 
active at the brazing temperature shall be used when necessary to 
prevent oxidation of the filler metal and the surfaces to be joined and 
to promote free flowing of the filler metal.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40615, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.75-10  Joint clearance (reproduces 128.2.2).

    (a) The clearance between surfaces to be joined shall be no larger 
than is necessary to insure complete capillary distribution of the 
filler metal; between

[[Page 231]]

0.002-inch minimum and 0.006-inch maximum.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 56.75-15  Heating (reproduces 128.2.3).

    (a) The joint shall be brought to brazing temperature in as short a 
time as possible to minimize oxidation.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 56.75-20  Brazing qualification.

    (a) The qualification of the performance of brazers and brazing 
operators, shall be in accordance with the requirements of part C, 
section IX of the ASME Code and part 57 of this subchapter.
    (b) Manufacturers shall perform those tests required by paragraph 
(a) of this section prior to performing production brazing.



Sec. 56.75-25  Detail requirements.

    (a) Pipe may be fabricated by brazing when the temperature to which 
such connections may be subjected does not exceed 425 [deg]F. (For 
exception refer to Sec. 56.30-30(b)(1).)
    (b) (Reproduces 128.2.1.) The surfaces to be brazed shall be clean 
and free from grease, oxides, paint, scale, and dirt of any kind. Any 
suitable chemical or mechanical cleaning method may be used to provide a 
clean wettable surface for brazing.
    (c) After the parts to be joined have been thoroughly cleaned the 
edges to be brazed shall be given an even coating of flux prior to 
heating the joint as a protection against oxidation.



Sec. 56.75-30  Pipe joining details.

    (a) Silver brazing. (1) Circumferential pipe joints may be either of 
the socket or butt type. When butt joints are employed the edges to be 
joined shall be cut or machined square and the edges shall be held 
closely together to insure a satisfactory joint.
    (b) Copper-alloy brazing. (1) Copper-alloy brazing may be employed 
to join pipe, valves, and fittings. Circumferential joints may be either 
of the butt or socket type. Where butt joints are employed, the included 
angle shall be not less than 90[deg] where the wall thickness is three-
sixteenths of an inch or greater. The annular clearance of socket joints 
shall be held to small clearances which experience indicates is 
satisfactory for the brazing alloy to be employed, method of heating, 
and material to be joined. The annular clearance shall be shown on 
drawings submitted for approval of socket joints.
    (2) Copper pipe fabricated with longitudinal joints for pressures 
not exceeding that permitted by the regulations in this subchapter may 
have butt, lapped, or scarfed joints. If of the latter type, the kerf of 
the material shall be not less than 60[deg].
    (c) Brazing, general. (1) Heat shall be applied evenly and uniformly 
to all parts of the joint in order to prevent local overheating.
    (2) The members to be joined shall be held firmly in place until the 
brazing alloy has set so as to prevent any strain on the joint until the 
brazing alloy has thoroughly solidified. The brazing shall be done by 
placing the flux and brazing material on one side of the joint and 
applying heat until the brazing material flows entirely through the lap 
and shows uniformly along the seam on the other side of the joint. 
Sufficient flux shall be used to cause the brazing material to appear 
promptly after reaching the brazing temperature.



                    Subpart 56.80_Bending and Forming



Sec. 56.80-5  Bending.

    Pipe may be bent by any hot or cold method and to any radius which 
will result in a bend surface free of cracks, as determined by a method 
of inspection specified in the design, and substantially free of 
buckles. Such bends shall meet the design requirements of 102.4.5 and 
104.2.1 of ANSI-B31.1. This shall not prohibit the use of bends designed 
as creased or corrugated. If doubt exists as to the wall thickness being 
adequate, Class I piping having diameters exceeding 4 inches shall be 
nondestructively examined by the use of ultrasonics or other acceptable 
method. Alternatively, the pipe may be drilled, gaged, and fitted with a 
screwed plug extending outside the pipe covering. The nondestructive 
method shall be employed where the design temperature exceeds 750 
[deg]F.

[[Page 232]]

Prior to the use of nondestructive method of examination by the above 
procedure, it shall be demonstrated by the user, in the presence of a 
marine inspector on specimens similar to those to be examined, that 
consistent results, having an accuracy of plus or minus 3 percent, can 
be obtained.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9979, June 17, 1970]



Sec. 56.80-10  Forming (reproduces 129.2).

    (a) Piping components may be formed (swaging, lapping, or upsetting 
of pipe ends, extrusion of necks, etc.) by any suitable hot or cold 
working method, providing such processes result in formed surfaces which 
are uniform and free of cracks or other defects, as determined by 
methods of inspection specified in the design.



Sec. 56.80-15  Heat treatment of bends and formed components.

    (a) (Reproduces 129.3.1.) Carbon steel piping which has been heated 
to at least 1,650 [deg]F. for bending or other forming operations shall 
require no subsequent heat treatment.
    (b) Ferritic alloy steel piping which has been heated for bending or 
other forming operations shall receive a stress relieving treatment, a 
full anneal, or a normalize and temper treatment, as specified by the 
design specification before welding.
    (c) (Reproduces 129.3.3.) Cold bending and forming of carbon steel 
having a wall thickness of three-fourths of an inch and heavier, and all 
ferritic alloy pipe in nominal pipe sizes of 4 inches and larger, or \1/
2\-inch wall thickness or heavier, shall require a stress relieving 
treatment.
    (d) (Reproduces 129.3.4.) Cold bending of carbon and ferritic alloy 
steel pipe in sizes and wall thicknesses less than specified in 129.3.3 
of ANSI-B31.1 may be used without a postheat treatment.
    (e) (Reproduces 129.3.5.) For other materials the heat treatment of 
bends and formed components shall be such as to insure pipe properties 
that are consistent with the original pipe specification.
    (f) All scale shall be removed from heat treated pipe prior to 
installation.
    (g) (Reproduces 129.3.6.) Austenitic stainless steel pipe that has 
been heated for bending or other forming may be used in the ``as-bent'' 
condition unless the design specification requires post bending heat 
treatment.

[CGFR 68-62, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9979, June 17, 1970; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40166, Sept. 2, 1975]



                  Subpart 56.85_Heat Treatment of Welds



Sec. 56.85-5  Heating and cooling method (reproduces 131.1).

    (a) Heat treatment may be accomplished by a suitable heating method 
which will provide the desired heating and cooling rates, the required 
metal temperature, metal temperature uniformity, and temperature 
control.



Sec. 56.85-10  Preheating.

    (a) The minimum preheat temperatures listed in Table 56.85-10 for P-
number materials groupings are mandatory minimum pre-heat temperatures. 
Preheat is required for Class I, I-L, I-N, II-N and II-L piping when the 
ambient temperature is below 50 [deg]F.
    (b) (Modifies 131.2.2.) When welding dissimilar materials the 
minimum preheat temperature may not be lower than the highest 
temperature listed in Table 56.85-10 for any of the materials to be 
welded or the temperature established in the qualified welding 
procedure.
    (c) (Reproduces 131.2.3.) The preheat temperature shall be checked 
by use of temperature-indicating crayons, thermocouples, pyrometers, or 
other suitable methods to assure that the required preheat temperature 
is obtained prior to and uniformly maintained during the welding 
operation.

[[Page 233]]



                                                 Table 56.85-10--Preheat and Postheat Treatment of Welds
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Preheat required                                  Post heat treatment requirement (1)(2)
                                ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                                        Time cycle
                                                                                                                                 -----------------------
        ASME Sec IX Nos.                                 Minimum        Minimum wall and                                                        Minimum
                                    Minimum wall       temperature            other                     Temperature                Hour per      time
                                   (3)(4) (inch)      (5)(6)([deg]F)    (3)(4)(17)(inch)    (7)(8)(9)(10)(11)(12)([deg]F)(inch)     inch of     within
                                                                                                                                     wall        range
                                                                                                                                    (3)(4)      (hour)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
P-1(16)........................  All..............  50 (for .30 C.     Over \3/4\ in.....  1,100 to 1,200 (minimum) (maximum)...           1           1
                                                     maximum or less)
                                                     (13).
P-1(16)........................  All..............  175 (for over .30  ......do..........  ......do.............................           1           1
                                                     C.) (13) and
                                                     wall thickness
                                                     over 1 in.
P-3(15)........................  All walls........  175..............  Over \1/2\ in.....  1,200 to 1,350 (minimum) (maximum)...           1           1
P-4(15)........................  Up to \3/4\ in     300..............  Over \1/2\ in or    1,330 to 1,400 (minimum) (maximum)...           1           1
                                  inclusive.                            over 4 in nom.
                                                                        size or.
                                 Over \3/4\ in....  400..............  Over .15 C.
                                                                        maximum.
P-5(15) (less than 5 cr.)......  Up to \3/4\ in     300..............  Over \1/2\ in or    1,300 to 1,425 (minimum) (maximum)...           1           1
                                  inclusive.                            over 4 in. nom.
                                                                        size or.
                                 Over \3/4\ in....  400..............  Over 0.15 C.
                                                                        maximum.
P-5(15) (5 cr. and higher).....  Up to \3/4\        300..............  All walls.........  ......do.............................           1           2
                                  inclusive.
                                 Over \3/4\ in....  400..............  Over 0.15 C.
                                                                        maximum.
P-6............................  All walls........  300 (14).........  All walls.........  1,400 to 1,500 (minimum) (maximum)...           1           2
P-8............................  ......do.........  None required....  ......do..........  None required........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    For P-7, P-9A, P-9B, P-10C and other materials not listed the 
Preheat and Postheat Treatment is to be in accordance with the qualified 
procedure.
    Notes Applicable to Table 56.85-10:
    (1) Not applicable to dissimilar metal welds.
    (2) When postheat treatment by annealing or normalizing is used, the 
postheat treatment temperatures must be in accordance with the qualified 
welding procedure.
    (3) Wall thickness of a butt weld is defined as the thicker of the 
two abutting ends after end preparation including I.D. machining.
    (4) The thickness of socket, fillet, and seal welds is defined as 
the throat thicknesses for pressure and nonpressure retaining welds.
    (5) Preheat temperatures must be checked by use of temperature 
indicating crayons, thermocouple pyrometers, or other suitable method.
    (6) For inert gas tungsten arc root pass welding lower preheat in 
accordance with the qualified procedure may be used.
    (7) The maximum postheat treatment temperature listed for each P 
number is a recommended maximum temperature.
    (8) Postheat treatment temperatures must be checked by use of 
thermocouple pyrometers or other suitable means.
    (9) Heating rate for furnace, gas, electric resistance, and other 
surface heating methods must not exceed: (i) 600 [deg]F per hour for 
thicknesses 2 inches and under.
    (ii) 600 [deg]F per hour divided by \1/2\ the thickness in inches 
for thickness over 2 inches.
    (10) Heating route for induction heating must not exceed:
    (i) 600 [deg]F per hour for thickness less than 1\1/2\ inches (60 
and 400 cycles).
    (ii) 500 [deg]F per hour when using 60 cycles and 400 [deg]F per 
hour when using 400 cycles for thicknesses 1\1/2\ inches and over.
    (11) When local heating is used, the weld must be allowed to cool 
slowly from the postheat treatment temperature. A suggested method of 
retarding cooling is to wrap the weld with asbestos and allow to cool in 
still air. When furnace cooling is used, the pipe sections must be 
cooled in the furnace to 1000 [deg]F and may then be cooled further in 
still air.
    (12) Local postheat treatment of butt welded joints must be 
performed on a circumferential band of the pipe. The minimum width of 
this band, centered on the weld, must be the width of the weld plus 2 
inches.
    Local postheat treatment of welded branch connections must be 
performed by heating a circumferential band of the pipe to which the 
branch is welded. The width of the heated

[[Page 234]]

band must extend at least 1 inch beyond the weld joining the branch.
    (13) 0.30 C. max applies to specified ladle analysis.
    (14) 600 [deg]F maximum interpass temperature.
    (15) Welding on P-3, P-4, and P-5 with 3 Cr max. may be interrupted 
only if--
    (i) At least \3/8\ inch thickness of weld is deposited or 25 percent 
of welding groove is filled, whichever is greater;
    (ii) The weld is allowed to cool slowly to room temperature; and
    (iii) The required preheat is resumed before welding is continued.
    (16) When attaching welding carbon steel non-pressure parts to steel 
pressure parts and the throat thickness of the fillet or partial or full 
penetration weld is \1/2\ in. or less, postheat treatment of the fillet 
weld is not required for Class I and II piping if preheat to a minimum 
temperature of 175 [deg]F is applied when the thickness of the pressure 
part exceeds \3/4\ in.
    (17) For Class I-L and II-L piping systems, relief from postweld 
heat treatment may not be dependent upon wall thickness. See also 
Sec. Sec. 56.50-105(a)(3) and 56.50-105(b)(3) of this chapter.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9980, June 17, 1970; CGD 72-104R, 37 FR 14234, July 18, 1972; CGD 72-
206R, 38 FR 17229, June 29, 1973; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40166, Sept. 2, 
1975; CGD 77-140, 54 FR 40615, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.85-15  Postheat treatment.

    (a) Where pressure retaining components having different thicknesses 
are welded together as is often the case when making branch connections, 
the preheat and postheat treatment requirements of Table 56.85-10 apply 
to the thicker of the components being joined. Postweld heat treatment 
is required for Classes I, I-L, II-L, and systems. It is not required 
for Class II piping. Refer to Sec. 56.50-105(a)(3) for exceptions in 
Classes I-L and II-L systems and to paragraph (b) of this section for 
Class I systems.
    (b) All buttwelded joints in Class I piping shall be postweld heated 
as required by Table 56.85-10. The following exceptions are permitted:
    (1) High pressure salt water piping systems used in tank cleaning 
operations; and,
    (2) Gas supply piping of carbon or carbon molybdenum steel used in 
gas turbines.
    (c) All complicated connections including manifolds shall be stress-
relieved in a furnace as a whole as required by Table 56.85-10 before 
being taken aboard ship for installation.
    (d) (Reproduces 131.3.2.) The postheat treatment method selected for 
parts of an assembly shall not adversely affect other components. 
Heating a fabricated assembly as a complete unit is usually desirable; 
however, the size or shape of the unit or the adverse effect of a 
desired heat treatment on one or more components where dissimilar 
materials are involved, may dictate alternative procedures such as 
heating a section of the assembly before the attachment of others, or 
local circumferential band heating of welded joints in accordance with 
Sec. 56.85-15(j)(3) and note (12) of Table 56.85-10.
    (e) (Reproduces 131.3.3.) Postheat treatment of welded joints 
between dissimilar metals having different postheat requirements shall 
be that established in the qualified welding procedure.
    (f)-(h) [Reserved]
    (i) (Reproduces 131.3.4.) For those materials listed under P-No. 1, 
when the wall thickness of the thicker of the two abutting ends, after 
end preparation, is less than three-fourths inch, the weld need not be 
postheat treated. In all cases, where the nominal wall thickness is \3/
4\ in. or less, postheat treatment is not required.
    (j) (1)-(2) [Reserved]
    (3) In local postheat treatment the entire band must be brought up 
to uniform specified temperature over the complete circumference of the 
pipe section, with a gradual diminishing of the temperature outward from 
the edges of the band.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 72-206R, 38 
FR 17229, June 29, 1973; CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40167, Sept. 2, 1975]



                         Subpart 56.90_Assembly



Sec. 56.90-1  General.

    (a) The assembly of the various piping components, whether done in a 
shop or as field erection, shall be done so that the completely erected 
piping conforms with the requirements of the regulations in this 
subchapter and with the specified requirements of the engineering 
design.

[[Page 235]]



Sec. 56.90-5  Bolting procedure.

    (a) All flanged joints shall be fitted up so that the gasket contact 
faces bear uniformly on the gasket and then shall be made up with 
relatively uniform bolt stress. Bolt loading and gasket compression need 
only be verified by touch and visual observation.
    (b) (Reproduces 135.2.2.) In bolting gasketed flanged joints, the 
gasket shall be properly compressed in accordance with the design 
principles applicable to the type of gasket used.
    (c) Steel to cast iron flanged joints shall be assembled with care 
to prevent damage to the cast iron flange in accordance with Sec. 
56.25-10.
    (d) (Reproduces 135.2.4.) All bolts shall be engaged so that there 
is visible evidence of complete threading through the nut or threaded 
attachment.



Sec. 56.90-10  Threaded piping (reproduces 135.4).

    (a) Any compound or lubricant used in threaded joints shall be 
suitable for the service conditions and shall not react unfavorably with 
either the service fluid or the piping materials.
    (b) Threaded joints which are to be seal welded shall be made up 
without any thread compound.
    (c) Backing off to permit alignment of pipe threaded joints shall 
not be permitted.



                        Subpart 56.95_Inspection



Sec. 56.95-1  General (replaces 136).

    (a) The provisions in this subpart shall apply to inspection in lieu 
of 136 of ANSI-B31.1.
    (b) Prior to initial operation, a piping installation shall be 
inspected to the extent necessary to assure compliance with the 
engineering design, and with the material, fabrication, assembly and 
test requirements of ANSI-B31.1, as modified by this subchapter. This 
inspection is the responsibility of the owner and may be performed by 
employees of the owner or of an engineering organization employed by the 
owner, together with the marine inspector.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9979, June 17, 1970]



Sec. 56.95-5  Rights of access of marine inspectors.

    Marine inspectors shall have rights of access to any place where 
work concerned with the piping is being performed. This includes 
manufacture, fabrication, assembly, erection, and testing of the piping 
or system components. Marine inspectors shall have access to review all 
certifications or records pertaining to the inspection requirements of 
Sec. 56.95-1, including certified qualifications for welders, welding 
operators, and welding procedures.



Sec. 56.95-10  Type and extent of examination required.

    (a) General. The types and extent of nondestructive examinations 
required for piping must be in accordance with this section and Table 
136.4 of ANSI-B31.1. In addition, a visual examination shall be made.
    (1) 100 percent radiography \1\ is required for all Class I, I-L, 
and II-L piping with wall thickness equal to or greater than 10 mm (.375 
in.).
    (2) Nondestructive examination is required for all Class II piping 
equal to or greater than 18 inches nominal diameter regardless of wall 
thickness. Any test method acceptable to the Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection may be used.
    (3) Appropriate nondestructive examinations of other piping systems 
are required only when deemed necessary by the Officer in Charge, Marine 
Inspection. In such cases a method of testing satisfactory to the 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection must be selected from those 
described in this section.
    (b) Visual examination. Visual examination consists of observation 
by the marine inspector of whatever portions of a component or weld are 
exposed to such observation, either before, during, or after 
manufacture, fabrication, assembly or test. All welds, pipe and piping 
components shall be capable of complying with the limitations on 
imperfections specified in the product

[[Page 236]]

specification under which the pipe or component was purchased, or with 
the limitations on imperfections specified in Sec. 56.70-15(b) (7) and 
(8), and (c), as applicable.
    (c) Nondestructive types of examinations--(1) 100 Percent 
radiography. Where 100 percent radiography \1\ is required for welds in 
piping, each weld in the piping shall be completely radiographed. If a 
butt weld is examined by radiography, for either random or 100 percent 
radiography, the method used shall be as follows:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Where for some reason, such as joint configuration, radiography 
is not applicable, another approved examination may be utilized.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) X-ray or gamma ray method of radiography may be used. The 
selection of the method shall be dependent upon its adaptability to the 
work being radiographed. The procedure to be followed shall be as 
indicated in PW-51 of section I of the ASME Code.
    (ii) If a piping component or a weld other than a butt weld is 
radiographed, the method used shall be in accordance with UW-51 of 
section VIII of the ASME Code.
    (2) Random radiography. Where random radiography \1\ is required, 
one or more welds may be completely or partially radiographed. Random 
radiography is considered to be a desirable means of spot checking 
welder performance, particularly in field welding where conditions such 
as position, ambient temperatures, and cleanliness are not as readily 
controlled as in shop welding. It is to be employed whenever an Officer 
in Charge, Marine Inspection questions a pipe weld not otherwise 
required to be tested. The standards of acceptance are the same as for 
100 percent radiography.
    (3) Ultrasonic. Where 100 percent ultrasonic testing is specified, 
the entire surface of the weld being inspected shall be covered using 
extreme care and careful methods to be sure that a true representation 
of the actual conditions is obtained. The procedures to be used shall be 
submitted to the Commandant for approval.
    (4) Liquid penetrant. Where liquid penetrant examination is 
required, the entire surface of the weld being examined shall be 
covered. The examination shall be performed in accordance with appendix 
VIII to section VIII of the ASME Code. The following standards of 
acceptance shall be met:
    (i) All linear discontinuities and aligned penetrant indications 
revealed by the test shall be removed. Aligned penetrant indications are 
those in which the average of the center-to-center distances between any 
one indication and the two adjacent indications in any straight line is 
less than three-sixteenths inch. All other discontinuities revealed on 
the surface need not be removed unless the discontinuities are also 
revealed by radiography, in which case the pertinent radiographic 
specification shall apply.
    (5) Magnetic particle. Where magnetic particle testing is required, 
the entire surface of the weld being examined shall be covered. The 
testing shall be performed in accordance with appendix VI to section 
VIII of the ASME Code. The following standards of acceptance are 
required for welds. All linear discontinuities and aligned indications 
revealed by the test shall be removed. Aligned indications are those in 
which the average of the center-to-center distances between any one 
indication and the two adjacent indications in any straight line is less 
than three-sixteenths inch. All other revealed discontinuities need not 
be removed unless the discontinuities are also revealed by radiography, 
in which case the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall 
be met.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 72-206R, 38 
FR 17229, June 29, 1973; CGD 78-108, 43 FR 46546, Oct. 10, 1978; CGD 77-
140, 54 FR 40615, Oct. 2, 1989; CGD 95-028, 62 FR 51202, Sept. 30, 1997; 
USCG-2000-7790, 65 FR 58460, Sept. 29, 2000]



                      Subpart 56.97_Pressure Tests



Sec. 56.97-1  General (replaces 137).

    (a) Scope. The requirements in this subpart apply to pressure tests 
of piping in lieu of 137 of ANSI-B31.1. Those paragraphs reproduced are 
so noted.
    (b) Leak tightness. It is mandatory that the design, fabrication and 
erection of piping constructed under the regulations in this subchapter 
demonstrate leak tightness. Except where otherwise permitted in this 
subpart,

[[Page 237]]

this requirement must be met by a hydrostatic leak test prior to initial 
operations. Where a hydrostatic test is not practicable, a pneumatic 
test (Sec. 56.97-35) or initial service leak test (Sec. 56.97- 38) may 
be substituted if approved by the Commandant.
    (1) At no time during the hydrostatic test may any part of the 
piping system be subjected to a stress greater than 90 percent of its 
yield strength (0.2 percent offset) at test temperature.
    (2) Pneumatic tests may be used in lieu of the required hydrostatic 
test (except as permitted in paragraph (b)(3) of this section), only 
when--
    (i) Piping subassemblies or systems are so designed or supported 
that they cannot be safely filled with water; \1\ or
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ These tests may be made with the item being tested partially 
filled with water, if desired.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Piping subassemblies or systems are to be used in services 
where traces of the testing medium cannot be tolerated and, whenever 
possible, the piping subassemblies or system have been previously 
hydrostatically tested to the pressure required in Sec. 56.97-30(e).
    (3) A pneumatic test at a pressure not to exceed 25 psig may be 
applied before a hydrostatic or a pneumatic test as a means of locating 
major leaks. The preliminary pneumatic test must be carried out in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 56.97-35.

    Note: Compressed gas is hazardous when used as a testing medium. It 
is, therefore, recommended that special precautions for protection of 
personnel be taken whenever gas under pressure is used as the test 
medium.

    (4) The hydrostatic test of the piping system, when conducted in 
accordance with the requirements of this part, is acceptable as the test 
for piping subassemblies and may also be used in lieu of any such test 
required by the material specification for material used in the piping 
subassembly or system provided the minimum test pressure required for 
the piping system is met, except where the installation would prevent 
performing any nondestructive examination required by the material 
specification to be performed subsequent to the hydrostatic or pneumatic 
test.

[CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40167, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.97-5  Pressure testing of nonstandard piping system components.

    (a) All nonstandard piping system components such as welded valves 
and fittings, nonstandard fittings, manifolds, seacocks, and other 
appurtenances must be hydrostatically tested to twice the rated pressure 
stamped thereon, except that no component should be tested at a pressure 
causing stresses in excess of 90 percent of its yield strength.
    (b) Items for which an accepted standard appears in Table 56.60-1(b) 
need not be tested as described in paragraph (a) of this section, but 
need only meet the test required in the applicable standard.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 77-140, 54 FR 
40615, Oct. 2, 1989]



Sec. 56.97-25  Preparation for testing (reproduces 137.3).

    (a) Exposure of joints. All joints including welds must be left 
uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test.
    (b) Addition of temporary supports. Piping systems designed for 
vapor or gas may be provided with additional temporary supports, if 
necessary, to support the weight of the test liquid.
    (c) Restraint or isolation of expansion joints. Expansion joints 
must be provided with temporary restraint, if required for the 
additional pressure load under test, or they must be isolated from the 
test.
    (d) Isolation of equipment not subjected to pressure test. Equipment 
that is not to be subjected to the pressure test must be either 
disconnected from the piping subassembly or system or isolated by a 
blank flange or similar means. Valves may be used if the valve with its 
closure is suitable for the proposed test pressure.
    (e) Treatment of flanged joints containing blinds. Flanged joints at 
which blinds are inserted to blank off other equipment during the test 
need not be tested.

[[Page 238]]

    (f) Precautions against test medium expansion. If a pressure test is 
to be maintained for a period of time and the test medium in the system 
is subject to thermal expansion, precautions must be taken to avoid 
excessive pressure. A small relief valve set to 1\1/3\ times the test 
pressure is recommended during the pressure test.

[CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40167, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.97-30  Hydrostatic tests (reproduces 137.4).

    (a) Provision of air vents at high points. Vents must be provided at 
all high points of the piping subassembly or system in the position in 
which the test is to be conducted to purge air pockets while the 
component or system is filling.
    (b) Test medium and test temperature. (1) Water will be used for a 
hydrostatic leak test unless another medium is approved by the 
Commandant.
    (2) The temperature of the test medium will be that of the available 
source unless otherwise approved by the Commandant upon review of the 
metallurgical aspects of the piping materials with respect to its 
brittle fracture properties.
    (c) Check of test equipment before applying pressure. The test 
equipment must be examined before pressure is applied to ensure that it 
is tight and that all low-pressure filling lines and other items that 
should not be subjected to the test pressure have been disconnected or 
isolated by valves or other suitable means.
    (d) Examination for leakage after application of pressure. Following 
the application of the hydrostatic test pressure for a minimum of 10 
minutes (see Sec. 56.97-30(g)), examination for leakage must be made of 
all joints, connections and of all regions of high stress, such as 
regions around openings and thickness-transition sections.
    (e) Minimum required hydrostatic test pressure. Except as otherwise 
permitted in Sec. 56.97-30(f) or Sec. 56.97-40, piping systems must be 
subjected to a hydrostatic test pressure that at every point in the 
system is not less than 1.5 times the maximum allowable working 
pressure.
    (f) Maximum permissible hydrostatic test pressure. (1) When a system 
is tested hydrostatically, the test pressure must not exceed the maximum 
test pressure of any component such as vessels, pumps, or valves in the 
system.
    (2) At no time during the hydrostatic test may any part of the 
piping system be subjected to a stress greater than 90 percent of its 
yield strength (0.2 percent offset) at test temperature.
    (g) Hydrostatic test pressure holding time. The hydrostatic test 
pressure must be maintained for a minimum total time of 10 minutes and 
for such additional time as may be necessary to conduct the examination 
for leakage required by Sec. 56.97-30(d).

[CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40167, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.97-35  Pneumatic tests (replaces 137.5).

    (a) General Requirements. When a pneumatic test is performed, it 
must be conducted in accordance with the requirements of this section.
    (b) Test medium and test temperature. (1) The gas used as the test 
medium must not be flammable.
    (2) The temperature of the test medium will be that of the available 
source unless otherwise approved by the Commandant upon review of the 
metallurgical aspects of the piping materials with respect to its 
brittle fracture properties.
    (c) Check of test equipment before applying pressure. The test 
equipment must be examined before pressure is applied to ensure that it 
is tight and that all items that should not be subjected to the test 
pressure have been disconnected or isolated by valves or other suitable 
means.
    (d) Procedure for applying pressure. The pressure in the system must 
gradually be increased to not more than one-half of the test pressure, 
after which the pressure is increased in steps of approximately one-
tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure has been 
reached.
    (e) Examination for leakage after application of pressure. Following 
the application of pressure for the time specified in Sec. 56.97-35(h), 
examination for leakage in accordance with 56.97-30(d) must be 
conducted.
    (f) Minimum required pneumatic test pressure. Except as provided in 
Sec. 56.97-35(g) or Sec. 56.97-40, the pneumatic test

[[Page 239]]

pressure may not be less than 1.20 nor more than 1.25 times the maximum 
allowable working pressure of the piping subassembly system.
    (g) Maximum permissible pneumatic test pressure. When a system is 
tested pneumatically, the test pressure may not exceed the maximum test 
pressure of any component such as vessels, pumps or valves in the 
system.
    (h) Pneumatic test pressure holding time. The pneumatic test 
pressure must be maintained for a minimum total time of 10 minutes and 
for such additional time as may be necessary to conduct the examination 
for leakage required in Sec. 56.97-30(d).

[CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40168, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.97-38  Initial service leak test (reproduces 137.7).

    (a) An initial service leak test and inspection is acceptable when 
other types of test are not practical or when leak tightness is 
conveniently demonstrable due to the nature of the service. One example 
is turbine extraction piping where shut-off valves are not available for 
isolating a line and where temporary closures are impractical. Others 
may be systems for service water, low pressure condensate, plant and 
instrument air, etc., where checking out of pumps and compressors afford 
ample opportunity for leak tightness inspection prior to fullscale 
operation.
    (b) The piping system must be gradually brought up to design 
pressure. After inspection of the piping system has proven that the 
installation is complete and all joints are leak-tight, the piping has 
met the requirements of Sec. 56.97-1.

[CGD 73-254, 40 FR 40168, Sept. 2, 1975]



Sec. 56.97-40  Installation tests.

    (a) The following piping systems shall be hydrostatically leak 
tested in the presence of a marine inspector at a pressure of 1\1/2\ 
times the maximum allowable working pressure of the system:
    (1) Class I steam, feedwater, and blowoff piping. Where piping is 
attached to boilers by welding without practical means of blanking off 
for testing, the piping shall be subjected to the same hydrostatic 
pressure to which the boiler is tested. The maximum allowable working 
pressures of boiler feedwater and blowoff piping shall be the design 
pressures specified in Sec. Sec. 56.50-30(a)(3) and 56.50-40(b), 
respectively.
    (2) Fuel oil discharge piping between the pumps and the burners, but 
not less than 500 pounds per square inch.
    (3) High-pressure piping for tank cleaning operations.
    (4) Flammable or corrosive liquids and compressed gas cargo piping, 
but not less than 150 pounds per square inch.
    (5) Any Class I, I-L, II-L piping.
    (6) Cargo oil piping.
    (7) Firemains, but not less than 150 pounds per square inch.
    (8) Fuel oil transfer and filling piping.
    (9) Class I compressed air piping.
    (10) Fixed oxygen-acetylene system piping.
    (b) Installation testing requirements for refrigeration, fluid 
power, and liquefied petroleum gas cooking and heating systems may be 
found in part 58 of this subchapter.
    (c) Class II piping systems shall be tested under working conditions 
as specified in the section on initial service leak test, Sec. 56.97-
38.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18843, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9980, June 17, 1970; CGD 72-206R, 38 FR 17229, June 29, 1973 CGD 73-
254, 40 FR 40168, Sept. 2, 1975; CGD 95-028, 62 FR 51202, Sept. 30, 
1997]



PART 57_WELDING AND BRAZING--Table of Contents




                           Subpart 57.01_Scope

Sec.
57.01-1 Qualifications and production tests.

                   Subpart 57.02_General Requirements

57.02-1 Incorporation by reference.
57.02-2 Adoption of section IX of the ASME Code.
57.02-3 Performance qualifications issued by other agencies.
57.02-4 Fabricator's responsibility.
57.02-5 Filler metals.

                 Subpart 57.03_Procedure Qualifications

57.03-1 General requirements.

[[Page 240]]

               Subpart 57.04_Procedure Qualification Range

57.04-1 Test specimen requirements and definition of ranges (modifies QW 
          202, QW 210, QW 451, and QB 202).

                Subpart 57.05_Performance Qualifications

57.05-1 General.
57.05-2 Transfer of performance qualifications.
57.05-3 Limited space qualifications.
57.05-4 Welder qualification by procedure tests.
57.05-5 Low temperature application.

                     Subpart 57.06_Production Tests

57.06-1 Production test plate requirements.
57.06-2 Production test plate interval of testing.
57.06-3 Method of performing production testing.
57.06-4 Production testing specimen requirements.
57.06-5 Production toughness testing.

    Authority: 46 U.S.C. 3306, 3703, E.O. 12234, 45 FR 58801, 3 CFR, 
1980 Comp., p. 277; 49 CFR 1.46.

    Source: CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18872, Dec. 18, 1968, unless otherwise 
noted.



                           Subpart 57.01_Scope



Sec. 57.01-1  Qualifications and production tests.

    (a) (Replaces QW 101 and QB 101.) The regulations in this part shall 
apply to the qualification of welding procedures, welders, and brazers, 
and to production tests for all types of manual and machine arc and gas 
welding and brazing processes.
    (b) (Modifies QW 305 and QB 305.) Operators of fully automatic 
welding and brazing machines are specifically exempt from performance 
qualification tests.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18872, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 74-102, 40 FR 
27460, June 30, 1975]



                   Subpart 57.02_General Requirements



Sec. 57.02-1  Incorporation by reference.

    (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part 
with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance 
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a). To enforce any edition other than that specified 
in paragraph (b) of this section, the Coast Guard must publish notice of 
change in the Federal Register and make the material available to the 
public. All approved material is on file at the U.S. Coast Guard, Office 
of Design and Engineering Standards (G-MSE), 2100 Second Street SW., 
Washington, DC 20593-0001 and is available from the sources indicated in 
paragraph (b) of this section or at the National Archives and Records 
Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this 
material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/
federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (b) The material approved for incorporation by reference in this 
part and the sections affected are:

      American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) International

Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, section IX, Welding and Brazing 
Qualifications, July 1989 with 1989 addenda............57.01-1; 57.02-2; 
         57.02-3; 57.02-4; 57.03-1; 57.04-1; 57.05-1; 57.06-1; 57.06-3; 
                                                                 57.06-4

[CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35823, July 29, 1991, as amended by CGD 95-072, 60 FR 
50462, Sept. 29, 1995; 60 FR 54106, Oct. 19, 1995; CGD 96-041, 61 FR 
50728, Sept. 27, 1996; USCG-1999-6216, 64 FR 53224, Oct. 1, 1999]



Sec. 57.02-2  Adoption of section IX of the ASME Code.

    (a) The qualifications for all types of welders and brazers, the 
qualification of welding procedures, and the production tests for all 
types of manual and machine arc and gas welding and brazing processes 
shall be in accordance with section IX of the ASME (American Society of 
Mechanical Engineers) Code, as limited, modified, or replaced by 
specific requirements in this part. For general information Table 57.02-
1(a) lists the various paragraphs in section IX of the ASME Code which 
are limited, modified, or replaced by regulations in this part.

[[Page 241]]



   Table 57.02-1(a)--Limitations and Modifications to the Adoption of
                       section IX of the ASME Code
------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Paragraphs in section IX ASME code, and
                Disposition                       Unit of this part
------------------------------------------------------------------------
QW-101 replaced by........................  57.01-1(a).
QW-103 replaced by........................  57.02-3(a).
QW-201 modified by........................  57.03-1(a).
QW-202 modified by........................  57.04-1
QW-202.1 modified by......................  57.03-1(b).
QW-210 modified by........................  57.04-1.
QW-211 modified by........................  57.02-4.
QW-253 modified by........................  57.03-1(g).
QW-254 modified by........................  57.03-1(g).
QW-255 modified by........................  57.03-1(g).
QW-305 modified by........................  57.01-1(b).
QW-451 modified by........................  57.03-1(b) and 57.04-1.
QB-101 replaced by........................  57.01-1(a).
QB-103 replaced by........................  57.02-3(a).
QB-201 modified by........................  57.03-1(a).
QB-202 modified by........................  57.04-1.
QB-305 modified by........................  57.01-1(b).
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) As stated in Sec. 50.15-5 of this subchapter, section IX of the 
ASME Code is adopted and shall be the governing requirements for the 
qualification of all types of welders and brazers, the qualification of 
all types of welding procedures, and the production tests for all types 
of manual and machine arc and gas welding and brazing processes used in 
fabricating power boilers, heating boilers, pressure vessels and piping 
unless specifically limited, modified or replaced by other regulations 
in this part.
    (b) References to the ASME Code, like paragraph QW-131.1 indicate:

Q=Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications, ASME Code.
W=Part containing requirements for welding procedure, welder, and 
welding operator qualifications.
131=Major division within the part.
131.1=Specific subparagraph within the part.

    (c) When a paragraph or a section of the regulations in this part 
relates to material in section IX of the ASME Code, the relationship 
with the code will be shown immediately following the heading of the 
section or at the beginning of the paragraph as follows:
    (1) (Modifies Q------.) This indicates that the material in Q------ 
is generally applicable but is being altered, amplified or augmented.
    (2) (Replaces Q------.) This indicates that Q------ does not apply.
    (3) (Reproduces Q------.) This indicates that Q------ is being 
identically reproduced for convenience, not for emphasis.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18872, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9980, June 17, 1970; CGD 74-102, 40 FR 27460, June 30, 1975. 
Redesignated by CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35823, July 29, 1991; CGD 95-012, 60 
FR 48050, Sept. 18, 1995]



Sec. 57.02-3  Performance qualifications issued by other agencies.

    (a) Within the limits of the qualification tests passed, the Officer 
in Charge, Marine Inspection, may accept welders who have been qualified 
by other agencies of the Federal Government; by the American Bureau of 
Shipping; or by the fabricator concerned, provided the fabricator's 
tests have been certified by an authorized Code inspector as defined in 
paragraphs PG-91, N-612, HG-515.2, or UG-91 of the ASME Code.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18872, Dec. 18, 1968. Redesignated by CGD 88-032, 56 
FR 35832, July 29, 1991]



Sec. 57.02-4  Fabricator's responsibility.

    (a) (Replaces QW 103 and QB 103). Each manufacturer or contractor is 
responsible for the welding and brazing done by his organization and 
shall conduct tests required in this part to qualify the welding and 
brazing procedures used and the performance of welders and brazers who 
apply these procedures. The manufacturer shall bear the expense of 
conducting the tests. Each manufacturer shall maintain a record of the 
test results obtained in welding and brazing procedure and welder and 
brazer performance qualifications. These required records, together with 
identification data, shall be maintained by the manufacturer or 
contractor on the recommended forms illustrated in QW 480 and QB 480 of 
section IX, ASME Code, or on any other form acceptable to the Officer in 
Charge, Marine Inspection. Upon request, duplicate forms shall be 
furnished by the manufacturer or contractor to the marine inspector.
    (b) Except as otherwise provided for in Sec. 57.02-2, the 
fabricator shall notify the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, prior 
to conducting performance or procedure qualification tests, and arrange 
a suitable time and place for

[[Page 242]]

conducting the tests, so that a marine inspector may be present.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18872, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 74-102, 40 FR 
27460, June 30, 1975. Redesignated by CGD 88-032, 56 FR 35823, July 29, 
1991]



Sec. 57.02-5  Filler metals.

    (a) Except as provided for in paragraph (b) of this section, when 
filler metal is used in a welded fabrication that is required to meet 
the requirements of this part the filler metal must be one that has been 
approved by the American Bureau of Shipping.
    (b) In instances where a fabricator desires to use a filler metal 
which has not been approved by the American Bureau of Shipping the 
approval of the filler metal can be made by the Officer in Charge, 
Marine Inspection on the basis of the fabricator passing the weld 
procedure qualification tests as outlined in this part. This alternate 
means of approval applies to wire-gas and wire-flux combinations as well 
as to stick electrodes. Filler metal approvals given in this manner will 
extend only to the specific fabricator to whom they are granted.

[CGD 74-102, 40 FR 27460, June 30, 1975. Redesignated by CGD 88-032, 56 
FR 35823, July 29, 1991]



                 Subpart 57.03_Procedure Qualifications



Sec. 57.03-1  General requirements.

    (a) (Modifies QW 201 and QB 201). In order to obtain Coast Guard 
approval of a weld procedure to be used on welded fabrication that is 
required to meet the requirements of this part each manufacturer or 
contractor must do the following:
    (1) Each manufacturer or contractor must submit to the cognizant 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, for approval, a welding or brazing 
procedure specification for the particular welding or brazing process to 
be used. The welding or brazing procedure specification must include a 
sketch showing joint preparation. Suggested forms showing the 
information which is required in the welding or brazing procedure 
specification are in QW 480 and QB 480 of section IX of the ASME Code.
    (2) Each manufacturer or contractor must submit to the cognizant 
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, for approval, the results of the 
physical tests required by section IX of the ASME Code.
    (b) (Modifies QW 202.1 and QW 451). To obtain approval of the 
welding procedure, fabricators desiring to use any welding process for 
applications involving temperatures below -18 [deg]C (approx. 0 [deg]F) 
must conduct a procedure qualification test in accordance with the 
requirements of paragraph (a) of this section and the following 
additional requirements:
    (1) The test piece must be large enough so that sufficient material 
is available for the tests prescribed in QW 451 of the ASME Code, plus 
toughness tests and a macro-etch specimen.
    (2) To obtain approval the fabricator must conduct toughness tests 
and qualify in accordance with Sec. 54.05 of the subchapter. Results of 
toughness tests must be submitted for approval to the cognizant Officer 
in Charge, Marine Inspection.
    (3) The macro-etch specimen must be submitted with the test results 
required by paragraph (a) of this section. Macro-etch specimens must not 
be obtained by flame or arc cutting from the test piece. Weld 
reinforcement must remain in place unless the production welds are to be 
machined or ground. Backing rings must also be left in place unless they 
are to be removed in production.
    (4) Low temperature procedure qualification thickness ranges are as 
indicated in Table 57.03-1(b).

Table 57.03-1(b)--Low temperature weld procedure qualification thickness
                                 ranges
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Range of thickness
                                                        of materials
                                                      qualified by test
 Thickness, ``t'' of test plate or pipe as welded       plate or pipe
                     (inches)                             (inches)
                                                   ---------------------
                                                     Minimum    Maximum
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/16\ to \3/8\, inclusive........................     \1/16\      \3/8\
Over \3/8\ but less than \3/4\....................     *\3/8\      \3/4\
\3/4\ to 3, inclusive.............................      \3/4\        **t
------------------------------------------------------------------------
*For thicknesses less than \5/8\ inch, the thickness of the test plate
  or pipe is the minimum thickness qualified.
**Where ``t'' is the thickest material over \3/4\ inch to be used in
  production.

    (5) The limits for heat input production, as measured in Joules/
inch, must be at or below the maximum heat input

[[Page 243]]

applied to the procedure test plate. The word ``maximum'' must not be 
interpreted as either nominal or average.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) For quenched and tempered steels, the Commandant may prescribe 
special testing to assure that the welding procedure produces weldments 
which are not prone to low energy fracture through the heat affected 
zone.
    (e) Welding procedures that utilize type E 6012, E 6013, E 6014, E 
6024, E 7014, or E 7024 electrode will be approved only for the specific 
type, size, and brand electrode used. If a different type, size, or 
brand of electrode is used, a new procedure qualification test must be 
conducted.
    (f) Welding or brazing procedure approvals cannot be transferred 
from one plant to another plant of the same company or from one company 
to another.
    (g) (Modifies QW 253, QW 254, and QW 255). Item QW 402.4 is an 
essential variable for all procedure specifications.

[CGD 74-102, 40 FR 27461, June 30, 1975]



               Subpart 57.04_Procedure Qualification Range



Sec. 57.04-1  Test specimen requirements and definition of ranges 
(modifies QW 202, QW 210, QW 451, and QB 202).

    The type and number of specimens that must be tested to qualify an 
automatic, semiautomatic, or manual procedure specification shall be in 
accordance with QW 202, QW 210, or QB 202 of the ASME Code as 
applicable, except as supplemented by Sec. Sec. 57.03-1(b) and 57.03-
1(d).

[CGD 74-102, 40 FR 27461, June 30, 1975]



                Subpart 57.05_Performance Qualifications



Sec. 57.05-1  General.

    (a) This subpart supplements the various paragraphs in section IX of 
the Code dealing with Performance Qualifications (see Sec. 57.02-2).

[CGFR 69-127, 35 FR 9980, June 17, 1970]



Sec. 57.05-2  Transfer of performance qualifications.

    (a) The performance qualification records of a welder may be 
transferred from one plant to another of the same company or from one 
company to another company provided the following requirements are met:
    (1) The transfer is authorized by the cognizant Officer in Charge, 
Marine Inspection;
    (2) A copy of the qualification test records of each welder together 
with employment records and identification data are transferred by the 
plant or company which qualified the welder to the new plant or company; 
and,
    (3) The new plant or company accepts the welder as qualified.



Sec. 57.05-3  Limited space qualifications.

    When a welder is to be qualified for welding or torch brazing of 
piping on board ship in a limited or restricted space, the space 
restrictions shown in connection with Figure 57.05-3(a) or (b) shall be 
used when welding and brazing the test joint.

[[Page 244]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.028

     Figure 57.05-3(a)--Limited space restriction for pipe welding 
                        performance qualification

[[Page 245]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.029

     Figure 57.05-3(b)--Limited space restriction for pipe brazing 
                        performance qualification

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 118872, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 74-102, 40 
FR 27461, June 30, 1975]



Sec. 57.05-4  Welder qualification by procedure tests.

    Qualification tests of welders may be omitted for welders who weld 
satisfactory procedure qualification test assemblies as required by 
subpart 57.03.



Sec. 57.05-5  Low temperature application.

    For low temperature application, each welder shall demonstrate his 
ability to weld satisfactorily in accordance with procedures qualified 
in accordance with Sec. 57.03-1(b). Manual welding shall be qualified 
in the position prescribed by the procedure.



                     Subpart 57.06_Production Tests



Sec. 57.06-1  Production test plate requirements.

    (a) Production test plates shall be provided for Class I, Class I-L, 
Class II, and Class II-L pressure vessels are specified in this section.
    (b) Main power boilers shall meet the test plate requirements for 
Class I pressure vessels.
    (c) Test plates are not required for heating boilers or Class III 
pressure vessels. Test plates are not required for main power boilers or 
pressure vessels constructed of P-1 material as listed in QW 422 of the 
ASME Code whose welded joints are fully radiographed as required by Part 
52 or 54 of this subchapter as applicable except when toughness tests 
are required in accordance with Sec. 57.06-5. When toughness tests are 
required all prescribed production tests shall be performed.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18872, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127, 35 
FR 9980, June 17, 1970; CGD 72-206R, 38 FR 17229, June 29, 1973; CGD 74-
102, 40 FR 27461, June 30, 1975; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48050, Sept. 18, 
1995]

[[Page 246]]



Sec. 57.06-2  Production test plate interval of testing.

    (a) At least one set of production test plates shall be welded for 
each Class I or Class I-L pressure vessel except as follows:
    (1) When the extent of welding on a single vessel exceeds 50 lineal 
feet of either or both longitudinal and circumferential joints, at least 
one set of test plates shall be welded for each 50 feet of joint.
    (2) When the extent of welding on vessels welded in succession 
exceeds 50 lineal feet of either or both longitudinal and 
circumferential joints, at least one set of test plates shall be welded 
for each 50 feet of aggregate joint of the same material where the plate 
thicknesses fall within a range of one-fourth inch. For each 50-foot 
increment of weld, test plates shall be prepared at the time of 
fabrication of the first vessel involving that increment.
    (b) Production test plates for Class II-L pressure vessels shall be 
prepared as for Classes I and I-L vessels except that the provisions of 
paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section are applicable to each 150 
lineal feet of welded joint in lieu of each 50 lineal feet.
    (c) In the case of Class II pressure vessels no more than one set of 
production test plates need be prepared for each 300 lineal feet of 
either or both longitudinal and circumferential joints. In the case of 
single vessel fabrication a set of test plates is required for each 300 
lineal feet of weld or fraction thereof. In the case of multiple vessel 
fabrication where each increment of 300 lineal feet of weld involves 
more than one pressure vessel, the set of test plates shall be prepared 
at the time of fabrication of the first vessel involving that increment.



Sec. 57.06-3  Method of performing production testing.

    (a) Except as otherwise specified in this section a test plate shall 
be attached to the shell plate on one end of the longitudinal joint of 
each vessel as shown in Figure 57.06-3, so that the edges of the test 
plate to be welded are a continuation of and duplication of the 
corresponding edges of the longitudinal joint. For attached test plates, 
the weld metal shall be deposited in the test plate welding groove 
continuously with the weld metal deposited in the groove of the 
longitudinal joint. As an alternate method, the marine inspector may 
permit the use of separate test plates, provided the same welding 
process, procedure, and technique employed in the fabrication of the 
longitudinal joint are used in welding the test plates.
    (b) All test plates, whether attached to the shell or separate in 
accordance with paragraphs (a) and (d) of this section, shall be 
prepared from material of the same specification, thickness, and heat 
treatment and, for Class I-L and Class II-L vessels, the same heat as 
that of the vessel for which they are required. However, except when 
required to be from a specific heat, test plates may be prepared from 
material of a different product form, such as plate in lieu of a 
forging, provided the chemical composition is within the vessel material 
specification limits and the melting practice is the same.
    (c) Test plates are not required for welded nozzle attachments.
    (d) In the case of vessels having no longitudinal welded joints, at 
least one set of test plates shall be welded for each vessel, using the 
circumferential joint process, procedure and technique, except that the 
provisions of Sec. 57.06-2(a) shall also apply for Classes I and I-L 
vessels, and that the provisions of Sec. 57.06-2 (a) and (c) shall also 
apply for Classes II and II-L vessels.

[[Page 247]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.030

  Figure 57.06-3--(PW-53.2) Method of forming longitudinal test plates
    (e) Test plates shall be made by the same welder producing the 
longitudinal and circumferential joints. If more than one welder is 
employed in the welding of the pressure vessel(s), the test plates shall 
be made by the welder designated by the marine inspector. The test 
plates shall be of the same thickness as the material being welded and 
shall be of sufficient size to provide two specimens of each type 
required, except that in the case of pressure vessels having no 
longitudinal seams, the test plate need be only of sufficient length to 
provide one set of test specimens, and if a retest is necessary, an 
additional set of test plates may be welded separately.



Sec. 57.06-4  Production testing specimen requirements.

    (a) For test plates three-fourths inch or less in thickness one 
reduced section tensile specimen and two free-bend specimens shall be 
tested. For plates exceeding three-fourths inch in thickness one reduced 
section tensile specimen, one free-bend specimen and one guided side 
bend specimen shall be tested. In addition boiler drums of thickness 
five-eighths inch or greater shall have a tension test specimen of the 
weld metal as required by paragraph (f)(2) of this section. Toughness 
tests are required for Classes I-L and II-L pressure vessels as 
specified in Sec. 57.06-5.
    (b) The test plates shall be so supported that the warping due to 
welding shall not throw the finished test plate out of line by an angle 
of over 5[deg].
    (c) Where the welding has warped the test plates, the plates shall 
be straightened before being stress-relieved. The test plates shall be 
subjected to the same stress-relieving operation as required by this 
subchapter for the pressure vessel itself. At no time shall the test 
plates be heated to a temperature higher than that used for stress-
relieving the vessel.
    (d) The bend specimens shall be taken from opposite sides of the 
reduced-section tensile specimen in their respective test plates as 
shown in Figures 57.06-4(d)(1) and 57.06-4(d)(2).

[[Page 248]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.031

Figure 57.06-4(d)(1)--Workmanship test plates for material three-fourths 
                        inch or less in thickness

[[Page 249]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.032

Figure 57.06-4(d)(2)--Workmanship test plates for material three-fourths 
                        inch or less in thickness
    (e) In submitting the samples for test the manufacturer shall state 
the minimum and maximum tensile range of the base metal.
    (f) The external appearances of the welds and the amount of weld 
reinforcement shall conform to the requirements for fabrication, and the 
maximum reinforcement for the test plates shall not exceed the maximum 
permitted for construction.
    (1) The tension-test specimen of the joint shall be transverse to 
the welded joint and shall be of the full thickness of the plate after 
the weld reinforcement has been machined flush. The form and dimensions 
shall be as shown in Figure 57.06-4(f)(1)(i). When the capacity of the 
available testing machine does not permit testing a specimen of the full 
thickness of the welded plate, the specimen may be cut with a thin saw 
into as many portions of the thickness as necessary, as shown in Figure 
57.06-4(f)(1)(ii) each of which shall meet the requirements. The tensile 
strength of the joint specimen when it breaks in the weld shall not be 
less than the minimum of the specified tensile range of the plate used. 
If the specimen breaks in the plate at not less than 95 percent of the 
minimum specified tensile range

[[Page 250]]

of the plate and the weld shows no sign of weakness, the test is 
considered acceptable.
    (2) Boiler drums fabricated of plate of thicknesses of five-eighths 
inch or greater shall have a tension-test specimen of the weld metal 
machined to form as shown in Figure 57.06-4(f)(2) taken entirely from 
the deposited metal. The all-weld tension test specimen shall have a 
tensile strength of not less than the minimum of the range of the plate 
which is welded and shall have a minimum elongation in 2 inches of not 
less than 20 percent.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.033

  Figure 57.06-4(f)(1)(i)--(PW-53.1) Reduced-section test specimen for 
                      tension test of welded joint

[[Page 251]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.034

Figure 57.06-4(f)(1)(ii)--(PW-53.3) Cross section of bend-test specimens 
                          from very thick plate
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.035

  Figure 57.06-4(f)(2)--(PW-53.3) All weld metal tension-test specimen
    (g) The freebend specimens shall be of the form and dimensions shown 
in Figure 57.06-4(g). For plates of three-fourths inch or less in 
thickness one of the specimens shall be bent with the face of the weld 
in tension. Each

[[Page 252]]

freebend specimen shall be bent cold under freebending conditions until 
the elongation measured within or across approximately the entire weld 
on the outer surface of the bend is at least 30 percent, except that for 
Class II and Class II-L pressure vessels, the minimum elongation shall 
be 20 percent. When the capacity of the available testing machine will 
not permit testing a full thickness specimen, the specimen may be cut 
with a thin saw into as many portions of the thickness as necessary as 
shown in Figure 57.06-4(f)(1)(ii), provided each such piece retains the 
proportion of 1\1/2\ to 1, width to thickness, each of which shall meet 
the requirements. Cracks at the corners of the specimens or small 
defects in the convex surface, the greatest dimensions of which do not 
exceed one-sixteenth inch need not be considered as failures.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01FE91.036

        Figure 57.06-4(g)--(PW-53.8) Specimen for free-bend test
    (h) The guided-bend specimen shall be bent with the side of the weld 
in tension, its width shall be equal to the full thickness of the plate 
and its thickness, after machining, shall be 0.350 inch to 0.380 inch to 
permit bending in a jig having the contour of the standard jig as shown 
in Figure QW 466.1, QW 466.2, or QW 466.3 of the ASME Code. The specimen 
shall withstand being bent cold to the full capacity of the jig without 
developing any crack exceeding one-eighth inch in any direction. Where 
the plate thickness exceeds two inches, the specimen shall be cut in two 
so that each portion does not exceed 2 inches in width. Each such 
portion shall be tested and shall meet the requirements.
    (i) One retest shall be made for each of the original specimens 
which fails to meet the requirements. Should the retests fail to meet 
the requirements, the welds which they represent shall be

[[Page 253]]

chipped out, rewelded and new test plates provided.

[CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18872, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGFR 69-127R, 35 
FR 9980, June 17, 1970; CGD 74-102, 40 FR 27461, June 30, 1975; CGD 80-
004, 45 FR 10796, Feb. 19, 1980; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48050, Sept. 18, 
1995]



Sec. 57.06-5  Production toughness testing.

    (a) In addition to the test specimens required by Sec. 57.06-4(a), 
production toughness test plates shall be prepared for Classes I-L and 
II-L pressure vessels in accordance with subpart 54.05 of this 
subchapter.
    (b) For nonpressure vessel type cargo tanks and associated secondary 
barriers as defined in Sec. 38.05-4 of subchapter D (Tank Vessels) of 
this chapter, production toughness test plates shall be prepared in 
accordance with subpart 54.05 of this subchapter.

[CGD 68-82, 33 FR 18872, Dec. 18, 1968, as amended by CGD 72-206R, 38 FR 
17229, June 29, 1973; CGD 95-012, 60 FR 48050, Sept. 18, 1995]



PART 58_MAIN AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY AND RELATED SYSTEMS--
Table of Contents




                   Subpart 58.01_General Requirements

Sec.
58.01-1 Scope.
58.01-5 Applicable standards.
58.01-10 Fuel oil.
58.01-20 Machinery guards.
58.01-25 Means of stopping machinery.
58.01-30 Trial-trip observance.
58.01-35 Main propulsion auxiliary machinery.
58.01-40 Machinery, angles of inclination.
58.01-45 Machinery space, ventilation.
58.01-50 Machinery space, noise.
58.01-55 Tanks for flammable and combustible oil.

                Subpart 58.03_Incorporation of Standards

58.03-1 Incorporation by reference.

                 Subpart 58.05_Main Propulsion Machinery

58.05-1 Material, design and construction.
58.05-5 Astern power.
58.05-10 Automatic shut-off.

         Subpart 58.10_Internal Combustion Engine Installations

58.10-5 Gasoline engine installations.
58.10-10 Diesel engine installations.
58.10-15 Gas turbine installations.

     Subpart 58.16_Liquefied Petroleum Gases for Cooking and Heating

58.16-1 Scope.
58.16-5 Definition.
58.16-7 Use of liquefied petroleum gas.
58.16-10 Approvals.
58.16-15 Valves and safety relief devices.
58.16-16 Reducing regulators.
58.16-17 Piping and fittings.
58.16-18 Installation.
58.16-19 Tests.
58.16-20 Ventilation of compartments containing gas-consuming 
          appliances.
58.16-25 Odorization.
58.16-30 Operating instructions.
58.16-35 Markings.

                  Subpart 58.20_Refrigeration Machinery

58.20-1 Scope.
58.20-5 Design.
58.20-10 Pressure relieving devices.
58.20-15 Installation of refrigerating machinery.
58.20-20 Refrigeration piping.
58.20-25 Tests.

                       Subpart 58.25_Steering Gear

58.25-1 Applicability.
58.25-5 General.
58.25-10 Main and auxiliary steering gear.
58.25-15 Voice communications.
58.25-20 Piping for steering gear.
58.25-25 Indicating and alarm systems.
58.25-30 Automatic restart.
58.25-35 Helm arrangements.
58.25-40 Arrangement of the steering-gear compartment.
58.25-45 Buffers.
58.25-50 Rudder stops.
58.25-55 Overcurrent protection for steering-gear systems.
58.25-60 Non-duplicated hydraulic rudder actuators.
58.25-65 Feeder circuits.
58.25-70 Steering-gear control systems.
58.25-75 Materials.
58.25-80 Automatic pilots and ancillary steering gear.
58.25-85 Special requirements for tank vessels.

              Subpart 58.30_Fluid Power and Control Systems

58.30-1 Scope.
58.30-5 Design requirements.
58.30-10 Hydraulic fluid.
58.30-15 Pipe, tubing, valves, fittings, pumps, and motors.
58.30-20 Fluid power hose and fittings.
58.30-25 Accumulators.
58.30-30 Fluid power cylinders.

[[Page 254]]

58.30-35 Testing.
58.30-40 Plans.
58.30-50 Requirements for miscellaneous fluid power and control systems.

                  Subpart 58.50_Independent Fuel Tanks

58.50-1 General requirements.
58.50-5 Gasoline fuel tanks.
58.50-10 Diesel fuel tanks.
58.50-15 Alternate material for construction of independent fuel tanks.

   Subpart 58.60_Industrial Systems and Components on Mobile Offshore 
                          Drilling Units (MODU)

58.60-1 Applicability.
58.60-2 Alternatives and substitutions.
58.60-3 Pressure vessel.
58.60-5 Industrial systems: Locations.
58.60-7 Industrial systems: Piping.
58.60-9 Industrial systems: Design.
58.60-11 Analyses, plans, diagrams and specifications: Submission.
58.60-13 Inspection.

    Authority: 43 U.S.C. 1333; 46 U.S.C. 3306, 3703; E.O. 12234, 45 FR 
58801, 3 CFR, 1980 Comp., p. 277; Department of Homeland Security 
Delegation No. 0170.1.

    Source: CGFR 68-82, 33 FR 18878, Dec. 18, 1968, unless otherwise 
noted.



                   Subpart 58.01_General Requirements



Sec. 58.01-1  Scope.

    The regulations in this part contain requirements for the design and 
construction of main and auxiliary machinery installed on vessels.



Sec. 58.01-5  Applicable standards.

    The applicable standards established by the American Bureau of 
Shipping or other recognized classification society, may be used as the 
standard for the design, construction, and testing of main and auxiliary 
machinery except as modified in this subchapter.



Sec. 58.01-10  Fuel oil.

    (a) The following limits apply to the use of oil as fuel:
    (1) Except as otherwise permitted by this section, no fuel oil with 
a flashpoint of less than 60 [deg]C (140 [deg]F) may be used.
    (2) Except as otherwise permitted by Sec. 58.50-1(b), fuel oil with 
a flashpoint of not less than 43 [deg]C (110 [deg]F) may be used in 
emergency generators.
    (3) Subject to such additional precautions as the Commanding 
Officer, Marine Safety Center, considers necessary, and provided that 
the ambient temperature of the space in which such fuel oil is stored or 
used does not rise to within 10 [deg]C (50 [deg]F) below the flashpoint 
of the fuel oil, fuel oil having a flashpoint of less than 60 [deg]C 
(140 [deg]F) but not less than 43 [deg]C (110 [deg]F) may be used in 
general.
    (4) In a cargo vessel, fuel having a lower flashpoint than otherwise 
specified in this section--for example, crude oil--may be used provided 
that such fuel is not stored in any machinery space and that the 
Commanding Officer, Marine Safety Center, approves the complete 
installation.
    (b) The flashpoint of oil must be determined by the Pensky-Martens 
Closed Tester, ASTM D 93 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 5